Xstack PDF

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.
com manuals search engine

®
xStack DGS-3120 Series Layer 3 Managed Gigabit Switch CLI Reference Guide
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Using Command Line Interface............................................................................................. 1
Chapter 2 Basic Command List ............................................................................................................. 8
Chapter 3 802.1Q VLAN Command List .............................................................................................. 23
Chapter 4 802.1X Command List ......................................................................................................... 38
Chapter 5 Access Authentication Control Command List .................................................................... 62
Chapter 6 Access Control List (ACL) Command List ......................................................................... 103
Chapter 7 Access Control List (ACL) Egress Command List (RI and EI Mode Only) ....................... 123
Chapter 8 Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) Command List.......................................................... 142
Chapter 9 ARP Spoofing Prevention Command List ......................................................................... 147
Chapter 10 Asymmetric VLAN Command List ..................................................................................... 149
Chapter 11 Auto-Configuration Command List .................................................................................... 151
Chapter 12 Basic Commands Command List ...................................................................................... 153
Chapter 13 BPDU Attack Protection Command List ............................................................................ 170
Chapter 14 Cable Diagnostics Command List ..................................................................................... 175
Chapter 15 Command Logging Command List.................................................................................... 178
Chapter 16 Compound Authentication Command List ........................................................................ 181
Chapter 17 Configuration Command List............................................................................................. 192
Chapter 18 Configuration Trap Command List .................................................................................... 197
Chapter 19 Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) Command List (RI and EI Mode Only) ............... 199
Chapter 20 Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) Extension Command List (RI and EI Mode Only)
........................................................................................................................................... 227
Chapter 21 CPU Interface Filtering Command List ............................................................................. 231
Chapter 22 Debug Software Command List ........................................................................................ 242
Chapter 23 Denial-of-Service (DoS) Attack Prevention Command List .............................................. 284
Chapter 24 DHCP Local Relay Command List .................................................................................... 288
Chapter 25 DHCP Relay Command List.............................................................................................. 292
Chapter 26 DHCP Server Command List (RI Mode Only) ................................................................... 311
Chapter 27 DHCP Server Screening Command List ........................................................................... 330
Chapter 28 DHCPv6 Relay Command List .......................................................................................... 334
Chapter 29 Digital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) Command List (RI and EI Mode Only).................... 340
Chapter 30 Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) Command List (RI Mode Only) ... 347
Chapter 31 D-Link License management System (DLMS) Command List ......................................... 354
Chapter 32 D-Link Unidirectional Link Detection (DULD) Command List (RI and EI Mode Only) ...... 356
Chapter 33 Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE) Command List ............................................................... 358
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

®
Chapter 34 Ethernet Ring Protection Switching (ERPS) Command List (RI and EI Mode Only) ........ 360
Chapter 35 FDB Command List ........................................................................................................... 370
Chapter 36 Filter Command List .......................................................................................................... 380
Chapter 37 Flash File System (FFS) Command List ........................................................................... 383
Chapter 38 Gratuitous ARP Command List ......................................................................................... 394
Chapter 39 Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Command List (RI Mode Only) ................ 400
Chapter 40 IGMP Proxy Command List (RI Mode Only) ..................................................................... 408
Chapter 41 IGMP Snooping Command List......................................................................................... 413
Chapter 42 IP-MAC-Port Binding (IMPB) Command List (RI and EI Mode Only) ............................... 437
Chapter 43 IP Multicast (IPMC) Command List (RI Mode Only) ......................................................... 460
Chapter 44 IP Route Filter Command List (RI Mode Only) ................................................................. 462
Chapter 45 IP Tunnel Command List (RI Mode Only) ......................................................................... 469
Chapter 46 IPv6 Neighbor Discover Command List ............................................................................ 477
Chapter 47 IPv6 Route Command List (RI and EI Mode Only) ........................................................... 484
Chapter 48 Japanese Web-Based Access Control (JWAC) Command List ....................................... 487
Chapter 49 Jumbo Frame Command List ............................................................................................ 511
Chapter 50 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling (L2PT) Command List ........................................................... 513
Chapter 51 Link Aggregation Command List ....................................................................................... 517
Chapter 52 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) Command List ...................................................... 524
Chapter 53 Loopback Detection (LBD) Command List ........................................................................ 550
Chapter 54 Loopback Interface Command List ................................................................................... 556
Chapter 55 MAC Notification Command List ....................................................................................... 559
Chapter 56 MAC-based Access Control Command List ...................................................................... 564
Chapter 57 MAC-based VLAN Command List..................................................................................... 581
Chapter 58 MD5 Configuration Command List (RI Mode Only) .......................................................... 584
Chapter 59 Mirror Command List ......................................................................................................... 587
Chapter 60 Multicast Listener Discovery Protocol (MLD) Command List (RI Mode Only) .................. 592
Chapter 61 MLD Proxy Command List (RI Mode Only) ....................................................................... 595
Chapter 62 MLD Snooping Command List .......................................................................................... 600
Chapter 63 MSTP debug enhancement Command List ...................................................................... 620
Chapter 64 Multicast Filter Command List ........................................................................................... 627
Chapter 65 Multicast VLAN Command List ......................................................................................... 638
Chapter 66 Network Load Balancing (NLB) Command List ................................................................ 652
Chapter 67 Network Monitoring Command List ................................................................................... 658
Chapter 68 OAM Command List (RI and EI Mode Only) ..................................................................... 665
Chapter 69 Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) Version 2 Command List (RI Mode Only) ................... 673
II

®
Chapter 70 OSPF Version 3 Command List (RI Mode Only) .............................................................. 694
Chapter 71 Password Recovery Command List .................................................................................. 713
Chapter 72 Peripherals Command List ................................................................................................ 716
Chapter 73 Ping Command List ........................................................................................................... 722
Chapter 74 Policy Route Command List (RI Mode Only) .................................................................... 725
Chapter 75 Port Security Command List ............................................................................................. 728
Chapter 76 Power over Ethernet (PoE) Command List ....................................................................... 736
Chapter 77 Power Saving Command List ............................................................................................ 741
Chapter 78 PPPoE Circuit ID Insertions Command List (RI and EI Mode Only) ................................. 747
Chapter 79 Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) Command List (RI Mode Only) ............................. 751
Chapter 80 PIM for IPv6 Command List (RI Mode Only) ..................................................................... 769
Chapter 81 Protocol VLAN Command List .......................................................................................... 788
Chapter 82 QinQ Command List (RI and EI Mode Only) ..................................................................... 794
Chapter 83 Quality of Service (QoS) Command List ........................................................................... 802
Chapter 84 Remote Switched Port ANalyzer (RSPAN) Command List............................................... 819
Chapter 85 Routing Information Protocol (RIP) Command List (RI Mode Only) ................................. 825
Chapter 86 RIPng Command List (RI Mode Only)............................................................................... 830
Chapter 87 Routing Command List ...................................................................................................... 836
Chapter 88 RPC PortMapper Command List....................................................................................... 852
Chapter 89 Safeguard Engine Command List ..................................................................................... 854
Chapter 90 SD Card Management Command List .............................................................................. 856
Chapter 91 Secure Shell (SSH) Command List ................................................................................... 863
Chapter 92 Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) Command List .................................................................... 874
Chapter 93 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) Command List .................................................................. 881
Chapter 94 Surveillance VLAN Command List .................................................................................... 894
Chapter 95 sFlow Command List (RI and EI Mode Only) .................................................................... 900
Chapter 96 Show Technical Support Command List ........................................................................... 912
Chapter 97 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) Command List ..................................................... 915
Chapter 98 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Command List ...................................... 920
Chapter 99 Single IP Management Command List ............................................................................. 949
Chapter 100 Stacking Command List (EI and SI Mode Only) ............................................................... 959
Chapter 101 Static Multicast Route Command List (RI Mode Only) ...................................................... 967
Chapter 102 Syslog and Trap Source-interface Command List ............................................................ 970
Chapter 103 System Log Command List ............................................................................................... 974
Chapter 104 System Severity Command List ........................................................................................ 986
Chapter 105 Telnet Client Command List .............................................................................................. 988
III

®
Chapter 106 TFTP Client Command List ............................................................................................... 989

Chapter 107 Time and SNTP Command List ........................................................................................ 994
Chapter 108 Trace Route Command List ............................................................................................ 1002
Chapter 109 Traffic Control Command List ......................................................................................... 1005
Chapter 110 Traffic Segmentation Command List ............................................................................... 1011
Chapter 111 Trusted Host Command List ........................................................................................... 1013
Chapter 112 UDP Helper Command List ............................................................................................. 1017
Chapter 113 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Command List (RI Mode Only) ............... 1022
Chapter 114 VLAN Trunking Command List........................................................................................ 1029
Chapter 115 Voice VLAN Command List ............................................................................................. 1034
Chapter 116 Web-Based Access Control (WAC) Command List ........................................................ 1045
Chapter 117 Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED) Command List .......................................... 1060
Appendix A Password Recovery Procedure....................................................................................... 1067
Appendix B System Log Entries ......................................................................................................... 1069
Appendix C Trap Log Entries .............................................................................................................. 1083
Appendix D RADIUS Attributes Assignment....................................................................................... 1101
IV

®
Chapter 1 Using Command Line

Interface
The Switch can be managed through the Switch’s serial port, Telnet, SNMP or the Web-based
management agent. The Command Line Interface (CLI) can be used to configure and manage the
Switch via the serial port or Telnet interfaces.
This manual provides a reference for all of the commands contained in the CLI. Every command
will be introduced in terms of purpose, format, description, parameters, and examples.
Configuration and management of the Switch via the Web-based management agent are
discussed in the Web UI Reference Guide. For detailed information on installing hardware please
also refer to the Hardware Installation Guide.
1-1 Accessing the Switch via the Serial Port

The Switch’s serial port’s default settings are as follows:
• 115200 baud
• no parity
• 8 data bits
• 1 stop bit
A computer running a terminal emulation program capable of emulating a VT-100 terminal and a
serial port configured as above are then connected to the Switch’s Console port via an included
RS-232 to RJ-45 convertor cable.
With the serial port properly connected to a management computer, the following screen should be
visible.
DGS-3120-24TC Gigabit Ethernet Switch

Command Line Interface
Firmware: Build 3.00.522

Copyright(C) 2013 D-Link Corporation. All rights reserved.
UserName:
PassWord:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#
There is no initial username or password. Just press the Enter key twice to display the CLI input
cursor − DGS-3120-24TC:admin# . This is the command line where all commands are input.
1-2 Setting the Switch’s IP Address

Each Switch must be assigned its own IP Address, which is used for communication with an
SNMP network manager or other TCP/IP application (for example BOOTP, TFTP). The Switch’s
1

®
default IP address is 10.90.90.90. You can change the default Switch IP address to meet the
specification of your networking address scheme.
The Switch is also assigned a unique MAC address by the factory. This MAC address cannot be
changed, and can be found on the initial boot console screen – shown below.
Boot Procedure V3.00.501

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Power On Self Test ........................................ 100 %
MAC Address : 00-01-02-03-04-00

H/W Version : B1
Please Wait, Loading V3.00.522 Runtime Image .............. 100 %

UART init ................................................. 100 %
Starting runtime image
Device Discovery .......................................... /
The Switch’s MAC address can also be found in the Web management program on the Switch
Information (Basic Settings) window on the Configuration menu.
The IP address for the Switch must be set before it can be managed with the Web-based manager.
The Switch IP address can be automatically set using BOOTP or DHCP protocols, in which case
the actual address assigned to the Switch must be known.
Starting at the command line prompt, enter the commands config ipif System ipaddress
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy. Where the x’s represent the IP address to be assigned to the
IP interface named System and the y’s represent the corresponding subnet mask.
Alternatively, you can enter config ipif System ipaddress xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/z. Where the x’s
represent the IP address to be assigned to the IP interface named System and the z represents
the corresponding number of subnets in CIDR notation.
The IP interface named System on the Switch can be assigned an IP address and subnet mask
which can then be used to connect a management station to the Switch’s Telnet or Web-based
management agent.
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config ipif System ipaddress 10.24.22.100/255.0.0.0

Command: config ipif System ipaddress 10.24.22.100/8
Success.
In the above example, the Switch was assigned an IP address of 10.24.22.100 with a subnet mask
of 255.0.0.0. The system message Success indicates that the command was executed
successfully. The Switch can now be configured and managed via Telnet, SNMP MIB browser and
the CLI or via the Web-based management agent using the above IP address to connect to the
Switch.

®
There are a number of helpful features included in the CLI. Entering the ? command will display a
list of all of the top-level commands.
..
?
cable_diag ports
cd
cfm linktrace
cfm lock md
cfm loopback
change drive
clear
clear address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry ports
clear address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry ports
clear arptable
clear attack_log
clear cfm pkt_cnt
clear counters
clear dhcp binding
clear dhcp conflict_ip
clear ethernet_oam ports
clear fdb
clear igmp_snooping statistics counter
clear jwac auth_state
clear log
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a All
When entering a command without its required parameters, the CLI will prompt you with a Next
possible completions: message.
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config account
Command: config account
Next possible completions:
<username 15>
In this case, the command config account was entered with the parameter <username 15>. The
CLI will then prompt to enter the <username 15> with the message, Next possible completions:.
Every command in the CLI has this feature, and complex commands have several layers of
parameter prompting.
In addition, after typing any given command plus one space, users can see all of the next possible
sub-commands, in sequential order, by repeatedly pressing the Tab key.
To re-enter the previous command at the command prompt, press the up arrow cursor key. The
previous command will appear at the command prompt.

®
Command: config account
<username 15>
In the above example, the command config account was entered without the required parameter
<username 15>, the CLI returned the Next possible completions: <username 15> prompt. The
up arrow cursor control key was pressed to re-enter the previous command (config account) at
the command prompt. Now the appropriate username can be entered and the config account
command re-executed.
All commands in the CLI function in this way. In addition, the syntax of the help prompts are the
same as presented in this manual − angle brackets < > indicate a numerical value or character
string, braces { } indicate optional parameters or a choice of parameters, and brackets [ ] indicate
required parameters.
If a command is entered that is unrecognized by the CLI, the top-level commands will be displayed
under the Available commands: prompt.
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#the
Available commands:
.. ? cable_diag cd
cfm change clear config
copy create debug del
delete dir disable download
enable erase execute format
install login logout md
move no ping ping6
rd reboot reconfig rename
reset save show smtp
telnet traceroute traceroute6 upload
The top-level commands consist of commands such as show or config. Most of these commands
require one or more parameters to narrow the top-level command. This is equivalent to show what?
or config what? Where the what? is the next parameter.
For example, entering the show command with no additional parameters, the CLI will then display
all of the possible next parameters.
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show
Command: show
802.1p 802.1x aaa access_profile
account accounting acct_client address_binding
arp_spoofing_prevention arpentry asymmetric_vlan
attack_log auth_client auth_diagnostics
auth_session_statistics auth_statistics authen

®
authen_enable authen_login authen_policy authentication

authorization autoconfig backup bandwidth_control
boot_file bpdu_protection cfm command
command_history community_encryption config
cpu cpu_filter current_config ddm
device_status dhcp dhcp_local_relay dhcp_relay
dhcp_server dhcpv6_relay dlms
dot1v_protocol_group dscp duld
dvmrp ecmp eee
egress_access_profile egress_flow_meter environment
erps error ethernet_oam execute_config
fdb filter flow_meter gratuitous_arp
greeting_message gvrp hol_prevention igmp
igmp_proxy igmp_snooping ip ip_tunnel
ipfdb ipif ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto
ipmc ipmroute iproute ipv6
ipv6route jumbo_frame jwac l2protocol_tunnel
lacp_port led limited_multicast_addr
link_aggregation lldp lldp_med log
log_save_timing log_software_module loopback
loopdetect mac_based_access_control
mac_based_access_control_local mac_based_vlan mac_notification
max_mcast_group mcast_filter_profile md5
mirror mld mld_proxy mld_snooping
multicast multicast_fdb nlb ospf
ospfv3 packet password_recovery per_queue
pim pim-ssm pim6 poe
policy_route port port_group port_security
port_security_entry port_vlan ports
power_saving pppoe private_vlan pvid
qinq radius rip ripng
rmon route route_map router_ports
rspan safeguard_engine scheduling
scheduling_mechanism serial_port session
sflow sim smtp snmp
sntp ssh ssl stack_device
stack_information stacking_mode storage_media_info
stp surveillance_vlan switch syslog
system_severity tech_support terminal time
time_range traffic traffic_segmentation
trap trusted_host udp_helper utilization
vlan vlan_translation vlan_trunk voice_vlan
vrrp wac wred
In the above example, all of the possible next parameters for the show command are displayed. At
the next command prompt, the up arrow was used to re-enter the show command, followed by the
account parameter. The CLI then displays the user accounts configured on the Switch.

®
1-3 Command Syntax Symbols

Syntax Description
angle brackets < > Encloses a variable or value. Users must specify the variable or value.
For example, in the syntax
config command_history <value 1-40>
users must enter how many entries for <value 1-40> when entering the
command. DO NOT TYPE THE ANGLE BRACKETS.
square brackets [ ] Encloses a required value or list of required arguments. Only one value or
argument must be specified. For example, in the syntax
create account [admin | operator | power_user | user] <username 15>
{encrypt [plain_text | sha_1] <password>}
users must specify either the admin, operator, power_user or user-level
account when entering the command. DO NOT TYPE THE SQUARE
BRACKETS.
vertical bar | Separates mutually exclusive items in a list. For example, in the syntax
reset {[config | system]} {force_agree}
users must specify either the community or trap receiver in the command.
DO NOT TYPE THE VERTICAL BAR.
braces { } Encloses an optional value or a list of optional arguments. One or more
values or arguments can be specified. For example, in the syntax
users may choose configure or system in the command. DO NOT TYPE
THE BRACES.
parentheses ( ) Indicates at least one or more of the values or arguments in the preceding
syntax enclosed by braces must be specified. For example, in the syntax
config bpdu_protection ports [<portlist> | all] {state [enable | disable] |
mode [drop | block | shutdown]}(1)
users have the option to specify hops or time or both of them. The "(1)"
following the set of braces indicates at least one argument or value within
the braces must be specified. DO NOT TYPE THE PARENTHESES.
ipif <ipif_name 12> 12 means the maximum length of the IP interface name.
metric <value 1-31> 1-31 means the legal range of the metric value.
1-4 Line Editing Keys

Keys Description
Delete Delete character under cursor and shift remainder of line to left.
Backspace Delete character to left of cursor and shift remainder of line to left.
CTRL+R Toggle on and off. When toggled on, inserts text and shifts previous
text to right.

®
Left Arrow Move cursor to left.

Right Arrow Move cursor to right
Tab Help user to select appropriate token.
P or p Display the previous page.
N, n or Space Display the next page.
CTRL+C Escape from displayed pages.
ESC Escape from displayed pages.
Q or q Escape from displayed pages.
R or r refresh the displayed pages
A or a Display the remaining pages. (The screen display will not pause again.)
Enter Display the next line.
The screen display pauses when the show command output reaches the end of the page.
In the above example, all of the possible next parameters for the show command are displayed. At
the next command prompt, the up arrow was used to re-enter the show command, followed by the
account parameter. The CLI then displays the user accounts configured on the Switch.

®
Chapter 2 Basic Command List

show session
show serial_port
config serial_port {baud_rate [9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 115200] | auto_logout [never | 2_minutes |
5_minutes | 10_minutes | 15_minutes]}
enable clipaging
disable clipaging
login
logout
?
clear
show command_history
config greeting_message {default}
show greeting_message
config command_prompt [<string 16> | username | default]
config terminal width [default | <value 80-200>]
show terminal width
config ports [<portlist> | all ] {medium_type [fiber | copper]} {speed [auto | 10_half | 10_full |
100_half | 100_full | 1000_full {[master | slave]}] | flow_control [enable | disable] | learning
[enable | disable] | state [enable | disable] | mdix [auto | normal | cross] | [description <desc 1-
32> | clear_description]}
show ports {<portlist>} {[description | err_disabled | details | media_type]}
2-1 show session

Description
This command is used to display a list of currently users which are login to CLI sessions.
Format
show session
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrator and Operator-level users can issue this command.
Example
To disable the password encryption:

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show session
Command: show session
ID Live Time From Level User

--- ------------ --------------------------------------- ----- ---------------
8 00:04:17.870 Serial Port admin Anonymous
Total Entries: 1
CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh
2-2 show serial_port

Description
This command is used to display the current serial port settings.
Format
show serial_port
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the serial port setting:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show serial_port
Command: show serial_port
Baud Rate : 9600

Data Bits : 8
Parity Bits : None
Stop Bits : 1
Auto-Logout : 10 minutes
2-3 config serial_port

Description
This command is used to configure the serial bit rate that will be used to communicate with the
management host and the auto logout time for idle connections.

®
Format
config serial_port {baud_rate [9600 | 19200 | 38400 | 115200] | auto_logout [never |
2_minutes | 5_minutes | 10_minutes | 15_minutes]}
Parameters
baud_rate - (Optional) The serial bit rate that will be used to communicate with the management
host. The default baud rate is 115200.
9600 - Specify the serial bit rate to be 9600.
auto_logout - (Optional) The auto logout time out setting:
never - Never timeout.
2_minutes - When idle over 2 minutes, the device will auto logout.
Restrictions
Example
To configure baud rate:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config serial_port baud_rate 9600
Command: config serial_port baud_rate 9600
Success.
2-4 enable clipaging

Description
This command is used to enable the pausing of the screen display when the show command
output reaches the end of the page. For those show commands that provide the display refresh
function, the display will not be refreshed when clipaging is disabled. The default setting is enabled.
Format
enable clipaging
Parameters
None.
10

®
Restrictions
Example
To enable pausing of the screen display when show command output reaches the end of the page:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable clipaging
Command: enable clipaging
Success.
2-5 disable clipaging

Description
This command is used to disable the pausing of the screen display when the show command
output reaches the end of the page. The default setting is enabled.
Format
disable clipaging
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable pausing of the screen display when show command output reaches the end of the page:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable clipaging
Command: disable clipaging
Success.
2-6 login
Description
This command is used to allow user login to the Switch.
11

®
Format
login
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To login the Switch with a user name dlink:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# login
Command: login
UserName:dlink
PassWord:****
2-7 logout
Description
This command is used to logout the facility.
Format
logout
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To logout current user:
12

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# logout
Command: logout
**********
* Logout *
**********
Press any key to login...


UserName:
2-8 ?
Description
This command is used to display the usage description for all commands in the cuurent login
account level or the specific one.
Format
?
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To get “ping” command usage, descriptions:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#? ping
Command: ? ping
Command: ping
Usage: <ipaddr> { times <value 1-255> | timeout <sec 1-99>}
Description: Used to test the connectivity between network devices.
13

®
2-9 clear
Description
The command is used to clear screen.
Format
clear
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To clear screen:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# clear
Command: clear
2-10 show command_history

Description
The command is used to display command history.
Format
show command_history
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display command history:
14

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show command_history
Command: show command_history
? ping
login
show serial_port
show session
? config bpdu_protection ports
? reset
? create account
? create ipif
show
the
?
2-11 config command_history

Description
This command is used to configure the number of commands that the Switch can recall. The
Switch “remembers” upto the last 40 commands you entered.
Format
Parameters
<value 1-40> - Enter the number of commands that the Switch can recall. This value must be
between 1 and 40.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To configure the number of command history:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config command_history 25
Command: config command_history 25
Success.
2-12 config greeting_message

Description
This command is used to configure the greeting message (or banner).
15

®
Format
config greeting_message {default}
Parameters
default - (Optional) Adding this parameter to the “config greeting_message” command will return
the greeting message (banner) to its original factory default entry.
Restrictions
Example
To edit the banner:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config greeting_message
Command: config greeting_message
Greeting Messages Editor

================================================================================


================================================================================
<Function Key> <Control Key>

Ctrl+C Quit without save left/right/
Ctrl+W Save and quit up/down Move cursor
Ctrl+D Delete line
Ctrl+X Erase all setting
Ctrl+L Reload original setting
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2-13 show greeting_message

Description
The command is used to display greeting message.
Format
show greeting_message
16

®
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To display greeting message:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show greeting_ message
Command: show greeting_message
================================================================================

================================================================================
2-14 config command_prompt

Description
This command is used to modify the command prompt.
The current command prompt consists of four parts: “product name” + “:” + ”user level” + ”#” (e.g.
“DGS-3120-24TC:admin#”). This command is used to modify the first part (1. “product name”) with
a string consisting of a maximum of 16 characters, or to be replaced with the users’ login user
name.
17

®
When users issue the “reset” command, the current command prompt will remain in tact. Yet,
issuing the “reset system” will return the command prompt to its original factory default value.
Format
config command_prompt [<string 16> | username | default]
Parameters
<string 16> - Enter the new command prompt string of no more than 16 characters.
username - Enter this command to set the login username as the command prompt.
default - Enter this command to return the command prompt to its original factory default value.
Restrictions
Example
To edit the command prompt:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config command_prompt Prompt#
Command: config command_prompt Prompt#
Success.
Prompt#:admin#
2-15 config terminal width

Description
The command is used to set current terminal width.
The usage is described as below:
1. Users login and configure the terminal width to 120, this configuration take effect on this
login section. If users implement “save” command, the configuration is saved. After users
log out and log in again, the terminal width is 120.
2. If user did not save the configuration, another user login, the terminal width is default value.
3. If at the same time, two CLI sessions are running, once section configure to 120 width and
save it, the other section will not be effected, unless it log out and then log in.
Format
config terminal width [default | <value 80-200>]
Parameters
default - The default setting of terminal width. The default value is 80.
<value 80-200> - The terminal width which will be configured. The width is between 80 and 200
characters.
18

®
Restrictions
None.
Example
To configure the current terminal width:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config terminal width 120
Command: config terminal width 120
Success.
2-16 show terminal width

Description
The command is used to display the configuration of current terminal width.
Format
show terminal width
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the configuration of current terminal width:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show terminal width
Command: show terminal width
Global terminal width : 80

Current terminal width : 80
2-17 config ports

Description
This command is used to configure the Switch's port settings.
19

®
Format
config ports [<portlist> | all ] {medium_type [fiber | copper]} {speed [auto | 10_half | 10_full |
100_half | 100_full | 1000_full {[master | slave]}] | flow_control [enable | disable] | learning
[enable | disable] | state [enable | disable] | mdix [auto | normal | cross] | [description <desc
1-32> | clear_description]}
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a list of ports used here.
all - Specify that all the ports will be used for this configuration.
medium_type - (Optional) Specify the medium type while the configure ports are combo ports
fiber - Specify that the medium type will be set to fiber.
copper - Specify that the medium type will be set to copper.
speed - (Optional) Specify the port speed of the specified ports .
auto - Set port speed to auto negotiation.
10_half - Set port speed to 10_half.
10_full - Set port speed to 10_full.
100_half - Set port speed to 100_half.
100_full - Set port speed to 100_full._
1000_full - 1000_full set port speed to 1000_full. While set port speed to 1000_full,user
should specify master or slave mode for 1000 base TX interface, and leave the 1000_full
without any master or slave setting for other interface.
master - Specify that the port(s) will be set to master.
slave - Specify that the port(s) will be set to slave.
flow_control - (Optional) You can turn on or turn off flow control on one or more ports. By set
flow_control to enable or disable.
enable - Specify that the flow control option will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the flow control option will be disabled.
learning - (Optional) You can turn on or turn off MAC address learning on one or more ports.
enable - Specify that the learning option will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the learning option will be disabled.
state - (Optional) Enables or disables the specified port. If the specificed ports are in error-
disabled status , configure their state to enable will recover these ports from disabled to
enable state.
enable - Specify that the port state will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the port state will be disabled.
mdix - (Optional) MDIX mode can be specified as auto, normal, and cross. If set to normal state,
the port is in MDIX mode and can be connected to PC NIC using a straight cale. If set to cross
state, the port is in mdi mode, and can be connected to a port (in mdix mode) on another
switch thru a straight cabe.
auto - Specify that the MDIX mode for the port will be set to auto.
normal - Specify that the MDIX mode for the port will be set to normal.
cross - Specify that the MDIX mode for the port will be set to cross.
description - (Optional) Specify the description of the port interface.
<desc 1-32> - Enter the port interface description here. This value can be up to 32 characters
long.
clear_description - (Optional) Specify that the description field will be cleared.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the ports:
20

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ports all medium_type copper speed auto

Command: config ports all medium_type copper speed auto
Success.
2-18 show ports

Description
This command is used to display the current configurations of a range of ports.
Format
show ports {<portlist>} {[description | err_disabled | details | media_type]}
Parameters
ports - Specify a range of ports to be displayed.
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter the list of ports to be configured here.
description - (Optional) Indicates if port description will be included in the display .
err_disabled - (Optional) Indicates if ports are disabled by some reasons will be displayed.
details - (Optional) Displays the port details.
media_type - (Optional) Displays port transceiver type.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the port details:
21

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ports details

Command: show ports details
Port : 1:1
--------------------
Port Status : Link Down
Description :
HardWare Type : Gigabits Ethernet
MAC Address : 00-01-02-03-04-10
Bandwidth : 1000000Kbit
Auto-Negotiation : Enabled
Duplex Mode : Full Duplex
Flow Control : Disabled
MDI : Auto
Address Learning : Enabled
Last Clear of Counter : 0 hours 10 mins ago
BPDU Hardware Filtering Mode: Disabled
Queuing Strategy : FIFO
TX Load : 0/100, 0 bits/sec, 0
packets/sec
RX Load : 0/100, 0 bits/sec, 0
packets/sec
22

®
Chapter 3 802.1Q VLAN Command List

create vlan <vlan_name 32> tag <vlanid 2-4094> {type [1q_vlan | private_vlan]} {advertisement}
create vlan vlanid <vidlist> {type [1q_vlan | private_vlan]} {advertisement}
delete vlan <vlan_name 32>
delete vlan vlanid <vidlist>
config vlan <vlan_name 32> {[add [tagged | untagged | forbidden] | delete] <portlist> |
advertisement [enable | disable]}(1)
config vlan vlanid <vidlist> {[add [tagged | untagged | forbidden] | delete] <portlist> |
advertisement [enable | disable] | name <vlan_name 32>}(1)
config port_vlan [<portlist> | all] {gvrp_state [enable | disable] | ingress_checking [enable |
disable] | acceptable_frame [tagged_only | admit_all] | pvid <vlanid 1-4094>}(1)
show vlan {<vlan_name 32>}
show vlan ports {<portlist>}
show vlan vlanid <vidlist>
show port_vlan {<portlist>}
enable pvid auto_assign
disable pvid auto_assign
show pvid auto_assign
config gvrp [timer [join | leave | leaveall] < value 100-100000> | nni_bpdu_addr [dot1d | dot1ad]]
show gvrp
enable gvrp
disable gvrp
config private_vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vid <vlanid 2-4094>] [add [isolated | community] | remove]
[<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>]
show private_vlan {[<vlan_name 32> | vlanid<vidlist>]}
3-1 create vlan

Description
This command is used to create a VLAN on the Switch. The VLAN ID must be always specified for
creating a VLAN.
Format
create vlan <vlan_name 32> tag <vlanid 2-4094> {type [1q_vlan | private_vlan]}
{advertisement}
Parameters
vlan - The name of the VLAN to be created.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters
long.
tag - The VLAN ID of the VLAN to be created.
<vlanid 2-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID here. The VLAN ID value must be between 2 and 4094.
type - (Optional) Specify the type of VLAN here.
1q_vlan - (Optional) Specify that the type of VLAN used is based on the 802.1Q standard.
private_vlan – (Optional) Specify that the private VLAN type will be used.
advertisement - (Optional) Specify the VLAN as being able to be advertised out.
23

®
Restrictions
Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command.
Example
To create a VLAN with name “v2” and VLAN ID 2:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create vlan v2 tag 2 type 1q_vlan advertisement
Command: create vlan v2 tag 2 type 1q_vlan advertisement
Success.
3-2 create vlan vlanid

Description
This command is used to create more than one VLANs at a time. A unique VLAN name (e.g.
VLAN10) will be automatically assigned by the system. The automatic assignment of VLAN name
is based on the following rule: “VLAN”+ID. For example, for VLAN ID 100, the VLAN name will be
VLAN100. If this VLAN name is conflict with the name of an existing VLAN, then it will be renamed
based on the following rule: “VLAN”+ID+”ALT”+ collision count. For example, if this conflict is the
second collision, then the name will be VLAN100ALT2.
Format
create vlan vlanid <vidlist> {type [1q_vlan | private_vlan]} {advertisement}
Parameters
vlanid - The VLAN ID list to be created.
<vidlist> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
type - (Optional) Specify the type of VLAN to be created.
1q_vlan - (Optional) Specify that the VLAN created will be a 1Q VLAN.
private_vlan – (Optional) Specify that the private VLAN type will be used.
advertisement - (Optional) Specify the VLAN as being able to be advertised out.
Restrictions
Example
To create some VLANs using VLAN ID:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create vlan vlanid 10-30
Command: create vlan vlanid 10-30
Success.
24

®
3-3 delete vlan

Description
This command is used to delete a previously configured VLAN by the name on the Switch.
Format
delete vlan <vlan_name 32>
Parameters
vlan - The VLAN name of the VLAN to be deleted.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
Restrictions
Example
To remove a vlan v1:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete vlan v1
Command: delete vlan v1
Success.
3-4 delete vlan vlanid

Description
This command is used to delete one or a number of previously configured VLAN by VID list.
Format
delete vlan vlanid <vidlist>
Parameters
vlanid - The VLAN ID list to be deleted.
Restrictions
25

®
Example
To remove VLANs from 10-30:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete vlan vlanid 10-30
Command: delete vlan vlanid 10-30
Success.
3-5 config vlan

Description
This command is used to configure a VLAN based on the name.
Format
config vlan <vlan_name 32> {[add [tagged | untagged | forbidden] | delete] <portlist> |
advertisement [enable | disable]}(1)
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name you want to add ports to. This name can be up to 32
characters long.
add - (Optional) Specify to add tagged, untagged or forbidden ports to the VLAN.
tagged - Specify the additional ports as tagged.
untagged - Specify the additional ports as untagged.
forbidden - Specify the additional ports as forbidden.
delete - (Optional) Specify to delete ports from the VLAN.
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter the list of ports used for the configuration here.
advertisement - (Optional) Specify the GVRP state of this VLAN.
enable - Specify to enable advertisement for this VLAN.
disable - Specify to disable advertisement for this VLAN.
Restrictions
Example
To add 4 through 8 of unit 2 as tagged ports to the VLAN v1:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config vlan v1 add tagged 2:4-2:8
Command: config vlan v1 add tagged 2:4-2:8
Success.
26

®
3-6 config vlan vlanid

Description
This command allows you to configure multiple VLANs at one time. But conflicts will be generated
if you configure the name of multiple VLANs at one time.
Format
config vlan vlanid <vidlist> {[add [tagged | untagged | forbidden] | delete] <portlist> |
advertisement [enable | disable] | name <vlan_name 32>}(1)
Parameters
<vidlist> - Enter a list of VLAN IDs to configure.
add - (Optional) Specify to add tagged, untagged or forbidden ports to the VLAN.
tagged - Specify the additional ports as tagged.
untagged - Specify the additional ports as untagged.
forbidden - Specify the additional ports as forbidden.
delete - (Optional) Specify to delete ports from the VLAN.
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter the list of ports used for the configuration here.
advertisement - (Optional) Specify the GVRP state of this VLAN.
enable - Specify to enable advertisement for this VLAN.
disable - Specify to disable advertisement for this VLAN.
name - (Optional) The new name of the VLAN.
Restrictions
Example
To add 4 through 8 of unit 2 as tagged ports to the VLAN ID from 10-20:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config vlan vlanid 10-20 add tagged 2:4-2:8
Command: config vlan vlanid 10-20 add tagged 2:4-2:8
Success.
3-7 config port_vlan

Description
This command is used to set the ingress checking status, the sending and receiving GVRP
information.
Format
config port_vlan [<portlist> | all] {gvrp_state [enable | disable] | ingress_checking [enable |
disable] | acceptable_frame [tagged_only | admit_all] | pvid <vlanid 1-4094>}(1)
27

®
Parameters
<portlist> - A range of ports for which you want ingress checking. The port list is specified by
listing the lowest switch number and the beginning port number on that switch, separated by a
colon. Then highest switch number, and the highest port number of the range (also separated
by a colon) are specified. The beginning and end of the port list range are separated by a
dash. For example, 1:3 would specify switch number 1, port 3. 2:4 specifies switch number 2,
port 4. 1:3-2:4 specifies all of the ports between switch 1, port 3 and switch 2, port 4 − in
numerical order.
all - Specify that all the port will be used for this configuration.
gvrp_state - (Optional) Enabled or disables GVRP for the ports specified in the port list.
enable - Specify that GVRP for the specified ports will be enabled.
disable - Specify that GVRP for the specified ports will be disabled.
ingress_checking - (Optional) Enables or disables ingress checking for the specified portlist.
enable - Specify that ingress checking will be enabled for the specified portlist.
disable - Specify that ingress checking will be disabled for the specified portlist.
acceptable_frame - (Optional) The type of frame will be accepted by the port. There are two
types:
tagged_only - Only tagged packets can be accepted by this port.
admit_all - All packets can be accepted.
pvid - (Optional) Specify the PVID of the ports.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID here. The VLAN ID value must be between 1 and 4094.
Restrictions
Example
To sets the ingress checking status, the sending and receiving GVRP information:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config port_vlan 1:1-1:5 gvrp_state enable
ingress_checking enable acceptable_frame tagged_only pvid 2
Command: config port_vlan 1:1-1:5 gvrp_state enable ingress_checking enable
acceptable_frame tagged_only pvid 2
Success
3-8 show vlan

Description
This command is used to display the vlan information including of parameters setting and
operational value.
Format
show vlan {<vlan_name 32>}
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - (Optional) Enter the VLAN name to be displayed. The VLAN name can be up
to 32 characters long.
28

®
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display VLAN settings:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show vlan
Command: show vlan
VLAN Trunk State : Disabled

VLAN Trunk Member Ports :
VID : 1 VLAN Name : default

VLAN Type : Static Advertisement : Enabled
Member Ports : 1:1-1:24
Static Ports : 1:1-1:24
Current Tagged Ports :
Current Untagged Ports: 1:1-1:24
Static Tagged Ports :
Static Untagged Ports : 1:1-1:24
Forbidden Ports :
Total Static VLAN Entries: 1

Total GVRP VLAN Entries: 0
3-9 show vlan ports

Description
This command is used to display the vlan information per ports.
Format
show vlan ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter the list of ports for which the VLAN information will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the VLAN configuration for port 6 of unit 1:
29

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show vlan ports 1:6

Command: show vlan ports 1:6
Port VID Untagged Tagged Dynamic Forbidden

----- ---- -------- ------ ------- ---------
1:6 1 X - - -
3-10 show vlan vlanid

Description
This command is used to display the vlan information using the VLAN ID.
Format
show vlan vlanid <vidlist>
Parameters
<vidlist> - Enter the VLAN ID to be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the VLAN configuration for VLAN ID 1:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show vlan vlanid 1
Command: show vlan vlanid 1

VLAN Type : Static Advertisement : Enabled
Member Ports : 1:1-1:24
Static Ports : 1:1-1:24
Current Tagged Ports :
Current Untagged Ports: 1:1-1:24
Static Tagged Ports :
Static Untagged Ports : 1:1-1:24
Forbidden Ports :
Total Entries : 1
30

®
3-11 show port_vlan

Description
This command is used to display the ports’ VLAN attributes on the Switch.
Format
show port_vlan {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Specify a range of ports to be displayed. (UnitID:port number).
If no parameter specified, system will display all ports gvrp information.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display 802.1Q port setting:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show port_vlan
Command: show port_vlan
Port PVID GVRP Ingress Checking Acceptable Frame Type

------- ---- -------- ---------------- ---------------------------
1:1 1 Disabled Enabled All Frames
31

®
3-12 enable pvid auto assign

Description
This command is used to enable the auto-assignment of PVID.
If “Auto-assign PVID” is enabled, PVID will be possibly changed by PVID or VLAN configuration.
When user configures a port to VLAN X’s untagged membership, this port’s PVID will be updated
with VLAN X. In the form of VLAN list command, PVID is updated with last item of VLAN list. When
user removes a port from the untagged membership of the PVID’s VLAN, the port’s PVID will be
assigned with “default VLAN”.
The default setting is enabled.
Format
enable pvid auto_assign
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the auto-assign PVID:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable pvid auto_assign
Command: enable pvid auto_assign
Success.
3-13 disable pvid auto assign

Description
This command is used to disable auto assignment of PVID.
Format
disable pvid auto_assign
Parameters
None.
32

®
Restrictions
Example
To disable the auto-assign PVID:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable pvid auto_assign
Command: disable pvid auto_assign
Success.
3-14 show pvid auto_assign

Description
This command is used to display the PVID auto-assignment state.
Format
show pvid auto_assign
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display PVID auto-assignment state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show pvid auto_assign
Command: show pvid auto_assign
PVID Auto-assignment: Enabled
3-15 config gvrp

Description
The config gvrp timer command set the GVRP timer’s value. The default value for Join time is 200
milliseconds; for Leave time is 600 milliseconds; for LeaveAll time is 10000 milliseconds.
33

®
Format
config gvrp [timer [join | leave | leaveall] < value 100-100000> | nni_bpdu_addr [dot1d |
dot1ad]]
Parameters
timer - Specify that the GVRP timer parameter will be configured.
join - (Optional) Specify the Join time will be set.
leave - (Optional) Specify the Leave time will be set.
leaveall - (Optional) Specify the LeaveAll time will be set.
<value 100-100000> - Enter the time used here. This value must be between 100 and 100000.
nni_bpdu_addr - Used to determine the BPDU protocol address for GVRP in service provide
site. It can use 802.1d GVRP address, 802.1ad service provider GVRP address or a user
defined multicast address.
dot1d - Specify that the NNI BPDU protocol address value will be set to Dot1d.
dot1ad - Specify that the NNI BPDU protocol address value will be set to Dot1ad.
Restrictions
Example
To set the Join time to 200 milliseconds:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config gvrp timer join 200
Command: config gvrp timer join 200
Success.
3-16 show gvrp

Description
This command is used to display the GVRP global setting.
Format
show gvrp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
34

®
Example
To display the global setting of GVRP:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show gvrp
Command: show gvrp
Global GVRP : Disabled

Join Time : 200 Milliseconds
Leave Time : 600 Milliseconds
LeaveAll Time : 10000 Milliseconds
NNI BPDU Address: dot1d
3-17 enable gvrp

Description
This command is used to enable the Generic VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP).
Format
enable gvrp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the generic VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP):
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable gvrp
Command: enable gvrp
Success.
3-18 disable gvrp

Description
This command is used to disable the Generic VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP).
Format
disable gvrp
35

®
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable the Generic VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP):
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable gvrp
Command: disable gvrp
Success.
3-19 config private_vlan

Description
This command is used to add or remove a secondary VLAN from a private VLAN.
Format
config private_vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vid <vlanid 2-4094>] [add [isolated | community] |
remove] [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>]
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Specify the name of the private VLAN.
vid - Specify the VLAN ID of the private VLAN.
<vlanid 2-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID used here. This value must be between 2 and 4094.
add - Specify that a secondary VLAN will be added to the private VLAN.
isolated - Specify the secondary VLAN as isolated VLAN.
community - Specify the secondary VLAN as community VLAN.
remove - Specify that a secondary VLAN will be removed from the private VLAN.
<vlan_name 32> - Specify the secondary VLAN name used. This name can be up to 32
characters long.
vlanid - A range of secondary VLAN to add or remove to the private VLAN.
<vidlist> - Enter the secondary VLAN ID used here.
Restrictions
Example
To associate secondary vlan to private vlan p1:
36

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config private_vlan p1 add community vlanid 2-5

Command: config private_vlan p1 add community vlanid 2-5
Success.
3-20 show private vlan

Description
This command is used to show the private VLAN information.
Format
show private_vlan {[<vlan_name 32> | vlanid<vidlist>]}
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - (Optional) Specify the name of the private VLAN or its secondary VLAN. This
name can be up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the VLAN ID of the private VLAN or its secondary VLAN.
<vidlist> - Enter the VLAN ID used here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display private VLAN settings:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show private_vlan
Command: show private_vlan
Private VLAN 100

------------------
Promiscuous Ports: 1:1
Trunk Ports : 1:2
Isolated Ports : 1:3-1:5 Isolated VLAN : 20
Community Ports : 1:6–1:8 Community VLAN: 30
Community Ports: : 1:9–1:10 Community VLAN: 40
Private VLAN 200

------------------
Promiscuous Ports: 1:11
Trunk Ports : 1:12
Isolated Ports : 1:13-1:15 Isolated VLAN : 20
Community Ports : 1:16–1:18 Community VLAN: 30
37

®
Chapter 4 802.1X Command List

enable 802.1x
disable 802.1x
create 802.1x user <username 15>
delete 802.1x user <username 15>
show 802.1x user
config 802.1x auth_protocol [local | radius_eap]
config 802.1x fwd_pdu system [enable | disable]
config 802.1x fwd_pdu ports [<portlist> | all] [enable | disable]
config 802.1x authorization attributes radius [enable | disable]
show 802.1x {[auth_state | auth_configuration] ports {<portlist>}}
config 802.1x capability ports [<portlist> | all] [authenticator | none]
config 802.1x max_users [<value 1–448> | no_limit]
config 802.1x auth_parameter ports [<portlist> | all] [default | {direction [both | in] | port_control
[force_unauth | auto | force_auth] | quiet_period <sec 0-65535> | tx_period <sec 1-65535> |
supp_timeout <sec 1-65535> | server_timeout <sec 1-65535> | max_req <value 1-10> |
reauth_period <sec 1-65535> | max_users [<value 1-448> | no_limit] | enable_reauth [enable
| disable]}(1)]
config 802.1x auth_mode [port_based | mac_based]
config 802.1x init [port_based ports [<portlist> | all] | mac_based ports [<portlist> | all]
{mac_address <macaddr>}]
config 802.1x reauth [port_based ports [<portlist> | all] | mac_based ports [<portlist> | all]
create 802.1x guest_vlan <vlan_name 32>
delete 802.1x guest_vlan <vlan_name 32>
config 802.1x guest_vlan ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
show 802.1x guest_vlan
config radius add <server_index 1-3> [<server_ip> | <ipv6addr>] [key <password 32> |
encryption_key <password 56>] [default | {auth_port <udp_port_number 1-65535 > | acct_port
<udp_port_number 1-65535 > | timeout <sec 1-255> | retransmit<int 1-20>}]
config radius delete <server_index 1-3>
config radius <server_index 1-3> {ipaddress [<server_ip> | <ipv6addr>] | [key <password 32> |
encryption_key <password 56>] | auth_port [<udp_port_number 1-65535 > | default] |
acct_port [<udp_port_number 1-65535> | default] | timeout [<sec 1-255> | default] | retransmit
[<int 1-20> | default]}
show radius
show auth_statistics {ports <portlist>}
show auth_diagnostics {ports <portlist>}
show auth_session_statistics {ports <portlist>}
show auth_client
show acct_client
4-1 enable 802.1x

Description
This command is used to enable the 802.1X function.
Format
enable 802.1x
38

®
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
Used to enable the 802.1X function:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable 802.1x
Command: enable 802.1x
Success.
4-2 disable 802.1x

Description
This command is used to disable the 802.1X function.
Format
disable 802.1x
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable the 802.1X function:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable 802.1x
Command: disable 802.1x
Success.
4-3 create 802.1x user

Description
This command is used to create an 802.1X user.
39

®
Format
create 802.1x user <username 15>
Parameters
<username 15> - Enter the username to be added. This value can be up to 15 characters long.
Restrictions
Example
To create a 802.1x user “test”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create 802.1x user test
Command: create 802.1x user test
Enter a case-sensitive new password:****

Enter the new password again for confirmation:****
Success.
4-4 delete 802.1x user

Description
This command is used to delete an 802.1X user.
Format
delete 802.1x user <username 15>
Parameters
<username 15> - Enter the username to be deleted. This value can be up to 15 characters long.
Restrictions
Example
To delete user “test”:
40

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete 802.1x user test

Command: delete 802.1x user test
Success.
4-5 show 802.1x user

Description
This command is used to display the 802.1X user.
Format
show 802.1x user
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the 802.1X user information:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show 802.1x user
Command: show 802.1x user
Current Accounts:
Username Password
--------------- ---------------
test test
Total Entries:1
4-6 config 802.1x auth_protocol

Description
This command is used to configure the 802.1X auth protocol.
Format
config 802.1x auth_protocol [local | radius_eap]
41

®
Parameters
local - Specify the authentication protocol as local.
radius_eap - Specify the authentication protocol as RADIUS EAP.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the 802.1X authentication protocol to RADIUS EAP:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config 802.1x auth_protocol radius_eap
Command: config 802.1x auth_protocol radius_eap
Success.
4-7 config 802.1x fwd_pdu system

Description
This command is used to globally control the forwarding of EAPOL PDU. When 802.1X
functionality is disabled globally or for a port, and if 802.1X fwd_pdu is enabled both globally and
for the port, a received EAPOL packet on the port will be flooded in the same VLAN to those ports
for which 802.1X fwd_pdu is enabled and 802.1X is disabled (globally or just for the port). The
default state is disabled.
Format
config 802.1x fwd_pdu system [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enable the forwarding of EAPOL PDU.
disable - Disable the forwarding of EAPOL PDU.
Restrictions
Example
To configure forwarding of EAPOL PDU system state enable:
42

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config 802.1x fwd_pdu system enable

Command: config 802.1x fwd_pdu system enable
Success.
4-8 config 802.1x fwd_pdu ports

Description
This command is used to control the forwarding of EAPOL PDU. When 802.1X functionality is
disabled globally or for a port, and if 802.1X fwd_pdu is enabled both globally and for the port, a
received EAPOL packet on the port will be flooded in the same VLAN to those ports for which
802.1X fwd_pdu is enabled and 802.1X is disabled (globally or just for the port). The default state
is disabled.
Format
config 802.1x fwd_pdu ports [<portlist> | all] [enable | disable]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports used for the configuration.
all - Specify that all the ports will be used.
enable - Enable forwarding EAPOL PDU receive on the ports.
disable - Disable forwarding EAPOL PDU receive on the ports.
Restrictions
Example
To configure 802.1X fwd_pdu for ports:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config 802.1x fwd_pdu ports 1:1-1:2 enable
Command: config 802.1x fwd_pdu ports 1:1-1:2 enable
Success.
4-9 config 802.1x authorization attributes

Description
This command is used to enable or disable acception of authorized configuration.
When the authorization is enabled for 802.1X’s RADIUS authentication, the authorized attributes
(for example VLAN, 802.1p default priority, and ACL) assigned by the RADUIS server will be
accepted if the global authorization status is enabled.
43

®
Format
config 802.1x authorization attributes radius [enable | disable]
Parameters
radius - If specified to enable, the authorization attributes (for example VLAN, 802.1p default
priority, and ACL) assigned by the RADUIS server will be accepted if the global authorization
status is enabled. The default state is enabled.
enable - Specify to enable the authorization attributes.
disable - Specify to disable the authorization attributes.
Restrictions
Example
The following example will disable to accept the authorized data assigned from the RADIUS server:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config 802.1x authorization attributes radius disable
Command: config 802.1x authorization attributes radius disable
Success.
4-10 show 802.1x

Description
This command is used to display the 802.1X state or configurations.
Format
show 802.1x {[auth_state | auth_configuration] ports {<portlist>}}
Parameters
auth_state - (Optional) Used to display 802.1X authentication state machine of some or all ports
auth_configuration - (Optional) Used to display 802.1X configurations of some or all ports.
port - (Optional) Specify a range of ports to be displayed. If no port is specified, all ports will be
displayed.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports used for the configuration here.
If no parameter is specified, the 802.1X system configurations will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the 802.1X port level configurations:
44

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show 802.1x auth_configuration ports 1:1

Command: show 802.1x auth_configuration ports 1:1
Port Number : 1:1

Capability : None
AdminCrlDir : Both
OpenCrlDir : Both
Port Control : Auto
QuietPeriod : 60 sec
TxPeriod : 30 sec
SuppTimeout : 30 sec
ServerTimeout : 30 sec
MaxReq : 2 times
ReAuthPeriod : 3600 sec
ReAuthenticate : Disabled
Forward EAPOL PDU On Port : Enabled
Max User On Port : 16
4-11 config 802.1x capability

Description
This command is used to configure the port capability.
Format
config 802.1x capability ports [<portlist> | all] [authenticator | none]
Parameters
ports - Specify a range of ports to be configured.
all - Specify all ports to be configured.
authenticator - The port that wishes to enforce authentication before allowing access to services
that are accessible via that port adopts the authenticator role.
none - Disable authentication on the specified ports.
Restrictions
45

®
Example
To configure the port capability:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config 802.1x capability ports 1:1-1:10 authenticator
Command: config 802.1x capability ports 1:1-1:10 authenticator
Success.
4-12 config 802.1x max_users

Description
This command is used to limit the maximum number of users that can be learned via 802.1X
authentication. In addition to the global limitation, maximum user for per port is also limited. It is
specified by config 802.1x auth_parameter command.
Format
config 802.1x max_users [<value 1–448> | no_limit]
Parameters
<value 1-448> - Enter the maximum number of users. This value must be between 1 and 448.
no_limit – Specify that the maximum user limit will be set to 448.
Restrictions
Example
To configure 802.1X number of users to be limited to 200:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config 802.1x max_users 200
Command: config 802.1x max_users 200
Success.
4-13 config 802.1x auth_parameter

Description
This command is used to configure the parameters that control the operation of the authenticator
associated with a port.
46

®
Format
config 802.1x auth_parameter ports [<portlist> | all] [default | {direction [both | in] |
port_control [force_unauth | auto | force_auth] | quiet_period <sec 0-65535> | tx_period
<sec 1-65535> | supp_timeout <sec 1-65535> | server_timeout <sec 1-65535> | max_req
<value 1-10> | reauth_period <sec 1-65535> | max_users [<value 1-448> | no_limit] |
enable_reauth [enable | disable]}(1)]
Parameters
default - Sets all parameter to be default value.
direction - (Optional) Sets the direction of access control.
both - For bidirectional access control.
in - For unidirectional access control.
port_control - (Optional) You can force a specific port to be unconditionally authorized or
unauthorized by setting the parameter of port_control to be force_authorized or
force_unauthorized. Besides, the controlled port will reflect the outcome of authentication if
port_control is auto.
force_unauth - Force a specific port to be unconditionally unauthorized.
auto - The controlled port will reflect the outcome of authentication.
force_auth - Force a specific port to be unconditionally authorized.
quiet_period - (Optional) It is the initialization value of the quietWhile timer. The default value is
60 seconds and can be any value among 0 to 65535.
<sec 0-65535> - Enter the quiet period value here. This value must be between 0 and 65535
seconds.
tx_period - (Optional) It is the initialization value of the transmit timer period. The default value is
30 seconds and can be any integer value among 1 to 65535.
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the tx period value here. This value must be between 1 and 65535
seconds.
supp_timeout - (Optional) The initialization value of the aWhile timer when timing out the
supplicant. Its default value is 30 seconds and can be any integer value among 1 to 65535.
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the supplicant timeout value here. This value must be between 1 and
65535 seconds.
server_timeout - (Optional) The initialization value of the aWhile timer when timing out the
authentication server. Its default value is 30 seconds and can be any integer value among 1 to
65535.
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the server timeout value here. This value must be between 1 and
65535 seconds.
max_req - (Optional) The maximum number of times that the authentication PAE state machine
will retransmit an EAP Request packet to the supplicant. Its default value is 2 and can be any
integer number among 1 to 10.
<value 1-10> - Enter the maximum required value here. This value must be between 1 and
10.
reauth_period - (Optional) It’s a nonzero number of seconds, which is used to be the re-
authentication timer. The default value is 3600.
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the re-authentication period value here. This value must be between 1
and 65535 seconds.
enable_reauth - (Optional) You can enable or disable the re-authentication mechanism for a
specific port.
enable - Specify to enable the re-authentication mechanism for a specific port.
disable - Specify to disable the re-authentication mechanism for a specific port.
max_users - (Optional) Specify per port maximum number of users. The default value is 16.
<value 1-448> - Enter the maximum users value here. This value must be between 1 and
448.
no_limit - Specify that no limit is enforced on the maximum users used.
47

®
Restrictions
Example
To configure the parameters that control the operation of the authenticator associated with a port:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config 802.1x auth_parameter ports 1:1-1:20 direction
both
Command: config 802.1x auth_parameter ports 1:1-1:20 direction both
Success.
4-14 config 802.1x auth_mode

Description
This command is used to configure 802.1X authentication mode.
Format
config 802.1x auth_mode [port_based | mac_based]
Parameters
port_based - Configure the authentication as port based mode.
mac_based - Configure the authentication as MAC based mode.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the authentication mode:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config 802.1x auth_mode port_based
Command: config 802.1x auth_mode port_based
Success.
4-15 config 802.1x init

Description
This command is used to initialize the authentication state machine of some or all ports.
48

®
Format
config 802.1x init [port_based ports [<portlist> | all] | mac_based ports [<portlist> | all]
Parameters
port_based ports- Configure the authentication as port based mode.
all - Specify that all ports will be used.
mac_based ports - Configure the authentication as MAC based mode.
mac_address - (Optional) Specify the MAC address of client.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address used here.
Restrictions
Example
To initialize the authentication state machine of some or all:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config 802.1x init port_based ports all
Command: config 802.1x init port_based ports all
Success.
4-16 config 802.1x reauth

Description
This command is used to re-authenticate the device connected to the port. During the re-
authentication period, the port status remains authorized until failed re-authentication.
Format
config 802.1x reauth [port_based ports [<portlist> | all] | mac_based ports [<portlist> | all]
Parameters
port_based ports - Configure the authentication as port based mode.
mac_based ports - Configure the authentication as MAC based mode.
mac_address - (Optional) Specify the MAC address of client.
49

®
Restrictions
Example
To re-authenticate the device connected to the port:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config 802.1x reauth port_based ports all
Command: config 802.1x reauth port_based ports all
Success.
4-17 create 802.1x guest_vlan

Description
This command is used to assign a static VLAN to be guest VLAN. The specific VLAN which
assigned to guest VLAN must be existed. The specific VLAN which assigned to guest VLAN can’t
be deleting.
Format
create 802.1x guest_vlan <vlan_name 32>
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Specify the VLAN to be guest VLAN. The VLAN name can be up to 32
characters long.
Restrictions
Example
To create a VLAN named “guestVLAN” as 802.1X guest VLAN:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create 802.1x guest_vlan guestVLAN
Command: create 802.1x guest_vlan guestVLAN
Success.
4-18 delete 802.1x guest_vlan

Description
This command is used to delete guest VLAN setting, but not delete the static VLAN. All ports
which enabled guest VLAN will remove to original VLAN after deleted guest VLAN.
50

®
Format
delete 802.1x guest_vlan <vlan_name 32>
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
Restrictions
Example
To delete the guest VLAN named “guestVLAN”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete 802.1x guest_vlan guestVLAN
Command: delete 802.1x guest_vlan guestVLAN
Success.
4-19 config 802.1x guest_vlan

Description
This command is used to configure guest VLAN setting. If the specific port state is changed from
enabled state to disable state, this port will move to its original VLAN.
Format
config 802.1x guest_vlan ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
ports - A range of ports enable or disable guest VLAN function.
all - Specify that all the port will be included in this configuration.
state - Specify the guest VLAN port state of the configured ports.
enable - Specify to join the guest VLAN.
disable - Specify to be removed from the guest VLAN.
Restrictions
Example
To enable from port 1:2 to 1:8 to configure 802.1X guest VLAN:
51

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config 802.1x guest_vlan ports 1:2-1:8 state enable

Command: config 802.1x guest_vlan ports 1:2-1:8 state enable
Warning, The ports are moved to Guest VLAN.
Success.
4-20 show 802.1x guest_vlan

Description
This command is used to show the information of guest VLANs.
Format
show 802.1x guest_vlan
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show 802.1X guest VLAN on the Switch:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show 802.1x guest_vlan
Command: show 802.1x guest_vlan
Guest VLAN Setting

-----------------------------------------------------------
Guest VLAN : guestVLAN
Enabled Guest VLAN Ports : 1:2-1:8
4-21 config radius add

Description
This command is used to add a new RADIUS server. The server with lower index has higher
authenticative priority.
52

®
Format
config radius add <server_index 1-3> [<server_ip> | <ipv6addr>] [key <password 32> |
encryption_key <password 56>] [default | {auth_port <udp_port_number 1-65535 > |
acct_port <udp_port_number 1-65535 > | timeout <sec 1-255> | retransmit<int 1-20>}]
Parameters
<server_index 1-3> - Enter the RADIUS server index. This value must be between 1 and 3.
<server_ip> - Enter the IP address of the RADIUS server here.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address of the RADIUS server here. (EI Mode Only)
key - The key pre-negotiated between switch and the RADIUS server. It is used to encrypt user’s
authentication data before being transmitted over internet. The maximum length of the key is
32.
<password 32> - Enter the password here. The password can be up to 32 characters long.
encryption_key - The key pre-negotiated between the Switch and the RADIUS server. It is used
to encrypt user’s authentication data before being transmitted over the Internet. The maximum
length of the key is 32.
<password 56> - The encrypted key string. The maximum length of the plain text key is 56
bytes. The encryption algorithm is based on DES.
default - Sets the authentication UDP port number to 1812 accounting UDP port number to 1813,
timeout to 5 seconds and retransmit to 2.
auth_port - (Optional) Specify the UDP port number which is used to transmit RADIUS
authentication data between the Switch and the RADIUS server. The range is 1 to 65535.
<udp_port_number 1-65535> - Enter the authentication port number here. This value must
be between 1 and 65535.
acct_port - (Optional) Specify the UDP port number which is used to transmit RADIUS
accounting statistics between the Switch and the RADIUS server. The range is 1 to 65535.
<udp_port_number 1-65535> - Enter the accounting port number here. This value must be
between 1 and 65535.
timeout - (Optional) The time in second for waiting server reply. The default value is 5 seconds.
<sec 1-255> - Enter the timeout value here. This value must be between 1 and 255 seconds.
retransmit - (Optional) The count for re-transmitting. The default value is 2.
<int 1-20> - Enter the re-transmit value here. This value must be between 1 and 20.
Restrictions
Example
To add a new RADIUS server:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config radius add 1 10.48.74.121 key dlink default
Command: config radius add 1 10.48.74.121 key dlink default
Success.
4-22 config radius delete

Description
This command is used to delete a RADIUS server.
53

®
Format
config radius delete <server_index 1-3>
Parameters
<server_index 1-3> - Specify to delete a RADIUS server.Enter the RADIUS server index.
Restrictions
Example
To delete a radius server:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config radius delete 1
Command: config radius delete 1
Success.
4-23 config radius

Description
This command is used to configure a RADIUS server.
Format
config radius <server_index 1-3> {ipaddress [<server_ip> | <ipv6addr>] | [key <password
32> | encryption_key <password 56>] | auth_port [<udp_port_number 1-65535 > | default] |
acct_port [<udp_port_number 1-65535> | default] | timeout [<sec 1-255> | default] |
retransmit [<int 1-20> | default]}
Parameters
<server_index 1-3> - Enter the RADIUS server index here. This value must be between 1 and 3.
ipaddress - (Optional) The IP address of the RADIUS server.
<server_ip> - Enter the RADIUS server IP address here.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the RADIUS server IPv6 address used here. (EI Mode Only)
key - (Optional) The key pre-negotiated between switch and RADIUS server. It is used to encrypt
user’s authentication data before being transmitted over internet. The maximum length of the
key is 32.
<password 32> - Enter the key here. The key can be up to 32 characters long.
encryption_key - The key pre-negotiated between the Switch and the RADIUS server. It is used
to encrypt user’s authentication data before being transmitted over the Internet. The maximum
length of the key is 32.
<password 56> - The encrypted key string. The maximum length of the plain text key is 56
bytes. The encryption algorithm is based on DES.
auth_port - (Optional) Specify the UDP port number which is used to transmit RADIUS
authentication data between the Switch and the RADIUS server. The range is 1 to 65535. The
default value is 1812.
54

®
<udp_port_number 1-65535> - Enter the authentication port number here. This value must
default - Specify that the default port number will be used.
acct_port - (Optional) Specify the UDP port number which is used to transmit RADIUS
accounting statistics between the Switch and the RADIUS server. The range is 1 to 65535.
The default value is 1813.
<udp_port_number 1-65535> - Enter the accounting port number here. This value must be
default - Specify that the default port number will be used.
timeout - (Optional) The time in second for waiting server reply. The default value is 5 seconds.
<sec 1-255> - Enter the timeout value here. This value must be between 1 and 255 seconds.
default - Specify that the default timeout value will be used.
retransmit - (Optional) The count for re-transmitting. The default value is 2.
default - Specify that the default re-transmit value will be used.
Restrictions
Example
To configure a radius server:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config radius 1 auth_port 60
Command: config radius 1 auth_port 60
Success.
4-24 show radius

Description
This command is used to display RADIUS server configurations.
Format
show radius
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display RADIUS server configurations:
55

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show radius

Command: show radius
Index 1
IP Address : 172.18.211.71
Auth-Port : 1812
Acct-Port : 1813
Timeout : 5 sec
Retransmit : 2
Key : 1234567
Index 2
IP Address : 172.18.211.108
Auth-Port : 1812
Acct-Port : 1813
Timeout : 5 sec
Retransmit : 2
Key : adfdslkfjefiefdkgjdassdwtgjk6y1w
Total Entries : 2
4-25 show auth_statistics

Description
This command is used to display information of authenticator statistics.
Format
show auth_statistics {ports <portlist>}
Parameters
ports - (Optional) Specify a range of ports to be displayed.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports that will be displayed here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display authenticator statistics information for port 1:
56

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show auth_statistics ports 1:1

Command: show auth_statistics ports 1:1
Port Number : 1:1
EapolFramesRx 0
EapolFramesTx 9
EapolStartFramesRx 0
EapolReqIdFramesTx 6
EapolLogoffFramesRx 0
EapolReqFramesTx 0
EapolRespIdFramesRx 0
EapolRespFramesRx 0
InvalidEapolFramesRx 0
EapLengthErrorFramesRx 0
LastEapolFrameVersion 0
LastEapolFrameSource 00-00-00-00-00-00
4-26 show auth_diagnostics

Description
This command is used to display information of authenticator diagnostics.
Format
show auth_diagnostics {ports <portlist>}
Parameters
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display authenticator diagnostics information for port 1:
57

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show auth_diagnostics ports 1:1

Command: show auth_diagnostics ports 1:1
Port Number : 1:1
EntersConnecting 11
EapLogoffsWhileConnecting 0
EntersAuthenticating 0
SuccessWhileAuthenticating 0
TimeoutsWhileAuthenticating 0
FailWhileAuthenticating 0
ReauthsWhileAuthenticating 0
EapStartsWhileAuthenticating 0
EapLogoffWhileAuthenticating 0
ReauthsWhileAuthenticated 0
EapStartsWhileAuthenticated 0
EapLogoffWhileAuthenticated 0
BackendResponses 0
BackendAccessChallenges 0
BackendOtherRequestsToSupplicant 0
BackendNonNakResponsesFromSupplicant 0
BackendAuthSuccesses 0
BackendAuthFails 0
4-27 show auth_session_statistics

Description
This command is used to display information of authenticator session statistics.
Format
show auth_session_statistics {ports <portlist>}
Parameters
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display authenticator session statistics information for port 1:
58

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show auth_session_statistics ports 1:1

Command: show auth_session_statistics ports 1:1
Port Number : 1:1
SessionOctetsRx 0
SessionOctetsTx 0
SessionFramesRx 0
SessionFramesTx 0
SessionId
SessionAuthenticMethod Remote Authentication Server
SessionTime 0
SessionTerminateCause SupplicantLogoff
SessionUserName
4-28 show auth_client

Description
This command is used to display information of RADIUS authentication client.
Format
show auth_client
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display authentication client information:
59

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show auth_client
Command: show auth_client
radiusAuthClient ==>
radiusAuthClientInvalidServerAddresses 0
radiusAuthClientIdentifier D-Link
radiusAuthServerEntry ==>
radiusAuthServerIndex :3
radiusAuthServerAddress 0.0.0.0
radiusAuthClientServerPortNumber 0
radiusAuthClientRoundTripTime 0
radiusAuthClientAccessRequests 0
radiusAuthClientAccessRetransmissions 0
radiusAuthClientAccessAccepts 0
radiusAuthClientAccessRejects 0
radiusAuthClientAccessChallenges 0
radiusAuthClientMalformedAccessResponses 0
radiusAuthClientBadAuthenticators 0
radiusAuthClientPendingRequests 0
radiusAuthClientTimeouts 0
radiusAuthClientUnknownTypes 0
radiusAuthClientPacketsDropped 0
4-29 show acct_client

Description
This command is used to display information of RADIUS accounting client.
Format
show acct_client
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display information of RADIUS accounting client:
60

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show acct_client
Command: show acct_client
radiusAcctClient ==>
radiusAcctClientInvalidServerAddresses 0
radiusAcctClientIdentifier D-Link
radiusAuthServerEntry ==>
radiusAccServerIndex : 1
radiusAccServerAddress 0.0.0.0
radiusAccClientServerPortNumber 0
radiusAccClientRoundTripTime 0
radiusAccClientRequests 0
radiusAccClientRetransmissions 0
radiusAccClientResponses 0
radiusAccClientMalformedResponses 0
radiusAccClientBadAuthenticators 0
radiusAccClientPendingRequests 0
radiusAccClientTimeouts 0
radiusAccClientUnknownTypes 0
radiusAccClientPacketsDropped 0
61

®
Chapter 5 Access Authentication

Control Command List
enable authen_policy_encryption
disable authen_policy_encryption
enable password encryption
disable password encryption
enable authen_policy
disable authen_policy
show authen_policy
create authen_login method_list_name <string 15>
config authen_login [default | method_list_name <string 15>] method {tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+
| radius | server_group <string 15> | local | none}
delete authen_login method_list_name <string 15>
show authen_login [default | method_list_name <string 15> | all]
create authen_enable method_list_name <string 15>
config authen_enable [default | method_list_name <string 15>] method {tacacs | xtacacs |
tacacs+ | radius | server_group <string 15> | local _enable | none}
delete authen_enable method_list_name <string 15>
show authen_enable [default | method_list_name <string 15> | all]
config authen application [console | telnet | ssh | http | all] [login | enable] [default |
method_list_name <string 15>]
show authen application
create authen server_group <string 15>
config authen server_group [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius | <string 15>] [add | delete]
server_host <ipaddr> protocol [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius]
delete authen server_group <string 15>
show authen server_group {<string 15>}
create authen server_host <ipaddr> protocol [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius] {port <int 1-
65535> | [key [<key_string 254> | none] | encryption_key <key_string 344>] | timeout <int 1-
255> | retransmit <int 1-20>}
config authen server_host <ipaddr> protocol [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius] {port <int 1-
65535> | [key [<key_string 254> | none] | encryption_key <key_string 344>] | timeout <int 1-
255> | retransmit <int 1-20>}
delete authen server_host <ipaddr> protocol [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius]
show authen server_host
config authen parameter response_timeout <int 0-255>
config authen parameter attempt <int 1-255>
show authen parameter
enable admin
config admin local_enable {encrypt [plain_text | sha_1] <password>}
create aaa server_group <string 15>
config aaa server_group [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius | group_name <string 15>] [add | de
lete] server_host <ipaddr> protocol [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+| radius]
delete aaa server_group <string 15>
show aaa server_group {<string 15>}
create accounting method_list_name <string 15>
config accounting [default | method_list_name <string 15>] method {tacacs+ | radius |
server_group <string 15> | none}
delete accounting method_list_name <string 15>
show accounting [default | method_list_name <string 15> | all]
config accounting service command {administrator | operator | power_user | user}
[method_list_name <string> | none]
62

®
create radius server_host <ipaddr> {auth_port <int 1-65535> | acct_port <int 1-65535> | [key
[<key_string 254> | none] | encryption_key <key_string 344>] | timeout <int 1-255> |
retransmit <int 1-20>}
config radius server_host <ipaddr> {auth_port <int 1-65535> | acct_port <int 1-65535> | [key
delete aaa server_host <ipaddr> protocol [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+| radius]
show aaa server_host
create tacacs server_host <ipaddr> {port <int 1-65535> | timeout <int 1-255> | retransmit <int 1-
20>}
config tacacs server_host <ipaddr> {port <int 1-65535> | timeout <int 1-255> | retransmit <int 1-
20>}
create xtacacs server_host <ipaddr> {port <int 1-65535> | timeout <int 1-255> | retransmit <int 1-
20>}
config xtacacs server_host <ipaddr> {port <int 1-65535> | timeout <int 1-255> | retransmit <int 1-
20>}
create tacacs+ server_host <ipaddr> {port <int 1-65535> | [key [<key_string 254> | none] |
encryption_key <key_string 344>] | timeout <int 1-255>}
config tacacs+ server_host <ipaddr> {port <int 1-65535> | [key [<key_string 254> | none] |
enable aaa_server_password_encryption
disable aaa_server_password_encryption
show aaa
config accounting service [network | shell | system] state [enable {[radius_only |
method_list_name <string 15> | default_method_list]} | disable]
show accounting service
5-1 enable authen_policy_encryption

Description
This command is used to enable the authentication policy encryption. When enabled, TACACS+
and RADIUS key will be in the encrypted form.
Format
enable authen_policy_encryption
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Only Administrator-level users can issue this command.
Example
To enable the authentication policy encryption:
63

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable authen_policy_encryption
Command: enable authen_policy_encryption
Success.
5-2 disable authen_policy_encryption

Description
This command is used to disable the authentication policy encryption. When disabled, TACACS+
and RADIUS key will be in the plain text form.
Format
disable authen_policy_encryption
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable the authentication policy encryption:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable authen_policy_encryption
Command: disable authen_policy_encryption
Success.
5-3 enable password encryption

Description
This command is used to enable password encryption. The user account configuration information
will be stored in the configuration file, and can be applied to the system later.
If the password encryption is enabled, the password will be in encrypted form.
Format
enable password encryption
64

®
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the password encryption:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable password encryption
Command: enable password encryption
Success.
5-4 disable password encryption

Description
This command is used to disable password encryption. The user account configuration information
will be stored in the configuration file, and can be applied to the system later.
When password encryption is disabled, if the user specifies the password in plain text form, the
password will be in plan text form. However, if the user specifies the password in encrypted form,
or if the password has been converted to encrypted form by the last enable password encryption
command, the password will still be in the encrypted form. It can not be reverted to the plaintext.
Format
disable password encryption
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable the password encryption:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable password encryption
Command: disable password encryption
Success.
65

®
5-5 enable authen_policy

Description
This command is used to enable system access authentication policy.
Enable system access authentication policy. When authentication is enabled, the device will adopt
the login authentication method list to authenticate the user for login, and adopt the enable
authentication method list to authenticate the enable password for promoting the user‘s privilege to
Admin level.
Format
enable authen_policy
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable system access authentication policy:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable authen_policy
Command: enable authen_policy
Success.
5-6 disable authen_policy

Description
This command is used to disable system access authentication policy.
Disable system access authentication policy. When authentication is disabled, the device will
adopt the local user account database to authenticate the user for login, and adopt the local
enable password to authenticate the enable password for promoting the user‘s privilege to Admin
level.
Format
disable authen_policy
Parameters
None.
66

®
Restrictions
Example
To disable system access authentication policy:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable authen_policy
Command: disable authen_policy
Success.
5-7 show authen_policy

Description
This command is used to display that system access authentication policy is enabled or disabled.
Format
show authen_policy
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To display system access authentication policy:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show authen_policy
Command: show authen_policy
Authentication Policy : Enabled

Authentication Policy Encryption: Enabled
5-8 create authen_login

Description
This command is used to create a user-defined method list of authentication methods for user
login. The maximum supported number of the login method lists is 8.
67

®
Format
create authen_login method_list_name <string 15>
Parameters
<string 15> - The user-defined method list name. This value can be up to 15 characters long.
Restrictions
Example
To create a user-defined method list for user login:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create authen_login method_list_name login_list_1
Command: create authen_login method_list_name login_list_1
Success.
5-9 config authen_login

Description
Configure a user-defined or default method list of authentication methods for user login. The
sequence of methods will effect the altercation result. For example, if the sequence is tacacs+ first,
then tacacs and local, when user trys to login, the authentication request will be sent to the first
server host in tacacs+ built-in server group. If the first server host in tacacs+ group is missing, the
authentication request will be sent to the second server host in tacacs+ group, and so on. If all
server hosts in tacacs+ group are missing, the authentication request will be sent to the first server
host in tacacs group…If all server hosts in tacacs group are missing, the local account database in
the device is used to authenticate this user. When user logins the device successfully while using
methods like tacacs/xtacacs/tacacs+/radius built-in or user-defined server groups or none, the
“user” privilege level is assigned only. If user wants to get admin privilege level, user must use the
“enable admin” command to promote his privilege level. But when local method is used, the
privilege level will depend on this account privilege level stored in the local device.
Format
config authen_login [default | method_list_name <string 15>] method {tacacs | xtacacs |
tacacs+ | radius | server_group <string 15> | local | none}
Parameters
default - The default method list of authentication methods.
method_list_name - The user-defined method list of authentication methods.
<string 15> - Enter the method list name here. This value can be up to 15 characters long.
method - Specify the authentication method used.
68

®
tacacs - (Optional) Authentication by the built-in server group “tacacs”.

xtacacs - (Optional) Authentication by the built-in server group “xtacacs”.
tacacs+ - (Optional) Authentication by the built-in server group “tacacs+”.
radius - (Optional) Authentication by the built-in server group “radius”.
server_group - (Optional) Authentication by the user-defined server group.
<string 15> - Enter the server group value here. This value can be up 15 characters long.
local - (Optional) Authentication by local user account database in device.
none - (Optional) No authentication.
Restrictions
Example
To configure a user-defined method list for user login:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config authen_login method_list_name login_list_1 method
tacacs+ tacacs local
Command: config authen_login method_list_name login_list_1 method tacacs+
tacacs local
Success.
5-10 delete authen_login

Description
This command is used to delete a user-defined method list of authentication methods for user login.
Format
delete authen_login method_list_name <string 15>
Parameters
Restrictions
Example
To delete a user-defined method list for user login:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete authen_login method_list_name login_list_1
Command: delete authen_login method_list_name login_list_1
Success.
69

®
5-11 show authen_login

Description
This command is used to display the method list of authentication methods for user login.
Format
show authen_login [default | method_list_name <string 15> | all]
Parameters
default - Display default user-defined method list for user login.
method_list_name - Display the specific user-defined method list for user login.
all - Display all method lists for user login.
Restrictions
Example
To display a user-defined method list for user login:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show authen_login method_list_name login_list_1
Command: show authen_login method_list_name login_list_1
Method List Name Priority Method Name Comment

---------------- -------- --------------- ------------------
login_list_1 1 tacacs+ Built-in Group
2 tacacs Built-in Group
3 mix_1 User-defined Group
4 local Keyword
5-12 create authen_enable

Description
This command is used to create a user-defined method list of authentication methods for
promoting user's privilege to Admin level.
Format
create authen_enable method_list_name <string 15>
Parameters
70

®
Restrictions
Example
To create a user-defined method list for promoting user's privilege to Admin level:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create authen_enable method_list_name enable_list_1
Command: create authen_enable method_list_name enable_list_1
Success.
5-13 config authen_enable

Description
This command is used to configure a user-defined or default method list of authentication methods
for promoting user's privilege to Admin level. The sequence of methods will affect the altercation
result. For example, if the sequence is tacacs+ first, then tacacs and local_enable, when user try
to promote user's privilege to Admin level, the authentication request will be sent to the first server
host in tacacs+ built-in server group. If the first server host in tacacs+ group is missing, the
authentication request will be sent to the second server host in tacacs+ group, and so on. If all
server hosts in tacacs+ group are missing, the authentication request will be sent to the first server
host in tacacs group…If all server hosts in tacacs group are missing, the local enable password in
the device is used to authenticate this user’s password.
Format
config authen_enable [default | method_list_name <string 15>] method {tacacs | xtacacs |
tacacs+ | radius | server_group <string 15> | local _enable | none}
Parameters
default - The default method list of authentication methods.
method_list_name - The user-defined method list of authentication methods.
<string 15> Enter the method list name here. This value can be up to 15 characters long.
method - Specify the authentication method used.
tacacs - (Optional) Authentication by the built-in server group “tacacs”.
xtacacs - (Optional) Authentication by the built-in server group “xtacacs”.
tacacs+ - (Optional) Authentication by the built-in server group “tacacs+”.
radius - (Optional) Authentication by the built-in server group “radius”.
server_group - (Optional) Authentication by the user-defined server group.
<string 15> - Enter the server group name here. This value can be up to 15 characters
long.
local_enable - (Optional) Authentication by local enable password in device.
none - (Optional) No authentication.
Restrictions
71

®
Example
To configure a user-defined method list for promoting user's privilege to Admin level:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config authen_enable method_list_name enable_list_1 method
tacacs+ tacacs local_enable
Command: config authen_enable method_list_name enable_list_1 method tacacs+
tacacs local_enable
Success.
5-14 delete authen_enable

Description
This command is used to delete a user-defined method list of authentication methods for
promoting user's privilege to Admin level.
Format
delete authen_enable method_list_name <string 15>
Parameters
Restrictions
Example
To delete a user-defined method list for promoting user's privilege to Admin level:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete authen_enable method_list_name enable_list_1
Command: delete authen_enable method_list_name enable_list_1
Success.
5-15 show authen_enable

Description
This command is used to display the method list of authentication methods for promoting user's
privilege to Admin level.
72

®
Format
show authen_enable [default | method_list_name <string 15> | all]
Parameters
default - Display default user-defined method list for promoting user's privilege to Admin level.
method_list_name - Display the specific user-defined method list for promoting user's privilege
to Admin level.
all - Display all method lists for promoting user's privilege to Admin level.
Restrictions
Example
To display all method lists for promoting user's privilege to Admin level:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show authen_enable method_list_name enable_list_1
Command: show authen_enable method_list_name enable_list_1

---------------- -------- --------------- ------------------
enable_list_1 1 local_enable Keyword
5-16 config authen application

Description
This command is used to configure login or enable method list for all or the specified application.
Format
config authen application [console | telnet | ssh | http | all] [login | enable] [default |
method_list_name <string 15>]
Parameters
console - Application: console.
telnet - Application: telnet.
ssh - Application: SSH.
http - Application: web.
all - Application: console, telnet, SSH, and web.
login - Select the method list of authentication methods for user login.
enable - Select the method list of authentication methods for promoting user's privilege to Admin
level.
default - Default method list.
method_list_name - The user-defined method list name.
<string> - Enter the method list name here. This value can be up to 15 characters long.
73

®
Restrictions
Example
To configure the login method list for telnet:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config authen application telnet login method_list_name
login_list_1
Command: config authen application telnet login method_list_name login_list_1
Success.
5-17 show authen application

Description
This command is used to display the login/enable method list for all applications.
Format
show authen application
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To display the login/enable method list for all applications:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show authen application
Command: show authen application
Application Login Method List Enable Method List

----------- ----------------- ------------------
Console default default
Telnet login_list_1 default
SSH default default
HTTP default default
74

®
5-18 create authen server_group

Description
This command is used to create a user-defined authentication server group. The maximum
supported number of server groups including built-in server groups is 8. Each group consists of 8
server hosts as maximum.
Format
create authen server_group <string 15>
Parameters
<string 15> - The user-defined server group name. This value can be up to 15 characters long.
Restrictions
Example
To create a user-defined authentication server group:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create authen server_group mix_1
Command: create authen server_group mix_1
Success.
5-19 config authen server_group

Description
This command is used to add or remove an authentication server host to or from the specified
server group. Built-in server group “tacacs”, “xtacacs”, “tacacs+”, “radius” accepts the server host
with the same protocol only, but user-defined server group can accept server hosts with different
protocols.
Format
config authen server_group [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius | <string 15>] [add | delete]
server_host <ipaddr> protocol [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius]
Parameters
server_group - User-defined server group.
tacacs - Built-in server group “tacacs”.
xtacacs - Built-in server group “xtacacs”.
tacacs+ - Built-in server group “tacacs+”.
radius - Built-in server group “radius”.
<string 15> - Enter the server group name here. This value can be up to 15 characters long.
75

®
add - Add a server host to a server group.

delete - Remove a server host from a server group.
server_host - Server host’s IP address.
<ipaddr> - Enter the server host IP address here.
protocol - Specify the authentication protocol used.
tacacs - Specify that the TACACS authentication protocol will be used.
xtacacs - Specify that the XTACACS authentication protocol will be used.
tacacs+ - Specify that the TACACS+ authentication protocol will be used.
radius - Specify that the radius authentication protocol will be used.
Restrictions
Example
To add an authentication server host to an server group:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config authen server_group mix_1 add server_host
10.1.1.222 protocol tacacs+
Command: config authen server_group mix_1 add server_host 10.1.1.222 protocol
tacacs+
Success.
5-20 delete authen server_group

Description
This command is used to delete a user-defined authentication server group.
Format
delete authen server_group <string 15>
Parameters
<string 15> - The user-defined server group name. This value can be up to 15 characters long.
Restrictions
Example
To delete a user-defined authentication server group:
76

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete authen server_group mix_1

Command: delete authen server_group mix_1
Success.
5-21 show authen server_group

Description
This command is used to display the authentication server groups.
Format
show authen server_group {<string 15>}
Parameters
<string 15> - (Optional) The built-in or user-defined server group name. This value can be up to
15 characters long.
Restrictions
Example
To display all authentication server groups:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show authen server_group
Command: show authen server_group
Group Name IP Address Protocol

--------------- --------------- --------
mix_1 10.1.1.222 TACACS+
10.1.1.223 TACACS
radius 10.1.1.224 RADIUS
tacacs 10.1.1.225 TACACS
tacacs+ 10.1.1.226 TACACS+
xtacacs 10.1.1.227 XTACACS
Total Entries : 5
5-22 create authen server_host

Description
This command is used to create an authentication server host. When an authentication server host
is created, IP address and protocol are the index. That means over 1 authentication protocol
77

®
services can be run on the same physical host. The maximum supported number of server hosts is
16.
Format
create authen server_host <ipaddr> protocol [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius] {port <int
1-65535> | [key [<key_string 254> | none] | encryption_key <key_string 344>] | timeout <int
1-255> | retransmit <int 1-20>}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Enter the server host IP address.
protocol - Specify the host's authentication protocol.
tacacs - Server host’s authentication protocol.
xtacacs - Server host’s authentication protocol.
tacacs+ - Server host’s authentication protocol.
radius - Server host’s authentication protocol.
port - (Optional) The port number of authentication protocol for server host. Default value for
TACACS/XTACACS/TACACS+ is 49. Default value for RADIUS is 1812.
<int 1-65535> - Enter the authentication protocol port number here. This value must be
key - (Optional) The key for TACACS+ and RADIUS authentication. If the value is null, no
encryption will apply. This value is meaningless for TACACS and XTACACS.
<key_string 254> - Enter the TACACS+ or the RADIUS key here. This key can be up to 254
characters long.
none - No encryption for TACACS+ and RADIUS authentication. This value is meaningless
for TACACS and XTACACS.
encryption_key - (Optional) Specify the encryption key string for TACACS+ and RADIUS
authentication.
<key_string 344> - Enter the encryption key string.
timeout - (Optional) The time in second for waiting server reply. Default value is 5 seconds.
<int 1-255> - Enter the timeout value here. This value must be between 1 and 255 seconds.
retransmit - (Optional) The count for re-transmit. This value is meaningless for TACACS+.
Default value is 2.
Restrictions
Example
To create a TACACS+ authentication server host, its listening port number is 15555 and timeout
value is 10 seconds:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create authen server_host 10.1.1.222 protocol tacacs+ port
15555 timeout 10
Command: create authen server_host 10.1.1.222 protocol tacacs+ port 15555
timeout 10
Key is empty for TACACS+ or RADIUS.

Success.
78

®
5-23 config authen server_host

Description
This command is used to configure an authentication server host.
Format
config authen server_host <ipaddr> protocol [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius] {port <int
1-65535> | [key [<key_string 254> | none] | encryption_key <key_string 344>] | timeout <int
1-255> | retransmit <int 1-20>}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Enter the server host IP address.
protocol - Specify the server host's authentication protocol.
port - (Optional) The port number of authentication protocol for server host. Default value for
TACACS/XTACACS/TACACS+ is 49. Default value for RADIUS is 1812.
<int 1-65535> - Enter the port number here. This value must be between 1 and 65535.
key - (Optional) The key for TACACS+ and RADIUS authentication. If the value is null, no
encryption will apply. This value is meaningless for TACACS and XTACACS.
<key_string 254> - Enter the TACACS+ key here. This value can be up to 254 characters
long.
none - No encryption for TACACS+ and RADIUS authentication. This value is meaningless
for TACACS and XTACACS.
encryption_key - (Optional) Specify the encryption key string for TACACS+ and RADIUS
authentication.
<key_string 344> - Enter the encryption key string.
timeout - (Optional) The time in second for waiting server reply. Default value is 5 seconds.
<int 1-255> - Enter the timeout value here. This value must be between 1 and 255 seconds.
retransmit - (Optional) The count for re-transmit. This value is meaningless for TACACS+.
Default value is 2.
Restrictions
Example
To configure a TACACS+ authentication server host’s key value:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config authen server_host 10.1.1.222 protocol tacacs+ key
"This is a secret."
Command: config authen server_host 10.1.1.222 protocol tacacs+ key "This is a
secret."
Success.
79

®
5-24 delete authen server_host

Description
This command is used to delete an authentication server host.
Format
delete authen server_host <ipaddr> protocol [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius]
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Enter the server host's IP address.
protocol - Specify that server host's authentication protocol.
Restrictions
Example
To delete an authentication server host:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete authen server_host 10.1.1.222 protocol tacacs+
Command: delete authen server_host 10.1.1.222 protocol tacacs+
Success.
5-25 show authen server_host

Description
This command is used to display the authentication server hosts.
Format
show authen server_host
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
80

®
Example
To display all authentication server hosts:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show authen server_host
Command: show authen server_host
IP Address Protocol Port Timeout Retransmit Key

-------------------- -------- ----- ------- ---------- -----------------------
10.1.1.222 TACACS+ 15555 10 - ******
Total Entries : 1
5-26 config authen parameter response_timeout

Description
This command is used to configure the amount of time waiting or user input on console, telnet,
SSH application.
Format
config authen parameter response_timeout <int 0-255>
Parameters
<int 0-255> - The amount of time for user input on console or telnet or SSH. 0 means there is no
time out. This value must be between 0 and 255. Default value is 30 seconds.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the amount of time waiting or user input to be 60 seconds:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config authen parameter response_timeout 60
Command: config authen parameter response_timeout 60
Success.
5-27 config authen parameter attempt

Description
This command is used to configure the maximum attempts for user's trying to login or promote the
privilege on console, telnet, SSH application.
81

®
Format
config authen parameter attempt <int 1-255>
Parameters
<int 1-255> - The amount of attempts for user's trying to login or promote the privilege on console
or telnet or SSH. This value must be between 1 and 255. Default value is 3.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the maximum attempts for user's trying to login or promote the privilege to be 9:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config authen parameter attempt 9
Command: config authen parameter attempt 9
Success.
5-28 show authen parameter

Description
This command is used to display the parameters of authentication.
Format
show authen parameter
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To display the parameters of authentication:
82

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show authen parameter

Command: show authen parameter
Response Timeout : 60 seconds

User Attempts : 9
5-29 enable admin

Description
This command is used to enter the administrator level privilege. Promote the "user" privilege level
to "admin" level. When the user enters this command, the authentication method tacacs, xtacacs,
tacacs+, user-defined server groups, local_enable or none will be used to authenticate the user.
Because TACACS, XTACACS and RADIUS don't support "enable" function in itself, if user wants
to use either one of these 3 protocols to do enable authentication, user must create a special
account on the server host first, which has a username "enable" and then configure its password
as the enable password to support "enable" function.
This command can not be used when authentication policy is disabled.
Format
enable admin
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To enable administrator lever privilege:
DGS-3120-24TC:oper#enable admin
Command: enable admin
PassWord:*****
Success.
5-30 config admin local_enable

Description
This command is used to config the local enable password of administrator level privilege. When
the user chooses the “local_enable” method to promote the privilege level, the enable password of
local device is needed. When the password information is not specified in the command, the
83

®
system will prompt the user to input the password interactively. For this case, the user can only
input the plain text password. If the password is present in the command, the user can select to
input the password in the plain text form or in the encrypted form. The encryption algorithm is
based on SHA-I.
Format
config admin local_enable {encrypt [plain_text | sha_1] <password>}
Parameters
encrypt - (Optional) Specify the password form.
plain_text - Specify the password in plain text form.
sha_1 - Specify the password in SHA-1 encrypted form.
<password> - (Optional) The password for promoting the privilege level. The length for a
password in plain-text form and SHA-1 encrypted form are different.
plain-text: Passwords can be from a minimum of 0 to a maximum of 15 characters.
SHA-1: The length of Encrypted passwords is fixed to 35 bytes longand the password is case-
sensitive.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the administrator password:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config admin local_enable
Command: config admin local_enable
Enter the old password:

Enter the case-sensitive new password:*****
Enter the new password again for confirmation:*****
Success.
5-31 create aaa server_group

Description
This command is used to create a group of user-defined AAA servers. The maximum number of
supported server groups, including the built-in server groups, is 8. Each group can have a
maximum of 8 server hosts.
Format
create aaa server_group <string 15>
84

®
Parameters
<string 15> - Specify the user-defined server group name.
Restrictions
Only Administrator level can issue this command.
Example
To create a user-defined AAA server group called “mix_1”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create aaa server_group mix_1
Command: create aaa server_group mix_1
Success.
5-32 config aaa server_group

Description
This command is used to add or remove an AAA server host to or from the specified server group.
The built-in TACACS, XTACACS, TACACS+, and RADIUS server groups only accept server hosts
with the same protocol, but a user-defined server group can accept server hosts with different
protocols.
Format
config aaa server_group [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+ | radius | group_name <string 15>] [add
| delete] server_host <ipaddr> protocol [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+| radius]
Parameters
tacacs - Specify the built-in TACACS server group.
xtacacs - Specify the built-in XTACACS server group.
tacacs+ - Specify the built-in TACACS+ server group.
radius - Specify the built-in RADIUS server group.
group_name - Specify a user-defined server group.
<string 15> - Enter the name of the server group.
add - Add a server host to the server group.
delete - Remove a server host to the server group.
server_host - Specify the server host.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address of the server host.
protocol - Specify the server host protocol.
tacacs - Specify the server host using TACACS protocol.
xtacacs - Specify the server host using XTACACS protocol.
tacacs+ - Specify the server host using TACACS+ protocol.
radius - Specify the server host using RADIUS protocol.
Restrictions
85

®
Example
To add an AAA server host with an IP address of 10.1.1.222 to server group “mix_1”, specifying
the TACACS+ protocol:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config aaa server_group group_name mix_1 add server_host
10.1.1.222 protocol tacacs+
Command: config aaa server_group group_name mix_1 add server_host 10.1.1.222
protocol tacacs+
Success.
5-33 delete aaa server_group

Description
This command is used to delete a group of user-defined AAA servers.
Format
delete aaa server_group <string 15>
Parameters
<string 15> - Specify the server group name to be deleted.
Restrictions
Example
To delete a user-defined AAA server group called “mix_1”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete aaa server_group mix_1
Command: delete aaa server_group mix_1
Success.
5-34 show aaa server_group

Description
This command is used to display the groups of AAA servers groups.
Format
show aaa server_group {<string 15>}
86

®
Parameters
<string 15> - (Optional) Specify the built-in or user-defined server group name.
Restrictions
Example
To display all AAA server groups:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show aaa server_group
Command: show aaa server_group
Group Name IP Address Protocol

--------------- --------------------------------------- --------
mix_1 --------------------------------------- --------
radius --------------------------------------- --------
tacacs --------------------------------------- --------
tacacs+ --------------------------------------- --------
xtacacs --------------------------------------- --------
Total Entries : 5
5-35 create accounting method_list_name

Description
This command is used to create a user-defined list of accounting methods for accounting services
on the Switch. The maximum supported number of accounting method lists is 8.
Format
create accounting method_list_name <string 15>
Parameters
<string 15> - Specify the built-in or user-defined method list.
Restrictions
87

®
Example
To a user-defined accounting method list called “shell_acct”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create accounting method_list_name shell_acct
Command: create accounting method_list_name shell_acct
Success.
5-36 config accounting

Description
This command is used to a user-defined or default method list of accounting methods.
Format
config accounting [default | method_list_name <string 15>] method {tacacs+ | radius |
server_group <string 15> | none}
Parameters
default - Specify the default method list of accounting methods.
method_list_name - Specify the user-defined method list of accounting methods.
<string 15> - Enter the name of the method list.
method - Specify the protocol.
tacacs+ - Specify the built-in TACACS+ server group.
radius – Specify the built-in RADIUS server group.
server_group - Specify the user-defined server group. If the group contains TACACS and
XTACACS server, it will be skipped in accounting.
<string 15> - Enter the name of server group.
none - Specify no accounting.
Restrictions
Example
To configure a user-defined method list called “shell_acct”, that specifies a sequence of the built-in
TACACS+ server group, followed by the RADIUS server group for accounting service on the
Switch:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config accounting method_list_name shell_acct method
tacacs+ radius
Command: config accounting method_list_name shell_acct method tacacs+ radius
Success.
88

®
5-37 delete accounting method_list_name

Description
This command is used to delete a user-defined method list of accounting methods.
Format
delete accounting method_list_name <string 15>
Parameters
<string 15> - Specify the built-in or user-defined method list.
Restrictions
Example
To delete the user-defined accounting method list called “shell_acct” from switch:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete accounting method_list_name shell_acct
Command: delete accounting method_list_name shell_acct
Success.
5-38 show accounting

Description
This command is used to display the list of accounting methods on the Switch.
Format
show accounting [default | method_list_name <string 15> | all]
Parameters
default - Display the user-defined list of default accounting methods.
method_list_name - Specify the user-defined list of specific accounting methods.
<string 15> - Enter the name of the method list.
all - Display all accounting method lists on the Switch.
Restrictions
89

®
Example
To display the user-defined accounting method list called “shell_acct”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show accounting method_list_name shell_acct
Command: show accounting method_list_name shell_acct

---------------- -------- --------------- ------------------
shell_acct 1 tacacs+ Built-in Group
2 radius Built-in Group
5-39 config accounting service command

Description
This command is used to the state of the specified accounting service.
Format
config accounting service command {administrator | operator | power_user | user}
[method_list_name <string> | none]
Parameters
administrator - Accounting service for all administrator level commands.
operator - Accounting service for all operator level commands.
power_user - Accounting service for all power-user level commands.
user - Accounting service for all user level commands.
method_list_name - Specify accounting service by the AAA user-defined method list specified
by the “create accounting method_list_name <string 15>” command.
<string> - Enter the name of the method list.
none - Disable AAA command accounting services by specified command level.
Restrictions
Example
To enable AAA accounting methodlist “shell_acct” to configure accounting shell state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config accounting service shell state enable
method_list_name shell_acct
Command: config accounting service shell state enable method_list_name
shell_acct
Success.
90

®
5-40 create radius server_host

Description
This command is used to create an RADIUS server host.
Format
create radius server_host <ipaddr> {auth_port <int 1-65535> | acct_port <int 1-65535> | [key
Parameters
auth_port - (Optional) Specify the port of the RADIUS authentication.
<int 1-65535> - Enter the value between 1 and 65535. The default value is 1812.
acct_port - (Optional) Specify the port of the RAIDUS accounting.
key - (Optional) Specify the key for RADIUS.
<key_string 254> - Enter the plain text key string for RADIUS.
none - No encryption for RADIUS.
encryption_key - (Optional) The encrypted form key string for RADIUS. The encryption
algorithm is based on DES.
<key_string 344> - Etner the string with maximum 344 characters.
timeout - (Optional) Specify the time in second to wait for the server to reply.
retransmit - (Optional) Specify the count for re-transmissions.
Restrictions
Example
To create an RADIUS server host:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create radius server_host 10.1.1.222 auth_port 15555
timeout 10
Command: create radius server_host 10.1.1.222 auth_port 15555 timeout 10
Key is empty for TACACS+ or RADIUS.
Success.
5-41 config radius server_host

Description
This command is used to
91

®
Format
config radius server_host <ipaddr> {auth_port <int 1-65535> | acct_port <int 1-65535> | [key
Parameters
auth_port - (Optional) Specify the port of the RADIUS authentication.
acct_port - (Optional) Specify the port of the RAIDUS accounting.
key - (Optional) Specify the key for RADIUS.
<key_string 254> - Enter the plain text key string for RADIUS.
encryption_key - (Optional) The encrypted form key string for RADIUS. The encryption
Restrictions
Example
To configure the RADIUS server host:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config radius server_host 10.1.1.222 key "abc123"
Command: config radius server_host 10.1.1.222 key "abc123"
Success.
5-42 delete aaa server_host

Description
This command is used to delete an AAA server host.
Format
delete aaa server_host <ipaddr> protocol [tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+| radius]
Parameters
protocol – Specify the protocol.
tacacs – Specify TACACS server host.
92

®
xtacacs - Specify XTACACS server host.

tacacs+ - Specify TACACS+ server host.
radius - Specify RADIUS server host.
Restrictions
Example
To tacacs | xtacacs | tacacs+| delete an AAA server host, with an IP address of 10.1.1.222, that is
running the TACACS+ protocol:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete aaa server_host 10.1.1.222 protocol tacacs+
Command: delete aaa server_host 10.1.1.222 protocol tacacs+
Success.
5-43 show aaa server_host

Description
This command is used to display the AAA server hosts.
Format
show aaa server_host
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To display all AAA server hosts:
93

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show aaa server_host

Command: show aaa server_host
IP Address Protocl Port

Acct Time Retry Key
Port out
-------------------- ------- ----- ----- ---- ----- ---------------------------
10.1.1.222 RADIUS 15555 1813 10 2 ******
Total Entries : 1
5-44 create tacacs server_host

Description
This command is used to create a TACACS server host.
Format
create tacacs server_host <ipaddr> {port <int 1-65535> | timeout <int 1-255> | retransmit
<int 1-20>}
Parameters
port - (Optional) The port number of the TACACS server host.
Restrictions
Example
To create a TACACS server host:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create tacacs server_host 10.1.1.223 port 15555 timeout 10
Command: create tacacs server_host 10.1.1.223 port 15555 timeout 10
Success.
94

®
5-45 config tacacs server_host

Description
This command is used to configure a TACACS server host.
Format
config tacacs server_host <ipaddr> {port <int 1-65535> | timeout <int 1-255> | retransmit
<int 1-20>}
Parameters
port - (Optional) The port number of the TACACS server host.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the TACACS server host:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config tacacs server_host 10.1.1.223 retransmit 5
Command: config tacacs server_host 10.1.1.223 retransmit 5
Key is meaningless for TACACS and XTACACS.
Success.
5-46 create xtacacs server_host

Description
Format
create xtacacs server_host <ipaddr> {port <int 1-65535> | timeout <int 1-255> | retransmit
<int 1-20>}
Parameters
port - (Optional) The port number of the XTACACS server host.
95

®
Restrictions
Example
To create a XTACACS server host:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create xtacacs server_host 10.1.1.224 port 15555 timeout 10
Command: create xtacacs server_host 10.1.1.224 port 15555 timeout 10
Success.
5-47 config xtacacs server_host

Description
This command is used to configure a XTACACS server host.
Format
config xtacacs server_host <ipaddr> {port <int 1-65535> | timeout <int 1-255> | retransmit
<int 1-20>}
Parameters
port - (Optional) The port number of the XTACACS server host.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the XTACACS server host:
96

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config xtacacs server_host 10.1.1.224 retransmit 5

Command: config xtacacs server_host 10.1.1.224 retransmit 5
Key is meaningless for TACACS and XTACACS.
Success.
5-48 create tacacs+ server_host

Description
This command is used to create a TACACS+ server host.
Format
create tacacs+ server_host <ipaddr> {port <int 1-65535> | [key [<key_string 254> | none] |
Parameters
port - (Optional) The port number of the TACACS+ server host.
key - (Optional) Specify the key for TACACS+.
<key_string 254> - Enter the plain text key string for TACACS+.
encryption_key - (Optional) The encrypted form key string for TACACS+. The encryption
Restrictions
Example
To create a TACACS+ server host:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create tacacs+ server_host 10.1.1.211 port 15555 timeout 10
key "abc123"
Command: create tacacs+ server_host 10.1.1.211 port 15555 timeout 10 key
"abc123"
Success.
97

®
5-49 config tacacs+ server_host

Description
Format
config tacacs+ server_host <ipaddr> {port <int 1-65535> | [key [<key_string 254> | none] |
Parameters
port - (Optional) The port number of the TACACS+ server host.
key - (Optional) Specify the key for TACACS+.
<key_string 254> - Enter the plain text key string for TACACS+.
encryption_key - (Optional) The encrypted form key string for TACACS+. The encryption
Restrictions
Example
To configure the TACACS+ server host:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config tacacs+ server_host 10.1.1.211 key "abcd123"
Command: config tacacs+ server_host 10.1.1.211 key "abcd123"
Success.
5-50 enable aaa_server_password_encryption

Description
This command is used to enable AAA server password encryption.
Format
enable aaa_server_password_encryption
Parameters
None.
98

®
Restrictions
Example
To enable AAA server password encryption:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable aaa_server_password_encryption
Command: enable aaa_server_password_encryption
Success.
5-51 disable aaa_server_password_encryption

Description
This command is used to disable AAA server password encryption.
Format
disable aaa_server_password_encryption
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable AAA server password encryption:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable aaa_server_password_encryption
Command: disable aaa_server_password_encryption
Success.
5-52 show aaa

Description
This command is used to display AAA global configuration.
99

®
Format
show aaa
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display AAA global configuration:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show aaa
Command: show aaa
Authentication Policy: Enabled

Accounting Network Service State: AAA Method
Accounting Network Service Method: acc_telnet
Accounting Shell Service State: RADIUS Only
Accounting Shell Service Method:
Accounting System Service State: Disabled
Accounting System Service Method:
Accounting Admin Command Service Method:
Accounting Operator Command Service Method:
Accounting PowerUser Command Service Method:
Accounting User Command Service Method:
Authentication Policy Encryption: Enabled
5-53 config accounting service

Description
This command is used to configure the state of the specified RADIUS accounting service.
Format
config accounting service [network | shell | system] state [enable {[radius_only |
method_list_name <string 15> | default_method_list]} | disable]
Parameters
network - Accounting service for 802.1X, JWAC and WAC port access control. By default, the
service is disabled.
shell - Accounting service for shell events: When user logs on or out the Switch (via the console,
Telnet, or SSH) and timeout occurs, accounting information will be collected and sent to
100

®
RADIUS server. By default, the service is disabled.

system - Accounting service for system events: reset, reboot. By default, the service is disabled.
state - Specify the state of the specified service.
enable - Specify to enable the specified accounting service.
radius_only - (Optional) Specify accounting service to only use radius group specified by
the "config radius add < server_index 1-3 >[ < server_ip > | < ipv6addr > ]” command.
method_list_name - (Optional) Specify accounting service by the AAA user-defined
method list specified by the “create accounting method_list_name <string 15>”
command.
<string 15> - Enter the method list name.
default_method_list - - (Optional) Specify accounting service by the AAA default method
list.
disable - Specify to disable the specified accounting service.
Restrictions
Example
Enable it to configure accounting shell state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config accounting service shell state enable
Command: config accounting service shell state enable
Success.
5-54 show accounting service

Description
This command is used to show the status of RADIUS accounting services.
Format
show accounting service
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show information of RADIUS accounting services:
101

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show accounting service

Command: show accounting service
Accounting Service
-------------------
Network : Enabled
Shell : Enabled
System : Enabled
102

®
Chapter 6 Access Control List (ACL)

Command List
create access_profile profile_id <value 1-6> profile_name <name 1-32> [ethernet {vlan {<hex
0x0-0x0fff>} | source_mac <macmask 000000000000-ffffffffffff> | destination_mac <macmask
000000000000-ffffffffffff> | 802.1p | ethernet_type} | ip {vlan {<hex 0x0-0x0fff>} |
source_ip_mask <netmask> | destination_ip_mask <netmask> | dscp | [icmp {type | code } |
igmp {type} | tcp {src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> |
flag_mask [all | {urg | ack | psh | rst | syn | fin}]} | udp {src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> |
dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | protocol_id_mask <hex 0x0-0xff> {user_define_mask <hex
0x0-0xffffffff>}]} | packet_content_mask {offset_chunk_1 <value 0-31> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> |
offset_chunk_2 <value 0-31> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_chunk_3 <value 0-31> <hex 0x0-
0xffffffff> | offset_chunk_4 <value 0-31> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>} | ipv6 {class | flowlabel |
source_ipv6_mask <ipv6mask> | destination_ipv6_mask <ipv6mask> | [tcp {src_port_mask
<hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | udp {src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> |
dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> } | icmp {type | code}]}]
delete access_profile [profile_id <value 1-6> | profile_name <name 1-32> | all]
config access_profile [profile_id <value 1-6> | profile_name <name 1-32>] [add access_id
[auto_assign | <value 1-256>] [ethernet {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>]
{mask <hex 0x0-0x0fff>} | source_mac <macaddr> {mask <macmask>} | destination_mac
<macaddr> {mask <macmask>} | 802.1p <value 0-7> | ethernet_type <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | ip
{[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] {mask <hex 0x0-0x0fff>} | source_ip
<ipaddr> {mask <netmask>} | destination_ip <ipaddr> {mask <netmask>} | dscp <value 0-63>
| [icmp {type <value 0-255> | code <value 0-255>} | igmp {type <value 0-255>} | tcp {src_port
<value 0-65535> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | dst_port <value 0-65535> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>}
| flag [all | {urg | ack | psh | rst | syn | fin}]} | udp {src_port <value 0-65535> {mask <hex 0x0-
0xffff>} | dst_port <value 0-65535> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>}} | protocol_id <value 0-255>
{user_define <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>}}]} | packet_content
{offset_chunk_1 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>} | offset_chunk_2 <hex 0x0-
0xffffffff> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>} | offset_chunk_3 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> {mask <hex 0x0-
0xffffffff>} | offset_chunk_4 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>}} | ipv6 {class <value
0-255> | flowlabel <hex 0x0-0xfffff> | source_ipv6 <ipv6addr> {mask<ipv6mask>} |
destination_ipv6 <ipv6addr> {mask <ipv6mask>} | [tcp {src_port <value 0-65535> {mask <hex
0x0-0xffff>} | dst_port <value 0-65535> {mask <hex0x0-0xffff>}} | udp {src_port <value 0-
65535> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | dst_port <value 0-65535> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>}} | icmp
{type <value 0-255> | code <value 0-255>}]}] [port [<portlist> | all] | vlan_based [vlan
<vlan_name 32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>]] [permit {priority <value 0-7> {replace_priority} |
[replace_dscp_with <value 0-63> | replace_tos_precedence_with <value 0-7>] | counter
[enable | disable]} | mirror {group_id <value 1-4>} | deny] {time_range <range_name 32>} |
delete access_id <value 1-256>]
show access_profile {[profile_id <value 1-6> | profile_name <name 1-32>]}
config flow_meter [profile_id <value 1-6> | profile_name <name 1-32>] access_id <value 1-256>
[rate [<value 0-1048576>] {burst_size [<value 0-131072>]} rate_exceed [drop_packet |
remark_dscp <value 0-63>] | tr_tcm cir <value 0-1048576> {cbs <value 0-131072>} pir
<value 0-1048576> {pbs <value 0-131072>} {[color_blind | color_aware]} {conform [permit |
replace_dscp <value 0-63>] {counter [enable |disable]}} exceed [permit {replace_dscp <value
0-63>} | drop] {counter [enable |disable]} violate [permit {replace_dscp <value 0-63>} | drop]
{counter [enable |disable]} | sr_tcm cir <value 0-1048576> cbs <value 0-131072> ebs <value
0-131072> {[color_blind | color_aware]} {conform [permit | replace_dscp <value 0-63>]
{counter [enable |disable]}} exceed [permit {replace_dscp <value 0-63>} | drop] {counter
[enable |disable]} violate [permit {replace_dscp <value 0-63>} | drop] {counter [enable
|disable]} | delete]
show flow_meter {[profile_id <value 1-6> | profile_name <name 1-32>] {access_id <value 1-
256>}}
103

®
config time_range <range_name 32> [hours start_time <time hh:mm:ss> end_time <time
hh:mm:ss> weekdays <daylist> | delete]
show time_range
show current_config access_profile
6-1 create access_profile

Description
This command is used to create access list rules.
Support for field selections can have additional limitations that are project dependent.
For example, for some hardware, it may be invalid to specify a class and source IPv6 address at
the same time. The user will be prompted with these limitations.
Format
create access_profile profile_id <value 1-6> profile_name <name 1-32> [ethernet {vlan
{<hex 0x0-0x0fff>} | source_mac <macmask 000000000000-ffffffffffff> | destination_mac
<macmask 000000000000-ffffffffffff> | 802.1p | ethernet_type} | ip {vlan {<hex 0x0-0x0fff>} |
source_ip_mask <netmask> | destination_ip_mask <netmask> | dscp | [icmp {type | code } |
dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | protocol_id_mask <hex 0x0-0xff> {user_define_mask
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff>}]} | packet_content_mask {offset_chunk_1 <value 0-31> <hex 0x0-
0xffffffff> | offset_chunk_2 <value 0-31> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_chunk_3 <value 0-31>
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_chunk_4 <value 0-31> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>} | ipv6 {class |
flowlabel | source_ipv6_mask <ipv6mask> | destination_ipv6_mask <ipv6mask> | [tcp
{src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | udp {src_port_mask
<hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> } | icmp {type | code}]}]
Parameters
profile_id - Specify the index of the access list profile.
<value 1-6> - Enter the profile ID here. This value must be between 1 and 6. A lower value
denotes a higher priority.
profile_name - The name of the profile must be specified. The maximum length is 32 characters.
<name 1-32> - Enter the profile name here.
ethernet - Specify this is an ethernet mask.
vlan - (Optional) Specify a VLAN mask. Only the last 12 bits of the mask will be considered.
<hex 0x0-0x0fff> - Enter the VLAN mask value here.
source_mac - (Optional) Specify the source MAC mask.
<macmask> - Enter the source MAC address used here.
destination_mac - (Optional) Specify the destination MAC mask.
<macmask> - Enter the destination MAC address used here.
802.1p - (Optional) Specify the 802.1p priority tag mask.
ethernet_type - (Optional) Specify the Ethernet type mask.
ip - Specify this is a IPv4 mask.
vlan - (Optional) Specify a VLAN mask. Only the last 12 bits of the mask will be considered.
<hex 0x0-0x0fff> -Enter the VLAN mask value here.
source_ip_mask - (Optional) Specify a source IP address mask.
<netmask> - Enter the source IP address mask here.
destination_ip_mask - (Optional) Specify a destination IP address mask.
<netmask> - Enter the destination IP address mask here.
104

®
dscp - (Optional) Specify the DSCP mask.

icmp - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to ICMP traffic.
type - (Optional) Specify the type of ICMP traffic.
code - (Optional) Specify the code of ICMP traffic
igmp - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to IGMP traffic.
type - (Optional) Specify the type of IGMP traffic.
tcp - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to TCP traffic.
src_port_mask - (Optional) Specify the TCP source port mask.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the TCP source port mask here.
dst_port_mask - (Optional) Specify the TCP destination port mask.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the TCP destination port mask here.
flag_mask - (Optional) Specify the TCP flag field mask.
all – Specify that all the flags will be used for the TCP mask.
urg – (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field will be set to ‘urg’.
ack - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field will be set to ‘ack’.
psh - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field will be set to ‘psh’.
rst - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field will be set to ‘rst’.
syn - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field will be set to ‘syn’.
fin - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field will be set to ‘fin’.
udp - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to UDP traffic.
src_port_mask - Specify the UDP source port mask.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the UDP source port mask here.
dst_port_mask - Specify the UDP destination port mask.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the UDP destination port mask here.
protocol_id_mask - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to IP protocol ID traffic.
<0x0-0xff> - Enter the protocol ID mask here.
user_define_mask - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to the IP protocol ID, and that
the mask option behind the IP header length is 20 bytes.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Enter a user-defined mask value here.
packet_content_mask - Specify the packet content mask. Only one packet_content_mask
profile can be created.
offset_chunk_1 - (Optional) Specify that the offset chunk 1 will be used.
<value 0-31> - Enter the offset chunk 1 value here. This value must be between 0 and 31.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Enter the offset chunk 1 mask here.
ipv6 - Specify this is the IPv6 mask.
class - (Optional) Specify the IPv6 class.
flowlabel - (Optional) Specify the IPv6 flow label.
source_ipv6_mask - (Optional) Specify an IPv6 source sub-mask.
<ipv6mask> - Enter the source IPv6 mask value here.
destination_ipv6_mask - (Optional) Specify an IPv6 destination sub-mask.
<ipv6mask> -Enter the destination IPv6 mask value here.
src_port_mask - (Optional) Specify an IPv6 Layer 4 TCP source port mask.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the TCP source port mask value here.
des_port_mask - (Optional) Specify an IPv6 Layer 4 TCP destination port mask.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the TCP destination port mask value here.
src_port_mask - (Optional) Specify the UDP source port mask.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the UDP source port mask value here.
dst_port_mask - (Optional) Specify the UDP destination port mask.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the UDP destination port mask value here.
105

®
icmp - (Optional) Specify a mask for ICMP filtering.

type - (Optional) Specify the inclusion of the ICMP type field in the mask.
code - (Optional) Specify the inclusion of the ICMP code field in the mask.
Restrictions
Example
To create an access profile:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create access_profile profile_id 1 profile_name t1
ethernet vlan source_mac 00-00-00-00-00-01 destination_mac 00-00-00-00-00-02
802.1p ethernet_type
Command: create access_profile profile_id 1 profile_name 1 ethernet vlan
source_mac 00-00-00-00-00-01 destination_mac 00-00-00-00-00-02 802.1p
ethernet_type
Success.
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create access_profile profile_id 2 profile_name 2 ip vlan

source_ip_mask 20.0.0.0 destination_ip_mask 10.0.0.0 dscp icmp type code
Command: create access_profile profile_id 2 profile_name t2 ip vlan
Success.
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create access_profile profile_id 4 profile_name 4

packet_content_mask offset_chunk_1 3 0xFFFF offset_chunk_2 5 0xFF00
offset_chunk_3 14 0xFFFF0000 offset_chunk_4 16 0xFF000000
Command: create access_profile profile_id 4 profile_name 4 packet_content_mask
offset_chunk_1 3 0xFFFF offset_chunk_2 5 0xFF00 offset_chunk_3 14 0xFFFF0000
offset_chunk_4 16 0xFF000000
Success.
6-2 delete access_profile

Description
This command is used to delete access list profiles. This command can only delete profiles that
were created using the ACL module.
Format
delete access_profile [profile_id <value 1-6> | profile_name <name 1-32> | all]
Parameters
<value 1-6> - Enter the profile ID value here. This value must be between 1 and 6.
profile_name - Specify the name of the profile. The maximum length is 32 characters.
106

®
<name 1-32> - Enter the profile name here. This value must be between 1 and 32.
all - Specify that the whole access list profile will be deleted.
Restrictions
Example
To delete the access list rule with a profile ID of 10:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete access_profile profile_id 10
Command: delete access_profile profile_id 10
Success.
6-3 config access_profile

Description
This command is used to configure an access list entry. The ACL mirror function works after the
mirror has been enabled and the mirror port has been configured using the mirror command.
When applying an access rule to a target, the setting specified in the VLAN field will not take effect
if the target is a VLAN.
Format
config access_profile [profile_id <value 1-6> | profile_name <name 1-32>] [add access_id
[auto_assign | <value 1-256>] [ethernet {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>]
{mask <hex 0x0-0x0fff>} | source_mac <macaddr> {mask <macmask>} | destination_mac
<macaddr> {mask <macmask>} | 802.1p <value 0-7> | ethernet_type <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | ip
{[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] {mask <hex 0x0-0x0fff>} | source_ip
<ipaddr> {mask <netmask>} | destination_ip <ipaddr> {mask <netmask>} | dscp <value 0-
63> | [icmp {type <value 0-255> | code <value 0-255>} | igmp {type <value 0-255>} | tcp
{src_port <value 0-65535> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | dst_port <value 0-65535> {mask <hex
0x0-0xffff>} | flag [all | {urg | ack | psh | rst | syn | fin}]} | udp {src_port <value 0-65535>
{mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | dst_port <value 0-65535> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>}} | protocol_id
<value 0-255> {user_define <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>}}]} |
packet_content {offset_chunk_1 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>} |
offset_chunk_2 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>} | offset_chunk_3 <hex 0x0-
0xffffffff> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>} | offset_chunk_4 <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> {mask <hex 0x0-
0xffffffff>}} | ipv6 {class <value 0-255> | flowlabel <hex 0x0-0xfffff> | source_ipv6 <ipv6addr>
{mask <ipv6mask>} | destination_ipv6 <ipv6addr> {mask <ipv6mask>} | [tcp {src_port
<value 0-65535> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | dst_port <value 0-65535> {mask <hex0x0-0xffff>}}
| udp {src_port <value 0-65535> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | dst_port <value 0-65535> {mask
<hex 0x0-0xffff>}} | icmp {type <value 0-255> | code <value 0-255>}]}] [port [<portlist> | all] |
vlan_based [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>]] [permit {priority <value 0-7>
{replace_priority} | [replace_dscp_with <value 0-63> | replace_tos_precedence_with <value
0-7>] | counter [enable | disable]} | mirror {group_id <value 1-4>} | deny] {time_range
<range_name 32>} | delete access_id <value 1-256>]
107

®
Parameters
<value 1-6> - Enter the profile ID value here. This value must be between 1 and 6. A lower
value denotes a higher priority.
profile_name - Specify the name of the profile.
<name 1-32> - Enter the profile name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
add access_id - Specify to add the access ID. The value is from 1 to 256, but the supported
maximum number of entries depends on the project. If the auto_assign option is selected, the
access ID is automatically assigned, when adding multiple ports.
auto_assign - Specify that the access ID will automatically be assigned.
<value 1-256> - Enter the access ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 256. A
lower value denotes a higher priority.
ethernet - Specify to configure the ethernet access profile.
vlan - (Optional) Specify the VLAN name.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the name of the VLAN here. This name can be up to 32
characters long.
vlan_id - (Optional) Specify the VLAN ID used.
mask - (Optional) Specify an additional mask parameter that can be configured.
<hex 0x0-0x0fff> - Enter the mask value here.
source_mac - (Optional) Specify the source MAC address.
<macaddr> - Enter the source MAC address used for this configuration here.
<macmask> - Enter the source MAC mask used here.
destination_mac - (Optional) Specify the destination MAC address.
<macaddr> - Enter the destination MAC address used for this configuration here.
<macmask> - Enter the destination MAC mask here.
802.1p - (Optional) Specify the value of the 802.1p priority tag. The priority tag ranges from 1
to 7.
<value 0-7> - Enter the 802.1p priority tag value here.
ethernet_type - (Optional) Specify the Ethernet type.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the Ethernet type mask here.
ip - Specify to configure the IP access profile.
vlan - (Optional) Specify a VLAN name.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the name of the VLAN here. This name can be up to 32
characters long.
vlan_id - (Optional) Specify that VLAN ID used.
<hex 0x0-0x0fff> - Enter the mask value here.
source_ip - (Optional) Specify an IP source address.
<ipaddr> - Enter the source IP address used for this configuration here.
<netmask> - Enter the source netmask used here.
destination_ip - (Optional) Specify an IP destination address.
<ipaddr> - Enter the destination IP address used for this configuration here.
<netmask> - Enter the destination netmask used here.
dscp - (Optional) Specify the value of DSCP. The DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63.
<value> - Enter the DSCP value here.
icmp - (Optional) Specify to configure the ICMP parameters.
type - (Optional) Specify that the rule will apply to the ICMP Type traffic value.
<value 0-255> - Enter the ICMP type traffic value here. This value must be between 0
and 255.
code - Specify that the rule will apply to the ICMP Code traffic value.
<value 0-255> - Enter the ICMP code traffic value here. This value must be between 0
108

®
and 255.
igmp - (Optional) Specify to configure the IGMP parameters.
type - (Optional) Specify that the rule will apply to the IGMP Type traffic value.
<value 0-255> - Enter the IGMP type traffic value here. This value must be between 0
and 255.
tcp - (Optional) Specify to configure the TCP parameters.
src_port - (Optional) Specify that the rule will apply to a range of TCP source ports.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the TCP source port value here. This value must be between
0 and 65535.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the source port mask here.
dst_port - (Optional) Specify that the rule will apply to a range of TCP destination ports.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the TCP destination port value here. This value must be
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the destination port mask here.
flag - (Optional) Specify the TCP flag fields.
all - Specify that all the TCP flags will be used in this configuration.
urg - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field will be set to 'urg'.
ack - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field will be set to 'ack'.
psh - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field will be set to 'psh'.
rst - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field will be set to 'rst'.
syn - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field will be set to 'syn'.
fin - (Optional) Specify that the TCP flag field will be set to 'fin'.
udp - (Optional) Specify to configure the UDP parameters.
src_port - (Optional) Specify the UDP source port range.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the UDP source port value here. This value must be between
0 and 65535.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the source port mask here.
dst_port - (Optional) Specify the UDP destination port range.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the UDP destination port value here. This value must be
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the destination port mask here.
protocol_id - (Optional) Specify that the rule will apply to the value of IP protocol ID traffic.
<value 0-255> - Enter the protocol ID used here.
user_define - (Optional) Specify that the rule will apply to the IP protocol ID and that the
mask options behind the IP header , which has a length of 20 bytes.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Enter the user-defined mask value here.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Enter the mask value here.
packet_content - A maximum of 11 offsets can be specified. Each offset defines 2 bytes of data
which is identified as a single UDF field. The offset reference is also configurable. It can be
defined to start at the end of the tag, the end of the ether type or the end of the IP header. To
qualify the fields before the end of the tag, the destination address, source address, and the
VLAN tags are also included
offset_chunk_1 – (Optional) Specify the value of the packet bytes to be matched. Offset
chunk 1 will be used.
offset_chunk_2 - (Optional) Specify the value of the packet bytes to be matched. Offset
ipv6 - Specify that the rule applies to IPv6 fields.
109

®
class - (Optional) Specify the value of the IPv6 class.

<value 0-255> - Enter the IPv6 class value here. This value must be between 0 and 255.
flowlabel - (Optional) Specify the value of the IPv6 flow label.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the IPv6 flow label mask used here.
source_ipv6 - (Optional) Specify the value of the IPv6 source address.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the source IPv6 address used for this configuration here.
<ipv6mask> - Enter the source IPv6 mask here.
destination_ipv6 - (Optional) Specify the value of the IPv6 destination address.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the destination IPv6 address used for this configuration here.
<ipv6mask> - Enter the destination IPv6 mask here.
src_port - Specify the value of the IPv6 Layer 4 TCP source port.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the TCP source port value here. This value must be between
0 and 65535.
dst_port - (Optional) Specify the value of the IPv6 Layer 4 TCP destination port.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the TCP destination port value here. This value must be
src_port - Specify the value of the IPv6 Layer 4 UDP source port.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the UDP source port value here. This value must be between
0 and 65535.
dst_port - Specify the value of the IPv6 Layer 4 UDP destination port.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the UDP destination port value here. This value must be
icmp - (Optional) Specify to configure the ICMP parameters used.
type - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to the value of ICMP type traffic.
<value 0-255> - Enter the ICMP type traffic value here. This value must be between 0
and 255.
code - Specify that the rule applies to the value of ICMP code traffic.
<value 0-255> - Enter the ICMP code traffic value here. This value must be between 0
and 255.
port - Specify the port list used for this configuration.
<portlist> - Enter a list of ports used for the configuration here.
vlan_based - Specify that the rule will be VLAN based.
vlan - Specify the VLAN name used for this configuration.
<vlan_name> - Enter the VLAN name used for this configuration here.
vlan_id - Specify the VLAN ID used for this configuration.
permit - Specify that packets matching the access rule are permitted by the Switch.
priority - (Optional) Specify that the priority of the packet will change if the packet matches
the access rule.
<value 0-7> - Enter the priority value here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
replace_priority - (Optional) Specify that the 802.1p priority of the outgoing packet will be
replaced.
replace_dscp_with - (Optional) Specify that the DSCP of the outgoing packet is changed with
the new value. If using this action without an action priority, the packet will be sent to the
default TC.
<value 0-63> - Enter the replace DSCP with value here. This value must be between 0
and 63.
110

®
replace_tos_precedence_with - (Optional) Specify that the IP precedence of the outgoing

packet is changed with the new value. If used without an action priority, the packet is sent
to the default TC.
<value 0-7> - Enter the replace ToS precedence with value here. This value must be
between 0 and 7.
counter - (Optional) Specify whether the ACL counter feature is enabled or disabled. This
parameter is optional. The default option is disabled. If the rule is not bound with the
flow_meter, all matching packets are counted. If the rule is bound with the flow_meter, then
the “counter” is overridden.
enable - Specify that the ACL counter feature will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the ACL counter feature will be disabled.
mirror - Specify that packets matching the access rules are copied to the mirror port.
group_id - (Optional) Specify the groupd ID.
<value 1-4> - Enter the value between 1 and 4.
deny - Specify that packets matching the access rule are filtered by the Switch.
time_range - (Optional) Specify the name of the time range entry.
<range_name 32> - Enter the time range name here. This name can be up to 32
characters long.
delete access_id - Specify to delete the access ID. The value range is 1-256, but the supported
maximum number of entries depends on the project.
<value 1-256> - Enter the access ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 256.
Restrictions
Example
To configure a rule entry for a packet content mask profile (option 3):
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config access_profile profile_id 5 add access_id
auto_assign packet_content offset5 0xF0 port all deny
Command: config access_profile profile_id 5 add access_id auto_assign
packet_content offset5 0xF0 port all deny
Success.
6-4 show access_profile

Description
This command is used to display the current access list table.
Format
show access_profile {[profile_id <value 1-6> | profile_name <name 1-32>]}
Parameters
profile_id - (Optional) Specify the index of the access list profile.
<value 1-6> - Enter the profile ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 6. A lower
profile_name - (Optional) Specify the name of the profile.
111

®
<name 1-32> - Enter the profile name used here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the current access list table:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show access_profile
Command: show access_profile
Access Profile Table
Total User Set Rule Entries : 4

Total Used HW Entries : 5
Total Available HW Entries : 1531
==============================================================================
Profile ID: 1 Profile name: EtherACL Type: Ethernet
MASK on
VLAN : 0xFFF
802.1p
Ethernet Type
Available HW Entries : 255

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rule ID : 1 Ports: 1:1
Match on
VLAN ID : 1
802.1p : 0
Ethernet Type : 0xFFFE
Action:
Permit
==============================================================================
==============================================================================
Profile ID: 2 Profile name: IPv4ACL Type: IPv4
MASK on
VLAN : 0xFFF
DSCP
ICMP

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
112

®
Match on
VLAN ID : 1
DSCP : 0
Action:
Permit
==============================================================================
==============================================================================
Profile ID: 3 Profile name: IPv6ACL Type: IPv6
MASK on
Class
TCP

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Match on
Class : 0
Action:
Permit
==============================================================================
==============================================================================
Profile ID: 4 Profile name: PCACL Type: User Defined
MASK on
offset_chunk_1 : 0 value : 0x00000000

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
Match on
offset_chunk_1 : 0 value : 0x0000FFEE Mask : 0x0000FFEE
Action:
Permit
Priority : 1
Replace DSCP : 1
==============================================================================
113

®
The following example displays an access profile that supports an entry mask for each rule:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show access_profile profile_id 2
Command: show access_profile profile_id 2
Profile ID: 2 Profile Name: 2 Type : Ethernet

Mask on
VLAN : 0xF
Source MAC : FF-FF-FF-00-00-00
Destination MAC : 00-00-00-FF-FF-FF
Available HW Entries: 255
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rule ID : 22 Ports: 1-7
Match on
VLAN ID : 8 Mask : 0xFFF
Source MAC : 00-01-02-03-04-05 Mask : FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
Destination MAC :00-05-04-03-02-00 Mask : FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-00
Action:
Deny
The following example displays the packet content mask profile for the profile with an ID of 5:
114

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show access_profile profile_id 5

Command: show access_profile profile_id 5
Profile ID: 5 Profile name:5 Type: User Defined
MASK on
offset_chunk_1 : 3 value : 0x0000FFFF
offset_chunk_2 : 5 value : 0x0000FF00
offset_chunk_3 : 14 value : 0xFFFF0000
offset_chunk_4 : 16 value : 0xFF000000

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rule ID : 1 Ports: 1:1-1:2
Match on
offset_chunk_1 : 3 value : 0x000086DD
offset_chunk_2 : 5 value : 0x00003A00
Action:
Deny
6-5 config flow_meter

Description
This command is used to configure the flow-based metering function. The metering function
supports three modes: single rate two color, single rate three color, and two rate three color. The
access rule must be created before the parameters of this function can be applied.
For the single rate two color mode, users may set the preferred bandwidth for this rule, in Kbps,
and once the bandwidth has been exceeded, overflowing packets will either be dropped or have a
drop precedence set, depending on the user configuration.
For single rate three color mode, users need to specify the committed rate, in Kbps, the committed
burst size, and the excess burst size.
For the two rate three color mode, users need to specify the committed rate in Kbps, the
committed burst size, the peak rate and the peak burst size.
There are two cases for mapping the color of a packet: Color-blind mode and Color-aware mode.
In the Color-blind case, the determination for the packet’s color is based on the metering result. In
the Color-aware case, the determination for the packet’s color is based on the metering result and
the ingress DSCP.
When color-blind or color-aware is not specified, color-blind is the default mode.
The green color packet will be treated as the conforming action, the yellow color packet will be
treated as the exceeding action, and the red color packet will be treated as the violating action.
115

®
The replace DSCP action can be performed on packets that conform (GREEN) and packets that
do not conform (YELLOW and RED). If drop YELLOW/RED is selected, the action to replace the
DSCP will not take effect.
Format
config flow_meter [profile_id <value 1-6> | profile_name <name 1-32>] access_id <value 1-
256> [rate [<value 0-1048576>] {burst_size [<value 0-131072>]} rate_exceed [drop_packet |
remark_dscp <value 0-63>] | tr_tcm cir <value 0-1048576> {cbs <value 0-131072>} pir <value
0-1048576> {pbs <value 0-131072>} {[color_blind | color_aware]} {conform [permit |
replace_dscp <value 0-63>] {counter [enable | disable]}} exceed [permit {replace_dscp
<value 0-63>} | drop] {counter [enable |disable]} violate [permit {replace_dscp <value 0-63>}
| drop] {counter [enable |disable]} | sr_tcm cir <value 0-1048576> cbs <value 0-131072> ebs
<value 0-131072> {[color_blind | color_aware]} {conform [permit | replace_dscp <value 0-
63>] {counter [enable |disable]}} exceed [permit {replace_dscp <value 0-63>} | drop]
{counter [enable |disable]} violate [permit {replace_dscp <value 0-63>} | drop] {counter
[enable |disable]} | delete]
Parameters
profile_id - Specify the profile ID.
<name 1-32> - Enter the profile name used here.
access_id - Specify the access ID.
rate - This specifies the rate for single rate two color mode. Specify the committed bandwidth in
Kbps for the flow. The value m and n are determined by the project.
<value 0-1048576> - Enter the rate for single rate two color mode here. This value must be
burst_size - (Optional) This specifies the burst size for the single rate two color mode. The unit is
Kbytes.
<value 0-131072> - Enter the burst size value here. This value must be between 0 and
131072.
rate_exceed - This specifies the action for packets that exceeds the committed rate in single
rate, two color mode.
drop_packet - Drop the packet immediately.
remark_dscp - Mark the packet with a specified DSCP. The packet is set to have a high drop
precedence.
<value 0-63> - Enter the remark DSCP value here. This value must be between 0 and 63.
tr_tcm - Specify the “two rate three color mode”.
cir - Specify the Committed Information Rate. The unit is in Kbps. CIR should always be equal
or less than PIR.
<value 0-1048576> - Enter the commited information rate value here. This value must be
cbs - (Optional) Specify the “Committed Burst Size”. The unit is Kbytes. That is to say, 1
means 1Kbytes. This parameter is an optional parameter. The default value is 4*1024.
<value 0-1048576> - Enter the commited burst size value here. This value must be
pir - Specify the “Peak Information Rate”. The unit is in Kbps. PIR should always be equal to
or greater than CIR.
<value 0-1048576> - Enter the peak information rate value here. This value must be
pbs - (Optional) Specify the “Peak Burst Size”. The unit is in Kbytes. This parameter is an
116

®
optional parameter. The default value is 4*1024.

<value 0-131072> - Enter the peak burst size value here. This value must be between 0
and 131072.
color_blind - (Optional) Specify the meter mode as color-blind. The default is color-blind
mode.
color_aware - (Optional) Specify the meter mode as color-aware. The final color of the packet
is determined by the initial color of the packet and the metering result.
conform - (Optional) Specify the action when a packet is mapped to the “green” color.
permit - Permits the packet.
replace_dscp - Changes the DSCP of the packet.
<value 0-63> - Enter the replace DSCP value here. This value must be between 0 and
63.
counter - (Optional) Specify the ACL counter. This is optional. The default is “disable”. The
resource may be limited so that a counter cannot be turned on. Counters will be cleared
when the function is disabled.
enable - Specify that the ACL counter option will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the ACL counter option will be disabled.
exceed - Specify the action when a packet is mapped to the “yellow” color.
replace_dscp - (Optional) Changes the DSCP of the packet.
63.
drop - Drops the packet.
violate - Specify the action when a packet is mapped to the “red” color.
63.
enable - Specify that the ACL counter option will disable - Specify that the ACL counter
option will be disabled.be enabled.
sr_tcm - Specify “single rate three color mode”.
cir - Specify the ommitted Information Rate. The unit is Kbps.
<value 0-1048576> - Enter the comitted information rate value here. This value must be
cbs - Specify the “Committed Burst Size” The unit is Kbytes.
<value 0-131072> - Enter the commited burst size value here. This value must be between
0 and 131072.
ebs - Specify the “Excess Burst Size”. The unit is Kbytes.
<value 0-131072> - Enter the excess burst size value here. This value must be between 0
and 131072.
color_blind - (Optional) Specify the meter mode as color-blind. The default is color-blind
mode.
color_aware - (Optional) Specify the meter mode as color-aware. The final color of the packet
is determined by the initial color of the packet and the metering result.
conform - (Optional) Specify the action when a packet is mapped to the “green” color.
63.
117

®

exceed - Specify the action when a packet is mapped to the “yellow” color.
63.
violate - Specify the action when a packet is mapped to the “red” color.
63.
delete - Deletes the specified flow_meter.
Restrictions
Example
To configure a “two rate, three color” flow meter:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config flow_meter profile_id 1 access_id 1 tr_tcm cir 1000
cbs 2000 pir 2000 pbs 2000 color_blind conform permit counter enable exceed
permit replace_dscp 60 counter enable violate drop
Command: config flow_meter profile_id 1 access_id 1 tr_tcm cir 1000 cbs 2000
pir 2000 pbs 2000 color_blind conform permit counter enable exceed permit
replace_dscp 60 counter enable violate drop
Success.
6-6 show flow_meter

Description
This command is used to display the flow-based metering (ACL Flow Metering) configuration.
Format
show flow_meter {[profile_id <value 1-6> | profile_name <name 1-32>] {access_id <value 1-
256>}}
118

®
Parameters
profile_id - (Optional) Specify the profile ID.
profile_name - (Optional) Specify the name of the profile. The maximum length is 32 characters.
<name 1-32> - Enter the profile name used here.
access_id - (Optional) Specify the access ID.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the flow metering configuration:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show flow_meter
Command: show flow_meter
Flow Meter Information

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Profile ID:1 Aceess ID:1 Mode : trTCM / ColorBlind
CIR(Kbps):1000 CBS(Kbyte):2000 PIR(Kbps):2000 PBS(Kbyte):2000
Action:
Conform : Permit Counter: Enabled
Exceed : Permit Replace DSCP: 60 Counter: Enabled
Violate : Drop Counter: Disabled
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total Entries: 1
6-7 config time_range

Description
This command is used to define a specific range of time to activate a function on the Switch by
specifying which time range in a day and which days in a week are covered in the time range. Note
that the specified time range is based on the SNTP time or the configured time. If this time is not
available, the time range will not be met.
Format
config time_range <range_name 32> [hours start_time <time hh:mm:ss> end_time <time
hh:mm:ss> weekdays <daylist> | delete]
Parameters
time_range - Specify the name of the time range settings.
<range_name 32> - Enter the time range name used here. This name can be up to 32
characters long.
119

®
hours - Specify the time of a day.

start_time - Specify the starting time of a day.
<time hh:mm:ss> - Enter the starting time here. (24-hr time). For example, 19:00 means
7PM. 19 is also acceptable. The time specified in the start_time parameter must be
smaller than the time specified in the end_time parameter.
end_time - Specify the ending time of a day. (24-hr time)
<time hh:mm:ss> - Enter the ending time here. (24-hr time). For example, 19:00 means
7PM. 19 is also acceptable. The time specified in the start_time parameter must be
smaller than the time specified in the end_time parameter.
weekdays - Specify the list of days contained in the time range. Use a dash to define a period of
days. Use a comma to separate specific days.
<daylist> - Enter the weekdays that will be included in this configuration here. For example,
mon-fri (Monday to Friday). sun, mon, fri (Sunday, Monday and Friday)
delete - Deletes a time range profile. When a time_range profile has been associated with ACL
entries, deleting the time_range profile will fail.
Restrictions
Example
To configure a time range named “1” that starts every Monday at 01:01:01am and ends at
02:02:02am:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config time_range 1 hours start_time 1:1:1 end_time 2:2:2
weekdays mon
Command: config time_range 1 hours start_time 1:1:1 end_time 2:2:2 weekdays mon
Success.
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config time_range 1 delete

Command: config time_range 1 delete
Success.
6-8 show time_range

Description
This command is used to display the current time range settings.
Format
show time_range
Parameters
None.
120

®
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the current time range settings:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show time_range
Command: show time_range
Time Range Information

-----------------------------
Range Name : test
Weekdays : Sun,Tue
Start Time : 11:00:00
End Time : 12:00:00
Associated ACL Entries : 2-10, 3-8
6-9 show current_config access_profile

Description
This command is used to display the ACL part of the current configuration, when logged in with
user level privileges.
The overall current configuration can be displayed by using the show config command, which is
accessible with administrator level privileges.
Format
show current_config access_profile
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the ACL part of the current configuration:
121

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show current_config access_profile

Command: show current_config access_profile
#-------------------------------------------------------------------
# ACL
create access_profile ethernet vlan profile_id 1

config access_profile profile_id 1 add access_id 1 ethernet vlan default port 1
permit
create access_profile ip source_ip_mask 255.255.255.255 profile_id 2

config access_profile profile_id 2 add access_id 1 ip source_ip 10.10.10.10
port 2 deny
#-------------------------------------------------------------------
122

®
Chapter 7 Access Control List (ACL)

Egress Command List (RI
and EI Mode Only)
create egress_access_profile profile_id <value 1-4> profile_name <name 1-32> [ethernet {vlan
{<hex 0x0-0x0fff>} | source_mac <macmask 000000000000-ffffffffffff> | destination_mac
<macmask 000000000000-ffffffffffff> | 802.1p | ethernet_type} | ip {vlan {<hex 0x0-0x0fff>} |
source_ip_mask <netmask> | destination_ip_mask <netmask> | dscp | [icmp {type | code} |
dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | protocol_id_mask <hex 0x0-0xff> {user_define_mask <hex
0x0-0xffffffff>}]} | ipv6 {class | source_ipv6_mask <ipv6mask> | destination_ipv6_mask
<ipv6mask> | [tcp {src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | udp
{src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | icmp {type | code}]}]
delete egress_access_profile [profile_id <value 1-4> | profile_name <name 1-32> | all]
config egress_access_profile [profile_id <value 1-4> | profile_name <name 1-32>] [add
access_id [auto_assign | <value 1-128>] [ethernet {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-
4094>] {mask <hex 0x0-0x0fff>} | source_mac <macaddr> {mask <macmask>} |
destination_mac <macaddr> {mask <macmask>} | 802.1p <value 0-7> | ethernet_type <hex
0x0-0xffff>} | ip {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] {mask <hex 0x0-0x0fff>} |
source_ip <ipaddr> {mask <netmask>} | destination_ip <ipaddr> {mask <netmask>} | dscp
<value 0-63> | [icmp {type <value 0-255> | code <value 0-255>} | igmp {type <value 0-255>} |
tcp {src_port <value 0-65535> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | dst_port <value 0-65535> {mask
<hex 0x0-0xffff>} | flag [all | {urg | ack | psh | rst | syn | fin}]} | udp {src_port <value 0-65535>
<value 0-255> {user_define <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>}}]} | ipv6 {class
<value 0-255> | source_ipv6 <ipv6addr> {mask <ipv6mask>} | destination_ipv6 <ipv6addr>
{mask <ipv6mask>} | [tcp {src_port <value 0-65535> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | dst_port
<value 0-65535> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>}} | udp {src_port <value 0-65535> {mask <hex 0x0-
0xffff>} | dst_port <value 0-65535> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>}} | icmp {type <value 0-255> | code
<value 0-255>} ]}] [vlan_based [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] | port_group
[id<value 1-64> | name <name 16>] | port <port>] [permit {replace_priority_with <value 0-7> |
replace_dscp_with <value 0-63> | counter[enable | disable]} | deny] {time_range
<range_name 32>} | delete access_id <value 1-128>]
show egress_access_profile {[profile_id <value 1-4> | profile_name <name 1-32>]}
show current_config egress_access_profile
config egress_flow_meter [profile_id <value 1-4> | profile_name <name 1-32>] access_id <value
1-128> [rate <value 0-1048576> {burst_size <value 0-131072>} rate_exceed [drop_packet |
remark_dscp <value 0-63>] | tr_tcm cir <value 0-1048576> {cbs <value 0-131072>} pir <value
0-1048576> {pbs <value 0-131072>} {[color_blind | color_aware]} {conform [permit |
replace_dscp <value 0-63>] {counter [enable |disable]}} exceed [permit {replace_dscp <value
0-63>} | drop] {counter [enable | disable]} violate [permit {replace_dscp <value 0-63>} | drop]
{counter [enable | disable]} |sr_tcm cir <value 0-1048576> cbs <value 0-131072> ebs <value
0-131072> {[color_blind | color_aware]} {conform [permit | replace_dscp <value 0-63>]
{counter [enable | disable]}} exceed [permit {replace_dscp <value 0-63>} | drop] {counter
[enable | disable]} violate [permit {replace_dscp <value 0-63>} | drop] {counter [enable |
disable]} | delete]
show egress_flow_meter {[profile_id <value 1-4> | profile_name <name 1-32>] {access_id
<value 1-128>}}
create port_group id <value 1-64> name <name 16>
config port_group [id <value 1-64> | name <name 16 >] [add | delete] [<portlist> |all]
delete port_group [id <value 1-64> | name <name 16>]
show port_group {id<value 1-64> | name<name 16>}
123

®
7-1 create egress_access_profile profile_id

Description
This command is used to create an egress access list profile. For example, for some hardware, it
may be invalid to specify destination IPv6 address and source IPv6 address at the same time. The
user will be prompted for these limitations.
Format
create egress_access_profile profile_id <value 1-4> profile_name <name 1-32> [ethernet
{vlan {<hex 0x0-0x0fff>} | source_mac <macmask 000000000000-ffffffffffff> |
destination_mac <macmask 000000000000-ffffffffffff> | 802.1p | ethernet_type} | ip {vlan
{<hex 0x0-0x0fff>} | source_ip_mask <netmask> | destination_ip_mask <netmask> | dscp |
[icmp {type | code} | igmp {type} | tcp {src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask
<hex 0x0-0xffff> | flag_mask [all | {urg | ack | psh | rst | syn | fin}]} | udp {src_port_mask
<hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | protocol_id_mask <hex 0x0-0xff>
{user_define_mask <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>}]} | ipv6 {class | source_ipv6_mask <ipv6mask> |
destination_ipv6_mask <ipv6mask> | [tcp {src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask
<hex 0x0-0xffff>} | udp {src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} |
icmp {type | code}]}]
Parameters
profile_id - Specify the index of the egress access list profile.
profile_name - The name of the profile must be specified. The maximum length is 32 characters.
ethernet - Specify this is an Ethernet mask.
vlan - (Optional) Specify a VLAN mask.
<hex 0x0-0x0fff> - Enter the VLAN mask used here.
<macmask> - Enter the source MAC mask used here.
destination_mac - (Optional) Specify the destination MAC mask.
<macmask> - Enter the destination MAC mask used here.
802.1p - (Optional) Specify 802.1p priority tag mask.
ethernet_type - (Optional) Specify the Ethernet type mask.
ip - Specify this is an IPv4 mask.
<hex 0x0-0x0fff> - Enter the VLAN mask used here.
source_ip_mask - (Optional) Specify a source IP address mask.
<netmask> - Enter the source network mask used here.
destination_ip_mask - (Optional) Specify a destination IP address mask.
<netmask> - Enter the destination network mask used here.
dscp - (Optional) Specify the DSCP mask.
type - Specify the type of ICMP traffic.
code - Specify the code of ICMP traffic.
type - Specify the type of IGMP traffic.
src_port_mask - Specify the TCP source port mask.
124

®
dst_port_mask - Specify the TCP destination port mask.

all - Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to 'all'.
urg - Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to 'urg'.
ack - Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to 'ack'.
psh - Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to 'psh'.
rst - Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to 'rst'.
syn - Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to 'syn'.
fin - Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to 'fin'.
protocod_id_mask - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to IP protocol ID traffic.
<hex 0x0-0xff> - Enter the protocol ID mask value here.
user_define_mask - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to the IP protocol ID, and that the
mask option behind the IP header length is 20 bytes.
ipv6 - (Optional) Specify this is an IPv6 mask.
source_ipv6_mask - (Optional) Specify an IPv6 source sub-mask.
<ipv6mask> - Enter the IPv6 source sub-mask value here.
destination_ipv6_mask - Specify an IPv6 destination sub-mask.
<ipv6mask> - Enter the IPv6 destination sub-mask value here.
tcp - (Optional) Specify that the following parameter are application to the TCP configuration.
src_port_mask - Specify an IPv6 Layer 4 TCP source port mask.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the Ipv6 TCP source port mask value here.
dst_port_mask - Specify an IPv6 Layer 4 TCP destination port mask.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the Ipv6 TCP destination port mask value here.
udp - (Optional) Specify that the following parameter are application to the UDP configuration.
src_port_mask - Specify an IPv6 Layer 4 UDP source port mask.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the Ipv6 UDP source port mask value here.
dst_port_mask - Specify an IPv6 Layer 4 UDP destination port mask.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the Ipv6 UDP destination port mask value here.
type - Specify the type of ICMP traffic.
code - Specify the code of ICMP traffic.
Restrictions
Example
To create an egress access list profile with the name “eap-eth-bc” and assign the profile ID to be 1:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create egress_access_profile profile_id 1 profile_name
eap-eth-bc ethernet source_mac FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
Command: create egress_access_profile profile_id 1 profile_name eap-eth-bc
ethernet source_mac FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
125

®
7-2 delete egress_access_profile

Description
This command is used to delete egress access profile command can only delete the profile which
is created by egress ACL module.
Format
delete egress_access_profile [profile_id <value 1-4> | profile_name <name 1-32> | all]
Parameters
<value 1-4> - Enter the profile ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 4.
all - Specify that the whole egress access list profile will be deleted.
Restrictions
Example
To delete egress access list profile ID 1:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete egress_access_profile profile_id 1
Command: delete egress_access_profile profile_id 1
Success.
7-3 config egress_access_profile

Description
This command is used to configure egress access list entries.
Format
config egress_access_profile [profile_id <value 1-4> | profile_name <name 1-32>] [add
access_id [auto_assign | <value 1-128>] [ethernet {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlan_id <vlanid
1-4094>] {mask <hex 0x0-0x0fff>} | source_mac <macaddr> {mask <macmask>} |
destination_mac <macaddr> {mask <macmask>} | 802.1p <value 0-7> | ethernet_type <hex
0x0-0xffff>} | ip {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] {mask <hex 0x0-0x0fff>} |
source_ip <ipaddr> {mask <netmask>} | destination_ip <ipaddr> {mask <netmask>} | dscp
<value 0-63> | [icmp {type <value 0-255> | code <value 0-255>} | igmp {type <value 0-255>} |
tcp {src_port <value 0-65535> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | dst_port <value 0-65535> {mask
<hex 0x0-0xffff>} | flag [all | {urg | ack | psh | rst | syn | fin}]} | udp {src_port <value 0-65535>
<value 0-255> {user_define <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>}}]} | ipv6 {class
126

®
<value 0-255> | source_ipv6 <ipv6addr> {mask <ipv6mask>} | destination_ipv6 <ipv6addr>

{mask <ipv6mask>} | [tcp {src_port <value 0-65535> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | dst_port
<value 0-65535> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>}} | udp {src_port <value 0-65535> {mask <hex 0x0-
0xffff>} | dst_port <value 0-65535> {mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>}} | icmp {type <value 0-255> |
code <value 0-255>} ]}] [vlan_based [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] |
port_group [id<value 1-64> | name <name 16>] | port <port>] [permit {replace_priority_with
<value 0-7> | replace_dscp_with <value 0-63> | counter[enable | disable]} | deny]
{time_range <range_name 32>} | delete access_id <value 1-128>]
Parameters
profile_name - Specify the name of the profile.
add - Specify to add a profile or rule.
access_id - Specify the index of the access list entry. If the auto_assign option is selected, the
access ID is automatically assigned.
auto assign - Specify that the access ID will be configured automatically.
<value 1-128> - Enter the access ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 128.
ethernet - Specify an Ethernet egress ACL rule.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name used for this configuration here. This name can be
up to 32 characters long.
vlanid - Specify a VLAN ID.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID used for this congfiguration here. This value must be
between 1 and 4094.
<macaddr> - Enter the source MAC address used here.
mask - Specify that source MAC mask used.
<macmask> - Enter the source MAC mask value here.
destination_mac - Specify the destination MAC address.
<macaddr> - Enter the destination MAC address used here.
mask - Specify that destination MAC mask used.
<macmask> - Enter the destination MAC mask value here.
802.1p - (Optional) Specify the value of the 802.1p priority tag. The priority tag ranges from 1 to
7.
<value 0-7> - Enter the 802.1p priority tag used here.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the Ethernet type mask used here.
ip - Specify an IP egress ACL rule.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name used for this configuration here. This name can be
between 1 and 4094.
mask - (Optional) Specify the mask used.
<hex 0x0-x0fff> - Enter the mask value used here.
<ipaddr> - Enter the source IP address used here.
mask - Specify the source IP address used here.
<netmask> - Enter the source network mask here.
<ipaddr> - Enter the destination IP address used here.
mask - Specify the destination IP address used here.
127

®
<netmask> - Enter the destination network mask here.

dscp - (Optional) Specify the value of DSCP. The DSCP value ranges from 0 to 63.
<value 0-63> - Enter the DSCP value used here. This value must be between 0 and 63.
icmp - (Optional) Specify that the following parameters configured will apply to the ICMP
configuration.
type - Specify that the rule will apply to the ICMP type traffic value.
<value 0-255> - Enter the ICMP traffic type value here. This value must be between 0 and
255.
code - Specify that the rule will apply to the ICMP code traffic value.
<value 0-255> - Enter the ICMP code traffic value here. This value must be between 0 and
255.
igmp - (Optional) Specify that the following parameters configured will apply to the IGMP
configuration.
type - Specify that the rule will apply to the IGMP type traffic value.
<value 0-255> - Enter the IGMP type traffic value here. This value must be between 0 and
255.
tcp - (Optional) Specify that the following parameters configured will apply to the TCP
configuration.
src_port - Specify that the rule will apply to a range of TCP source ports.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the source port value here. This value must be between 0 and
65535.
mask - Specify the TCP source port mask here.
dst_port - Specify that the rule will apply to a range of TCP destination ports.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the destination port value here. This value must be between 0
and 65535.
mask - Specify the TCP destination port mask here.
flag - (Optional) Specify the TCP flag fields.
all - Specify that the TCP flag field will be set to 'all'.
urg - Specify that the TCP flag field will be set to 'urg'.
ack - Specify that the TCP flag field will be set to 'ack'.
psh - Specify that the TCP flag field will be set to 'psh'.
rst - Specify that the TCP flag field will be set to 'rst'.
syn - Specify that the TCP flag field will be set to 'syn'.
fin - Specify that the TCP flag field will be set to 'fin'.
udp - (Optional) Specify that the following parameters configured will apply to the UDP
configuration.
src_port - Specify the UDP source port range.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the UDP source port range value here.
mask - Specify the UDP source port mask here.
dst_port - Specify the UDP destination port range.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the UDP destination port range value here.
mask - Specify the UDP destination port mask here.
protocod_id - (Optional) Specify that the rule will apply to the value of IP protocol ID traffic.
<value 0-255> - Enter the protocol ID used here. This value must be between 0 and 255.
user_define - (Optional) Specify that the rule will apply to the IP protocol ID and that the mask
options behind the IP header, which has a length of 20 bytes.
mask - Specify the user-defined mask here.
ipv6 - Specify the rule applies to IPv6 fields.
class - (Optional) Specify the value of IPv6 class.
source_ipv6 - (Optional) Specify the value of IPv6 source address.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the source IPv6 source address here.
mask - Specify the IPv6 source address mask here.
128

®
<ipv6mask> - Enter the IPv6 source address mask value here.

destination_ipv6 - (Optional) Specify the value of IPv6 destination address.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the source IPv6 destination address here.
mask - Specify the IPv6 destination address mask here.
<ipv6mask> - Enter the IPv6 destination address mask value here.
tcp - (Optional) Specify the TCP protocol
src_port - Specify the value of the IPv6 layer 4 TCP source port.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the IPv6 TCP source port value here. This value must be
mask - Specify the IPv6 TCP source port mask here.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the IPv6 TCP source port mask value here.
dst_port - Specify the value of the IPv6 layer 4 TCP destination port.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the IPv6 TCP destination port value here. This value must be
mask - Specify the IPv6 TCP destination port mask here.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the IPv6 TCP destination port mask value here.
udp - (Optional) Specify the UDP protocol.
src_port - Specify the value of the IPv6 layer 4 UDP source port.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the IPv6 UDP source port value here. This value must be
mask - Specify the IPv6 UDP source port mask here.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the IPv6 UDP source port mask value here.
dst_port - Specify the value of the IPv6 layer 4 UDP destination port.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the IPv6 UDP destination port value here. This value must be
mask - Specify the IPv6 UDP destination port mask here.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the IPv6 UDP destination port mask value here.
icmp - (Optional) Specify that the following parameters configured will apply to the ICMP
configuration.
type - Specify that the rule will apply to the ICMP type traffic value.
<value 0-255> - Enter the ICMP traffic type value here. This value must be between 0 and
255.
code - Specify that the rule will apply to the ICMP code traffic value.
255.
vlan_based - The rule applies on the specified VLAN.
vlan - Specify the VLAN name.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name used for this configuration here. This name can
be up to 32 characters long.
between 1 and 4094.
port_group - Specify the port group value here.
id - Specify the ID of the port group which the rule applies.
<value 1-64> - Enter the group ID value here. This value must be between 1 and 64.
name - Specify the name of the port group which the rule applies.
<name_string 16> - Enter the port group name here. This name can be up to 16
characters long.
permit - Specify that packets matching the egress access rule are permitted by the Switch.
replace_priority_with - (Optional) Specify the packets that match the egress access rule are
changed the 802.1p priority tag field by the Switch.
<value 0-7> - Enter the replace priority with value here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
replace_dscp_with - (Optional) Specify the packets that match the egress access rule are
changed the DSCP value by the Switch.
<value 0-63> - Enter the replace DSCP with value here. This value must be between 0 and
63.
counter - (Optional) Specify whether the ACL counter feature is enabled or disabled. This
parameter is optional. The default option is disabled. If the rule is not bound with the
flow_meter, all matching packets are counted. If the rule is bound with the flow_meter, then
129

®
the “counter” is overridden.

enable - Specify that the ACL counter feature will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the ACL counter feature will be disabled.
deny - Specify the packets that match the egress access rule are filtered by the Switch.
time_range - (Optional) Specify the name of the time range entry.
<range_name 32> - Enter the time range value here. This name can be up to 32 characters
long.
delete - Specify to delete a profile or rule.
access_id - Specify the index of the access list entry. If the auto_assign option is selected, the
access ID is automatically assigned.
Restrictions
Example
To configure a port-base egress access rule that when the packet go out switch which match the
specified source IP, DSCP and destination IP field, it will not be dropped:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config egress_access_profile profile_id 2 add access_id
auto_assign ip source_ip 10.0.0.1 dscp 25 destination_ip 10.90.90.90 port_group
id 1 permit
Command: config egress_access_profile profile_id 2 add access_id auto_assign ip
source_ip 10.0.0.1 dscp 25 destination_ip 10.90.90.90 port_group id 1 permit
Success.
To configure a vlan-base egress access rule that when the packet go out switch which match the
specified source MAC field, it will be dropped:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config egress_access_profile profile_id 2 add access_id 1
ethernet source_mac 11-22-33-44-55-66 vlan_based vlan_id 1 deny
Command: config egress_access_profile profile_id 2 add access_id 1 ethernet
source_mac 11-22-33-44-55-66 vlan_based vlan_id 1 deny
Success.
7-4 show egress_access_profile

Description
This command is used to display current egress access list table.
Format
show egress_access_profile {[profile_id <value 1-4> | profile_name <name 1-32>]}
130

®
Parameters
profile_id - (Optional) Specify the index of the egress access list profile.
profile_name - (Optional) Specify the name of the profile. The maximum length is 32 characters.
If no parameter is specified, will show the all egress access profile.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display current egress access list table:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show egress_access_profile
Command: show egress_access_profile
Egress Access Profile Table
Total User Set Rule Entries : 3

Total Used HW Entries : 4
Total Available HW Entries : 508
================================================================================
Profile ID: 1 Profile name: EthernetACL Type: Ethernet
MASK on
VLAN : 0xFFF
802.1p

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rule ID : 1 (auto assign) Ports: 1:1
Match on
802.1p : 0
Action:
Permit
================================================================================
================================================================================
Profile ID: 2 Profile name: IPv4 Type: IPv4
MASK on
DSCP
ICMP

131

®
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Match on
DSCP : 3
Action:
Permit
================================================================================
================================================================================
Profile ID: 3 Profile name: IPv6 Type: IPv6
MASK on
Class

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Match on
Class : 10
Action:
Permit
================================================================================
The following example displays an egress access profile that supports an entry mask for each rule:
132

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show egress_access_profile profile_id 1

Command: show egress_access_profile profile_id 1
Egress Access Profile Table
================================================================================
Profile ID: 1 Profile name: EthernetACL Type: Ethernet
MASK on
VLAN : 0xFFF
802.1p

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Match on
802.1p : 0
Action:
Permit
================================================================================
7-5 show current_config egress_access_profile

Description
This command is used to display the egress ACL part of current configuration in user level of
privilege.
The overall current configuration can be displayed by “show config” command which is accessible
in administrator level of privilege.
Format
show current_config egress_access_profile
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display current configuration of egress access list table:
133

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show current_config egress_access_profile

Command: show current_config egress_access_profile
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
# Egress ACL
create egress_access_profile profile_id 1 profile_name 1 ethernet source_mac FF-

FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
config egress_access_profile profile_id 1 add access_id 1 ethernet source_mac 00
-00-00-00-00-01 vlan_based vlan_id 1 permit
create egress_access_profile profile_id 2 profile_name 2 ip source_ip_mask 255.2
55.255.255 destination_ip_mask 255.255.255.255 dscp
config egress_access_profile profile_id 2 add access_id auto_assign ip source_ip
10.0.0.2 destination_ip 10.90.90.90 dscp 25 port_group id 1 permit counter
enable
config egress_access_profile profile_id 2 add access_id auto_assign ip source_ip
10.0.0.1 destination_ip 10.90.90.90 dscp 25 port_group id 1 permit
#-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7-6 config egress_flow_meter

Description
This command is used to configure the packet flow-based metering based on an egress access
profile and rule.
Format
config egress_flow_meter [profile_id <value 1-4> | profile_name <name 1-32>] access_id
<value 1-128> [rate <value 0-1048576> {burst_size <value 0-131072>} rate_exceed
[drop_packet | remark_dscp <value 0-63>] | tr_tcm cir <value 0-1048576> {cbs <value 0-
131072>} pir <value 0-1048576> {pbs <value 0-131072>} {[color_blind | color_aware]}
{conform [permit | replace_dscp <value 0-63>] {counter [enable |disable]}} exceed [permit
{replace_dscp <value 0-63>} | drop] {counter [enable | disable]} violate [permit
{replace_dscp <value 0-63>} | drop] {counter [enable | disable]} |sr_tcm cir <value 0-
1048576> cbs <value 0-131072> ebs <value 0-131072> {[color_blind | color_aware]}
{conform [permit | replace_dscp <value 0-63>] {counter [enable | disable]}} exceed [permit
{replace_dscp <value 0-63>} | drop] {counter [enable | disable]} violate [permit
{replace_dscp <value 0-63>} | drop] {counter [enable | disable]} | delete]
Parameters
profile_id - Specify the profile ID.
<name> - Enter the profile name used here.
access_id - Specify the access ID.
134

®

rate - This specifies the rate for single rate two-color mode. Specify the committed bandwidth in
Kbps for the flow. The value m and n are determined by the project.
<value> - Enter the rate for single rate two-color mode here.
burst_size - (Optional) This specifies the burst size for the single rate “two color” mode. The unit
is Kbytes.
<value 0-131072>- Enter the burst size value here.
rate_exceed - This specifies the action for packets that exceed the committed rate in single rate
“two color” mode. The action can be specified as one of the following:
drop_packet - Drop the packet immediately.
remark_dscp - Mark the packet with a specified DSCP. The packet is set to have the higher
drop precedence.
<value 0-63> - Enter the remark DSCP value here. This value must be between 0 and 63.
tr_tcm - Specify the “two rate three color mode”.
cir - Specify the Committed Information Rate in Kbps.
cbs - (Optional) Specify the “Committed Burst Size”. The unit is Kbytes. That is to say, 1
means 1Kbytes. This parameter is an optional parameter. The default value is 4*1024.
<value 0-131072> - Enter the comitted burst size value here.
pir - Specify the “Peak Information Rate”. The unit is in Kbps. PIR should always be equal to
or greater than CIR.
<value 0-1048576> - Enter the peak information rate value here.
pbs - (Optional) Specify the “Peak Burst Size”. The unit is in Kbytes.
<value 0-131072> - Enter the peak burst size value here.
color_blind - (Optional) Specify the meter mode to be color-blind. The default is color-blind
mode.
color_aware - (Optional) Specify the meter mode to be color-aware. When this code is
specified, user could set the “in-coming packet color” by using command “config
color_aware”. The final color of packet is determined by the initial color of packet and the
metering result.
conform - (Optional) Specify the action when packet is in “green color”.
permit - Permit the packet.
63.
enable - Specify that the ACL counter parameter will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the ACL counter parameter will be disabled.
exceed - Specify the action when packet is in “yellow color”.
permit - (Optional) Permit the packet.
<value 0-63> - Enter the DSCP replace value here. This value must be between 0
and 63.
violate - Specify the action when packet is in “red color”.
and 63.
135

®

sr_tcm - Specify the “single rate three color mode”.
cir - Specify the Committed Information Rate in Kbps.
<value 0-1048576> - Enter the single rate three color mode value here.
cbs - Specify the “committed burst size”. The unit is Kbytes.
<value 0-131072> - Enter the committed burst size value here.
ebs - Specify the “Excess Burst Size”. The unit is Kbytes.
<value 0-131072> - Enter the excess burst size value here.
color_blind - (Optional) Specify the meter mode to be color-blind. The default is color-blind
mode.
color_aware - (Optional) Specify the meter mode to be color-aware. When this code is
specified, user could set the “in-coming packet color” by using command “config
color_aware”. The final color of packet is determined by the initial color of packet and the
metering result.
conform - (Optional) Specify the action when packet is in “green color”.
permit - (Optional) Permit the packet.
63.
exceed - Specify the action when packet is in “yellow color”.
and 63.
violate - Specify the action when packet is in “red color”.
and 63.
delete - Delete the specified “flow_meter”.
Restrictions
Example
To configure a “two rates three color” flow meter:
136

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config egress_flow_meter profile_id 1 access_id 1 tr_tcm

cir 1000 cbs 200 pir 2000 pbs 200 exceed permit replace_dscp 21 violate drop
Command: config egress_flow_meter profile_id 1 access_id 1 tr_tcm cir 1000 cbs
200 pir 2000 pbs 200 exceed permit replace_dscp 21 violate drop
Success.
7-7 show egress_flow_meter

Description
This command is used to display the egress flow-based metering configuration.
Format
show egress_flow_meter {[profile_id <value 1-4> | profile_name <name 1-32>] {access_id
<value 1-128>}}
Parameters
profile_id - (Optional) Specify the index of access list profile.
profile_name - (Optional) Specify the name of the profile.
access_id - (Optional) Specify the access ID.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display current egress flow meter table:
137

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show egress_flow_meter
Command: show egress_flow_meter
Flow Meter Information

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Profile ID:1 Aceess ID:1 Mode : trTCM / ColorAware
CIR(Kbps):1000 CBS(Kbyte):1000 PIR(Kbps):2000 PBS(Kbyte):2000
Action:
Exceed : Drop Counter: Enabled
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Profile ID:1 Aceess ID:2 Mode : srTCM / ColorBlind
CIR(Kbps):1000 CBS(Kbyte):100 EBS(Kbyte):200
Action:
Exceed : Permit Replace DSCP: 60 Counter: Enabled
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total Entries: 2
7-8 create port_group

Description
This command is used to create a port group.
Format
create port_group id <value 1-64> name <name 16>
Parameters
id - Specify the port group ID.
<value 1-64> - Enter the port group ID here. This value must be between 1 and 64.
name - Specify the port group name.
<name 16> - Enter the port group name here. This name can be up to 16 characters long.
Restrictions
Example
To create a port group:
138

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create port_group id 2 name group2

Command: create port_group id 2 name group2
Success.
7-9 config port_group

Description
This command is used to add or delete a port list to a port group.
Format
config port_group [id <value 1-64> | name <name 16 >] [add | delete] [<portlist> |all]
Parameters
<value 1-64> - Enter the port group ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 64.
add - Add a port list to this port group.
delete - Delete a port list from this port group.
Restrictions
Example
Add port list “1-3” to the port group which ID is “2”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config port_group id 2 add 1:1-1:3
Command: config port_group id 2 add 1:1-1:3
Success.
7-10 delete port_group

Description
This command is used to delete port group.
Format
delete port_group [id <value 1-64> | name <name 16>]
139

®
Parameters
Restrictions
Example
To delete the port group which ID is “2”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete port_group id 2
Command: delete port_group id 2
Success.
7-11 show port_group

Description
This command is used to display the port group information.
Format
show port_group {id<value 1-64> | name<name 16>}
Parameters
id - (Optional) Specify the port group ID.
name - (Optional) Specify the port group name.
If not specified parameter, will show all the port group.
Restrictions
Example
To show all the port group information:
140

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show port_group
Command: show port_group
Port Group Table

---------------------------------------------
Port Group ID Port Group Name Ports
2 group2 1:1-1:3
Total Entries :1
141

®
Chapter 8 Address Resolution

Protocol (ARP) Command
List
create arpentry <ipaddr> <macaddr>
delete arpentry [<ipaddr> | all]
config arpentry <ipaddr> <macaddr>
config arp_aging time <min 0-65535>
clear arptable
show arpentry {ipif <ipif_name 12> | ipaddress <ipaddr> | static | mac_address <macaddr>}
8-1 create arpentry

Description
This command is used to enter a static ARP entry into the Switch’s ARP table.
Format
create arpentry <ipaddr> <macaddr>
Parameters
<ipaddr> - The IP address of the end node or station.
<macaddr> - The MAC address corresponding to the IP address above.
Restrictions
Example
To create a static ARP entry for the IP address 10.48.74.121 and MAC address 00-50-BA-00-07-
36:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create arpentry 10.48.74.121 00-50-BA-00-07-36
Command: create arpentry 10.48.74.121 00-50-BA-00-07-36
Success.
8-2 delete arpentry

Description
This command is used to delete an ARP entry, by specifying either the IP address of the entry or
all. Specify ‘all’ clears the Switch’s ARP table.
142

®
Format
delete arpentry [<ipaddr> | all]
Parameters
all - Delete all ARP entries.
Restrictions
Example
To delete an entry of IP address 10.48.74.121 from the ARP table:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete arpentry 10.48.74.121
Command: delete arpentry 10.48.74.121
Success.
8-3 config arpentry

Description
This command is used to configure a static entry’s MAC address in the ARP table. Specify the IP
address and MAC address of the entry.
Format
config arpentry <ipaddr> <macaddr>
Parameters
<macaddr> - The MAC address corresponding to the IP address above.
Restrictions
Example
To configure a static ARP entry, whose IP address is 10.48.74.121, set its MAC address to 00-50-
BA-00-07-37:
143

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config arpentry 10.48.74.121 00-50-BA-00-07-37

Command: config arpentry 10.48.74.121 00-50-BA-00-07-37
Success.
8-4 config arp_aging time

Description
This command is used to set the maximum amount of time, in minutes, that a dynamic ARP entry
can remain in the Switch’s ARP table, without being accessed, before it is dropped from the table.
Format
config arp_aging time <min 0-65535>
Parameters
<min 0-65535>- Enter the ARP age-out time, in minutes. This value must be between 0 and
65535 minutes.The default value is 20.
Restrictions
Example
To configure ARP aging time to 30 minutes:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config arp_aging time 30
Command: config arp_aging time 30
Success.
8-5 clear arptable

Description
This command is used to clear all the dynamic entries from ARP table.
Format
clear arptable
Parameters
None.
144

®
Restrictions
Example
To clear the ARP table:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# clear arptable
Command: clear arptable
Success.
8-6 show arpentry

Description
This command is used to displays the ARP table. You can filter the display by IP address, MAC
address, Interface name, or static entries.
Format
show arpentry {ipif <ipif_name 12> | ipaddress <ipaddr> | static | mac_address <macaddr>}
Parameters
ipif - (Optional) The name of the IP interface the end node or station for which the ARP table
entry was made, resides on.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name here. This value can be up to 12 characters
long.
ipaddress - (Optional) The IP address of the end node or station.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address here.
static - (Optional) Display the static entries in the ARP table.
mac_address - (Optional) Displays the ARP entry by MAC address.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address here.
Restrictions
Example
To display the ARP table:
145

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show arpentry

Command: show arpentry
ARP Aging Time : 20
Interface IP Address MAC Address Type

------------- --------------- ----------------- ---------------
System 10.0.0.0 FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF Local/Broadcast
System 10.1.1.1 00-02-03-04-05-06 Static
System 10.1.1.2 00-02-03-04-05-06 Dynamic
System 10.1.1.3 00-02-03-04-05-06 Static
System 10.90.90.90 00-01-02-03-04-00 Local
System 10.255.255.255 FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF Local/Broadcast
Total Entries: 6
146

®
Chapter 9 ARP Spoofing Prevention

Command List
config arp_spoofing_prevention [add gateway_ip <ipaddr> gateway_mac <macaddr> ports
[<portlist> | all] | delete gateway_ip <ipaddr>]
show arp_spoofing_prevention
9-1 config arp_spoofing_prevention

Description
This command is used to configure the spoofing prevention entry to prevent spoofing of MAC for
the protected gateway. When an entry is created, those ARP packets whose sender IP matches
the gateway IP of an entry, but either its sender MAC field or source MAC field doesnot match the
gateway MAC of the entry will be dropped by the system.
Format
config arp_spoofing_prevention [add gateway_ip <ipaddr> gateway_mac <macaddr> ports
[<portlist> | all] | delete gateway_ip <ipaddr>]
Parameters
add - Specify to add an ARP spoofing prevention entry.
gateway_ip - Specify a gateway IP address to be configured.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address used for this configuration here.
gateway_mac - Specify a gateway MAC address to be configured.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address used for this configuration here.
all - Specify all of ports to be configured.
delete - Specify to delete an ARP spoofing prevention entry.
gateway_ip - Specify a gateway ip to be configured.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the ARP spoofing prevention entry:
147

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config arp_spoofing_prevention add gateway_ip

10.254.254.251 gateway_mac 00-00-00-11-11-11 ports 1:1-1:2
Command: config arp_spoofing_prevention add gateway_ip 10.254.254.251
gateway_mac 00-00-00-11-11-11 ports 1:1-1:2
Success.
9-2 show arp_spoofing_prevention

Description
This command is used to show the ARP spoofing prevention entry.
Format
show arp_spoofing_prevention
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the ARP spoofing prevention entries:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show arp_spoofing_prevention
Command: show arp_spoofing_prevention
Gateway IP Gateway MAC Ports

------------------ ------------------- --------------------
10.254.254.1 00-00-00-11-11-11 1:1-1:2
Total Entries: 1
148

®
Chapter 10 Asymmetric VLAN

Command List
enable asymmetric_vlan
disable asymmetric_vlan
show asymmetric_vlan
10-1 enable asymmetric_vlan

Description
This command is used to enable the asymmetric VLAN function on the Switch.
Format
enable asymmetric_vlan
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable asymmetric VLANs:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable asymmetric_vlan
Command: enable asymmetric_vlan
Success.
10-2 disable asymmetric_vlan

Description
This command is used to disable the asymmetric VLAN function on the Switch.
Format
disable asymmetric_vlan
149

®
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable asymmetric VLANs:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable asymmetric_vlan
Command: disable asymmetric_vlan
Success.
10-3 show asymmetric_vlan

Description
This command is used to display the asymmetric VLAN state on the Switch.
Format
show asymmetric_vlan
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the asymmetric VLAN state currently set on the Switch:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show asymmetric_vlan
Command: show asymmetric_vlan
Asymmetric VLAN: Enabled
150

®
Chapter 11 Auto-Configuration
Command List
enable autoconfig
disable autoconfig
show autoconfig
11-1 enable autoconfig

Description
This command is used to enable auto configuration. When enabled, during power on initialization,
the Switch will get configure file path name and TFTP server IP address from the DHCP server.
Then, the Switch will download the configuration file from the TFTP server for configuration of the
system.
Format
enable autoconfig
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable autoconfig:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable autoconfig
Command: enable autoconfig
Success.
11-2 disable autoconfig

Description
This command is used to disable auto configuration. When disabled, the Switch will configure itself
using the local configuration file
151

®
Format
disable autoconfig
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable autoconfig:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable autoconfig
Command: disable autoconfig
Success.
11-3 show autoconfig

Description
This command is used to display if the auto-configuration is enabled or disabled.
Format
show autoconfig
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To show autoconfig status:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show autoconfig
Command: show autoconfig
Autoconfig State : Disabled
152

®
Chapter 12 Basic Commands Command

List
create account [admin | operator | power_user | user] <username 15> {encrypt [plain_text |
sha_1] <password>}
config account <username> {encrypt [plain_text | sha_1] <password>}
show account
delete account <username>
show switch
enable telnet {<tcp_port_number 1-65535>}
disable telnet
enable web {<tcp_port_number 1-65535>}
disable web
reboot {force_agree}
config firmware image {unit <unit_id>} <pathname> boot_up
create ipif <ipif_name 12> {<network_address>} <vlan_name 32> {secondary | state [enable |
disable] | proxy_arp [enable | disable] {local [enable | disable]}} (RI and EI Mode Only)
config ipif <ipif_name 12> [{ipaddress <network_address> | vlan <vlan_name 32> | state [enable |
disable]} | proxy_arp [enable | disable] {local [enable | disable]} | bootp | dhcp | ipv6
[ipv6address <ipv6networkaddr> | state [enable | disable]] | ipv4 state [enable | disable] |
dhcpv6_client [enable | disable] | ip_directed_broadcast [enable | disable] | dhcp_option12
[hostname <hostname 63> | clear_hostname | state [enable | disable]]]
delete ipif [<ipif_name 12> {ipv6address <ipv6networkaddr>} | all]
enable ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all]
disable ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all]
show ipif {<ipif_name 12>}
enable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto [<ipif_name 12> | all]
disable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto [<ipif_name 12> | all]
show ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto {<ipif_name 12>}
12-1 create account

Description
This command is used to create user accounts. The username is between 1 and 15 characters,
the password is between 0 and 15 characters. It is case sensitive. The number of account (include
admin and user) is up to 8.
Format
create account [admin | operator | power_user | user] <username 15> {encrypt [plain_text |
sha_1] <password>}
Parameters
admin - Specify the name of the admin account.
operator - Specify the name for a operator user account.
power_user – Specify the name for a Power-user account.
user - Specify the name of the user account.
<username 15> - Enter the username used here. This name can be up to 15 characters long.
153

®
encrypt - (Optional) Specify the encryption applied to the account.

plain_text - Select to specify the password in plain text form.
sha_1 - Select to specify the password in the SHA-I encrypted form.
<password> - The password for the user account. The length for of password in plain-text
form and in encrypted form are different. For the plain-text form, passwords must have a
minimum of 0 character and can have a maximum of 15 characters. For the encrypted form
password, the length is fixed to 35 bytes long. The password is case-sensitive.
Restrictions
Example
To create the admin-level user “dlink”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create account admin dlink
Command: create account admin dlink

Success.
To create the user-level user “Remote-Manager”:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create account user Remote-Manager
Command: create account user Remote-Manager

Success.
12-2 config account

Description
This command is used to configure user account. When the password information is not specified
in the command, the system will prompt the user to input the password interactively. For this case,
the user can only input the plain text password.
If the password is present in the command, the user can select to input the password in the plain
text form or in the encrypted form. The encryption algorithm is based on SHA-I.
Format
config account <username> {encrypt [plain_text | sha_1] <password>}
154

®
Parameters
<username> - Enter the user name of the account that has been defined.
encrypt - (Optional) Specify that the password will be encrypted.
plain_text - Select to specify the password in plain text form.
sha_1 - Select to specify the password in the SHA-I enacrpted form.
<password> - The password for the user account. The length for of password in plain-text
form and in encrypted form are different. For the plain-text form, passwords must have a
minimum of 0 character and can have a maximum of 15 characters. For the encrypted
form password, the length is fixed to 35 bytes long. The assword is case-sensitive.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the user password of “dlink” account:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config account dlink
Command: config account dlink
Enter a old password:****

Success.
To configure the user password of “administrator” account:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config account administrator encrypt sha_1
*@&cRDtpNCeBiq15KOQsKVyrA0sAiCIZQwq
Command: config account administrator encrypt sha_1
*@&cRDtpNCeBiq15KOQsKVyrA0sAiCIZQwq
Success.
12-3 show account

Description
This command is used to display user accounts that have been created.
Format
show account
Parameters
None.
155

®
Restrictions
Example
To display the accounts that have been created:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show account
Command: show account
Current Accounts:
Username Access Level
--------------- ------------
admin Admin
oper Operator
power Power_user
user User
Total Entries : 4
12-4 delete account

Description
This command is used to delete an existing account.
Format
delete account <username>
Parameters
<username> - Name of the user who will be deleted.
Restrictions
Example
To delete the user account “System”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete account System
Command: delete account System
Success.
156

®
12-5 show switch

Description
This command is used to display the Switch information.
Format
show switch
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
The following is an example for display of the Switch information.
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show switch
Command: show switch
Device Type : DGS-3120-24TC Gigabit Ethernet Switch

Unit ID : 1
MAC Address : 00-01-02-03-04-00
IP Address : 10.90.90.90 (Manual)
VLAN Name : default
Subnet Mask : 255.0.0.0
Default Gateway : 0.0.0.0
Boot PROM Version : Build 3.00.501
Firmware Version : Build 3.00.522
Hardware Version : B1
Firmware Type : RI
Serial Number : PVT93CB000001
System Name :
System Location :
System Uptime : 0 days, 0 hours, 18 minutes, 46 seconds
System Contact :
Spanning Tree : Disabled
GVRP : Disabled
IGMP Snooping : Disabled
MLD Snooping : Disabled
RIP : Disabled
RIPng : Disabled
157

®
12-6 enable telnet

Description
This command is used to manage the Switch via TELNET based management software. Use the
command to enable TELNET and configure port number.
Format
enable telnet {<tcp_port_number 1-65535>}
Parameters
<tcp_port_number 1-65535> - (Optional) The TCP port number. TCP ports are numbered
between 1 and 65535. The “well-known” TCP port for the TELNET protocol is 23.
Restrictions
Example
To enable TELNET and configure port number:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable telnet 23
Command: enable telnet 23
Success.
12-7 disable telnet

Description
This command is used to manage the Switch via TELNET based management software. Use the
command to disable TELNET.
Format
disable telnet
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
158

®
Example
To disable TELNET:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable telnet
Command: disable telnet
Success.
12-8 enable web

Description
This command is used to manage the Switch via HTTP based management software. Use the
command to enable HTTP and configure port number.
Format
enable web {<tcp_port_number 1-65535>}
Parameters
<tcp_port_number 1-65535> - (Optional) The TCP port number. TCP ports are numbered
between 1 and 65535. The “well-known” TCP port for the WEB protocol is 80.
Restrictions
Example
To enable HTTP and configure port number:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable web 80
Command: enable web 80
Note: SSL will be disabled if web is enabled.

Success.
12-9 disable web

Description
This command is used to manage the Switch via HTTP based management software. Use the
command to disable HTTP.
Format
disable web
159

®
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable HTTP:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable web
Command: disable web
Success.
12-10 reboot
Description
This command is used to restart the Switch.
Format
reboot {force_agree}
Parameters
force_agree - (Optional) When force_agree is specified, the reboot command will be executed
immediatedly without further confirmation.
Restrictions
Example
To reboot the Switch:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# reboot
Command: reboot
Are you sure to proceed with the system reboot?(y/n)

Please wait, the switch is rebooting…
160

®
12-11 reset
Description
This command is used to provide reset functions. The configuration setting will be reset to the
default setting. For the “save system” command, the device will store the reset setting in the
NVRAM and then reboot the system.
The configuration settings include enable/disable of clipaging, greeting message, and command
prompt will also be reset by all the reset commands.
There is one exception, the “reset” command will not reset IP address configured on the system
IPIF and the default gateway setting.
Format
Parameters
config - (Optional) If you specify the ‘config’ keyword , all parameters are reset to default
settings. But device will not do save neither reboot.
system - (Optional) If you specify the ‘system’ keyword, all parameters are reset to default
settings. Then the Switch will do factory reset, save and reboot.
force_agree - (Optional) When force_agree is specified, the reset command will be executed
immediatedly without further confirmation.
Restrictions
Example
To reset the Switch:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#reset system
Command: reset system
Are you sure you want to proceed with system reset?(y/t/n)

y-(reset all include stacking configuration, save, reboot )
t-(reset all exclude stacking configuration, save, reboot)
n-(cancel command)y
Reboot & Load Factory Default Configuration...
Saving configurations and logs to NV-RAM...... Done.

Please wait, the switch is rebooting...
12-12 config firmware image

Description
This command is used to select a firmware file as a boot up file. This command is required to be
supported when multiple firmware images are supported.
161

®
Format
config firmware image {unit <unit_id>} <pathname> boot_up
Parameters
unit - (Optional) Specify which unit on the stacking system. If it is not specified, it refers to the
master unit.
<unit_id> - Specify the single stack unit to apply command.
<pathname>- Specify a firmware file on the device file system.
boot_up - Specify the firmware as the boot up firmware.
Restrictions
Example
To configure c:/DGS3120_Run_2_00_010.had as the boot up image for unit 2:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config firmware image unit 2 c:/DGS3120_Run_2_00_010.had
boot_up
Command: config firmware image unit 2 c:/DGS3120_Run_2_00_010.had boot_up
Success.
12-13 create ipif (RI and EI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to create an IP interface.
Format
create ipif <ipif_name 12> {<network_address>} <vlan_name 32> {secondary | state [enable
| disable] | proxy_arp [enable | disable] {local [enable | disable]}}
Parameters
ipif - Specify the name of the IP interface.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name here. This name can be up to 12 characters
long.
<network_address> - (Optional) Specify the IPv4 networkaddress (xxx.xxx.xxx/xx). It specifies a
host address and length of network mask.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name used here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
secondary - (Optional) Specify the IPv4 secondary interface to be created.
state - (Optional) Specify the state of the IP interface.
enable - Specify that the IP interface state will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the IP interface state will be disabled.
proxy_arp - (Optional) Enable or disable of proxy ARP function. It is for IPv4 function. Default:
Disabled. (RI and EI Mode Only)
162

®
enable - Specify that the proxy ARP option will be enabled.

disable - Specify that the proxy ARP option will be disabled.
local - (Optional) This setting controls whether the system provides the proxy reply for the ARP
packets destined for IP address located in the same interface as the received interface. When
proxy ARP is enabled for an interface, the system will do the proxy reply for the ARP packets
destined for IP address located in a different interface. For ARP packets destined for IP
address located in the same interface, the system will check this setting to determine whether
to reply. (RI and EI Mode Only)
enable - Specify that the local option will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the local option will be disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To create an IP interface:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create ipif Inter2 192.168.16.1/24 default state enable
secondary
Command: create ipif Inter2 192.168.16.1/24 default state enable secondary
Success.
12-14 config ipif

Description
This command is used to configure the IP interface.
Format
config ipif <ipif_name 12> [{ipaddress <network_address> | vlan <vlan_name 32> | state
[enable | disable]} | proxy_arp [enable | disable] {local [enable | disable]} | bootp | dhcp |
ipv6 [ipv6address <ipv6networkaddr> | state [enable | disable]] | ipv4 state [enable | disable]
| dhcpv6_client [enable | disable] | ip_directed_broadcast [enable | disable] | dhcp_option12
[hostname <hostname 63> | clear_hostname | state [enable | disable]]]
Parameters
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name used here. This name can be up to 12
characters long.
ipaddress - (Optional) Configures a network on an ipif. The address should specify a host
address and length of network mask. Since an ipif can have only one IPv4 address, the new
configured address will overwrite the original one.
<network_address> - Enter the network address used here.
vlan - (Optional) Specify the name of the VLAN here.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name used here. This name can be up to 32 characters
long.
state - (Optional) Enable or disable the state of the interface.
enable - Enable the state of the interface.
163

®
disable - Disable the state of the interface.

proxy_arp - Enable/disable of proxy ARP function. It is for IPv4 function. Default: Disabled. (RI
and EI Mode Only)
enable - Specify that the proxy ARP option will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the proxy ARP option will be disabled.
local - This setting controls whether the system provides the proxy reply for the ARP packets
destined for IP address located in the same interface as the received interface. When proxy
ARP is enabled for an interface, the system will do the proxy reply for the ARP packets
destined for IP address located in a different interface. For ARP packets destined for IP
address located in the same interface, the system will check this setting to determine whether
to reply. (RI and EI Mode Only)
enable - Specify that the local option will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the local option will be disabled.
bootp - Use BOOTP to obtain the IPv4 address.
dhcp - Use DHCP to obtain the IPv4 address.
ipv6 - Specify that the IPv6 configuration will be done.
ipv6address - Specify the IPv6 network address. The address should specify a host address
and length of network prefix. There can be multiple V6 addresses defined on an interface.
Thus, as a new address is defined, it is added on this ipif.
<ipv6networkaddr> - Enter the IPv6 address used here.
state - Specify that the IPv6 interface state will be set to enabled or disabled.
enable - Specify that the IPv6 interface sate will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the IPv6 interface sate will be disabled.
ipv4 - Specify that the IPv4 configuration will be done.
state - Specify that the IPv4 interface state will be set to enabled or disabled.
enable - Specify that the IPv4 interface sate will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the IPv4 interface sate will be disabled.
dhcpv6_client - Specify the DHCPv6 client state of the interface.
enable - Enable the DHCPv6 client state of the interface.
disable - Disable the DHCPv6 client state of the interface.
ip_directed_broadcast - Used to configure the IP Directed Broadcast state parameters. (RI
Mode Only)
enable - Enable the IP directed-broadcast state of the interface.
disable - Disable the IP directed-broadcast state of the interface.
dhcp_option12 - Specify the DHCP option 12.
hostname - Specify the host name to be inserted in the DHCPDISCOVER and
DHCPREQUEST message.
<hostname 63> - Enter a name starting with a letter, end with a letter or digit, and have
only letters, digits, and hyphen as interior characters; the maximal length is 63.
clear_hostname - To clear the hostname setting. If host name is empty, system name will be
used to encode option 12. The length of system is more than 63, the superfluous chars will
be truncated. If system name is also empty, then product model name will be used to
encode option 12.
state - Enable or disable insertion of option 12 in the DHCPDISCOVER and DHCPREQUEST
message. The state is disable by default.
enable - Enable insertion of option 12 in the DHCPDISCOVER and DHCPREQUEST
message.
disable - Disable insertion of option 12 in the DHCPDISCOVER and DHCPREQUEST
message.
Restrictions
Example
To configure an interface’s IPv4 network address:
164

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ipif System ipaddress 192.168.69.123/24 vlan default

Command: config ipif System ipaddress 192.168.69.123/24 vlan default
Success.
12-15 delete ipif

Description
This command is used to delete an IP interface.
Format
delete ipif [<ipif_name 12> {ipv6address <ipv6networkaddr>} | all]
Parameters
characters long.
ipv6address – (Optional) Specify the IPv6 network address. The address should specify a host
address and length of network prefix. There can be multiple V6 addresses defined on an
interface.
all – Specify that all the IP interfaces will be used.
Restrictions
Example
To delete an IP interface:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete ipif newone
Command: delete ipif newone
Success.
12-16 enable ipif

Description
This command is used to enable the IP interface.
Format
enable ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all]
165

®
Parameters
ipif_name - Specify the name of the IP interface.
characters long.
all – Specify that all the IP interfaces will be enabled.
Restrictions
Example
To enable an IP interface:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable ipif newone
Command: enable ipif newone
Success.
12-17 disable ipif

Description
This command is used to disable an IP interface.
Format
disable ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all]
Parameters
characters long.
all – Specify that all the IP interfaces will be disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To disable an IP interface:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable ipif newone
Command: disable ipif newone
Success.
166

®
12-18 show ipif

Description
This command is used to display an IP interface.
Format
show ipif {<ipif_name 12>}
Parameters
<ipif_name 12> - (Optional) Enter the IP interface name used here. This name can be up to
12 characters long.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display an IP interface:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ipif
Command: show ipif
IP Interface : System
VLAN Name : default
Interface Admin State : Enabled
IPv4 Address : 10.90.90.90/8 (Manual) Primary
Proxy ARP : Disabled (Local : Disabled)
IP Directed Broadcast : Disabled
IPv4 State : Enabled
DHCPv6 Client State : Disabled
IPv6 State : Enabled
DHCP Option12 State : Disabled
DHCP Option12 Host Name :
Total Entries: 1
12-19 enable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto

Description
This command is used to enable the auto configuration of link local address when there are no
IPv6 addresses explicitly configured. When an IPv6 address is explicitly configured, the link local
address will be automatically configured, and the IPv6 processing will be started. When there is no
IPv6 address explicitly configured, by default, link local address is not configured and the IPv6
167

®
processing will be disabled. By enable this automatic configuration, the link local address will be
automatically configured and IPv6 processing will be started.
Format
enable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto [<ipif_name 12> | all]
Parameters
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name used here. This name can be up to 12 characters
long.
all - Specify that all the IP interfaces will be used.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the IP interface for IPv6 link local automatic:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto newone
Command: enable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto newone
Success.
12-20 disable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto

Description
This command is used to disable the auto configuration of link local address when no IPv6 address
are configured.
Format
disable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto [<ipif_name 12> | all]
Parameters
long.
Restrictions
Example
To disable the IP interface for IPv6 link local automatic:
168

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto newone

Command: disable ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto newone
Success.
12-21 show ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto

Description
This command is used to display the link local address automatic configuration state.
Format
show ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto {<ipif_name 12>}
Parameters
<ipif_name 12> - (Optional) Enter the Ip interface name used here. This name can be up to 12
characters long.
Restrictions
Example
T o display the link local address automatic configuration state.
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto
Command: show ipif_ipv6_link_local_auto
IPIF: System Automatic Link Local Address: Disabled
169

®
Chapter 13 BPDU Attack Protection

Command List
config bpdu_protection ports [<portlist> | all ] {state [enable | disable] | mode [ drop | block |
shutdown} (1)
config bpdu_protection recovery_timer [<sec 60-1000000> | infinite]
config bpdu_protection [trap | log] [none | attack_detected | attack_cleared | both]
enable bpdu_protection
disable bpdu_protection
show bpdu_protection {ports {<portlist>}}
13-1 config bpdu_protection ports

Description
This command is used to configure the BPDU protection function for the ports on the Switch. In
generally, there are two states in BPDU protection function. One is normal state, and another is
under attack state. The under attack state have three modes: drop, block, and shutdown. A BPDU
protection enabled port will enter under attack state when it receives one STP BPDU packet. And it
will take action based on the configuration. Thus, BPDU protection can only be enabled on STP-
disabled port.
BPDU protection has high priority than fbpdu setting configured by configure STP command in
determination of BPDU handling. That is, when fbpbu is configured to forward STP BPDU but
BPDU protection is enabled, then the port will not forward STP BPDU.
Format
config bpdu_protection ports [<portlist> | all ] {state [enable | disable] | mode [ drop | block |
shutdown]}(1)
Parameters
<portlist> - Specified a range of ports to be configured (port number).
all – Specified that all the port will be configured.
state – (Optional) Specified the BPDU protection state. The default state is disable
enable – Specify to enable BPDU protection.
disable – Specify to disable BPDU protection.
mode – (Optional) Specifiy the BPDU protection mode. The default mode is shutdown
drop - Drop all received BPDU packets when the port enters under_attack state.
block - Drop all packets (include BPDU and normal packets) when the port enters
under_attack state.
shutdown - Shut down the port when the port enters under_attack state.
Restrictions
170

®
Example
To set the port state enable and drop mode:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config bpdu_protection ports 1:1 state enable mode drop
Command: config bpdu_protection ports 1:1 state enable mode drop
Success.
13-2 config bpdu_protection recovery_interval

Description
This command is used to configure BPDU protection recovery timer. When a port enters the ‘under
attack’ state, it can be disabled or blocked based on the configuration. The state can be recovered
manually or by the auto recovery mechanism. To manually recover the port, the user needs to
disable and re-enable the port.
Format
config bpdu_protection recovery_timer [<sec 60-1000000> | infinite]
Parameters
recovery_timer - Specified the bpdu_protection Auto-Recovery recovery_timer. The default
value of recovery_timer is 60.
<sec 60 –1000000> - The timer (in seconds) used by the Auto-Recovery mechanism to
recover the port. The valid range is 60 to 1000000.
infinite - The port will not be auto recovered.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the bpdu_protection recovery_timer to 120 seconds for the entire switch:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config bpdu_protection recovery_timer 120
Command: config bpdu_protection recovery_timer 120
Success.
13-3 config bpdu_protection

Description
This command is used to configure the BPDU protection trap state or state for the Switch.
171

®
Format
config bpdu_protection [trap | log] [none | attack_detected | attack_cleared | both]
Parameters
trap - To specify the trap state.
log - To specify the log state.
none - Neither attack_detected nor attack_cleared is trapped or logged.
attack_detected - Events will be logged or trapped when the BPDU attacks is detected.
attack_cleared - Events will be logged or trapped when the BPDU attacks is cleared.
both - The events of attack_detected and attack_cleared shall be trapped or logged.
Restrictions
Example
To config the bpdu_protection trap state as both for the entire switch:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config bpdu_protection trap both
Command: config bpdu_protection trap both
Success.
13-4 enable bpdu_protection

Description
This command is used to enable BPDU protection function globally for the Switch.
Format
enable bpdu_protection
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable bpdu_protection function globally for the entire switch:
172

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable bpdu_protection
Command: enable bpdu_protection
Success.
13-5 disable bpdu_protection

Description
This command is used to disable BPDU protection function globally for the Switch.
Format
disable bpdu_protection
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable bpdu_protection function globally for the entire switch:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable bpdu_protection
Command: disable bpdu_protection
Success.
13-6 show bpdu_protection

Description
This command is used to display BPDU protection global configuration or per port configuration
and current status.
Format
show bpdu_protection {ports {<portlist>}}
Parameters
ports - Specified a range of ports to be configured.
<portlist> - Enter the portlist here.
173

®
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the bpdu_protection for the entire switch:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show bpdu_protection
Command: show bpdu_protection
BPDU Protection Global Settings

----------------------------------------
BPDU Protection Status : Enabled
BPDU Protection Recover Time : 120 seconds
BPDU Protection Trap Status : Both
BPDU Protection Log Status : Both
To show the bpdu_protection status ports 1-12:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show bpdu_protection ports 1:1-1:12
Command: show bpdu_protection ports 1:1-1:12
Port State Mode Status

------ ----------- ---------- ----------
1:1 Enabled Drop Normal
1:2 Disabled Shutdown Normal
174

®
Chapter 14 Cable Diagnostics

Command List
cable_diag ports [<portlist> | all]
14-1 cable_diag ports

Description
This command is used to configure cable diagnostics on ports. For FE port, two pairs of cable will
be diagnosed. For GE port, four pairs of cable will be diagnosed.
The type of cable error can be open, short, or crosstalk.
• Open – The cable in the error pair does not have a connection at the specified position.
• Short – The cables in the error pair has a short problem at the specified position,
• Crosstalk – The cable in the error pair has a crosstalk problem at the specified position.
• Unknow – The diagnosis does not obtain the cable status, please try again.
• NA – No cable was found, maybe it's because cable is out of diagnosis specification or the
quality is too bad.
When a port is in link-up status, the test will obtain the distance of the cable. Since the status is
link-up, the cable will not have the short or open problem. But the test may still detect the crosstalk
problem.
When a port is in link-down status, the link-down may be caused by many factors.
1. When the port has a normal cable connection, but the remote partner is powered off, the
cable diagnosis can still diagnose the health of the cable as if the remote partner is
powered on.
2. When the port does not have any cable connection, the result of the test will indicate no
cable.
3. The test will detect the type of error and the position where the error occurs.
When the link partner is Fast Ethernet ports:

• Where the link partner is powered on with no errors and the link is up, this command
can detect the cable length.
• Where the link partner is powered on with errors, this command can detect whether the
error is open, short, or crosstalk. In this case this command can also detect the distance of
the error.
• Where the link partner is powered down with no errors and the link is down, this
command can detect the cable length.
175

®
• When the link partner is powered down with errors, this command can detect whether
the error is open, short, or crosstalk. In this case this command can also detect the
distance of the error.
• When there is no link partner with no errors, this command can detect the cable length.
• When there is no link partner with errors, this command can detect whether the error is
open, short, or crosstalk. In this case this command can also detect the distance of the
error.
When the link partner is Gigabit Ethernet ports:

• Where the link partner is powered on with no errors and the link is up, this command can
detect the cable length.
• Where the link partner is powered on with errors, this command can detect whether the error
is open, short, or crosstalk. In this case this command can also detect the distance of the error.
• Where the link partner is powered down with no errors and the link is down, this command
cannot detect the cable length.
• When the link partner is powered down with errors, this command can detect whether the
error is open, short, or crosstalk. In this case this command can also detect the distance of the
error.
• When there is no link partner with no errors, this command can detect the cable length.
• When there is no link partner with errors, this command can detect whether the error is open,
short, or crosstalk. In this case this command can also detect the distance of the error.
Note: This test is only for copper cable. The fiber port is not tested. For the combo ports, only the
copper media will be tested.
The cable diagnosis does not support on the Pair 1 and 4 if the link partner is FE port.
If the link partner is FE port, the target port's link will be down after the test.
Format
cable_diag ports [<portlist> | all]
Parameters
all – Specify that all the ports will be used for this configuration.
Restrictions
Example
Test the cable on port 1, 11, and 12:
176

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#cable_diag ports 1:1,1:11-1:12

Command: cable_diag ports 1:1,1:11-1:12
Perform Cable Diagnostics ...
Port Type Link Status Test Result Cable Length (M)

------ ---------- ------------- ------------------------- -----------------
1:1 1000BASE-T Link Up OK 1
1:11 1000BASE-T Link Down No Cable -
1:12 1000BASE-T Link Down No Cable -
177

®
Chapter 15 Command Logging

Command List
enable command logging
disable command logging
show command logging
15-1 enable command logging

Description
This command is used to enable the command logging function.
Note: When the Switch is under the booting procedure or in the procedure of downloading the
configuration, all configuration commands should not be logged. When the user under AAA
authentication, the user name should not changed if user uses “enable admin” command to
replace its privilege.
Format
enable command logging
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the command logging function:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable command logging
Command: enable command logging
Success.
15-2 disable command logging

Description
This command is used to disable the command logging function.
178

®
Format
disable command logging
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable the command logging:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable command logging
Command: disable command logging
Success.
15-3 show command logging

Description
This command is used to display the Switch’s general command logging configuration status.
Format
show command logging
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To show the command logging configuration status:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show command logging
Command: show command logging
Command Logging State : Disabled
179

®
180

®
Chapter 16 Compound Authentication

Command List
create authentication guest_vlan [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>] (RI and EI
Mode Only)
delete authentication guest_vlan [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>] (RI and EI
Mode Only)
config authentication guest_vlan [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>] [add | delete]
ports [<portlist> | all] (RI and EI Mode Only)
config authentication ports [<portlist> | all] {auth_mode [port_based | host_based {vlanid
<vid_list> state [enable | disable]}] | multi_authen_methods [none | any | dot1x_impb |
impb_jwac | impb_wac | mac_impb| mac_jwac]}(1)
config authentication mac_format {case [lowercase | uppercase] | delimiter {[hyphen | colon |
dot | none] | number [1 | 2 | 5]}(1)}(1)
show authentication guest_vlan (RI and EI Mode Only)
show authentication ports {<portlist>}
enable authorization attributes
disable authorization attributes
show authorization
config authentication server failover [local | permit | block]
show authentication
show authentication mac_format
16-1 create authentication guest_vlan (RI and EI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to assign a static VLAN to be guest VLAN. The specific VLAN which
assigned to guest VLAN must be existed. The specific VLAN which assigned to guest VLAN can’t
be deleted.
Format
create authentication guest_vlan [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]
Parameters
vlan - Specify the guest VLAN by VLAN name.
vlanid - Specify the guest VLAN by VLAN ID.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID here. This ID must be between 1 and 4094.
Restrictions
Example
To assign a static VLAN to be guest VLAN:
181

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create authentication guest_vlan vlan guestVLAN

Command: create authentication guest_vlan vlan guestVLAN
Success.
16-2 delete authentication guest_vlan (RI and EI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to delete guest VLAN setting, but won’t delete the static VLAN.
All ports which enable guest VLAN will move to original VLAN after deleting guest VLAN.
Format
delete authentication guest_vlan [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]
Parameters
vlan - Specify the guest VLAN by VLAN name.
vlanid - Specify the guest VLAN by VLAN ID.
Restrictions
Example
To delete guest VLAN configuration:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete authentication guest_vlan vlan guestVLAN
Command: delete authentication guest_vlan vlan guestVLAN
Success.
16-3 config authentication guest_vlan (RI and EI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to configure security port(s) as specified guest VLAN member.
Format
config authentication guest_vlan [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>] [add |
delete] ports [<portlist> | all]
182

®
Parameters
vlan - Assigned a VLAN as guest VLAN. The VLAN must be an existed static VLAN.
vlanid - Assigned a VLAN as guest VLAN. The VLAN must be an existed static VLAN.
add - Specify to add port list to the guest VLAN.
delete - Specify to delete port list from the guest VLAN.
ports - Specify the configured port(s).
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports to be configured here.
all - Specify all ports on the Switch.
Restrictions
Example
To configure security port(s) as specified guest VLAN member:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config authentication guest_vlan vlan guestVLAN add ports
all
Command: config authentication guest_vlan vlan guestVLAN add ports all
Success.
16-4 config authentication ports

Description
This command is used to configure security port(s).
Format
config authentication ports [<portlist> | all] {auth_mode [port_based | host_based {vlanid
<vid_list> state [enable | disable]}] | multi_authen_methods [none | any | dot1x_impb |
impb_jwac | impb_wac | mac_impb| mac_jwac]}(1)
Parameters
auth_mode - (Optional) Specify the authentication mode used.
port_based - If one of the attached hosts passes the authentication, all hosts on the same
port will be granted to access network. If the user fails to authorize, this port will keep trying
the next authentication
host_based - Every user can be authenticated individually. v2.01 and later, can authenticate
client on specific authentication VLAN(s) only for WAC.
vlanid - (Optional) Specific authentication VLAN(s). This is useful when different VLANs on
the Switch have different authentication requirements.
state - (Optional) Specify the VID list's authentication state.
enable - Assign the specified VID list as authentication VLAN(s).
183

®
disable - Remove the specified VID list from authentication VLAN(s). If "vlanid" is not
specified, or all VLANs is disabled, means do not care which VLAN the client comes
from, the client will be authenticated if the client's MAC(not care the VLAN) is not
authenticated. After the client is authenticated, the client will not be re-authenticated
when received from other VLANs. All VLANs are disabled by default.
Note: When port’s authorization mode is changed to port-based, previously authentication
VLAN(s) on this port will be clear.
multi_authen_methods - (Optional) Specify the method for compound authentication. (EI Mode
Only)
none - Compound authentication is not enabled.
any - If any one of the authentication method (802.1X, MAC-based Access Control, WAC or
JWAC) passes, then pass.
dot1x_impb – 802.1X will be verified first, and then IMPB will be verified. Both authentications
need to be passed.
impb_jwac - JWAC will be verified first, and then IMPB will be verified. Both authentications
need to be passed.
impb_wac - WAC will be verified first, and then IMPB will be verified. Both authentications
need to be passed.
mac_impb - MAC will be verified first, and then IMPB will be verified. Both authentications
need to be passed.
mac_jwac - MAC will be verified first, and then JWAC will be verified. Both authentications
need to be passed.
Restrictions
Example
The following example sets the compound authentication method of all ports to any:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config authentication ports all multi_authen_methods any
Command: config authentication ports all multi_authen_methods any
Success.
16-5 config authentication mac_format

Description
This command is used to configure the MAC address format of the RADIUS authentication user
name for MAC-based Access Control and IGMP security.
Format
config authentication mac_format {case [lowercase | uppercase] | delimiter {[hyphen | colon
| dot | none] | number [1 | 2 | 5]}(1)}(1)
Parameters
case - (Optional) Specify the leter format.
lowercase - User lowercase letters, e.g. aabbccddeeff.
uppercase - Use uppercase letters, e.g. AABBCCDDEEFF.
184

®
delimiter - (Optional)Specify whether to use delimiter and number of delimiters for MAC address.
hyphen - (Optional) Use “-” when specifying MAC address, e.g. aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff.
colon - (Optional) Use “:” when specifying MAC address, e.g. aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff.
dot - (Optional) Use “.”when specifying MAC address, e.g. aa.bb.cc.dd.ee.ff.
none - (Optional) Do not use any delimiter when specifying MAC address, e.g. aabbccddeeff.
number - (Optional)Specify the number of delimiters.
1 - Use one delimiter, e.g. aabbcc-ddeeff.
2 - Use two delimiters, e.g. aabb-ccdd-eeff.
5 - Use five delimiters, e.g. aa-bb-cc-dd-ee-ff.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the MAC address format to IEFT style:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config authentication mac_format case uppercase delimiter
hyphen number 5
Command: config authentication mac_format case uppercase delimiter hyphen number
5
Success.
16-6 show authentication guest_vlan (RI and EI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to show guest VLAN setting.
Format
show authentication guest_vlan
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
This example displays the guest VLAN setting:
185

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show authentication guest_vlan

Command: show authentication guest_vlan
Guest VLAN VID : 2

Guest VLAN Member Ports: 1:1-1:24
Total Entries: 1
16-7 show authentication ports

Description
This command is used to display authentication setting on port(s).
Format
show authentication ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a list of ports to be displayed.
If not specify the port list, displays compound authentication setting of all ports.
Restrictions
None.
Example
This example displays authentication setting for all ports:
186

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show authentication ports

Command: show authentication ports
Port Methods Auth Mode Authentication VLAN(s)

---- -------------- ----------- ----------------------
1:1 None Host-based
1:2 None Host-based
1:3 None Host-based
1:4 None Host-based
1:5 None Host-based
1:6 None Host-based
1:7 None Host-based
1:8 None Host-based
1:9 None Host-based
1:10 None Host-based
16-8 enable authorization attributes

Description
This command is used to enable authorization.
Format
enable authorization attributes
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
This example sets authorization global state enabled:
187

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable authorization attributes

Command: enable authorization attributes
Success.
16-9 disable authorization attributes

Description
This command is used to disable authorization.
Format
disable authorization attributes
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
This example sets authorization global state disabled:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable authorization attributes
Command: disable authorization attributes
Success.
16-10 show authorization

Description
This command is used to display authorization status.
Format
show authorization
Parameters
None.
188

®
Restrictions
None.
Example
This example displays authorization status:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show authorization
Command: show authorization
Authorization for Attributes: Enabled
16-11 config authentication server failover

Description
This command is used to configure authentication server failover function.
Format
config authentication server failover [local | permit | block]
Parameters
local - Use local DB to authenticate the client.
permit - The client is always regarded as authenticated.
block - Block the client (Default setting).
Restrictions
Example
Set authentication server auth fail over state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config authentication server failover local
Command: config authentication server failover local
Success.
16-12 show authentication

Description
This command is used to display authentication global configuration.
189

®
Format
show authentication
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show authentication global configuration:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show authentication
Command: show authentication
Authentication Server Failover: Block.
16-13 show authentication mac_format

Description
This command is used to display the authentication MAC format settings.
Format
show authentication mac_format
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the authentication MAC format settings:
190

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show authentication mac_format

Command: show authentication mac_format
Case : Uppercase
Delimiter : Hyphen
Delimiter Number : 5
191

®
Chapter 17 Configuration Command

List
show config [effective | modified | current_config | boot_up | information| file <pathname>]
{[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}} {[include |
exclude | begin] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}} {[include | exclude |
begin] <filter_string80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}}}}}
config configuration {unit <unit_id>} <pathname> [boot_up | active]
save {[config <pathname> | log | all]}
show boot_file
17-1 show config

Description
This command is used to display the content of the current configuration, the configuration to be
used in next boot, or the configuration file specified by the command.
The output stream of the configuration data can be filtered by the expression specified at the end
of the command. The expression can contain up to three multiple filter evaluations. A filter
evaluation begins with a filter type (include, exclude, and begin), followed by up to three filter
strings (ex: “stp”). A filter string is enclosed by symbol ". The following describes the meaning of
the each filter type.
include: includes lines that contain the specified filter string.
exclude: excludes lines that contain the specified filter string
begin: The first line that contains the specified filter string will be the first line of the output.
The relationship of multiple filter strings following the same filter type is OR. That is, one line is
qualified if one of specified filter strings is matched.
If more than one filter evaluation is specified; the output of filtered by the former evaluation will be
used as the input of the latter evaluation.
Format
show config [effective | modified | current_config | boot_up | information| file <pathname>]
{[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}} {[include
| exclude | begin] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}} {[include |
exclude | begin] <filter_string80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}}}}}
Parameters
effective - Show only commands which affects the behavior of the device. For example, if STP is
disabled, then for STP configuration, only “STP is disabled” is displayed. All other lower level
192

®
setting regarding STP is not displayed. The lower level setting will only be displayed when the
higher level setting is enabled.
Note: This parameter is only for the current configuration.
modified - Show only the commands which are not from the ‘reset’ default setting.
Note:This parameter is only for the current configuration.
current_config - Specify the current configuration.
boot_up - Specify the list of the bootup configuration.
file - Specify that the unit can display the specified configuration file.
<pathname 64> - The pathname specifies an absolute pathname on the device file system. If
pathname is not specified, the boot up configuration is implied. This name can be up to 64
characters long.
include - (Optional) Include lines that contain the specified filter string.
exclude - (Optional) Exclude lines that contain the specified filter string.
begin - (Optional) The first line that contains the specified filter string will be the first line of the
output.
<filter_string 80> - A filter string is enclosed by symbol ". Thus, the filter string itself cannot
contain the “character. The filter string is case sensitive. This value can be up to 80
characters long.
<filter_string 80> - (Optional) A filter string is enclosed by symbol ". Thus, the filter string
itself cannot contain the “character. The filter string is case sensitive. This value can be up
itself cannot contain the “character. The filter string is case sensitive. This value can be
output.
characters long.
output.
characters long.
Restrictions
193

®
Example
The following example illustrates how the special filters ‘modified’ and .’effective’ affect the
configuration display:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show config modified
Command:show config modified
enable loopdetect
enable ssl
config ipif System vlan default ipaddress 192.168.3.4/8 state enable
create arpentry 10.1.1.1 00-00-00-00-00-01
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show config effective

Command:show config effective
enable loopdetect
config loopdetect recover_timer 60
config loopdetect interval 10
config loopdetect port 1-28 state disabled
disable sim
disable stp
disable ssh
Output truncated...
17-2 config configuration

Description
This command is used to select a configuration file as the next boot up configuration or to apply a
specific configuration to the system. This command is required when multiple configuration files
are supported.
Format
config configuration {unit <unit_id>} <pathname> [boot_up | active]
Parameters
master unit.
<unit_id> - Enter the unit ID here.
<pathname> - Specify a configuration file on the device file system.
boot_up - (Optional) Specify it as a boot up file.
active - (Optional) Specify to apply the configuration.
Restrictions
194

®
Example
To configure the Switch’s configuration file as boot up:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config configuration config.cfg boot_up
Command: config configuration config.cfg boot_up
Success.
17-3 save
Description
This command is used to save the current configuration to a file. This command is required to be
supported regardless of whether file system is supported or whether multiple configuration files are
supported. The configuration will only save to the master unit. For projects that support multiple
configurations, the configuration ID or configuration file name can be specified. If the configuration
ID or configuration file name is not specified, the next boot up configuration is implied.
Format
save {[config <pathname> | log | all]}
Parameters
config - (Optional) Specify to save the configuration to a file.
<pathname> - The pathname specifies the absolute pathname on the device file system. If
pathname is not specified, it refers to the boot up configuration file.
log - (Optional) Specify to save the log.
all - (Optional) Specify to save the configuration and the log.
Restrictions
Example
To save the configuration:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#save config c:/3120.cfg
Command: save config c:/3120.cfg
Saving all configurations to NV-RAM.......... Done.
17-4 show boot file

Description
This command is used to display the configuration file and firmware image assigned as boot up
files.
195

®
Format
show boot_file
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the boot file:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show boot_file
Command: show boot_file
Bootup Firmware : /c:/runtime.had

Bootup Configuration : /c:/config.cfg
196

®
Chapter 18 Configuration Trap

Command List
config configuration trap {save [enable | disable] | upload [enable | disable] | download [enable |
disable]}
18-1 config configuration trap

Description
This command is used to configure the trap status of configuration saving completed, configuration
uploading completed and configuration downloading completed.When set to enabled, the SNMP
Agent will send a trap while the related operation (save / upload / download the configuration) is
successfully completed.
Format
config configuration trap {save [enable | disable] | upload [enable | disable] | download
[enable | disable]}
Parameters
save - (Optional) Enable or disable sending the trap by the SNMP agent when the configuration
is saved in NVRAM.
enable - Send the trap by the SNMP agent when the configuration is saved in NVRAM.
disable - No trap will be send.
upload - (Optional) Enable or disable sending the trap by the SNMP agent when successfully
uploading configuration.
enable - Send the trap by the SNMP agent when successfully uploading configuration.
download - (Optional) Enable or disable sending the trap by the SNMP agent when successfully
downloading configuration.
enable - Send the trap by the SNMP agent when successfully downloading configuration.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the trap of a configuration saving completed:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config configuration trap save enable
Command: config configuration trap save enable
Success.
197

®
198

®
Chapter 19 Connectivity Fault

Management (CFM)
Command List (RI and EI
Mode Only)
create cfm md <string 22> {md_index <uint 1-4294967295>} level <int 0-7>
config cfm md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] {mip [none | auto | explicit] |
sender_id [none | chassis | manage | chassis_manage]}
create cfm ma <string 22> {ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>} md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-
4294967295>]
config cfm ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>] md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-
4294967295>] {vlanid <vlanid 1-4094> | mip [none | auto | explicit | defer] | sender_id [none |
chassis | manage | chassis_manage | defer] | ccm_interval [100ms | 1sec | 10sec | 1min |
10min] | mepid_list [add | delete] <mepid_list1-8191>}
create cfm mep <string 32> mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-
4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>] direction [inward | outward]
port <port>
config cfm mep [mepname <string 32> | mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-
4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>]] {state [enable | disable] |
ccm [enable | disable] | pdu_priority <int 0-7> | fault_alarm [all | mac_status | remote_ccm |
error_ccm | xcon_ccm | none] | alarm_time <centisecond 250 -1000> | alarm_reset_time
<centisecond 250-1000>}
delete cfm mep [mepname <string 32> | mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-
4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>]]
delete cfm ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>] md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-
4294967295>]
delete cfm md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>]
enable cfm
disable cfm
config cfm ports <portlist> state [enable | disable]
show cfm ports <portlist>
show cfm {[md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] {ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint
1-4294967295>] {mepid <int 1-8191>}} | mepname <string 32>]}
show cfm fault {md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] {ma [<string 22> | ma_index
<uint 1-4294967295>]}}
show cfm port <port> {level <int 0-7> | direction [inward | outward] | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>}
cfm loopback <macaddr> [mepname <string 32> | mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> |
md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>]] {num
<int 1-65535> | [length <int 0-1500> | pattern <string 1500>] | pdu_priority <int 0-7>}
cfm linktrace <macaddr> [mepname <string 32> | mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index
<uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>]] {ttl <int 2-255> |
pdu_priority <int 0-7>}
show cfm linktrace [mepname <string 32> | mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index <uint
1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>]] {trans_id <uint>}
delete cfm linktrace {[md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] {ma [<string 22> |
ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>] {mepid <int 1-8191>}} | mepname <string 32>]}
show cfm mipccm
config cfm mp_ltr_all [enable | disable]
show cfm mp_ltr_all
show cfm remote_mep [mepname <string 32> | md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-
4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>] mepid <int 1-8191>]
199

®
remote_mepid <int 1-8191>

show cfm pkt_cnt {[ports <portlist> {[rx | tx]} | [rx | tx] | ccm]}
clear cfm pkt_cnt {[ports <portlist> {[rx | tx]} | [rx | tx] | ccm]}
config cfm trap [ais | lock] state [enable | disable]
19-1 create cfm md

Description
This command is used to create a maintenance domain.
Format
create cfm md <string 22> {md_index <uint 1-4294967295>} level <int 0-7>
Parameters
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance domain name. This name can be up to 22 characters long.
md_index - (Optional) Specify the maintenance domain index.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance domain index value here. This value must be
level - Specify the maintenance domain level.
<int 0-7> - Enter the maintenance domain level here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
Restrictions
Example
To create a maintenance domain called “op_domain” and assign a maintenance domain level of
“2”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create cfm md op_domain level 2
Command: create cfm md op_domain level 2
Success.
19-2 config cfm md

Description
This command is used to configure the parameters of a maintenance domain. The creation of
MIPs on an MA is useful to trace the link, MIP by MIP. It also allows the user to perform a loopback
from an MEP to an MIP.
Format
config cfm md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] {mip [none | auto | explicit] |
sender_id [none | chassis | manage | chassis_manage]}
200

®
Parameters
md_index - Specify the maintenance domain index.
mip - (Optional) This is the control creations of MIPs.
none - Do not create MIPs. This is the default value.
auto - MIPs can always be created on any ports in this MD, if that port is not configured with
an MEP of this MD. For the intermediate switch in an MA, the setting must be automatic in
order for the MIPs to be created on this device.
explicit - MIPs can be created on any ports in this MD, only if the next existent lower level has
an MEP configured on that port, and that port is not configured with an MEP of this MD.
sender_id - (Optional) This is the control transmission of the sender ID TLV.
none - Do not transmit the sender ID TLV. This is the default value.
chassis - Transmit the sender ID TLV with the chassis ID information.
manage - Transmit the sender ID TLV with the managed address information.
chassis_manage - Transmit sender ID TLV with chassis ID information and manage address
information.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the maintenance domain called “op_domain” and specify the explicit option for
creating MIPs:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config cfm md op_domain mip explicit
Command: config cfm md op_domain mip explicit
Success.
19-3 create cfm ma

Description
This command is used to create a maintenance association. Different MAs in an MD must have
different MA Names. Different MAs in different MDs may have the same MA Name.
Format
create cfm ma <string 22> {ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>} md [<string 22> | md_index
<uint 1-4294967295>]
Parameters
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance association name. This name can be up to 22 characters
long.
ma_index - (Optional) Specify the maintenance association index.
201

®
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance association index value here. This value must
md - Specify the maintenance domain name.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance domain name here. This name can be up to 22
characters long.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance domain index value here. This value must
Restrictions
Example
To create a maintenance association called “ma” and assign it to the maintenance domain
“op_domain”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create cfm ma op1 md op_domain
Command: create cfm ma op1 md op_domain
Success.
19-4 config cfm ma

Description
This command is used to configure the parameters of a maintenance association. The MEP list
specified for an MA can be located in different devices. MEPs must be created on the ports of
these devices explicitly. An MEP will transmit a CCM packet periodically across the MA. The
receiving MEP will verify these received CCM packets from the other MEPs against this MEP list
for the configuration integrity check.
Format
config cfm ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>] md [<string 22> | md_index
<uint 1-4294967295>] {vlanid <vlanid 1-4094> | mip [none | auto | explicit | defer] | sender_id
[none | chassis | manage | chassis_manage | defer] | ccm_interval [100ms | 1sec | 10sec |
1min | 10min] | mepid_list [add | delete] <mepid_list 1-8191>}
Parameters
long.
ma_index - Specify the maintenance association index.
characters long.
202

®

vlanid - (Optional) Specify the VLAN Identifier. Different MAs must be associated with different
VLANs.
mip - (Optional) This is the control creation of MIPs.
none - Specify not to create MIPs.
auto - MIPs can always be created on any ports in this MA, if that port is not configured with
an MEP of that MA.
explicit - MIP can be created on any ports in this MA, only if the next existing lower level has
an MEP configured on that port, and that port is not configured with an MEP of this MA.
defer - Inherit the setting configured for the maintenance domain that this MA is associated
with. This is the default value.
sender_id - (Optional) This is the control transmission of the sender ID TLV.
none - Do not transmit the sender ID TLV. This is the default value.
chassis - Transmit the sender ID TLV with the chassis ID information.
manage - Transmit the sender ID TLV with the manage address information.
chassis_manage - Transmit the sender ID TLV with the chassis ID information and the
manage address information.
defer - Inherit the setting configured for the maintenance domain that this MA is associated
with. This is the default value.
ccm_interval - (Optional) This is the CCM interval.
100ms - Specify that the CCM interval will be set to 100 milliseconds. Not recommended.
1sec - Specify that the CCM interval will be set to 1 second.
10sec - Specify that the CCM interval will be set to 10 seconds. This is the default value.
1min - Specify that the CCM interval will be set to 1 minute.
10min - Specify that the CCM interval will be set to 10 minutes.
mepid_list - (Optional) This is to specify the MEPIDs contained in the maintenance association.
The range of the MEPID is 1-8191.
add - Specify to add MEPID(s).
delete - Specify to delete MEPID(s). By default, there is no MEPID in a newly created
maintenance association.
<mepid_list 1-8191> - Enter the MEP ID list here.
Restrictions
Example
To configure a CFM MA:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config cfm ma op1 md op_domain vlanid 1 ccm_interval 1sec
Command: config cfm ma op1 md op_domain vlanid 1 ccm_interval 1sec
Success.
19-5 create cfm mep

Description
This command is used to create an MEP. Different MEPs in the same MA must have a different
MEPID. MD name, MA name, and MEPID that together identify a MEP.
Different MEPs on the same device must have a different MEP name. Before creating an MEP, its
MEPID should be configured in the MA’s MEPID list.
203

®
Format
create cfm mep <string 32> mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-
4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>] direction [inward | outward]
port <port>
Parameters
<string 32> - Enter the MEP name used. It is unique among all MEPs configured on the
device.This name can be up to 32 characters long.
mepid - Specify the MEP ID. It should be configured in the MA’s MEPID list.
<int 1-8191> - Enter the MEP ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 8191.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance domain name used here. This name can be up to 22
characters long.
ma - Specify the maintenance association name.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance association name used here. This name can be up to 22
characters long.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance association index value here. This value
must be between 1 and 4294967295.
direction - This is the MEP direction.
inward - Specify the inward facing (up) MEP.
outward - Specify the outward facing (down) MEP.
port - Specify the port number. This port should be a member of the MA’s associated VLAN.
<port> - Enter the port number used here.
Restrictions
Example
To create a CFM MEP:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create cfm mep mep1 mepid 1 md op_domain ma op1 direction
inward port 2
Command: create cfm mep mep1 mepid 1 md op_domain ma op1 direction inward port
1:2
Success.
19-6 config cfm mep

Description
This command is used to configure the parameters of an MEP.
An MEP may generate 5 types of Fault Alarms, as shown below by their priorities from high to low:
• Cross-connect CCM Received: priority 5
204

®
• Error CCM Received: priority 4

• Some Remote MEPs Down: priority 3
• Some Remote MEP MAC Status Errors: priority 2
• Some Remote MEP Defect Indications: priority 1
If multiple types of the fault occur on an MEP, only the fault with the highest priority will be alarmed.
Format
config cfm mep [mepname <string 32> | mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index
<uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>]] {state [enable |
disable] | ccm [enable | disable] | pdu_priority <int 0-7> | fault_alarm [all | mac_status |
remote_ccm | error_ccm | xcon_ccm | none] | alarm_time <centisecond 250 -1000> |
alarm_reset_time <centisecond 250-1000>}
Parameters
mepname - Specify the MEP name.
<string 32> - Enter the MEP name used here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
mepid - Specify the MEP ID.
characters long.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance domain index value here. This value
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance association name used here. This name can be up to
22 characters long.
state - (Optional) This is the MEP administrative state.
enable - Specify that the MEP will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the MEP will be disabled. This is the default value.
ccm - (Optional) This is the CCM transmission state.
enable - Specify that the CCM transmission will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the CCM transmission will be disabled. This is the default value.
pdu_priority - (Optional) The 802.1p priority is set in the CCMs and the LTMs messages
transmitted by the MEP. The default value is 7.
<int 0-7> - Enter the PDU priority value here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
fault_alarm - (Optional) This is the control types of the fault alarms sent by the MEP.
all - All types of fault alarms will be sent.
mac_status - Only the fault alarms whose priority is equal to or higher than “Some Remote
MEP MAC Status Errors” are sent.
remote_ccm - Only the fault alarms whose priority is equal to or higher than “Some Remote
MEPs Down” are sent.
error_ccm - Only the fault alarms whose priority is equal to or higher than “Error CCM
Received” are sent.
xcon_ccm - Only the fault alarms whose priority is equal to or higher than “Cross-connect
CCM Received” are sent.
none - No fault alarm is sent. This is the default value.
alarm_time - (Optional) This is the time that a defect must exceed before the fault alarm can be
sent. The unit is centisecond, the range is 250-1000. The default value is 250.
205

®
<centisecond 250-1000> - Enter the alarm time value here. This value must be between 250
and 1000 centiseconds.
alarm_reset_time - (Optional) This is the dormant duration time before a defect is triggered
before the fault can be re-alarmed. The unit is centisecond, the range is 250-1000. The default
value is 1000.
<centisecond 250-1000> - Enter the alarm reset time value here. This value must be
between 250 and 1000 centiseconds.
Restrictions
Example
To configure a CFM MEP:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config cfm mep mepname mep1 state enable ccm enable
Command: config cfm mep mepname mep1 state enable ccm enable
Success.
19-7 delete cfm mep

Description
This command is used to delete a previously created MEP.
Format
delete cfm mep [mepname <string 32> | mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index
<uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>]]
Parameters
mepname - Specify the MEP name.
mepid - Specify the MEP ID.
characters long.
22 characters long.
206

®
Restrictions
Example
To delete a CFM MEP:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete cfm mep mepname mep1
Command: delete cfm mep mepname mep1
Success.
19-8 delete cfm ma

Description
This command is used to delete a created maintenance association. All MEPs created in the
maintenance association will be deleted automatically.
Format
delete cfm ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>] md [<string 22> | md_index
<uint 1-4294967295>]
Parameters
long.
characters long.
Restrictions
Example
To delete a CFM MA:
207

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete cfm ma op1 md op_domain

Command: delete cfm ma op1 md op_domain
Success.
19-9 delete cfm md

Description
This command is used to delete a previously created maintenance domain. All the MEPs and
maintenance associations created in the maintenance domain will be deleted automatically.
Format
delete cfm md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>]
Parameters
Restrictions
Example
To delete a CFM MD:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete cfm md op_domain
Command: delete cfm md op_domain
Success.
19-10 enable cfm

Description
This command is used to enable the CFM globally.
Format
enable cfm
208

®
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the CFM globally:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable cfm
Command: enable cfm
Success.
19-11 disable cfm

Description
This command is used to disable the CFM globally.
Format
disable cfm
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable the CFM globally:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable cfm
Command: disable cfm
Success.
209

®
19-12 config cfm ports

Description
This command is used to enable or disable the CFM function on a per-port basis. By default, the
CFM function is disabled on all ports.
If the CFM is disabled on a port:
1. MIPs are never created on that port.
2. MEPs can still be created on that port, and the configuration can be saved.
3. MEPs created on that port can never generate or process CFM PDUs. If the user issues a
Loopback or Link trace test on those MEPs, it will prompt the user to inform them that the
CFM function is disabled on that port.
Format
config cfm ports <portlist> state [enable | disable]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports used for this configuration here.
state - Specify that the the CFM function will be enabled or disabled.
enable - Specify that the the CFM function will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the the CFM function will be disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the CFM ports:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config cfm ports 1:2-1:5 state enable
Command: config cfm ports 1:2-1:5 state enable
Success.
19-13 show cfm ports

Description
This command is used to show the CFM state of specified ports.
Format
show cfm ports <portlist>
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter the list of logical ports.
210

®
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the CFM ports:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show cfm ports 1:3-1:6
Command: show cfm ports 1:3-1:6
Port State
----- --------
1:3 Enabled
1:4 Enabled
1:5 Enabled
1:6 Disabled
19-14 show cfm

Description
This command is used to show the CFM configuration.
Format
show cfm {[md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] {ma [<string 22> | ma_index
<uint 1-4294967295>] {mepid <int 1-8191>}} | mepname <string 32>]}
Parameters
md - (Optional) Specify the maintenance domain name.
characters long.
ma - (Optional) Specify the maintenance association name.
22 characters long.
mepid - (Optional) Specify the MEP ID.
<int 1-8191> - Enter the MEP ID used here. This value must be between 1 and
8191.
mepname - (Optional) Specify the MEP name.
211

®
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the CFM configuration:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show cfm
Command: show cfm
CFM State: Enabled

AIS Trap State: Disabled
LCK Trap State: Disabled
MD Index MD Name Level

---------- ---------------------- -----
1 op_domain 2
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show cfm md op_domain

Command: show cfm md op_domain
MD Index : 1
MD Name : op_domain
MD Level : 2
MIP Creation: Explicit
SenderID TLV: None
MA Index MA Name VID

---------- ---------------------- ----
1 op1 1
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show cfm md op_domain ma op1

Command: show cfm md op_domain ma op1
MA Index : 1
MA Name : op1
MA VID : 1
MIP Creation: Defer
CCM Interval: 1 second
SenderID TLV: Defer
MEPID List : 1
MEPID Direction Port Name MAC Address

----- --------- ----- ----------- -----------------
1 Inward 1:2 mep1 00-01-02-03-04-02
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show cfm mepname mep1

Command: show cfm mepname mep1
Name : mep1
MEPID : 1
212

®
Port : 1:2
Direction : Inward
CFM Port Status : Enabled
MAC Address : 00-01-02-03-04-02
MEP State : Enabled
CCM State : Enabled
PDU Priority : 7
Fault Alarm : Disabled
Alarm Time : 250 centisecond((1/100)s)
Alarm Reset Time : 1000 centisecond((1/100)s)
Highest Fault : Some Remote MEP Down
AIS State : Disabled
AIS Period : 1 Second
AIS Client Level : Invalid
AIS Status : Not Detected
LCK State : Disabled
LCK Period : 1 Second
LCK Client Level : Invalid
LCK Status : Not Detected
Out-of-Sequence CCMs: 0 received
Cross-connect CCMs : 0 received
Error CCMs : 0 received
Normal CCMs : 0 received
Port Status CCMs : 0 received
If Status CCMs : 0 received
CCMs transmitted : 71
In-order LBRs : 0 received
Out-of-order LBRs : 0 received
Next LTM Trans ID : 0
Unexpected LTRs : 0 received
LBMs Transmitted : 0
AIS PDUs : 0 received
AIS PDUs Transmitted: 0
LCK PDUs : 0 received
LCK PDUs Transmitted: 0
Remote
MEPID MAC Address Status RDI PortSt IfSt LCK Detect Time
------ ----------------- ------ --- ------- ---------- --- -------------------
2 FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF FAILED No No No No 2011-07-13 12:00:00
19-15 show cfm fault

Description
This command is used to display all the fault conditions detected by the MEPs contained in the
specified MA or MD. This display provides the overview of the fault status by MEPs.
213

®
Format
show cfm fault {md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] {ma [<string 22> |
ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>]}}
Parameters
characters long.
22 characters long.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the CFM faults:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show cfm fault
Command: show cfm fault
MD Name MA Name MEPID Status AIS Status LCK Status

----------- ----------- ----- ---------------------- ------------ ------------
op_domain op1 1 Cross-connect CCM Received
19-16 show cfm port

Description
This command is used to show MEPs and MIPs created on a port.
Format
show cfm port <port> {level <int 0-7> | direction [inward | outward] | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>}
Parameters
level - (Optional) Specify the MD Level. If not specified, all levels are shown.
<int 0-7> - Enter the MD level value here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
direction - (Optional) Specify the MEP direction.
inward - Specify that the MEP direction will be inward facing.
214

®
outward - Specify that the MEP direction will be outward facing.

If not specified, both directions and the MIP are shown.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the VLAN identifier. If not specified, all VLANs are shown.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the MEPs and MIPs created on a port:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show cfm port 1
Command: show cfm port 1
MAC Address: 00-05-78-82-32-01
MD Name MA Name MEPID Level Direction VID

----------- ----------- ----- ----- --------- ----
op_domain op1 1 2 inward 2
cust_domain cust1 8 4 inward 2
serv_domain serv2 MIP 3 2
19-17 cfm loopback

Description
This command is used to start a CFM loopback test. You can press Ctrl+C to exit the loopback test.
The MAC address represents the destination MEP or MIP that can be reached by this MAC
address. The MEP represents the source MEP to initiate the loopback message.
Format
cfm loopback <macaddr> [mepname <string 32> | mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> |
md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>]] {num <int
1-65535> | [length <int 0-1500> | pattern <string 1500>] | pdu_priority <int 0-7>}
Parameters
<macaddr> - Enter the destination MAC address here.
mepname - Specify the MEP name used.
mepid - Specify the MEP ID used.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance domain name her. This name can be up to 22
characters long.
215

®
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance association name her. This name can be up to 22
characters long.
num - (Optional) Number of LBMs to be sent. The default value is 4.
<int 1-65535> - Enter the number of LBMs to be sent here. This value must be between 1 and
65535.
length - (Optional) The payload length of the LBM to be sent. The default is 0.
<int 0-1500> - Enter the payload length here. This value must be between 0 and 1500.
pattern - (Optional) An arbitrary amount of data to be included in a Data TLV, along with an
indication whether the Data TLV is to be included.
<string 1500> - Enter the pattern used here. This value can be up to 1500 characters long.
pdu_priority - (Optional) The 802.1p priority to be set in the transmitted LBMs. If not specified, it
uses the same priority as CCMs and LTMs sent by the MA.
Restrictions
Example
To transmit a LBM:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# cfm loopback 00-01-02-03-04-05 mepname mep1
Command: cfm loopback 00-01-02-03-04-05 mepname mep1
Request timed out.

Request timed out.
Reply from MPID 52: bytes=xxx time=xxxms
Request timed out.
CFM loopback statistics for 00-01-02-03-04-05:

Packets: Sent=4, Received=1, Lost=3(75% loss).
19-18 cfm linktrace

Description
This command is used to issue a CFM link track message.
Format
cfm linktrace <macaddr> [mepname <string 32> | mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> |
md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>]] {ttl <int 2-
255> | pdu_priority <int 0-7>}
Parameters
<macaddr> - Specify the destination MAC address.
216

®
characters long.
<uint 1-4294967295> - Enter the maintenance domain index value here. This value can
characters long.
can be between 1 and 4294967295.
ttl - (Optional) Specify the link trace message TTL value. The default value is 64.
<int 2-255> - Enter the link trace message TTL value here. This value must be between 2 and
255.
pdu_priority - (Optional) The 802.1p priority to be set in the transmitted LTM. If not specified, it
uses the same priority as CCMs sent by the MA.
Restrictions
Example
To transmit an LTM:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# cfm linktrace 00-01-02-03-04-05 mepname mep1
Command: cfm linktrace 00-01-02-03-04-05 mepname mep1
Transaction ID: 26
Success.
19-19 show cfm linktrace

Description
This command is used to show the link trace responses. The maximum link trace responses a
device can hold is 128.
Format
show cfm linktrace [mepname <string 32> | mepid <int 1-8191> md [<string 22> | md_index
<uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>]] {trans_id <uint>}
Parameters
217

®
characters long.
must between 1 and 4294967295.
characters long.
trans_id - (Optional) Specify the identifier of the transaction displayed.
<uint> - Enter the transaction ID used here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the link trace reply when the "all MPs reply LTRs" function is enabled:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show cfm linktrace mepname mep1 trans_id 26
Command: show cfm linktrace mepname mep1 trans_id 26
Transaction ID: 26
From MEP mep1 to 00-11-22-33-44-55
Start Time 2008-01-01 12:00:00
Hop MEPID MAC Address Forwarded Relay Action

--- ----- ----------------- --------- ------------
1 00-22-33-44-55-66 Yes FDB
2 00-33-44-55-66-77 Yes MPDB
3 00-11-22-33-44-55 No Hit
To show the link trace reply when the "all MPs reply LTRs" function is disabled:
218

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show cfm linktrace mep mep1 trans_id 26

Command: show cfm linktrace mep mep1 trans_id 26
Transaction ID: 26
From MEP mep1 to 00-11-22-33-44-55
Start Time 2008-01-01 12:00:00
Hop MEPID Ingress MAC Address Egress MAC Address Forwarded Relay Action
--- ----- ------------------- ------------------- --------- ------------
1 - 00-22-33-44-55-66 00-22-33-44-55-67 Yes FDB
2 - 00-33-44-55-66-77 00-33-44-55-66-78 Yes MPDB
3 X 00-44-55-66-77-88 00-11-22-33-44-55 No Hit
19-20 delete cfm linktrace

Description
This command is used to delete the stored link trace response data that have been initiated by the
specified MEP.
Format
delete cfm linktrace {[md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] {ma [<string 22> |
ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>] {mepid <int 1-8191>}} | mepname <string 32>]}
Parameters
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance domain name her. This name can be up to 22 characters
long.
characters long.
mepid - (Optional) Specify the MEP ID used.
mepname - (Optional) Specify the MEP name used.
Restrictions
219

®
Example
To delete the CFM link trace reply:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete cfm linktrace mepname mep1
Command: delete cfm linktrace mepname mep1
Success.
19-21 show cfm mipccm

Description
This command is used to show the MIP CCM database entries. All entries in the MIP CCM
database will be shown. A MIP CCM entry is similar to a FDB which keeps the forwarding port
information of a MAC entry.
Format
show cfm mipccm
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show MIP CCM database entries:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show cfm mipccm
Command: show cfm mipccm
MA VID MAC Address Port

---------- ---- ----------------- -----
opma 1 xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx 2
opma 1 xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx 3
Total: 2
19-22 config cfm mp_ltr_all

Description
This command is used to enable or disable the "all MPs reply LTRs" function.
220

®
Format
config cfm mp_ltr_all [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Specify that the MP's reply to the LTR function will be set to all.
disable - Disable sending the all MPs replay LTRs function.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the "all MPs reply LTRs" function:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config cfm mp_ltr_all enable
Command: config cfm mp_ltr_all enable
Success.
19-23 show cfm mp_ltr_all

Description
This command is used to show the current configuration of the "all MPs reply LTRs" function.
Format
show cfm mp_ltr_all
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the configuration of the "all MPs reply LTRs" function:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show cfm mp_ltr_all
Command: show cfm mp_ltr_all
All MPs reply LTRs: Disabled
221

®
19-24 show cfm remote_mep

Description
This command is used to show remote MEPs.
Format
show cfm remote_mep [mepname <string 32> | md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-
4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>] mepid <int 1-8191>]
remote_mepid <int 1-8191>
Parameters
md Specify the maintenance domain name.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance domain name her. This name can be up to 22 characters
long.
ma Specify the maintenance association name.
characters long.
remote_mepid - Specify the Remote MEP ID used.
<int 1-8191> - Enter the remote MEP ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 8191.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the CFM Remote MEP information:
222

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show cfm remote_mep mepname mep1 remote_mepid 2

Command: show cfm remote_mep mepname mep1 remote_mepid 2
Remote MEPID : 2
MAC Address : 00-11-22-33-44-02
Status : OK
RDI : Yes
Port State : Blocked
Interface Status : Down
Last CCM Serial Number : 1000
Sender Chassis ID : 00-11-22-33-44-00
Sender Management Address: SNMP-UDP-IPv4 10.90.90.90:161
Detect Time : 2008-01-01 12:00:00
19-25 show cfm pkt_cnt

Description
This command is used to show the CFM packet’s RX/TX counters.
Format
show cfm pkt_cnt {[ports <portlist> {[rx | tx]} | [rx | tx] | ccm]}
Parameters
ports - (Optional) Specify the port counters to show. If not specified, all ports will be shown.
rx - (Optional) Specify to display the RX counter.
tx - (Optional) Specify to display the TX counter. If not specified, both of them will be shown.
rx - (Optional) Specify to display the RX counter.
tx - (Optional) Specify to display the TX counter. If not specified, both of them will be shown.
ccm - (Optional) Specify the CCM RX counters.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the CFM packet’s RX/TX counters:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show cfm pkt_cnt
Command: show cfm pkt_cnt
CFM RX Statistics
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Port AllPkt CCM LBR LBM LTR LTM VidDrop OpcoDrop
----- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- --------
all 204 204 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
223

®
2 204 204 0 0 0 0 0 0
3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
CFM TX Statistics
-----------------------------------------------------------
Port AllPkt CCM LBR LBM LTR LTM
----- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- --------
all 3988 3984 0 0 0 4
1 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 204 204 0 0 0 4
3 578 578 0 0 0 0
4 578 578 0 0 0 0
5 578 578 0 0 0 0
6 578 578 0 0 0 0
7 578 578 0 0 0 0
8 578 578 0 0 0 0
9 578 578 0 0 0 0
10 578 578 0 0 0 0
11 578 578 0 0 0 0
12 578 578 0 0 0 0
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show cfm pkt_cnt ccm

Command: show cfm pkt_cnt ccm
CCM RX counters:
XCON = Cross-connect CCMs
Error = Error CCMs
Normal = Normal CCMs
MEP Name VID Port Level Direction XCON Error Normal

----------- ---- ----- ----- --------- ---------- ---------- ----------
mep1 1 1 2 inward 9 8 100
mep2 1 2 2 inward 9 8 100
mep3 1 3 2 inward 9 8 100
-----------------------------------------
Total: 27 24 300
19-26 clear cfm pkt_cnt

Description
This command is used to clear the CFM packet’s RX/TX counters.
224

®
Format
clear cfm pkt_cnt {[ports <portlist> {[rx | tx]} | [rx | tx] | ccm]}
Parameters
ports - (Optional) The ports which require need the counters clearing. If not specified, all ports
will be cleared.
rx - (Optional) Specify to clear the RX counter.
tx - (Optional) Specify to clear the TX counter. If not specified, both of them will be cleared.
rx - (Optional) Specify to clear the RX counter.
tx - (Optional) Specify to clear the TX counter. If not specified, both of them will be cleared.
ccm - (Optional) Specify the CCM RX counters.
Restrictions
Example
To clear the CFM packet’s RX/TX counters:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# clear cfm pkt_cnt
Command: clear cfm pkt_cnt
Success.
DGS-3120-24TC: clear cfm pkt_cnt ccm

Command: clear cfm pkt_cnt ccm
Success.
19-27 config cfm trap

Description
This command is used to configure the state of the CFM trap.
Format
config cfm trap [ais | lock] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
ais - Specify the AIS trap status to be configured. If the trap status of AIS is enabled, a trap will
be sent out when an ETH-AIS event occurs or clears.
lock - Specify the LCK trap status that to be configured. If the trap status of LCK is enabled, a
trap will be sent out wnen an ETH-LCK event occurs or clears.
state – Specify the state of the CFM trap.
225

®
enable – Enable the CFM trap state. This is the default.

disable – Disable the CFM trap state.
Restrictions
Example
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config cfm trap ais state enable

Command: config cfm trap ais state enable
Success.
226

®
Chapter 20 Connectivity Fault

Management (CFM)
Extension Command List
(RI and EI Mode Only)
config cfm ais md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index
<uint 1-4294967295>] mepid <int 1-8191> {period [1sec | 1min] | level <int 0-7> | state
[enable | disable]}
config cfm lock md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index
[enable | disable]}
cfm lock md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint 1-
4294967295>] mepid <int 1-8191> remote_mepid <int 1-8191> action [start | stop]
20-1 config cfm ais

Description
This command is used to configure the parameters of AIS function on a MEP. The default client
MD level is MD level at which the most immediate client layer MIPs and MEPs exist.
Note: This default client MD level is not a fixed value. It may change when creating or deleting
higher level MD and MA on the device.
When the most immediate client layer MIPs and MEPs do not exist, the default client MD level
cannot be calculated. If the default client MD level cannot be calculated and user doesn’t
designate a client level, the AIS and LCK PDU cannot be transmitted.
Format
config cfm ais md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index
[enable | disable]}
Parameters
characters long.
md_index – (Optional) Specify the maintenance domain index.
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance association name here. This name can be up to 22
characters long.
ma_index – (Optional) Specify the maintenance association index.
mepid - The MEP ID in the MD which sends AIS frame.
227

®
<int 1-8191> - Enter the MEP ID value here. This value must be between 1 and 8191.
period - (Optional) The transmitting interval of AIS PDU. The default period is 1 second.
1sec - Specify that the transmitting interval will be set to 1 second.
1min - Specify that the transmitting interval will be set to 1 minute.
level - (Optional) The client level ID to which the MEP sends AIS PDU. The default client MD
level is MD level at which the most immediate client layer MIPs and MEPs exist.
<int 0-7> - Enter the client level ID here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
state - (Optional) Specify to enable or disable the AIS function.
enable - Specify that the AIS function will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the AIS function will be disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the AIS function enabled and client level is 5:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config cfm ais md op-domain ma op-ma mepid 1 state enable
level 5
Command: config cfm ais md op-domain ma op-ma mepid 1 state enable level 5
Success.
20-2 config cfm lock

Description
This command is used to configure the parameters of LCK function on a MEP. The default client
MD level is MD level at which the most immediate client layer MIPs and MEPs exist.
Note: This default client MD level is not a fixed value. It may change when creating or deleting
higher level MD and MA on the device.
When the most immediate client layer MIPs and MEPs do not exist, the default client MD level
cannot be calculated. If the default client MD level cannot be calculated and user doesn’t
designate a client level, the AIS and LCK PDU cannot be transmitted.
Format
config cfm lock md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> |
ma_index <uint 1-4294967295>] mepid <int 1-8191> {period [1sec | 1min] | level <int 0-7> |
state [enable | disable]}
Parameters
characters long.
228

®
characters long.
mepid - The MEP ID in the MD which sends LCK frame.
period - (Optional) The transmitting interval of LCK PDU. The default period is 1 second.
1sec - Specify that the transmitting interval will be set to 1 second.
1min - Specify that the transmitting interval will be set to 1 minute.
level - (Optional) The client level ID to which the MEP sends LCK PDU. The default client MD
level is MD level at which the most immediate client layer MIPs and MEPs exist.
<int 0-7> - Enter the client level ID here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
state - (Optional) Specify to enable or disable the LCK function.
enable - Specify that the LCK function will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the LCK function will be disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the LCK function enabled and client level is 5:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config cfm lock md op-domain ma op-ma mepid 1 state enable
level 5
Command: config cfm lock md op-domain ma op-ma mepid 1 state enable level 5
Success.
20-3 cfm lock md

Description
This command is used to start/stop cfm management lock. This command will result in the MEP
sends a LCK PDU to client level MEP.
Format
cfm lock md [<string 22> | md_index <uint 1-4294967295>] ma [<string 22> | ma_index <uint
1-4294967295>] mepid <int 1-8191> remote_mepid <int 1-8191> action [start | stop]
Parameters
<string 22> - Enter the maintenance domain name here. This name can be up to 22 characters
long.
characters long.
229

®
mepid - The MEP ID in the MD which sends LCK frame.
remote_mepid - The peer MEP is the target of management action.
<int 1-8191> - Enter the remote MEP ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 8191.
action - Specify to start or to stop the management lock function.
start - Specify to start the management lock function.
stop - Specify to stop the management lock function.
Restrictions
Example
To start management lock:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# cfm lock md op-domain ma op-ma mepid 1 remote_mepid 2
action start
Command: cfm lock md op-domain ma op-ma mepid 1 remote_mepid 2 action start
Success.
230

®
Chapter 21 CPU Interface Filtering

Command List
create cpu access_profile profile_id <value 1-5> [ethernet {vlan | source_mac <macmask
000000000000-ffffffffffff> | destination_mac <macmask 000000000000-ffffffffffff> | 802.1p |
ethernet_type} | ip {vlan | source_ip_mask <netmask> | destination_ip_mask <netmask> |
dscp | [icmp {type | code } | igmp {type} | tcp {src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask
<hex 0x0-0xffff> | flag_mask [all | {urg | ack | psh | rst | syn | fin}]} | udp {src_port_mask <hex
0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | protocol_id_mask <hex 0x0-0xff>
{user_define_mask <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>} ]} | packet_content_mask {offset_0-15 <hex 0x0-
0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_16-31 <hex 0x0-
0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>} | ipv6 class | flowlabel |
source_ipv6_mask <ipv6mask> | destination_ipv6_mask <ipv6mask>}]
delete cpu access_profile [profile_id <value 1-5> | all]
config cpu access_profile profile_id <value 1-5> [add access_id [auto_assign | <value 1-100>]
[ethernet {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] | source_mac <macaddr> |
destination_mac <macaddr> | 802.1p <value 0-7> | ethernet_type <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | ip {[vlan
<vlan_name 32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] | source_ip <ipaddr> | destination_ip <ipaddr> |
dscp <value 0-63> | [icmp {type <value 0-255> | code <value 0-255>} | igmp {type <value 0-
255>} | tcp {src_port <value 0-65535> | dst_port <value 0-65535> | flag [all | {urg | ack | psh |
rst | syn | fin}]} |udp {src_port <value 0-65535> | dst_port <value 0-65535>} | protocol_id
<value 0-255> {user_define <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>}]} | packet_content {offset_0-15 <hex 0x0-
0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>} | ipv6 {class <value 0-
255> | flowlabel <hex 0x0-0xfffff> | source_ipv6 <ipv6addr> | destination_ipv6 <ipv6addr>}]
port [<portlist> | all] [permit | deny] {time_range <range_name 32>} | delete access_id <value
1-100>]
enable cpu_interface_filtering
disable cpu_interface_filtering
show cpu access_profile {profile_id <value 1-5>}
21-1 create cpu access_profile

Description
This command is used to create CPU access list rules.
Format
create cpu access_profile profile_id <value 1-5> [ethernet {vlan | source_mac <macmask
000000000000-ffffffffffff> | destination_mac <macmask 000000000000-ffffffffffff> | 802.1p |
ethernet_type} | ip {vlan | source_ip_mask <netmask> | destination_ip_mask <netmask> |
dscp | [icmp {type | code } | igmp {type} | tcp {src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> |
dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | flag_mask [all | {urg | ack | psh | rst | syn | fin}]} | udp
{src_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff> | dst_port_mask <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | protocol_id_mask <hex
0x0-0xff> {user_define_mask <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>} ]} | packet_content_mask {offset_0-15
231

®
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> | offset_16-31

<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>} | ipv6 class |
flowlabel | source_ipv6_mask <ipv6mask> | destination_ipv6_mask <ipv6mask>}]
Parameters
profile_id - Specify the profile ID used here.
ethernet - Specify that the profile type will be Ethernet.
<macmask> - Enter the source MAC mask here.
destination_mac - (Optional) Specify the destination mac mask.
<macmask> - Enter the destination MAC mask here.
802.1p - (Optional) Specify 802.1p priority tag mask.
ethernet_type - (Optional) Specify the ethernet type mask.
ip - Specify that the profile type will be IP.
source_ip_mask - (Optional) Specify an IP source submask.
<netmask> - Enter the IP source submask here.
destination_ip_mask - Specify an IP destination submask.
<netmask> - Enter the IP destination submask here.
dscp - Specify the DSCP mask.
icmp - Specify that the rule applies to ICMP traffic.
type - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to ICMP type traffic.
code - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to ICMP code traffic.
igmp - Specify that the rule applies to IGMP traffic.
type - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to IGMP type traffic.
tcp - Specify that the rule applies to TCP traffic.
src_port_mask - (Optional) Specify the TCP source port mask.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the source TCP port mask here.
dst_port_mask - (Optional) Specify the TCP destination port mask.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the destination TCP port mask here.
all - Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to all.
urg - Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to urg.
ack - Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to ack.
psh - Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to psh.
rst - Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to rst.
syn - Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to syn.
fin - Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to fin.
udp - Specify that the rule applies to UDP traffic.
src_port_mask - (Optional) Specify the UDP source port mask.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the source UDP port mask here.
dst_port_mask - (Optional) Specify the UDP destination port mask.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the destination UDP port mask here.
protocod_id_mask - Specify that the rule applies to the IP protocol ID traffic.
<0x0-0xff> - Enter the IP protocol ID mask here.
user_define_mask - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to the IP protocol ID and the mask
options behind the IP header length is 20 bytes.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Enter the user-defined IP protocol ID mask here.
packet_content_mask - Specify the frame content mask, there are 5 offsets in maximum could
be configure. Each offset presents 16 bytes, the range of mask of frame is 80 bytes (5 offsets)
in the first eighty bytes of frame.
offset_0-15 - (Optional) Specify that the mask pattern offset of the frame will be between 0
232

®
and 15.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Enter the mask pattern offset of the frame between 0 and 15 here.
and 31.
and 47.
and 63.
and 79.
ipv6 - Specify IPv6 filtering mask.
flowlabel - (Optional) Specify the IPv6 flowlabel.
source_ipv6_mask - (Optional) Specify an IPv6 source submask.
<ipv6mask> - Enter the IPv6 source submask here.
destination_ipv6_mask - (Optional) Specify an IPv6 destination submask.
<ipv6mask> - Enter the IPv6 destination submask here.
src_port_mask - Specify an IPv6 Layer 4 TCP source port mask.
des_port_mask - Specify an IPv6 Layer 4 TCP destination port mask.
icmp - (Optional) Specify a mask for ICMP filtering.
type - Specify the inclusion of the ICMP type field in the mask.
code - Specify the inclusion of the ICMP code field in the mask.
Restrictions
Example
To create CPU access list rules:
233

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create cpu access_profile profile_id 1 ethernet vlan

source_mac 00-00-00-00-00-01 destination_mac 00-00-00-00-00-02 802.1p
ethernet_type
Command: create cpu access_profile profile_id 1 ethernet vlan source_mac 00-00-
00-00-00-01 destination_mac 00-00-00-00-00-02 802.1p ethernet_type
Success.
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create cpu access_profile profile_id 2 ip vlan

Command: create cpu access_profile profile_id 2 ip vlan source_ip_mask 20.0.0.0
destination_ip_mask 10.0.0.0 dscp icmp type code
Success.
21-2 delete cpu access_profile

Description
This command is used to delete CPU access list rules.
Format
delete cpu access_profile [profile_id <value 1-5> | all]
Parameters
profile_id - Specify the index of access list profile.
all – Specify that al the access list profiles will be deleted.
Restrictions
Example
To delete CPU access list rules:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete cpu access_profile profile_id 1
Command: delete cpu access_profile profile_id 1
Success.
21-3 config cpu access_profile

Description
This command is used to configure CPU access list entry.
234

®
Format
config cpu access_profile profile_id <value 1-5> [add access_id [auto_assign | <value 1-
100>] [ethernet {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] | source_mac <macaddr> |
destination_mac <macaddr> | 802.1p <value 0-7> | ethernet_type <hex 0x0-0xffff>} | ip {[vlan
<vlan_name 32> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] | source_ip <ipaddr> | destination_ip <ipaddr> |
dscp <value 0-63> | [icmp {type <value 0-255> | code <value 0-255>} | igmp {type <value 0-
255>} | tcp {src_port <value 0-65535> | dst_port <value 0-65535> | flag [all | {urg | ack | psh |
rst | syn | fin}]} |udp {src_port <value 0-65535> | dst_port <value 0-65535>} | protocol_id
<value 0-255> {user_define <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>}]} | packet_content {offset_0-15 <hex 0x0-
0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff> <hex 0x0-0xffffffff>} | ipv6 {class <value 0-
255> | flowlabel <hex 0x0-0xfffff> | source_ipv6 <ipv6addr> | destination_ipv6 <ipv6addr>}]
port [<portlist> | all] [permit | deny] {time_range <range_name 32>} | delete access_id
<value 1-100>]
Parameters
profile_id - Specify the index of access list profile.
access_id - Specify the index of access list entry. The range of this value is 1-100.
<value 1-100> - Enter the access ID here. This value must be between 1 and 100.
ethernet - Specify that the profile type will be Ethernet.
vlan - (Optional) Specify the VLAN name used.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the name of the VLAN here. This name can be up to 32 characters
long.
<vid> - Enter the VLAN ID used here.
<hex 0x0-0x0fff> - Specify the mask used.
<macaddr> - Enter the source MAC address used for this configuration here.
destination_mac - (Optional) Specify the destination MAC.
<macaddr> - Enter the destination MAC address used for this configuration here.
802.1p - (Optional) Specify the value of 802.1p priority tag.
<value 0-7> - Enter the 802.1p priority tag value here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the Ethernet type value here.
ip - Specify that the profile type will be IP.
vlan - (Optional) Specify the VLAN name used.
long.
<vid> - Enter the VLAN ID used here.
<ipaddr> - Enter the source IP address used for this configuration here.
mask - (Optional) Specify the mask.
<netmask> - Specify the mask.
235

®

<ipaddr> - Enter the destination IP address used for this configuration here.
<netmask> - Specify the mask.
dscp - (Optional) Specify the value of DSCP, the value can be configured 0 to 63.
<value> - Enter the DSCP value used here.
type - Specify that the rule applies to the value of ICMP type traffic.
<value 0-255> - Enter the ICMP type value here. This value must be between 0 and 255.
<value 0-255> - Enter the ICMP code value here. This value must be between 0 and 255.
type - Specify that the rule applies to the value of IGMP type traffic.
<value 0-255> - Enter the IGMP type value here. This value must be between 0 and 255.
src_port - Specify that the rule applies the range of TCP source port.
65535.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Specify the mask.
dst_port - Specify the range of TCP destination port range.
and 65535.
flag - (Optional) Specify the TCP flag fields .
all - Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to all.
urg - Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to urg.
ack - Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to ack.
psh - Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to psh.
rst - Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to rst.
syn - Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to syn.
fin - Specify that the TCP flag field mask will be set to fin.
udp - Specify that the rule applies to UDP traffic.
src_port - (Optional) Specify the range of UDP source port range.
65535.
dst_port - (Optional) Specify the range of UDP destination port mask.
and 65535.
protocod_id - Specify that the rule applies to the value of IP protocol ID traffic.
<value 0-255> - Enter the protocol ID value here. This value must be between 0 and 255.
user_define - (Optional) Specify that the rule applies to the IP protocol ID and the mask options
behind the IP header length is 20 bytes.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Enter the user-defined IP protocol ID mask here.
<hex 0x0-0xffffffff> - Specify the mask.
packet_content - Specify the frame content pattern, there are 5 offsets in maximum could be
configure. Each offset presents 16 bytes, the range of content of frame is 80 bytes(5 offsets)
in the first eighty bytes of frame.
and 15.
and 31.
236

®
and 47.
and 63.
and 79.
ipv6 - Specify the rule applies to IPv6 fields.
class - (Optional) Specify the value of IPv6 class.
flowlabel - (Optional) Specify the value of IPv6 flowlabel.
<hex 0x0-0xffff> - Enter the IPv6 flowlabel here.
source_ipv6 - (Optional) Specify the value of IPv6 source address.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 source address used for this configuration here.
<ipv6mask> - Specify the mask.
destination_ipv6 - (Optional) Specify the value of IPv6 destination address.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 destination address used for this configuration here.
<ipv6mask> - Specify the mask.
src_port - Specify the value of the IPv6 Layer 4 TCP source port.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the TCP source port value here. This value must be between 0
and 65535.
mask - Specify an additional mask parameter that can be configured.
dst_port - (Optional) Specify the value of the IPv6 Layer 4 TCP destination port.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the TCP destination port value here. This value must be between
0 and 65535.
src_port - Specify the value of the IPv6 Layer 4 UDP source port.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the UDP source port value here. This value must be between 0
and 65535.
dst_port - Specify the value of the IPv6 Layer 4 UDP destination port.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the UDP destination port value here. This value must be between
0 and 65535.
icmp - (Optional) Specify to configure the ICMP parameters used.
type - Specify that the rule applies to the value of ICMP type traffic.
<value 0-255> - Enter the ICMP type traffic value here. This value must be between 0 and
255.
255.
port - Specify the list of ports to be included in this configuration.
permit - Specify the packets that match the access profile are permit by the Switch.
deny - Specify the packets that match the access profile are filtered by the Switch.
time_range - (Optional) Specify name of this time range entry.
<range_name> - Enter the time range here.
237

®
delete - Specify to delete a rule from the profile ID entered.

access_id - Specify the index of access list entry. The range of this value is 1-100.
<value 1-100> - Enter the access ID here. This value must be between 1 and 100.
Restrictions
Example
To configure CPU access list entry:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config cpu access_profile profile_id 1 add access_id 1 ip
vlan default source_ip 20.2.2.3 destination_ip 10.1.1.252 dscp 3 icmp type 11
code 32 port 1 deny
Command: config cpu access_profile profile_id 1 add access_id 1 ip vlan default
source_ip 20.2.2.3 destination_ip 10.1.1.252 dscp 3 icmp type 11 code 32 port 1
deny
Success.
21-4 enable cpu interface filtering

Description
This command is used to enable CPU interface filtering control.
Format
enable cpu_interface_filtering
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable cpu_interface_filtering:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable cpu_interface_filtering
Command: enable cpu_interface_filtering
Success.
238

®
21-5 disable cpu interface filtering

Description
This command is used to disable CPU interface filtering control.
Format
disable cpu_interface_filtering
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable cpu_interface_filtering:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable cpu_interface_filtering
Command: disable cpu_interface_filtering
Success.
21-6 show cpu access_profile

Description
This command is used to display current access list table.
Format
show cpu access_profile {profile_id <value 1-5>}
Parameters
profile_id - (Optional) Specify the index of access list profile.
<value 1-5> - Enter the profile ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 5.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display current cpu access list table:
239

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show cpu access_profile

Command: show cpu access_profile
CPU Interface Filtering State: Disabled
CPU Interface Access Profile Table
Total Unused Rule Entries : 497

Total Used Rule Entries : 3
================================================================================
Profile ID: 1 Type: IPv6
MASK on
Source IPv6 Addr : FFFF:FFFF:FFFF::
Unused Rule Entries: 99

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rule ID : 1 Ports: 2:20,3:20
Match on
Source IPv6 : 2103:16:16::
Action:
Deny
================================================================================
================================================================================
Profile ID: 2 Type: IPv4
MASK on
Source IP : 255.255.0.0

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rule ID : 1 Ports: 2:20,3:20
Match on
Source IP : 172.18.0.0
Action:
Deny
================================================================================
================================================================================
Profile ID: 3 Type: Ethernet
MASK on
240

®
Source MAC : FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rule ID : 1 Ports: 1:1-1:24,2:1-2:24,3:1-3:24
Match on
Source MAC : 00-00-22-B0-61-51
Action:
Deny
================================================================================
================================================================================
Profile ID: 4 Type: User Defined
MASK on
Offset 0-15 : 0xFFF000FF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF
Offset 16-31 : 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFF00FFFF 0xFFFFFFFF
Offset 32-47 : 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0x000FFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF
Offset 48-63 : 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFF000 0xFFFFFFFF
Offset 64-79 : 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFFFFF 0xFFFFF000
241

®
Chapter 22 Debug Software Command

List
debug error_log [dump | clear | upload_toTFTP <ipaddr> <path_filename 64>]
debug show error_reboot state
debug buffer [utilization | dump | clear | upload_toTFTP <ipaddr> <path_filename 64>]
debug output [module <module_list> | all] [buffer | console]
debug config error_reboot [enable | disable]
debug config state [enable | disable]
debug clear cpu port counter [<portlist> | all]
debug show cpu port counter [<portlist> | all] [by_cos | by_reason | by_protocol [L2 | ARP | IPv4
[ICMP | TCP | UDP | multicast-protocol | unicast-protocol | all] | IPv6 [ICMP | TCP | UDP |
OSPFV3 | all] | STACK] | by_priority]
debug show jwac auth_info
debug show status {module <module_list>}
debug dhcpv6_client state enable
debug dhcpv6_client state disable
debug dhcpv6_client output [buffer | console]
debug dhcpv6_client packet [all | receiving | sending] state [enable | disable]
debug dhcpv6_relay state enable
debug dhcpv6_relay state disable
debug dhcpv6_relay output [buffer | console]
debug dhcpv6_relay packet [all | receiving | sending] state [enable | disable]
debug dhcpv6_relay hop_count state [enable | disable]
debug address_binding [event | dhcp | all] state [enable | disable] (RI and EI Mode Only)
debug ripng state enable (RI Mode Only)
debug ripng state disable (RI Mode Only)
debug ripng show flag (RI Mode Only)
debug ripng flag [{interface | packet [all | rx | tx ] | route} | all] state [enable | disable] (RI Mode
Only)
no debug address_binding (RI and EI Mode Only)
debug show address_binding binding_state_table [nd_snooping | dhcpv6_snooping]
debug ospf [neighbor_state_change | interface_state_change {dr_bdr_selection} | lsa {all |
originating | installing | receiving | flooding}(1) | packet {all | receiving | sending}(1) |
retransmission | spf {all | intra | inter | extern}(1) | timer | virtual_link | route | redistribution]
state [enable | disable] (RI Mode Only)
debug ospf clear counter {packet | neighbor | spf} (RI Mode Only)
debug ospf log state [enable | disable] (RI Mode Only)
debug ospf show counter {packet | neighbor | spf} (RI Mode Only)
debug ospf show detail external_link (RI Mode Only)
debug ospf show detail net_link (RI Mode Only)
debug ospf show detail rt_link (RI Mode Only)
debug ospf show detail summary_link (RI Mode Only)
debug ospf show detail type7_link (RI Mode Only)
debug ospf show flag (RI Mode Only)
debug ospf show log state (RI Mode Only)
debug ospf show redistribution (RI Mode Only)
debug ospf show request_list (RI Mode Only)
debug ospf show summary_list (RI Mode Only)
debug ospf state [enable | disable] (RI Mode Only)
debug vrrp [vr_state_change | packet [all | {receiving | sending}(1)] | mac_addr_update |
interface_change | timers] state [enable | disable] (RI Mode Only)
debug vrrp clear counter (RI Mode Only)
242

®
debug vrrp log state [enable | disable] (RI Mode Only)

debug vrrp show counter (RI Mode Only)
debug vrrp show flag (RI Mode Only)
debug vrrp show log state (RI Mode Only)
debug vrrp state [enable | disable] (RI Mode Only)
debug pim ssm (RI Mode Only)
no debug pim ssm (RI Mode Only)
22-1 debug error_log

Description
This command is used to dump, clear or upload the software error log to a TFTP server.
Format
debug error_log [dump | clear | upload_toTFTP <ipaddr> <path_filename 64>]
Parameters
dump - Display the debug message of the debug log.
clear - Clear the debug log.
upload_toTFTP - Upload the debug log to a TFTP server specified by IP address.
<ipaddr> - Specify the IPv4 address of the TFTP server.
<path_filename 64> - The pathname specifies the DOS pathname on the TFTP server. It can
be a relative pathname or an absolute pathname. This value can be up to 64 characters
long.
Restrictions
Example
To dump the error log:
243

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# debug error_log dump

Command: debug error_log dump
**************************************************************************
# debug log: 1
# level: fatal
# clock: 10000ms
# time : 2009/03/11 13:00:00
====================== SOFTWARE FATAL ERROR =======================

Invalid mutex handle : 806D6480
Current TASK : bcmARL.0
------------------------- TASK STACKTRACE ------------------------

->802ACE98
->8018C814
->8028FF44
->8028352C
->801D703C
->8013B8A4
->802AE754
->802A5E0C
To clear the error log:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin# debug error_log clear
Command: debug error_log clear
Success.
To upload the error log to TFTP server:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin# debug error_log upload_toTFTP 10.0.0.90 debug-log.txt
Command: debug error_log upload_toTFTP 10.0.0.90 debug-log.txt
Connecting to server................Done.
Upload error log ..................Done.
22-2 debug show error_reboot state

Description
This command is used to display the error reboot status.
Format
debug show error_reboot state
244

®
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To display the error reboot status:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug show error_reboot state
Command: debug show error_reboot state
Error Reboot: Enabled
22-3 debug buffer

Description
This command is used to show the debug buffer’s state, or dump, clear, or upload the debug buffer
to a TFTP server.
Note: When selecting to output to the debug buffer and there are debug messages in process, the
system’s memory pool will be used as the debug buffer. Then, the functions which will be
used in the system’s memory pool resources may fail to excute these commands
successfully. Use the “debug buffer clear” command to release the system’s memroy pool
resources manually.
Format
debug buffer [utilization | dump | clear | upload_toTFTP <ipaddr> <path_filename 64>]
Parameters
utilization - Display the debug buffer’s state.
dump - Display the debug message in the debug buffer.
clear - Clear the debug buffer.
upload_toTFTP - Upload the debug buffer to a TFTP server specified by IP address.
<path_filename 64> - The pathname specifies the DOS pathname on the TFTP server. It can
be a relative pathname or an absolute pathname. This value can be up to 64 characters
long.
Restrictions
245

®
Example
To show the debug buffer’s state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# debug buffer utilization
Command: debug buffer utilization
Allocate from : System memory pool

Total size : 2 MB
Utilization rate : 30%
To clear the debug buffer:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin# debug buffer clear
Command: debug buffer clear
Success.
To upload the messages stored in debug buffer to TFTP server:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin# debug buffer upload_toTFTP 10.0.0.90 debugcontent.txt
Command: debug buffer upload_toTFTP 10.0.0.90 debugcontent.txt
Connecting to server................... Done.

Upload debug file ................... Done.
22-4 debug output

Description
This command is used to set a specified module’s debug message output to debug buffer or local
console. If the user uses the command in a Telnet session, the error message also is output to the
local console.
Note: When selecting to output to the debug buffer and there are debug messages in process, the
system’s memory pool will be used as the debug buffer. Then, the functions which will be
used in the system’s memory pool resources may fail to excute these commands
successfully. Use the “debug buffer clear” command to release the system’s memroy pool
resources manually.
Format
debug output [module <module_list> | all] [buffer | console]
246

®
Parameters
module - Specify the module list.
<module_list> - Enter the module list here.
all - Control output method of all modules.
buffer - Direct the debug message of the module output to debug buffer(default).
console - Direct the debug message of the module output to local console.
Restrictions
Example
To set all module debug message outputs to local console:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# debug output all console
Command: debug output all console
Success.
22-5 debug config error_reboot

Description
This command is used to set if the Switch needs to be rebooted when a fatal error occurs. When
the error occurs, the watchdog timer will be disabled by the system first, and then all debug
information will be saved in NVRAM. If the error_reboot is enabled, the watchdog shall be enabled
after all information is stored into NVRAM.
Format
debug config error_reboot [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable – If enabled, the Switch will reboot when a fatal error happens.
disable – If disabled the Switch will not reboot when a fatal error happens, system will hang-up
for debug and enter the debug shell mode for debug.
Restrictions
Example
To set the Switch to not need a reboot when a fatal error occurs:
247

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# debug config error_reboot disable

Command: debug config error_reboot disable
Success.
22-6 debug config state

Description
This command is used to set the state of the debug.
Format
debug config state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enable the debug state.
disable - Disable the debug state.
Restrictions
Example
To set the debug state to disabled:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# debug config state disable
Command: debug config state disable
Success.
22-7 debug clear cpu port counter

Description
This command is used to clear cpu port counter.
Format
debug clear cpu port counter [<portlist> | all]
Parameters
<portlist> - Specify a range of ports.
all - Specify all ports.
248

®
Restrictions
Example
To clear cpu port counter of all ports:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug clear cpu port counter all
Command: debug clear cpu port counter all
Success.
22-8 debug show cpu port counter

Description
This command is used to show debug cpu port counter.
Format
debug show cpu port counter [<portlist> | all] [by_cos | by_reason | by_protocol [L2 | ARP |
IPv4 [ICMP | TCP | UDP | multicast-protocol | unicast-protocol | all] | IPv6 [ICMP | TCP | UDP
| OSPFV3 | all] | STACK] | by_priority]
Parameters
by_cos - Display by Cos.
by_reason - Display by reason.
by_protocol - Display by protocol types.
L2 - Display by L2 protocol.
ARP - Display by ARP protocol.
IPv4 - Display by IPv4 protocol.
ICMP - Display by ICMP.
TCP - Display by TCP.
UDP - Display by UDP.
multicast-protocol - Display by multicast protocol.
unicast-protocol - Display by unicast protocol
all - Display by all IPv4 protocols.
IPv6 - Display by IPv6 protocol
ICMP - Display by ICMP.
TCP - Display by TCP.
UDP - Display by UDP.
OSPFV3 - Display by OSPFv3.
all - Display by all IPv6 protocol.
STACK - Display by stacking.
by_priority - Display by priority.
Restrictions
249

®
Example
To show debug cpu port counter by CoS on port 1:1 and 1:2:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug show cpu port counter 1:1-1:2 by_cos
Command: debug show cpu port counter 1:1-1:2 by_cos
Ports:1
CoS 0 rx:0 tx:0
1 rx:0 tx:0
2 rx:0 tx:0
3 rx:0 tx:0
4 rx:0 tx:0
5 rx:0 tx:0
6 rx:0 tx:0
7 rx:0 tx:0
unknown rx:0 tx:0
total rx:0 tx:0
Ports:2
CoS 0 rx:0 tx:0
1 rx:0 tx:0
2 rx:0 tx:0
3 rx:0 tx:0
4 rx:0 tx:0
5 rx:0 tx:0
6 rx:0 tx:0
7 rx:0 tx:0
unknown rx:0 tx:0
total rx:0 tx:0
22-9 debug show jwac auth_info

Description
This command is used to show debug information of JWAC.
Format
debug show jwac auth_info
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
250

®
Example
To display debug information of JWAC:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug show jwac auth_info
Command: debug show jwac auth_info
ACL Index Bitmap DB (jwac_db_acl_bmp):

00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
Internal TCP Port Number (jwac_internal_port_bitmap):
FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF
FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF
Connection DB:
No Host
Current AUTH DB (_jwac_db_nodes):
No Host
Ports AUTH Info: (_jwac_db_nodes)
port mac state last_bytes authing_cnt authed_cnt
----- ------------------ -------- ---------- ----------- -----------
JWAC Web data (jwac_web_auth_result_list):

22-10 debug show status

Description
This command is used to display the specified module’s debug status.
Format
debug show status {module <module_list>}
Parameters
module – (Optional) Specify the module to be displayed.
<module_list> - enter the module to be displayed.
Restrictions
Example
To display the all modules’ debug state:
251

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug show status

Command: debug show status
Debug Global State : Enabled
MSTP : Disabled
IMPB : Disabled
DHCPv6_CLIENT : Disabled
DHCPv6_RELAY : Disabled
ERPS : Disabled
22-11 debug dhcpv6_client state enable

Description
This command is used to enable the DHCPv6 client debug function.
Format
debug dhcpv6_client state enable
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enabled the DHCPv6 client debug function:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug dhcpv6_client state enable
Command: debug dhcpv6_client state enable
Success.
22-12 debug dhcpv6_client state disable

Description
This command is used to disable the DHCPv6 client debug function.
Format
debug dhcpv6_client state disable
252

®
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disabled the DHCPv6 client debug function:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug dhcpv6_client state disable
Command: debug dhcpv6_client state disable
Success.
22-13 debug dhcpv6_client output

Description
This command is used to set debug message to output to buffer or console.
Format
debug dhcpv6_client output [buffer | console]
Parameters
buffer - Let the debug message output to buffer.
console - Let the debug message output to console.
Restrictions
Example
To set debug information to output to console:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug dhcpv6_client output console
Command: debug dhcpv6_client output console
Success.
253

®
22-14 debug dhcpv6_client packet

Description
This command is used to enable or disable debug information flag for DHCPv6 client packet,
including packet receiving and sending.
Format
debug dhcpv6_client packet [all | receiving | sending] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
all - Set packet receiving and sending debug flags.
receiving - Set packet receiving debug flag.
sending - Set packet sending debug flag.
state - Specify the state of the designated flags.
enable - Enable the designated flags.
disable - Disable the designated flags.
Restrictions
Example
To enable DHCPv6client packet sending debug flags:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug dhcpv6_client packet sending state enable
Command: debug dhcpv6_client packet sending state enable
Success.
22-15 debug dhcpv6_relay state enable

Description
This command is used to enable DHCPv6 relay debug functions.
Format
debug dhcpv6_relay state enable
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
254

®
Example
To enabled the DHCPv6 relay debug function:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug dhcpv6_relay state enable
Command: debug dhcpv6_relay state enable
Success.
22-16 debug dhcpv6_relay state disable

Description
This command is used to disable DHCPv6 relay debug functions.
Format
debug dhcpv6_relay state disable
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable DHCPv6 relay debug functions:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug dhcpv6_relay state disable
Command: debug dhcpv6_relay state disable
Success.
22-17 debug dhcpv6_relay output

Description
This command is used to set the debug message to output to a buffer or a console.
Format
debug dhcpv6_relay output [buffer | console]
255

®
Parameters
buffer - Let the debug message output to buffer.
console - Let the debug message output to console.
Restrictions
Example
To set debug information to output to a console:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug dhcpv6_relay output console
Command: debug dhcpv6_relay output console
Success.
22-18 debug dhcpv6_relay packet

Description
This command is used to enable or disable the debug information flag of the DHCPv6 relay packet,
including packets receiving and sending.
Format
debug dhcpv6_relay packet [all | receiving | sending] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
all - Set packet receiving and sending debug flags.
receiving - Set packet receiving debug flag.
sending - Set packet sending debug flag.
state - Specify the state of the designated flags.
enable - Enable the designated flags.
disable - Disable the designated flags.
Restrictions
Example
To enabled the DHCPv6 relay packet sending debug:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug dhcpv6_relay packet sending state enable
Command: debug dhcpv6_relay packet sending state enable
Success.
256

®
22-19 debug dhcpv6_relay hop_count state

Description
This command is used to enable or disable debug information flag about the hop count.
Format
debug dhcpv6_relay hop_count state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Specify to enable the hop count state.
disable - Specify to disable the hop count state.
Restrictions
Example
To enable debug information flag about the hop count:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug dhcpv6_relay hop_count state enable
Command: debug dhcpv6_relay hop_count state enable
Success.
22-20 debug address_binding (RI and EI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to start the IMPB debug when the IMPB module receives an ARP/IP packet
or a DHCP packet.
Format
debug address_binding [event | dhcp | all] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
event - To print out the debug messages when IMPB module receives ARP/IP packets.
dhcp - To print out the debug messages when the IMPB module receives the DHCP packets.
all - Print out all debug messages.
state - This parameter configures the IMPB debug state to be enabled or disabled.
enable - Specify that the state will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the state will be disabled.
257

®
Restrictions
Example
To print out all debug IMPB messages:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# debug address_binding all state enable
Command: debug address_binding all state enable
Success.
22-21 debug ripng state enable (RI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to enable the RIPng debug flag.
Format
debug ripng state enable
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable RIPng debug globally:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug ripng state enable
Command: debug ripng state enable
Success.
22-22 debug ripng state disable (RI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to disable the RIPng debug flag.
Format
debug ripng state disable
258

®
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable RIPng debug globally:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug ripng state disable
Command: debug ripng state disable
Success.
22-23 debug ripng show flag (RI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to display the RIPng debug flag setting.
Format
debug ripng show flag
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To show the current RIPng debug flag setting:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug ripng show flag
Command: debug ripng show flag
Current RIPng debug level setting:
259

®
22-24 debug ripng flag (RI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to enable or disable the RIPng debug flag.
Format
debug ripng flag [{interface | packet [all | rx | tx ] | route} | all] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
interface - (Optional) The state of the RIPng interface debug. The default setting is disabled.
packet - (Optional) Specify the type of packets with debug flags.
all - Set all packets with debug flags.
rx - Set inbound packets with debug flag.
tx - Set outbound packets with debug flag.
route - (Optional) The state of the RIPng route debug. The default setting is disabled.
all - Specify to configure all debug flags.
state - Specify the designated flag status.
enable - Enable the designated flags
disable - Disable designated flags.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the ripng interface debug:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug ripng flag interface state enable
Command: debug ripng flag interface state enable
Success.
22-25 no debug address_binding (RI and EI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to stop the IMPB debug starting when the IMPB module receives an
ARP/IP packet or a DHCP packet.
Format
no debug address_binding
Parameters
None.
260

®
Restrictions
Example
To stop IMPB debug: starting when the IMPB module receives an ARP/IP or DHCP packet:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# no debug address_binding
Command: no debug address_binding
Success.
22-26 debug show address_binding binding_state_table

Description
This command is used to display the ND snooping and DHCPv6 binding state table.
Format
debug show address_binding binding_state_table [nd_snooping | dhcpv6_snooping]
Parameters
nd_snooping – Display the ND Snooping binding state table.
dhcpv6_snooping – Display the DHCPv6 binding state table.
Restrictions
Example
To display the DHCPv6 snooping binding state of entries in BST:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug show address_binding binding_state_table
dhcpv6_snooping
Command: debug show address_binding binding_state_table dhcpv6_snooping
S (State) - S: Start, L: Live, D :Detection, R: Renew, B: Bound

Time - Expiry Time (sec)
IP Address MAC Address S Time Port

--------------------------------------- ----------------- -- ---------- -----
2001:2222:1111:7777:5555:6666:7777:8888 00-00-00-00-00-02 S 50 5
2001::1 00-00-00-00-03-02 B 100 6
Total entries : 2
261

®
22-27 debug ospf (RI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to enable or disable OSPF debug flags.
Format
debug ospf [neighbor_state_change | interface_state_change {dr_bdr_selection} | lsa {all |
originating | installing | receiving | flooding} (1) | packet {all | receiving | sending} (1) |
retransmission | spf {all | intra | inter | extern} (1) | timer | virtual_link | route | redistribution]
state [enable | disable]
Parameters
neighbor_state_change - The state of the OSPF neighbor state change debug.
interface_state_change - The state of the OSPF interface state change debug.
dr_bdr_selection - (Optional) Specify to include or exclude debug information for DR/BDR
selection.
lsa - Specify the state of the designated debug flag.
all - Specify to set all LSA debug flags.
originating - Specify to set LSA originating debug flag.
installing - Specify to set LSA installing debug flag.
receiving - Specify to set LSA receiving debug flag.
flooding - Specify to set LSA flooding debug flag.
packet - Specify the state of the designated debug flag.
all - Specify to set all packet debug flags.
receiving - Specify to set packet receiving debug flag.
sending - Specify to set packet sending debug flag.
retransmission - Specify the state of the OSPF retransmission debug flag.
spf - Specify the state of the designated debug flag.
all - Specify to set all SPF debug flags.
intra - Specify to set intra-area SPF debug flag.
inter - Specify to set inter-area SPF debug flag.
extern - Specify to set AS external SPF debug flag.
timer - Specify the state of the OSPF timer debug flag.
virtual_link - Specify the state of the OSPF virtual link debug flag.
route - Specify the state of OSPF route debug flag.
redistribution - Specify the state of the OSPF redistribution debug flag.
state - Specify to set the configured OSPF debug flag’s state.
enable - Specify that the configured OSPF debug flag’s state will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the configured OSPF debug flag’s state will be disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To enable OSPF neighbor state change debug:
262

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug ospf neighbor_state_change state enable

Command: debug ospf neighbor_state_change state enable
Success.
To enable OSPF interface state change debug:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug ospf interface_state_change state enable
Command: debug ospf interface_state_change state enable
Success.
To enable all OSPF LSA debug flags:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug ospf lsa all state enable
Command: debug ospf lsa all state enable
Success.
To enable all OSPF packet debug flags:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug ospf packet all state enable
Command: debug ospf packet all state enable
Success.
To enable the OSPF retransmission debug flag:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug ospf retransmission state enable
Command: debug ospf retransmission state enable
Success.
To enable all OSPF SPF debug flags:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug ospf spf all state enable
Command: debug ospf spf all state enable
Success.
263

®
22-28 debug ospf clear counter (RI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to reset the OSPF statistic counters.
Format
debug ospf clear counter {packet | neighbor | spf}
Parameters
packet - (Optional) Specify to reset the OSPF packet counter.
neighbor - (Optional) Specify to reset the OSPF neighbor event counter.
spf - (Optional) Specify to reset the OSPF SPF event counter.
If the parameter is not specified, all OSPF counters will be cleared.
Restrictions
Example
To clear all OSPF statistic counters:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug ospf clear counter
Command: debug ospf clear counter
Success.
22-29 debug ospf log state (RI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to enable or disable the OSPF debug log.
Format
debug ospf log state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Specify that the OSPF debug log state will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the OSPF debug log state will be disabled.
Restrictions
264

®
Example
To enable the OSPF debug log:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug ospf log state enable
Command: debug ospf log state enable
Success.
22-30 debug ospf show counter (RI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to display OSPF statistic counters.
Format
debug ospf show counter {packet | neighbor | spf}
Parameters
packet - (Optional) Specify to display the OSPF packet counter.
neighbor - (Optional) Specify to display the OSPF neighbor event counter.
spf - (Optional) Specify to display the OSPF SPF event counter.
If the parameter is not specified, all OSPF counters will be displayed.
Restrictions
Example
To show all OSPF statistic counters:
265

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug ospf show counter

Command: debug ospf show counter
OSPF Debug Statistic Counters

Packet Receiving:
Total : 30
Hello : 30
DD : 0
LSR : 0
LSU : 0
LSAck : 0
Drop : 0
Auth Fail : 0
Packet Sending:
Total : 59
Hello : 59
DD : 0
LSR : 0
LSU : 0
LSAck : 0
Neighbor State:
Change : 0
SeqMismatch : 0
SPF Calculation:
Intra : 0
Inter : 0
Extern : 0
22-31 debug ospf show detail external_link (RI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to display all AS external LSAs with detail information.
Format
debug ospf show detail external_link
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
266

®
Example
To display all AS external LSAs with detail information:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug ospf show detail external_link
Command: debug ospf show detail external_link
OSPF Phase2 External Link:
===========
AREA 0.0.0.0:
AS-External LSA:
Link-State ID: 192.168.205.0
Advertising Router: 1.1.1.1
LS Age: 10 Seconds
Options: 0x2
.... ...0 = 0 Bit Isn't Set
.... ..1. = E: ExternalRoutingCapability
.... .0.. = MC: NOT Multicast Capable
.... 0... = N/P: NSSA Bit
...0 .... = EA: Not Support Rcv And Fwd EA_LSA
..0. .... = DC: Not Support Handling Of Demand Circuits
.0.. .... = O: O Bit Isn't Set
0... .... = 7 Bit Isn't Set
LS Sequence Number: 0x80000001
Length: 36
Netmask: 255.255.255.0
Metric: 20
Forwarding Address: 10.90.90.101
External Route Tag: 0
Internal Field:
Del_flag: 0x0 I_ref_count: 0 Seq: 0x80000001 Csum: 0xd08e
Rxtime: 384 Txtime: 0 Orgage: 0
Current Time: 394
22-32 debug ospf show detail net_link (RI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to display all Network LSAs with detail information.
Format
debug ospf show detail net_link
Parameters
None.
267

®
Restrictions
Example
To display all Network LSAs with detail information:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug ospf show detail net_link
Command: debug ospf show detail net_link
OSPF Phase2 NET Link:
===========
AREA 0.0.0.0:
Network LSA:
Link-State ID: 10.90.90.123
Netmask: 255.0.0.0
LS Age: 109 Seconds
Options: 0x2
.... ...0 = 0 Bit Isn't Set
.... 0... = N/P: NSSA Bit
0... .... = 7 Bit Isn't Set
Length: 32
Attached Router: 10.90.90.91
Attached Router: 1.1.1.1
Internal Field:
Del_flag: 0x0 I_ref_count: 0 Seq: 0x80000001 Csum: 0x4e99
Current Time: 112
22-33 debug ospf show detail rt_link (RI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to display all Router LSAs with detail information.
Format
debug ospf show detail rt_link
Parameters
None.
268

®
Restrictions
Example
To display all Router LSAs with detail information:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug ospf show detail rt_link
Command: debug ospf show detail rt_link
OSPF Phase2 RT Link:
===========
AREA 0.0.0.0:
Router LSA:
LS Age: 10 Seconds
Options: 0x2
.... ...0 = 0 Bit Isn't Set
.... 0... = N/P: NSSA Bit
0... .... = 7 Bit Isn't Set
Length: 36
Flags: 0x0
.... ...0 = B: Not Area Border Router
.... ..0. = E: Not AS Boundary Router
.... .0.. = V: Not Virtual Link Endpoint
Number Of Links: 1
Type: Transit ID: 10.90.90.123 Data: 10.90.90.91 Metric: 1
Internal Field:
Del_flag: 0x0 I_ref_count: 0 Seq: 0x80000002 Csum: 0xd81d
Current Time: 15
22-34 debug ospf show detail summary_link (RI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to display all Summary LSAs with detail information.
Format
debug ospf show detail summary_link
269

®
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To display all Summary LSAs with detail information:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug ospf show detail summary_link
Command: debug ospf show detail summary_link
OSPF Phase2 Summary Link:
===========
AREA 0.0.0.0:
Summary LSA:
LS Age: 10 Seconds
Options: 0x2
.... ...0 = 0 Bit Isn't Set
.... 0... = N/P: NSSA Bit
0... .... = 7 Bit Isn't Set
Length: 28
Netmask: 255.255.255.0
Metric: 1
Internal Field:
Del_flag: 0x0 I_ref_count: 0 Seq: 0x80000001 Csum: 0x8f9c
Current Time: 255
22-35 debug ospf show detail type7_link (RI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to display all type-7 LSAs with detail information.
270

®
Format
debug ospf show detail type7_link
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To display all type-7 LSAs with detail information:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug ospf show detail type7_link
Command: debug ospf show detail type7_link
OSPF Phase2 NSSA-External Link:
===========
AREA 0.0.0.1:
NSSA-External LSA:
LS Age: 855 Seconds
Options: 0x2
.... ...0 = 0 Bit Isn't Set
.... 0... = N/P: NSSA Bit
0... .... = 7 Bit Isn't Set
Length: 36
Netmask: 0.0.0.0
Metric: 0
Forwarding Address: 0.0.0.0
External Route Tag: 0
Internal Field:
Del_flag: 0x0 I_ref_count: 0 Seq: 0x80000002 Csum: 0x77be
Current Time: 3156
271

®
22-36 debug ospf show flag (RI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to display the OSPF debug flag’s settings.
Format
debug ospf show flag
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To display the current OSPF debug flag’s settings:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug ospf show flag
Command: debug ospf show flag
Global State: Disabled
Current OSPF Flags Setting:
Neighbor State Change

Interface State Change
Lsa Originating
Lsa Operating
Lsa Receiving
Lsa Flooding
Packet Receiving
Packet Sending
Retransmission
SPF Intra
SPF Inter
SPF Extern
22-37 debug ospf show log state (RI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to display the OSPF debug log state.
272

®
Format
debug ospf show log state
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To display the OSPF debug log state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug ospf show log state
Command: debug ospf show log state
OSPF Log State: Enabled
22-38 debug ospf show redistribution (RI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to display the current internal OSPF redistribute list.
Format
debug ospf show redistribution
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To display the current OSPF redistribution list:
273

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug ospf show redistribution

Command: debug ospf show redistribution
OSPF Redistribution List:
IP Nexthop State Type Tag

------------------ --------------- ----- ---- ---------------
1.1.1.0/24 0.0.0.0 ON 2 0.0.0.0
OSPF ASE Table:
IP Nexthop State Type Tag

------------------ --------------- ----- ---- ---------------
1.1.1.0/24 0.0.0.0 ON 2 0.0.0.0
22-39 debug ospf show request_list (RI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to display the current internal OSPF request list.
Format
debug ospf show request_list
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To display the current OSPF request list:
274

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug ospf show request_list

Command: debug ospf show request_list
OSPF Request List:
Area 0.0.0.0:
Circuit: 1.1.1.1
Neighbor: 90.2.0.1 IP: 1.1.1.2
LSID: 192.194.134.0 RTID: 90.2.0.1
LSID: 192.194.135.0 RTID: 90.2.0.1
LSID: 192.194.136.0 RTID: 90.2.0.1
LSID: 192.194.137.0 RTID: 90.2.0.1
LSID: 192.194.138.0 RTID: 90.2.0.1
22-40 debug ospf show summary_list (RI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to display the current internal OSPF summary list.
Format
debug ospf show summary_list
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To display the current OSPF summary list:
275

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug ospf show summary_list

Command: debug ospf show summary_list
OSPF Summary List:
Area 0.0.0.0:
Circuit: 1.1.1.1
Neighbor: 90.2.0.1 IP: 1.1.1.2
LSID: 1.1.1.1 RTID: 1.1.1.1
Circuit: 2.2.2.1
Circuit: 10.1.1.6
22-41 debug ospf state (RI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to set the OSPF debug global state.
Format
debug ospf state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Specify that the OSPF debug global state will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the OSPF debug global state will be disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the OSPF debug global state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug ospf state enable
Command: debug ospf state enable
Success.
22-42 debug vrrp (RI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to set VRRP debug flags.
276

®
Format
debug vrrp [vr_state_change | packet [all | {receiving | sending}(1)] | mac_addr_update |
interface_change | timers] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
vr_state_change - Specify the VRRP virtual router state change debug flag.
packet - Specify to set the VRRP packet flags.
all - Sets VRRP all packet debug flags.
receiving - Set the VRRP packet receiving flag.
sending - Set the VRRP packet sending flag.
mac_addr_update - Specify the VRRP MAC address update debug flag.
interface_change - Specify the VRRP interface state change debug flag.
timers - Specify the state of the VRRP timers debug flag.
state - Specify the state of the configured VRRP debug flag.
enable - Specify that the configured VRRP debug flag will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the configured VRRP debug flag will be disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the VRRP virtual router state change debug flag:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug vrrp vr_state_change state enable
Command: debug vrrp vr_state_change state enable
Success.
To enable all VRRP packet debug flags:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug vrrp packet all state enable
Command: debug vrrp packet all state enable
Success.
To enable the VRRP virtual MAC address update debug flag:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug vrrp mac_addr_update state enable
Command: debug vrrp mac_addr_update state enable
Success.
277

®
To enable the VRRP interface state change debug flag:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug vrrp interface_change state enable
Command: debug vrrp interface_change state enable
Success.
To enable the VRRP timers debug flag:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug vrrp timers state enable
Command: debug vrrp timers state enable
Success.
22-43 debug vrrp clear counter (RI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to reset the VRRP debug statistic counters.
Format
debug vrrp clear counter
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To clear VRRP statistic counters:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug vrrp clear counter
Command: debug vrrp clear counter
Success.
22-44 debug vrrp log state (RI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to enable or disable the VRRP debug log state.
278

®
Format
debug vrrp log state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Specify that the VRRP debug log state will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the VRRP debug log state will be disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the VRRP debug log state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug vrrp log state enable
Command: debug vrrp log state enable
Success.
22-45 debug vrrp show counter (RI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to display the VRRP debug statistic counters.
Format
debug vrrp show counter
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To display VRRP statistic counters:
279

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug vrrp show counter

Command: debug vrrp show counter
VRRP debug statistic counters

Received ADV : 9
Drop : 52
Auth fail : 0
Sent ADV : 0
22-46 debug vrrp show flag (RI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to display VRRP debug flag settings.
Format
debug vrrp show flag
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To display VRRP debug flag settings:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug vrrp show flag
Command: debug vrrp show flag
Global State: Disabled
Current VRRP debug level setting:
virtual router state change

packet receiving
packet sending
mac address update
interface change
timer
280

®
22-47 debug vrrp show log state (RI Mode Only)

Description
The command is used to display the VRRP debug log state.
Format
debug vrrp show log state
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To display the VRRP debug log state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug vrrp show log state
Command: debug vrrp show log state
VRRP Debug Log State : Enabled
22-48 debug vrrp state (RI Mode Only)

Description
The command is used to enable or disable the VRRP debug state.
Format
debug vrrp state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Specify that the VRRP debug state will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the VRRP debug state will be disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the VRRP debug state:
281

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug vrrp state enable

Command: debug vrrp state enable
Success.
22-49 debug pim ssm (RI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to enable the PIM-SSM debug function.
Format
debug pim ssm
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the PIM-SSM debug function:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug pim ssm
Command: debug pim ssm
Success.
Once the PIM-SSM debug enabled, the debug information maybe outputted.
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#PIM_SSM, 29 Oct 2012 11:04:12 IGMP v1/v2 Report for group
232.1.1.0 from 192.168.121.1 on n121, ignored.
Output truncated...
22-50 no debug pim ssm (RI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to disable the PIM-SSM debug function.
Format
no debug pim ssm
282

®
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable the PIM-SSM debug function:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#no debug pim ssm
Command: no debug pim ssm
Success.
283

®
Chapter 23 Denial-of-Service (DoS)

Attack Prevention
Command List
config dos_prevention dos_type [{land_attack | blat_attack | tcp_null_scan | tcp_xmasscan |
tcp_synfin | tcp_syn_srcport_less_1024 | ping_death_attack | tcp_tiny_frag_attack}(1) | all]
{action [drop] | state [enable | disable]}(1)
show dos_prevention {land_attack | blat_attack | tcp_null_scan | tcp_xmasscan | tcp_synfin |
tcp_syn_srcport_less_1024 | ping_death_attack | tcp_tiny_frag_attack}
config dos_prevention trap [enable | disable]
config dos_prevention log [enable | disable]
23-1 config dos_prevention dos_type

Description
This command is used to prevent the DoS attack from specific ports.
Format
config dos_prevention dos_type [{land_attack | blat_attack | tcp_null_scan | tcp_xmasscan
| tcp_synfin | tcp_syn_srcport_less_1024 | ping_death_attack | tcp_tiny_frag_attack}(1) | all]
{action [drop] | state [enable | disable]}(1)
Parameters
land_attack - Specify the type of DoS attack as land attack.
blat_attack - Specify the type of DoS attack as blat attack.
tcp_null_scan - Specify the type of DoS attack as TCP null scan.
tcp_xmasscan - Specify the type of DoS attack as TCP xmasscan.
tcp_synfin - Specify the type of DoS attack as TCP synfin.
tcp_syn_srcport_less_1024 - Specify the type of DoS attack as tcp_syn_srcport_less_1024.
ping_death_attack - Specify the type of DoS attack as ping_death_attack.
tcp_tiny_frag_attack - Specify the type of DoS attack as tcp_tiny_frag_attack.
all - Specify all types of DoS attack.
action - When the DoS prevention is enabled, the following action can be taken.
drop - Drop DoS attack packets.
state - Specify the DoS attack prevention state.
enable - Enable the DoS attack prevention.
disable - Disable the DoS attack prevention.
Restrictions
Example
To configure land attack and blat attack prevention, the action is drop:
284

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config dos_prevention dos_type land_attack blat_attack

action drop state enable
Command: config dos_prevention dos_type land_attack blat_attack action drop
state enable
Success.
23-2 show dos_prevention

Description
This command is used to display DoS prevention information.
Format
show dos_prevention {land_attack | blat_attack | tcp_null_scan | tcp_xmasscan | tcp_synfin
| tcp_syn_srcport_less_1024 | ping_death_attack | tcp_tiny_frag_attack}
Parameters
land_attack - (Optional) Specify the type of DoS attack as land attack.
blat_attack - (Optional) Specify the type of DoS attack as blat attack.
tcp_null_scan - (Optional) Specify the type of DoS attack as TCP null scan.
tcp_xmasscan - (Optional) Specify the type of DoS attack as TCP xmasscan.
tcp_synfin - (Optional) Specify the type of DoS attack as TCP synfin.
tcp_syn_srcport_less_1024 - (Optional) Specify the type of DoS attack as
tcp_syn_srcport_less_1024.
ping_death_attack - (Optional) Specify the type of DoS attack as ping_death_attack.
tcp_tiny_frag_attack - (Optional) Specify the type of DoS attack as tcp_tiny_frag_attack.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display DoS prevention information:
285

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show dos_prevention
Command: show dos_prevention
Trap:Disabled Log:Disabled Function Version : 1.01
DoS Type State Action Frame Counts

-------------------------- -------- ---------------- ------------
Land Attack Enabled Drop -
Blat Attack Enabled Drop -
TCP Null Scan Disabled Drop -
TCP Xmas Scan Disabled Drop -
TCP SYNFIN Disabled Drop -
TCP SYN SrcPort Less 1024 Disabled Drop -
Ping of Death Attack Disabled Drop -
TCP Tiny Fragment Attack Disabled Drop -
23-3 config dos_prevention trap

Description
This command is used to enable or disable the DoS prevention trap state.
Format
config dos_prevention trap [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Specify to enable DoS prevention trap state.
disable - Specify to disable DoS prevention trap state.
Restrictions
Example
To disable DoS prevention trap state:
286

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config dos_prevention trap disable

Command: config dos_prevention trap disable
Success.
23-4 config dos_prevention log

Description
This command is used to enable or disable the DoS prevention log state.
Format
config dos_prevention log [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Specify to enable DoS prevention log state.
disable - Specify to disable DoS prevention log state.
Restrictions
Example
To enable DoS prevention log state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config dos_prevention log enable
Command: config dos_prevention log enable
Success.
287

®
Chapter 24 DHCP Local Relay

Command List
config dhcp_local_relay vlan <vlan_name 32> state [enable | disable]
config dhcp_local_relay vlan vlanid <vlan_id 1-4094> state [enable | disable]
enable dhcp_local_relay
disable dhcp_local_relay
show dhcp_local_relay
24-1 config dhcp_local_relay vlan

Description
This command is used to enable or disable DHCP local relay function for specified VLAN name.
When DHCP local relay is enabled for the VLAN, the DHCP packet will be relayed in broadcast
way without change of the source MAC address and gateway address. DHCP option 82 will be
automatically added.
Format
config dhcp_local_relay vlan <vlan_name 32> state [enable | disable]
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Specify the VLAN name that the DHCP local relay function will be enabled.
This name can be up to 32 characters long.
state - Enable or disable DHCP local relay for specified vlan.
enable - Specify that the DHCP local relay function will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the DHCP local relay function will be disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To enable DHCP local relay for default VLAN:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config dhcp_local_relay vlan default state enable
Command: config dhcp_local_relay vlan default state enable
Success.
288

®
24-2 config dhcp_local_relay vlan vlanid

Description
This command is used to enable or disable DHCP local relay function for specified VLAN ID.
Format
config dhcp_local_relay vlan vlanid <vlan_id 1-4094> state [enable | disable]
Parameters
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID that the DHCP local relay function will be enabled.
<vlan_id 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID used here.
state - Enable or disable DHCP local relay for specified VLAN.
enable - Specify that the DHCP local relay function will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the DHCP local relay function will be disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To enable DHCP local relay for default VLAN:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config dhcp_local_relay vlan vlanid 1 state enable
Command: config dhcp_local_relay vlan vlanid 1 state enable
Success.
24-3 enable dhcp_local_relay

Description
This command is used to globally enable the DHCP local relay function on the Switch.
Format
enable dhcp_local_relay
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
289

®
Example
To enable the DHCP local relay function:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable dhcp_local_relay
Command: enable dhcp_local_relay
Success.
24-4 disable dhcp_local_relay

Description
This command is used to globally disable the DHCP local relay function on the Switch.
Format
disable dhcp_local_relay
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable the DHCP local relay function:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable dhcp_local_relay
Command: disable dhcp_local_relay
Success.
24-5 show dhcp_local_relay

Description
This command is used to display the current DHCP local relay configuration.
Format
show dhcp_local_relay
Parameters
None.
290

®
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display local dhcp relay status:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show dhcp_local_relay
Command: show dhcp_local_relay
DHCP/BOOTP Local Relay Status : Disabled

DHCP/BOOTP Local Relay VID List : 1,3-4
291

®
Chapter 25 DHCP Relay Command List

config dhcp_relay {hops <int 1-16> | time <sec 0-65535>}
config dhcp_relay add ipif <ipif_name 12> <ipaddr>
config dhcp_relay add vlanid <vlan_id_list> <ipaddr>
config dhcp_relay delete ipif <ipif_name 12> <ipaddr>
config dhcp_relay delete vlanid <vlan_id_list> <ipaddr>
enable dhcp_relay
disable dhcp_relay
show dhcp_relay {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
config dhcp_relay option_60 state [enable | disable]
config dhcp_relay option_60 add string <multiword 255> relay <ipaddr> [exact-match | partial-
match]
config dhcp_relay option_60 default [relay <ipaddr> | mode [drop | relay]]
config dhcp_relay option_60 delete [string <multiword 255> {relay <ipaddr>} | ipaddress
<ipaddr> | all | default {<ipaddr>}]
show dhcp_relay option_60 {[string <multiword 255> | ipaddress <ipaddr> | default]}
config dhcp_relay option_61 add [mac_address <macaddr> | string <desc_long 255>] [relay
<ipaddr> | drop]
config dhcp_relay option_61 default [relay <ipaddr> | drop]
config dhcp_relay option_61 delete [mac_address <macaddr> | string <desc_long 255> | all]
show dhcp_relay option_61
config dhcp_relay option_82 check [enable | disable]
config dhcp_relay option_82 circuit_id [default | user_define <desc 32> | vendor1 | vendor2 |
vendor4]
config dhcp_relay option_82 policy [replace | drop | keep]
config dhcp_relay option_82 remote_id [default | user_define <desc 32>]
25-1 config dhcp_relay

Description
This command is used to configure the DHCP relay feature of the Switch.
Format
config dhcp_relay {hops <int 1-16> | time <sec 0-65535>}
Parameters
hops - (Optional) Specify the maximum number of relay hops that the DHCP/BOOTP packets
can cross. The range is 1 to 16. The default value is 4. The DHCP packet will be dropped
when the relay hop count in the received packet is equal to or greater than this setting.
<int 1-16> - Enter the maximum number of relay hops here. This value must be between 1
and 16.
time - (Optional) The time field in the DHCP packet must be equal to or greater than this setting
to be relayed by the router. The default value is 0.
<sec 0-65535> - Enter the relay time here. This value must be between 0 and 65535 seconds.
292

®
Restrictions
Example
To configure the DHCP relay hops and time parameters:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config dhcp_relay hops 4 time 2
Command: config dhcp_relay hops 4 time 2
Success.
25-2 config dhcp_relay add

Description
This command is used to add an IP destination address to the Switch’s DHCP relay table. Used to
configure a DHCP server for relay of packets.
Format
config dhcp_relay add ipif <ipif_name 12> <ipaddr>
Parameters
ipif_name - The name of the IP interface which contains the IP address below.
characters long.
<ipaddr> - The DHCP/BOOTP server IP address.
Restrictions
Example
To add a DHCP/BOOTP server to the relay table:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config dhcp_relay add ipif System 10.43.21.12
Command: config dhcp_relay add ipif System 10.43.21.12
Success.
25-3 config dhcp_relay add vlanid

Description
This command is used to add an IP address as a destination to forward (relay) DHCP/BOOTP
packets. If there is an IP interface in the VLAN and it has configured a DHCP server at the
293

®
interface level, then the configuration at the interface level has higher priority. In this case, the
DHCP server configured on the VLAN will not be used to forward the DHCP packets.
Format
config dhcp_relay add vlanid <vlan_id_list> <ipaddr>
Parameters
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID list used for this configuration.
<vlan_id_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list used for this configuration here.
<ipaddr> - Enter the DHCP/BOOTP server IP address used here.
Restrictions
Example
To add a DHCP/BOOTP server 10.43.21.12 to VLAN 1 to 10:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config dhcp_relay add vlanid 1-10 10.43.21.12
Command: config dhcp_relay add vlanid 1-10 10.43.21.12
Success.
To display the DHCP relay status:
294

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show dhcp_relay
Command: show dhcp_relay
DHCP/BOOTP Relay Status : Disabled

DHCP/BOOTP Hops Count Limit : 4
DHCP/BOOTP Relay Time Threshold : 2
DHCP Vendor Class Identifier Option 60 State: Disabled
DHCP Client Identifier Option 61 State: Disabled
DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 State : Disabled
DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Check : Disabled
DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Policy : Replace
DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Remote ID : default(00-01-02-03-04-00)
DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Circuit ID : default
Interface Server 1 Server 2 Server 3 Server 4

------------ --------------- --------------- --------------- ---------------
System 10.43.21.12
Server VLAN ID List

--------------- -----------------------------------------------------------
10.43.21.12 1-10
25-4 config dhcp_relay delete

Description
This command is used to delete one of the IP destination addresses in the swith’s relay table.
Format
config dhcp_relay delete ipif <ipif_name 12> <ipaddr>
Parameters
ipif - The name of the IP interface which contains the IP address below.
characters long.
<ipaddr> - The DHCP/BOOTP server IP address.
Restrictions
Example
To delete a DHCP/BOOTP server to the relay table:
295

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config dhcp_relay delete ipif System 10.43.21.12

Command: config dhcp_relay delete ipif System 10.43.21.12
Success.
25-5 config dhcp_relay delete vlanid

Description
This command is used to delete an IP address as a destination to forward (relay) DHCP/BOOTP
packets. If there is an IP interface in the VLAN and it has configured a DHCP server at the
interface level, then the configuration at the interface level has higher priority. In this case, the
DHCP server configured on the VLAN will not be used to forward the DHCP packets.
Format
config dhcp_relay delete vlanid <vlan_id_list> <ipaddr>
Parameters
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID list used for this configuration.
<vlan_id_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list used for this configuration here.
<ipaddr> - Enter the DHCP/BOOTP server IP address used here.
Restrictions
Example
To delete a DHCP/BOOTP server 10.43.21.12 from VLAN 2 and VLAN 3:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config dhcp_relay delete vlanid 2-3 10.43.21.12
Command: config dhcp_relay delete vlanid 2-3 10.43.21.12
Success.
25-6 enable dhcp_relay

Description
This command is used to enable the DHCP relay function on the Switch.
Format
enable dhcp_relay
296

®
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the DHCP relay function.
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable dhcp_relay
Command: enable dhcp_relay
Success.
25-7 disable dhcp_relay

Description
This command is used to disable the DHCP relay function on the Switch.
Format
disable dhcp_relay
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable the DHCP relay function:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable dhcp_relay
Command: disable dhcp_relay
Success.
25-8 show dhcp_relay

Description
This command is used to display the current DHCP relay configuration.
297

®
Format
show dhcp_relay {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
Parameters
ipif - (Optional) Specify the IP interface name.
characters long.
If no parameter is specified , the system will display all DHCP relay configuration.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display DHCP relay configuration:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show dhcp_relay ipif System
Command: show dhcp_relay ipif System
DHCP/BOOTP Relay Status : Disabled

DHCP/BOOTP Hops Count Limit : 4
DHCP/BOOTP Relay Time Threshold : 2
DHCP Vendor Class Identifier Option 60 State: Disabled
DHCP Client Identifier Option 61 State: Disabled
DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 State : Disabled
DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Check : Disabled
DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Policy : Replace
DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Remote ID : default(00-01-02-03-04-00)
DHCP Relay Agent Information Option 82 Circuit ID : default
Interface Server 1 Server 2 Server 3 Server 4

------------ --------------- --------------- --------------- ---------------
System 10.43.21.12
25-9 config dhcp_relay option_60

Description
This command is used to decide whether DHCP relay will process the DHCP option 60 or not.
When option_60 is enabled, if the packet does not have option 60, then the relay servers cannot
be determined based on option 60. The relay servers will be determined based on either option 61
or per IPIF configured servers.
If the relay servers are determined based on option 60 or option 61, then per IPIF configured
servers will be ignored.
298

®
If the relay servers are not determined either by option 60 or option 61, then per IPIF configured
servers will be used to determine the relay servers.
Format
Parameters
state - Specify that the DHCP relay function should use the option 60 rule to relay the DHCP
packets.
enable - Specify that the option 60 rule will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the option 60 rule will be disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the state of dhcp_relay option 60:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config dhcp_relay option_60 state enable
Command: config dhcp_relay option_60 state enable
Success
25-10 config dhcp_relay option_60 add

Description
This command is used to configure the option 60 relay rules. Note that different string can be
specified with the same relay server, and the same string can be specified with multiple relay
servers.
The system will relay the packet to all the matching servers.
Format
config dhcp_relay option_60 add string <multiword 255> relay <ipaddr> [exact-match |
partial-match]
Parameters
string - Specify the string used.
<multiword 255> - Enter the string value here. This value can be up to 255 characters long.
relay - Specify a relay server IP address.
exact-match - The option 60 string in the packet must full match with the specified string.
partial-match - The option 60 string in the packet only need partial match with the specified
string.
299

®
Restrictions
Example
To configure the DHCP relay option 60 option:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config dhcp_relay option_60 add string "abc" relay
10.90.90.1 exact-match
Command: config dhcp_relay option_60 add string "abc" relay 10.90.90.1 exact-
match
Success.
25-11 config dhcp_relay option_60 default

Description
This command is used to configure the DHCP relay option 60 default drop option.
When there are no match servers found for the packet based on option 60, the relay servers will
be determined by the default relay server setting.
When there is no matching found for the packet, the relay servers will be determined based on the
default relay servers.
When drop is specified, the packet with no matching rules found will be dropped without further
process.
If the setting is no- drop, then the packet will be processed further based on option 61. The final
relay servers will be the union of option 60 default relay servers and the relay servers determined
by option 61.
Format
config dhcp_relay option_60 default [relay <ipaddr> | mode [drop | relay]]
Parameters
relay - Specify the IP address used for the DHCP relay forward function.
mode - Specify the DHCP relay option 60 mode.
drop - Specify to drop the packet that has no matching option 60 rules.
relay - The packet will be relayed based on the relay rules.
Restrictions
300

®
Example
To configure the DHCP relay option 60 default drop option:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config dhcp_relay option_60 default mode drop
Command: config dhcp_relay option_60 default mode drop
Success.
25-12 config dhcp_relay option_60 delete

Description
This command is used to delete DHCP relay option 60 entry.
Format
config dhcp_relay option_60 delete [string <multiword 255> {relay <ipaddr>} | ipaddress
<ipaddr> | all | default {<ipaddr>}]
Parameters
string - Delete all the entries whose string is equal to the string of specified if ipaddress is not
specified
<multiword 255> - Enter the DHCP option 60 string to be removed here. This value can be
relay - (Optional) Delete one entry, whose string and IP address are equal to the string and IP
address specified by the user.
ipaddress - Delete all the entry whose ipaddress is equal to the specified ipaddress.
all - Delete all the entry. Default relay servers are excluded.
default - Delete the default relay ipaddress that is specified by the user.
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Enter the IP address used for this configuration here.
Restrictions
Example
To delete the DHCP relay option 60 string called ‘abc’:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete dhcp_relay option_60 string "abc" relay 10.90.90.1
Command: delete dhcp_relay option_60 string "abc" relay 10.90.90.1
Success
301

®
25-13 show dhcp_relay option_60

Description
This command is used to show DHCP relay option 60 entry by the user specified.
Format
show dhcp_relay option_60 {[string <multiword 255> | ipaddress <ipaddr> | default]}
Parameters
string - (Optional) Show the entry which’s string equal the string of specified.
<multiword 255> - Enter the entry's string value here. This value can be up to 255 characters
long.
ipadddress - (Optional) Show the entry whose IP address equal the specified ipaddress.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address here.
default - (Optional) Show the defaut behaviour of DHCP relay option 60.
If no parameter is specified then all the DHCP option 60 entries will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show DHCP option 60 information:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show dhcp_relay option_60
Command: show dhcp_relay option_60
Default Processing Mode: Drop
Default Servers:
Matching Rules:
String Match Type IP Address

------- --------- ---------
abc Exact Match 10.90.90.1
Total Entries : 1
25-14 config dhcp_relay option_61

Description
This command is used to decide whether the DHCP relay will process the DHCP option 61 or not.
When option 61 is enabled, if the packet does not have option 61, then the relay servers cannot be
determined based on option 61.
302

®
If the relay servers are determined based on option 60 or option 61, then per IPIF configured
servers will be ignored.
If the relay servers are not determined either by option 60 or option 61, then per IPIF configured
servers will be used to determine the relay servers.
Format
Parameters
state - Specify whether the DHCP relay option 61 is enabled or disabled.
enable - Enables the function DHCP relay use option 61 ruler to relay DHCP packet.
disable - Disables the function DHCP relay use option 61 ruler to relay DHCP packet.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the state of dhcp_relay option 61:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config dhcp_relay option_61 state enable
Success
25-15 config dhcp_relay option_61 add

Description
This command is used to add a rule to determine the relay server based on option 61. The match
rule can base on either MAC address or a user-specified string. Only one relay server can be
specified for a MAC-address or a string.
If relay servers are determined based on option 60, and one relay server is determined based on
option 61, the final relay servers will be the union of these two sets of the servers.
Format
config dhcp_relay option_61 add [mac_address <macaddr> | string <desc_long 255>] [relay
<ipaddr> | drop]
Parameters
mac_address - The client’s client-ID which is the hardware address of client.
<macaddr> - Enter the client's MAC address here.
string - The client’s client-ID, which is specified by administrator.
<desc_long 255> - Enter the client's description here. This value can be up to 255 characters
303

®
long.
relay - Specify to relay the packet to a IP address.
drop - Specify to drop the packet.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the DHCP relay option 61 function:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config dhcp_relay option_61 add mac_address 00-11-22-33-
44-55 drop
Command: config dhcp_relay option_61 add mac_address 00-11-22-33-44-55 drop
Success
25-16 config dhcp_relay option_61 default

Description
This command is used to configure the default ruler for option 61.
Format
config dhcp_relay option_61 default [relay <ipaddr> | drop]
Parameters
relay - Specify to relay the packet that has no option matching 61 matching rules to an IP
address.
drop - Specify to drop the packet that have no option 61 matching rules.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the DHCP relay option 61 function:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config dhcp_relay option_61 default drop
Command: config dhcp_relay option_61 default drop
Success
304

®
25-17 config dhcp_relay option_61 delete

Description
This command is used to delete an option 61 rule.
Format
config dhcp_relay option_61 delete [mac_address <macaddr> | string <desc_long 255> | all]
Parameters
mac_address - The entry with the specified MAC address will be deleted.
string - The entry with the specified string will be deleted.
<desc_long 255> - Enter the string value here. This value can be up to 255 characters long.
all - All rules excluding the default rule will be deleted.
Restrictions
Example
To remove a DHCP relay option 61 entry:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config dhcp_relay option_61 delete mac_address 00-11-22-
33-44-55
Command: config dhcp_relay option_61 delete mac_address 00-11-22-33-44-55
Success
25-18 show dhcp_relay option_61

Description
This command is used to show all rulers for option 61.
Format
show dhcp_relay option_61
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
305

®
Example
To display DHCP relay rulers for option 61:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show dhcp_relay option_61
Command: show dhcp_relay option_61
Default Relay Rule: 10.90.90.200
Matching Rules:
Client-ID Type Relay Rule

---------------------- ----------- ----------------
abc String Drop
abcde String 10.90.90.1
00-11-22-33-44-55 MAC Address Drop
Total Entries: 3
25-19 config dhcp_relay option_82 check

Description
This command is used to configure the checking mechanism of the DHCP relay agent information
option 82 of the switch.
Format
config dhcp_relay option_82 check [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - When the state is enabled, the DHCP packet will be inserted with the option 82 field
before being relayed to server. The DHCP packet will be processed based on the behavior
defined in check and policy setting.
disable - When the state is disabled, the DHCP packet will be relayed directly to server without
further check and processing on the packet. The default setting is disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To disable DHCP relay option 82 check:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config dhcp_relay option_82 check disable
Command: config dhcp_relay option_82 check disable
Success.
306

®
25-20 config dhcp_relay option_82 circuit_id

Description
This command is used to configure the DHCP relay option 82 circuit ID.
Format
config dhcp_relay option_82 circuit_id [default | user_define <desc 32> | vendor1 | vendor2
| vendor4]
Parameters
default - If configure to default, the circuit_id use the original format:
a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
1 0x6 0 4 VLAN Module ID Port ID
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 1 byte
a. Sub-option type (1 means circuit ID)
b. Length, it should be 6.
c. Circuit ID’s sub-option, it should be 0.
d. Sub-option’s length, it should be 4
e. VLAN ID (S-VID)
f. Module ID, for standalone switch, it is 0; for stacking switch, it is the box ID that
assigned by stacking.
g. Port ID: port number of each box.
user_define - Use user-defined string as the circuit ID.
a. b. c. d. e.
2 n+2 1 n user define
1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte Max. 32 bytes
<desc 32> - Enter the user-defined ID. Space is allowed in the string.
vendor1 - If configure to vendor1, the circuit ID uses the following format to communicate with
Alcatel-Lucent’s server:
a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.
1 0x10 0 6 VLAN Slot ID Port ID 1 6 MAC
1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 2
byte byte byte byte bytes bytes bytes byte byte bytes
b. Length
c. Circuit ID’s sub-option’s first tag, it should be 0.
d. First tag’s length, it should be 6
e. VLAN ID
f. Slot ID, for standalone switch, it is 1; for stacking switch, it is the box ID that assigned
by stacking.
g. Port ID: port number of each box
h. Circuit ID’s sub-option’s second tag, it should be 1.
i. Second tag’s length, it should be 6.
j. MAC address: System’s MAC address
vendor2 - If configure to vendor2, the circuit ID uses the following format:
a. b. c.
1 n Port number
1 byte 1 byte N bytes
a. Sub-option type, 1 indicates this is the Circuit ID.
b. Length: length of value
c. Value: Character string. The incoming port number of DHCP client packet, start with
character “p”. Ex: p02 means port 2. (No Circuit ID sub-option type, directly fill the
value.) For stacking port(1~768), The format of port 129(port 1 of box3) is p129.
307

®
vendor4 - If configure to vendor4, the circuit ID uses the following format:

a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.
1 n System - Module / Port ID - CVID
name ID
1 byte 1 byte 0-128 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1-2 1 byte 1-4
bytes bytes bytes
b. Length: Total lengths of all follow fields.
c. System name.
d. Separator character
e. Module ID
f. Separator character.
g. Port ID: port number
h. Separator character
i. CVID(Client VLAN ID)
Restrictions
Example
To configure the ciruit ID as vendor 2:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config dhcp_relay option_82 circuit_id vendor2
Command: config dhcp_relay option_82 circuit_id vendor2
Success.
25-21 config dhcp_relay option_82 policy

Description
This command is used to specify the way to process the packets from the client side which have
the 82 option field, and are not dropped since the check function is disabled.
Format
config dhcp_relay option_82 policy [replace | drop | keep]
Parameters
replace - Replace the existing option 82 field in the packet. The Switch will use it's own Option 82
value to replace the old Option 82 value in the packet.
drop - Discard if the packet has the option 82 field. If the packet from the client side contains an
Option 82 value, the packet will be dropped. If the packet from the client side doesn’t contain
an Option 82 value, it inserts it's own Option 82 value into the packet.
keep - Retain the existing option 82 field in the packet. If the packet from the client side contains
an Option 82 value, it keeps the old Option 82 value. If the packet from the client side doesn’t
contain an Option 82 value, it inserts it's own Option 82 value into the packet.
308

®
Restrictions
Example
To configure DHCP relay option 82 policy:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config dhcp_relay option_82 policy replace
Command: config dhcp_relay option_82 policy replace
Success.
25-22 config dhcp_relay option_82 remote_id

Description
This command is used to configure the remote ID string of the DHCP relay agent information
option 82 of the switch.
Format
config dhcp_relay option_82 remote_id [default | user_define <desc 32>]
Parameters
default - Use the Switch’s system MAC address as remote ID.
user_define - Use the user-defined string as remote ID. The space character is allowed in the
string.
<desc 32> - Enter the user defined description here. This value can be up to 32 characters
long.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the content in Remote ID sub-option:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config dhcp_relay option_82 remote_id user_define "D-Link
L2
Switch"
Command: config dhcp_relay option_82 remote_id user_define "D-Link L2 Switch"
Success.
309

®
25-23 config dhcp_relay option_82 state

Description
This command is used to configure the state of the DHCP relay agent information option 82 of the
switch.
Format
Parameters
enable - When the state is enabled, the DHCP packet will be inserted with the option 82 field
before being relayed to server. The DHCP packet will be processed based on the behaviour
defined in check and policy setting.
disable - When the state is disabled, the DHCP packet will be relayed directly to server without
further check and processing on the packet. The default setting is disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To enable DHCP relay option 82 state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config dhcp_relay option_82 state enable
Success.
310

®
Chapter 26 DHCP Server Command List

(RI Mode Only)
create dhcp excluded_address begin_address <ipaddr> end_address <ipaddr>
delete dhcp excluded_address [begin_address <ipaddr> end_address <ipaddr> | all]
show dhcp excluded_address
create dhcp pool <pool_name 12>
delete dhcp pool [<pool_name 12> | all]
config dhcp pool network_addr <pool_name 12> <network_address>
config dhcp pool domain_name <pool_name 12> {<domain_name 64>}
config dhcp pool dns_server <pool_name 12> {< ipaddr> {< ipaddr> {< ipaddr>}}}
config dhcp pool netbios_name_server <pool_name 12> {< ipaddr> {< ipaddr> {< ipaddr>}}}
config dhcp pool netbios_node_type <pool_name 12> [broadcast | peer_to_peer | mixed |
hybrid]
config dhcp pool default_router <pool_name 12> {< ipaddr> {< ipaddr> {< ipaddr>}}}
config dhcp pool lease <pool_name 12> [<day 0-365> <hour 0-23> <minute 0-59> | infinite]
config dhcp pool boot_file <pool_name 12> {<file_name 64>}
config dhcp pool next_server <pool_name 12> {<ipaddr>}
config dhcp ping_packets <number 0-10>
config dhcp ping_timeout <millisecond 10-2000>
create dhcp pool manual_binding <pool_name 12> < ipaddr> hardware_address <macaddr>
{type [ethernet | ieee802]}
delete dhcp pool manual_binding <pool_name 12> [<ipaddr> | all]
clear dhcp binding [<pool_name 12> [<ipaddr> | all] | all]
show dhcp binding {<pool_name 12>}
show dhcp pool {<pool_name 12>}
show dhcp pool manual_binding {<pool_name 12>}
enable dhcp_server
disable dhcp_server
show dhcp_server
clear dhcp conflict_ip [<ipaddr> | all]
show dhcp conflict_ip {<ipaddr>}
26-1 create dhcp excluded_address

Description
This command is used to create a DHCP server exclude address. The DHCP server assumes that
all IP addresses in a DHCP pool subnet are available for assigning to DHCP clients. Use this
command to specify the IP address that the DHCP server should not assign to clients. This
command can be used multiple times in order to define multiple groups of excluded addresses.
Format
create dhcp excluded_address begin_address <ipaddr> end_address <ipaddr>
Parameters
begin_address - Specify the starting address of the IP address range.
<ipaddr> - Specify the starting address of the IP address range.
end_address - Specify the ending address of the IP address range.
311

®
<ipaddr> - Specify the ending address of the IP address range.
Restrictions
Example
To specify the IP address that DHCP server should not assign to clients:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create dhcp excluded_address begin_address 10.10.10.1
end_address 10.10.10.10
Command: create dhcp excluded_address begin_address 10.10.10.1 end_address
10.10.10.10
Success.
26-2 delete dhcp excluded_address

Description
This command is used to delete a DHCP server exclude address.
Format
delete dhcp excluded_address [begin_address <ipaddr> end_address <ipaddr> | all]
Parameters
begin_address - Specify the starting address of the IP address range.
<ipaddr> - Specify the starting address of the IP address range.
end_address - Specify the ending address of the IP address range.
<ipaddr> - Specify the ending address of the IP address range.
all - Specify to delete all IP addresses.
Restrictions
Example
To delete a DHCP server exclude address:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete dhcp excluded_address begin_address 10.10.10.1
end_address 10.10.10.10
Command: delete dhcp excluded_address begin_address 10.10.10.1 end_address
10.10.10.10
Success.
312

®
26-3 show dhcp excluded_address

Description
This command is used to display the groups of IP addresses which are excluded from being a
legal assigned IP address.
Format
show dhcp excluded_address
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the DHCP server excluded addresses:
GS-3120-24TC:admin#show dhcp excluded_address
Command: show dhcp excluded_address
Index Begin Address End Address

----- ------------ ------------
1 10.10.10.1 10.10.10.10
Total Entries: 1
26-4 create dhcp pool

Description
This command is used to create a DHCP pool by specifying a name. After creating a DHCP pool,
use other DHCP pool configuration commands to configure parameters for the pool.
Format
create dhcp pool <pool_name 12>
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - Specify the name of the DHCP pool.
313

®
Restrictions
Example
To create a DHCP pool:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create dhcp pool dhcppool01
Command: create dhcp pool dhcppool01
Success.
26-5 delete dhcp pool

Description
This command is used to delete a DHCP pool.
Format
delete dhcp pool [<pool_name 12> | all]
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - Specify the name of the DHCP pool.
all - Specify to delete all the DHCP pools.
Restrictions
Example
To delete a DHCP pool:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete dhcp pool dhcppool01
Command: delete dhcp pool dhcppool01
Success.
26-6 config dhcp pool network_addr

Description
This command is used to specify the network for the DHCP pool. The addresses in the network
are free to be assigned to the DHCP client. The prefix length specifies the number of bits that
comprise the address prefix. The prefix is an alternative way of specifying the network mask of the
client. The prefix length must be preceded by a forward slash (/). When the DHCP server receives
314

®
a request from the client, the server will automatically find a pool to allocate the address. If the
request is relayed to the server by the intermediate device, the server will match the gateway IP
address carried in the packet against the network of each DHCP pool. The pool which has the
longest match will be selected. If the request packet is not through relay, then the server will match
the IP address of the IPIF that received the request packet against the network of each DHCP pool.
Format
config dhcp pool network_addr <pool_name 12> <network_address>
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - Specify the DHCP pool name.
<network_address> - Specify the IP address that the DHCP server may assign to clients.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the address range of the DHCP address pool:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config dhcp pool network_addr dhcppool01 10.10.10.0/24
Command: config dhcp pool network_addr dhcppool01 10.10.10.0/24
Success.
26-7 config dhcp pool domain_name

Description
This command is used to specify the domain name for the client if the server allocates the address
for the client from this pool. The domain name configured here will be used as the default domain
name by the client. By default, the domain name is empty. If the domain name is empty, the
domain name information will not be provided to the client.
Format
config dhcp pool domain_name <pool_name 12> {<domain_name 64>}
Parameters
<domain_name 64> - (Optional) Specify the domain name of the client.
Restrictions
315

®
Example
To configure the domain name option of the DHCP pool:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config dhcp pool domain_name dhcppool01 nba.com
Command: config dhcp pool domain_name dhcppool01 nba.com
Success.
26-8 config dhcp pool dns_server

Description
This command is used to specify the IP address of a DNS server that is available to a DHCP client.
Up to three IP addresses can be specified on one command line. If DNS server is not specified,
the DNS server information will not be provided to the client. If this command is input twice for the
same pool, the second command will overwrite the first command.
Format
config dhcp pool dns_server <pool_name 12> {< ipaddr> {< ipaddr> {< ipaddr>}}}
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - Specify the DHCP pooll name.
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Specify the IP address of the DNS server. Up to three IP addresses can be
specified on one command line.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the DNS server’s IP address:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config dhcp pool dns_server dhcppool01 10.10.10.1
Command: config dhcp pool dns_server dhcppool01 10.10.10.1
Success.
26-9 config dhcp pool netbios_name_server

Description
This command is used to specify the NetBIOS WINS server that is available to a Microsoft DHCP
client. Up to three IP addresses can be specified on one command line.
316

®
Windows Internet Naming Service (WINS) is a name resolution service that Microsoft DHCP
clients use to correlate host names to IP addresses within a general grouping of networks. If a
NetBIOS name server is not specified, the NetBIOS name server information will not be provided
to the client. If this command is input twice for the same pool, the second command will overwrite
the first command.
Format
config dhcp pool netbios_name_server <pool_name 12> {< ipaddr> {< ipaddr> {< ipaddr>}}}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Specify the IP address of the WINS server. Up to three IP addresses can
be specified on one command line.
Restrictions
Example
To configure a WINS server IP address:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config dhcp pool netbios_name_server dhcppool01 10.10.10.1
Command: config dhcp pool netbios_name_server dhcppool01 10.10.10.1
Success.
26-10 config dhcp pool netbios_node_type

Description
This command is used to specify the NetBIOS node type for a Microsoft DHCP client.
The NetBIOS node type for Microsoft DHCP clients can be one of four settings: broadcast, peer-to-
peer, mixed, or hybrid. Use this command to configure a NetBIOS over TCP/IP device that is
described in RFC 1001/1002. By default, the NetBIOS node type is broadcast.
Format
config dhcp pool netbios_node_type <pool_name 12> [broadcast | peer_to_peer | mixed |
hybrid]
Parameters
broadcast - Specify the NetBIOS node type for Microsoft DHCP clients as broadcast.
peer_to_peer - Specify the NetBIOS node type for Microsoft DHCP clients as peer_to_peer.
mixed - Specify the NetBIOS node type for Microsoft DHCP clients as mixed.
hybrid - Specify the NetBIOS node type for Microsoft DHCP clients as hybrid.
317

®
Restrictions
Example
To configure the NetBIOS node type:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config dhcp pool netbios_node_type dhcppool01 hybrid
Command: config dhcp pool netbios_node_type dhcppool01 hybrid
Success.
26-11 config dhcp pool default_router

Description
This command is used to specify the IP address of the default router for a DHCP client. Up to three
IP addresses can be specified on one command line.
After a DHCP client has booted, the client begins sending packets to its default router. The IP
address of the default router should be on the same subnet as the client. If the default router is not
specified, the default router information will not be provided to the client. If this command is input
twice for the same pool, the second command will overwrite the first command. The default router
must be within the range the network defined for the DHCP pool.
Format
config dhcp pool default_router <pool_name 12> {< ipaddr> {< ipaddr> {< ipaddr>}}}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Specify the IP address of the default router. Up to three IP addresses can
be specified on one command line.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the default router:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config dhcp pool default_router dhcppool01 10.10.10.1
Command: config dhcp pool default_router dhcppool01 10.10.10.1
Success.
318

®
26-12 config dhcp pool lease

Description
This command is used to specify the duration of the DHCP pool lease.
By default, each IP address assigned by a DHCP server comes with a one-day lease, which is the
amount of time that the address is valid.
Format
config dhcp pool lease <pool_name 12> [<day 0-365> <hour 0-23> <minute 0-59> | infinite]
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - Specify the DHCP pool’s name.
<day 0-365> - Specify the number of days of the lease.
<hour 0-23> - Specify the number of hours of the lease.
<minute 0-59> - Specify the number of minutes of the lease.
infinite - Specify a lease of unlimited duration.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the lease of a pool:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config dhcp pool lease dhcppool01 infinite
Command: config dhcp pool lease dhcppool01 infinite
Success.
26-13 config dhcp pool boot_file

Description
This command is used to specify the name of the file that is used as a boot image.
The boot file is used to store the boot image for the client. The boot image is generally the
operating system the client uses to load. If this command is input twice for the same pool, the
second command will overwrite the first command. If the bootfile is not specified, the boot file
information will not be provided to the client.
Format
config dhcp pool boot_file <pool_name 12> {<file_name 64>}
319

®
Parameters
<file_name 64> - (Optional) Specify the file name of the boot image.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the boot file:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config dhcp pool boot_file dhcppool01 boot.had
Command: config dhcp pool boot_file dhcppool01 boot.had
Success.
26-14 config dhcp pool next_server

Description
This command is used by the DHCP client boot process, typically a TFTP server. If next server
information is not specified, it will not be provided to the client. If this command is input twice for
the same pool, the second command will overwrite the first command.
Format
config dhcp pool next_server <pool_name 12> {<ipaddr>}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Specify the IP address of the next server.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the next server:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config dhcp pool next_server dhcppool01 192.168.0.1
Command: config dhcp pool next_server dhcppool01 192.168.0.1
Success.
320

®
26-15 config dhcp ping_packets

Description
This command is used to specify the number of ping packets the DHCP server sends to an IP
address before assigning this address to a requesting client.
By default, the DHCP server pings a pool address twice before assigning the address to a DHCP
client. If the ping is unanswered, the DHCP server assumes (with a high probability) that the
address is not in use and assigns the address to the requesting client. If the ping is answered, the
server will discard the current IP address and try another IP address.
Format
config dhcp ping_packets <number 0-10>
Parameters
<number 0-10> - Specify the number of ping packets. 0 means there is no ping test. The default
value is 2.
Restrictions
Example
To configure ping packets:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config dhcp ping_packets 4
Command: config dhcp ping_packets 4
Success.
26-16 config dhcp ping_timeout

Description
This command is used to specify the amount of time the DHCP server must wait before timing out
a ping packet.
By default, the DHCP server waits 100 milliseconds before timing out a ping packet.
Format
config dhcp ping_timeout <millisecond 10-2000>
Parameters
<millisecond 10-2000> - Specify the amount of time the DHCP server must wait before timing
out a ping packet. The default value is 100.
321

®
Restrictions
Example
To configure the time out value for ping packets:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config dhcp ping_timeout 500
Command: config dhcp ping_timeout 500
Success.
26-17 create dhcp pool manual_binding

Description
This command is used to specify the distinct identification of the client in dotted-hexadecimal
notation or hardware address.
An address binding is a mapping between the IP address and MAC address of a client. The IP
address of a client can be assigned manually by an administrator or assigned automatically from a
pool by a DHCP server.
The IP address specified in the manual binding entry must be in a range within that the network
uses for the DHCP pool. If the user specifies a conflict IP address, an error message will be
returned. If a number of manual binding entries are created, and the network address for the pool
is changed such that conflicts are generated, those manual binding entries which conflict with the
new network address will be automatically deleted.
Format
create dhcp pool manual_binding <pool_name 12> < ipaddr> hardware_address <macaddr>
{type [ethernet | ieee802]}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Specify the IP address which will be assigned to a specified client.
hardware_address - Specify the hardware MAC address.
type - (Optional) Specify the DHCP pool manual binding type.
ethernet - Specify Ethernet type.
ieee802 -Specify IEEE802 type.
Restrictions
Example
To configure manual bindings:
322

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create dhcp pool manual_binding dhcppool01 10.10.10.1

hardware_address 00-80-C8-02-02-02 type ethernet
Command: create dhcp pool manual_binding dhcppool01 10.10.10.1 hardware_address
00-80-C8-02-02-02 type ethernet
Success.
26-18 delete dhcp pool manual_binding

Description
This command is used to delete DHCP server manual binding.
Format
delete dhcp pool manual_binding <pool_name 12> [<ipaddr> | all]
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Specify the IP address which will be assigned to a specified client.
all - Specify to delete all IP addresses.
Restrictions
Example
To delete DHCP server manual binding:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete dhcp pool manual_binding dhcppool01 10.10.10.1
Command: delete dhcp pool manual_binding dhcppool01 10.10.10.1
Success.
26-19 clear dhcp binding

Description
This command is used to clear a binding entry or all binding entries in a pool or clears all binding
entries in all pools. Note that this command will not clear the dynamic binding entry which matches
a manual binding entry.
Format
clear dhcp binding [<pool_name 12> [<ipaddr> | all] | all]
323

®
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - Specify the DHCP pool name to clear.
<ipaddr> - Specify the IP address to clear.
all - Specify to clear all IP addresses.
all - Specify to clear all DHCP pool names and IP addresses.
Restrictions
Example
To clear dynamic binding entries in the pool named “engineering”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#clear dhcp binding dhcppool01 10.20.3.4
Command: clear dhcp binding dhcppool01 10.20.3.4
Success.
26-20 show dhcp binding

Description
This command is used to display dynamic binding entries.
Format
show dhcp binding {<pool_name 12>}
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - (Optional) Specify a DHCP pool name.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display dynamic binding entries for “engineering”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show dhcp binding engineering
Command: show dhcp binding engineering
Pool Name IP Address Hardware Address Type Status Lifetime

------------ --------------- ----------------- -------- --------- -------------
engineering 192.168.0.1 00-80-C8-08-13-88 Ethernet Manual 86400
engineering 192.168.0.2 00-80-C8-08-13-99 Ethernet Automatic 38600
engineering 192.168.0.3 00-80-C8-08-13-A0 Ethernet Offering -
engineering 192.168.0.4 00-80-C8-08-13-B0 Ethernet BOOTP Infinite
324

®
Total Entries: 4
26-21 show dhcp pool

Description
This command is used to display the information for DHCP pool. If pool name is not specified,
information for all pools will be displayed.
Format
show dhcp pool {<pool_name 12>}
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - (Optional) Specify the DHCP pool name.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the current DHCP pool information for “engineering”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show dhcp pool engineering
Command: show dhcp pool engineering
Pool Name : engineering

Network Address : 10.10.10.0/24
Domain Name : dlink.com
DNA Server : 10.10.10.1
NetBIOS Name Server : 10.10.10.1
NetBIOS Node Type : broadcast
Default Router : 10.10.10.1
Pool Lease : 10 days, 0 hours, 0 minutes
Boot File : boot.bin
Next Server : 10.10.10.2
26-22 show dhcp pool manual_binding

Description
This command is used to display the configured manual binding entries.
325

®
Format
show dhcp pool manual_binding {<pool_name 12>}
Parameters
<pool_name 12> - (Optional) Specify the DHCP pool name.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the configured manual binding entries:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show dhcp pool manual_binding
Command: show dhcp pool manual_binding
Pool Name IP Address Hardware Address Type

--------- --------- ------------------------ ---------
dhcppool01 10.10.10.1 00-80-C8-02-02-02 ethernet
Total Entries: 1
26-23 enable dhcp_server

Description
This command is used to enable the DHCP server function.
If DHCP relay is enabled, DHCP server cannot be enabled. The opposite is also true. For Layer 2
switches, if DHCP client is enabled on the only interface, then DHCP server cannot be enabled.
For layer 3 switches, when the System interface is the only interface then can DHCP client be
enabled. If the DHCP client is enabled, then the DHCP server cannot be enabled.
Format
enable dhcp_server
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
326

®
Example
To enable DHCP server:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable dhcp_server
Command: enable dhcp_server
Success.
26-24 disable dhcp_server

Description
This command is used to disable the DHCP server function on the switch.
Format
disable dhcp_server
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable the Switch’s DHCP server:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable dhcp_server
Command: disable dhcp_server
Success.
26-25 show dhcp_server

Description
This command is used to display the current DHCP server configuration.
Format
show dhcp_server
Parameters
None.
327

®
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the DHCP server status:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show dhcp_server
Command: show dhcp_server
DHCP Server Global State: Enabled

Ping Packet Number : 4
Ping Timeout : 500 ms
26-26 clear dhcp conflict_ip

Description
This command is used to clear an entry or all entries from the conflict IP database.
Format
clear dhcp conflict_ip [<ipaddr> | all]
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Specify the IP address to be cleared.
all - Specify that all IP addresses will be cleared.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To clear an IP address 10.20.3.4 from the conflict database:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#clear dhcp conflict_ip 10.20.3.4
Command: clear dhcp conflict_ip 10.20.3.4
Success.
328

®
26-27 show dhcp conflict_ip

Description
This command is used to display the IP address that has been identified as being in conflict.
The DHCP server will use ping packet to determine whether an IP address is conflicting with other
hosts before binding this IP. The IP address which has been identified in conflict will be moved to
the conflict IP database. The system will not attempt to bind the IP address in the conflict IP
database unless the user clears it from the conflict IP database.
Format
show dhcp conflict_ip {<ipaddr>}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Specify the IP address to be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the entries in the DHCP conflict IP database:
DES-3810-28:admin#show dhcp conflict_ip
Command: show dhcp conflict_ip
IP Address Detection Method Detection Time

----------- ---------------- --------------------
172.16.1.32 Ping 2007/08/30 17:06:59
172.16.1.32 Gratuitous ARP 2007/09/10 19:38:01
DES-3810-28:admin#
329

®
Chapter 27 DHCP Server Screening

Command List
config filter dhcp_server [add permit server_ip <ipaddr> {client_mac <macaddr>} ports
[<portlist> | all] | delete permit server_ip <ipaddr> {client_mac <macaddr>} ports [<portlist> |
all] | ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable] | illegal_server_log_suppress_duration [1min
| 5min | 30min]]
show filter dhcp_server
config filter dhcp_server log [enable | disable]
config filter dhcp_server trap [enable | disable]
27-1 config filter dhcp_server

Description
This command is used to configure DHCP server screening.
With DHCP server screening function, illegal DHCP server packet will be filtered. This command is
used to configure the state of the function for filtering of DHCP server packet and to add/delete the
DHCP server/client binding entry.
This command is useful for projects that support per port control of the DHCP server screening
function. The filter can be based on the DHCP server IP address, or based on a binding of the
DHCP server IP and client MAC address.
The command has two purposes: To specify to filter all DHCP server packets on the specific port
and to specify to allow some DHCP server packets with pre-defined server IP addresses and client
MAC addresses. With this function, we can restrict the DHCP server to service specific DHCP
clients. This is useful when two DHCP servers are present on the network, one of them provides
the private IP address, and one of them provides the IP address.
Enabling filtering of the DHCP server port state will create one access profile and create one
access rule per port (UDP port = 67). Filter commands in this file will share the same access profile.
Addition of a permit DHCP entry will create one access profile and create one access rule. Filtering
commands in this file will share the same access profile.
Format
config filter dhcp_server [add permit server_ip <ipaddr> {client_mac <macaddr>} ports
[<portlist> | all] | delete permit server_ip <ipaddr> {client_mac <macaddr>} ports [<portlist>
| all] | ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable] | illegal_server_log_suppress_duration
[1min | 5min | 30min ]]
Parameters
add permit - Specify to add a DHCP permit.
server_ip - The IP address of the DHCP server to be filtered.
<ipaddr> - Enter the DHCP server IP address here.
client_mac - (Optional) The MAC address of the DHCP client.
<macaddr> - Enter the DHCP client MAC address here.
ports - The port number of filter DHCP server.
330

®

delete permit - Specify to delete a DHCP permit.
server_ip - The IP address of the DHCP server to be filtered.
<ipaddr> - Enter the DHCP server IP address here.
client_mac - (Optional) The MAC address of the DHCP client.
<macaddr> - Enter the DHCP client MAC address here.
ports - The port number of filter DHCP server.
state - Specify to enable or disable the filter DHCP server state.
enable - Specify that the filter DHCP server state will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the filter DHCP server state will be disabled.
illegal_server_log_suppress_duration - Specify the same illegal DHCP server IP address
detected will be logged only once within the duration. The default value is 5 minutes.
1min - Specify that illegal server log suppress duration value will be set to 1 minute.
5min - Specify that illegal server log suppress duration value will be set to 5 minutes.
30min - Specify that illegal server log suppress duration value will be set to 30 minutes.
Restrictions
Example
To add an entry from the DHCP server/client filter list in the Switch’s database:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config filter dhcp_server add permit server_ip 10.1.1.1
client_mac 00-00-00-00-00-01 port 1:1-1:24
Command: config filter dhcp_server add permit server_ip 10.1.1.1 client_mac 00-
00-00-00-00-01 port 1:1-1:24
Success.
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config filter dhcp_server ports 1:1-1:10 state enable

Command: config filter dhcp_server ports 1:1-1:10 state enable
Success.
27-2 show filter dhcp_server

Description
This command is used to display the DHCP server/client filter list created on the Switch.
Format
show filter dhcp_server
331

®
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the DHCP server/client filter list created on the Switch:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show filter dhcp_server
Command: show filter dhcp_server
Enabled Ports: 1:1-1:10

Trap State: Disabled
Log State: Disabled
Illegal Server Log Suppress Duration:5 minutes
Permit DHCP Server/Client Table:

Server IP Address Client MAC Address Port
----------------- ------------------ --------------------
10.1.1.1 00-00-00-00-00-01 1:1-1:24
Total Entries: 1
27-3 config filter dhcp_server log

Description
This command is used to enable or disable the log function.
Format
config filter dhcp_server log [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enable the log function.
disable - Disable the log function.
Restrictions
Example
To disable the log function.
332

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config filter dhcp_server log disable

Command: config filter dhcp_server log disable
Success.
27-4 config filter dhcp_server trap

Description
This command is used to enable or disable the log function.
Format
config filter dhcp_server trap [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enable the trap function.
disable - Disable the trap function.
Restrictions
Example
To disable the trap function.
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config filter dhcp_server trap disable
Command: config filter dhcp_server trap disable
Success.
333

®
Chapter 28 DHCPv6 Relay Command

List
enable dhcpv6_relay
disable dhcpv6_relay
config dhcpv6_relay [add|delete] ipif <ipif_name 12> <ipv6addr>
config dhcpv6_relay hop_count <value 1-32>
config dhcpv6_relay ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all] state [enable | disable]
config dhcpv6_relay option_37 {state [enable | disable] | check [enable | disable] | remote_id
[default | cid_with_user_define <desc 128> | user_define <desc 128>]}
show dhcpv6_relay {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
28-1 enable dhcpv6_relay

Description
This command is used to enable the DHCPv6 relay function on the Switch.
Format
enable dhcpv6_relay
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the DHCPv6 relay global state to enable:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable dhcpv6_relay
Command: enable dhcpv6_relay
Success.
28-2 disable dhcpv6_relay

Description
This command is used to disable the DHCPv6 relay function on the Switch.
334

®
Format
disable dhcpv6_relay
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the DHCPv6 relay global state to disable:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable dhcpv6_relay
Command: disable dhcpv6_relay
Success.
28-3 config dhcpv6_relay

Description
The command is used to add or delete an IPv6 address which is a destination to forward (relay)
DHCPv6 packets.
Format
config dhcpv6_relay [add|delete] ipif <ipif_name 12> <ipv6addr>
Parameters
add - Add an IPv6 destination to the DHCPv6 relay table.
delete - Delete an IPv6 destination from the DHCPv6 relay table.
ipif - The IP information for DHCPv6 relay.
<ipif_name 12> - The name of the IP interface in which DHCPv6 relay is to be enabled.
<ipv6addr> - The DHCPv6 server IP address.
Restrictions
Example
To add a DHCPv6 server to the relay table:
335

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config dhcpv6_relay add ipif System

2001:DB8:1234:0:218:FEFF:FEFB:CC0E
Command: config dhcpv6_relay add ipif System 2001:DB8:1234:0:218:FEFF:FEFB:CC0E
Success.
28-4 config dhcpv6_relay hop_count

Description
This command is used to configure the DHCPv6 relay hop count of the Switch.
Format
config dhcpv6_relay hop_count <value 1-32>
Parameters
<value 1-32> - Enter the number of relay agents that have to be relayed in this message. The
range is from 1 to 32. The default value is 4.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the maximum hops of a DHCPv6 relay packet that can be transferred to 4:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config dhcpv6_relay hop_count 4
Command: config dhcpv6_relay hop_count 4
Success.
28-5 config dhcpv6_relay ipif

Description
Format
config dhcpv6_relay ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
<ipif_name 12> - Specify the name of the IP interface.
all - The value all indicates all configured IP interfaces.
336

®
state - Enable or disable the DHCPv6 relay state of the interface.

enable - Enable the DHCPv6 relay state of the interface.
disable - Disable the DHCPv6 relay state of the interface.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the DHCPv6 relay state of the System interface to enable:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config dhcpv6_relay ipif System state enable
Command: config dhcpv6_relay ipif System state enable
Success.
28-6 config dhcpv6_relay option_37

Description
This command is used to configure the DHCPv6 Relay option 37 function.When DHCPv6 relay
option 37 is enabled, the DHCP packet is inserted with the option 37 field before being relayed to
the server. The DHCP packet will be processed based on the behavior defined in the check and
remote ID type setting. When the state is disabled, the DHCP packet is relayed directly to the
server.
Format
config dhcpv6_relay option_37 {state [enable | disable] | check [enable | disable] |
remote_id [default | cid_with_user_define <desc 128> | user_define <desc 128>]}
Parameters
state - (Optional) Specify DHCPv6 relay option 37 state.
enable - When the state is enabled, the DHCP packet is inserted with the option 37 field
before being relayed to the server.
disable - When the state is disabled, the DHCP packet is relayed directly to the server.
check – (Optional) Specify to check the packets or not.
enable - When the check state is enabled, packets from client side should not have the option
37 field. If client originating packets have the option 37 field, they will be dropped.
disable - Specify for not checking the packets.
remote_id – (Optional) Specify the content in the remote ID.
default – Specify to have the remote ID as VLAN ID + Module + Port +System MAC address
of the device.
cid_with_user_define – Specify to have the remote ID as VLAN ID + Module + Port + user
defined string.
<desc 128> - Enter the string.
user_define – Use the user-defined string as the remote ID.
<desc 128> - Enter the string.
337

®
Restrictions
Example
To configure the DHCPv6 relay option 37:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config dhcpv6_relay option_37 state enable
Command: config dhcpv6_relay option_37 state enable
Success.
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config dhcpv6_relay option_37 check enable

Command: config dhcpv6_relay option_37 check enable
Success.
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config dhcpv6_relay option_37 remote_id default

Command: config dhcpv6_relay option_37 remote_id default
Success.
28-7 show dhcpv6_relay

Description
This command is used to display the current DHCPv6 relay configuration of the specified or all IP
Interfaces.
Format
show dhcpv6_relay {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
Parameters
ipif - (Optional) The IP information for DHCPv6 relay.
<ipif_name 12> - The name of the IP interface in which DHCPv6 relay is to be enabled.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the DHCPv6 relay configuration of all interfaces:
338

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show dhcpv6_relay
Command: show dhcpv6_relay
DHCPv6 Relay Global State : Enabled

DHCPv6 Hops Count Limit : 4
DHCPv6 Relay Information Option 37 State : Enabled
DHCPv6 Relay Information Option 37 Check : Disabled
DHCPv6 Relay Information Option 37 Remote ID Type : Default
DHCPv6 Relay Information Option 37 Remote ID :
---------------------------------------------------------------
DHCPv6 Relay Status : Enabled
Server Address : 2001:DB8:1234::218:FEFF:FEFB:CC0E
Total Entries : 1
339

®
Chapter 29 Digital Diagnostic

Monitoring (DDM) Command
List (RI and EI Mode Only)
config ddm [trap | log] [enable | disable]
config ddm ports [<portlist> | all] [[temperature_threshold {high_alarm <degrees> | low_alarm
<degrees> | high_warning <degrees> | low_warning <degrees>} | voltage_threshold
{high_alarm <voltage> | low_alarm <voltage> | high_warning <voltage> | low_warning
<voltage>} | bias_current_threshold {high_alarm <milliampere> | low_alarm <milliampere> |
high_warning <milliampere> | low_warning <milliampere>} | tx_power_threshold {high_alarm
<milliwatts> | low_alarm <milliwatts> | high_warning <milliwatts> | low_warning <milliwatts>} |
rx_power_threshold {high_alarm <milliwatts> | low_alarm <milliwatts> | high_warning
<milliwatts> | low_warning <milliwatts>}] | {state [enable | disable] | shutdown [alarm | warning
| none]}]
show ddm
show ddm ports {<portlist>} [status | configuration]
29-1 config ddm

Description
The command configures the DDM log and trap action when encountering an exceeding alarm or
warning thresholds event.
Format
config ddm [trap | log] [enable | disable]
Parameters
trap - Specify whether to send traps, when the operating parameter exceeds the corresponding
threshold. The DDM trap is disabled by default.
log - Specify whether to send a log, when the operating parameter exceeds the corresponding
threshold. The DDM log is enabled by default.
enable - Specify to enable the log or trap sending option.
disable - Specify to disable the log or trap sending option.
Restrictions
Only Administrator, and Operator level users can issue this command.
Example
To configure DDM log state to enable:
340

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ddm log enable

Command: config ddm log enable
Success.
To configure DDM trap state to enable:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ddm trap enable
Command: config ddm trap enable
Success.
29-2 config ddm ports

Description
The command is used to configure the DDM settings of the specified ports.
Format
config ddm ports [<portlist> | all] [[temperature_threshold {high_alarm <degrees> |
low_alarm <degrees> | high_warning <degrees> | low_warning <degrees>} |
voltage_threshold {high_alarm <voltage> | low_alarm <voltage> | high_warning <voltage> |
low_warning <voltage>} | bias_current_threshold {high_alarm <milliampere> | low_alarm
<milliampere> | high_warning <milliampere> | low_warning <milliampere>} |
tx_power_threshold {high_alarm <milliwatts> | low_alarm <milliwatts> | high_warning
<milliwatts> | low_warning <milliwatts>} | rx_power_threshold {high_alarm <milliwatts> |
low_alarm <milliwatts> | high_warning <milliwatts> | low_warning <milliwatts>}] | {state
[enable | disable] | shutdown [alarm | warning | none]}]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter the range of ports to be configured here.
all - Specify that all the optic ports’ operating parameters will be configured.
temperature_threshold - Specify the threshold of the optic module’s temperature in centigrade.
At least one parameter shall be specified for this threshold.
high_alarm - (Optional) Specify the high threshold for the alarm. When the operating
parameter rises above this value, the action associated with the alarm is taken.
<degrees> - Enter the high threshold alarm value used here.
low_alarm - (Optional) Specify the low threshold for the alarm. When the operating parameter
falls below this value, the action associated with the alarm is taken.
<degrees> - Enter the low threshold alarm value used here.
high_warning - (Optional) Specify the high threshold for the warning. When the operating
parameter rises above this value, the action associated with the warning is taken.
<degrees> - Enter the high threshold warning value here.
low_warning - (Optional) Specify the low threshold for the warning. When the operating
parameter falls below this value, the action associated with the warning is taken.
<degrees> - Enter the low threshold warning value here.
voltage_threshold - Specify the threshold of optic module’s voltage.
341

®
<voltage> - Enter the high threshold alarm value used here.
<voltage> - Enter the low threshold alarm value used here.
<voltage> - Enter the high threshold warning value here.
<voltage> - Enter the low threshold warning value here.
bias_current_threshold - Specify the threshold of the optic module’s bias current.
<milliampere> - Enter the high threshold alarm value used here.
<milliampere> - Enter the low threshold alarm value used here.
<milliampere> - Enter the high threshold warning value here.
<milliampere> - Enter the low threshold warning value here.
tx_power_threshold - Specify the threshold of the optic module’s output power.
<milliwatts> - Enter the high threshold alarm value used here.
<milliwatts> - Enter the low threshold alarm value used here.
<milliwatts> - Enter the high threshold warning value here.
<milliwatts> - Enter the low threshold warning value here.
rx_power_threshold - Specify the threshold of optic module’s received power.
<milliwatts> - Enter the high threshold alarm value used here.
<milliwatts> - Enter the low threshold alarm value used here.
<milliwatts> - Enter the high threshold warning value here.
<milliwatts> - Enter the low threshold warning value here.
state - (Optional) Specify the DDM state to enable or disable. If the state is disabled, no DDM
action will take effect.
enable - Specify to enable the DDM state.
disable - Specify to disable the DDM state.
shutdown - (Optional) Specify whether or not to shutdown the port when the operating
parameter exceeds the corresponding alarm threshold or warning threshold.
alarm - Shutdown the port when the configured alarm threshold range is exceeded.
warning - Shutdown the port when the configured warning threshold range is exceeded.
none - The port will never shutdown regardless if the threshold ranges are exceeded or not.
342

®
Restrictions
Only Administrator, and Operator level users can issue this command.
Example
To configure the port 21’s temperature threshold:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ddm ports 1:21 temperature_threshold high_alarm
84.9555 low_alarm -10 high_warning 70 low_warning 2.25251
Command: config ddm ports 1:21 temperature_threshold high_alarm 84.9555
low_alarm -10 high_warning 70 low_warning 2.25251
Success.
To configure the port 21’s voltage threshold:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ddm ports 1:21 voltage_threshold high_alarm 4.25
low_alarm 2.5 high_warning 3.5 low_warning 3
Command: config ddm ports 1:21 voltage_threshold high_alarm 4.25 low_alarm 2.5
high_warning 3.5 low_warning 3
Success.
To configure the port 21’s bias current threshold:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ddm ports 1:21 bias_current_threshold high_alarm
7.25 low_alarm 0.004 high_warning 0.5 low_warning 0.008
Command: config ddm ports 1:21 bias_current_threshold high_alarm 7.25 low_alarm
0.004 high_warning 0.5 low_warning 0.008
Success.
To configure the port 21’s transmit power threshold:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ddm ports 1:21 tx_power_threshold high_alarm 0.625
low_alarm 0.006 high_warning 0.55 low_warning 0.008
Command: config ddm ports 1:21 tx_power_threshold high_alarm 0.625 low_alarm
Success.
To configure the port 21’s receive power threshold:
343

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ddm ports 1:21 rx_power_threshold high_alarm 4.55

low_alarm 0.01 high_warning 3.5 low_warning 0.03
Command: config ddm ports 1:21 rx_power_threshold high_alarm 4.55 low_alarm
Success.
To configure port 21’s actions associate with the alarm:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ddm ports 1:21 state enable shutdown alarm
Command: config ddm ports 1:21 state enable shutdown alarm
Success.
29-3 show ddm

Description
This command is used to display the DDM global settings.
Format
show ddm
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the DDM global settings:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ddm
Command: show ddm
DDM Log : Enabled

DDM Trap : Enabled
344

®
29-4 show ddm ports

Description
This command is used to show the current operating DDM parameters and configuration values of
the optic module of the specified ports. There are two types of thresholds: the administrative
configuration and the operation configuration threshold.
For the optic port, when a particular threshold was configured by user, it will be shown in this
command with a tag indicating that it is a threshold that user configured, else it would be the
threshold read from the optic module that is being inserted.
Format
show ddm ports {<portlist>} [status | configuration]
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter the range of ports to be displayed here.
status - Specify that the operating parameter will be displayed.
configuration - Specify that the configuration values will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display ports 21-22’s operating parameters:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ddm ports 1:21-1:22 status
Command: show ddm ports 1:21-1:22 status
Port Temperature Voltage Bias-Current TX-Power RX-Power

(in Celsius) (V) (mA) (mW) (mW)
------- ------------- ---------- -------------- ---------- ------------
1:21 21.5 2.5 50 3 4
1:22 - - - - -
To display port 21’s configuration:
345

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ddm ports 1:21 configuration

Command: show ddm ports 1:21 configuration
Port: 1:21
--------------------------------------------
DDM State : Enabled
Shutdown : Alarm
Threshold Temperature Voltage Bias-Current TX-Power RX-Power

(in Celsius) (V) (mA) (mW) (mW)
------------- ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------ ------------
High Alarm 84.9555(A) 4.2500(A) 7.2500(A) 0.6250(A) 4.5500(A)
Low Alarm -10.0000(A) 2.5000(A) 0.0040(A) 0.0060(A) 0.0100(A)
High Warning 70.0000(A) 3.5000(A) 0.5000(A) 0.5500(A) 3.5000(A)
Low Warning 2.2525(A) 3.0000(A) 0.0080(A) 0.0080(A) 0.0300(A)
A means that the threshold is administratively configured.
346

®
Chapter 30 Distance Vector Multicast

Routing Protocol (DVMRP)
Command List (RI Mode
Only)
config dvmrp [ipif <ipif_name 12> | all] {metric <value 1-31> | probe <sec 1-65535> |
neighbor_timeout <sec 1-65535> | state [enable | disable]}(1)
enable dvmrp
disable dvmrp
show dvmrp {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
show dvmrp neighbor {ipif <ipif_name 12> | ipaddress <network_address>}
show dvmrp nexthop {ipaddress <network_address> | ipif <ipif_name 12>}
show dvmrp routing_table {ipaddress <network_address>}
30-1 config dvmrp

Description
This command is used to configure DVMRP configurations.
Format
config dvmrp [ipif <ipif_name 12> | all] {metric <value 1-31> | probe <sec 1-65535> |
neighbor_timeout <sec 1-65535> | state [enable | disable]}(1)
Parameters
ipif - Specify the IP interface name used.
characters long.
metric - Allows the assignment of a DVMRP route cost to the above IP interface. A DVMRP route
cost is a relative number that represents the real cost of using this route in the construction of
a multicast delivery tree. It is similar to, but not defined as, the hop count in RIP.
<value 1-31> - Enter the metric value used here. This value must be between 1 and 31. The
default value is 1.
probe - Specify the time in seconds between the DVMRP Probe message transmissions.
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the probe value used here. This value must be between 1 and 65535
seconds. The default value is 10 seconds.
neighbor_timeout - Specify the time period that DVMRP will hold a DVMRP neighbor before the
neighbor’s Expire Timer expired.
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the neighbor timeout value used here. This value must be between 1
and 65535 seconds. The default value is 35 seconds.
state - Specify the DVMRP state of the IP interface.
enable - Specify that DVMRP of the specified IP interface will be enabled.
disable - Specify that DVMRP of the specified IP interface will be disabled.
347

®
Restrictions
Example
To configure DVMRP configurations of IP interface called ‘System’:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config dvmrp ipif System neighbor_timeout 30 metric 1 probe
5
Command: config dvmrp ipif System neighbor_timeout 30 metric 1 probe 5
Success.
30-2 enable dvmrp

Description
This command is used to enable the DVMRP global state on the Switch.
Format
enable dvmrp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable DVMRP:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable dvmrp
Command: enable dvmrp
Success.
30-3 disable dvmrp

Description
This command is used to disable the DVMRP global state on the Switch.
348

®
Format
disable dvmrp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable DVMRP:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable dvmrp
Command: disable dvmrp
Success.
30-4 show dvmrp

Description
This command is used to display DVMRP configurations.
Format
show dvmrp {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
Parameters
ipif - (Optional) Specify the IP interface name used for the display.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name used for the display here. This name can be up
If no parameter is specified, then all the IP interfaces will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display DVMRP configurations:
349

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show dvmrp
Command: show dvmrp
DVMRP Global State : Disabled
Interface IP Address Neighbor Timeout Probe Metric State

------------ ----------------- ---------------- ----- ------ --------
System 10.90.90.90 35 10 1 Disabled
Total Entries: 1
30-5 show dvmrp neighbor

Description
This command is used to display the DVMRP neighbor table.
Format
show dvmrp neighbor {ipif <ipif_name 12> | ipaddress <network_address>}
Parameters
ipaddress - (Optional) Specify the IP address and netmask of the destination used.
<network_address> - Enter the IP address and netmask of the destination used here.
If no parameter is specified, the system will display the whole DVMRP neighbor table.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display DVMRP neighbor table:
350

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show dvmrp neighbor

Command: show dvmrp neighbor
DVMRP Neighbor Address Table
Interface Neighbor Address Generation ID Expire Time

--------------- ---------------- ------------- -----------
System 10.48.74.123 86 32
Total Entries : 1
30-6 show dvmrp nexthop

Description
This command is used to display the DVMRP routing next hop table.
Format
show dvmrp nexthop {ipaddress <network_address> | ipif <ipif_name 12>}
Parameters
If no parameter is specified, the system will display all the DVMRP routing next hop tables.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display DVMRP routing next hop table:
351

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show dvmrp nexthop

Command: show dvmrp nexthop
DVMRP Routing Next Hop Table
Source Address/NetMask Interface Name Type

---------------------- --------------- ------
10.0.0.0/8 ip2 Leaf
10.0.0.0/8 ip3 Leaf
20.0.0.0/8 System Leaf
20.0.0.0/8 ip3 Leaf
30.0.0.0/8 System Leaf
30.0.0.0/8 ip2 Leaf
Total Entries : 6
30-7 show dvmrp routing_table

Description
This command is used to display the DVMRP routing table.
Format
show dvmrp routing_table {ipaddress <network_address>}
Parameters
If no parameter is specified, the system will display the whole DVMRP routing table.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display DVMRP routing table:
352

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show dvmrp routing_table

Command: show dvmrp routing_table
DVMRP Routing Table
Source Address/Netmask Upstream Neighbor Metric Learned Interface Expire

---------------------- ----------------- ------ ------- ---------- ------
10.0.0.0/8 10.90.90.90 2 Local System -
20.0.0.0/16 20.1.1.1 2 Local ip2 -
30.0.0.0/24 30.1.1.1 2 Local ip3 -
Total Entries : 3
353

®
Chapter 31 D-Link License

management System (DLMS)
Command List
install dlms activation_code <string 25> {unit <unit_id 1-6>}
show dlms license {unit <unit_id 1-6>}
31-1 install dlms activation_code

Description
This command is used to install an activation code to activate or unlock function on the applicance.
Format
install dlms activation_code <string 25> {unit <unit_id 1-6>}
Parameters
<string 25> - Specify an activation code.
unit - (Optional) Specify the Switch in the switch stack.
<unit_id 1-6> - Enter the unit ID of the Switch.
Restrictions
Example
To install an activation code:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#install dlms activation_code xBc7vNWsSpchuQkGZsTfPwcfa
Command: install dlms activation_code xBc7vNWsSpchuQkGZsTfPwcfa
Success.
Please reboot the device to active the license.
31-2 show dlms license

Description
This command is used to display license information.
354

®
Format
show dlms license {unit <unit_id 1-6>}
Parameters
unit - (Optional) Specify the Swithc in the switch stack.
<unit_id 1-6> - Enter the unit ID of the Switch.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display license information:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show dlms license
Command: show dlms license
Device Default License : EI
355

®
Chapter 32 D-Link Unidirectional Link

Detection (DULD) Command
config duld ports [<portlist> | all ] {state [enable | disable] | mode [shutdown | normal] |
discovery_time <sec 5-65535>}(1)
show duld ports {<portlist>}
32-1 config duld ports

Description
The command is used to configure unidirectional link detection on ports. Unidirectional link
detection provides discovery mechanism based on 802.3ah to discovery its neighbor. If the OAM
discovery can complete in configured discovery time, it concludes the link is bidirectional.
Otherwise, it starts detecting task to detect the link status.
Format
config duld ports [<portlist> | all ] {state [enable | disable] | mode [shutdown | normal] |
discovery_time <sec 5-65535>}(1)
Parameters
all - Specify to select all ports.
state - Specify these ports unidirectional link detection status.
enable - Enable unidirectional link detection status.
disable - Disable unidirectional link detection status.
mode - Specify the mode when detecting unidirectional link.
shutdown - If any unidirectional link is detected, disable the port and log an event.
normal - Only log an event when a unidirectional link is detected.
discovery_time - Specify these ports neighbor discovery time. If OAM discovery cannot
complete in the discovery time, the unidirectional link detection will start.
<sec 5-65535> - Enter a time in second. The default discovery time is 5 seconds.
Restrictions
Example
To enable unidirectional link detection on port 1:
356

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config duld ports 1 state enable

Command: config duld ports 1:1 state enable
Success.
32-2 show duld ports

Description
This command is used to show unidirectional link detection information.
Format
show duld ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Specify a range of ports.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show ports 1-4 unidirectional link detection information:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show duld ports 1:1-1:4
Command: show duld ports 1:1-1:4
Port Admin State Oper Status Mode Link Status Discovery Time(Sec)
----- ----------- ----------- -------- -------------- -------------------
1:1 Enabled Disabled Normal Unknown 5
1:2 Disabled Disabled Normal Unknown 5
357

®
Chapter 33 Energy Efficient Ethernet

(EEE) Command List
config eee ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
show eee ports {<portlist>}
33-1 config eee ports

Description
This command is used to enable or disable the EEE function on the specified port(s) on the Switch.
Format
config eee ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
<portlist> - Specify a range of ports to be configured.
all - Specify to configure all ports.
state - Specify the EEE state. The default is disabled.
enable - Enable the EEE function for the specified port(s).
disable - Disable the EEE function for the specified port(s).
Restrictions
Example
To enable the EEE state on ports 1:2-1:5:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config eee ports 1:2-1:5 state enable
Command: config eee ports 1:2-1:5 state enable
Success.
33-2 show eee ports

Description
This command is used to display the EEE function state on the specified port(s).
Format
show eee ports {<portlist>}
358

®
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Specify a list of ports to be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the EEE state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show eee ports 1:1-1:6,1:9
Command: show eee ports 1:1-1:6,1:9
Port State
--------- -----------
1:1 Disabled
1:2 Enabled
1:3 Enabled
1:4 Enabled
1:5 Enabled
1:6 Disabled
1:9 Disabled
359

®
Chapter 34 Ethernet Ring Protection

Switching (ERPS) Command
enable erps
disable erps
create erps raps_vlan <vlanid 1-4094>
delete erps raps_vlan <vlanid 1-4094>
config erps raps_vlan <vlanid 1-4094> [state [enable | disable] | ring_mel <value 0-7> | ring_port
[west [<port> | virtual_channel] | east [<port> | virtual_channel]] | rpl_port [west | east | none] |
rpl_owner [enable | disable] | protected_vlan [add | delete] vlanid <vidlist> | sub_ring
raps_vlan <vlanid 1-4094> tc_propagation state [enable | disable] | [add | delete] sub_ring
raps_vlan <vlanid 1-4094> | revertive [enable| disable] | timer { holdoff_time <millisecond 0 -
10000> | guard_time <millisecond 10 - 2000 > | wtr_time <min 5 - 12>}]
config erps log [enable | disable]
config erps trap [enable | disable]
show erps {raps_vlan <vlanid 1-4094> {sub_ring}}
34-1 enable erps

Description
This command is used to enable the global ERPS function on a switch. When both the global state
and the specified ring ERPS state are enabled, the specified ring will be activated.
The global ERPS function cannot be enabled, when any ERPS ring on the device is enabled and
the integrity of any ring parameter is not available. For each ring with the ring state enabled when
ERPS is enabled, the following integrity will be checked:
1. R-APS VLAN is created.
2. The Ring port is a tagged member port of the R-APS VLAN.
3. The RPL port is specified if the RPL owner is enabled.
4. The RPL port is not sepcified as virtual channel.
Format
enable erps
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable ERPS:
360

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable erps

Command: enable erps
Success.
34-2 disable erps

Description
This command is used to disable the global ERPS function on a switch.
Format
disable erps
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable ERPS:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable erps
Command: disable erps
Success.
34-3 create erps raps_vlan

Description
This command is used to create an R-APS VLAN on a switch. Only one R-APS VLAN should be
used to transfer R-APS messages.
Note that the R-APS VLAN must already have been created by the create vlan command.
Format
create erps raps_vlan <vlanid 1-4094>
Parameters
<vlanid 1-4094> - Specify the VLAN which will be the R-APS VLAN.
361

®
Restrictions
Example
To create an R-APS VLAN:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create erps raps_vlan 4094
Command: create erps raps_vlan 4094
Success.
34-4 delete erps raps_vlan

Description
This command is used to delete an R-APS VLAN on a switch. When an R-APS VLAN is deleted,
all parameters related to this R-APS VLAN will also be deleted. This command can only be issued
when the ring is not active.
Format
delete erps raps_vlan <vlanid 1-4094>
Parameters
<vlanid 1-4094> - Specify the VLAN which will be the R-APS VLAN.
Restrictions
Example
To delete an R-APS VLAN:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete erps raps_vlan 4094
Command: delete erps raps_vlan 4094
Success.
34-5 config erps raps_vlan

Description
This command is used to configure the ERPS R-APS VLAN settings.
362

®
The ring MEL is one field in the R-APS PDU. Note that if CFM (Connectivity Fault Management)
and ERPS are used at the same time, the R-APS PDU is one of a suite of Ethernet OAM PDU.
The behavior for forwarding of R-APS PDU should follow the Ethernet OAM. If the MEL of R-APS
PDU is not higher than the level of the MEP with the same VLAN on the ring ports, the R-APS
PDU cannot be forwarded on the ring.
Restrictions apply for ports that are included in a link aggregation group. A link aggregation group
can be configured as a ring port by specifying the master port of the link aggregation port. Only the
master port can be specified as a ring port. If the specified link aggregation group is eliminated, the
master port retains its ring port status. If the ring port configured on virtual channel, the ring which
the port connects to will be considered as a sub-ring. Note that the ring ports can be modified
when ERPS is enabled.
RPL port - Specify one of the R-APS VLAN ring ports as the RPL port. To remove an RPL port
from an R-APS VLAN, use the none designation for rpl_port.
RPL owner - Specify the node as the RPL owner.
Note that the RPL port and RPL owner can be modified when ERPS is enabled; and the virtual
channel cannot be configured as RPL. For example, if a ring port is configured on the virtual
channel and the ring port is configured as an RPL port, an error message will be display and the
configuration will fail.
The R-APS VLAN cannot be the protected VLAN. The protected VLAN can be one that has
already been created, or it can be used for a VLAN that has not yet been created.
Holdoff timer - The Holdoff timer is used to filter out intermittent link faults when link failures occur
during the protection switching process. When a ring node detects a link failure, it will start the
holdoff timer and report the link failure event (R-APS BPDU with SF flag) after the link failure is
confirmed within period of time specified.
Guard timer - Guard timer is used to prevent ring nodes from receiving outdated R-APS
messages. This timer is used during the protection switching process after the link failure recovers.
When the link node detects the recovery of the link, it will report the link failure recovery event (R-
APS PDU with NR flag) and start the guard timer. Before the guard timer expires, all received R-
APS messages are ignored by this ring node, except in the case where a burst of three R-APS
event messages that indicates the topology of a sub-ring has changed and the node needs to flush
FDB are received on the node. In this case the recovered link does not go into a blocking state.
The Guard Timer should be greater than the maximum expected forwarding delay for which one R-
APS message circles around the ring.
WTR timer - WTR timer is used to prevent frequent operation of the protection switch due to an
intermittent defect. This timer is used during the protection switching process when a link failure
recovers. It is only used by the RPL owner. When the RPL owner in protection state receives R-
APS PDU with an NR flag, it will start the WTR timer. The RPL owner will block the original
unblocked RPL port and start to send R-APS PDU with an RB flag after the link recovery is
confirmed within this period of time.
363

®
When both the global state and the specified ring ERPS state are enabled, the specified ring will
be activated. STP and LBD should be disabled on the ring ports before the specified ring is
activated.
The ring cannot be enabled before the R-APS VLAN is created, and ring ports, RPL port, RPL
owner, are configured. Note that these parameters cannot be changed when the ring is activated.
In order to guarantee correct operation, the following integrity will be checked when the ring is
enabled and the global ERPS state is enabled.
1. R-APS VLAN is created.
2. The Ring port is the tagged member port of the R-APS VLAN.
3. The RPL port is specified if RPL owner is enabled.
Format
config erps raps_vlan <vlanid 1-4094> [state [enable | disable] | ring_mel <value 0-7> |
ring_port [west [<port> | virtual_channel] | east [<port> | virtual_channel]] | rpl_port [west |
east | none] | rpl_owner [enable | disable] | protected_vlan [add | delete] vlanid <vidlist> |
sub_ring raps_vlan <vlanid 1-4094> tc_propagation state [enable | disable] | [add | delete]
sub_ring raps_vlan <vlanid 1-4094> | revertive [enable| disable] | timer { holdoff_time
<millisecond 0 - 10000> | guard_time <millisecond 10 - 2000 > | wtr_time <min 5 - 12>}]
Parameters
raps_vlan - Specify the R-APS VLAN used.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID used here.
state - Specify to enable or disable the specified ring.
enable - Enable the state of the specified ring.
disable - Disable the state of the specified ring. The default value is disabled.
ring_mel - Specify the ring MEL of the R-APS function. The default ring MEL is 1.
<value 0-7> - Enter the ring MEL value here. This value should be between 0 and 7.
ring_port - Specify the ring port used.
west - Specify the port as the west ring port.
<port> - Enter the port number here.
virtual_channel - Specify the port as west port on virtual channel.
east - Specify the port as the east ring port.
virtual_channel - Specify the port as east port on virtual channel.
rpl_port - Specify the RPL port used.
west - Specify the west ring port as the RPL port.
east - Specify the east ring port as the RPL port.
none - No RPL port on this node. By default, the node has no RPL port.
rpl_owner - Specify to enable or disable the RPL owner node.
enable - Specify the device as an RPL owner node.
disable - This node is not an RPL owner. By default, the RPS owner is disabled.
protected_vlan - Specify to add or delete the protected VLAN group.
add - Add VLANs to the protected VLAN group.
delete - Delete VLANs from the protected VLAN group.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID to be removed or added.
sub_ring - Specify that the sub-ring is being configured.
raps_vlan - Specify the R-APS VLAN.
tc_propagation - Specify that the topology propagation state will be configured.
state - Specify the topology propagation state.
364

®
enable - Enable the propagation state of topology change for the sub-ring.
disable - Disable the propagation state of topology change for the sub-ring. The default value
is disabled.
add - Connect the sub-ring to another ring.
delete - Disconnect the sub-ring from the connected ring.
sub_ring - Specify that the sub-ring is being configured.
raps_vlan - Specify the R-APS VLAN.
revertive - Specify the state of the R-APS revertive option.
enable - Specify that the R-APS revertive option will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the R-APS revertive option will be disabled.
timer - Specify the R-APS timer used.
holdoff_time - (Optional) Specify the holdoff time of the R-APS function. The default holdoff
time is 0 milliseconds.
<millisecond 0-10000> - Enter the hold off time value here. This value must be in the
range of 0 to 10000 millseconds.
guard_time - (Optional) Specify the guard time of the R-APS function. The default guard time
is 500 milliseconds.
<millisecond 10-2000> - Enter the guard time value here. This value must be in the range
of 0 to 2000 millseconds.
wtr_time - (Optional) Specify the WTR time of the R-APS function.
<min 5-12> - Enter the WTR time range value here. The range is from 5 to 12 minutes.
The default WTR time is 5 minutes.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the MEL of the ERPS ring for a specific R-APS VLAN:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config erps raps_vlan 4094 ring_mel 2
Command: config erps raps_vlan 4094 ring_mel 2
Success.
To configure the ports of the ERPS ring for a specific R-APS VLAN:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config erps raps_vlan 4094 ring_port west 1:5
Command: config erps raps_vlan 4094 ring_port west 1:5
Success.
365

®
To configure the RPL port for a specific R-APS VLAN:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config erps raps_vlan 4094 rpl_port west
Command: config erps raps_vlan 4094 rpl_port west
Success.
To configure the protected VLAN for a specific R-APS VLAN:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config erps raps_vlan 4094 protected_vlan add vlanid 10-20
Command: config erps raps_vlan 4094 protected_vlan add vlanid 10-20
Success.
To configure the ERPS timers for a specific R-APS VLAN:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config erps raps_vlan 4094 timer holdoff_time 100
guard_time 1000 wtr_time 10
Command: config erps raps_vlan 4094 timer holdoff_time 100 guard_time 1000
wtr_t
ime 10
Success.
To configure the ring state of the ERPS:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config erps raps_vlan 4094 state enable
Command: config erps raps_vlan 4094 state enable
Success.
To configure a sub-ring connected to another ring:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config erps raps_vlan 4094 add sub_ring raps_vlan 4093
Command: config erps raps_vlan 4094 add sub_ring raps_vlan 4093
Success.
366

®
To configure the state of topology change propagation:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config erps raps_vlan 4094 sub_ring raps_vlan 4093
tc_propagation state enable
Command: config erps raps_vlan 4094 sub_ring raps_vlan 4093 tc_propagation
state enable
Success.
34-6 config erps log

Description
This command is used to configure the log state of ERPS events.
Format
config erps log [enable | disable]
Parameters
log - Specify to enable or disable the ERPS log state.
enable - Enter enable to enable the log state.
disable - Enter disable to disable the log state. The default value is disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the ERPS log state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config erps log enable
Command: config erps log enable
Success.
34-7 config erps trap

Description
This command is used to configure trap state of ERPS events.
Format
config erps trap [enable | disable]
367

®
Parameters
trap - Specify to enable or disable the ERPS trap state.
enable - Enter enable to enable the trap state.
disable - Enter disable to disable the trap state. The default value is disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the trap state of the ERPS:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config erps trap enable
Command: config erps trap enable
Success.
34-8 show erps

Description
This command is used to display ERPS configuration and operation information.
The port state of the ring port may be as "Forwarding", "Blocking", "Signal Fail". "Forwarding"
indicates that traffic is able to be forwarded. "Blocking" indicates that traffic is blocked by ERPS
and a signal failure is not detected on the port. "Signal Fail" indicates that a signal failure is
detected on the port and traffic is blocked by ERPS.
The RPL owner administrative state could be configured to "Enabled" or "Disabled". But the RPL
owner operational state may be different from the RPL owner administrative state, for example, the
RPL owner conflict occurs. "Active" is used to indicate that the RPL owner administrative state is
enabled and the device is operated as the active RPL owner. "Inactive" is used to indicate that the
RPL owner administrative state is enabled, but the device is operated as the inactive RPL owner.
Format
show erps {raps_vlan <vlanid 1-4094> {sub_ring}}
Parameters
raps_vlan - (Optional) Specify the R-APS VLAN.
sub_ring - (Optional) Display the sub-ring configuration information.
Restrictions
None.
368

®
Example
To display ERPS information:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show erps
Command: show erps
ERPS Information
Global Status : Enabled
Log Status : Disabled
Trap Status : Disabled
------------------------
R-APS VLAN : 4092
Ring Status : Enabled
West Port : 5 (Blocking)
East Port : 7 (Forwarding)
RPL Port : West Port
RPL Owner : Enabled (Active)
Protected VLANs : 100-300, 4092, 4093
Ring MEL : 2
Holdoff Time : 0 milliseconds
Guard Time : 500 milliseconds
WTR Time : 5 minutes
Current Ring State : Idle
------------------------
R-APS VLAN : 4093
Ring Status : Enabled
West Port : Virtual Channel
East Port : 10 (Forwarding)
RPL Port : None
RPL Owner : Disabled
Protected VLANs : 200-220
Ring MEL : 2
Holdoff Time : 0 milliseconds
Guard Time : 500 milliseconds
WTR Time : 5 minutes
Current Ring State : Idle
------------------------
Total Ring: 2
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show erps raps_vlan 4092 sub_ring

Command: show erps raps_vlan 4092 sub_ring
R-APS VLAN: 4092
Sub-Ring R-APS VLAN TC Propagation State
------------------- ---------------------
4093 Enable
4094 Enable
--------------------------------------------
Total Sub-Ring Connected: 2
369

®
Chapter 35 FDB Command List

create fdb <vlan_name 32> <macaddr> [port <port> | drop]
create fdb vlanid <vidlist> <macaddr> [port <port> | drop]
create multicast_fdb <vlan_name 32> <macaddr>
config multicast_fdb <vlan_name 32> <macaddr> [add | delete] <portlist>
config fdb aging_time <sec 10-1000000>
config multicast vlan_filtering_mode [vlanid <vidlist> | vlan <vlan_name 32> | all]
[forward_all_groups | forward_unregistered_groups | filter_unregistered_groups]
delete fdb <vlan_name 32> <macaddr>
clear fdb [vlan <vlan_name 32> | port <port> | all]
show multicast_fdb {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>] | mac_address <macaddr>}
show fdb {[port <port> | vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist> | mac_address <macaddr> | static
| aging_time | security]}
show multicast vlan_filtering_mode {[ vlanid < vidlist> | vlan <vlan_name 32>]}
35-1 create fdb

Description
This command is used to create a static entry in the unicast MAC address forwarding table
(database).
Format
create fdb <vlan_name 32> <macaddr> [port <port> | drop]
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Specify a VLAN name associated with a MAC address. The maximum length
of the VLAN name is 32 bytes.
<macaddr> - The MAC address to be added to the static forwarding table.
port - The port number corresponding to the MAC destination address. The switch will always
forward traffic to the specified device through this port.
<port> - Enter the port number corresponding to the MAC destination address here.
drop - Specify the action drop to be taken.
Restrictions
Example
To create a unicast MAC forwarding entry:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create fdb default 00-00-00-00-01-02 port 1:5
Command: create fdb default 00-00-00-00-01-02 port 1:5
Success.
370

®
To filter a unicast MAC:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create fdb default 00-00-00-00-01-02 drop
Command: create fdb default 00-00-00-00-01-02 drop
Success.
35-2 create fdb vlanid

Description
This command is used to create a static entry in the unicast MAC address forwarding table
(database).
Format
create fdb vlanid <vidlist> <macaddr> [port <port> | drop]
Parameters
<vidlist> - Specify a VLAN ID associated with a MAC address.
<macaddr> - The MAC address to be added to the static forwarding table.
port - The port number corresponding to the MAC destination address. The switch will always
forward traffic to the specified device through this port.
<port> - Enter the port number corresponding to the MAC destination address here.
drop - Specify the action drop to be taken.
Restrictions
Example
To create a unicast MAC forwarding entry:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create fdb vlanid 1 00-00-00-00-02-02 port 1:5
Command: create fdb vlanid 1 00-00-00-00-02-02 port 1:5
Success.
To filter a unicast MAC:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create fdb vlanid 1 00-00-00-00-02-02 drop
Command: create fdb vlanid 1 00-00-00-00-02-02 drop
Success.
371

®
35-3 create multicast_fdb

Description
This command is used to create a static entry in the multicast MAC address forwarding table
(database).
Format
create multicast_fdb <vlan_name 32> <macaddr>
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - The name of the VLAN on which the MAC address resides. The maximum
name length is 32.
<macaddr> - Enter the multicast MAC address to be added to the static forwarding table here.
Addresses in the range 01-80-C2-XX-XX-XX are reserved addresses, 01-00-5E-XX-XX-XX
are reserved for IPv4 multicast MAC address and 33-33-XX-XX-XX are reserved for IPv6
multicast MAC address.
Restrictions
Example
To create a multicast MAC forwarding entry to the default VLAN:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create multicast_fdb default 01-00-5C-11-22-33
Command: create multicast_fdb default 01-00-5C-11-22-33
Success.
35-4 config multicast_fdb

Description
This command is used to configure the Switch’s multicast MAC address forwarding database.
Format
config multicast_fdb <vlan_name 32> <macaddr> [add | delete] <portlist>
Parameters
name length is 32.
<macaddr> - Enter the multicast MAC address to be added or removed to and from the static
forwarding table here. Addresses in the range 01-80-C2-XX-XX-XX cannot be configured as
static MAC addresses. Addresses in the range 01-00-5E-XX-XX-XX and 33-33-XX-XX-XX-XX
372

®
are IP multicast addresses, which cannot be specified as the static L2 multicast MAC address.
add - Specify to add ports to the multicast forwarding table.
delete - Specify to remove ports from the multicast forwarding table.
<portlist> - Specify a range of ports to be configured. (UnitID: port number).
Restrictions
Example
To add a multicast MAC forwarding entry to the default VLAN on port 1:1 to 1:5:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config multicast_fdb default 01-00-5C-11-22-33 add 1:1-1:5
Command: config multicast_fdb default 01-00-5C-11-22-33 add 1:1-1:5
Success.
35-5 config fdb aging_time

Description
This command is used to configure the MAC address table aging time.
Format
config fdb aging_time <sec 10-1000000>
Parameters
aging_time - Specify the FDB age out time in seconds. The aging time affects the learning
process of the Switch. Dynamic forwarding table entries, which are made up of the source
MAC addresses and their associated port numbers, are deleted from the table if they are not
accessed within the aging time. The aging time can be from 10 to 1000000 seconds with a
default value of 300 seconds. A very long aging time can result in dynamic forwarding table
entries that are out-of-date or no longer exist. This may cause incorrect packet forwarding
decisions by the Switch. If the aging time is too short however, many entries may be aged out
too soon. This will result in a high percentage of received packets whose source addresses
cannot be found in the forwarding table, in which case the Switch will broadcast the packet to
all ports, negating many of the benefits of having a switch..
<sec 10-1000000> - The FDB age out time must be between 10 to 1000000 seconds.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the MAC address table aging time to 600 seconds:
373

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config fdb aging_time 600

Command: config fdb aging_time 600
Success.
35-6 config multicast vlan_filtering_mode

Description
This command is used to configure the multicast packet filtering mode for VLANs.
The registered group will be forwarded to the range of ports in the multicast forwarding database.
Format
config multicast vlan_filtering_mode [vlanid <vidlist> | vlan <vlan_name 32> | all]
[forward_all_groups | forward_unregistered_groups | filter_unregistered_groups]
Parameters
vlanid - Specify a list of VLANs to be configured.
vlan - Specify the name of the VLAN. The maximum name length is 32.
<vlan_name 32> - The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
all - Specify all configured VLANs.
forward_all_groups - Both the registered group and the unregistered group will be forwarded to
all member ports of the specified VLAN where the multicast traffic comes in.
forward_unregistered_groups - The unregistered group will be forwarded to all member ports
of the VLAN where the multicast traffic comes in.
filter_unregistered_groups - The unregistered group will be filtered.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the multicast packet filtering mode to filter all unregistered multicast groups for the
VLAN 200 to 300:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config multicast vlan_filtering_mode vlanid 200-300
filter_unregistered_groups
Command: config multicast vlan_filtering_mode vlanid 200-300
filter_unregistered_groups
Success.
374

®
35-7 delete fdb

Description
This command is used to delete an entry from the forwarding database.
Format
delete fdb <vlan_name 32> <macaddr>
Parameters
name length is 32.
<macaddr> - The multicast MAC address to be deleted from the static forwarding table.
Restrictions
Example
To delete a static FDB entry:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete fdb default 00-00-00-00-01-02
Command: delete fdb default 00-00-00-00-01-02
Success.
35-8 clear fdb

Description
This command is used to clear the Switch’s forwarding database for dynamically learned MAC
addresses.
Format
clear fdb [vlan <vlan_name 32> | port <port> | all]
Parameters
vlan - Clears the FDB entry by specifying the VLAN name.
name length is 32.
port - Clears the FDB entry by specifying the port number.
<port> - The port number corresponding to the MAC destination address. The switch will
always forward traffic to the specified device through this port.
all - Clears all dynamic entries in the Switch’s forwarding database.
375

®
Restrictions
Example
To clear all FDB dynamic entries:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# clear fdb all
Command: clear fdb all
Success.
35-9 show multicast_fdb

Description
This command is used to display the multicast forwarding database of the Switch.
Format
show multicast_fdb {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>] | mac_address <macaddr>}
Parameters
vlan - (Optional) The name of the VLAN on which the MAC address resides.
long.
vlanid - (Optional) Displays the entries for the VLANs indicated by VID list.
mac_address - (Optional) Specify a MAC address, for which FDB entries will be displayed.
If no parameter is specified, all multicast FDB entries will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the multicast MAC address table:
376

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show multicast_fdb
Command: show multicast_fdb
VLAN Name : default

MAC Address : 01-00-5C-11-22-33
Egress Ports : 1:1-1:5
Mode : Static
Total Entries: 1
35-10 show fdb

Description
This command is used to display the current unicast MAC address forwarding database.
Format
show fdb {[port <port> | vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist> | mac_address <macaddr> |
static | aging_time | security]}
Parameters
port - (Optional) Displays the entries for a specified port.
vlan - (Optional) Displays the entries for a specific VLAN. The maximum name length is 32.
long.
vlanid - (Optional) Displays the entries for the VLANs indicated by VID list.
mac_address - (Optional) Displays a specific MAC address.
static - (Optional) Displays all permanent entries.
aging_time - (Optional) Displays the unicast MAC address aging time.
security - (Optional) Displays the FDB entries that are created by the security module.
If no parameter is specified, system will display the unicast address table.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the FDB table:
377

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show fdb
Command: show fdb
Unicast MAC Address Aging Time = 300
VID VLAN Name MAC Address Port Type Status

---- -------------------------------- ----------------- ----- ------- -------
1 default 00-01-02-03-04-00 CPU Self Forward
1 default 00-23-7D-BC-08-44 1:1 Dynamic Forward
1 default 00-23-7D-BC-2E-18 1:1 Dynamic Forward
1 default 00-26-5A-AE-CA-1C 1:1 Dynamic Forward
1 default 60-33-4B-C4-52-1A 1:1 Dynamic Forward
Total Entries: 5
To display the security FDB table:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show fdb security
Command: show fdb security
VID MAC Address Port Type Status Security Module

---- ---------------- ----- ------- -------- ---------------
1 00-00-00-10-00-01 1:1 Dynamic Drop 802.1X
1 00-00-00-10-00-02 1:2 Static Forward WAC
1 00-00-00-10-00-04 1:4 Static Forward Port Security
1 00-00-00-10-00-0A 1:5 Static Forward MAC-based Access Control
1 00-00-00-10-00-06 1:6 Dynamic Drop Compound Authentication
Total Entries: 5
35-11 show multicast vlan_filtering_mode

Description
This command is used to show the multicast packet filtering mode for VLANs.
Note: A product supports the multicast VLAN filtering mode could not support the port filtering
mode at the same time.
Format
show multicast vlan_filtering_mode {[ vlanid < vidlist> | vlan <vlan_name 32>]}
Parameters
vlanid - (Optional) Specify a list of VLANs to be configured.
vlan - (Optional) Specify the name of the VLAN. The maximum name length is 32.
378

®
long.
If no parameter is specified, the device will show all multicast filtering settings in the device.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the multicast vlan_filtering_mode for VLANs:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show multicast vlan_filtering_mode
Command: show multicast vlan_filtering_mode
VLAN ID/VLAN Name Multicast Filter Mode

---------------------------------------- -----------------------------
1 /default forward_unregistered_groups
379

®
Chapter 36 Filter Command List

config filter netbios [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
show filter netbios
config filter extensive_netbios [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
show filter extensive_netbios
36-1 config filter netbios

Description
This command is used to configure the Switch to deny the NETBIOS packets on specific ports.
Format
config filter netbios [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
<portlist> - Specify the list of ports used.
all - Specify that all the ports will be used for the configuration.
state- Specify the state of the filter to block the NETBIOS packet.
enable - Specify that the state will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the state will be disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To configure filter netbios state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config filter netbios 1-10 state enable
Command: config filter netbios 1-10 state enable
Success.
36-2 show filter netbios

Description
This command is used to display the NETBIOS filter state on the Switch.
Format
show filter netbios
380

®
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the DHCP server/client filter list created on the Switch:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show filter netbios
Command: show filter netbios
Enabled ports: 1-3
36-3 config filter extensive_netbios

Description
This command is used to configure the Switch to filter NETBIOS packets over 802.3 flame on the
specific ports.
Format
config filter extensive_netbios [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
all - Specify that all the ports will be used this configuration.
state - Enable or disable the filter to block the NETBIOS packet over 802.3 frame.
enable - Specify that the filter state will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the filter state will be disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To configure a DHCP client/server filter entry.
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config filter extensive_netbios 1-10 state enable
Command: config filter extensive_netbios 1-10 state enable
Success.
381

®
36-4 show filter extensive_netbios

Description
This command is used to display the extensive netbios state on the Switch.
Format
show filter extensive_netbios
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the extensive_state created on the Switch:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show filter extensive_netbios
Command: show filter extensive_netbios
Enabled ports: 1-3
382

®
Chapter 37 Flash File System (FFS)

Command List
show storage_media_info {[unit <unit_id> | all]}
change drive {unit <unit_id>} <drive_id>
md {{unit <unit_id>} <drive_id>} <pathname>
rd {{unit <unit_id>} <drive_id>} <pathname>
cd {<pathname>}
dir {{unit <unit_id>} <drive_id>} {<pathname>}
rename {{unit <unit_id>} <drive_id>} <pathname> <filename>
del {{unit <unit_id>} <drive_id>} <pathname> {recursive}
erase {{unit <unit_id>} <drive_id>} <pathname>
move {{unit <unit_id>} <drive_id>} <pathname> {{unit <unit_id>} <drive_id>} <pathname>
copy {{unit <unit_id>} <drive_id>} <pathname> {{unit <unit_id>} <drive_id>} <pathname>
format {unit <unit_id>} <drive_id> {[fat16 | fat32]} {<label_name>}
37-1 show storage_media_info

Description
This command is used to display the information of the storage media available on the system.
There can be one or multiple media on the system. The information for a media includes the drive
number, the media identification.
Format
show storage_media_info {[unit <unit_id> | all]}
Parameters
unit - (Optional) Specify a unit ID if in the stacking system. If not specified, it refers to the master
unit.
all - Specify all units.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the storage media’s information:
383

®
GS-3120-24TC:admin#show storage_media_info
Command: show storage_media_info
Unit Drive Media Type Size Label FS Type Version

---- ----- ---------- -------- ----------- ------- -------
1 c: Flash 28 MB FFS Ver2.1
37-2 change drive

Description
This command is used to change the current drive.
Format
change drive {unit <unit_id>} <drive_id>
Parameters
unit.
<drive_id> - Specify the drive ID. The format of drive_id is C:, D: and so on.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the storage media’s information:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# change drive unit 3 c:
Command: change drive unit 3 c:
Success.
37-3 md
Description
This command is used to create a directory.
Format
md {{unit <unit_id>} <drive_id>} <pathname>
384

®
Parameters
unit – (Optional) Specify a unit ID if in the stacking system. If not specified, it refers to the master
unit.
<drive_id> - (Optional) Enter the drive ID used here. Examples are C: or D:
<pathname> - Specify the directory to be removed. The path name can be specified either as a
full path name or partial name. For partial path name, it indicates the file is in the current
directory. The drive ID also included in this parameter, for example: d:/config/bootup.cfg.
Restrictions
Example
To make a directory:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# md c:/abc
Command: md c:/abc
Success.
37-4 rd
Description
This command is used to remove a directory. If there are files still existing in the directory, this
command will fail and return error message.
Format
rd {{unit <unit_id>} <drive_id>} <pathname>
Parameters
unit.
<pathname> - Specify the directory to be removed. The path name can be specified either as a
full path name or partial name. For partial path name, it indicates the file is in the current
directory.
Restrictions
Example
To remove a directory:
385

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# rd c:/abc
Command: rd c:/abc
Success.
37-5 cd
Description
This command is used to change the current directory. The current directory is changed under the
current drive. If you want to change the working directory to the directory in another drive, then you
need to change the current drive to the desired drive, and then change the current directory. The
current drive and current directory will be displayed if the <pathname> is not specified.
Format
cd {<pathname>}
Parameters
<pathname> - (Optional) Specify the directory to be removed. The path name can be specified
either as a full path name or partial name. For partial path name, it indicates the file is in the
current directory.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To change to other directory or display current directory path:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# cd
Command: cd
Current work directory: "/unit2:/c:".
37-6 dir
Description
This command is used to list all the files located in a directory of a drive.
If pathname is not specified, then all of the files in the specified drive will be displayed. If none of
the parameters are specified, the files in the current drive will be displayed.
Format
dir {{unit <unit_id>} <drive_id>} {<pathname>}
386

®
Parameters
unit.
<pathname> - (Optional) Specify the directory to be removed. The path name can be specified
either as a full path name or partial name. For partial path name, it indicates the file is in the
current directory.
Restrictions
None.
Example
List the files:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#dir
Command: dir
Directory of /unit2:/c:
Idx Info Attr Size Update Time Name

--- ------- ---- -------- ------------------- ----------------
1 CFG(*) -rw- 29661 2000/04/01 05:54:38 config.cfg
2 RUN(*) -rw- 4879040 2000/03/26 03:15:11 B019.had
3 d--- 0 2000/04/01 05:17:36 system
29618 KB total (24727 KB free)

(*) -with boot up info (b) -with backup info
37-7 rename
Description
This command is used to rename a file. Note that for standalone device, the unit argument is not
needed. This command is used to rename a file in the file system. The pathname specifies the file
(in path form) to be renamed and the filename specifies the new filename. If the pathname is not a
full path, then it refers to a path under the current directory for the drive. The renamed file will stay
in the same directory.
Format
rename {{unit <unit_id>} <drive_id>} <pathname> <filename>
Parameters
unit.
387

®

<pathname> - Specified the file (in path form) to be renamed.
<filename> - Specified the new name of the file.
Restrictions
Example
To rename a file:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# rename run.had run1.had
Command: rename run.had run1.had
Success.
37-8 del
Description
This command is used to delete a file, either physically or softly. It is also used to delete a directory
and its contents. If two files with the same name under the same directory are softly deleted
sequentially, only the last one will exist. Deleting, copying, renaming or moving the already softly
deleted file is not acceptable.
System will prompt if the target file is a FW or configuration whose type is bootup or backup.
Format
del {{unit <unit_id>} <drive_id>} <pathname> {recursive}
Parameters
unit.
<pathname>- Specify the file or directory to be deleted. If it is specified in the associated form,
then it is related to the current directory.
recursive - (Optional) Used on directory, to delete a directory and its contents even if it’s not
empty.
Restrictions
Example
Delete a directory with parameter “recursive”:
388

®
Command: dir

--- ------- ---- -------- ------------------- ----------------
1 drw- 0 2000/04/02 06:02:04 12
2 CFG(*) -rw- 29661 2000/04/01 05:54:38 config.cfg
3 RUN(*) -rw- 4879040 2000/03/26 03:15:11 B019.had
4 d--- 0 2000/04/01 05:17:36 system

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#del 12 recursive
Command: del 12 recursive
Success.
Command: dir

--- ------- ---- -------- ------------------- ----------------
1 CFG(*) -rw- 29661 2000/04/01 05:54:38 config.cfg
2 RUN(*) -rw- 4879040 2000/03/26 03:15:11 B019.had
3 d--- 0 2000/04/01 05:17:36 system

37-9 erase
Description
This command is used to delete a file stored in the file system.
System will prompt if the target file is a FW or configuration whose type is boot up.
Format
erase {{unit <unit_id>} <drive_id>} <pathname>
Parameters
unit.
389

®

<pathname> - Specify the file to be deleted. If it is specified in the associated form, then it is
related to the current directory.
Restrictions
Example
To erase a file:
Command: dir

--- ------- ---- -------- ------------------- ----------------
1 CFG(b) -rw- 29661 2000/04/02 06:03:19 config2.cfg
2 CFG(*) -rw- 29661 2000/04/01 05:54:38 config.cfg
3 RUN(*) -rw- 4879040 2000/03/26 03:15:11 B019.had
4 d--- 0 2000/04/01 05:17:36 system

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#erase config2.cfg
Command: erase config2.cfg
Success.
Command: dir

--- ------- ---- -------- ------------------- ----------------
1 CFG(*) -rw- 29661 2000/04/01 05:54:38 config.cfg
2 RUN(*) -rw- 4879040 2000/03/26 03:15:11 B019.had
3 d--- 0 2000/04/01 05:17:36 system

390

®
37-10 move
Description
This command is used to move a file around the file system. Files in a drive located in a unit can
be moved to another drive located in another unit. Note that when a file is moved, it can be
specified whether to rename at the same time.
Format
move {{unit <unit_id>} <drive_id>} <pathname> {{unit <unit_id>} <drive_id>} <pathname>
Parameters
unit.
<unit_id> Enter the unit ID here.
<pathname> - Specify the file to be moved. The path name can be specified either as a full path
name or partial name. Specified either as a full path name or partial name. For partial path
name, it indicates the file is in the current directory.
unit.
<unitid 1-n> Enter the unit ID here. This value must be between 1 and n.
<pathname> - Specify the new path where the file will be moved. The path name can be. For
partial path name, it indicates the file is in the current directory.
Restrictions
Example
To move a file from one location to another location:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# move c:/log.txt c:/log1.txt
Command: move c:/log.txt c:/log1.txt
Success.
37-11 copy
Description
This command is used to copy a file to another file in the file system. A file located in a drive of a
unit can be copied to another file located in another drive of another unit.
For project that does not support file system on the flash, the system file such as runtime
image/configuration / prom /log can still be copied to media or from media that support sfile system
via this command using the reserved keyword. The keyword here refers to image_id, config_id,
prom, or log.
391

®
Format
copy {{unit <unit_id>} <drive_id>} <pathname> {{unit <unit_id>} <drive_id>} <pathname>
Parameters
unit - (Optional) Unit ID in the stacking system. If not specified, it refers to the master unit.
<drive_id> - (Optional) Enter the drive ID. Examples are C: or D:
<pathname> - Specify the file to be copied. The path name can be specified either as a full path
name or partial name. For partial path name, it indicates the file is in the current directory.
<drive_id> - (Optional) Enter the drive ID. Examples are C: or D:
<pathname> - Specify the file to copy to. The path name can be specified either as a full path
name or partial name. For partial path name, it indicates the file is in the current directory.
Restrictions
Example
To copy a file:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# copy c:/log.txt c:/log1.txt
Command: copy c:/log.txt c:/log1.txt
Success.
37-12 format
Description
This command is used to format a specific drive.
Format
format {unit <unit_id>} <drive_id> {[fat16 | fat32]} {<label_name>}
Parameters
<unitid 1-n> - Enter the unit ID here. This value must be between 1 and n.
<drive_id> - Specify drive to be formatted.
fat16 - Specify a FAT16 file system
fat32 - Specify a FAT32 file system
<label_name> - (Optional) Enter the label for the drive here. This value can be up to 8 characters
long.
392

®
Restrictions
Example
To format a drive:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#format d: fat32 aaaa
Command: format d: fat32 aaaa
Formatting........................... Done
Success
393

®
Chapter 38 Gratuitous ARP Command

List
config gratuitous_arp send ipif_status_up [enable | disable]
config gratuitous_arp send dup_ip_detected [enable | disable]
config gratuitous_arp learning [enable | disable]
config gratuitous_arp send periodically ipif <ipif_name 12> interval <value 0-65535>
enable gratuitous_arp {ipif <ipif_name 12>} {trap | log}(1)
disable gratuitous_arp {ipif <ipif_name 12>} {trap | log}(1)
show gratuitous_arp {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
38-1 config gratuitous_arp send ipif_status_up

Description
The command is used to enable/disable sending of gratuitous ARP request packet while IPIF
interface become up. This is used to automatically announce the interface’s IP address to other
nodes. By default, the state is disabled, and only one gratuitous ARP packet will be broadcast.
Format
config gratuitous_arp send ipif_status_up [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enable sending of gratuitous ARP when IPIF status become up.
disable - Disable sending of gratuitous ARP when IPIF status become up.
Restrictions
Example
To enable send gratuitous ARP request in normal situation:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config gratuitous_arp send ipif_status_up enable
Command: config gratuitous_arp send ipif_status_up enable
Success.
38-2 config gratuitous_arp send dup_ip_detected

Description
The command is used to enable/disable sending of gratuitous ARP request packet while duplicate
IP is detected. By default, the state is disabled.For this command, the duplicate IP detected means
394

®
that the system received a ARP request packet that is sent by an IP address that match the
system’s own IP address. In this case, the system knows that some body out there uses an IP
address that is conflict with the system. In order to reclaim the correct host of this IP address, the
system can send out the gratuitous ARP request packet for this duplicate IP address.
Format
config gratuitous_arp send dup_ip_detected [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enable sending of gratuitous ARP when duplicate IP is detected.
disable - Disable sending of gratuitous ARP when duplicate IP is detected.
Restrictions
Example
To enable send gratuitous ARP request when duplicate IP is detected:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config gratuitous_arp send dup_ip_detected enable
Command: config gratuitous_arp send dup_ip_detected enable
Success.
38-3 config gratuitous_arp learning

Description
This command is used to configure gratuitous ARP learning. Normally, the system will only learn
the ARP reply packet or a normal ARP request packet that asks for the MAC address that
corresponds to the system’s IP address. The command is used to enable/disable learning of ARP
entry in ARP cache based on the received gratuitous ARP packet. The gratuitous ARP packet is
sent by a source IP address that is identical to the IP that the packet is queries for. Note that, with
the gratuitous ARP learning, the system will not learn new entry but only do the update on the ARP
table based on the received gratuitous ARP packet. By default, the state is disabled status.
Format
config gratuitous_arp learning [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enable learning of ARP entry based on the received gratuitous ARP packet.
disable - Disable learning of ARP entry based on the received gratuitous ARP packet.
395

®
Restrictions
Example
To enable the Gratuitous ARP learning state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config gratuitous_arp learning enable
Command: config gratuitous_arp learning enable
Success.
38-4 config gratuitous_arp send periodically

Description
The command is used to configure the interval for periodical sending of gratuitous ARP request
packet. By default, the interval is 0.
Format
config gratuitous_arp send periodically ipif <ipif_name 12> interval <value 0-65535>
Parameters
ipif - Interface name of L3 interface.
long.
interval - Periodically send gratuitous ARP interval time in seconds. 0 means not send gratuitous
ARP periodically.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the gratuitous ARP interval time here. This value must be between 0
and 65535 seconds.
Restrictions
Example
To configure gratuitous ARP interval to 5 for IPIF System:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config gratuitous_arp send periodically ipif System
interval 5
Command: config gratuitous_arp send periodically ipif System interval 5
Success.
396

®
38-5 enable gratuitous_arp

Description
The command is used to enable gratuitous ARP trap and log state. The switch can trap and log the
IP conflict event to inform the administrator. By default, trap is disabled and event log is enabled.
Format
enable gratuitous_arp {ipif <ipif_name 12>} {trap | log}(1)
Parameters
ipif - (Optional) Interface name of L3 interface
long.
trap - Specify to enable the trap function.
log - Specify to enable the log function.
Restrictions
Example
To enable system interface’s gratuitous ARP log and trap:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable gratuitous_arp ipif System trap log
Command: enable gratuitous_arp ipif System trap log
Success.
38-6 disable gratuitous_arp

Description
The command is used to disable gratuitous ARP trap and log state. The switch can trap and log
the IP conflict event to inform the administrator. By default, trap is disabled and event log is
enabled.
Format
disable gratuitous_arp {ipif <ipif_name 12>} {trap | log}(1)
Parameters
ipif - (Optional) Interface name of L3 interface
long.
trap - Specify to disable the trap function.
log - Specify to disable the log function.
397

®
Restrictions
Example
To disable system interface’s gratuitous ARP log and trap:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable gratuitous_arp ipif System trap log
Command: disable gratuitous_arp ipif System trap log
Success.
38-7 show gratuitous_arp

Description
This command is used to display gratuitous ARP configuration.
Format
show gratuitous_arp {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
Parameters
ipif - (Optional) Interface name of L3 interface.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display gratuitous ARP configuration:
398

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show gratuitous_arp
Command: show gratuitous_arp
Send on IPIF Status Up : Enabled

Send on Duplicate IP Detected : Enabled
Gratuitous ARP Learning : Enabled
IP Interface Name : System

Gratuitous ARP Trap : Enabled
Gratuitous ARP Log : Enabled
Gratuitous ARP Periodical Send Interval : 5
Total Entries: 1
399

®
Chapter 39 Internet Group Management

Protocol (IGMP) Command
List (RI Mode Only)
config igmp [ipif <ipif_name 12> | all] {version <value 1-3> | query_interval <sec 1-31744> |
max_response_time <sec 1-25> | robustness_variable <value 1-7> |
last_member_query_interval <value 1-25> | state [enable | disable]}(1)
show igmp {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
show igmp group {group <group> | ipif <ipif_name 12>}
config igmp check_subscriber_source_network [ipif <ipif_name 12> | all] [enable | disable]
show igmp check_subscriber_source_network {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
create igmp static_group ipif <ipif_name 12> group <ipaddr>
delete igmp static_group ipif <ipif_name 12> [group <ipaddr> | all]
show igmp static_group {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
39-1 config igmp

Description
This command is used to configure IGMP on the Switch.
Format
config igmp [ipif <ipif_name 12> | all] {version <value 1-3> | query_interval <sec 1-31744> |
max_response_time <sec 1-25> | robustness_variable <value 1-7> |
last_member_query_interval <value 1-25> | state [enable | disable]}(1)
Parameters
ipif - Specify the IP interface name used for this configuration.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name used for this configuration here. This name can
version - Specify the IGMP version used.
<value 1-3> - Enter the IGMP version number used here. This value must be between 1 and
3. The default value is 3.
query_interval - Specify the time in seconds between general query transmissions.
<sec 1-31744> - Enter the query interval time here. This value must be between 1 and 31744
seconds. The default value is 125.
max_response_time - Specify the maximum time in seconds to wait for reports from members.
<sec 1-25> - Enter the maximum response time here. This value must be between 1 and 25
robustness_variable - Specify the permitted packet loss that guarantees IGMP.
<value 1-7> - Enter the robustness variable here. This value must be between 1 and 7. The
default value is 2.
last_member_query_interval - Specify the maximum Response Time inserted into the Group-
Specific Queries that are sent in response to Leave Group messages, which is also the
amount of time between Group-Specific Query messages.
<value 1-25> - Enter the last member query interval value here. This value must be between
1 and 25. The default value is 1.
400

®
state - Specify the IGMP state on a router interface.

enable - Specify that the IGMP state will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the IGMP state will be disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To enable IGMP version 1 for the IP interface “System”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config igmp ipif System version 1 state enable
Command: config igmp ipif System version 1 state enable
Success.
To configure IGMPv2 for all IP interfaces:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config igmp all version 2
Command: config igmp all version 2
Success.
39-2 show igmp

Description
This command is used to display the IGMP configuration.
Format
show igmp {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
Parameters
ipif - (Optional) Specify the IP interface name to be displayed.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name, to be displayed, here. This name can be up to
12 characters long.
If no parameter is specified, the system will display all IGMP configurations.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the IGMP configuration for all interfaces:
401

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show igmp
Command: show igmp
IGMP Interface Configurations
Interface IP Address/Netmask Ver- Query Maximum Robust- Last State

sion Response ness Member
Time Value Query
Interval
------------ ------------------ ---- ------ -------- ------- -------- --------
System 10.90.90.90/8 2 125 10 2 1 Enabled
Total Entries: 1
39-3 show igmp group

Description
This command is used to display the switch’s IGMP group table.
Format
show igmp group {group <group> | ipif <ipif_name 12>}
Parameters
group - (Optional) Specify the multicast group ID.
<group> - Enter the multicast group ID value here.
ipif - (Optional) Specify the IP interface name to be displayed
12 characters long.
If no parameter is specified, the system will display all IGMP group tables.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the IGMP group table:
402

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show igmp group

Command: show igmp group
Interface Multicast Group Last Reporter IP Querier IP Expire

------------ --------------- --------------- --------------- ---------
System 224.0.0.2 10.42.73.111 10.48.74.122 260
System 224.0.0.9 10.20.53.1 10.48.74.122 260
System 224.0.1.24 10.18.1.3 10.48.74.122 259
System 224.0.1.41 10.1.43.252 10.48.74.122 259
System 224.0.1.149 10.20.63.11 10.48.74.122 259
Total Entries : 5
39-4 config igmp check_subscriber_source_network

Description
This command is used to configure the flag that determines whether or not to check the subscriber
source IP when an IGMP report or leave message is received. When this command is enabled on
an interface, any IGMP report or leave messages received by the interface will be checked to
determine whether its source IP is in the same network as the interface. If the check failed for a
received report or leave message, the message won’t be processed by IGMP protocol. If the check
is disabled, the IGMP report or leave message with any source IP will be processed by the IGMP
protocol.
Format
config igmp check_subscriber_source_network [ipif <ipif_name 12> | all] [enable | disable]
Parameters
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name used for this configuration here. This name can
enable - Specify that the check state will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the check state will be disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the checking of subscriber source IP addresses when an IGMP report or leave message
is received on the interface called ‘System’:
403

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config igmp check_subscriber_source_network ipif System

enable
Command: config igmp check_subscriber_source_network ipif System enable
Success.
39-5 show igmp check_subscriber_source_network

Description
This command is used to display the status of the IGMP report/leave message source IP check.
Format
show igmp check_subscriber_source_network {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
Parameters
ipif – (Optional) Specify the IP interface name to be displayed.
12 characters long.
If no parameter is specified, the system will display all interfaces.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the status of the check subscriber for the received IGMP report/leave messages on
interface “n20”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show igmp check_subscriber_source_network ipif n20
Command: show igmp check_subscriber_source_network ipif n20
Interface IP Address/Netmask Check Subscriber Source Network

------------ ------------------ -------------------------
n20 20.1.1.1/8 Disabled
Total Entries: 1
To show the status of the check subscriber for the received IGMP report/leave messages on all
interfaces:
404

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show igmp check_subscriber_source_network

Command: show igmp check_subscriber_source_network
Interface IP Address/Netmask Check Subscriber Source Network

------------ ------------------ -------------------------
System 10.90.90.90/8 Enabled
n1 1.1.1.1/8 Disabled
n11 11.1.1.1/8 Disabled
n20 20.1.1.1/8 Disabled
n100 100.3.2.2/8 Disabled
Total Entries: 5
39-6 create igmp static_group ipif

Description
This command is used to create an IGMP static group on the Switch.
Format
create igmp static_group ipif <ipif_name 12> group <ipaddr>
Parameters
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name used for this configuration. This name can be up to
12 characters long.
group - Specify the multicast IP address used.
<ipaddr> - Enter the multicast IP address used here.
Restrictions
Example
To create an IGMP static group, with the multicast IP address 225.0.0.2 on the IP interface
“System”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create igmp static_group ipif System group 225.0.0.2
Command: create igmp static_group ipif System group 225.0.0.2
Success.
39-7 delete igmp static_group ipif

Description
This command is used to delete an IGMP static group on the Switch.
405

®
Format
delete igmp static_group ipif <ipif_name 12> [group <ipaddr> | all]
Parameters
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name used for this configuration. This name can be up to
12 characters long.
group - Specify the multicast IP address used.
<ipaddr> - Enter the multicast IP address used here.
all – Specify that all the multicast IP addresses will be deleted.
Restrictions
Example
To delete the IGMP static group, with the multicast IP address 225.0.0.2 on the IP interface
“System”.
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete igmp static_group ipif System group 255.0.0.2
Command: delete igmp static_group ipif System group 255.0.0.2
Success.
To delete all IGMP static groups on the IP interface “n2”.

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete igmp static_group ipif n2 all
Command: delete igmp static_group ipif n2 all
Success.
39-8 show igmp static_group

Description
This command is used to display IGMP static groups on the Switch.
Format
show igmp static_group {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
Parameters
ipif – (Optional) Specify the IP interface name to be displayed.
406

®
12 characters long.
If no parameter is specified, the system will display all IGMP static groups.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display all IGMP static groups on the interface “n20”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show igmp static_group ipif n20
Command: show igmp static_group ipif n20
Interface Multicast Group

------------ ---------------
n20 239.0.0.3
Total Entries: 1
To display all IGMP static groups on all interfaces:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show igmp static_group
Command: show igmp static_group
Interface Multicast Group

------------ ---------------
System 225.0.0.1
System 225.0.0.2
n20 239.0.0.3
Total Entries: 3
407

®
Chapter 40 IGMP Proxy Command List

(RI Mode Only)
enable igmp_proxy
disable igmp_proxy
config igmp_proxy downstream_if [add | delete] vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>]
config igmp_proxy upstream_if {vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid1-4094>] | router_ports
[add | delete] <portlist> | source_ip <ipaddr> | unsolicited_report_interval <sec 0-25>} (1)
show igmp_proxy {group}
40-1 enable igmp_proxy

Description
This command is used to enable the IGMP proxy on the switch.
Format
enable igmp_proxy
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the IGMP proxy:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable igmp_proxy
Command: enable igmp_proxy
Success.
40-2 disable igmp_proxy

Description
This command is used to disable the IGMP proxy on the switch.
Format
disable igmp_proxy
408

®
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable the IGMP proxy:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable igmp_proxy
Command: disable igmp_proxy
Success.
40-3 config igmp_proxy downstream_if

Description
This command is used to configure the IGMP proxy downstream interfaces. The IGMP proxy plays
the server role on the downstream interfaces. The downstream interface must be an IGMP-
snooping enabled VLAN.
Format
config igmp_proxy downstream_if [add | delete] vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>]
Parameters
add - Specify to add a downstream interface.
delete - Specify to delete a downstream interface .
vlan – Specify the VLAN by name or ID.
<vlan_name 32> - Specify a name of VLAN which will be added to or deleted from the IGMP
proxy downstream interface. The maximum length is 32 characters.
vlanid - Specify a list of VLAN IDs to be added to or deleted from the IGMP proxy
downstream interface.
<vidlist> - Specify a list of VLAN IDs which will be added to or deleted from the IGMP
proxy downstream interface.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the IGMP proxy’s downstream interface:
409

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config igmp_proxy downstream_if add vlan vlanid 2-7

Command: config igmp_proxy downstream_if add vlan vlanid 2-7
Success.
40-4 config igmp_proxy upstream_if

Description
This command is used to configure the setting for the IGMP proxy’s upstream interface. The IGMP
proxy plays the host role on the upstream interface. It will send IGMP report packets to the router
port.
The source IP address determines the source IP address to be encoded in the IGMP protocol
packet.
If the router port is empty, the upstream will send the IGMP protocol packet to all member ports on
the upstream interface.
Format
config igmp_proxy upstream_if {vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>] |
router_ports [add | delete] <portlist> | source_ip <ipaddr> | unsolicited_report_interval <sec
0-25>} (1)
Parameters
vlan - Specify the VLAN for the upstream interface.
<vlan_name 32> - Specify a VLAN name between 1 and 32 characters.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID for the upstream interface.
<1-4094> - Specify the VLAN ID between 1 and 4094.
router_ports - Specify a list of ports that are connected to multicast-enabled routers.
add - Specify to add the router ports.
delete - Specify to delete the router ports.
source_ip - Specify the source IP address of the upstream protocol packet. If it is not specified,
zero IP address will be used as the protocol source IP address.
<ipaddr> - Specify the IP address.
unsolicited_report_interval - Specify the time between repetitions of the host's initial report of
membership in a group. The default is 10 seconds. If set to 0, only one report packet is sent.
<sec 0-25> - Specify the time between 0 and 25 seconds.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the router port of IGMP proxy’s upstream interface:
410

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config igmp_proxy upstream_if vlan default router_ports add

1:3
Command: config igmp_proxy upstream_if vlan default router_ports add 1:3
Success.
40-5 show igmp_proxy

Description
This command displays IGMP proxy configuration information or group information on the switch.
The display status item means group entry is determined by whether or not the chip is inserted.
Format
show igmp_proxy {group}
Parameters
group - (Optional) Specify the group information.
Note: If the group is not specified, the IGMP proxy configuration will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display IGMP proxy information:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show igmp_proxy
Command: show igmp_proxy
IGMP Proxy Global State : Enabled
Upstream Interface
VLAN ID : 1
Dynamic Router Ports : 1-4
Static Router Ports : 5-6
Unsolicited Report Interval : 10
Source IP Address : 0.0.0.0
Downstream Interface
VLAN List : 2-4
To display the IGMP proxy’s group information:

411

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show igmp_proxy group

Command: show igmp_proxy group
Dest-V : The destination VLAN.

A : Active
I : Inactive
Dest IP Source IP Dest-V Member Ports Status

----------- ------------- ------ ---------------- ---------
224.2.2.2 NULL 4 3,6 A
2 2-4 I
227.3.1.5 NULL 2 2,5,8 I
3 5,7,9 A
Total Entries: 2
412

®
Chapter 41 IGMP Snooping Command

List
The Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) is a L3 protocol used to manage the
membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups. IGMP is used by IP hosts and adjacent
multicast routers to establish multicast group memberships. IGMP snooping is the process of
listening to IGMP network traffic. IGMP snooping, as implied by the name, is a feature that allows
a layer 2 switch to "listen in" on the IGMP conversation between hosts and routers by processing
the layer 3 IGMP packets sent in a multicast network.
When IGMP snooping is enabled in a switch it analyzes all IGMP packets between hosts
connected to the Switch and multicast routers in the network. When a switch hears an IGMP report
from a host for a given multicast group, the Switch adds the host's port number to the multicast list
for that group. And, when the Switch hears an IGMP Leave, it removes the host's port from the
table entry.
config igmp_snooping [vlan_name <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | all ] { state [enable |
disable] | fast_leave [enable | disable] | proxy_reporting {state [enable|disable] | source_ip
<ipaddr>}(1)}(1)
config igmp_snooping rate_limit [ports <portlist> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] [<value 1-1000> |
no_limit]
config igmp_snooping querier [vlan_name <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | all]
{query_interval <sec 1-65535> | max_response_time <sec 1-25> | robustness_variable
<value 1-7> | last_member_query_interval <sec 1-25> | state [enable | disable] | version
<value 1-3>}(1)
config igmp access_authentication ports [all | <portlist>] state [enable | disable]
config router_ports [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> ] [add | delete] <portlist>
config router_ports_forbidden [ <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> ] [add | delete] <portlist>
enable igmp_snooping
disable igmp_snooping
create igmp_snooping static_group [vlan<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipaddr>
delete igmp_snooping static_group [vlan<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipaddr>
config igmp_snooping static_group [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipaddr> [add |
delete] <portlist>
show igmp_snooping static_group {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipaddr>}
config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning [all | vlan_name <vlan_name 32> | vlanid
<vlanid_list>] {state [enable | disable] | aged_out [enable | disable ] | expiry_time <sec 1-
65535>}(1) (EI and SI Mode Only)
config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry <value 1-1024> (EI and SI
Mode Only)
clear igmp_snooping data_driven_group [all | [vlan_name <vlan_name 32> | vlanid
<vlanid_list>] [<ipaddr> | all]] (EI and SI Mode Only)
show igmp_snooping {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>]}
show igmp_snooping rate_limit [ports <portlist> | vlanid <vlanid_list>]
show igmp_snooping group {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | ports <portlist>]
{<ipaddr>}} {data_driven}
show igmp_snooping forwarding {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>]}
show router_ports [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | all ] {[static | dynamic |
forbidden]}
show igmp_snooping statistic counter [vlan <vlan_name> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | ports
<portlist>]
413

®
show igmp access_authentication ports [all | <portlist>]

41-1 config igmp_snooping

Description
This command is used to configure IGMP snooping on the Switch.
Format
config igmp_snooping [vlan_name <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | all ] { state
[enable | disable] | fast_leave [enable | disable] | proxy_reporting {state [enable|disable] |
source_ip <ipaddr>}(1)}(1)
Parameters
vlan_name - Specify the name of the VLAN for which IGMP snooping is to be configured.
long.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID for which IGMP snooping is to be configured.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID here.
all - Specify to use all configured VLANs.
state - (Optional) Enable or disable IGMP snooping for the chosen VLAN.
enable - Enter enable to enable IGMP snooping for the chosen VLAN.
disable - Enter disable to disable IGMP snooping for the chosen VLAN.
fast_leave - Enable or disable the IGMP snooping fast leave function.
enable - Enter enable to enable the IGMP snooping fast leave function. If enabled, the
membership is immediately removed when the system receives the IGMP leave message.
disable - Enter disable to disable the IGMP snooping fast leave function.
proxy reporting - Specify IGMP proxy reporting. If enabled, multiple IGMP reports or leave for a
specific (S, G) will be integrated into one report only before sending to the router port.
state - Enable or disable the proxy reporting.
enable - Enable the proxy reporting.
disable - Disable the proxy reporting.
source_ip - Specify the source IP of proxy reporting integrated report. Default value is zero
IP.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address.
Restrictions
Example
To configure IGMP snooping:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config igmp_snooping vlan_name default state enable
Command: config igmp_snooping vlan_name default state enable
Success.
414

®
41-2 config igmp_snooping rate_limit

Description
This command is used to configure the rate of IGMP control packet that is allowed per port or per
VLAN.
Format
config igmp_snooping rate_limit [ports <portlist> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] [<value 1-1000> |
no_limit]
Parameters
vlanid - Specify a range of VLANs to be configured.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the VLAN ID list here.
<value 1-1000> - Configure the rate of the IGMP control packet that the Switch can process on a
specific port/VLAN. The rate is specified in packets per second. The packets that exceed the
limit will be dropped.
no_limit - Configure the rate of the IGMP control packet to be unlimited that the Switch can
process on a specific port/VLAN. The rate is specified in packets per second. The packets that
exceed the limit will be dropped. The default setting is no_limit.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the IGMP snooping per port rate_limit:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config igmp_snooping rate_limit ports 1:1 100
Command: config igmp_snooping rate_limit ports 1:1 100
Success.
41-3 config igmp_snooping querier

Description
This command is used to configure the time in seconds between general query transmissions, the
maximum time in seconds to wait for reports from members, and the permitted packet loss that
guarantees IGMP snooping.
Format
config igmp_snooping querier [vlan_name <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | all]
<value 1-7> | last_member_query_interval <sec 1-25> | state [enable | disable] | version
<value 1-3>}(1)
415

®
Parameters
vlan_name - Specify the name of the VLAN for which IGMP snooping querier is to be configured.
long.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID for which IGMP snooping querier is to be configured.
all - Specify all VLANs for which IGMP snooping querier is to be configured.
query_interval - (Optional) Specify the amount of time in seconds between general query
transmissions. The default setting is 125 seconds.
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the query interval value here. This value must between between 1 and
65535 seconds.
max_reponse_time - (Optional) Specify the maximum time in seconds to wait for reports from
members. The default setting is 10 seconds.
<sec 1-25> - Enter the maximum response time value here. This value must be between 1
and 25 seconds.
robustness_variable - (Optional) Provides fine-tuning to allow for expected packet loss on a
subnet. The value of the robustness variable is used in calculating the following IGMP
message intervals:
<value 1-7> - Enter the robustness variable value here. This value must be between 1 and 7.
By default, the robustness variable is set to 2. You might want to increase this value if you
expect a subnet to be loosely.
• Group member interval—Amount of time that must pass before a multicast router decides
there are no more members of a group on a network. This interval is calculated as
follows: (robustness variable x query interval) + (1 x query response interval).
• Other querier present interval—Amount of time that must pass before a multicast router
decides that there is no longer another multicast router that is the querier. This interval is
calculated as follows: (robustness variable x query interval) + (0.5 x query response
interval).
• Last member query count—Number of group-specific queries sent before the router
assumes there are no local members of a group. The default number is the value of the
robustness variable.
last_member_query_interval - (Optional) Specify the maximum amount of time between group-
specific query messages, including those sent in response to leave-group messages. You
might lower this interval to reduce the amount of time it takes a router to detect the loss of the
last member of a group. On receiving a leave message, the router will assume there are no
local members on the interface if there are no reports received after the response time (which
is last member query interval * robustness variable)
<sec 1-25> - Enter the last member query interval value here. This value must be between 1
and 25 seconds.
state - (Optional) If the state is enabled, it allows the Switch to be selected as an IGMP Querier
(sends IGMP query packets). It the state is disabled, then the Switch cannot play the role as a
querier. Note that if the Layer 3 router connected to the Switch provide only the IGMP proxy
function but does not provide the multicast routing function, then this state must be configured
as disabled. Otherwise, if the Layer 3 router is not selected as the querier, it will not send the
IGMP query packet. Since it will not send the multicast-routing protocol packet, the port will be
timed out as a router port.
enable - Enter enable to enable this state.
disable - Enter disable to disable this state.
version - (Optional) Specify the version of IGMP packet that will be sent by this port. If an IGMP
packet received by the interface has a version higher than the specified version, this packet
will be dropped.
<value 1-3> - Enter the version number here. This value must be between 1 and 3.
Restrictions
416

®
Example
To configure the IGMP snooping querier:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config igmp_snooping querier vlan_name default
query_interval 125 state enable
Command: config igmp_snooping querier vlan_name default query_interval 125
state enable
Success.
41-4 config igmp access_authentication ports

Description
This command is used to enable or disable the IGMP Access Control function for the specified
ports. If the IGMP Access Control function is enabled and the Switch receives an IGMP JOIN
message, the Switch will send the access request to the RADIUS server for authentication.
Format
config igmp access_authentication ports [all | <portlist>] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
state - Specify the state of the RADIUS authentication function on the specified ports.
enable - Enable the RADIUS authentication function on the specified ports.
disable - Disable the RADIUS authentication function on the specified ports.
Restrictions
Example
To enable IGMP Access Control for all ports:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config igmp access_authentication ports all state enable
Command: config igmp access_authentication ports all state enable
Success.
417

®
41-5 config router_ports

Description
This command is used to designate a range of ports as being connected to multicast-enabled
routers. This will ensure that all packets with such a router as its destination will reach the
multicast-enabled router, regardless of protocol, etc.
Format
config router_ports [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> ] [add | delete] <portlist>
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Specify the name of the VLAN on which the router port resides.
vlanid - Specify the ID of the VLAN on which the router port resides.
<portlist> - Specify a range of ports to be configured. (UnitID:port number)
Restrictions
Example
To set up static router ports:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config router_ports default add 1:1-1:10
Command: config router_ports default add 1:1-1:10
Success.
41-6 config router_ports_forbidden

Description
This command is used to designate a range of ports as being not connected to multicast-enabled
routers. This ensures that the forbidden router port will not propagate routing packets out.
Format
config router_ports_forbidden [ <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> ] [add | delete]
<portlist>
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Specify the name of the VLAN on which the router port resides.
418

®

Restrictions
Example
To set up port range 1-10 to forbidden router ports of default VLAN:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config router_ports_forbidden default add 1:11-1:12
Command: config router_ports_forbidden default add 1:11-1:12
Success.
41-7 enable igmp_snooping

Description
This command is used to enable IGMP snooping on the Switch.
Format
enable igmp_snooping
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable IGMP snooping on the Switch:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable igmp_snooping
Command: enable igmp_snooping
Success.
419

®
41-8 disable igmp_snooping

Description
This command is used to disable IGMP snooping on the Switch. Disabling IGMP snooping allows
all IGMP and IP multicast traffic to flood within a given IP interface. Note that disable
igmp_snooping will also disable the forward multicast router only function.
Format
disable igmp_snooping
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable IGMP snooping on the Switch:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable igmp_snooping
Command: disable igmp_snooping
Success.
41-9 create igmp_snooping static_group

Description
This command is used to create an IGMP snooping static group. Member ports can be added to
the static group. The static member and the dynamic member port form the member ports of a
group.
The static group will only take effect when IGMP snooping is enabled on the VLAN. For those
static member ports, the device needs to emulate the IGMP protocol operation to the querier, and
forward the traffic destined to the multicast group to the member ports.
For a layer 3 device, the device is also responsible to route the packet destined for this specific
group to static member ports.
The static member port will only affect V2 IGMP operation.

The Reserved IP multicast address 224.0.0.X must be excluded from the configured group.
The VLAN must be created first before a static group can be created.
420

®
Format
create igmp_snooping static_group [vlan<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipaddr>
Parameters
vlan - Specify the name of the VLAN on which the router port resides.
long.
<ipaddr> - Specify the multicast group IP address.
Restrictions
Example
To create an IGMP snooping static group for VLAN 1, group 239.1.1.1:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create igmp_snooping static_group vlan default 239.1.1.1
Command: create igmp_snooping static_group vlan default 239.1.1.1
Success.
41-10 delete igmp_snooping static_group

Description
This command is used to delete an IGMP snooping multicast static group. The deletion of an
IGMP snooping static group will not affect the IGMP snooping dynamic member ports for a group.
Format
delete igmp_snooping static_group [vlan<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipaddr>
Parameters
long.
Restrictions
421

®
Example
To delete an IGMP snooping static group for VLAN 1, group 239.1.1.1:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete igmp_snooping static_group vlan default 239.1.1.1
Command: delete igmp_snooping static_group vlan default 239.1.1.1
Success.
41-11 config igmp_snooping static_group

Description
This command is used to configure IGMP snooping static group. When a port is configured as a
static member port, the IGMP protocol will not operate on this port. For example, suppose that a
port is a dynamic member port learned by IGMP. If this port is configured as a static member later,
then the IGMP protocol will stop operating on this port. The IGMP protocol will resume once this
port is removed from static member ports.
The static member port will only affect V2 IGMP operation.
Format
config igmp_snooping static_group [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipaddr>
[add | delete] <portlist>
Parameters
vlan - Specify the name of the VLAN on which the static group resides.
long.
vlanid - Specify the ID of the VLAN on which the static group resides.
<ipaddr> - Specify the multicast group IP address (for Layer 3 switch).
add - Specify to add the member ports.
delete - Specify to delete the member ports.
Restrictions
Example
To unset port range 9-10 from IGMP snooping static member ports for group 239.1.1.1 on default
VLAN:
422

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config igmp_snooping static_group vlan default 239.1.1.1

delete 2:9-2:10
Command: create igmp_snooping static_group vlan default 239.1.1.1 delete 2:9-
2:10
Success.
41-12 show igmp_snooping static_group

Description
This command is used to display the IGMP snooping multicast group static members.
Format
show igmp_snooping static_group {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipaddr>}
Parameters
long.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display all the IGMP snooping static groups:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show igmp_snooping static_group
VLAN ID/Name IP Address Static Member Ports
-------------- ------------------ ------------------------
1 / Default 239.1.1.1 2:9-2:10
Total Entries : 1
41-13 config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning (EI and SI Mode

Only)
Description
This command is used to enable or disable the data driven learning of an IGMP snooping group.
423

®
When data-driven learning is enabled for the VLAN, when the Switch receives the IP multicast
traffic on this VLAN, an IGMP snooping group will be created. That is, the learning of an entry is
not activated by IGMP membership registration, but activated by the traffic. For an ordinary IGMP
snooping entry, the IGMP protocol will take care of the aging out of the entry. For a data-driven
entry, the entry can be specified not to be aged out or to be aged out by the aged timer.
When data driven learning is enabled, and the data driven table is not full, the multicast filtering
mode for all ports is ignored. That is, the multicast packets will be forwarded to router ports. If the
data driven learning table is full, the multicast packets will be forwarded according to the multicast
filtering mode.
Note that if a data-driven group is created and IGMP member ports are learned later, the entry will
become an ordinary IGMP snooping entry. That is, the aging out mechanism will follow the
ordinary IGMP snooping entry.
Format
config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning [all | vlan_name <vlan_name 32> | vlanid
<vlanid_list>] {state [enable | disable] | aged_out [enable | disable ] | expiry_time <sec 1-
65535>}(1)
Parameters
all - Specify all VLANs to be configured.
vlan_name - Specify the VLAN name to be configured.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name here.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID to be configured.
state - (Optional) Specify to enable or disable the data driven learning of an IGMP snooping
group.
enable - Enter enable to enable the data driven learning option. By default, the state is
enabled.
disable - Enter disable to disable the data driven learning option.
aged_out - (Optional) Enable or disable the aging out of the entry.
enable - Enter enable to enable the aging out of the entry.
disable - Enter disable to disable the aging out of the entry. By default, the state is disabled
state.
expiry_time - (Optional) Specify the data driven group lifetime in seconds. This parameter is
valid only when aged_out is enabled.
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the expiry time here. This value must be between 1 and 65535
seconds.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the data driven learning of an IGMP snooping group on the default VLAN:
424

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning vlan default

state enable
Command: config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning vlan default state enable
Success.
41-14 config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning

max_learned_entry (EI and SI Mode Only)
Description
This command is used to configure the maximum number of groups that can be learned by data
driven.
When the table is full, the system will stop the learning of the new data-driven groups. Traffic for
the new groups will be dropped.
Format
config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry <value 1-1024>
Parameters
max_learned_entry - Specify the maximum number of groups that can be learned by data
driven. The suggested default setting is 56. This default setting may vary depending on
projects.
<value 1-1024> - Enter the maximum learning entry value here. This value must be between
1 and 1024.
Restrictions
Example
To set the maximum number of groups that can be learned by data driven:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning
max_learned_entry 50
Command: config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry 50
Success.
41-15 clear igmp_snooping data_driven_group (EI and SI Mode

Only)
Description
This command is used to delete the IGMP snooping group(s) learned by data driven.
425

®
Format
clear igmp_snooping data_driven_group [all | [vlan_name <vlan_name 32> | vlanid
<vlanid_list>] [<ipaddr> | all]]
Parameters
all - Specify all VLANs to which IGMP snooping groups will be deleted.
vlan_name - Specify the VLAN name.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID.
<ipaddr> - Specify the group’s IP address learned by data driven.
all - Delete all IGMP snooping groups of specified VLANs.
Restrictions
Example
To delete all the groups learned by data-driven:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# clear igmp_snooping data_driven_group all
Command: clear igmp_snooping data_driven_group all
Success.
41-16 show igmp_snooping

Description
This command is used to display the current IGMP snooping configuration on the Switch.
Format
show igmp_snooping {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>]}
Parameters
vlan - (Optional) Specify the name of the VLAN for which you want to view the IGMP snooping
configuration.
long.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the ID of the VLAN for which you want to view the IGMP snooping
configuration.
If the VLAN is not specified, the system will display all current IGMP snooping configurations.
426

®
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show IGMP snooping:
Command: show igmp_snooping
IGMP Snooping Global State : Disabled
VLAN Name : default

Query Interval : 125
Max Response Time : 10
Robustness Value : 2
Last Member Query Interval : 1
Querier State : Disabled
Querier Role : Non-Querier
Querier IP : 0.0.0.0
Querier Expiry Time : 0 secs
State : Disabled
Fast Leave : Disabled
Rate Limit(pkt/sec) : No Limitation
Proxy Reporting : Disabled
Proxy Reporting Source IP : 0.0.0.0
Version : 3
Total Entries: 1
41-17 show igmp_snooping rate_limit

Description
This command is used to display the IGMP snooping rate limit setting.
Format
show igmp_snooping rate_limit [ports <portlist> | vlanid <vlanid_list>]
Parameters
ports - Specify the port range.
<portlist> - Enter the range of ports here.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN range..
Restrictions
None.
427

®
Example
To display the IGMP snooping rate limit for ports 1 to 15:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show igmp_snooping rate_limit ports 1-15
Command: show igmp_snooping rate_limit ports 1-15
Port Rate Limit

-------- -----------
1 No Limit
2 100
3 No Limit
4 No Limit
5 No Limit
Total Entries: 5
41-18 show igmp_snooping group

Description
This command is used to display the current IGMP snooping group configuration on the Switch.
Format
show igmp_snooping group {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | ports <portlist>]
{<ipaddr>}} {data_driven}
Parameters
vlan - (Optional) Specify the name of the VLAN for which you want to view IGMP snooping group
information. If VLAN, ports and IP address are not specified, the system will display all current
IGMP snooping group information.
long.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the ID of the VLAN for which you want to view IGMP snooping group
information.
ports - (Optional) Specify a list of ports for which you want to view IGMP snooping group
information.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports here.
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Specify the group IP address for which you want to view IGMP snooping
group information.
data_driven - (Optional) If data_driven is specified, only data driven groups will be displayed.
(EI and SI Mode Only)
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show IGMP snooping groups when IGMP v3 is supported:
428

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show igmp_snooping group

Command: show igmp_snooping group
Source/Group : 10.0.0.1/225.0.0.1
VLAN Name/VID : default/1
Member Ports : 1:5
UP Time : 6
Expiry Time : 254
Filter Mode : INCLUDE
Source/Group : 10.0.0.10/225.0.0.1
Member Ports : 1:5
UP Time : 6
Expiry Time : 254
Source/Group : NULL/239.255.255.250
Member Ports : 1:5
UP Time : 2
Expiry Time : 258
Filter Mode : EXCLUDE
Total Entries: 3
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show igmp_snooping group data_driven

Command: show igmp_snooping group data_driven
Reports : 0
Member Ports :
Router Ports : 24
UP Time : 3 days 50 mins
Expiry Time : 120 secs
Total Entries : 1
To show IGMP snooping groups when only IGMP v2 is supported: The third item is a data-driven
learned entry. If the member port list is empty, the multicast packets will be forwarded to the router
ports. If the router port list is empty, the packets will be dropped.
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show igmp_snooping group
Command: show igmp_snooping group
429

®
Member Ports : 1:5

UP Time : 10
Expiry Time : 258
Member Ports : 1:5
UP Time : 9
Expiry Time : 259
Member Ports :
Router Ports :
UP Time : 1
Expiry Time : 259
Member Ports : 1:5
UP Time : 1
Expiry Time : 259
Total Entries: 4
41-19 show igmp_snooping forwarding

Description
This command is used to display the Switch’s current IGMP snooping forwarding table. It provides
an easy way for users to check the list of ports that the multicast group that comes from a specific
sources will be forwarded to. The packet comes from the source VLAN. They will be forwarded to
the forwarding VLAN. The IGMP snooping further restricts the forwarding ports.
Format
show igmp_snooping forwarding {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>]}
Parameters
vlan - (Optional) Specify the name of the VLAN for which you want to view IGMP snooping
forwarding table information.
long.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the ID of the VLAN for which you want to view IGMP snooping
430

®

If no parameter is specified, the system will display all current IGMP snooping forwarding table
entries of the Switch.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show all IGMP snooping forwarding entries located on the Switch:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show igmp_snooping forwarding
Command: show igmp_snooping forwarding
VLAN Name : default

Source IP : 10.90.90.114
Multicast Group: 225.0.0.0
Port Member : 2,7
VLAN Name : default

Source IP : 10.90.90.10
Port Member : 2,5
VLAN Name : default

Source IP : 10.90.90.20
Port Member : 2,8
Total Entries : 3
41-20 show router_ports

Description
This command is used to display the currently configured router ports on the Switch.
Format
show router_ports [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | all ] {[static | dynamic |
forbidden]}
Parameters
long.
431

®
all - Specify all VLANs on which the router port resides.

static - (Optional) Displays router ports that have been statically configured.
dynamic - (Optional) Displays router ports that have been dynamically configured.
forbidden - (Optional) Displays forbidden router ports that have been statically configured.
If no parameter is specified, the system will display all currently configured router ports on the
Switch.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display router ports:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show router_ports all
Command: show router_ports all
VLAN Name : default

Static Router Port : 1:1-1:10
Dynamic Router Port :
Router IP :
Forbidden Router Port : 1:11-1:12
Total Entries: 1
41-21 show igmp_snooping statistics counter

Description
This command is used to display the statistics counter for IGMP protocol packets that are received
by the Switch since IGMP snooping was enabled.
Format
show igmp_snooping statistic counter [vlan <vlan_name> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | ports
<portlist>]
Parameters
vlan - Specify a VLAN to be displayed.
<vlan_name> - Enter the VLAN name here.
vlanid - Specify a list of VLANs to be displayed.
ports - Specify a list of ports to be displayed.
<portlist> - Enter the list of port to be displayed here.
432

®
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the IGMP snooping statistics counter:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show igmp_snooping statistics counter vlanid 1
Command: show igmp_snooping statistics counter vlanid 1
VLAN Name : Default

-----------------------------------------------
Group Number : 10
Receive Statistics
Query
IGMP v1 Query : 1
IGMP v2 Query : 1
IGMP v3 Query : 1
Total : 3
Dropped By Rate Limitation : 1
Dropped By Multicast VLAN : 1
Report & Leave

IGMP v1 Report : 0
IGMP v2 Report : 10
IGMP v3 Report : 10
IGMP v2 Leave : 1
Total : 21
Dropped By Max Group Limitation : 90
Dropped By Group Filter : 0
Transmit Statistics
Query
IGMP v1 Query : 1
IGMP v2 Query : 1
IGMP v3 Query : 1
Total : 3
Report & Leave
IGMP v1 Report : 0
IGMP v2 Report : 10
IGMP v3 Report : 10
IGMP v2 Leave : 1
Total : 21
Total Entries : 1
To display the IGMP snooping statistics counter for a port:
433

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show igmp_snooping statistics counter ports 1

Command: show igmp_snooping statistics counter ports 1
Port #1
------------------------------------------------
Group Number : 10
Receive Statistics
Query
IGMP v1 Query : 0
IGMP v2 Query : 0
IGMP v3 Query : 0
Total : 0
Report & Leave

IGMP v1 Report : 0
IGMP v2 Report : 100
IGMP v3 Report : 0
IGMP v2 Leave : 0
Total : 100
Transmit Statistics
Query
IGMP v1 Query : 0
IGMP v2 Query : 0
IGMP v3 Query : 0
Total : 0
Report & Leave

IGMP v1 Report : 0
IGMP v2 Report : 0
IGMP v3 Report : 0
IGMP v2 Leave : 0
Total : 0
Total Entries : 1
41-22 show igmp access_authentication ports

Description
This command is used to display the current IGMP Access Control configuration.
434

®
Format
show igmp access_authentication ports [all | <portlist>]
Parameters
all - Specify all ports to be displayed.
<portlist> - Specify a range of ports to be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the IGMP Access Control status for ports 1-4:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show igmp access_authentication ports 1:1-1:4
Command: show igmp access_authentication ports 1:1-1:4
Port State
----- ---------
1:1 Enabled
1:2 Disabled
1:3 Disabled
1:4 Disabled
To display the IGMP Access Control status for all ports:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show igmp access_authentication ports all
Command: show igmp access_authentication ports all
Port State
----- ---------
1:1 Enabled
1:2 Disabled
1:3 Disabled
1:4 Disabled
1:5 Disabled
1:6 Disabled
1:7 Disabled
1:8 Disabled
1:9 Disabled
1:10 Disabled
1:11 Disabled
1:12 Disabled
1:13 Disabled
1:14 Disabled
1:15 Disabled
1:16 Disabled
1:17 Disabled
435

®
1:18 Disabled
1:19 Disabled
1:20 Disabled
41-23 clear igmp_snooping statistics counter

Description
This command is used to clear the IGMP snooping statistics counter.
Format
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To clear the IGMP snooping statistics counter:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# clear igmp_snooping statistic counter
Command: clear igmp_snooping statistic counter
Success.
436

®
Chapter 42 IP-MAC-Port Binding (IMPB)

Mode Only)
create address_binding ip_mac ipaddress <ipaddr> mac_address <macaddr> {ports [<portlist>
| all]}
config address_binding ip_mac ports [ <portlist> | all] {arp_inspection [strict | loose | disable] |
ip_inspection [enable | disable] | protocol [ipv4 | ipv6 | all] | allow_zeroip [enable | disable] |
forward_dhcppkt [enable | disable] | stop_learning_threshold <int 0-500>}
create address_binding ip_mac ipv6address <ipv6addr> mac_address <macaddr> {ports
[ <portlist>| all ]}
config address_binding ip_mac ipv6address <ipv6addr> mac_address <macaddr> {ports
[<portlist>| all]}
delete address_binding blocked [all | vlan_name <vlan_name> mac_address <macaddr>]
delete address_binding ip_mac [all | ipaddress <ipaddr> mac_address <macaddr> | ipv6address
<ipv6addr> mac_address <macaddr>]
config address_binding ip_mac ipaddress <ipaddr> mac_address <macaddr> {ports [<portlist>
| all]}
show address_binding {ports {<portlist>}}
show address_binding blocked [all | vlan_name <vlan_name> mac_address <macaddr>]
show address_binding ip_mac [all | [[ipaddress <ipaddr> | ipv6address <ipv6addr>]
{mac_address <macaddr>} | mac_address <macaddr>]]
enable address_binding dhcp_snoop {[ipv6| all]}
disable address_binding dhcp_snoop {[ipv6| all]}
clear address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry ports [<portlist> | all] {[ipv6 | all]}
show address_binding dhcp_snoop {max_entry {ports <portlist>}}
show address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry {port <port>}
show address_binding dhcp_snoop limit_rate {ports <portlist>}
config address_binding dhcp_snoop max_entry ports [<portlist> | all] limit [<value 1-50> |
no_limit] {ipv6}
enable address_binding nd_snoop
disable address_binding nd_snoop
config address_binding nd_snoop ports [<portlist> | all] max_entry [< value 1-50 > | no_limit]
show address_binding nd_snoop {ports <portlist>}
show address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry {port <port>}
clear address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry ports [<portlist> | all]
enable address_binding trap_log
disable address_binding trap_log
config address_binding recover_learning ports [<portlist> | all]
config address_binding dhcp snooping ports [<portlist> | all] limit [rate {<value 1-2048> mode
[drop | shutdown]} | no_limit]
config address_binding dhcp snooping recovery_timer [<sec 60-1000000> | infinite]
42-1 create address_binding ip_mac

Description
This command is used to create an IMPB entry.
437

®
Format
create address_binding ip_mac ipaddress <ipaddr> mac_address <macaddr> {ports
[<portlist> | all]}
Parameters
ipaddress - Specify the IP address used for the IMPB entry.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address used here.
mac_address - Specify the MAC address used for the IMPB entry.
ports - (Optional) Specify the portlist the entry will apply to. If not ports are specified, the settings
will be applied to all ports.
<portlist> - Enter a list of ports used for this configuration here.
all - Specify that all the ports will be included.
Restrictions
Example
To create an IMPB entry:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create address_binding ip_mac ipaddress 10.1.1.1
mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-11
Command: create address_binding ip_mac ipaddress 10.1.1.1 mac_address 00-00-00-
00-00-11
Success.
42-2 config address_binding ip_mac

Description
This command is used to configure the state of IMPB on the Switch for each port.
Format
config address_binding ip_mac ports [ <portlist> | all] {arp_inspection [strict | loose |
disable] | ip_inspection [enable | disable] | protocol [ipv4 | ipv6 | all] | allow_zeroip [enable |
disable] | forward_dhcppkt [enable | disable] | stop_learning_threshold <int 0-500>}
Parameters
ports - Specify the ports used for this configuration.
arp_inspection - (Optional) Specify that the ARP inspection option will be configured.
strict - In this mode, all packets are dropped by default until a legal ARP or IP packets are
detected.
loose - In this mode, all packets are forwarded by default until an illegal ARP or broadcast IP
438

®
packets are detected. If not specified strict or loose, default is strict.

disable - Disable ARP inspection function. The default value is disabled.
ip_inspection - (Optional) Specify that the IP inspection option will be configured.
enable - Enable IP inspection function. The legal IP packets will be forward, while the illegal
IP packets will be dropped.
disable - Disable IP inspection function. The default value is disabled.
protocol - (Optional) Specify the version used.
ipv4 - Only IPv4 packets will be checked.
ipv6 - Specify that only IPv6 packets will be checked.
all - Specify that all packets will be checked.
allow_zeroip - (Optional) Specify whether to allow ARP packets with a source IP address of
0.0.0.0. If the IP address 0.0.0.0 is not configured in the binding list and this setting is enabled,
ARP packets with the source IP address of 0.0.0.0 will be allowed; If the IP address 0.0.0.0 is
not configured in the binding list and this setting is disabled, ARP packets with the source IP
address of 0.0.0.0 will not be allowed. This option does not affect the IMPB ACL Mode.
enable - Specify that the allow zero IP option will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the allow zero IP option will be disabled.
forward_dhcppkt - (Optional) By default, DHCP packets with a broadcast DA will be flooded.
When set to disabled, the broadcast DHCP packet received by the specified port will not be
forwarded. This setting is effective when DHCP Snooping is enabled, in this case DHCP
packets trapped by the CPU must be forwarded by the software. This setting controls the
forwarding behavior in this situation.
enable - Specify that the forward DHCP packets option will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the forward DHCP packets option will be disabled.
stop_learning_threshold - (Optional) When the number of blocked entries exceeds the
threshold, the port will stop learning new addresses. Packets with a new address will be
dropped.
<int 0-500> - Enter the stop learning threshold value here. This value must be between 0 and
500.
Restrictions
Example
To enable IMPB on port 1:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config address_binding ip_mac ports 1:1 arp_inspection
strict
Command: config address_binding ip_mac ports 1:1 arp_inspection strict
Success.
42-3 create address_binding ip_mac ipv6address

Description
This command is used to create an IP-MAC-Port binding entry using IPv6.
Format
create address_binding ip_mac ipv6address <ipv6addr> mac_address <macaddr> {ports
[ <portlist>| all ]}
439

®
Parameters
<ipv6addr> - Specify the IPv6 address.
mac_address - Specify the MAC address.
ports - (Optional) Configure the portlist or all ports.
all - Specify to apply to all the ports.
Restrictions
Example
To create a static IPv6 IMPB entry that binds the IPv6 address fe80::240:5ff:fe00:28 to the MAC
address 00-00-00-00-00-11:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create address_binding ip_mac ipv6address
fe80::240:5ff:fe00:28 mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-11
Command: create address_binding ip_mac ipv6address FE80::240:5FF:FE00:28
mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-11
Success.
42-4 config address_binding ip_mac ipv6address

Description
This command is used to update an address binding entry using IPv6.
Format
config address_binding ip_mac ipv6address <ipv6addr> mac_address <macaddr> {ports
[<portlist>| all]}
Parameters
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address used here.
mac_address - Specify the MAC address.
ports - (Optional) Configure the portlist to apply, if ports are not configured, then it will apply to all
ports.
<portlist> - Specify the list of ports to apply.
all - Specify to apply to all the ports.
Restrictions
440

®
Example
To configure a static IPv6 IMPB entry so that that IPv6 address fe80::240:5ff:fe00:28 is bound to
the MAC address 00-00-00-00-00-11:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config address_binding ip_mac ipv6address
fe80::240:5ff:fe00:28 mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-11
Command: config address_binding ip_mac ipv6address FE80::240:5FF:FE00:28
mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-11
Success.
42-5 delete address_binding blocked

Description
This command is used to delete a blocked entry.
Format
delete address_binding blocked [all | vlan_name <vlan_name> mac_address <macaddr>]
Parameters
all - Specify that all the entries the address database that the system has automatically learned
and blocked to be deleted.
vlan_name - Specify the name of the VLAN to which the blocked MAC address belongs.
<vlan_name> - Enter the VLAN name.
mac_address - Specify the MAC address of the entry or the blocked MAC address.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address used.
Restrictions
Example
To delete a blocked address:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete address_binding blocked vlan_name v31 mac_address
00-00-00-00-00-11
Command: delete address_binding blocked vlan_name v31 mac_address 00-00-00-00-
00-11
Success.
42-6 delete address_binding ip_mac

Description
This command is used to delete an IMPB entry.
441

®
Format
delete address_binding ip_mac [all | ipaddress <ipaddr> mac_address <macaddr> |
ipv6address <ipv6addr> mac_address <macaddr>]
Parameters
all - Specify that all the MAC address will be used.
ipaddress - Specify the learned IP address of the entry in the database.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address used.
mac_address - Specify the MAC address used for this configuration.
Ipv6address - Specify the learned IPv6 address of the entry in the database.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address used.
mac_address - Specify the MAC address used for this configuration.
Restrictions
Example
To delete a blocked address:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete address_binding ip_mac ipaddress 10.1.1.1
mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-11
Command: delete address_binding ip_mac ipaddress 10.1.1.1 mac_address 00-00-00-
00-00-11
Success.
42-7 config address_binding ip_mac

Description
This command is used to update an IMPB entry.
Format
config address_binding ip_mac ipaddress <ipaddr> mac_address <macaddr> {ports
[<portlist> | all]}
Parameters
ipaddress - Specify the IP address of the entry being updated.
mac_address - Specify the MAC address of the entry being updated
ports - (Optional) Specify which ports are used for the IMPB entry being updated. If not specified,
then it is applied to all ports.
442

®
<portlist> - Enter the list of port used here.

Restrictions
Example
To configure an IMPB entry:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config address_binding ip_mac ipaddress 10.1.1.1
mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-11
Command: config address_binding ip_mac ipaddress 10.1.1.1 mac_address 00-00-00-
00-00-11
Success.
42-8 show address_binding

Description
This command is used to display the IMPB global settings or IMPB settings on specified ports.
Format
show address_binding {ports {<portlist>}}
Parameters
ports - (Optional) Specify the ports for which the information is displayed. If not specified, all
ports are displayed.
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter the list of ports used here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the IMPB global configuration:
443

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show address_binding
Command: show address_binding
Trap/Log : Disabled
DHCP Snoop(IPv4) : Disabled
ND Snoop : Disabled
Function Version : 3.96
To show the IMPB ports:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show address_binding ports
Command: show address_binding ports
ARP: ARP Inspection IP: IP Inspection
Port ARP IP Protocol Zero IP DHCP Packet Stop Learning

Threshold/Mode
----- -------- -------- ----- --------- ----------- --------------
1:1 Strict Disabled IPv4 Not Allow Forward 500/Normal
1:2 Disabled Disabled IPv4 Not Allow Forward 500/Normal
42-9 show address_binding blocked

Description
This command is used to display the blocked MAC entries.
Format
show address_binding blocked [all | vlan_name <vlan_name> mac_address <macaddr>]
444

®
Parameters
all - Specify that all the addresses in the database that the system has auto learned and blocked
to be displayed.
vlan_name - Specify the name of the VLAN to which the blocked MAC address belongs.
<vlan_name> - Enter the VLAN name used.
mac_address - Specify the MAC address of the entry or the blocked MAC address.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address of the entry or the blocked MAC address.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the IMPB entries that are blocked:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show address_binding blocked all
Command: show address_binding blocked all
VID VLAN Name MAC Address Port

---- -------------------------------- ----------------- ----
1 default 00-0C-6E-AA-B9-C0 1:1
Total Entries : 1
42-10 show address_binding ip_mac

Description
This command is used to display the IMPB entries.
Format
show address_binding ip_mac [all | [[ipaddress <ipaddr> | ipv6address <ipv6addr>]
{mac_address <macaddr>} | mac_address <macaddr>]]
Parameters
all - Specify that all the IP addresses to be displayed.
ipaddress - Specify the learned IP address of the entry in the database.
<ipaddr> - Enter the learned IP address.
ipv6address - Specify the learned IPv6 address of the entry in the database.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the learned IPv6 address.
mac_address - (Optional) Specify the MAC address of the entry in the database.
mac_address - Specify the MAC address of the entry in the database.
445

®
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show IMPB entries:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show address_binding ip_mac all
Command: show address_binding ip_mac all
M(Mode) - D:DHCP, S:Static ACL - A:Active I:Inactive
IP Address MAC Address M ACL Ports

--------------------------------------- ----------------- -- -- --------------
10.1.1.1 00-00-00-00-00-11 S I 1:1-1:24
Total Entries : 1
42-11 enable address_binding dhcp_snoop

Description
This command is used to enable DHCP snooping mode.
By default, DHCP snooping is disabled.
If a user enables DHCP Snooping mode, all ports which have IMPB disabled will become server
ports. The switch will learn the IP addresses through server ports (by using DHCP Offer and
DHCP ACK packets).
Note that the DHCP discover packet cannot be passed thru the user ports if the allow_zeroip
function is disabled on the port.
The auto-learned IMPB entry will be mapped to a specific source port based on the MAC address
learning function. This entry will be created as an IP-Inspection mode binding entry for this specific
port. Each entry is associated with a lease time. When the lease time has expires, the expired
entry will be removed from the port. The auto-learned binding entry can be moved from one port to
another port if the DHCP snooping function has learned that the MAC address has moved to a
different port.
If a situation occurs where a binding entry learned by DHCP snooping conflicts with a statically
configured entry. The binding relation has conflicted. For example, if IP A is binded to MAC X with
a static configuration and suppose that the binding entry learned by DHCP snooping is that IP A is
bound to MAC Y, and then it is conflict. When the DHCP snooping learned entry binds with the
static configured entry, and the DHCP snooping learned entry will not be created.
In a situation where the same IMPB pair has been statically configured, the auto-learned entry will
not be created. In a situation where the learned information is consistent with the statically
configured entry the auto-learned entry will not be created. In a situation where the entry is
statically configured in ARP mode the auto learned entry will not be created. In a situation where
the entry is statically configured on one port and the entry is auto-learned on another port, the
auto-learned entry will not be created.
446

®
Format
enable address_binding dhcp_snoop {[ipv6| all]}
Parameters
ipv6 - (Optional) Specify that IPv6 entries to be enabled.
all - (Optional) Specify to enable all DHCP snooping mode.
Restrictions
Example
To enable DHCP IPv4 snooping mode:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable address_binding dhcp_snoop
Command: enable address_binding dhcp_snoop
Success.
42-12 disable address_binding dhcp_snoop

Description
This command is used to disable DHCP snooping mode. When the DHCP snooping function is
disabled, all of the auto-learned binding entries will be removed.
Format
disable address_binding dhcp_snoop {[ipv6| all]}
Parameters
ipv6 - (Optional) Specify that IPv6 entries to be disabled.
all - (Optional) Specify to disable all DHCP snooping mode.
Restrictions
Example
To disable DHCP IPv4 snooping mode:
447

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable address_binding dhcp_snoop

Command: disable address_binding dhcp_snoop
Success.
42-13 clear address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry ports

Description
This command is used to clear the DHCP snooping entries learned for the specified ports.
Format
clear address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry ports [<portlist> | all] {[ipv6 | all]}
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports used.
ipv6 - (Optional) Specify that IPv6 entries will be cleared.
all - (Optional) Specify that all entries will be cleared.
Restrictions
Example
To clear DHCP IPv4 snooping entries on ports 1-3:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# clear address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry ports 1-3
Command: clear address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry ports 1-3
Success.
42-14 show address_binding dhcp_snoop

Description
This command is used to display the DHCP snooping configuration and learning database.
Format
show address_binding dhcp_snoop {max_entry {ports <portlist>}}
Parameters
max_entry - (Optional) To show the maximum number of entries per port.
448

®
ports - Specify the ports used for this configuration.

<portlist> - Enter a list of ports used here.
If no parameters are specified, show DHCP snooping displays the enable/disable state.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the DHCP snooping state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show address_binding dhcp_snoop
Command: show address_binding dhcp_snoop
DHCP Snoop(IPv4) : Enabled

Auto Recovery Time : 300 Seconds
To display DHCP snooping maximun entry configuration:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show address_binding dhcp_snoop max_entry
Command: show address_binding dhcp_snoop max_entry
Port Max Entry

---- ---------
1:1 No Limit
1:2 No Limit
1:3 No Limit
1:4 No Limit
1:5 No Limit
1:6 No Limit
1:7 No Limit
1:8 No Limit
1:9 No Limit
1:10 No Limit
1:11 No Limit
1:12 No Limit
1:13 No Limit
1:14 No Limit
1:15 No Limit
1:16 No Limit
1:17 No Limit
1:18 No Limit
1:19 No Limit
1:20 No Limit
449

®
42-15 show address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry

Description
This command is used to display the DHCP snooping binding entries.
Format
show address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry {port <port>}
Parameters
port – (Optional) Specify the port used for this configuration.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the DHCP snooping binding entries:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry
Command: show address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry
S (Status) - A: Active, I: Inactive

Time - Left Time (sec)
IP Address MAC Address S LT(sec) Port

--------------------------------------- ----------------- -- ---------- -----
10.62.58.35 00-0B-5D-05-34-0B A 35964 1
10.33.53.82 00-20-c3-56-b2-ef I 2590 2
Total Entries : 2
42-16 show address_binding dhcp_snoop limit_rate

Description
This command is used to display the DHCP snooping limit rate entries.
Format
show address_binding dhcp_snoop limit_rate {ports <portlist>}
Parameters
port – (Optional) Specify the port used for this configuration.
450

®
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the DHCP snooping limit rate entries:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show address_binding dhcp_snoop limit_rate
Command: show address_binding dhcp_snoop limit_rate
Port Rate Limit (pps) Action

------ ---------------- ---------
1:1 No Limit -
1:2 No Limit -
1:3 No Limit -
1:4 No Limit -
1:5 No Limit -
1:6 No Limit -
1:7 No Limit -
1:8 No Limit -
1:9 No Limit -
1:10 No Limit -
1:11 No Limit -
1:12 No Limit -
1:13 No Limit -
1:14 No Limit -
1:15 No Limit -
1:16 No Limit -
1:17 No Limit -
1:18 No Limit -
1:19 No Limit -
1:20 No Limit -
1:21 No Limit -
1:22 No Limit -
1:23 No Limit -
1:24 No Limit -
42-17 config address_binding dhcp_snoop max_entry

Description
This command is used to specify the maximum number of entries that can be learned by a
specified port.
Format
config address_binding dhcp_snoop max_entry ports [<portlist> | all] limit [<value 1-50> |
no_limit] {ipv6}
451

®
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports you would like to set the maximum number of entries that can
be learned.
all - Specify that all the ports to be used.
limit - Specify the maximum number.
<value 1-50> - Enter the limit value here. This value must be between 1 and 50.
no_limit - Specify that the maximum number of learned entries is unlimited.
ipv6 - (Optional) Specify the IPv6 address used for this configuration.
Restrictions
Example
To set the maximum number of DHCP IPv4 snooping entries that ports 1:1–1:3 can learned to 10:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config address_binding dhcp_snoop max_entry ports 1:1-1:3
limit 10
Command: config address_binding dhcp_snoop max_entry ports 1:1-1:3 limit 10
Success.
42-18 enable address_binding nd_snoop

Description
This command is used to enable ND snooping on the switch.
Format
enable address_binding nd_snoop
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the ND snooping function on the switch:
452

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable address_binding nd_snoop

Command: enable address_binding nd_snoop
Success.
42-19 disable address_binding nd_snoop

Description
This command is used to disable ND snooping on the switch.
Format
disable address_binding nd_snoop
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the ND snooping function on the switch:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable address_binding nd_snoop
Command: disable address_binding nd_snoop
Success.
42-20 config address_binding nd_snoop ports

Description
This command is used to specify the maximum number of entries that can be learned with ND
snooping. By default, there is no limit on the maximum number of entries that can be learned on a
port with ND snooping.
Format
config address_binding nd_snoop ports [<portlist> | all] max_entry [< value 1-50 > | no_limit]
Parameters
ports - Specify the list of ports used for this configuration.
453

®
all - Specify that all the ports will be usd for this configuration.
max_entry - Specify the maximum number of entries.
<value 1-50> - Enter the maximum number of entries used here. This value must be between
1 and 50.
no_limit - Specify that the maximum number of learned entries is unlimited.
Restrictions
Example
To that a maximum of 10 entries can be learned by ND snooping on ports 1:1 to 1:3:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config address_binding nd_snoop ports 1:1-1:3 max_entry 10
Command: config address_binding nd_snoop ports 1:1-1:3 max_entry 10
Success.
42-21 show address_binding nd_snoop

Description
This command is used to the status of ND snooping on the Switch.
Format
show address_binding nd_snoop {ports <portlist>}
Parameters
ports – (Optional) Specify the list of ports used for this display.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports used for this display here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the ND snooping state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show address_binding nd_snoop
Command: show address_binding nd_snoop
ND Snoop : Enabled
To show the ND snooping maximum entry information for ports 1:1-1:5:

454

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show address_binding nd_snoop ports 1:1-1:5

Command: show address_binding nd_snoop ports 1:1-1:5
Port Max Entry

---- ---------
1:1 10
1:2 10
1:3 10
1:4 No Limit
1:5 No Limit
42-22 show address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry

Description
This command is used to show the ND snooping binding entries on the Switch.
Format
show address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry {port <port>}
Parameters
port - (Optional) Specify a port used for this display.
<port> - Enter the port number used for this display here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To the ND snooping binding entry:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry
Command: show address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry
S (Status) - A: Active, I: Inactive

Time - Left Time (sec)
IP Address MAC Address S LT(sec) Port

--------------------------------------- ----------------- -- ---------- -----
2001:2222:1111:7777:5555:6666:7777:8888 00-00-00-00-00-02 I 50 5
2001::1 00-00-00-00-03-02 A 100 6
Total Entries : 2
455

®
42-23 clear address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry ports

Description
This command is used to clear the ND snooping entries on specified ports.
Format
clear address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry ports [<portlist> | all]
Parameters
ports - Specify the list of ports that you would like to clear the ND snoop learned entry.
all - Clear all ND snooping learned entries.
Restrictions
Example
To clear ND snooping entry on ports 1:1-1:3:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#clear address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry ports 1:1-1:3
Command: clear address_binding nd_snoop binding_entry ports 1:1-1:3
Success.
42-24 enable address_binding trap_log

Description
This command is used to send traps and logs when the IMPB module detects an illegal IP and
MAC address.
Format
enable address_binding trap_log
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
456

®
Example
To enable the IMPB traps and logs:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable address_binding trap_log
Command: enable address_binding trap_log
Success.
42-25 disable address_binding trap_log

Description
This command is used to disable the IMPB traps and logs.
Format
disable address_binding trap_log
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable IMPB traps and logs:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable address_binding trap_log
Command: disable address_binding trap_log
Success.
42-26 config address_binding recover_learning

Description
This command is used to recover IMPB checking.
Format
config address_binding recover_learning ports [<portlist> | all]
457

®
Parameters
ports - Specify the list of ports that need to recover the IMPB check.
Restrictions
Example
To recover IMPB checking for ports 6 to 7:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config address_binding recover_learning ports 6-7
Command: config address_binding recover_learning ports 6-7
Success.
42-27 config address_binding dhcp snooping ports

Description
This command is used to configure the DHCP snooping rate limit state.
Format
config address_binding dhcp snooping ports [<portlist> | all] limit [rate {<value 1-2048>
mode [drop | shutdown]} | no_limit]
Parameters
<portlist> - Specify list of ports to be configured.
all - Specify to configure all ports.
limit - Specify the reate limit.
rate - The number of DHCP messages that an interface can receive per second.
<value 1-2048> - (Optional) Enter the value between 1 and 2048.
mode - (Optional) Specify the DHCP protection mode. The default is shutdown.
drop - Drop all the above rate limit DHCP packets when the port enters the under
attack state.
shutdown - Shut down the port when the port enters the under attack state.
no_limit – Disable DHCP snooping rate limiting. This is the default.
Restrictions
Example
To configure limit 10pps DHCP packet on port 1:
458

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config address_binding dhcp snooping ports 1:1 limit rate

10
mode drop
Command: config address_binding dhcp snooping ports 1:1 limit rate 10 mode drop
Success.
42-28 config address_binding dhcp snooping recovery_timer

Description
This command is used to configure the auto recovery timer value.
Format
config address_binding dhcp snooping recovery_timer [<sec 60-1000000> | infinite]
Parameters
<sec 60-1000000> - Enter a value between 60 and 1000000 for the time interval used by the
auto-recovery mechanism.
infinite - Specify that the port cannot be auto-recovered.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the auto-recovery time as 1000 seconds:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config address_binding dhcp snooping recovery_timer 1000
Command: config address_binding dhcp snooping recovery_timer 1000
Success.
459

®
Chapter 43 IP Multicast (IPMC)

Only)
show ipmc {ipif <ipif_name 12> | protocol [inactive | dvmrp | pim]}
show ipmc cache {group <group>} {ipaddress <network_address>}
43-1 show ipmc

Description
This command is used to display the IP Multicast interface table.
Format
show ipmc {ipif <ipif_name 12> | protocol [inactive | dvmrp | pim]}
Parameters
ipif - (Optional) Specify the IP Multicast interface that will be displayed.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP Multicast interface name, that will be displayed, here. This
protocol - (Optional) Specify which kind of routing protocol the interface table will display.
inactive - Specify that the protocol display feature will be inactive
dvmrp - Specify that the DVMRP protocol will be displayed.
pim - Specify that the PIM protocol will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the IP Multicast interface table:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ipmc
Command: show ipmc
Interface Name IP Address Multicast Routing

--------------- --------------- -----------------
System 10.90.90.90 PIM-DM
Total Entries: 1
460

®
43-2 show ipmc cache

Description
This command is used to display the IP multicast forwarding cache.
Format
show ipmc cache {group <group>} {ipaddress <network_address>}
Parameters
group - (Optional) Specify the multicast group.
<group> - Enter the multicast group value here.
ipaddress - (Optional) Specify the network address used here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the IP multicast forwarding cache:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ipmc cache
Command: show ipmc cache
IP Multicast Forwarding Table
Multicast Source Upstream Expire Routing

Group Address/Netmask Neighbor Time Protocol
--------------- ---------------------- --------------- ------ ---------
224.1.1.1 10.48.74.121/8 10.48.75.63 30 DVMRP
224.1.1.1 20.48.74.25/8 20.48.75.25 20 PIM-DM
224.1.2.3 10.48.75.3/8 10.48.76.6 30 DVMRP
Total Entries: 3
461

®
Chapter 44 IP Route Filter Command

List (RI Mode Only)
create ip standard access_list <list_name 16>
config ip standard access_list <list_name 16> [add | delete] <network_address> [deny | permit]
delete ip standard access_list [list_name <list_name 16> | all]
show ip standard access_list {<list_name 16>}
create route_map <map_name 16>
config route_map <map_name 16> [[add | delete] sequence <value 1-65535 > {[deny | permit]} |
sequence <value 1-65535> [match [add | delete] [ip [next_hop | address] <list_name 16> |
metric <uint 0-4294967294> | route_type [internal | external | type_1 | type_2] | interface
<ipif_name 12> | route_source <list_name 16>] | set [add | delete] [next_hop [<ipaddr>] |
metric <uint 0-4294967294> | metric_type [type_1 | type_2]]]]
delete route_map [map_name <map_name 16> {all_seqence} | all]
show route_map {<map_name 16>}
44-1 create ip standard access_list

Description
This command is used to create an access list to filter routes.
Format
create ip standard access_list <list_name 16>
Parameters
<list_name16> - Enter the name of the access list.
Restrictions
Example
To create an access_list named “list1”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create ip standard access_list list1
Command: create ip standard access_list list1
Success.
44-2 config ip standard access_list

Description
This command is used to configure an IP Route access list. It is used to filter the routes.
462

®
Format
config ip standard access_list <list_name 16> [add | delete] <network_address> [deny |
permit]
Parameters
<list_name 16> - Enter the name of the access list.
add - Add the entry to the access list.
delete - Delete the entry from the access list.
<network_address> - Enter the network address as the filter condidtion of the access list.
deny - The network matched will be denied.
permit - The network matched will be permitted.
Restrictions
Example
To add an entry to the access list:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ip standard access_list list1 add 10.10.10.0/24
permit
Command: config ip standard access_list list1 add 10.10.10.0/24 permit
Success.
44-3 delete ip standard access_list

Description
This command is used to delete an access list identified by the access list name.
Format
delete ip standard access_list [list_name <list_name 16> | all]
Parameters
list_name - Specify the name of the access list.
<list_name 16> - Enter the name of the access list.
all - specify to remove all access list.
Restrictions
463

®
Example
To delete an access list named by “list1”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete ip standard access_list list_name list1
Command: delete ip standard access_list list_name list1
Success.
44-4 show ip standard access_list

Description
This command is used to display the information of an access list.
Format
show ip standard access_list {<list_name 16>}
Parameters
<list_name16> - (Optional) Enter the name of the access list.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the information of an access list named “list1”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ip standard access_list list1
Command: show ip standard access_list list1
IP standard Access_list: list1

Total entries number : 1
filter : permit 10.10.10.0/24
44-5 create route_map

Description
This command is used to create a route map.
Format
create route_map <map_name 16>
464

®
Parameters
<map_name 16> - Enter the route map name.
Restrictions
Example
To create a route map named map1:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create route_map map1
Command: create route_map map1
Success.
44-6 config route_map

Description
This command is used to configure the route map. A route map can have multiple rule entries,
each with a different sequence number. When creating a route map, a sequence ID, 10, will be
add to the route map. If the sequence number is not specified, it will be automatically given. The
automatically given sequence number will be multiple of 10. If permit/deny is not specified, permit
is applied.
Format
config route_map <map_name 16> [[add | delete] sequence <value 1-65535 > {[deny |
permit]} | sequence <value 1-65535> [match [add | delete] [ip [next_hop | address]
<list_name 16> | metric <uint 0-4294967294> | route_type [internal | external | type_1 |
type_2] | interface <ipif_name 12> | route_source <list_name 16>] | set [add | delete]
[next_hop [<ipaddr>] | metric <uint 0-4294967294> | metric_type [type_1 | type_2]]]]
Parameters
<map_name 16> - Enter the name of the route map.
add - Add the specified sequence.
delete - Delete the specified sequence.
sequence - Specify the sequence.
<value 1-65535 > - Enter the sequence number for the route map rule.
deny - (Optional) Deny the route if the rule is matched.
permit- (Optional) Permit the route if the rule is matched.
sequence - Specify the sequence.
<value 1-65535> - Enter the sequence number for the route map rule.
match - Specify to configure the macth rules.
add - Add a match rule.
delete - Delete a match rule.
ip - Specify to match IP information.
next_hop - Specify to match the next hop of the routes.
address - Specify to match the routes.
465

®
<list_name 16> - Enter the name of the IP access list.

metric - Specify to match the metric of the routes.
<uint 0-4294967294> - Enter the value of the metric.
route_type - Specify to match the type of the routes.
internal - Specify to match the AS- internal routes.
external - Specify to match the AS-external routes.
type_1 - Specify to match the AS-external type-1 routes.
type_2 - Specify to match the AS-external type-2 routes.
interface - Specify to match the first hop interface of routes.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the name of the interface.
route_source - Specify to match the advertising source address.
<list_name 16> - Enter the IP access-list name.
set - Specify to configure the set rules.
add - Add a set rule.
delete - Delete a set rule.
next_hop - “Specify to set the next hop of the routes.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address of the next hop.
metric - Specify to set the metric of the routes.
<uint 0-4294967294> - Enter the value of the metric.
metric_type - Specify to set the type of metric of the routes.
type_1 - Specify to set the metric of the routes to be the OSPF external type 1
metric.
type_2 - Specify to set the metric of the routes to be the OSPF external type 2
metric.
Restrictions
Example
To add a sequence to the route map:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config route_map map1 add sequence 20
Command: config route_map map1 add sequence 20
Success.
44-7 delete route_map

Description
This command is used to delete a route map configuration
Format
delete route_map [map_name <map_name 16> {all_seqence} | all]
Parameters
map_name - Specify the name of the route map.
<mep_name 16> - Enter the route map name.
all_sequence - (Optional) Specify to remove all sequence entries from the route map. The
466

®
route map still exists.

all – Delete all route maps.
Restrictions
Example
To delete the route map:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete route_map map_name map1
Command: delete route_map map_name map1
Success.
44-8 show route_map

Description
This command is used to display the route map configuration.
Format
show route_map {<map_name 16>}
Parameters
<mep_name 16> - (Optional) Enter the route map name.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the route map:
467

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show route_map
Command: show route_map
route_map : map1
--------------------------
sequence : 10 (Permit)
Match clauses:
Set clauses:
-----------------
sequence : 20 (Permit)
Match clauses:
Set clauses:
Total Route Map Count:1
468

®
Chapter 45 IP Tunnel Command List (RI

Mode Only)
create ip_tunnel <tunnel_name 12>
delete ip_tunnel <tunnel_name 12>
config ip_tunnel manual <tunnel_name 12> {ipv6address <ipv6networkaddr> | source <ipaddr> |
destination <ipaddr>}(1)
config ip_tunnel 6to4 <tunnel_name 12> {ipv6address <ipv6networkaddr> | source <ipaddr>}(1)
config ip_tunnel isatap <tunnel_name 12> {ipv6address <ipv6networkaddr> | source
<ipaddr>}(1)
config ip_tunnel gre <tunnel_name 12> {ipaddress <network_address> | ipv6address
<ipv6networkaddr> | source [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] | destination [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>]}
show ip_tunnel {<tunnel_name 12>}
enable ip_tunnel {<tunnel_name 12>}
disable ip_tunnel {<tunnel_name 12>}
45-1 create ip_tunnel

Description
This command is used to create an IP tunnel interface.
Format
create ip_tunnel <tunnel_name 12>
Parameters
<tunnel_name 12> - Enter the IP tunnel interface name used here. This name can be up to 12
characters long.
Restrictions
Example
To create an IP tunnel interface (with the tunnel name “tn2”):
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create ip_tunnel tn2
Command: create ip_tunnel tn2
Success.
469

®
45-2 delete ip_tunnel

Description
This command is used to delete an IP tunnel interface.
Format
delete ip_tunnel <tunnel_name 12>
Parameters
characters long.
Restrictions
Example
To delete an IP tunnel interface (with the tunnel name “tn2”):
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete ip_tunnel tn2
Command: delete ip_tunnel tn2
Success.
45-3 config ip_tunnel manual

Description
This command is used to configure an IPv6 manual tunnel. If this tunnel has previously been
configured in another mode, the tunnel’s information will still exist in the database. However,
whether the tunnel’s former information is invalid or not, will depend on the current mode.
IPv6 Manual tunnels are simple point-to-point tunnels that can be used within a site or between
sites.
Format
config ip_tunnel manual <tunnel_name 12> {ipv6address <ipv6networkaddr> | source
<ipaddr> | destination <ipaddr>}(1)
Parameters
characters long.
ipv6address - (Optional) Specify the IPv6 address assigned to the IPv6 tunnel interface. IPv6
processing becomes enabled on the IPv6 tunnel interface when an IPv6 address is
configured. The IPv6 address is not connected with the tunnel source or the destination IPv4
470

®
address.
source - (Optional) Specify the source IPv4 address of the IPv6 tunnel interface. It is used as the
source address for packets in the IPv6 tunnel.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IPv4 source address used here.
destination - (Optional) Specify the destination IPv4 address of the IPv6 tunnel interface. It is
used as the destination address for packets in the IPv6 tunnel. It is not required for 6to4 and
ISATAP tunnels.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IPv4 destination address used here.
Restrictions
Example
To configure an IPv6 manual tunnel (Tunnel name is “tn2”, Tunnel source IPv4 address is 1.0.0.1,
Tunnel destination IPv4 address is 1.0.0.2, Tunnel IPv6 address is 2001::1/64):
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config ip_tunnel manual tn2 source 1.0.0.1 destination
1.0.0.2 ipv6address 2001::1/64
Command: config ip_tunnel manual tn2 source 1.0.0.1 destination 1.0.0.2
ipv6address 2001::1/64
Success.
45-4 config ip_tunnel 6to4

Description
This command is used to configure an existing IPv6 tunnel as an IPv6 6to4 tunnel on the switch. If
this tunnel has previously been configured in another mode, the tunnel’s information will still exist
in the database. However, whether the tunnel’s former information is invalid or not will depend on
the current mode. A maximum of one IPv6 6to4 tunnel can exist on the system.
IPv6 6to4 tunnels are point-to-multipoint tunnels that can be used to connect isolated IPv6 sites.
Each IPv6 site has at least one connection to a shared IPv4 network and this IPv4 network could
be the global Internet or a corporate backbone. The key requirement is that each site has a
globally unique IPv4 address, which is used to construct a 48-bit globally unique 6to4 IPv6 prefix
(starting with the prefix 2002::/16).
Format
config ip_tunnel 6to4 <tunnel_name 12> {ipv6address <ipv6networkaddr> | source
<ipaddr>}(1)
Parameters
characters long.
ipv6address - (Optional) Specify the IPv6 address assigned to this IPv6 tunnel interface. IPv6
processing will be enabled on this IPv6 tunnel interface as soon as its IPv6 address is
471

®
configured. The 32 bits following the initial 2002::/16 prefix correspond to an IPv4 address
assigned to the tunnel source.
source - (Optional) Specify the IPv4 source address for a packet sent to the remote end of the
6to4 tunnel. The IPv4 destination address for the packet is derived from the IPv6 destination
address of the remote destination, which is in the format of a 6to4 address. The address is
derived by extracting the 4-octets immediately following the IPv6 destination address's
2002::/16 prefix. For example, a 6to4 address, 2002:c0a8:0001::/48 will be extracted to
192.168.0.1. Any IPv6 address that begins with the 2002::/16 prefix is known as a 6to4
address
<ipaddr> - Enter the IPv4 source address used here.
Restrictions
Example
To configure an IPv6 6to4 tunnel (Tunnel name is “tn2”, Tunnel source IPv4 address is 10.0.0.1,
Tunnel IPv6 address is 2002:a00:1::1/64):
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ip_tunnel 6to4 tn2 ipv6address 2002:A00:1::1/64
source 10.0.0.1
Command: config ip_tunnel 6to4 tn2 ipv6address 2002:A00:1::1/64 source 10.0.0.1
Success.
45-5 config ip_tunnel isatap

Description
This command is used to configure an existing IPv6 tunnel as an IPv6 ISATAP tunnel on the
switch. If this tunnel has previously been configured in another mode, the tunnel’s information will
still exist in the database. However, whether the tunnel’s former information is valid or not will
depend on the current mode. IPv6 ISATAP tunnels are point-to-multipoint tunnels that can be used
to connect systems within a site. An IPv6 ISATAP address is a well-defined unicast address that
includes a 64-bit unicast IPv6 prefix (it can be either link-local or global prefixes), a 32-bit value
0000:5EFE/0200:5EFE and a 32-bit tunnel source IPv4 address.
Format
config ip_tunnel isatap <tunnel_name 12> {ipv6address <ipv6networkaddr> | source
<ipaddr>}(1)
Parameters
characters long.
ipv6address - (Optional) Specify the IPv6 address assigned to this IPv6 tunnel interface. IPv6
processing will be enabled on the IPv6 tunnel interface when an IPv6 address is configured.
The last 32 bits of the IPv6 ISATAP address correspond to an IPv4 address assigned to the
tunnel source.
472

®

source - (Optional) Specify the source IPv4 address of this IPv6 tunnel interface. It is used as the
source address for packets in the IPv6 tunnel. The tunnel destination IPv4 address is
extracted from the last 32 bits of the remote tunnel endpoint’s IPv6 ISATAP address.
<ipaddr> - Enter the source IPv4 address used here.
Restrictions
Example
To configure an IPv6 ISATAP tunnel (Tunnel name is “tn2”, Tunnel source IPv4 address is
10.0.0.1, Tunnel IPv6 address is 2001::5efe:a00:1/64):
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ip_tunnel isatap tn2 ipv6address 2001::5EFE:A00:1/64
source 10.0.0.1
Command: config ip_tunnel isatap tn2 ipv6address 2001::5EFE:A00:1/64 source
10.0.0.1
Success.
45-6 config ip_tunnel gre

Description
This command is used to configure an existing tunnel as a GRE tunnel on the Switch. If this tunnel
has been configured in another mode before, the tunnel’s information will still exist in the database.
However, whether the tunnel’s former information is valid or not, depends on the current mode.
GRE tunnels are simple point-to-point tunnels that can be used within a site or between sites.
Format
config ip_tunnel gre <tunnel_name 12> {ipaddress <network_address> | ipv6address
<ipv6networkaddr> | source [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] | destination [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>]}(1)
Parameters
characters long.
ipaddress - (Optional) Specify the IPv4 address assigned to the GRE tunnel interface. IPv4
This IPv4 address is not connected with the tunnel source or destination IPv4 address.
<network_address> - Enter the IPv4 network address.
ipv6address - (Optional) Specify the IPv6 address assigned to the GRE tunnel interface. IPv6
This IPv6 address is not connected with the tunnel source or destination IPv4 address.
<ipv6networkaddr> - Enter the IPv6 network address.
source - (Optional) Specify the source address of the GRE tunnel interface. It is used as the
source address for packets in the tunnel.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IPv4 source address.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 source address.
473

®
destination - (Optional) Specify the destination address of the GRE tunnel interface. It is used as
the destination address for packets in the tunnel.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IPv4 destination address.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 destination address.
Restrictions
Example
To configure a GRE tunnel (tunnel with: the name “tn1”, the delivery protocol as IPv4, the tunnel
source IPv4 address 1.0.0.1, the tunnel destination IPv4 address 1.0.0.2, the GRE tunnel
interface’s IPv6 address 2001::1/64, and the GRE tunnel interface’s IPv4 address 2.0.0.1/8):
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ip_tunnel gre tn1 source 1.0.0.1 destination 1.0.0.2
Command: config ip_tunnel gre tn1 source 1.0.0.1 destination 1.0.0.2
Success.
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ip_tunnel gre tn1 ipaddress 2.0.0.1/8 ipv6address

2000::1/64
Command: config ip_tunnel gre tn1 ipaddress 2.0.0.1/8 ipv6address 2000::1/64
Success.
To display the configuration of a GRE tunnel interface named “tn1”:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ip_tunnel tn1
Command: show ip_tunnel tn1
Tunnel Interface : tn1

Tunnel Mode : GRE
IPv4 Address : 2.0.0.1/8
IPv6 Global Unicast Address : 2000::1/64
Tunnel Source : 1.0.0.1
Tunnel Destination : 1.0.0.2
45-7 show ip_tunnel

Description
This command is used to show one or all IP tunnel interfaces’ information.
Format
show ip_tunnel {<tunnel_name 12>}
474

®
Parameters
<tunnel_name 12> - (Optional) Enter the IP tunnel interface name used here. This name can be
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show an IP tunnel interface’s information (Tunnel name is “tn2”):
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ip_tunnel tn2
Command: show ip_tunnel tn2
Tunnel Interface : tn2

Tunnel Mode : ISATAP
IPv6 Link-Local Address : FE80::5EFE:A00:1/128
IPv6 Global Unicast Address : 2001::5EFE:A00:1/64
Tunnel Source : 10.0.0.1
Tunnel Destination : Unknown
45-8 enable ip_tunnel

Description
This command is used to enable a single specified IP tunnel or all IP tunnels on the Switch.
Format
enable ip_tunnel {<tunnel_name 12>}
Parameters
Restrictions
Example
To enable an IP tunnel interface (Tunnel name is “tn2”):
475

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable ip_tunnel tn2

Command: enable ip_tunnel tn2
Success.
45-9 disable ip_tunnel

Description
This command is used to disable a single specified IP tunnel or all IP tunnels on the Switch.
Format
disable ip_tunnel {<tunnel_name 12>}
Parameters
Restrictions
Example
To disable an IP tunnel interface (Tunnel name is “tn2”):
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable ip_tunnel tn2
Command: disable ip_tunnel tn2
Success.
476

®
Chapter 46 IPv6 Neighbor Discover

Command List
create ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif <ipif_name 12> <ipv6addr> <macaddr>
delete ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all] [<ipv6addr> | static | dynamic | all]
show ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all] [ipv6address <ipv6addr> | static | dynamic |
all]
config ipv6 nd ns ipif <ipif_name 12> retrans_time <millisecond 0-4294967295>
show ipv6 nd {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
config ipv6 nd ra ipif <ipif_name 12> {state [enable | disable] | life_time <sec 0-9000> |
reachable_time <millisecond 0-3600000> | retrans_time <millisecond 0-4294967295> |
hop_limit <value 0-255> | managed_flag [enable | disable] | other_config_flag [enable |
disable] | min_rtr_adv_interval <sec 3-1350> | max_rtr_adv_interval <sec 4-1800>}(1)
config ipv6 nd ra prefix_option ipif <ipif_name 12> <ipv6networkaddr> {preferred_life_time <sec
0-4294967295> | valid_life_time <sec 0-4294967295> | on_link_flag [enable | disable] |
autonomous_flag [enable | disable]}(1)
46-1 create ipv6 neighbor_cache

Description
This command is used to add a static neighbor on an IPv6 interface.
Format
create ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif <ipif_name 12> <ipv6addr> <macaddr>
Parameters
ipif - Specify the interface’s name.
long.
<ipv6addr> - The address of the neighbor.
<macaddr> - The MAC address of the neighbor.
Restrictions
Example
Create a static neighbor cache entry:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif System 3ffc::1 00-01-02-
03-04-05
Command: create ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif System 3ffc::1 00-01-02-03-04-05
Success.
477

®
46-2 delete ipv6 neighbor_cache

Description
This command is used to delete a neighbor cache entry or static neighbor cache entries from the
address cache or all address cache entries on this IP interface. Both static and dynamic entries
can be deleted.
Format
delete ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all] [<ipv6addr> | static | dynamic | all]
Parameters
ipif - Specify the IPv6 interface name.
long.
all - Specify that all the interfaces will be used in this configuration.
<ipv6addr> - The neighbor’s address.
static - Delete the static entry.
dynamic - Delete those dynamic entries.
all - All entries include static and dynamic entries will be deleted.
Restrictions
Example
Delete a neighbor cache.entry on IP interface “System”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif System 3ffc::1
Command: delete ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif System 3FFC::1
Success.
46-3 show ipv6 neighbor_cache

Description
This command is used to display the neighbor cache entry for the specified interface. You can
display a specific entry, all entries, or all static entries.
Format
show ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all] [ipv6address <ipv6addr> | static |
dynamic | all]
478

®
Parameters
ipif - Specify the IPv6 interface name
long.
all - Specify that all the interface will be displayed.
ipv6address - The neighbor’s address.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address here.
static - Static neighbor cache entry.
dynamic - Dynamic entries.
all - All entries include static and dynamic entries.
Restrictions
None
Example
Show all neighbor cache entries of IP interface “System”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif System all
Command: show ipv6 neighbor_cache ipif System all
3FFC::1 State: Static

MAC Address : 00-01-02-03-04-05 Port : NA
Interface : System VID : 1
Total Entries: 1
46-4 config ipv6 nd ns retrans_time

Description
This command is used to configure the IPv6 ND neighbor solicitation retransmit time, which is
between retransmissions of neighbor solicitation messages to a neighbor when resolving the
address or when probing the reachability of a neighbor.
Format
config ipv6 nd ns ipif <ipif_name 12> retrans_time <millisecond 0-4294967295>
Parameters
ipif - The IPv6 interface name
long.
retrans_time - Neighbor solicitation’s re-transmit timer in millisecond.
<millisecond 0-4294967295> - Enter the re-transmit timer value here. This value must be
between 0 and 4294967295 milliseconds.
479

®
Restrictions
Example
To configure the retrans_time of IPv6 ND neighbor solicitation:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config ipv6 nd ns ipif Zira retrans_time 1000000
Command: config ipv6 nd ns ipif Zira retrans_time 1000000
Success.
46-5 show ipv6 nd

Description
This command is used to display information regarding neighbor detection on the Switch.
Format
show ipv6 nd {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
Parameters
ipif – (Optional) The name of the interface.
long.
If no IP interface is specified, it will show the IPv6 ND related configuration of all interfaces.
Restrictions
Example
To show IPv6 ND related configuration:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ipv6 nd ipif System
Command: show ipv6 nd ipif System
Interface Name : System

NS Retransmit Time : 0 (ms)
46-6 config ipv6 nd ra ipif

Description
This command is used to configure the RA parameters of a specified interface.
480

®
Format
config ipv6 nd ra ipif <ipif_name 12> {state [enable | disable] | life_time <sec 0-9000> |
reachable_time <millisecond 0-3600000> | retrans_time <millisecond 0-4294967295> |
hop_limit <value 0-255> | managed_flag [enable | disable] | other_config_flag [enable |
disable] | min_rtr_adv_interval <sec 3-1350> | max_rtr_adv_interval <sec 4-1800>}(1)
Parameters
<ipif_name 12> - Specify the name of the interface.
state - Specify the router advertisement status.
enable - Enable the router advertisement state.
disable - Disable the router advertisement state.
life_time - Specify the lifetime of the router as the default router, in seconds.
reachable_time - Specify the amount of time that a node can consider a neighboring node
reachable after receiving a reachability confirmation, in milliseconds.
<millisecond 0-3600000> - Specify the time between 0 and 3600000 milliseconds.
retrans_time - Specify the amount of time that a node can consider a neighboring node
reachable after receiving a reachability confirmation, in milliseconds.
<millisecond 0-4294967295> - Specify the time between 0 and 4294967295 milliseconds.
hop_limit - Specify the default value of the hop limit field in the IPv6 header for packets sent by
hosts that receive this RA message.
<value 0-255> - Specify the value between 0 and 255.
managed_flag - Specify to enable or disable the function.
enable - When set to enable, it indicates that hosts receiving this RA must use a stateful
address configuration protocol to obtain an address, in addition to the addresses derived
from the stateless address configuration.
disable - Set to disable to stop hosts receiving the RA from using a stateful address
configuration to obtain an address.
other_config_flag - Specify to enable or disable the function.
enable - When set to enable, it indicates that hosts receiving this RA must use a stateful
address configuration protocol to obtain on-address configuration information.
disable - Set to disable to stop hosts receiving this RA from using a stateful address
configuration protocol to obtain on-address configuration information.
min_rtr_adv_interval - Specify the minimum time allowed between sending unsolicited multicast
Router Advertisements from the interface, in seconds. It must be no less than 3 seconds and
no greater than .75 * MaxRtrAdvInterval. The default is 0.33 * MaxRtrAdvInterval.
max_rtr_adv_interval - Specify the maximum time allowed between sending unsolicited
multicast Router Advertisements from the interface, in seconds. It must be no less than 4
seconds and no greater than 1800 seconds. The default is 600 seconds.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the RA state as enabled and the life_time of the “System” interface to be 1000
seconds:
481

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ipv6 nd ra ipif System state enable life_time 1000

Command: config ipv6 nd ra ipif System state enable life_time 1000
Success.
46-7 config ipv6 nd ra prefix_option ipif

Description
This command is used to configure the prefix option for the router advertisement function.
Format
config ipv6 nd ra prefix_option ipif <ipif_name 12> <ipv6networkaddr> {preferred_life_time
<sec 0-4294967295> | valid_life_time <sec 0-4294967295> | on_link_flag [enable | disable] |
autonomous_flag [enable | disable]}(1)
Parameters
<ipif_name 12> - Specify the name of the interface. The maximum length is 12 characters.
<ipv6networkaddr> - Specify the IPv6 network address.
preferred_life_time - Specify the number in milliseconds that an address, based on the specified
prefix using the stateless address configuration, remains in preferred state.
<sec 0-4294967295> - Specify the time between 0 and 4294967295 milliseconds. For an
infinite valid lifetime the value can be set to 4294967295.
valid_life_time - Specify the number of seconds that an address, based on the specified prefix,
using the stateless address configuration, remains valid.
<sec 0-4294967295> - Specify the time between 0 and 4294967295 milliseconds. For an
infinite valid lifetime the value can be set to 4294967295.
on_link_flag - Specify to enable or disable the function.
enable - Setting this field to enable will denote, within the IPv6 packet, that the IPv6 prefix
configured here is assigned to this link-local network. Once traffic has been successfully
sent to these nodes with this specific IPv6 prefix, the nodes will be considered reachable
on the link-local network.
disable - When set to disable, the addresses implied by the specified prefix are not available
on the link where the RA message is received.
autonomous_flag - Specify to enable or disable the function.
enable - Setting this field to enable will denote that this prefix may be used to autoconfigure
IPv6 addresses on the link-local network.
disable - When set to disable, the specified prefix will not be used to create an autonomous
address configuration.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the value of the preferred_life_time of prefix option to be 1000 seconds for the prefix
3ffe:501:ffff:100::/64, which is the prefix of the ip1 interface:
482

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ipv6 nd ra prefix_option ipif ip1

3ffe:501:ffff:100::/64 preferred_life_time 1000
Command: config ipv6 nd ra prefix_option ipif ip1 3ffe:501:ffff:100::/64
preferred_life_time 1000
Success.
483

®
Chapter 47 IPv6 Route Command List

create ipv6route [default | <ipv6networkaddr>] [[<ipif_name 12> <ipv6addr> | <ipv6addr>]
{<metric 1-65535>} {[primary|backup]} | ip_tunnel <tunnel_name 12>]
delete ipv6route [[default | <ipv6networkaddr>] [<ipif_name 12> <ipv6addr> | <ipv6addr> |
ip_tunnel <tunnel_name 12>] | all]
show ipv6route {[<ipv6networkaddr> | <ipv6addr>]} {[static | ripng | ospfv3 | hardware]
47-1 create ipv6route

Description
This command is used to create an IPv6 static route. If the next hop is a global address, it is not
needed to indicate the interface name. If the next hop is a link local address, then the interface
name must be specified.
Format
create ipv6route [default | <ipv6networkaddr>] [[<ipif_name 12> <ipv6addr> | <ipv6addr>]
{<metric 1-65535>} {[primary|backup]} | ip_tunnel <tunnel_name 12>]
Parameters
default - Specify the default route.
<ipv6networkaddr> - Specify the destination network of the route.
<ipif_name 12> - Specify the interface for the route. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
<ipv6addr> - Specify the next hop address for this route.
<ipv6addr> - Specify the next hop address for this route.
<metric 1-65535> - (Optional) Enter the metric value here. The default setting is 1. This value
primary - (Optional) Specify the route as the primary route to the destination.
backup - (Optional) Specify the route as the backup route to the destination. The backup route
can only be added when the primary route exists. If the route is not specified as the primary
route or the backup route, then it will be auto-assigned by the system. The first created is the
primary, the second created is the backup.
ip_tunnel - Specify the IP tunnel interface of the route.
<tunnel_name 12> - Enter the IP tunnel interface name.
Restrictions
Example
To create an IPv6 route:
484

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create ipv6route default System 3FFC::1 1 primary

Command: create ipv6route default System 3FFC::1 1 primary
Success.
47-2 delete ipv6route

Description
This command is used to delete an IPv6 static route. If the next hop is a global address, it is not
needed to indicate the interface name. If the next hop is a link local address, then the interface
name must be specified.
Format
delete ipv6route [[default | <ipv6networkaddr>] [<ipif_name 12> <ipv6addr> | <ipv6addr> |
ip_tunnel <tunnel_name 12>] | all]
Parameters
default - Specify the default route.
<ipv6networkaddr> - The destination network of the route.
long.
<ipv6addr> - Specify the next hop address for the route.
<ipv6addr> - Specify the next hop address for the route.
ip_tunnel - Specify the IP tunnel interface of the route.
all - Specify to delete all created static routes.
Restrictions
Example
Delete an IPv6 static route:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete ipv6route default System 3FFC::1
Command: delete ipv6route default System 3FFC::1
Success.
47-3 show ipv6route

Description
This command is used to display IPv6 routes.
485

®
Format
show ipv6route {[<ipv6networkaddr> | <ipv6addr>]} {[static | ripng | ospfv3 | hardware]
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
<ipv6networkaddr> - (Optional) The destination network of the route.
<ipv6addr> - (Optional) Specify the destination 128-bit length IPv6 address to be displayed.
static - (Optional) Specify to display only the static route entries.
ripng - (Optional) Specify to display only the RIPng route entries.
ospfv3 - (Optional) Specify to display only the OSPFv3 route entries.
hardware - (Optional) Specify to display only the route entries which have been wrote into
hardware table.
Example
Show all the IPv6 routes:
DGS-3120-24PC:admin#show ipv6route
Command: show ipv6route
IPv6 Prefix: 1111:1111::/64 Protocol: Local Metric: 1

Next Hop : :: IPIF : System
IPv6 Prefix: 2103::/64 Protocol: Local Metric: 1

Next Hop : :: IPIF : i6



Total Entries: 5
486

®
Chapter 48 Japanese Web-Based

Access Control (JWAC)
Command List
enable jwac
disable jwac
config jwac [quarantine_server_url [<string 128> | ipv6 <string 128>] |
clear_quarantine_server_url {ipv6}]
show jwac
enable jwac redirect
disable jwac redirect
config jwac redirect {destination [quarantine_server | jwac_login_page] | delay_time <sec 0-
10>}(1)
enable jwac forcible_logout
disable jwac forcible_logout
enable jwac udp_filtering
disable jwac udp_filtering
enable jwac quarantine_server_monitor
disable jwac quarantine_server_monitor
config jwac quarantine_server_error_timeout <sec 5-300>
config jwac virtual_ip [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] {url [<string 128> | clear]}
config jwac update_server [add | delete] [ipaddress <network_address> | ipv6address
<ipv6networkaddr>] {[tcp_port <port_number 1-65535> | udp_port <port_number 1-65535>]}
config jwac switch_http_port <tcp_port_number 1-65535> {[http | https]}
config jwac ports [<portlist> | all] { state [enable | disable] | max_authenticating_host <value 0-
50> | aging_time [infinite | <min 1-1440>] | idle_time [infinite | <min 1-1440>] | block_time
[<sec 0-300>]}(1)
show jwac ports {<portlist>}
config jwac radius_protocol [local | eap_md5 | pap | chap | ms_chap | ms_chapv2]
create jwac user <username 15> {vlan <vlanid 1-4094>}
config jwac user <username 15> {vlan <vlanid 1-4094>}
delete jwac [user <username 15> | all_users]
show jwac user
clear jwac auth_state [ports [all | <portlist>] {authenticated | authenticating | blocked} | mac_addr
<macaddr>]
show jwac auth_state ports {<portlist>}
config jwac authorization attributes {radius [enable | disable] | local [enable | disable]}(1)
show jwac update_server
config jwac authentication_page element [japanese | english] [default | page_title <desc 128> |
login_window_title <desc 32> | user_name_title <desc 16> | password_title <desc 16> |
logout_window_title <desc 32> | notification_line <value 1-5> <desc 128>]
config jwac authenticate_page [japanese | english]
show jwac authenticate_page
48-1 enable jwac

Description
This command is used to enable the Japanese Web-based access control (JWAC) function. JWAC
and WAC are mutually exclusive functions. That is, they can not be enabled at the same time.
487

®
Using the JWAC function, PC users need to pass two stages of authentication. The first stage is to
do the authentication with the quarantine server and the second stage is the authentication with
the Switch. For the second stage, the authentication is similar to WAC, except that there is no port
VLAN membership change by JWAC after a host passes authentication. The RADIUS server will
share the server configuration defined by the 802.1X command set.
Format
enable jwac
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable JWAC:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable jwac
Command: enable jwac
Success.
48-2 disable jwac

Description
This command is used to disable JWAC.
Format
disable jwac
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
488

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable jwac
Command: disable jwac
Success.
48-3 config jwac

Description
This command is used to configure the quarantine server URL. If the redirection is enabled and the
redirection destination is a quarantine server, when a HTTP request from an unauthenticated host
which is not headed to a quarantine server reaches the Switch, the Switch will handle this HTTP
packet and send back a message to the host to make it access the quarantine server with the
configured URL. When the PC connected to the specified URL, the quarantine server will request
the PC user to input the user name and password to authenticate.
Note: If the quarantine server is linked to the JWAC enabled port on the Switch, it must be added
to the static FDB correctly before it can work properly.
Format
config jwac [quarantine_server_url [<string 128> | ipv6 <string 128>] |
clear_quarantine_server_url {ipv6}]
Parameters
quarantine_server_url - Specify the entire URL of the authentication page on the quarantine
server.
<string 128> - Specify the entire URL of the authentication page on the quarantine server.
The quarantine server URL can be up to 128 characters long.
ipv6 - Specify the entire URL of authentication page on Quarantine Server of IPv6. (EI Mode
Only)
<string 128> - The quarantine server URL can be up to 128 characters long.
clear_quarantine_server_url - Specify to clear the current quarantine server URL.
ipv6 – (Optional) Clear the Quarantine Server URL of IPv6. (EI Mode Only)
Restrictions
Example
To configure the quarantine server URL:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config jwac quarantine_server_url
http://10.90.90.88/authpage.html
Command: config jwac quarantine_server_url http://10.90.90.88/authpage.html
Success.
489

®
48-4 show jwac

Description
This command is used to display the JWAC configuration settings.
Format
show jwac
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the current JWAC configuration:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show jwac
Command: show jwac
State : Disabled
Enabled Ports :
Virtual IP/URL : 0.0.0.0/-
Virtual IPv6/URL : ::/-
Switch HTTP Port : 80 (HTTP)
UDP Filtering : Enabled
Forcible Logout : Enabled
Redirect State : Enabled
Redirect Delay Time : 1 Seconds
Redirect Destination : Quarantine Server
Quarantine Server :
Quarantine Server IPv6 :
Q-Server Monitor : Disabled
Q-Server Error Timeout : 30 Seconds
RADIUS Auth-Protocol : PAP
RADIUS Authorization : Enabled
Local Authorization : Enabled
Function Version : 2.11
48-5 enable jwac redirect

Description
This command is used to enable JWAC redirect. When redirect quarantine_server is enabled,
the unauthenticated host will be redirected to a quarantine server when it tries to access a random
490

®
URL. When redirect jwac_login_page is enabled, the unauthenticated host will be redirected to
the jwac_login_page on the Switch to finish authentication.
When enable redirect to quarantine server is in effect, a quarantine server must be configured first.
Format
enable jwac redirect
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable jwac redirect

Command: enable jwac redirect
Success.
48-6 disable jwac redirect

Description
This command is used to disable JWAC redirect. When redirect is disabled, only access to
quarantine_server and the jwac_login_page from an unauthenticated host is allowed, all other
Web access will be denied.
Format
disable jwac redirect
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable JWAC redirect:
491

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable jwac redirect

Command: disable jwac redirect
Success.
48-7 config jwac redirect

Description
This command is used to configure redirect destination and delay time before an unauthenticated
host is redirected to the quarantine server or the JWAC login web page. The unit of delay time is
seconds. 0 means no delaying the redirect.
Format
config jwac redirect {destination [quarantine_server | jwac_login_page] | delay_time <sec 0-
10>}(1)
Parameters
destination - Specify the destination which the unauthenticated host will be redirected to.
quarantine_server - Specify the unauthenticated host will be redirected to the
quarantine_server.
jwac_login_page - Specify the unauthenticated host will be redirected to the
jwac_login_page.
delay_time - Specify the time interval after which the unauthenticated host will be redirected.
<sec 0-10> - Specify the time interval after which the unauthenticated host will be redirected.
The delay time must be between 0 and 10 seconds.
Restrictions
Example
To configure JWAC redirect destination to JWAC login web page and a delay time of 5 seconds:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config jwac redirect destination jwac_login_page delay_time
5
Command: config jwac redirect destination jwac_login_page delay_time 5
Success.
48-8 enable jwac forcible_logout

Description
This command is used to enable JWAC forcible logout. When enabled, a Ping packet from an
authenticated host to the JWAC Switch with TTL=1 will be regarded as a logout request, and the
host will be moved back to unauthenticated state.
492

®
Format
enable jwac forcible_logout
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable JWAC forcible logout:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable jwac forcible_logout
Command: enable jwac forcible_logout
Success.
48-9 disable jwac forcible_logout

Description
This command is used to disable JWAC forcible logout.
Format
disable jwac forcible_logout
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable JWAC forcible logout:
493

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable jwac forcible_logout

Command: disable jwac forcible_logout
Success.
48-10 enable jwac udp_filtering

Description
This command is used to enable the JWAC UDP filtering function. When UDP filtering is enabled,
all UDP and ICMP packets except DHCP and DNS packets from unauthenticated hosts will be
dropped.enable jwac udp_filtering
Format
enable jwac udp_filtering
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable JWAC UDP filtering:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable jwac udp_filtering
Command: enable jwac udp_filtering
Success.
48-11 disable jwac udp_filtering

Description
This command is used to disable JWAC UDP filtering.
Format
disable jwac udp_filtering
Parameters
None.
494

®
Restrictions
Example
To disable JWAC UDP filtering:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable jwac udp_filtering
Command: disable jwac udp_filtering
Success.
48-12 enable jwac quarantine_server_monitor

Description
This command is used to enable the JWAC quarantine server monitor. When enabled, the JWAC
switch will monitor the quarantine server to ensure the server is okay. If the Switch detects no
quarantine server, it will redirect all unauthenticated HTTP accesses to the JWAC Login Page
forcibly if the redirect is enabled and the redirect destination is configured to be quarantine server.
Format
enable jwac quarantine_server_monitor
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable JWAC quarantine server monitoring:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable jwac quarantine_server_monitor
Command: enable jwac quarantine_server_monitor
Success.
495

®
48-13 disable jwac quarantine_server_monitor

Description
This command is used to disable JWAC quarantine server monitoring.
Format
disable jwac quarantine_server_monitor
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable JWAC quarantine server monitoring:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable jwac quarantine_server_monitor
Command: disable jwac quarantine_server_monitor
Success.
48-14 config jwac quarantine_server_error_timeout

Description
This command is used to set the quarantine server error timeout. When the quarantine server
monitor is enabled, the JWAC switch will periodically check if the quarantine works okay. If the
Switch does not receive any response from quarantine server during the configured error timeout,
the Switch then regards it as not working properly.
Format
config jwac quarantine_server_error_timeout <sec 5-300>
Parameters
<sec 5-300> - Specify the error timeout interval.
Restrictions
496

®
Example
To set the quarantine server error timeout:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config jwac quarantine_server_error_timeout 60
Command: config jwac quarantine_server_error_timeout 60
Success.
48-15 config jwac virtual_ip

Description
This command is used to configure JWAC virtual IP addresses used to accept authentication
requests from an unauthenticated host. The virtual IP of JWAC is used to accept authentication
request from unauthenticated host. Only requests sent to this IP will get correct responses. This IP
does not respond to ARP requests or ICMP packets.
Format
config jwac virtual_ip [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] {url [<string 128> | clear]}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Specify the IP address of the virtual IP.
<ipv6addr> - Specify the Ipv6 address of the virtual IP. (EI Mode Only)
url - (Optional) Specify the URL of the virtual IP.
<string 128> - Specify the URL of the virtual IP.
clear - Clear the URL of the virtual IP.
Restrictions
Example
To configure a JWAC virtual IP address of 1.1.1.1 to accept authentication requests from an
unauthenticated host:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config jwac virtual_ip 1.1.1.1
Command: config jwac virtual_ip 1.1.1.1
Success.
48-16 config jwac update_server

Description
This command is used to add or delete a server network address to which the traffic from an
unauthenticated client host will not be blocked by the JWAC Switch. Any servers running ActiveX
497

®
need to be able to have access to accomplish authentication. Before the client passes
authentication, it should be added to the Switch with its IP address. For example, the client may
need to access update.microsoft.com or some sites of the Anti-Virus software companies to check
whether the OS or Anti-Virus software of the client are the latest; and so IP addresses of
update.microsoft.com and of Anti-Virus software companies need to be added in the Switch.
Format
config jwac update_server [add | delete] [ipaddress <network_address> | ipv6address
<ipv6networkaddr>] {[tcp_port <port_number 1-65535> | udp_port <port_number 1-65535>]}
Parameters
add - Specify to add a network address to which the traffic will not be blocked. Up to 100 network
addresses can be added.
delete - Specify to delete a network address to which the traffic will not be blocked.
ipaddress - Specify the network address to add or delete.
<network_address> - Enter the network address here.
ipv6address - Specify the IPv6 network address for the update server network. (EI Mode Only)
<ipv6networkaddr> - To set a specific IPv6 network address, use “/” to separate the IPv6
address and the number of network mask bits. If TCP port or UDP port number is not
specified, all TCP/UDP ports are accessible.
tcp_port - (Optional) Specify a TCP port number between 1 and 65535.
<port_number 1-65535> - Specify a TCP port value between 1 and 65535.
udp_port - (Optional) Specify a UDP port number between 1 and 65535.
<port_number 1-65535> - Specify a UDP port value between 1 and 65535.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the update servers:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config jwac update_server add ipv6address 3000::1/32
Command: config jwac update_server add ipv6address 3000::1/32
Update Server 3000::/32 is added.
Success.
48-17 config jwac switch_http_port

Description
This command is used to configure the TCP port which the JWAC switch listens to. This port
number is used in the second stage of the authentication. PC users will connect to the page on the
Switch to input the user name and password. If not specified, the default port number is 80. If no
protocol is specified, the protocol is HTTP.
HTTP cannot run on TCP port 443, and HTTPS cannot run on TCP port 80.
498

®
Format
config jwac switch_http_port <tcp_port_number 1-65535> {[http | https]}
Parameters
<tcp_port_number 1-65535> - Specify a TCP port which the JWAC switch listens to and uses to
finish the authenticating process.
http - (Optional) Specify the JWAC run HTTP protocol on this TCP port.
https - (Optional) Specify the JWAC run HTTPS protocol on this TCP port.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the TCP port which the JWAC switch listens to:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config jwac switch_http_port 8888 http
Command: config jwac switch_http_port 8888 http
Success.
48-18 config jwac ports

Description
This command is used to configure port state of JWAC.
Format
config jwac ports [<portlist> | all] { state [enable | disable] | max_authenticating_host <value
0-50> | aging_time [infinite | <min 1-1440>] | idle_time [infinite | <min 1-1440>] | block_time
[<sec 0-300>]}(1)
Parameters
<portlist> - Specify a port range for setting the JWAC state.
all - Specify to configure all switch ports’ JWAC state.
state - Specify the port state of JWAC.
enable - Specify to enable the JWAC port state.
disable - Specify to disable the JWAC port state.
max_authenticating_host - Specify the maximum number of hosts that can process
authentication on each port at the same time. The default value is 50.
<value 0-50> - Specify the maximum number of authenticating hosts, between 0 and 50.
aging_time - Specify a time period during which an authenticated host will keep in authenticated
state.
infinite - Specify to indicate the authenticated host on the port will never ageout.
<min 1-1440> - Specify an aging time between 1 and 1440 minutes. The default value is 1440
minutes.
idle_time - If there is no traffic during idle time, the host will be moved back to unauthenticated
499

®
state.
infinite - Specify to indicate the idle state of the authenticated host on the port will never be
checked. The default value is infinite.
<min 1-1440> - Specify an idle time between 1 and 1440 minutes.
block_time - If a host fails to pass the authentication, it will be blocked for a period specified by
the blocking time.The default value is 60 seconds.
<sec 0-300> - Specify a blocking time value between 0 and 300.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the JWAC port state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config jwac ports 1-9 state enable
Command: config jwac ports 1-9 state enable
Success.
48-19 show jwac ports

Description
This command is used to display the port configuration of JWAC.
Format
show jwac ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Specify a port range to show the configuration of JWAC.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display JWAC ports 1 to 4:
500

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show jwac ports 1-4

Command: show jwac ports 1:1-1:4
Port State Aging Time Idle Time Block Time Max

(min) (min) (sec) Hosts
----- -------- ---------- --------- ---------- -----
1:1 Disabled 1440 Infinite 60 50
48-20 config jwac radius_protocol

Description
This command is used to specify the RADIUS protocol used by JWAC to complete RADIUS
authentication.
JWAC shares other RADIUS configurations with 802.1X. When using this command to set the
RADIUS protocol, make sure the RADIUS server added by the config radius command supports
the protocol.
Format
config jwac radius_protocol [local | eap_md5 | pap | chap | ms_chap | ms_chapv2]
Parameters
local - Specify the JWAC switch uses the local user DB to complete the authentication.
eap_md5 - Specify the JWAC switch uses EAP MD5 to communicate with the RADIUS server.
pap - Specify the JWAC switch uses PAP to communicate with the RADIUS server.
chap - Specify the JWAC switch uses CHAP to communicate with the RADIUS server.
ms_chap - Specify the JWAC switch uses MS-CHAP to communicate with the RADIUS server.
ms_chapv2 - Specify the JWAC switch uses MS-CHAPv2 to communicate with the RADIUS
server.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the RADIUS protocol used by JWAC:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config jwac radius_protocol ms_chapv2
Command: config jwac radius_protocol ms_chapv2
Success.
501

®
48-21 create jwac user

Description
This command is used to create JWAC users in the local database. When “local” is chosen while
configuring the JWAC RADIUS protocol, the local database will be used.
Format
create jwac user <username 15> {vlan <vlanid 1-4094>}
Parameters
<username 15> - Specify the user name to be created.
vlan - (Optional) Specify the target VLAN ID for the authenticated host which uses this user
account to pass authentication.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Specify the target VLAN ID for the authenticated host which uses this user
account to pass authentication. The VLAN ID value must be between 1 and 4094.
Restrictions
Example
To create a JWAC user in the local database:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create jwac user 112233
Command: create jwac user 112233
Enter a case-sensitive new password:*****

Enter the new password again for confirmation:*****
Success.
48-22 config jwac user

Description
This command is used to configure a JWAC user.
Format
config jwac user <username 15> {vlan <vlanid 1-4094>}
Parameters
<username 15> - Specify the user name to be configured.
vlan - (Optional) Specify the target VLAN ID for the authenticated host which uses this user
<vlanid 1-4094> - Specify the target VLAN ID for the authenticated host which uses this user
account to pass authentication. The VLAN ID value must be between 1 and 4094.
502

®
Restrictions
Example
To configure a JWAC user:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config jwac user 112233
Command: config jwac user 112233
Enter a old password:*****

Enter a case-sensitive new password:******
Enter the new password again for confirmation:******
Success.
48-23 delete jwac

Description
This command is used to delete JWAC users from the local database.
Format
delete jwac [user <username 15> | all_users]
Parameters
user - Specify the user name to be deleted.
<username 15> - Specify the user name to be deleted. The user name can be up to 15
characters long.
all_users - Specify all user accounts in the local database will be deleted.
Restrictions
Example
To delete a JWAC user from the local database:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete jwac user 112233
Command: delete jwac user 112233
Success.
503

®
48-24 show jwac user

Description
This command is used to display JWAC users in the local database.
Format
show jwac user
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the current JWAC local users:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show jwac user
Command: show jwac user
User Name Password VID

---------------- ---------------- ----------
112233 12345 -
123 123 1
Total Entries:2
48-25 clear jwac auth_state

Description
This command is used to clear authentication entries.
Format
clear jwac auth_state [ports [all | <portlist>] {authenticated | authenticating | blocked} |
mac_addr <macaddr>]
Parameters
ports - Specify the port range to delete hosts on.
all - Specify to delete all ports.
<portlist> - Specify range of ports to delete.
authenticated - (Optional) Specify the state of host to delete.
504

®
authenticating - (Optional) Specify the state of host to delete.

blocked - (Optional) Specify the state of host to delete.
mac_addr - Delete a specified host with this MAC address.
Restrictions
Example
To delete authentication entries:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#clear jwac auth_state ports all blocked
Command: clear jwac auth_state ports all blocked
Success.
48-26 show jwac auth_state ports

Description
This command is used to display information for JWAC client hosts.
Format
show jwac auth_state ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Specify a port range to show the JWAC authentication entries.
If no port is specified, the JWAC authentication state will be displayed for all ports.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display JWAC authentication entries for ports 1 to 2:
505

®
DGS-3120-24TC: show jwac auth_state ports 1-3C

ommand: show jwac auth_state ports 1-3
Pri - Priority. State - A:Authenticated, B:Blocked, -:Authenticating
Time - Aging Time/Idle Time for authenticated entries.
Port MAC Address State VID Pri Time IP User Name

----- -------------------- ---- ---- --- ------- --------------- ---------------
1 00-00-00-00-00-01 A 20 3 1440/30 192.168.101.239 jack
1 00-00-00-00-00-02 A 1234 - 1440/30 172.18.61.242 tom
1 00-00-00-00-00-03 B - - -/40 172.18.61.243 user
1 00-00-00-00-00-04 - - - 10 - -
2 00-00-00-00-00-10(P) A 1234 - 1440/30 10.10.10.90 admin
3 00-00-00-00-00-20(P) - - - 1440/30 10.10.10.131 -
3 00-00-00-00-00-21(P) B - - -/29 172.18.61.133 lina
4 00-00-00-00-00-21(P) A 1234 5 1440/30 3000:2000:3000:aabb:bbcc:ccdd:d
dee:eeff name
Total Authenticating Hosts : 2
Total Authenticated Hosts : 4
Total Blocked Hosts : 2
48-27 config jwac authorization attributes

Description
This command is used to enable or disable acceptation of authorized configuration. When the
authorization is enabled for JWAC’s RADIUS, the authorized data assigned by the RADUIS server
will be accepted if the global authorization network is enabled. When the authorization is enabled
for JWAC’s local, the authorized data assigned by the local database will be accepted.
Format
config jwac authorization attributes {radius [enable | disable] | local [enable | disable]}(1)
Parameters
radius - If specified to enable, the authorized data assigned by the RADUIS server will be
accepted if the global authorization network is enabled.The default state is enabled.
enable - Specify to enable authorized data assigned by the RADUIS server to be accepted.
disable - Specify to disable authorized data assigned by the RADUIS server from being
accepted.
local - If specified to enable, the authorized data assigned by the local database will be accepted
if the global authorization network is enabled. The default state is enabled.
enable - Specify to enable authorized data assigned by the local database to be accepted.
disable - Specify to disable authorized data assigned by the local database from being
accepted.
Restrictions
506

®
Example
To disable the configuration authorized from the local database:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config jwac authorization attributes local disable
Command: config jwac authorization attributes local disable
Success.
48-28 show jwac update_server

Description
This command is used to display the JWAC update server.
Format
show jwac update_server
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the JWAC update server:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show jwac update_server
Command: show jwac update_server
Index IP TCP/UDP Port State

----- ------------------ ------ ---- -------
1 172.18.0.0/21 TCP 1 Active
2 172.18.0.0/21 TCP 2 Active
3 172.18.0.0/21 TCP 3 Active
48-29 config jwac authentication_page element

Description
This command is used by administrators to customize the JWAC authenticate page.
507

®
Format
config jwac authentication_page element [japanese | english] [default | page_title <desc
128> | login_window_title <desc 32> | user_name_title <desc 16> | password_title <desc 16>
| logout_window_title <desc 32> | notification_line <value 1-5> <desc 128>]
Parameters
japanese - Specify to change to the Japanese page.
english - Specify to change to the English page.
default - Specify to reset the page element to default.
page_title - Specify the title of the authenticate page.
<desc 128> - Specify the title of the authenticate page. The page title description can be up to
128 characters long.
login_window_title - Specify the login window title of the authenticate page.
<desc 32> - Specify the login window title of the authenticate page. The login window title
description can be up to 32 characters long.
user_name_title - Specify the user name title of the authenticate page.
<desc 16> - Specify the user name title of the authenticate page. The user name title
password_title - Specify the password title of the authenticate page.
<desc 16> - Specify the password title of the authenticate page. The password title
logout_window_title - Specify the logout windown title mapping of the authenticate page.
<desc 32> - Specify the logout windown title mapping of the authenticate page. The logout
window title description can be up to 32 characters long.
notification_line - Specify this parameter to set the notification information by line in
authentication Web pages.
<value 1-5> - Specify a notification line value between 1 and 5.
<desc 128> - Specify a notification line description up to 128 characters long.
Restrictions
Example
To customize the authenticate page:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config jwac authentication_page element japanese
page_title "ディーリンクジャパン株式会社" login_window_title "JWAC 认证"
user_name_title "ユーザ名" password_title "パスワード" logout_window_title "ログアウ
ト"
Command: config jwac authentication_page element japanese page_title "ディーリン
クジャパン株式会社" login_window_title "JWAC 认证" user_name_title "ユーザ名"
password_title "パスワード" logout_window_title "ログアウト"
Success.
48-30 config jwac authenticate_page

Description
This command is used by administrators to decide which authenticate page to use.
508

®
Format
config jwac authenticate_page [japanese | english]
Parameters
japanese - Specify to change to the Japanese page.
english - Specify to change to the English page. This is the default page.
Restrictions
Example
To customize the authenticate page:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config jwac authenticate_page japanese
Command: config jwac authenticate_page japanese
Success.
48-31 show jwac authenticate_page

Description
This command is used to display the element mapping of the customized authenticate page.
Format
show jwac authenticate_page
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the element mapping of the customized authenticate page:
509

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show jwac authenticate_page

Command: show jwac authenticate_page
Current Page : English Version

English Page Element
-----------------------------------------------------------
Page Title :
Login Window Title : Authentication Login
User Name Title : User Name
Password Title : Password
Logout Window Title : Logout from the network
Notification :
Japanese Page Element

-----------------------------------------------------------
Page Title :
Login Window Title : 社内 LAN 認証ログイン
User Name Title : ユーザ ID
Password Title : パスワード
510

®
Chapter 49 Jumbo Frame Command

List
enable jumbo_frame
disable jumbo_frame
show jumbo_frame
49-1 enable jumbo_frame

Description
This command is used to configure the jumbo frame setting as enable.
Format
enable jumbo_frame
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the Jumbo frame:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable jumbo_frame
Command: enable jumbo_frame
The maximum size of jumbo frame is 13312 bytes.

Success.
49-2 disable jumbo_frame

Description
This command is used to configure the jumbo frame setting as disable.
Format
disable jumbo_frame
511

®
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable the Jumbo frame:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable jumbo_frame
Command: disable jumbo_frame
Success.
49-3 show jumbo_frame

Description
This command is used to display the current configuration of jumbo frame.
Format
show jumbo_frame
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the Jumbo frame:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show jumbo_frame
Command: show jumbo_frame
Jumbo Frame State : Disabled

Maximum Frame Size : 1536 Bytes
512

®
Chapter 50 Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling

(L2PT) Command List
enable l2protocol_tunnel
disable l2protocol_tunnel
config l2protocol_tunnel ports [<portlist> | all] type [uni tunneled_protocol [{stp | gvrp |
protocol_mac [01-00-0C-CC-CC-CC | 01-00-0C-CC-CC-CD]}(1) | all] {threshold <value 0-
65535>} | nni | none]
show l2protocol_tunnel {[uni | nni]}
50-1 enable l2protocol_tunnel

Description
This command is used to enable the Layer 2 protocol tunneling function.
Format
enable l2protocol_tunnel
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the Layer 2 protocol tunneling function:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable l2protocol_tunnel
Command: enable l2protocol_tunnel
Success.
50-2 disable l2protocol_tunnel

Description
This command is used to disable the L2PT function globally on the Switch.
Format
disable l2protocol_tunnel
513

®
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable the Layer 2 protocol tunneling function:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable l2protocol_tunnel
Command: disable l2protocol_tunnel
Success.
50-3 config l2protocol_tunnel ports

Description
This command is used to configure Layer 2 protocol tunneling on ports. Layer 2 protocol tunneling
is used to tunnel Layer 2 protocol packet. If a Layer 2 protocol is tunnel-enabled on an UNI, once
received the PDU on this port, the multicast destination address of the PDU will be replaced by
Layer 2 protocol tunneling multicast address. The Layer 2 protocol tunneling multicast address for
STP is 01-05-5D-00-00-00, for GVRP is 01-05-5D-00-00-21, for Layer 2 protocols MAC 01-00-0C-
CC-CC-CC is 01-05-5D-00-00-10 and for protocol MAC 01-00-0C-CC-CC-CD is 01-05-5D-00-00-
11.
When QinQ is enabled, an S-TAG will be added to the Layer 2 PDU too. The S-TAG is assigned
according QinQ VLAN configuration.
Format
config l2protocol_tunnel ports [<portlist> | all] type [uni tunneled_protocol [{stp | gvrp |
protocol_mac [01-00-0C-CC-CC-CC | 01-00-0C-CC-CC-CD]}(1) | all] {threshold <value 0-
65535>} | nni | none]
Parameters
<portlist> - Specify a list of ports on which the Layer 2 protocol tunneling to be configured.
all – Specify to have all ports to be configured
type - Specify the type of the ports.
uni - Specify the ports as UNI ports.
tunneled_protocol - Specify tunneled protocols on the UNI ports.
stp - Specify to use the STP protocol.
gvrp - Specify to use the GVRP protocol.
protocol_mac - Specify the destination MAC address of the L2 protocol packets that
will tunneled on these UNI ports.
01-00-0C-CC-CC-CC - Specify the MAC address as 01-00-0C-CC-CC-CC.
514

®
01-00-0C-CC-CC-CD - Specify the MAC address as 01-00-0C-CC-CC-CD.

all - All tunnel-abled Layer 2 protocols will be tunneled on the ports.
threshold - (Optional) Specify the drop threshold for packets-per-second accepted on the
UNI ports. The ports drop the PDU if the protocol’s threshold is exceeded.
<value 0-65535> - The range of the threshold value is 0 to 65535 (packet/second). The
value 0 means no limit. By default, the value is 0.
nni - Specify the ports as NNI ports.
none - Disable tunnel on it.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the STP tunneling on ports 1-4:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config l2protocol_tunnel ports 1:1-1:4 type uni
tunneled_protocol stp
Command: config l2protocol_tunnel ports 1:1-1:4 type uni tunneled_protocol stp
Success.
50-4 show l2protocol_tunnel

Description
This command is used to display Layer 2 protocol tunneling information.
Format
show l2protocol_tunnel {[uni | nni]}
Parameters
uni - (Optional) Specify to show UNI detail information, include tunneled and dropped PDU
statistic.
nni - (Optional) Specify to show NNI detail information, include de-capsulated Layer 2 PDU
statistic.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show Layer 2 protocol tunneling information summary:
515

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show l2protocol_tunnel

Command: show l2protocol_tunnel
Global State : Enabled

UNI Ports : 1:1-1:4
NNI Ports :
To show Layer 2 protocol tunneling information summary:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show l2protocol_tunnel uni
Command: show l2protocol_tunnel uni
UNI Tunneled Threshold

Port Protocol (packet/sec)
---- ----------------- ------------
1:1 STP 0
1:2 STP 0
1:3 STP 0
1:4 STP 0
516

®
Chapter 51 Link Aggregation Command

List
create link_aggregation group_id <value 1-32> {type [lacp | static]}
delete link_aggregation group_id <value 1-32>
config link_aggregation group_id <value 1-32> {master_port <port> | ports <portlist> | state
[enable | disable] | trap [enable | disable]}
config link_aggregation algorithm [mac_source | mac_destination | mac_source_dest |
ip_source | ip_destination | ip_source_dest | l4_src_port | l4_dest_port | l4_src_dest_port]
show link_aggregation {group_id <value 1-32> | algorithm}
config lacp_port <portlist> mode [active | passive]
show lacp_port <portlist>
51-1 create link_aggregation group_id

Description
This command is used to create a link aggregation group on the Switch.
Format
create link_aggregation group_id <value 1-32> {type [lacp | static]}
Parameters
group_id - Specify the group id. The number of link aggregation groups is project dependency.
The group number identifies each of the groups.
type - (Optional) Specify the group type is belong to static or LACP. If type is not specified, the
default is static type.
lacp - Specify to use LACP as the group type.
static - Specify to use static as the group type.
Restrictions
Example
To create link aggregation group:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create link_aggregation group_id 1 type lacp
Command: create link_aggregation group_id 1 type lacp
Success.
517

®
51-2 delete link_aggregation group_id

Description
This command is used to delete a previously configured link aggregation group.
Format
delete link_aggregation group_id <value 1-32>
Parameters
group_id - Specify the group id. The number of link aggregation groups is project dependency.
The group number identifies each of the groups.
Restrictions
Example
To delete link aggregation group:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete link_aggregation group_id 3
Command: delete link_aggregation group_id 3
Success.
51-3 config link_aggregation group_id

Description
This command is used to configure a previously created link aggregation group.
Format
config link_aggregation group_id <value 1-32> {master_port <port> | ports <portlist> | state
[enable | disable] | trap [enable | disable]}
Parameters
group_id - Specify the group id. The group number identifies each of the groups.
master_port - (Optional) Master port ID. Specify which port (by port number) of the link
aggregation group will be the master port. All of the ports in a link aggregation group will share
the port configuration with the master port.
<port> - Enter the master port number here.
ports - (Optional) Specify a range of ports that will belong to the link aggregation group. The port
list is specified by listing the lowest switch number and the beginning port number on that
switch, separated by a colon. Then highest switch number, and the highest port number of the
range (also separated by a colon) are specified. The beginning and end of the port list range
518

®
are separated by a dash. For example, 1:3 would specify switch number 1, port 3. 2:4
specifies switch number 2, port 4. 1:3-2:4 specifies all of the ports between switch 1, port 3
and switch 2, port 4 − in numerical order.
<portlist> - Enter the list of port used for the configuration here.
state - (Optional) Enable or disable the specified link aggregation group. If not specified, the
group will keep the previous state, the default state is disabled. If configure LACP group, the
ports’ state machine will start.
enable - Enable the specified link aggregation group.
disable - Disable the specified link aggregation group.
trap - (Optional) Specify the state of Link Up and Link Down notifications.
enable - Enable Link Up and Link Down notifications.
disable - Disable Link Up and Link Down notifications.
Restrictions
Example
To define a load-sharing group of ports, group-id 1, master port 17 of unit 2:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config link_aggregation group_id 1 master_port 1:5 ports
1:5-1:7
Command: config link_aggregation group_id 1 master_port 1:5 ports 1:5-1:7
Success.
51-4 config link_aggregation algorithm

Description
This command is used to configure the part of the packet examined by the Switch when selecting
the egress port for transmitting load-sharing data. This feature is available using the address-
based load-sharing algorithm, only.
Format
config link_aggregation algorithm [mac_source | mac_destination | mac_source_dest |
ip_source | ip_destination | ip_source_dest | l4_src_port | l4_dest_port | l4_src_dest_port]
Parameters
mac_source - Indicates that the Switch should examine the MAC source address.
mac_destination - Indicates that the Switch should examine the MAC destination address.
mac_source_dest - Indicates that the Switch should examine the MAC source and destination
address.
ip_source - Indicates that the Switch should examine the IP source address.
ip_destination - Indicates that the Switch should examine the IP destination address.
ip_source_dest - Indicates that the Switch should examine the IP source address and
destination address.
l4_src_port - Indicates that the Switch should examine the TCP/UDP source port.
l4_dest_port - Indicates that the Switch should examine the TCP/UDP destination port.
l4_src_dest_port - Indicates that the Switch should examine the TCP/UDP source port and
519

®
destination port.
Restrictions
Example
To configure link aggregation algorithm for mac-source-dest:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config link_aggregation algorithm mac_source_dest
Command: config link_aggregation algorithm mac_source_dest
Success.
51-5 show link_aggregation

Description
This command is used to display the current link aggregation configuration on the Switch.
Format
show link_aggregation {group_id <value 1-32> | algorithm}
Parameters
group_id - (Optional) Specify the group id. The group number identifies each of the groups.
algorithm - (Optional) Allows you to specify the display of link aggregation by the algorithm in
use by that group.
If no parameter specified, system will display all link aggregation information.
Restrictions
None.
Example
Link aggregation group enable:
520

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show link_aggregation
Command: show link_aggregation
Link Aggregation Algorithm = MAC-Source-Dest
Group ID : 1
Type : LACP
Master Port : 1:5
Member Port : 1:5-1:7
Active Port : 7
Status : Enabled
Flooding Port : 7
Trap : Disabled
Total Entries : 1
Link aggregation group enable and no member linkup:

Group ID : 1
Type : LACP
Master Port : 1:5
Active Port :
Status : Enabled
Flooding Port :
Trap : Disabled
Total Entries : 1
Link aggregation group disabled:
521

®
Group ID : 1
Type : LACP
Master Port : 1:5
Active Port :
Status : Disabled
Flooding Port :
Trap : Disabled
Total Entries : 1
51-6 config lacp_port

Description
This command is used to configure per-port LACP mode.
Format
config lacp_port <portlist> mode [active | passive]
Parameters
lacp_port - Specified a range of ports to be configured. (UnitID:port number).
<portlist> - Enter the list of port used for the configuration here.
mode - Specify the LACP mode used.
active - Specify to set the LACP mode as active.
passive - Specify to set the LACP mode as passive.
Restrictions
Example
To config port LACP mode:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config lacp_port 1-12 mode active
command: config lacp_port 1:1-1:12 mode active
Success.
522

®
51-7 show lacp_port

Description
This command is used to display the current mode of LACP of the ports.
Format
show lacp_port <portlist>
Parameters
lacp_port - Specified a range of ports to be configured. (UnitID:port number).
If no parameter specified, the system will display current LACP and all port status.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show port lacp mode:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show lacp_port
Command: show lacp_port
Port Activity
------ --------
1 Active
2 Active
3 Active
4 Active
5 Active
6 Active
7 Active
8 Active
9 Active
10 Active
11 Active
12 Active
523

®
Chapter 52 Link Layer Discovery

Protocol (LLDP) Command
List
enable lldp
disable lldp
config lldp [message_tx_interval <sec 5-32768> | message_tx_hold_multiplier <int 2-10> |
tx_delay <sec 1-8192> | reinit_delay <sec 1-10>]
config lldp notification_interval <sec 5-3600>
config lldp ports [<portlist> | all] [notification [enable | disable] | admin_status [tx_only | rx_only |
tx_and_rx | disable] | mgt_addr [ipv4 {<ipaddr>} | ipv6 {<ipv6addr>}] [enable | disable] |
basic_tlvs [{all} |{port_description | system_name | system_description | system_capabilities}]
[enable | disable] | dot1_tlv_pvid [enable | disable] | dot1_tlv_protocol_vid [vlan [all |
<vlan_name 32> ] | vlanid <vidlist>] [enable | disable] | dot1_tlv_vlan_name [vlan [all |
<vlan_name 32>] | vlanid <vidlist>] [enable | disable] | dot1_tlv_protocol_identity [all | {eapol |
lacp | gvrp | stp}] [enable | disable] | dot3_tlvs [{all} | {mac_phy_configuration_status |
link_aggregation | power_via_mdi|maximum_frame_size}] [enable | disable]]
config lldp forward_message [enable | disable]
show lldp
show lldp mgt_addr {[ipv4 {<ipaddr>} | ipv6 {<ipv6addr>}]}
show lldp ports {<portlist>}
show lldp local_ports {<portlist>} {mode [brief | normal | detailed]}
show lldp remote_ports {<portlist>} {mode [brief | normal | detailed]}
show lldp statistics
show lldp statistics ports {<portlist>}
config lldp_med fast_start repeat_count <value 1 - 10>
config lldp_med log state [enable | disable]
config lldp_med notification topo_change ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
config lldp_med ports [<portlist> | all] med_transmit_capabilities [all | {capabilities |
network_policy | power_pse | inventory}] state [enable | disable]
show lldp_med ports {<portlist>}
show lldp_med
show lldp_med local_ports {<portlist>}
show lldp_med remote_ports {<portlist>}
52-1 enable lldp

Description
This command is used to globally enable the LLDP function.
When this function is enabled, the Switch can start to transmit LLDP packets and receive and
process the LLDP packets. The specific function of each port will depend on the per-port LLDP
setting.
For the advertisement of LLDP packets, the Switch announces the information to its neighbor
through ports. For the receiving of LLDP packets, the Switch will learn the information from the
LLDP packets advertised from the neighbor in the neighbor table. The default state for LLDP is
disabled.
524

®
Format
enable lldp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable LLDP:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable lldp
Command: enable lldp
Success.
52-2 disable lldp

Description
This command is used to stop sending and receiving of LLDP advertisement packet.
Format
disable lldp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable LLDP:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable lldp
Command: disable lldp
Success.
525

®
52-3 config lldp

Description
This command is used to change the packet transmission interval.
Format
config lldp [message_tx_interval <sec 5-32768> | message_tx_hold_multiplier <int 2-10> |
tx_delay <sec 1-8192> | reinit_delay <sec 1-10>]
Parameters
message_tx_interval - Changes the interval between consecutive transmissions of LLDP
advertisements on any given port. The default setting 30 seconds.
<sec 5-32768> - Enter the message transmit interval value here. This value must be between
5 and 32768 seconds.
message_tx_hold_multiplier - Specify to configure the message hold multiplier. The default
setting 4.
<2-10> - Enter the message transmit hold multiplier value here. This value must be between 2
and 10.
tx_delay - Specify the minimum interval between sending of LLDP messages due to constantly
change of MIB content. The default setting 2 seconds.
<sec 1-8192> - Enter the transmit delay value here. This value must be between 1 and 8192
seconds.
reinit_delay - Specify the the minimum time of reinitialization delay interval. The default setting 2
seconds.
<sec 1-10> - Enter the re-initiate delay value here. This value must be between 1 and 10
seconds.
Restrictions
Example
To change the packet transmission interval:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config lldp message_tx_interval 30
Command: config lldp message_tx_interval 30
Success.
52-4 config lldp notification_interval

Description
This command is used to configure the timer of notification interval for sending notification to
configured SNMP trap receiver(s).
Format
config lldp notification_interval <sec 5-3600>
526

®
Parameters
notification_interval - Specify the timer of notification interval for sending notification to
configured SNMP trap receiver(s). The default setting is 5 seconds.
<sec 5-3600> - Enter the notification interval value here. This value must be between 5 and
3600 seconds.
Restrictions
Example
To changes the notification interval to 10 second:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config lldp notification_interval 10
Command: config lldp notification_interval 10
Success.
52-5 config lldp ports

Description
This command is used to configure each port for sending a notification to configure the SNMP trap
receiver(s).
Format
config lldp ports [<portlist> | all] [notification [enable | disable] | admin_status [tx_only |
rx_only | tx_and_rx | disable] | mgt_addr [ipv4 {<ipaddr>} | ipv6 {<ipv6addr>}] [enable |
disable] | basic_tlvs [{all} |{port_description | system_name | system_description |
system_capabilities}] [enable | disable] | dot1_tlv_pvid [enable | disable] |
dot1_tlv_protocol_vid [vlan [all | <vlan_name 32> ] | vlanid <vidlist>] [enable | disable] |
dot1_tlv_vlan_name [vlan [all | <vlan_name 32>] | vlanid <vidlist>] [enable | disable] |
dot1_tlv_protocol_identity [all | {eapol | lacp | gvrp | stp}] [enable | disable] | dot3_tlvs [{all} |
{mac_phy_configuration_status | link_aggregation | power_via_mdi|maximum_frame_size}]
[enable | disable]]
Parameters
notification - Enables or disables the SNMP trap notification of LLDP data changes detected on
advertisements received from neighbor devices. The default notification state is disabled.
enable - Specify that the SNMP trap notification of LLDP data changes detected will be
enabled.
disable - Specify that the SNMP trap notification of LLDP data changes detected will be
disabled.
admin_status - Specify the per-port transmit and receive modes.
tx_only - Configure the specified port(s) to transmit LLDP packets, but block inbound LLDP
527

®
packets from neighbor devices.

rx_only - Configure the specified port(s) to receive LLDP packets from neighbors, but block
outbound packets to neighbors.
tx_and_rx - Configure the specified port(s) to both transmit and receive LLDP packets.
disable - Disable LLDP packet transmit and receive on the specified port(s).
mgt_addr - Specify the management address used.
ipv4 - Specify the IPv4 address used.
ipv6 - Specify the IPv6 address used.
<ipv6addr> - (Optional) Enter the IPv6 address used for this configuration here.
enable - Specify that the advertising indicated management address instance will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the advertising indicated management address instance will be disabled.
basic_tlvs - Specify the basic TLV data types used from outbound LLDP advertisements.
all - Specify that all the basic TLV data types will be used.
port_description - (Optional) This TLV optional data type indicates that LLDP agent should
transmit 'Port Description TLV on the port. The default state is disabled.
system_name - (Optional) This TLV optional data type includes indicates that LLDP agent
should transmit 'System Name TLV'. The default state is disabled.
system_description - (Optional) This TLV optional data type includes indicates that LLDP
agent should transmit 'System Description TLV'. The default state is disabled.
system_capabilities - (Optional) This TLV optional data type includes indicates that LLDP
agent should transmit 'System Capabilities TLV'. The system capability will indicate
whether the device provides repeater, bridge, or router function, and whether the provided
functions are currently enabled. The default state is disabled.
enable - Specify that the basic TLV data types used from outbound LLDP advertisements will be
enabled.
disable - Specify that the basic TLV data types used from outbound LLDP advertisements will be
disabled.
dot1_tlv_pvid - This TLV optional data type determines whether the IEEE 802.1 organizationally
defined port VLAN ID TLV transmission is allowed on a given LLDP transmission capable port.
The default state is disable.
enable - Specify that the Dot1 TLV PVID option will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the Dot1 TLV PVID option will be disabled.
dot1_tlv_protocol_vid - This TLV optional data type determines whether the IEEE 802.1
organizationally defined port and protocol VLAN ID TLV transmission is allowed on a given
LLDP transmission capable port. The default state is disable.
vlan - Specify the VLAN used for this configuration.
all - Specify that all the configured VLANs will be used for this configuration.
long.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID used for this configuration.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the ID of the VLAN here.
enable - Specify that the Dot1 TLV protocol VID will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the Dot1 TLV protocol VID will be disabled.
dot1_tlv_vlan_name - This TLV optional data type indicates whether the corresponding Local
System’s VLAN name instance will be transmitted on the port. If a port is associated with
multiple VLANs. those enabled VLAN ID will be advertised. The default state is disable.
vlan - Specify the VLAN used for this configuration.
all - Specify that all the configured VLANs will be used for this configuration.
long.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID used for this configuration.
<vlanid_list> - Enter the ID of the VLAN here.
enable - Specify that the Dot1 TLV VLAN name will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the Dot1 TLV VLAN name will be disabled.
dot1_tlv_protocol_identity - This TLV optional data type indicates whether the corresponding
Local System's Protocol Identity instance will be transmitted on the port. The Protocol Identity
TLV provides a way for stations to advertise protocols that are important to the operation of
the network. Such as Spanning Tree Protocol, the Link Aggregation Control Protocol, and
528

®
numerous vendor proprietary variations are responsible for maintaining the topology and
connectivity of the network. If EAPOL, GVRP, STP (including MSTP), and LACP protocol
identity is enabled on this port and it is enabled to be advertised, then this protocol identity will
be advertised. The default state is disabled.
all - Specify that all the vendor proprietary protocols will be advertised.
eapol - (Optional) Specify that the EAPOL protocol will be advertised.
lacp - (Optional) Specify that the LACP protocol will be advertised.
gvrp - (Optional) Specify that the GVRP protocol will be advertised.
stp - (Optional) Specify that the STP protocol will be advertised.
enable - Specify that the protocol identity TLV according to the protocol specified will be
adverstised.
disable - Specify that the protocol identity TLV according to the protocol specified will not be
adverstised.
dot3_tlvs - Specify that the IEEE 802.3 specific TLV data type will be configured.
all - Specify that all the IEEE 802.3 specific TLV data type will be used.
mac_phy_configuration_status - (Optional) This TLV optional data type indicates that LLDP
agent should transmit 'MAC/PHY configuration/status TLV'. This type indicates it is
possible for two ends of an IEEE 802.3 link to be configured with different duplex and/or
speed settings and still establish some limited network connectivity. More precisely, the
information includes whether the port supported the auto-negotiation function, whether the
function is enabled, the auto-negotiated advertised capability, and the operational MAU
type. The default state is disabled.
link_aggregation - (Optional) This TLV optional data type indicates that LLDP agent should
transmit 'Link Aggregation TLV'. This type indicates the current link aggregation status of
IEEE 802.3 MACs. More precisely, the information should include whether the port is
capable of doing link aggregation, whether the port is aggregated in a aggregated link, and
the aggregated port ID. The default state is disabled.
power_via_mdi - (Optional) This TLV optional data type indicates that LLDP agent should
transmit 'Power via MDI TLV'. Three IEEE 802.3 PMD implementations (10BASE-T,
100BASE-TX, and 1000BASE-T) allow power to be supplied over the link for connected
non-powered systems. The Power Via MDI TLV allows network management to advertise
and discover the MDI power support capabilities of the sending IEEE 802.3 LAN station.
The default state is disabled.
maximum_frame_size - (Optional) This TLV optional data type indicates that LLDP agent
should transmit 'Maximum-frame-size TLV. The default state is disabled.
enable - Specify that the IEEE 802.3 specific TLV data type selected will be advertised.
disable - Specify that the IEEE 802.3 specific TLV data type selected will be not advertised.
Restrictions
Example
To enable SNMP notifications from port 1:1-1:5:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config lldp ports 1:1-1:5 notification enable
Command: config lldp ports 1:1-1:5 notification enable
Success.
To configure port 1:1-1:5 to transmit and receive:
529

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config lldp ports 1:1-1:5 admin_status tx_and_rx

Command: config lldp ports 1:1-1:5 admin_status tx_and_rx
Success.
To enable ports 1-2 for manage address entry:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config lldp ports 1:1-1:2 mgt_addr ipv4 192.168.254.10
enable
Command: config lldp ports 1:1-1:2 mgt_addr ipv4 192.168.254.10 enable
Success
To configure exclude the system name TLV from the outbound LLDP advertisements for all ports:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config lldp ports all basic_tlvs system_name enable
Command: config lldp ports all basic_tlvs system_name enable
Success.
To configure exclude the vlan nameTLV from the outbound LLDP advertisements for all ports:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config lldp ports all dot1_tlv_protocol_vid vlan default
enable
Command: config lldp ports all dot1_tlv_protocol_vid vlan default enable
Success.
To configure exclude the port and protocol VLAN ID TLV from the outbound LLDP advertisements
for all ports:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config lldp ports all dot1_tlv_protocol_vid vlanid 1-3
enable
Command: config lldp ports all dot1_tlv_protocol_vid vlanid 1-3 enable
Success.
To configure exclude the VLAN name TLV from the outbound LLDP advertisements for all ports:
530

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config lldp ports all dot1_tlv_vlan_name vlanid 1-3

enable
Command: config lldp ports all dot1_tlv_vlan_name vlanid 1-3 enable
Success.
To configure exclude the protocol identity TLV from the outbound LLDP advertisements for all
ports:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config lldp ports all dot1_tlv_protocol_identity all
enable
Command: config lldp ports all dot1_tlv_protocol_identity all enable
Success.
To configure exclude the MAC/PHY configuration/status TLV from the outbound LLDP
advertisements for all ports:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config lldp ports all dot3_tlvs
mac_phy_configuration_status enable
Command: config lldp ports all dot3_tlvs mac_phy_configuration_status enable
Success.
52-6 config lldp forward_ message

Description
This command is used to configure forwarding of LLDP PDU packet when LLDP is disabled.
Format
config lldp forward_message [enable | disable]
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To configure LLDP to forward LLDP PDUs:
531

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config lldp forward_message enable

Command: config lldp forward_message enable
Success.
52-7 show lldp

Description
This command is used to display the Switch’s general LLDP configuration status.
Format
show lldp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the LLDP system level configuration status:
Command: show lldp
LLDP System Information

Chassis ID Subtype : MAC Address
Chassis ID : 00-01-02-03-04-00
System Name :
System Description : Gigabit Ethernet Switch
System Capabilities : Repeater, Bridge
LLDP Configurations
LLDP Status : Enabled
LLDP Forward Status : Enabled
Message TX Interval : 30
Message TX Hold Multiplier: 4
ReInit Delay : 2
TX Delay : 2
Notification Interval : 10
532

®
52-8 show lldp mgt_addr

Description
This command is used to display the LLDP management address information.
Format
show lldp mgt_addr {[ipv4 {<ipaddr>} | ipv6 {<ipv6addr>}]}
Parameters
ipv4 - (Optional) Specify the IPv4 address used for the display.
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Enter the IPv4 address used for this configuration here.
ipv6 - (Optional) Specify the IPv6 address used for the display.
<ipv6addr> - (Optional) Enter the IPv6 address used for this configuration here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display management address information:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show lldp mgt_addr ipv4 192.168.254.10
Command: show lldp mgt_addr ipv4 192.168.254.10
Address 1
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Subtype : IPV4
Address : 192.168.254.10
IF type : unknown
OID : 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.10.36.1.11
Advertising ports :
1:1-1:5, 1:7, 2:10-2:20
52-9 show lldp ports

Description
This command is used to display the LLDP per port configuration for advertisement options.
Format
show lldp ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Specify a range of ports to be displayed.
If the port list is not specified, information for all the ports will be displayed.
533

®
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the LLDP port 1 TLV option configuration:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show lldp ports 1:1
Command: show lldp ports 1:1
Port ID : 1:1
-----------------------------------------------------------------
Admin Status : TX_and_RX
Notification Status : Enabled
Advertised TLVs Option :
Port Description Disabled
System Name Disabled
System Description Disabled
System Capabilities Disabled
Enabled Management Address
(None)
Port VLAN ID Disabled
Enabled Port_and_Protocol_VLAN_ID
(None)
Enabled VLAN Name
(None)
Enabled Protocol_Identity
(None)
MAC/PHY Configuration/Status Disabled
Link Aggregation Disabled
Maximum Frame Size Disabled
52-10 show lldp local_ports

Description
This command is used to display the per-port information currently available for populating
outbound LLDP advertisements.
Format
show lldp local_ports {<portlist>} {mode [brief | normal | detailed]}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Specified a range of ports to be configured. When port list is not specified,
information for all ports will be displayed.
534

®
mode - (Optional) Specify the display mode.

brief - Display the information in brief mode.
normal - Display the information in normal mode. This is the default display mode.
detailed - Display the information in detailed mode.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display outbound LLDP advertisements for port 1 in detailed mode. Port description on the
display should use the same value as ifDescr.
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show lldp local_ports 1:1 mode detailed
Command: show lldp local_ports 1:1 mode detailed
Port ID : 1:1
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Port ID Subtype : MAC Address
Port ID : 00-01-02-03-04-01
Port Description : D-Link DGS-3120-24TC R2.00.010
Port 1 on Unit 1
Port PVID : 1
Management Address Count : 2
Subtype : IPv4
Address : 0.0.0.0
IF Type : IfIndex
OID : 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.10.117.1.1
Subtype : IPv4
Address : 10.90.90.90
IF Type : IfIndex
OID : 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.10.117.1.1
PPVID Entries Count : 0

(None)
VLAN Name Entries Count : 1
Entry 1 :
VLAN ID : 1
VLAN Name : default
Protocol Identity Entries Count : 0

(None)
MAC/PHY Configuration/Status :
Auto-Negotiation Support : Supported
Auto-Negotiation Enabled : Enabled
Auto-Negotiation Advertised Capability : 6c01(hex)
Auto-Negotiation Operational MAU Type : 0010(hex)
Link Aggregation :
Aggregation Capability : Aggregated
Aggregation Status : Not Currently in Aggregation
535

®
Aggregation Port ID : 0
Maximum Frame Size : 1536
To display outbound LLDP advertisements for port 1 in normal mode:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show lldp local_ports 1:1 mode normal
Command: show lldp local_ports 1:1 mode normal
Port ID : 1:1
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Port ID Subtype : MAC Address
Port ID : 00-01-02-03-04-01
Port Description : D-Link DGS-3120-24TC R2.00.010
Port 1 on Unit 1
Port PVID : 1
Management Address Count : 2
PPVID Entries Count : 0
VLAN Name Entries Count : 1
Protocol Identity Entries Count : 0
MAC/PHY Configuration/Status : (See Detail)
Link Aggregation : (See Detail)
To display outbound LLDP advertisements for port 1 in brief mode:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show lldp local_ports 1:1 mode brief
Command: show lldp local_ports 1:1 mode brief
Port ID 1:
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Port ID Subtype : LOCAL
Port ID : 1/1
Port Description : RMON Port 1 on Unit 1
52-11 show lldp remote_ports

Description
This command is used to display the information learned from the neighbor parameters.
Format
show lldp remote_ports {<portlist>} {mode [brief | normal | detailed]}
536

®
Parameters
mode – (Optional) Specify to display the information in various modes.
brief - Display the information in brief mode.
normal - Display the information in normal mode. This is the default display mode.
detailed - Display the information in detailed mode.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display remote table in brief mode:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show lldp remote_ports 1:1-1:2 mode brief
Command: show lldp remote_ports 1:1-1:2 mode brief
Port ID: 1
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Remote Entities count : 3
Entity 1
Chassis ID Subtype : MACADDRESS
Chassis ID : 00-01-02-03-04-01
Port ID : 1/3
Entity 2
Chassis ID : 00-01-02-03-04-02
Port ID : 1/4
Port ID : 2
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Entity 1
Chassis ID : 00-01-02-03-04-03
Port ID : 2/1
Entity 2
Chassis ID : 00-01-02-03-04-04
Port ID : 2/2
537

®
Entity 3
Chassis ID : 00-01-02-03-04-05
Port ID : 2/3
To display remote table in normal mode:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show lldp remote_ports 1:1 mode normal
Command: show lldp remote_ports 1:1 mode normal
Port ID : 1
----------------------------------------------------------------------
Entity 1
Chassis ID : 00-01-02-03-04-01
Port ID : 1/3
System Name : Switch1
System Description : Stackable Ethernet Switch
Management Address count : 1
Port VLAN ID : 1
PPVID Entries count : 5
VLAN Name Entries count : 3
Protocol Id Entries count : 2
MAC/PHY Configuration/Status : (See detail)
Power Via MDI : (See detail)
Link Aggregation : (See detail)
Unknown TLVs count : 2
Entity 2
Chassis ID : 00-01-02-03-04-02
Port ID : 2/1
Management Address count : 2
Port VLAN ID : 1
PPVID Entries count : 5
VLAN Name Entries count : 3
Protocol Id Entries count : 2
MAC/PHY Configuration/Status : (See detail)
538

®
Power Via MDI : (See detail)

Link Aggregation : (See detail)
To display remote table in detailed mode:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show lldp remote_ports 1:1 mode detailed
Command: show lldp remote_ports 1:1 mode detailed
Port ID : 1
---------------------------------------------------------------------
Entity 1
Chassis ID : 00-01-02-03-04-01
Port ID : 1/3
Management Address : 10.90.90.91
Port VLAN ID : 1
Management Address
Address 1
Subtype : IPV4
Address : 192.168.254.10
IF type : unknown
OID : 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.10.36.1.11
Address 2
Subtype : IPV4
Address : 192.168.254.11
IF type : unknown
OID : 2.3.6.1.4.1.171.10.36.1.11
PPVID Entries
Entry 1
Port and protocol VLAN ID : 4
PPVID supported : supported
PPVID Enable : Enable
Entry 2
Entry 3
539

®
VLAN Name Entries

Entry 1
VLAN ID : 1
VLAN Name : V1
Entry 2
VLANID : 2
VLAN Name : V2
Entry 3
VLAN ID : 3
VLAN Name : V3
Protocol Identity Entries

Entry 1
Protocol index : 1
Protocol id : 00 16 42 42 03 00 01 01
Protocol Name : GVRP
Entry 2
Protocol index : 2
Protocol id : 00 27 42 42 03 00 00 02
Protocol Name : STP
MAC/PHY Configuration/Status
Auto-negotiation support : supported
Auto-negotiation status : enabled
Auto-negotiation advertised capability : xxxx (hex)
Auto-negotiation operational MAU type : 0010 (hex)
Power Via MDI

Port class : PSE
PSE MDI pnower support : supported
PSE MDI power state : enabled
PSE pairs control ability : uncontrollable
PSE power pair : signal
power class : 3
Link Aggregation
Aggregation capability : aggregated
Aggregation status : currently in aggregation
Aggregated port ID : 1

Unknown TLVs
Entry 1
Unknown TLV type : 30
Unknown TLV Information Bytes : XX XX XX XX XX XX(hex)
Entry 2
540

®
Unknown TLV type : 31

Unknown TLV Information Bytes : XX XX XX XX XX XX(hex)
52-12 show lldp statistics

Description
This command is used to display an overview of neighbor detection activity on the Switch.
Format
show lldp statistics
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display global statistics information:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show lldp statistics
Command: show lldp statistics
Last Change Time : 6094

Number of Table Insert : 1
Number of Table Delete : 0
Number of Table Drop : 0
Number of Table Ageout : 0
52-13 show lldp statistics ports

Description
This command is used to display per-port LLDP statistics
Format
show lldp statistics ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
541

®
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display statistics information of port 1:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show lldp statistics ports 1:1
Command: show lldp statistics ports 1:1
Port ID: 1
------------------------------------------------------------------------
lldpStatsTxPortFramesTotal : 27
lldpStatsRxPortFramesDiscardedTotal : 0
lldpStatsRxPortFramesErrors : 0
lldpStatsRxPortFramesTotal : 27
lldpStatsRxPortTLVsDiscardedTotal : 0
lldpStatsRxPortTLVsUnrecognizedTotal : 0
lldpStatsRxPortAgeoutsTotal : 0
52-14 config lldp_med fast_start repeat_count

Description
This command is used to configure the fast start repeat count. When an LLDP-MED Capabilities
TLV is detected for an MSAP identifier not associated with an existing LLDP remote system MIB,
the application layer shall start the fast start mechanism and set the ‘medFastStart’ timer to
‘medFastStartRepeatCount’ times 1. The default value is 4.
Format
config lldp_med fast_start repeat_count <value 1 - 10>
Parameters
<value 1-10> - Specify a fast start repeat count value between 1 and 10. The default value is 4.
Restrictions
Example
To configure a LLDP-MED fast start repeat count of 5:
542

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config lldp_med fast_start repeat_count 5

Command: config lldp_med fast_start repeat_count 5
Success.
52-15 config lldp_med log state

Description
This command is used to configure the log state of LLDP-MED events.
Format
config lldp_med log state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enable the log state for LLDP-MED events.
disable - Disable the log state for LLDP-MED events. The default is disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the log state of LLDP-MED events:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config lldp_med log state enable
Command: config lldp_med log state enable
Success.
52-16 config lldp_med notification topo_change ports

Description
This command is used to enable or disable each port for sending topology change notification to
configured SNMP trap receiver(s) if an endpoint device is removed or moved to another port.
Format
config lldp_med notification topo_change ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
all - Specify to set all ports in the system.
543

®
state - Enable or disable the SNMP trap notification of topology change detected state.
enable - Enable the SNMP trap notification of topology change detected.
disable - Disable the SNMP trap notification of topology change detected. The default
notification state is disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To enable topology change notification on ports 1 to 2:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config lldp_med notification topo_change ports 1:1-1:2
state enable
Command: config lldp_med notification topo_change ports 1:1-1:2 state enable
Success.
52-17 config lldp_med ports

Description
This command is used to enable or disable transmitting LLDP-MED TLVs. It effectively disables
LLDP-MED on a per-port basis by disabling transmission of TLV capabilities. In this case, the
remote table’s objects in the LLDP-MED MIB corresponding to the respective port will not be
populated.
Format
config lldp_med ports [<portlist> | all] med_transmit_capabilities [all | {capabilities |
network_policy | power_pse | inventory}(1)] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
all - Specify to set all ports in the system.
med_transit_capabilities - Select to send the LLDP-MED TLV capabilities specified.
all - Select to send capabilities, network policy, and inventory.
capabilities - Specify that the LLDP agent should transmit “LLDP-MED capabilities TLV.” If a
user wants to transmit LLDP-MED PDU, this TLV type should be enabled. Otherwise, this
port cannot transmit LLDP-MED PDU.
network_policy - Specify that the LLDP agent should transmit “LLDP-MED network policy
TLV.”
power_pse - Specify that the LLDP agent should transmit 'LLDP-MED extended Power via
MDI TLV' if the local device is a PSE device.
inventory - Specify that the LLDP agent should transmit “LLDP-MED inventory TLV.”
state - Enable or disable the transmitting of LLDP-MED TLVs.
enable - Enable the transmitting of LLDP-MED TLVs.
disable - Disable the transmitting of LLDP-MED TLVs.
544

®
Restrictions
Example
To enable transmitting all capabilities on all ports:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config lldp_med ports all med_transmit_capabilities all
state enable
Command: config lldp_med ports all med_transmit_capabilities all state enable
Success.
52-18 show lldp_med ports

Description
This command is used to display LLDP-MED per port configuration for advertisement options.
Format
show lldp_med ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
If a port list is not specified, information for all ports will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display LLDP-MED configuration information for port 1:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show lldp_med ports 1:1
Command: show lldp_med ports 1:1
Port ID : 1:1
-----------------------------------------------------------------
Topology Change Notification Status :Enabled
LLDP-MED Capabilities TLV :Enabled
LLDP-MED Network Policy TLV :Enabled
LLDP-MED Extended Power Via MDI PSE TLV :Enabled
LLDP-MED Inventory TLV :Enabled
545

®
52-19 show lldp_med

Description
This command is used to display the Switch’s general LLDP-MED configuration status.
Format
show lldp_med
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the Switch’s general LLDP-MED configuration status:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show lldp_med
Command: show lldp_med
LLDP-MED System Information:

Device Class : Network Connectivity Device
Hardware Revision : B1
Firmware Revision : 3.00.501
Software Revision : 3.00.522
Serial Number : PVT93CB000001
Manufacturer Name : D-Link
Model Name : DGS-3120-24TC Gigabit Ethernet S
Asset ID :
PoE Device Type : PSE Device
PoE PSE Power Source : Primary
LLDP-MED Configuration:
Fast Start Repeat Count : 4
LLDP-MED Log State:Enabled
52-20 show lldp_med local_ports

Description
This command is used to display the per-port LLDP-MED information currently available for
populating outbound LLDP-MED advertisements.
546

®
Format
show lldp_med local_ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display LLDP-MED information currently available for populating outbound LLDP-MED
advertisements for port 1:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show lldp_med local_ports 1:1
Command: show lldp_med local_ports 1:1
Port ID : 1:1
-----------------------------------------------------------------
LLDP-MED Capabilities Support:
Capabilities :Support
Network Policy :Support
Location Identification :Not Support
Extended Power Via MDI PSE :Not Support
Extended Power Via MDI PD :Not Support
Inventory :Support
Network Policy:
None
Extended Power Via MDI:

None
52-21 show lldp_med remote_ports

Description
This command is used to display LLDP-MED information learned from neighbors.
Format
show lldp_med remote_ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
547

®
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display remote entry information:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show lldp_med remote_ports 1:1
Command: show lldp_med remote_ports 1:1
Port ID : 1:1
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Remote Entities Count : 1
Entity 1
Chassis ID : 00-01-02-03-04-00
Port ID Subtype : Net Address
Port ID : 172.18.10.11
LLDP-MED capabilities:
LLDP-MED Device Class: Endpoint Device Class III
LLDP-MED Capabilities Support:
Capabilities : Support
Network Policy : Support
Location Identification : Support
Extended Power Via MDI : Support
Inventory : Support
LLDP-MED Capabilities Enabled:
Capabilities : Enabled
Network Policy : Enabled
Location Identification : Enabled
Extended Power Via MDI : Enabled
Inventory : Enabled
Network Policy:
Application Type : Voice
VLAN ID :
Priority :
DSCP :
Unknown : True
Tagged :
Application Type : Softphone Voice
VLAN ID : 200
Priority : 7
DSCP : 5
Unknown : False
Tagged : True
Location Identification:
Location Subtype: CoordinateBased
548

®
Location Information :
Location Subtype: CivicAddress
Location Information :
Extended Power Via MDI

Power Device Type: PD Device
Power Priority : High

Power Source : From PSE
Power Request : 8 Watts
Inventory Management:
Hardware Revision :
Firmware Revision :
Software Revision :
Serial Number :
Manufacturer Name :
Model Name :
Asset ID :
549

®
Chapter 53 Loopback Detection (LBD)

Command List
config loopdetect {recover_timer [0 | <sec 60-1000000>] | interval <sec 1-32767> | mode [port-
based | vlan-based]}
config loopdetect ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
enable loopdetect
disable loopdetect
show loopdetect
show loopdetect ports {<portlist>}
config loopdetect trap [none | loop_detected | loop_cleared | both]
config loopdetect log state [enable | disable]
53-1 config loopdetect

Description
This command is used to setup the loop-back detection function (LBD) for the entire Switch.
Format
config loopdetect {recover_timer [0 | <sec 60-1000000>] | interval <sec 1-32767> | mode
[port-based | vlan-based]}
Parameters
recover_timer - (Optional) The time interval (in seconds) used by the Auto-Recovery mechanism
to decide how long to check before determining that the loop status has gone. The valid range
is from 60 to 1000000. 0 is a special value that specifies that the auto-recovery mechanism
should be disabled. When the auto-recovery mechanism is disabled, a user would need to
manually recover a disabled port. The default value for the recover timer is 60 seconds.
0 - 0 is a special value that specifies that the auto-recovery mechanism should be disabled.
When the auto-recovery mechanism is disabled, a user would need to manually recover a
disabled port.
<sec 60-1000000> - Enter the recovery timer value here. This value must be between 60 and
1000000 seconds.
interval - (Optional) The time interval (in seconds) that the device will transmit all the CTP
(Configuration Test Protocol) packets to detect a loop-back event. The default setting is 10
seconds. The valid range is from 1 to 32767 seconds.
<sec - 1-32767> - Enter the time interval value here. This value must be between 1 and
32767 seconds.
mode - (Optional) Specify the loop-detection operation mode. In port-based mode, the port will
be shut down (disabled) when loop has been detected In VLAN-based mode, the port cannot
process the packets of the VLAN that has detected the loop.
port-based - Specify that the loop-detection operation mode will be set to port-based mode.
vlan-based - Specify that the loop-detection operation mode will be set to vlan-based mode.
Restrictions
550

®
Example
To set the auto-recover time to 0, which disables the auto-recovery mechanism, the interval to 20
seconds and specify VLAN-based mode:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config loopdetect recover_timer 0 interval 20 mode vlan-
based
Command: config loopdetect recover_timer 0 interval 20 mode vlan-based
Success.
53-2 config loopdetect ports

Description
This command is used to setup the loop-back detection function for the interfaces on the Switch.
Format
config loopdetect ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
ports - Specify the range of ports that LBD will be configured on.
<portlist> - Enter a list of ports
all - To set all ports in the system, you may use the “all” parameter.
state - Specify whether the LBD function should be enabled or disabled on the ports specified in
the port list. The default state is disabled.
enable - Specify to enable the LBD function.
disable - Specify to disable the LBD function.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the LBD function on ports 1:1-1:5:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config loopdetect ports 1:1-1:5 state enable
Command: config loopdetect ports 1:1-1:5 state enable
Success.
53-3 enable loopdetect

Description
This command is used to enable the LBD function globally on the Switch. The default state is
disabled.
551

®
Format
enable loopdetect
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the LBD function globally:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable loopdetect
Command: enable loopdetect
Success.
53-4 disable loopdetect

Description
This command is used to disable the LBD function globally on the Switch.
Format
disable loopdetect
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable the LBD function globally:
552

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable loopdetect

Command: disable loopdetect
Success.
53-5 show loopdetect

Description
This command is used to display the LBD global configuration.
Format
show loopdetect
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To show the LBD global settings:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show loopdetect
Command: show loopdetect
LBD Global Settings

---------------------------
Status : Disabled
Mode : Port-based
Interval : 10 sec
Recover Time : 60 sec
Trap State : None
Log State : Enabled
Function Version : v4.04
53-6 show loopdetect ports

Description
This command is used to display the LBD per-port configuration.
553

®
Format
show loopdetect ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
ports - Specify the range of member ports that will display the LBD settings.
<portlist> - Enter the list of port to be configured here.
If no port is specified, the configuration for all ports will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the LBD settings on ports 1-9:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show loopdetect ports 1-9
Command: show loopdetect ports 1-9
Port Loopdetect State Loop Status

------ ------------------ ----------
1 Enabled Normal
2 Enabled Normal
3 Enabled Normal
4 Enabled Normal
5 Enabled Loop!
6 Enabled Normal
7 Enabled Loop!
8 Enabled Normal
9 Enabled Normal
53-7 config loopdetect trap

Description
This command is used to configure the trap modes for LBD.
Format
config loopdetect trap [none | loop_detected | loop_cleared | both]
Parameters
none - There is no trap in the LBD function.
loop_detected - Trap will only be sent when the loop condition is detected.
loop_cleared - Trap will only be sent when the loop condition is cleared.
both - Trap will either be sent when the loop condition is detected or cleared.
554

®
Restrictions
Example
To specify that traps will be sent when the loop condition is detected or cleared:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config loopdetect trap both
Command: config loopdetect trap both
Success.
53-8 config loopdetect log

Description
This command is used to configure the log state for LBD. The default value is enabled.
Format
config loopdetect log state [enable | disable]
Parameters
state - Specify the state of the LBD log feature.
enable - Enable the LBD log feature.
disable - Disable the LBD log feature. All LBD-related logs will not be recorded.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the log state for LBD:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config loopdetect log state enable
Command: config loopdetect log state enable
Success.
555

®
Chapter 54 Loopback Interface

Command List
create loopback ipif <ipif_name 12> {<network_address>} {state [enable | disable]}
config loopback ipif <ipif_name 12> [{ipaddress <network_address> | state [enable | disable]}(1)]
delete loopback ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all]
show loopback ipif {<ipif_name 12>}
54-1 create loopback ipif

Description
This command is used to create a loopback interface on the Switch.
Format
create loopback ipif <ipif_name 12> {<network_address>} {state [enable | disable]}
Parameters
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name used for this configuration here. This name can be
<network_address> - (Optional) Enter the IPv4 network address of the loopback interface here.
It specifies a host address and length of network mask.
state - (Optional) Specify the state of the loopback interface.
enable - Specify that the loopback interface state will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the loopback interface state will be disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To create one loopback interface named loopback1 with subnet address 20.1.1.1/8 and enable the
admin state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create loopback ipif loopback1 20.1.1.1/8 state enable
Command: create loopback ipif loopback1 20.1.1.1/8 state enable
Success.
54-2 config loopback ipif

Description
This command is used to configure the loopback interface parameters.
556

®
Format
config loopback ipif <ipif_name 12> [{ipaddress <network_address> | state [enable |
disable]}(1)]
Parameters
ipaddress –Specify the IPv4 network address of the loopback interface.
<network_address> - Enter the IPv4 network address of the loopback interface here. It specifies
a host address and length of network mask.
state - Specify the state of the loopback interface.
enable - Specify that the loopback interface state will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the loopback interface state will be disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the loopback interface named loopback1 with subnet address 10.0.0.1/8:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config loopback ipif loopback1 ipaddress 10.0.0.1/8
Command: config loopback ipif loopback1 ipaddress 10.0.0.1/8
Success.
54-3 delete loopback ipif

Description
This command is used to delete a loopback interface.
Format
delete loopback ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all]
Parameters
all – Specify that all the IP loopback interfaces will be deleted.
Restrictions
557

®
Example
To delete the loopback interface named loopback1:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete loopback ipif loopback1
Command: delete loopback ipif loopback1
Success.
54-4 show loopback ipif

Description
This command is used to display the information of the loopback interface.
Format
show loopback ipif {<ipif_name 12>}
Parameters
<ipif_name 12> - (Optional) Enter the IP interface name used for this configuration here. This
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the information of the loopback interface named loopback1:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show loopback ipif loopback1
Command: show loopback ipif loopback1
Loopback Interface : loopback1

IPv4 Address : 20.0.0.2/8 (Manual)
Total Entries : 1
558

®
Chapter 55 MAC Notification Command

List
enable mac_notification
disable mac_notification
config mac_notification {interval <sec 1-2147483647> | historysize <int 1-500>}
config mac_notification ports [<portlist> | all] [enable | disable]
show mac_notification
show mac_notification ports {<portlist>}
55-1 enable mac_notification

Description
This command is used to enable global MAC address table notification on the Switch.
Format
enable mac_notification
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable mac_notification function:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable mac_notification
Command: enable mac_notification
Success.
55-2 disable mac_notification

Description
This command is used to disable global MAC address table notification on the Switch.
Format
disable mac_notification
559

®
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable mac_notification function:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable mac_notification
Command: disable mac_notification
Success.
55-3 config mac_notification

Description
This command is used to configure the Switch’s MAC address table notification global settings.
Format
config mac_notification {interval <sec 1-2147483647> | historysize <int 1-500>}
Parameters
interval - (Optional) The time in seconds between notifications.
<sec 1-2147483647> - Enter the interval time here. This value must be between 1 and
2147483647 seconds.
historysize - (Optional) This is maximum number of entries listed in the history log used for
notification. Up to 500 entries can be specified.
<int 1-500> - Enter the history log size here. This value must be between 1 and 500.
Restrictions
Example
To config the Switch’s Mac address table notification global settings:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config mac_notification interval 1 historysize 500
Command: config mac_notification interval 1 historysize 500
Success.
560

®
55-4 config mac_notification ports

Description
This command is used to configure the port’s MAC address table notification status settings.
Format
config mac_notification ports [<portlist> | all] [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enable the port’s MAC address table notification.
disable - Disable the port’s MAC address table notification.
Restrictions
Example
To enable 7th port’s mac address table notification:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config mac_notification ports 1:7 enable
Command: config mac_notification ports 1:7 enable
Success.
55-5 show mac_notification

Description
This command is used to display the Switch’s Mac address table notification global settings.
Format
show mac_notification
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
561

®
Example
To show the Switch’s Mac address table notification global settings:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show mac_notification
Command: show mac_notification
Global Mac Notification Settings
State : Enabled
Interval : 1
History Size : 500
55-6 show mac_notification ports

Description
This command is used to display the port’s Mac address table notification status settings.
Format
show mac_notification ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a list of ports used for the configuration here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display all port’s Mac address table notification status settings:
562

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show mac_notification ports

Command: show mac_notification ports
Port # MAC Address Table Notification State

------ ------------------------------------
1:1 Disabled
1:2 Disabled
1:3 Disabled
1:4 Disabled
1:5 Disabled
1:6 Disabled
1:7 Disabled
1:8 Disabled
1:9 Disabled
1:10 Disabled
563

®
Chapter 56 MAC-based Access Control

Command List
enable mac_based_access_control
disable mac_based_access_control
config mac_based_access_control password <passwd 16>
config mac_based_access_control password_type [manual_string | client_mac_address]
config mac_based_access_control method [local | radius]
config mac_based_access_control guest_vlan ports <portlist>
config mac_based_access_control ports [<portlist> | all] {state [enable | disable] | mode
[port_based | host_based] | aging_time [infinite | <min 1-1440>] | block_time <sec 0-300> |
max_users [<value 1-1000> | no_limit]}(1)
create mac_based_access_control [guest_vlan <vlan_name 32> | guest_vlanid <vlanid 1-
4094>]
delete mac_based_access_control [guest_vlan <vlan_name 32> | guest_vlanid <vlanid 1-
4094>]
clear mac_based_access_control auth_state [ports [all | <portlist>] | mac_addr <macaddr>]
create mac_based_access_control_local mac <macaddr> {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <
vlanid 1-4094>]}
config mac_based_access_control_local mac <macaddr> [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid
<vlanid 1-4094> | clear_vlan]
delete mac_based_access_control_local [mac <macaddr> | vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid
<vlanid 1-4094>]
config mac_based_access_control authorization attributes {radius [enable | disable] | local
[enable | disable]}(1)
show mac_based_access_control {ports {<portlist>}}
show mac_based_access_control_local {[mac <macaddr> | vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid
<vlanid 1-4094>]}
show mac_based_access_control auth_state ports {<portlist>}
config mac_based_access_control max_users [<value 1-1000> | no_limit]
config mac_based_access_control trap state [enable | disable]
config mac_based_access_control log state [enable | disable]
56-1 enable mac_based_access_control

Description
This command is used to enable MAC-based Access Control.
Format
enable mac_based_access_control
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
564

®
Example
To enable the MAC-based Access Control global state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable mac_based_access_control
Command: enable mac_based_access_control
Success.
56-2 disable mac_based_access_control

Description
This command is used to disable MAC-based Access Control.
Format
disable mac_based_access_control
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable the MAC-based Access Control global state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable mac_based_access_control
Command: disable mac_based_access_control
Success.
56-3 config mac_based_access_control password

Description
This command is used to configure the RADIUS authentication password for MAC-based Access
Control.
Format
config mac_based_access_control password <passwd 16>
565

®
Parameters
password - In RADIUS mode, the Switch will communicate with the RADIUS server using this
password. The maximum length of the key is 16.
<password> - Enter the password used here. The default password is “default”.
Restrictions
Example
To set the MAC-based Access Control password:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config mac_based_access_control password switch
Command: config mac_based_access_control password switch
Success.
56-4 config mac_based_access_control password_type

Description
This command is used to chose the password type used for authentication via the RADIUS server.
Format
config mac_based_access_control password_type [manual_string | client_mac_address]
Parameters
manual_string - Use the same password for all clients to communicate with the RADIUS server.
client_mac_address - Use the client’s MAC address as the password to communicate with the
RADIUS server.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the MAC-based Access Control using client’s MAC address as authentication
password:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config mac_based_access_control password_type
client_mac_address
Command: config mac_based_access_control password_type client_mac_address
Success.
566

®
56-5 config mac_based_access_control method

Description
This command is used to configure the MAC-based Access Control authentication method.
Format
config mac_based_access_control method [local | radius]
Parameters
local - Specify to authenticate via the local database.
radius - Specify to authenticate via a RADIUS server.
Restrictions
Example
To set the MAC-based Access Control authentication method as local:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config mac_based_access_control method local
Command: config mac_based_access_control method local
Success.
56-6 config mac_based_access_control guest_vlan

Description
This command is used to assign a specified port list to the MAC-based Access Control guest
VLAN. Ports that are not contained in port list will be removed from the MAC-based Access
Control guest VLAN.
For detailed information on the operation of MAC-based Access Control guest VLANs, please see
the description for the “config mac_based_access_control ports” command.
Format
config mac_based_access_control guest_vlan ports <portlist>
Parameters
ports - Specify MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN membership.
<portlist> - Enter the list of port used for this configuration here.
Restrictions
567

®
Example
To set the MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN membership:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config mac_based_access_control guest_vlan ports 1-8
Command: config mac_based_access_control guest_vlan ports 1-8
Success.
56-7 config mac_based_access_control ports

Description
This command is used to configure MAC-based Access Control port’s setting.
When the MAC-based Access Control function is enabled for a port and the port is not a MAC-
based Access Control guest VLAN member, the user who is attached to this port will not be
forwarded unless the user passes the authentication.
• A user that does not pass the authentication will not be serviced by the Switch.
• If the user passes the authentication, the user will be able to forward traffic operated under
the assigned VLAN.
When the MAC-based Access Control function is enabled for a port, and the port is a MAC-based
Access Control guest VLAN member, the port(s) will be removed from the original VLAN(s)
member ports, and added to MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN member ports.
• Before the authentication process starts, the user is able to forward traffic under the guest
VLAN.
• After the authentication process, the user will be able to access the assigned VLAN.
If the port authorize mode is port based mode, when the port has been moved to the authorized
VLAN, the subsequent users will not be authenticated again. They will operate in the current
authorized VLAN.
If the port authorize mode is host based mode, then each user will be authorized individually and
be capable of getting its own assigned VLAN.
If port’s block time is set to” infinite”, it means that a failed authentication client will never be
blocked. Block time will be set to “0”.
Format
config mac_based_access_control ports [<portlist> | all] {state [enable | disable] | mode
[port_based | host_based] | aging_time [infinite | <min 1-1440>] | block_time <sec 0-300> |
max_users [<value 1-1000> | no_limit]}(1)
568

®
Parameters
ports - Specify a range of ports for configuring the MAC-based Access Control function
parameters.
all - Specify all existed ports of switch for configuring the MAC-based Access Control function
parameters.
state - (Optional) Specify whether the port’s MAC-based Access Control function is enabled or
disabled.
enable - Specify that the port's MAC-based Access Control states will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the port's MAC-based Access Control states will be disabled.
mode - (Optional) Specify the MAC-based access control port mode used.
port_based - Specify that the MAC-based access control port mode will be set to port-based.
host_based - Specify that the MAC-based access control port mode will be set to host-based.
aging_time - (Optional) A time period during which an authenticated host will be kept in an
authenticated state. When the aging time has timed-out, the host will be moved back to
unauthenticated state.
infinite - If the aging time is set to infinite, it means that authorized clients will not be aged out
automatically.
<min 1-1440> - Enter the aging time value here. This value must be between 1 and 1440
minutes.
block_time - (Optional) If a host fails to pass the authentication, the next authentication will not
start within the block time unless the user clears the entry state manually. If the block time is
set to 0, it means do not block the client that failed authentication.
<sec 0-300> -Enter the block time value here. This value must be between 0 and 300
seconds.
max_users - (Optional) Specify maximum number of users per port.
<value 1-1000> - Enter the maximum number of users per port here. This value must be
between 1 and 1000.
no_limit - Specify to not limit the maximum number of users on the port. The default value is
128.
Restrictions
Example
To configure an unlimited number of maximum users for MAC-based Access Control on ports 1 to
8:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config mac_based_access_control ports 1:1-1:8 max_users
no_limit
Command: config mac_based_access_control ports 1:1-1:8 max_users no_limit
Success.
To configure the MAC-based Access Control timer parameters to have an infinite aging time and a
block time of 120 seconds on ports 1 to 8:
569

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config mac_based_access_control ports 1:1-1:8 aging_time

infinite block_time 120
Command: config mac_based_access_control ports 1:1-1:8 aging_time infinite
block_time 120
Success.
56-8 create mac_based_access_control

Description
This command is used to assign a static 802.1Q VLAN as a MAC-based Access Control guest
VLAN.
Format
create mac_based_access_control [guest_vlan <vlan_name 32> | guest_vlanid <vlanid 1-
4094>]
Parameters
guest_vlan - Specify MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN by name, it must be a static 1Q
VLAN.
guest_vlanid - Specify MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN by VID, it must be a static 1Q
VLAN.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID here. This value must be between 1 and 4094.
Restrictions
Example
To create a MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create mac_based_access_control guest_vlan VLAN8
Command: create mac_based_access_control guest_vlan VLAN8
Success.
56-9 delete mac_based_access_control

Description
This command is used to remove a MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN.
570

®
Format
delete mac_based_access_control [guest_vlan <vlan_name 32> | guest_vlanid <vlanid 1-
4094>]
Parameters
guest_vlan - Specify the name of the MAC-based Access Control’s guest VLAN.
guest_vlanid - Specify the VID of the MAC-based Access Control’s guest VLAN.
Restrictions
Example
To delete the MAC-based Access Control guest VLAN called default:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete mac_based_access_control guest_vlan default
Command: delete mac_based_access_control guest_vlan default
Success.
56-10 clear mac_based_access_control auth_state

Description
This command is used to clear the authentication state of a user (or port). The port (or the user)
will return to an un-authenticated state. All the timers associated with the port (or the user) will be
reset.
Format
clear mac_based_access_control auth_state [ports [all | <portlist>] | mac_addr <macaddr>]
Parameters
ports - To specify the port range to delete MAC addresses on them.
all - To specify all MAC-based Access Control enabled ports to delete MAC addresses.
mac_addr - To delete a specified host with this MAC address.
Restrictions
571

®
Example
To clear MAC-based Access Control clients’ authentication information for all ports:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# clear mac_based_access_control auth_state ports all
Command: clear mac_based_access_control auth_state ports all
Success.
To delete the MAC-based Access Control authentication information for the host that has a MAC
address of 00-00-00-47-04-65:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# clear mac_based_access_control auth_state mac_addr 00-00-
00-47-04-65
Command: clear mac_based_access_control auth_state mac_addr 00-00-00-47-04-65
Success.
56-11 create mac_based_access_control_local

Description
This command is used to create a MAC-based Access Control local database entry that will be
used for authentication. This command can also specify the VLAN that an authorized host will be
assigned to.
Format
create mac_based_access_control_local mac <macaddr> {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <
vlanid 1-4094>]}
Parameters
mac - Specify the MAC address that can pass local authentication.
vlan - (Optional) Specify the target VLAN by using the VLAN name. When this host is authorized,
it will be assigned to this VLAN.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the target VLAN by using the VID. When this host is authorized, it will
be assigned to this VLAN if the target VLAN exists.
If no vlanid or vlan parameter is specified, not specify the target VLAN for this host.
Restrictions
572

®
Example
To create one MAC-based Access Control local database entry for MAC address 00-00-00-00-00-
01 and specify that the host will be assigned to the “default” VLAN after the host has been
authorized:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create mac_based_access_control_local mac 00-00-00-00-00-
01 vlan default
Command: create mac_based_access_control_local mac 00-00-00-00-00-01 vlan
default
Success.
56-12 config mac_based_access_control_local

Description
This command is used to configure a MAC-based Access Control local database entry.
Format
config mac_based_access_control_local mac <macaddr> [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid
<vlanid 1-4094> | clear_vlan]
Parameters
mac - Specify the authenticated host’s MAC address.
vlan - Specify the target VLAN by VLAN name. When this host is authorized, the host will be
assigned to this VLAN.
vlanid - Specify the target VLAN by VID. When this host is authorized, the host will be assigned
to this VLAN if the target VLAN exists.
clear_vlan - Not specify the target VLAN. When this host is authorized, will not assign target
VLAN.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the target VLAN “default” for the MAC-based Access Control local database entry 00-
00-00-00-00-01:
573

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config mac_based_access_control_local mac 00-00-00-00-00-

01 vlan default
Command: config mac_based_access_control_local mac 00-00-00-00-00-01 vlan
default
Success.
56-13 delete mac_based_access_control_local

Description
This command is used to delete a MAC-based Access Control local database entry.
Format
delete mac_based_access_control_local [mac <macaddr> | vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid
<vlanid 1-4094>]
Parameters
mac - Delete local database entry by specific MAC address.
vlan - Delete local database entries by specific target VLAN name.
vlanid - Delete local database entries by specific target VLAN ID.
Restrictions
Example
To delete the MAC-based Access Control local database entry for MAC address 00-00-00-00-00-
01:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete mac_based_access_control_local mac 00-00-00-00-00-
01
Command: delete mac_based_access_control_local mac 00-00-00-00-00-01
Success.
To delete the MAC-based Access Control local database entry for the VLAN name VLAN3:
574

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete mac_based_access_control_local vlan VLAN3

Command: delete mac_based_access_control_local vlan VLAN3
Success.
56-14 config mac_based_access_control authorization attributes

Description
This command is used to enable or disable the acceptation of an authorized configuration.
When authorization is enabled for MAC-based Access Controls with RADIUS authentication, the
authorized attributes (for example VLAN, 802.1p default priority, and ACL) assigned by the
RADUIS server will be accepted if the global authorization status is enabled.
When authorization is enabled for MAC-based Access Controls with local authentication, the
authorized attributes assigned by the local database will be accepted.
Format
config mac_based_access_control authorization attributes {radius [enable | disable] | local
[enable | disable]}(1)
Parameters
radius - (Optional) If specified to enable, the authorized attributes (for example VLAN, 802.1p
default priority, and ACL) assigned by the RADUIS server will be accepted if the global
authorization status is enabled. The default state is enabled.
enable - Specify that the radius attributes will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the radius attributes will be disabled.
local - (Optional) If specified to enable, the authorized attributes assigned by the local database
will be accepted if the global authorization status is enabled. The default state is enabled.
enable - Specify that the local attributes will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the local attributes will be disabled.
Restrictions
Example
The following example will disable the configuration authorized from the local database:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config mac_based_access_control authorization attributes
local disable
Command: config mac_based_access_control authorization attributes local disable
Success.
575

®
56-15 show mac_based_access_control

Description
This command is used to display the MAC-based Access Control setting.
Format
show mac_based_access_control {ports {<portlist>}}
Parameters
ports – (Optional) Displays the MAC-based Access Control settings for a specific port or range of
ports.
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter the list of port used for this configuration here.
If no parameter is specified, the global MAC-based Access Control settings will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the MAC-based Access Control port configuration for ports 1 to 4:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show mac_based_access_control ports 1:1-1:4
Command: show mac_based_access_control ports 1:1-1:4
Port State Aging Time Block Time Auth Mode Max User
(min) (sec)
----- -------- ---------- --------- ---------- --------
1:1 Disabled 1440 300 Host-based 128
56-16 show mac_based_access_control_local

Description
This command is used to display the MAC-based Access Control local database entry(s).
Format
show mac_based_access_control_local {[mac <macaddr> | vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid
<vlanid 1-4094>]}
Parameters
mac - (Optional) Displays MAC-based Access Control local database entries for a specific MAC
576

®
address.
vlan - (Optional) Displays MAC-based Access Control local database entries for a specific target
VLAN name.
vlanid - (Optional) Displays MAC-based Access Control local database entries for a specific
target VLAN ID.
If the parameter is no specified, displays all MAC-based Access Control local database entries.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show MAC-based Access Control local database for the VLAN called ‘default’:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show mac_based_access_control_local vlan default
Command: show mac_based_access_control_local vlan default
MAC Address VID

----------------- ----
00-00-00-00-00-01 1
00-00-00-00-00-04 1
Total Entries:2
56-17 show mac_based_access_control auth_state

Description
This command is used to display the MAC-based Access Control authentication status.
Format
show mac_based_access_control auth_state ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
ports - Display authentication status by specific port.
If not specified port(s), it will display all of MAC-based Access Control ports authentication status.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the MAC-based Access Control authentication status on port 1:1-1:4
577

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show mac_based_access_control auth_state ports 1:1-1:4

Command: show mac_based_access_control auth_state ports 1:1-1:4
(P): Port-based
Port MAC Address State VID

Priority Aging Time/
Block Time
---- -------------------- -------------- ---- -------- ------------
Total Authenticating Hosts : 0

Total Authenticated Hosts : 0
Total Blocked Hosts : 0
56-18 config mac_based_access_control max_users

Description
This command is used to configure the maximum number of authorized clients.
Format
config mac_based_access_control max_users [<value 1-1000> | no_limit]
Parameters
max_users - Specify to set the maximum number of authorized clients on the whole device. N is
project dependent.
<value 1-1000> - Enter the maximum users here. This value must be between 1 and 1000.
no_limit - Specify to not limit the maximum number of users on the system. By default, there
is no limit on the number of users.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the maximum number of users of the MAC-based Access Control system supports to
128:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config mac_based_access_control max_users 128
Command: config mac_based_access_control max_users 128
Success.
578

®
56-19 config mac_based_access_control trap state

Description
This command is used to enable or disable sending of MAC-based Access Control traps.
Format
config mac_based_access_control trap state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enable trap for MAC-based Access Control. The trap of MAC-based Access Control will
be sent out.
disable - Disable trap for MAC-based Access Control.
Restrictions
Example
To enable trap state of MAC-based Access Control:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config mac_based_access_control trap state enable
Command: config mac_based_access_control trap state enable
Success.
56-20 config mac_based_access_control log state

Description
This command is used to enable or disable generating of MAC-based Access Control logs.
Format
config mac_based_access_control log state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enable log for MAC-based Access Control. The log of MAC-based Access Control will
be generated.
disable - Disable log for MAC-based Access Control.
Restrictions
579

®
Example
To disable log state of MAC-based Access Control:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config mac_based_access_control log state disable
Command: config mac_based_access_control log state disable
Success.
580

®
Chapter 57 MAC-based VLAN Command

List
create mac_based_vlan mac_address <macaddr> [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-
4094>] {priority <value 0-7>}
delete mac_based_vlan {mac_address <macaddr> [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-
4094>]}
show mac_based_vlan {mac_address <macaddr> | [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-
4094>]}
57-1 create mac_based_vlan mac_address

Description
This command is used to create a static MAC-based VLAN entry.
This command only needs to be supported by the model which supports MAC-based VLAN.
There is a global limitation of the maximum entries supported for the static MAC-based entry.
Format
create mac_based_vlan mac_address <macaddr> [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-
4094>]
Parameters
mac_address - Specify the MAC address used.
vlan - The VLAN to be associated with the MAC address.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN by VLAN ID.
priority - Specify the priority that is assigned to untagged packets. If not specified, the priority is
the default value 0.
Restrictions
Example
To create a static MAC-based VLAN entry:
581

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create mac_based_vlan mac_address 00-11-22-33-44-55 vlanid

100
Command: create mac_based_vlan mac_address 00-11-22-33-44-55 vlanid 100
Success.
57-2 delete mac_based_vlan

Description
This command is used to delete the static MAC-based VLAN entry.
Format
delete mac_based_vlan {mac_address <macaddr> [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-
4094>]}
Parameters
mac_address - (Optional) Specify the MAC address used.
vlan - (Optional) The VLAN to be associated with the MAC address.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the VLAN by VLAN ID.
If no parameter is specified, ALL static configured entries will be removed.
Restrictions
Example
To delete a static MAC-based VLAN entry:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete mac_based_vlan mac_address 00-11-22-33-44-55 vlanid
100
Command: delete mac_based_vlan mac_address 00-11-22-33-44-55 vlanid 100
Success.
57-3 show mac_based_vlan

Description
This command is used to display the static or dynamic MAC-Based VLAN entry. If the MAC
address and VLAN is not specified, all static and dynamic entries will be displayed.
582

®
Format
show mac_based_vlan {mac_address <macaddr> | [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-
4094>]}
Parameters
mac_address - (Optional) Specify the entry that you would like to display.
vlan - (Optional) Specify the VLAN that you would like to display.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the VLAN by VLAN ID.
Restrictions
None.
Example
In the following example, MAC address “00-80-c2-33-c3-45” is assigned to VLAN 300 by manual
config. It is assigned to VLAN 400 by Voice VLAN. Since Voice VLAN has higher priority than
manual configuration, the manual configured entry will become inactive. To display the MAC-
based VLAN entry:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show mac_based_vlan
MAC Address VLAN ID Status Type

----------------- ------- -------- -------------------
00-80-e0-14-a7-57 200 Active Static
00-80-c2-33-c3-45 300 Inactive Static
00-80-c2-33-c3-45 400 Active Voice VLAN
Total Entries : 3
583

®
Chapter 58 MD5 Configuration

Only)
create md5 key <key_id 1-255> <password 16>
config md5 key <key_id 1-255> <password 16>
delete md5 key <key_id 1-255>
show md5 {key <key_id 1-255>}
58-1 create md5

Description
This command is used to create an MD5 key table.
Format
create md5 key <key_id 1-255> <password 16>
Parameters
<key_id 1-255> - Enter the MD5 key to be added. This key must be between 1 and 255.
<password 16> - Enter an alphanumeric string of between 1 and 16, case-sensitive characters,
used to generate the Message Digest which is in turn used to authenticate OSPF packets
within the OSPF routing domain.
Restrictions
Example
To create an MD5 key table:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create md5 key 1 dlink
Command: create md5 key 1 dlink
Success.
58-2 config md5

Description
This command is used to configure an MD5 key and password. The MD5 Configuration allows for
the entry of a 16 character Message Digest - version 5 (MD5) key which can be used to
584

®
authenticate every packet exchanged between OSPF routers. It is used as a security mechanism
to limit the exchange of network topology information to the OSPF routing domain.
Format
config md5 key <key_id 1-255> <password 16>
Parameters
key_id 1-255> - Enter the MD5 key to be configured. This key must be between 1 and 255.
<password 16> - Enter an alphanumeric string of between 1 and 16, case-sensitive characters,
used to generate the Message Digest which is in turn used to authenticate OSPF packets
within the OSPF routing domain.
Restrictions
Example
To configure an MD5 key and password:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config md5 key 1 dlink1
Command: config md5 key 1 dlink1
Success.
58-3 delete md5

Description
This command is used to delete an MD5 key table.
Format
delete md5 key <key_id 1-255>
Parameters
<key_id 1-255> - Enter the MD5 key to be removed. This key must be between 1 and 255.
Restrictions
Example
To delete an MD5 key table:
585

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete md5 key 1

Command: delete md5 key 1
Success.
58-4 show md5

Description
This command is used to display the MD5 key table.
Format
show md5 {key <key_id 1-255>}
Parameters
key - (Optional) Specify that the MD5 key will be displayed.
<key_id 1-255> - Enter the MD5 key used here. This key must be between 1 and 255.
If no parameter is specified, the system will display the MD5 key table.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the MD5 key table:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show md5
Command: show md5
MD5 Key Table Configurations
Key-ID Key
------ ----------
1 dlink1
Total Entries: 1
586

®
Chapter 59 Mirror Command List

config mirror port <port> {[add | delete] source ports <portlist> [rx | tx | both]}
enable mirror
disable mirror
show mirror {group_id <value 1-4>}
create mirror group_id <value 1-4>
config mirror group_id <value 1-4> {target_port <port> | [add | delete] source ports <portlist> [rx |
tx | both] | state [enable | disable]}(1)
delete mirror group_id <value 1-4>
59-1 config mirror

Description
This command is used to configure a mirror port − source port pair on the Switch. Traffic from any
source port to a target port can be mirrored for real-time analysis. A logic analyzer or an RMON
probe then can be attached to study the traffic crossing the source port in a completely unobtrusive
manner. When mirroring port traffic, please note that the target port operates at the same speed as
the source port. If the target port is operating at a lower speed, the source port will be forced to
drop its operating speed to match that of the target port.
Format
config mirror port <port> {[add | delete] source ports <portlist> [rx | tx | both]}
Parameters
port - The port that will receive the packets duplicated at the mirror port.
<port> - Enter the port number to be configured here.
add - (Optional) The mirror entry to be added.
delete - (Optional) The mirror entry to be deleted.
source ports - (Optional) The port that will be mirrored. All packets entering and leaving the
source port can be duplicated in the mirror port.
rx - (Optional) Allows the mirroring packets received (flowing into) the port or ports in the port list.
tx - (Optional) Allows the mirroring packets sent (flowing out of) the port or ports in the port list.
both - (Optional) Mirrors all the packets received or sent by the port or ports in the port list.
Restrictions
Example
To add the mirroring ports:
587

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config mirror port 1:3 add source ports 1:7-1:12 both

Command: config mirror port 1:3 add source ports 1:7-1:12 both
Success.
59-2 enable mirror

Description
This command is used to enable mirror function without having to modify the mirror session
configuration.
Format
enable mirror
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable mirroring function:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable mirror
Command: enable mirror
Success.
59-3 disable mirror

Description
This command is used to disable mirror function without having to modify the mirror session
configuration.
Format
disable mirror
Parameters
None.
588

®
Restrictions
Example
To disable mirroring function:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable mirror
Command: disable mirror
Success.
59-4 show mirror

Description
This command is used to display the current mirror function state and mirror session configuration
on the Switch.
Format
show mirror {group_id <value 1-4>}
Parameters
group_id - (Optional) Specify a mirror group ID.
<value 1-4> - Enter a mirro group identify value.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display mirroring configuration:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show mirror
Command: show mirror
Mirror Global State: Enabled
Group State Target Port Source Ports

------- ---------- ------------- ---------------------------------------------
-
1 Enabled 1:3 RX: 1:7-1:12
TX: 1:7-1:12
589

®
59-5 create mirror group_id

Description
This command is used to a mirror group on the switch
Format
create mirror group_id <value 1-4>
Parameters
Restrictions
Example
To create mirror group 3:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create mirror group_id 3
Command: create mirror group_id 3
Success.
59-6 config mirror group_id

Description
This command is used to configure mirror group’s parameters. It can configure mirror group’s
target port, state and source ports. The mirror group target port can’t be a member of all mirror
groups’ source ports. Each mirror group’s target port can be the same port. But each mirror
group’s source ports can’t overlap.
Format
config mirror group_id <value 1-4> {target_port <port> | [add | delete] source ports
<portlist> [rx | tx | both] | state [enable | disable]}(1)
Parameters
target_port - The port that receives the packets duplicated at the mirror port.
<port> - Specify the port.
add - Add the mirror source ports.
delete - Delete mirror source ports.
source ports – Specify the mirror group source ports.
<portlist> - Enter a list of ports.
rx - Only the received packets on the mirror group source ports will be mirrored to the
590

®
mirror group target port.

tx - Only the sent packets on the mirror group source ports will be mirrored to the mirror
group target port.
both - Both the received and sent packets on the mirror group source ports will be
mirrored to the mirror group target port.
state - Specify the mirror group state.
enable - Enable the mirror group function.
disable - Disable the mirror group function.
Restrictions
Example
To configure mirror group 3 with state enable and add source ports 1:4-1:9:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config mirror group_id 3 state enable add source ports 1:4-
1:9 both
Command: config mirror group_id 3 state enable add source ports 1:4-1:9 both
Success.
59-7 delete mirror group_id

Description
This command is used to delete a mirror group.
Format
delete mirror group_id <value 1-4>
Parameters
Restrictions
Example
To delete mirror group 3:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete mirror group_id 3
Command: delete mirror group_id 3
Success.
591

®
Chapter 60 Multicast Listener

Discovery Protocol (MLD)
Only)
config mld [ipif <ipif_name 12> | all] {query_interval <sec 1-31744> | max_response_time <sec 1-
25> | robustness_variable <value 2-7> | last_listener_query_interval <sec 1-25> | version
<value 1-2> | state [enable | disable]}(1)
show mld {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
show mld group {ipif <ipif_name 12> | group <ipv6addr>}
60-1 config mld

Description
This command is used to configure MLD on the Switch.
Format
config mld [ipif <ipif_name 12> | all] {query_interval <sec 1-31744> | max_response_time
<sec 1-25> | robustness_variable <value 2-7> | last_listener_query_interval <sec 1-25> |
version <value 1-2> | state [enable | disable]}(1)
Parameters
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name used for this configuration. This name can be
all - Specify that all the IP interfaces to be used.
query_interval - Specify the time in seconds between general query transmissions.
<sec 1-31744> - Enter the query interval time. This value must be between 1 and 31744
max_response_time - Specify the maximum time in seconds to wait for reports from members.
<sec 1-25> - Enter the maximum response time here. This value must be between 1 and 25
robustness_variable - Specify the permitted packet loss that guarantees MLD.
<value 2-7> - Enter the robustness variable here. This value must be between 2 and 7. The
default value is 2.
last_member_query_interval - Specify the maximum Response Time inserted into the Multicast
Address Specific Query sent in response to Done Group messages, which is also the amount
of time between Multicast Address Specific Query messages.
<value 1-25> - Enter the last member query interval value here. This value must be between
1 and 25. The default value is 1.
version - Specify the MLD version.
<value 1-2> - Enter the MLD version number. This value must be between 1 and 2. The
default value is 2.
state - Specify the MLD state on a router interface.
enable - Specify that the MLD state will be enabled.
592

®
disable - Specify that the MLD state will be disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the MLD on the IP interface “System”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config mld ipif System version 1 state enable
Command: config mld ipif System version 1 state enable
Success.
60-2 show mld

Description
This command is used to display the MLD configurations on the switch.
Format
show mld {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
Parameters
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the MLD configurations on all interfaces::
593

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show mld
Command: show mld
MLD Interface Configurations
MRT = Maximum Response Time, LLQI = Last Listener Query Interval
Interface Version Query MRT Robustness LLQI State

------------ ------- ------ ------ ---------- ------ --------
System 1 125 10 2 1 Enabled
Total Entries: 1
60-3 show mld group

Description
This command is used to display the MLD group member table.
Format
show mld group {ipif <ipif_name 12> | group <ipv6addr>}
Parameters
group - (Optional) Specify the IPv6 multicast group address.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 multicast group address.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display all the MLD group member information:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show mld group
Command: show mld group
Interface Multicast Group Expiry

------------ ------------------------------ ------
System FF1E::100:0:0:20 260 260
Total Entries : 1
594

®
Chapter 61 MLD Proxy Command List

(RI Mode Only)
enable mld_proxy
disable mld_proxy
config mld_proxy downstream_if [add | delete] vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>]
config mld_proxy upstream_if {vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>] | router_ports
[add | delete] <portlist> | source_ip <ipv6addr> | unsolicited_report_interval <sec 0-25>}(1)
show mld_proxy {group}
61-1 enable mld_proxy

Description
This command is used to enable the MLD proxy on the switch.
Format
enable mld_proxy
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the MLD proxy:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable mld_proxy
Command: enable mld_proxy
Success.
61-2 disable mld_proxy

Description
This command is used to disable the MLD proxy on the switch.
Format
disable mld_proxy
595

®
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable the MLD proxy:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable mld_proxy
Command: disable mld_proxy
Success.
61-3 config mld_proxy downstream_if

Description
This command configures the MLD proxy downstream interfaces. The MLD proxy plays the server
role on the downstream interfaces. The downstream interface must be an MLD Snooping enabled
VLAN.
Format
config mld_proxy downstream_if [add | delete] vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>]
Parameters
add - Specify to add a downstream interface.
delete - Specify to delete a downstream interface .
vlan - Specify the VLAN by name or ID.
<vlan_name 32> - Specify a name of VLAN which belong to the MLD proxy downstream
interface. The maximum length is 32 characters.
vlanid - Specify a list of VLAN IDs which belong to the MLD proxy downstream interface.
<vidlist> - Specify a list of VLAN IDs which belong to the MLD proxy downstream
interface.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the MLD Proxy’s downstream interface:
596

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config mld_proxy downstream_if add vlan vlanid 2-7

Command: config mld_proxy downstream_if add vlan vlanid 2-7
Success.
61-4 config mld_proxy upstream_if

Description
This command is used to configure the setting for the MLD proxy’s upstream interface. The MLD
proxy plays the host role on the upstream interface. It will send MLD report packets to the router
port. The source IP address determines the source IP address to be encoded in the MLD protocol
packet. If the router port is empty, the upstream will send the MLD protocol packet to all member
ports on the upstream interface.
Format
config mld_proxy upstream_if {vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>] |
router_ports [add | delete] <portlist> | source_ip <ipv6addr> | unsolicited_report_interval
<sec 0-25>}(1)
Parameters
vlan - Specify the VLAN for the upstream interface.
<vlan_name 32> - Specify a VLAN name between 1 and 32 characters.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID for the upstream interface.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Specify the VLAN ID between 1 and 4094.
router_ports - Specify a list of ports that are connected to multicast-enabled routers.
source_ip - Specify the source IPv6 address of the upstream protocol packet. If it is not
specified, zero IP address will be used as the protocol source IP address.
<ipv6addr>> - Specify the IPv6 address.
unsolicited_report_interval - Specify the time between repetitions of the host's initial report of
membership in a group. The default is 10 seconds. If set to 0, only one report packet is sent.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the router port of MLD proxy’s upstream interface:
597

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config mld_proxy upstream_if vlan default router_ports add

1:3
Command: config mld_proxy upstream_if vlan default router_ports add 1:3
Success.
61-5 show mld_proxy

Description
This command is used to display the MLD proxy’s configuration or group information. The display
status item means group entry is determined by whether or not the chip has been inserted.
Format
show mld_proxy {group}
Parameters
group - (Optional) Specify the group information.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the MLD proxy’s information:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show mld_proxy
Command: show mld_proxy
MLD Proxy Global State : Enabled
Upstream Interface
VLAN ID : 1
Dynamic Router Ports : 1:1-1:4
Static Router Ports : 1:5
Unsolicited Report Interval : 10
Source IP Address : ::
Downstream Interface
VLAN List : 2-4
To display the MLD proxy’s group information:
598

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show mld_proxy group

Command: show mld_proxy group
Source : NULL
Group : FF1E::0202
Downstream VLAN : 4
Member Ports : 3,6
Status : Active
Source : FF80::200
Group : FF1E::0202
Downstream VLAN : 2
Member Ports : 2,5,8
Status : Inactive
Total Entries: 2
599

®
Chapter 62 MLD Snooping Command

List
The Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) is used by IPv6 routers to discover multicast listeners on a
directly attached link, much as IGMP is used in IPv4. The protocol is embedded in ICMPv6 instead
of using a separate protocol. MLDv1 is similar to IGMPv2 and MLDv2 similar to IGMPv3.
config mld_snooping [vlan_name <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> |all] {state [enable |
disable] | fast_done [enable | disable] | proxy_reporting {state [enable | disable] | source_ip
<ipv6addr>}(1)}(1)
config mld_snooping querier [vlan_name <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | all]
<value 1-7> | last_listener_query_interval <sec 1-25> | state [enable | disable] | version
<value 1-2>}(1)
config mld_snooping mrouter_ports [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] [add | delete]
<portlist>
config mld_snooping mrouter_ports_forbidden [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>]
enable mld_snooping
disable mld_snooping
show mld_snooping {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>]}
show mld_snooping group {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | ports <portlist>]
{<ipv6addr>}} {data_driven}
show mld_snooping forwarding {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>]}
show mld_snooping mrouter_ports [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | all] {[static |
dynamic | forbidden]}
create mld_snooping static_group [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipv6addr>
delete mld_snooping static_group [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipv6addr>
config mld_snooping static_group [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipv6addr> [add
| delete] <portlist>
show mld_snooping static_group {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipv6addr>}
config mld_snooping data_driven_learning [all | vlan_name <vlan_name 32> | vlanid
<vlanid_list>] { state [enable | disable] | aged_out [enable | disable ] | expiry_time <sec 1-
65535>}(1) (EI and SI Mode Only)
config mld_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry <value 1-1024> (EI and SI
Mode Only)
clear mld_snooping data_driven_group [all | [vlan_name <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>]
[<ipv6addr>| all]] (EI and SI Mode Only)
show mld_snooping statistic counter [vlan <vlan_name> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | ports <portlist>]
clear mld_snooping statistics counter
config mld_snooping rate_limit [ports <portlist> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] [<value 1-1000> | no_limit]
show mld_snooping rate_limit [ports <portlist> | vlanid <vlanid_list>]
62-1 config mld_snooping

Description
This command is used to configure MLD snooping on the Switch.
600

®
Format
config mld_snooping [vlan_name <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> |all] {state [enable |
disable] | fast_done [enable | disable] | proxy_reporting {state [enable | disable] | source_ip
<ipv6addr>}(1)}(1)
Parameters
vlan_name - Specify the name of the VLAN for which MLD snooping is to be configured.
long.
vlanid - Specify the ID of the VLAN for which MLD snooping is to be configured.
all - Specify all VLANs for which MLD snooping is to be configured.
state - Enable or disable MLD snooping for the chosen VLAN.
enable - Enter enable here to enable MLD snooping for the chosen VLAN.
disable - Enter disable here to disable MLD snooping for the chosen VLAN.
fast_done - Enable or disable MLD snooping fast_leave function.
enable - Enter enable here to enable MLD snooping fast_leave function. If enable, the
membership is immediately removed when the system receive the MLD leave message.
disable - Enter disable here to disable MLD snooping fast_leave function.
proxy reporting - Specify MLD proxy reporting.
state - Enable or disable the proxy reporting.
enable - Enable the proxy reporting.
disable - Disable the proxy reporting.
source_ip - Specify the source IP of proxy reporting integrated report. Default value is zero
IP.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the Ipv6 address.
Restrictions
Example
To configure MLD snooping:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config mld_snooping vlan_name default state enable
Command: config mld_snooping vlan_name default state enable
Success.
62-2 config mld_snooping querier

Description
This command is used to configure the timer in seconds between general query transmissions, the
maximum time in seconds to wait for reports from listeners, and the permitted packet loss that is
guaranteed by MLD snooping.
601

®
Format
config mld_snooping querier [vlan_name <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | all]
<value 1-7> | last_listener_query_interval <sec 1-25> | state [enable | disable] | version
<value 1-2>}(1)
Parameters
vlan_name - Specify the name of the VLAN for which MLD snooping querier is to be configured.
long.
vlanid - Specify the ID of the VLAN for which MLD snooping querier is to be configured.
all - Specify all VLANs for which MLD snooping querier is to be configured.
query_interval - Specify the amount of time in seconds between general query transmissions.
The default setting is 125 seconds.
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the query interval value here. This value must be between 1 and
65535 seconds.
max_reponse_time - Specify the maximum time in seconds to wait for reports from listeners.
The default setting is 10 seconds.
<sec 1-25> - Enter the maximum response time value here. This value must be between 1
and 25 seconds.
robustness_variable - Provides fine-tuning to allow for expected packet loss on a subnet. The
value of the robustness variable is used in calculating the following MLD message intervals:
<value 1-7> - Enter the robustness variable value here. This value must be between 1 and 7.
• Group listener interval—Amount of time that must pass before a multicast router decides
there are no more listeners of a group on a network. This interval is calculated as follows:
(robustness variable * query interval) + (1 * query response interval).
• Other querier present interval—Amount of time that must pass before a multicast router
decides that there is no longer another multicast router that is the querier. This interval is
calculated as follows: (robustness variable * query interval) + (0.5 * query response
interval).
• Last listener query count—Number of group-specific queries sent before the router
assumes there are no local listeners of a group. The default number is the value of the
robustness variable.
• By default, the robustness variable is set to 2. You might want to increase this value if
you expect a subnet to be loosely.
last_listener_query_interval - (Optional) Specify the maximum amount of time between group-
specific query messages, including those sent in response to done-group messages. You
might lower this interval to reduce the amount of time it takes a router to detect the loss of the
last listener of a group.
<sec 1-25> - Enter the last listener query interval value here. This value must be between 1
and 25 seconds.
state - (Optional) This allows the Switch to be specified as an MLD Querier (sends MLD query
packets) or a Non-Querier (does not send MLD query packets). Set to enable or disable.
enable - Enter enable to enable the MLD querier state here.
disable - Enter disable to disable the MLD querier state here.
version - (Optional) Specify the version of MLD packet that will be sent by this port. If a MLD
packet received by the interface has a version higher than the specified version, this packet
will be dropped.
<value 1-2> - Enter the version number value here. This value must be between 1 and 2.
Restrictions
602

®
Example
To configure the MLD snooping querier:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config mld_snooping querier vlan_name default
query_interval 125 state enable
Command: config mld_snooping querier vlan_name default query_interval 125 state
enable
Success.
62-3 config mld_snooping router_ports

Description
This command is used to designate a range of ports as being connected to multicast-enabled
routers. This will ensure that all packets with such a router as its destination will reach the
multicast-enabled router, regardless of protocol, etc.
Format
config mld_snooping mrouter_ports [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] [add |
delete] <portlist>
Parameters
long.
Restrictions
Example
To set up static router ports:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config mld_snooping mrouter_ports vlan default add 1:1-
1:10
Command: config mld_snooping mrouter_ports vlan default add 1:1-1:10
Success.
603

®
62-4 config mld_snooping router_ports_forbidden

Description
This command is used to designate a range of ports as being not connected to multicast-enabled
routers. This ensures that the forbidden router port will not propagate routing packets out.
Format
config mld_snooping mrouter_ports_forbidden [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>]
Parameters
long.
Restrictions
Example
To set up port range 1-10 to forbidden router ports of the default VLAN:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config mld_snooping mrouter_ports_forbidden vlan default
add 1:11
Command: config mld_snooping mrouter_ports_forbidden vlan default add 1:11
Success.
62-5 enable mld_snooping

Description
This command is used to enable MLD snooping on the Switch. The forward_mcrouter_only
function is disabled by default. The enable mld_snooping forward_mcrouter_only command will
enable the MLD snooping function and the forward multicast router only function.
If forward multicast router only is enabled, the Switch will forward all multicast traffic to the
multicast router, only. Otherwise, the Switch forwards all multicast traffic to any IP router.
Format
enable mld_snooping
604

®
Parameters
When the Switch receives an MLD report packet from a port, this port will be learned as a
member port of the multicast group that the port is reported, and the router will be a default
member of this multicast group. The multicast packet destined for this multicast group will be
forwarded to all the members of this multicast group.
Restrictions
Example
To enable MLD snooping on the Switch:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable mld_snooping
Command: enable mld_snooping
Success.
62-6 disable mld_snooping

Description
This command is used to disable MLD snooping on the Switch.
Format
disable mld_snooping
Parameters
When the Switch receives an MLD report packet from a port, this port will be learned as a
member port of the multicast group that the port is reported, and the router will be a default
member of this multicast group. The multicast packet destined for this multicast group will be
forwarded to all the members of this multicast group.
Restrictions
Example
To disable MLD snooping on the Switch:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable mld_snooping
Command: disable mld_snooping
Success.
605

®
62-7 show mld_snooping

Description
This command is used to display the current MLD snooping configuration on the Switch.
Format
show mld_snooping {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>]}
Parameters
vlan - (Optional) Specify the name of the VLAN for which you want to view the IGMP snooping
configuration.
long.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the ID of the VLAN for which you want to view the IGMP snooping
configuration.
If VLAN is not specified, the system will display all current MLD snooping configurations.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show MLD snooping:
Command: show mld_snooping
MLD Snooping Global State : Disabled
VLAN Name : default

Query Interval : 125
Max Response Time : 10
Robustness Value : 2
Last Listener Query Interval : 1
Querier State : Disabled
Querier Role : Non-Querier
Querier IP : ::
Querier Expiry Time : 0 secs
State : Disabled
Fast Done : Disabled
Rate Limit(pkt/sec) : No Limitation
Proxy Reporting : Disabled
Proxy Reporting Source IP : ::
Version : 2
Total Entries: 1
606

®
62-8 show mld_snooping group

Description
This command is used to display the current MLD snooping group information on the Switch.
Format
show mld_snooping group {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | ports <portlist>]
{<ipv6addr>}} {data_driven}
Parameters
vlan - (Optional) Specify the name of the VLAN for which you want to view MLD snooping group
information. If VLAN and ports and IP address are not specified, the system will display all
current IGMP snooping group information.
long.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the ID of the VLAN for which you want to view MLD snooping group
information.
ports - (Optional) Specify a list of ports for which you want to view MLD snooping group
information.
<portlist> - Enter the list of port here.
<ipv6addr> - (Optional) Specify the group IPv6 address for which you want to view MLD
snooping group information.
data_driven - (Optional) Display the data driven groups. (EI and SI Mode Only)
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show an MLD snooping group when MLD v2 is supported:
The first item means that for ports 1-2, the data from the 2001::1/FE1E::1 will be forwarded.
The second item means that for port 3, the data from the 2002::2/FE1E::1 must not be forwarded.
The third item means that for ports 4-5, the data from FE1E::2 will be forwarded, MLD v1 group
doesn't care about the source address.
The fourth item is a data-driven learned entry. The member port list is empty. The multicast
packets will be forwarded to the router ports. If the router port list is empty, the packet will be
dropped.
607

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show mld_snooping group

Command: show mld_snooping group
Source/Group : 2001::1/FE1E::1
Member Ports : 1-2
UP Time : 26
Expiry Time : 258
Source/Group : 2002::2/FE1E::1
VLAN Name/VID: : default/1
Member Ports : 3
UP Time : 29
Expiry Time : 247
Source/Group : NULL/FE1E::2
Member Ports : 4-5
UP Time : 40
Expiry Time : 205
Source/Group : NULL/FF1E::5
Reports : 0
Member Ports :
Router Ports : 24
UP Time : 100
Expiry Time : 200
Total Entries : 4
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show mld_snooping group data_driven

Command: show mld_snooping group data_driven
Source/Group : NULL/FF1E::5
Member Ports :
Router Ports : 24
UP Time : 100
Expiry Time : 200
Total Entries : 1
608

®
62-9 show mld_snooping forwarding

Description
This command is used to display the Switch’s current MLD snooping forwarding table. It provides
an easy way for users to check the list of ports that the multicast group that comes from specific
sources will be forwarded to. The packet comes from the source VLAN. They will be forwarded to
the forwarding VLAN. The MLD snooping further restricts the forwarding ports.
Format
show mld_snooping forwarding {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>]}
Parameters
vlan - (Optional) Specify the name of the VLAN for which you want to view MLD snooping
long.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the ID of the VLAN for which you want to view MLD snooping
If no parameter is specified, the system will display all current MLD snooping forwarding table
entries of the Switch.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show all MLD snooping forwarding entries located on the Switch.
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show mld_snooping forwarding
Command: show mld_snooping forwarding
VLAN Name : default

Source IP : 2001::1
Multicast Group: FE1E::1
Port Member : 2,7
VLAN Name : default

Source IP : 2001::2
Multicast Group: FF1E::1
Port Member : 5
Total Entries : 2
609

®
62-10 show mld_snooping mrouter_ports

Description
This command is used to display the currently configured router ports on the Switch.
Format
show mld_snooping mrouter_ports [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | all] {[static
| dynamic | forbidden]}
Parameters
long.
all - Specify all VLANs on which the router port resides.
static - (Optional) Displays router ports that have been statically configured.
dynamic - (Optional) Displays router ports that have been dynamically configured.
forbidden - (Optional) Displays forbidden router ports that have been statically configured.
If no parameter is specified, the system will display all currently configured router ports on the
Switch.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the mld_snooping router ports:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show mld_snooping mrouter_ports all
Command: show mld_snooping mrouter_ports all
VLAN Name : default

Static Router Port : 1:1-1:10
Dynamic Router Port :
Router IP : FE08::1
Forbidden Router Port : 1:11
Total Entries: 1
62-11 create mld_snooping static_group

Description
This command is used to create an MLD snooping static group. Member ports can be added to the
static group. The static member and the dynamic member ports form the member ports of a group.
610

®
The static group will only take effect when MLD snooping is enabled on the VLAN. For those static
member ports, the device needs to emulate the MLD protocol operation to the querier, and forward
the traffic destined to the multicast group to the member ports.
For a layer 3 device, the device is also responsible to route the packets destined for this specific
group to static member ports.
The static member ports will only affect MLD V2 operation.
The Reserved IP multicast addresses FF0x::/16 must be excluded from the configured group.
The VLAN must be created first before a static group can be created.
Format
create mld_snooping static_group [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipv6addr>
Parameters
long.
<ipv6addr> - Specify the multicast group IPv6 address.
Restrictions
Example
To create an MLD snooping static group for VLAN 1, group FF1E::1:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create mld_snooping default FF1E::1
Command: create mld_snooping default FF1E::1
Success.
62-12 delete mld_snooping static_group

Description
This command is used to delete a MLD Snooping multicast static group.
Format
delete mld_snooping static_group [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipv6addr>
Parameters
611

®
long.
<ipv6addr> - Specify the multicast group IP address.
Restrictions
Example
To delete an MLD snooping static group for VLAN 1, group FF1E::1:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete mld_snooping default FF1E::1
Command: delete mld_snooping default FF1E::1
Success.
62-13 config mld_snooping static_group

Description
This command is used to configure an MLD snooping multicast group static member port. When a
port is configured as a static member port, the MLD protocol will not operate on this port. For
example, suppose that a port is a dynamic member port learned by MLD. If this port is configured
as a static member later, then the MLD protocol will stop operating on this port. The MLD protocol
will resume once this port is removed from static member ports. The static member port will only
affect MLD V1 operation.
Format
config mld_snooping static_group [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipv6addr>
Parameters
long.
<ipv6addr> - Specify the multicast group IPv6 address.
add - Specify to add the member ports.
delete - Specify to delete the member ports.
Restrictions
612

®
Example
To unset port range 9-10 from MLD snooping static member ports for group FF1E::1 on default
VLAN:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config mld_snooping static_group vlan default FF1E::1
delete 2:9-2:10
Command: create mld_snooping static_group vlan default FF1E::1 delete 2:9-2:10
Success.
62-14 show mld_snooping static_group

Description
This command used to display the MLD snooping multicast group static members.
Format
show mld_snooping static_group {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] <ipv6addr>}
Parameters
vlan - (Optional) Specify the name of the VLAN on which the static group resides.
long.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the ID of the VLAN on which the static group resides.
<ipv6addr> - (Optional) Specify the multicast group IPv6 address.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display all the MLD snooping static groups:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show mld_snooping static_group
VLAN ID/Name IP Address Static Member Ports
-------------- ------------------ ------------------------
1 / default FF1E ::1 2:9-2:10
Total Entries : 1
613

®
62-15 config mld_snooping data_driven_learning (EI and SI Mode

Only)
Description
This command is used to enable or disable the data-driven learning of an MLD snooping group.
When data-driven learning is enabled for the VLAN, when the Switch receives the IP multicast
traffic, on this VLAN, an MLD snooping group will be created. That is, the learning of an entry is
not activated by MLD membership registration, but activated by the traffic. For an ordinary MLD
snooping entry, the MLD protocol will take care the aging out of the entry. For a data-driven entry,
the entry can be specified not to be aged out or to be aged out by the aged timer.
When the data driven learning is enabled, and the data driven table is not full, the multicast filtering
mode for all ports is ignored. That is, the multicast packets will be forwarded to router ports. If the
data driven learning table is full, the multicast packets will be forwarded according to the multicast
filtering mode.
Note that if a data-driven group is created and MLD member ports are learned later, the entry will
become an ordinary MLD snooping entry. That is, the aging out mechanism will follow the ordinary
MLD snooping entry.
Format
config mld_snooping data_driven_learning [all | vlan_name <vlan_name 32> | vlanid
<vlanid_list>] { state [enable | disable] | aged_out [enable | disable ] | expiry_time <sec 1-
65535>}(1)
Parameters
all - Specify that all VLANs are to be configured.
vlan_name - Specify the VLAN name to be configured.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID to be configured.
state - (Optional) Specify to enable or disable the data driven learning of MLD snooping groups.
By default, the state is enabled.
enable - Enter enable to enable the data driven learning state.
disable - Enter disable to disable the data driven learning state.
aged_out - (Optional) Enable or disable the aging out of entries. By default, the state is disabled.
enable - Enter enable to enable the aged out option.
disable - Enter disable to disable the aged out option.
expiry_time - (Optional) Specify the data driven group lifetime, in seconds. This parameter is
valid only when aged_out is enabled.
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the expiry time value here. This value must be between 1 and 65535
seconds.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the data driven learning of an MLD snooping group on the default VLAN:
614

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config mld_snooping data_driven_learning vlan default

state enable
Command: config mld_snooping data_driven_learning vlan default state enable
Success.
62-16 config mld_snooping data_driven_learning

max_learned_entry (EI and SI Mode Only)
Description
This command is used to configure the maximum number of groups that can be learned by data
driven.
When the table is full, the system will stop the learning of the new data-driven groups. Traffic for
the
Format
config mld_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry <value 1-1024>
Parameters
max_learned_entry - Specify the maximum number of groups that can be learned by data
driven. The suggested default setting is 56. This default setting may vary depending on
project.
<value 1-1024> - Enter the maximum learned entry value here. This value must be between 1
and 1024.
Restrictions
Example
To set the maximum number of groups that can be learned by data driven:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config mld_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry
50
Command: config mld_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry 50
Success.
62-17 clear mld_snooping data_driven_group (EI and SI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to delete the MLD snooping groups learned by data driven.
615

®
Format
clear mld_snooping data_driven_group [all | [vlan_name <vlan_name 32> | vlanid
<vlanid_list>] [<ipv6addr>| all]]
Parameters
all - Specify all VLANs to which IGMP snooping groups will be deleted.
vlan_name - Specify the VLAN name.
<ipaddr> - Specify the group’s IP address learned by data driven.
all - Specify to clear all data driven groups of the specified VLAN.
Restrictions
Example
To delete all the groups learned by data-driven:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# clear mld_snooping data_driven_group all
Command: clear mld_snooping data_driven_group all
Success.
62-18 show mld_snooping statistic counter

Description
This command is used to display the statistics counter for IGMP protocol packets that are received
by the Switch since IGMP snooping was enabled.
Format
show mld _snooping statistic counter [vlan <vlan_name> | vlanid <vlanid_list> | ports
<portlist>]
Parameters
vlan - Specify a VLAN to be displayed.
vlanid - Specify a list of VLANs to be displayed.
<portlist> - Enter the list of port here.
Restrictions
None.
616

®
Example
To show MLD snooping statistics counters:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show mld_snooping statistics counter vlanid 1
Command: show mld_snooping statistics counter vlanid 1
VLAN Name : Default

-----------------------------------------------
Total Groups : 10
Receive Statistics
Query
MLD v1 Query : 1
MLD v2 Query : 1
Total : 2
Report & Leave

MLD v1 Report : 0
MLD v2 Report : 10
MLD v1 Done : 1
Total : 11
Transmit Statistics
Query
MLD v1 Query : 1
MLD v2 Query : 1
Total : 2
Report & Leave
MLD v1 Report : 0
MLD v2 Report : 10
MLD v1 Done : 1
Total : 11
Total Entries : 1
62-19 clear mld_snooping statistic counter

Description
This command is used to clear MLD snooping statistics counters.
Format
clear mld _snooping statistics counter
617

®
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To clear MLD snooping statistics counter:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# clear mld_snooping statistic counter
Command: clear mld_snooping statistic counter
Success.
62-20 config mld_snooping rate_limit

Description
This command is used to configure the rate limit of MLD control packets that are allowed by each
port or VLAN.
Format
config mld_snooping rate_limit [ports <portlist> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] [<value 1-1000> |
no_limit]
Parameters
vlanid - Specify a range of VLANs to be configured.
<value 1-1024> - Configure the rate limit of MLD control packets that the Switch can process on
a specific port or VLAN. The rate is specified in packet per second. The packets that exceed
the limited rate will be dropped.
no_limit - Configure the rate limit of MLD control packets that the Switch can process on a
specific port or VLAN. The rate is specified in packet per second. The packets that exceed the
limited rate will be dropped. The default setting is no_limit.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the MLD snooping per port rate limit:
618

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config mld_snooping ports 1 rate_limit 100

Command: config mld_snooping ports 1 rate_limit 100
Success.
62-21 show mld_snooping rate_limit

Description
This command is used to configure the rate limit of MLD control packets that are allowed by each
port.
Format
show mld_snooping rate_limit [ports <portlist> | vlanid <vlanid_list>]
Parameters
ports - Specify a list of ports.
vlanid - Specify a list of VLANs.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To configure the mld_snooping per port rate_limit:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show mld_snooping rate_limit ports 1-15
Command: show mld_snooping rate_limit ports 1-15
Port Rate Limit

-------- -----------
1 No Limit
2 100
3 No Limit
4 No Limit
5 No Limit
Total Entries: 5
619

®
Chapter 63 MSTP debug enhancement

Command List
debug stp config ports [<portlist> | all] [event | bpdu | state_machine | all] state [disable | brief |
detail]
debug stp show information
debug stp show flag {ports <portlist>}
debug stp show counter {ports [<portlist> | all]}
debug stp clear counter [ports <portlist> | all]
debug stp state [enable | disable]
config stp trap {topo_change [disable | enable ] | new_root [enable | disable]}(1)
63-1 debug stp config ports

Description
This command is used to configure per-port STP debug level on the specified ports.
Format
debug stp config ports [<portlist> | all] [event | bpdu | state_machine | all] state [disable |
brief | detail]
Parameters
<portlist> - Specify the STP port range to debug.
all - Specify to debug all ports on the Switch.
event - Debug the external operation and event processing.
bpdu - Debug the BPDU’s that have been received and transmitted.
state_machine - Debug the state change of the STP state machine.
all - Debug all of the above.
state - Specify the state of the debug mechanism.
disable - Disables the debug mechanism.
brief - Sets the debug level to brief.
detail - Sets the debug level to detail.
Restrictions
Example
To configure all STP debug flags to brief level on all ports:
620

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# debug stp config ports all all state brief

Command: debug stp config ports all all state brief
Warning: only support local device.
Success.
63-2 debug stp show information

Description
This command is used to display STP detailed information, such as the hardware tables, the STP
state machine, etc.
Format
debug stp show information
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To show STP debug information:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# debug stp show information
Command: debug stp show information

Spanning Tree Debug Information:
----------------------------------------
Port Status In Hardware Table:
Instance 0:
Port 1:1 : FOR Port 1:2 : FOR Port 1:3 : FOR Port 1:4 : FOR Port 1:5 : FOR
Port 1:6 : FOR
Port 1:7 : FOR Port 1:8 : FOR Port 1:9 : FOR Port 1:10: FOR Port 1:11: FOR
Port 1:12: FOR
Port 1:13: FOR Port 1:14: FOR Port 1:15: FOR Port 1:16: FOR Port 1:17: FOR
Port 1:18: FOR
Port 1:19: FOR Port 1:20: FOR Port 1:21: FOR Port 1:22: FOR Port 1:23: FOR
Port 1:24: FOR
--------------------------------------
Root Priority And Times:
Instance 0:
Designated Root Bridge : 32768/00-01-70-33-21-02
External Root Cost : 0
621

®
Regional Root Bridge : 32768/00-01-70-33-21-02

Internal Root Cost : 0
Designated Bridge : 32768/00-01-70-33-21-02
Designated Port : 0
Message Age : 0
Max Age : 20
Forward Delay : 15
Hello Time : 2
--------------------------------------
Designated Priority And Times:
Instance 0:
--------------------------------------
Port Priority And Times:
Instance 0:
63-3 debug stp show flag

Description
This command is used to display the STP debug level on specified ports.
Format
debug stp show flag {ports <portlist>}
Parameters
ports - (Optional) Specify the STP ports to display.
If no parameter is specified, all ports on the Switch will be displayed.
Restrictions
Example
To display the debug STP levels on all ports:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#debug stp show flag
Command: debug stp show flag
Global State: Enabled
Port Index Event Flag BPDU Flag State Machine Flag

----------------------------------------------------------
1:1 Brief Brief Brief
622

®

63-4 debug stp show counter

Description
This command is used to display the STP counters.
Format
debug stp show counter {ports [<portlist> | all]}
Parameters
ports - (Optional) Specify the STP ports for display.
all - Display all port’s counters.
If no parameter is specified, display the global counters.
Restrictions
Example
To show the STP counters for port 9:
623

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# debug stp show counter ports 1:9

Command: debug stp show counter ports 1:9
STP Counters
--------------------------------------
Port 1:9 :
Receive: Transmit:
Total STP Packets : 0 Total STP Packets : 0
Configuration BPDU : 0 Configuration BPDU : 0
TCN BPDU : 0 TCN BPDU : 0
RSTP TC-Flag : 0 RSTP TC-Flag : 0
RST BPDU : 0 RST BPDU : 0
Discard:
Total Discarded BPDU : 0
Global STP Disabled : 0
Port STP Disabled : 0
Invalid packet Format : 0
Invalid Protocol : 0
Configuration BPDU Length : 0
TCN BPDU Length : 0
RST BPDU Length : 0
Invalid Type : 0
Invalid Timers : 0
63-5 debug stp clear counter

Description
This command is used to clear the STP counters.
Format
debug stp clear counter [ports <portlist> | all]
Parameters
ports - Specify the port range.
all - Clears all port counters.
Restrictions
Example
To clear all STP counters on the Switch:
624

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# debug stp clear counter ports all

Command: debug stp clear counter ports all
Success.
63-6 debug stp state

Description
This command is used to enable or disable the STP debug state.
Format
debug stp state [enable | disable]
Parameters
state - Specify the STP debug state.
enable - Enable the STP debug state.
disable - Disable the STP debug state.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the STP debug state to enable, and then disable the STP debug state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# debug stp state enable
Command: debug stp state enable
Success.
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# debug stp state disable

Command: debug stp state disable
Success.
63-7 config stp trap

Description
This command is used to configure sending the STP traps.
625

®
Format
config stp trap {topo_change [disable | enable ] | new_root [enable | disable]}(1)
Parameters
topo_change - Specify the state of sending new root traps. The default state is enable.
disable - Disable sending new root traps.
enable - Enable sending new root traps.
new_root - Specify the state of sending topology change traps. The default state is enable.
enable - Enable sending topology change traps.
disable - Enable sending topology change traps.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the sending state for STP traps:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config stp trap new_root enable
Command: config stp trap new_root enable
Success.
DGS-3120-24TC:
626

®
Chapter 64 Multicast Filter Command

List
create mcast_filter_profile {[ipv4 | ipv6]} profile_id <value 1-24> profile_name <name 32>
config mcast_filter_profile [profile_id <value 1-24> | profile_name <name 32>] {profile_name
<name 32> | [add | delete] <mcast_address_list>}(1)
config mcast_filter_profile ipv6 [profile_id <value 1-24> | profile_name <name 32>]
{profile_name <name 32> | [add | delete] <mcastv6_address_list>}(1)
delete mcast_filter_profile {[ipv4 | ipv6]} [profile_id [<value 1-24> | all] | profile_name <name 32>]
show mcast_filter_profile {[ipv4 | ipv6]} {[profile_id <value 1-24> | profile_name <name 32>]}
config limited_multicast_addr [ports <portlist> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] {[ipv4 | ipv6]} {[add
[profile_id <value 1-24> | profile_name <name 32>] | delete [profile_id <value 1-24> |
profile_name <name 32> | all]] | access [permit | deny]}(1)
config max_mcast_group [ports <portlist> | vlanid <vlanid_list] {[ipv4 | ipv6]} {max_group [<value
1-1024> | infinite] | action [ drop | replace]}(1)
show max_mcast_group [ports {<portlist>} | vlanid {<vlanid_list >}] {[ipv4 | ipv6]}
show limited_multicast_addr [ports {<portlist>} | vlanid {<vlanid_list>}] {[ipv4 | ipv6]}
config cpu_filter l3_control_pkt <portlist> [{dvmrp | pim | igmp_query} | all] state [enable |
disable]
show cpu_filter l3_control_pkt ports {<portlist>}
64-1 create mcast_filter_profile

Description
This command is used to configure a multicast address profile. Multiple ranges of multicast
addresses can be defined in the profile. If the IPv4 or ipv6 option is not specified, IPv4 is implied.
Format
create mcast_filter_profile {[ipv4 | ipv6]} profile_id <value 1-24> profile_name <name 32>
Parameters
ipv4 - (Optional) Adds an IPv4 multicast profile.
ipv6 - (Optional) Adds an IPv6 multicast profile.
profile_id - The ID of the profile. Range is 1 to n.
profile_name - Provides a meaningful description for the profile.
<name 32> - Enter the profile name here. The profile name can be up to 32 characters long.
Restrictions
Example
To create a multicast address profile with a profile ID of 2 and a profile name of MOD:
627

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create mcast_filter_profile profile_id 2 profile_name MOD

Command: create mcast_filter_profile profile_id 2 profile_name MOD
Success.
64-2 config mcast_filter_profile

Description
This command is used to add or delete a range of multicast IP addresses to or from the profile.
Format
config mcast_filter_profile [profile_id <value 1-24> | profile_name <name 32>] {profile_name
<name 32> | [add | delete] <mcast_address_list>}(1)
Parameters
profile_id - ID of the profile.
<name 32> - Enter the profile name here. THe profile name can be up to 32 characters long.
<name 32> - Enter the profile name here. THe profile name can be up to 32 characters long.
add - Specify to add a multicast address.
delete - Specify to delete a multicast address.
<mcast_address_list> - List of the multicast addresses to be put in the profile. You can either
specify a single multicast IP address or a range of multicast addresses using -.
Restrictions
Example
To add the multicast address range 225.1.1.1 to 225.1.1.10 to the profile:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config mcast_filter_profile profile_id 2 add 225.1.1.1 -
225.1.1.10
Command: config mcast_filter_profile profile_id 2 add 225.1.1.1 - 225.1.1.10
Success.
64-3 config mcast_filter_profile ipv6

Description
This command is used to add or delete a range of IPv6 multicast addresses to the profile.
628

®
Format
config mcast_filter_profile ipv6 [profile_id <value 1-24> | profile_name <name 32>]
{profile_name <name 32> | [add | delete] <mcastv6_address_list>}(1)
Parameters
profile_id - ID of the profile.
add - Specify to add an IPv6 multicast address.
delete - Specify to delete an IPv6 multicast address.
<mcastv6_address_list> - Lists the IPv6 multicast addresses to put in the profile. You can either
specify a single IPv6 multicast IP address or a range of IPv6 multicast addresses connected
by ‘-‘.
Restrictions
Example
To add the IPv6 multicast address range FFF0E::100:0:0:20 – FFF0E::100:0:0:22 to profile ID 3:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config mcast_filter_profile profile_id 3 add
FF0E::100:0:0:20 - FF0E::100:0:0:22
Command: config mcast_filter_profile profile_id 3 add FF0E::100:0:0:20 -
FF0E::100:0:0:22
Success.
64-4 delete mcast_filter_profile

Description
This command is used to delete a multicast address profile. If the IPv4 or IPv6 option is not
specified, IPv4 is implied.
Format
delete mcast_filter_profile {[ipv4 | ipv6]} [profile_id [<value 1-24> | all] | profile_name <name
32>]
Parameters
ipv4 - (Optional) Specify to delete an IPv4 multicast profile.
profile_id - Specify the ID of the profile
all - All multicast address profiles will be deleted.
629

®
profile_name - Specify to display a profile based on the profile name.

<name 32> - Enter the profile name value here. The profile name can be up to 32 characters
long.
Restrictions
Example
To delete the multicast address profile with a profile ID of 3:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete mcast_filter_profile profile_id 3
Command: delete mcast_filter_profile profile_id 3
Success.
To delete the multicast address profile called MOD:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete mcast_filter_profile profile_name MOD
Command: delete mcast_filter_profile profile_name MOD
Total entries: 2
64-5 show mcast_filter_profile

Description
This command is used to display the defined multicast address profiles. If the IPv4 or IPv6 option
is not specified, IPv4 is implied.
Format
show mcast_filter_profile {[ipv4 | ipv6]} {[profile_id <value 1-24> | profile_name <name 32>]}
Parameters
profile_id - (Optional) Specify the ID of the profile
profile_name - (Optional) Specify to display a profile based on the profile name.
<name 1-32> - Enter the profile name here. The profile name can be up to 32 characters long.
Restrictions
None.
630

®
Example
To display all the defined multicast address profiles:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show mcast_filter_profile
Command: show mcast_filter_profile
Profile ID Name Multicast Addresses

---- ---------------- ---------------- ----------------
1 MOD 234.1.1.1 - 238.244.244.244
234.1.1.1 - 238.244.244.244
2 customer 224.19.62.34 - 224.19.162.200
Total Entries : 2
64-6 config limited_multicast_addr

Description
This command is used to configure the multicast address filtering function on a port or VLAN.
When there are no profiles specified with a port or VLAN, the limited function is not effective. When
the function is configured on a port, it limits the multicast group operated by the IGMP or MLD
snooping function. When this function is configured on a VLAN, the multicast group is limited to
only operate the IGMP or MLD layer 3 functions. If the IPv4 or IPv6 option is not specified, IPv4 is
implied.
Format
config limited_multicast_addr [ports <portlist> | vlanid <vlanid_list>] {[ipv4 | ipv6]} {[add
[profile_id <value 1-24> | profile_name <name 32>] | delete [profile_id <value 1-24> |
profile_name <name 32> | all]] | access [permit | deny]}(1)
Parameters
ports - Specify the range of ports to configure the multicast address filtering function.
<portslist> - Enter the list of port to be configured here.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID of the VLAN that the multicast address filtering function will be
configured on.
ipv4 - (Optional) Specify the IPv4 multicast profile.
ipv6 - (Optional) Specify the IPv6 multicast profile.
add - Adds a multicast address profile to a port.
profile_id - A profile to be added to or deleted from the port.
profile_name - Specify the profile name used.
<name 1-32> - Enter the profile name here. The profile name can be up to 32 characters
long.
delete - Delete a multicast address profile to a port.
profile_id - A profile to be added to or deleted from the port.
profile_name - Specify the profile name used.
<name 1-32> - Enter the profile name here. The profile name can be up to 32 characters
long.
631

®
all - Specify to delete all multicast address profile..

access - Specify the access of packets matching the addresses defined in the profiles.
permit - Specify that packets matching the addresses defined in the profiles will be permitted.
The default mode is permit.
deny - Specify that packets matching the addresses defined in the profiles will be denied.
Restrictions
Example
To add multicast address profile 2 to ports 1 and 3:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config limited_multicast_addr ports 1,3 add profile_id 2
Command: config limited_multicast_addr ports 1,3 add profile_id 2
Success.
64-7 config max_mcast_group

Description
This command is used to configure the maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join.
If the IPv4 or IPv6 option is not specified, IPv4 is implied.
When the joined groups for a port or a VLAN have reached the maximum number, the newly
learned group will be dropped if the action is specified as drop. The newly learned group will
replace the eldest group if the action is specified as replace.
Format
config max_mcast_group [ports <portlist> | vlanid <vlanid_list] {[ipv4 | ipv6]} {max_group
[<value 1-1024> | infinite] | action [ drop | replace]}(1)
Parameters
ports - Specify the range of ports to configure the max_mcast_group.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID to configure max_mcast_group.
ipv4 - (Optional) Specify that the maximum number of IPv4 learned addresses should be limited.
ipv6 - (Optional) Specify that the maximum number of IPv6 learned addresses should be limited.
max_group - (Optional) Specify the maximum number of multicast groups. The range is from 1
to n or infinite. “Infinite” means that the maximum number of multicast groups per port or
VLAN is not limited by the Switch, which is project dependent.. “n” is based on the project.
<value 1-1024> - Enter the maximum group value here. This value must be between 1 and
1024.
infinite - Specify that the maximum group value will be set to infinite.
action - (Optional) Specify the action for handling newly learned groups when the register is full.
drop - The new group will be dropped.
replace - The new group will replace the eldest group in the register table.
632

®
Restrictions
Example
To configure the maximum number of multicast group that ports 1 and 3 can join to 100:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config max_mcast_group ports 1, 3 max_group 100
Command: config max_mcast_group ports 1, 3 max_group 100
Success.
64-8 show max_mcast_group

Description
This command is used to display the maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join. If
the IPv4 or IPv6 option is not specified, IPv4 is implied.
Format
show max_mcast_group [ports {<portlist>} | vlanid {<vlanid_list >}] {[ipv4 | ipv6]}
Parameters
ports - Specify the range of ports for displaying information about the maximum number of
multicast groups that the specified ports can join.
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter the list of ports to be configured here.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID for displaying the maximum number of multicast groups.
<vlanid_list> - (Optional) Enter the VLAN ID list here.
ipv4 - (Optional) Specify to display the maximum number of IPv4 learned addresses.
ipv6 - (Optional) Specify to display the maximum number of IPv6 learned addresses.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the maximum number of multicast groups that ports 1 and 2 can join:
633

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show max_mcast_group ports 1:1-1:2

Command: show max_mcast_group ports 1:1-1:2
Port Max Multicast Group Number Action

------ ---------------------------- ---------
1:1 Infinite Drop
1:2 100 Drop
Total Entries: 2
To display the maximum number of multicast groups that VLANs 1 and 2 can join:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show max_mcast_group vlanid 1-2
Command: show max_mcast_group vlanid 1-2
VLAN Max Multicast Group Number Action

------ ---------------------------- ---------
1 Infinite Drop
2 10 Drop
Total Entries: 2
64-9 show limited_multicast_addr

Description
This command is used to display the multicast address range by port or by VLAN.
When the function is configured on a port, it limits the multicast groups operated by the IGMP or
MLD snooping function and layer 3 functions. When the function is configured on a VLAN, it limits
the multicast groups operated by the IGMP or MLD layer 3 functions.
If the IPv4 or IPv6 option is not specified, IPv4 is implied.
Format
show limited_multicast_addr [ports {<portlist>} | vlanid {<vlanid_list>}] {[ipv4 | ipv6]}
Parameters
ports - Specify the range of ports that require information displaying about the multicast address
filtering function.
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter the list of port to be configured here.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID of VLANs that require information displaying about the multicast
address filtering function.
<vlanid_list> - (Optional) Enter the VLAN ID list here.
ipv4 - (Optional) Specify to display the IPv4 multicast profile associated with the port.
ipv6 - (Optional) Specify to display the IPv6 multicast profile associated with the port.
634

®
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the limited multicast address range on ports 1 and 3:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show limited_multicast_addr ports 1,3
Command: show limited_multicast_addr ports 1,3
Port : 1
Access : Deny

----------- ----------- ----------------------------
1 customer 224.19.62.34 - 224.19.162.200
Port : 3
Access : Deny

----------- ---------------- ----------------------------
1 customer 224.19.62.34 - 224.19.162.200
To show the limited multicast settings configured on VLAN 1:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show limited_multicast_addr vlan 1
Command: show limited_multicast_addr vlan 1
VLAN ID : 1
Access : Deny

---------- ----------------- -----------------------------
1 customer 224.19.62.34 - 224.19.162.200
Success.
64-10 config cpu_filter l3_control_pkt

Description
This command is used to configure the port state for the Layer 3 control packet filter.
635

®
Format
config cpu_filter l3_control_pkt <portlist> [{dvmrp | pim | igmp_query}(1) | all] state [enable
| disable]
Parameters
<portlist> - Specify the port list to filter control packets.
dvmrp - Specify to filter the DVMRP control packets.
pim - Specify to filter the PIM control packets.
igmp_query - Specify to filter the IGMP query control packets.
all - Specify to filter all the L3 protocol control packets.
state - Specify the filter function status. The default is disabled.
enable - Enable the filtering function.
disable - Disable the filtering function.
Restrictions
Example
To filter the DVMRP control packets on ports 1 to 2:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config cpu_filter l3_control_pkt 1:1-1:2 dvmrp state enable
Command: config cpu_filter l3_control_pkt 1:1-1:2 dvmrp state enable
Success.
64-11 show cpu_filter l3_control_pkt ports

Description
This command is used to display the L3 control packet CPU filtering state.
Format
show cpu_filter l3_control_pkt ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Specify the port list to display the L3 control packet CPU filtering state.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the filtering status for port 1 and 2:
636

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show cpu_filter l3_control_pkt ports 1:1-1:2

Command: show cpu_filter l3_control_pkt ports 1:1-1:2
Port IGMP Query DVMRP PIM

---- ---------- -------- --------
1:1 Disabled Enabled Disabled
1:2 Disabled Enabled Disabled
637

®
Chapter 65 Multicast VLAN Command

List
create [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping] multicast_vlan <vlan_name 32> <vlanid 2-4094>
{remap_priority [<value 0-7> | none] {replace_priority}}
config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan <vlan_name 32> {[add | delete] [member_port <portlist> |
[source_port <portlist> | untag_source_port <portlist>] | tag_member_port <portlist>] | state
[enable | disable] | replace_source_ip [<ipaddr> | none] | remap_priority [<value 0-7> | none]
{replace_priority}}(1)
config mld_snooping multicast_vlan <vlan_name 32> {[add | delete] [member_port <portlist> |
[source_port <portlist> | untag_source_port <portlist>] | tag_member_port <portlist>] | state
[enable | disable] | replace_source_ipv6 [<ipv6addr> | none] | remap_priority [<value 0-7> |
none] {replace_priority}}(1)
create [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping] multicast_vlan_group_profile <profile_name 1-32>
config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile <profile_name 1-32> [add | delete]
<mcast_address_list>
config mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile <profile_name 1-32> [add | delete]
<mcast_v6address_list>
delete [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping] multicast_vlan_group_profile [profile_name
<profile_name 1-32> | all]
show [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping ] multicast_vlan_group_profile {< profile_name 1-32>}
config [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping] multicast_vlan_group <vlan_name 32> [add | delete]
profile_name <profile_name 1-32>
show [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping] multicast_vlan_group {<vlan_name 32>}
delete [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping] multicast_vlan <vlan_name 32>
enable [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping] multicast_vlan
disable [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping] multicast_vlan
config [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping] multicast_vlan forward_unmatched [enable |
disable]
show [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping] multicast_vlan {<vlan_name 32>}
65-1 create [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping] multicast_vlan

Description
This command is used to create a multicast VLAN and implements relevant parameters as
specified. More than one multicast VLANs can be configured. The maximum number of
configurable VLANs is project dependent.
Newly created IGMP snooping multicast VLANs must use a unique VLAN ID and name, i.e. they
cannot use the VLAN ID or name of any existing 802.1q VLAN.
Also keep in mind the following conditions:

• Multicast VLANs cannot be configured or displayed using 802.1Q VLAN commands.
• An IP interface cannot be bound to a multicast VLAN.
• The multicast VLAN snooping function co-exists with the 802.1q VLAN snooping function.
638

®
Format
create [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping] multicast_vlan <vlan_name 32> <vlanid 2-4094>
{remap_priority [<value 0-7> | none] {replace_priority}}
Parameters
igmp_snooping - Specify to configure VLAN for IGMP snooping.
mld_snooping - Specify to configure VLAN for MLD snooping.
multicast_vlan - The name of the multicast VLAN to be created. Each multicast VLAN is given a
name that can be up to 32 characters.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters long.
<vlanid 2-4094> - The VLAN ID of the multicast VLAN to be created. This value must be
between 2 and 4094.
remap_priority - (Optional) The remap priority (0 to 7) to be associated with the data traffic to be
forwarded on the multicast VLAN. If none is specified, the packet’s original priority will be
used. The default setting is none.
<value 0-7> - Enter the remap priority value here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
none - Specify that the remap priority value will be set to none.
replace_priority - (Optional) Specify that packet’s priority will be changed by the Switch, based
on the remap priority. This flag will only take effect when the remap priority is set.
Restrictions
Example
To create an IGMP snooping multicast VLAN with the VLAN name mv1 and the VID 2:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create igmp_snoop multicast_vlan mv1 2
Command: create igmp_snoop multicast_vlan mv1 2
Success.
65-2 config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan

Description
This command is used to add member ports and source ports to a list of multicast VLAN member
ports. Member ports automatically become untagged members of the multicast VLAN and source
ports automatically become tagged members of the multicast VLAN. However, member ports of
one multicast VLAN are allowed to overlap with member ports on a different multicast VLAN.
A multicast VLAN must first be created using the create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan command
before the multicast VLAN can be configured.
Format
config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan <vlan_name 32> {[add | delete] [member_port
<portlist> | [source_port <portlist> | untag_source_port <portlist>] | tag_member_port
<portlist>] | state [enable|disable] | replace_source_ip [<ipaddr> | none] | remap_priority
[<value 0-7> | none] {replace_priority}}(1)
639

®
Parameters
multicast_vlan - The name of the multicast VLAN to be configured.
add - Specify that the entry will be added to the specified multicast VLAN.
delete - Specify that the entry will be deleted to the specified multicast VLAN.
member_port - A member port or range of member ports to be added to the multicast VLAN.
The specified range of ports will become untagged members of the multicast VLAN.
source_port - A port or range of ports to be added to the multicast VLAN.
untag_source_port - Specify the source port or range of source ports as untagged members of
the multicast VLAN. The PVID of the untagged source port is automatically changed to the
multicast VLAN. Source ports must be either tagged or untagged for any single multicast
VLAN, i.e. both types cannot be members of the same multicast VLAN.
tag_member_port - Specify the port or range of ports that will become tagged members of the
multicast VLAN.
state - Used to specify if the multicast VLAN for a chosen VLAN should be enabled or disabled.
enable - Specify to enable the multicast VLAN for a chosen VLAN.
disable - Specify to disable the multicast VLAN for a chosen VLAN.
replace_source_ip - Before forwarding the report packet sent by the host, the source IP address
in the join packet must be replaced by this IP address. If none is specified, the source IP
address will not be replaced.
<ipaddr> - Enter the replace source IP address here.
none - Specify for not replacing the source IP address.
remap_priority - The remap priority value to be associated with the data traffic to be forwarded
on the multicast VLAN. If none is specified, the packet’s original priority is used. The default
setting is none.
none - Specify that the remap priority value will be set to none.
replace_priority - (Optional) Specify that the packet priority will be changed to the
remap_priority, but only if remap_priority is set.
Restrictions
Example
To configure an IGMP snooping multicast VLAN with the name “v1”, make ports 1 and 3 members
of the VLAN, and set the state to enable:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan v1 add member_port
1,3 state enable
Command: config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan v1 add member_port 1,3 state
enable
Success.
640

®
65-3 config mld_snooping multicast_vlan

Description
This command is used to add member ports and source ports to a list of multicast VLAN member
ports. Member ports automatically become untagged members of the multicast VLAN and source
ports automatically become tagged members of the multicast VLAN. If the port list of an existing
multicast VLAN is changed without specifying add or delete, the newly added port list replaces the
existing port list. A member port list cannot overlap with a source port list of the same multicast
VLAN. However, member ports of one multicast VLAN are allowed to overlap with member ports
on a different multicast VLAN.
A multicast VLAN must first be created using the create mld_snooping multicast_vlan command
before it can be configured.
Format
config mld_snooping multicast_vlan <vlan_name 32> {[add | delete] [member_port
<portlist> | [source_port <portlist> | untag_source_port <portlist>] | tag_member_port
<portlist>] | state [enable | disable] | replace_source_ipv6 [<ipv6addr> | none] |
remap_priority [<value 0-7> | none] {replace_priority}}(1)
Parameters
multicast_vlan - The name of the multicast VLAN to be configured. The maximum length is 32
characters.
add - Specify to add member ports to the multicast VLAN.
delete - Specify to delete member ports to the multicast VLAN.
member_port - A member port or range of member ports to be added to the multicast VLAN.
The specified range of ports will become untagged members of the multicast VLAN.
tag_member_port - Specify that the port or range of ports will become tagged members of the
multicast VLAN.
source_port - Specify the port or range of ports to be added to the multicast VLAN.
untag_source_port - Specify the source port or range of source ports as untagged members of
the multicast VLAN. The PVID of the untagged source port is automatically changed to the
multicast VLAN. Source ports must be either tagged or untagged for any single multicast
VLAN, i.e. both types cannot be members of the same multicast VLAN.
state - Used to specify if the multicast VLAN for a chosen VLAN should be enabled or disabled.
enable - Specify to enable the multicast VLAN for a chosen VLAN.
disable - Specify to disable the multicast VLAN for a chosen VLAN.
replace_source_ipv6 - Before forwarding the report packet sent by the host, the source IP
address in the join packet must be replaced by this IP address. If none is specified, the source
IP address will not be replaced.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the replace source IPv6 address here.
none – Specify for not replaceing the source IPv6 address.
remap_priority - The remap priority value to be associated with the data traffic to be forwarded
on the multicast VLAN. If none is specified, the packet’s original priority is used. The default
setting is none.
replace_priority - (Optional) The packet priority is changed to the remap_priority, but only if the
remap_priority is set.
641

®
Restrictions
Example
To configure an MLD snooping multicast VLAN with the name “v1”, make ports 1 and 3 members
of the VLAN, and set the state to enable:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config mld_snooping multicast_vlan v1 add member_port
1:1,1:3 state enable
Command: config mld_snooping multicast_vlan v1 add member_port 1:1,1:3 state
enable
Success.
65-4 create [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping]

multicast_vlan_group_profile
Description
This command is used to create an IGMP or MLD snooping multicast group profile on the Switch.
Format
create [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping] multicast_vlan_group_profile <profile_name 1-32>
Parameters
igmp_snooping - Specify that an IGMP snooping profile will be created.
mld_snooping - Specify that an MLD snooping profile will be created.
multicast_vlan_group_profile - Specify the multicast VLAN profile name. The maximum length
is 32 characters.
<profile_name 1-32> - Enter the multicast VLAN group profile name here. The name can be
Restrictions
Example
To create an IGMP snooping multicast group profile with the name “test”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile test
Command: create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile test
Success.
642

®
65-5 config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile

Description
This command is used to configure an IGMP snooping multicast group profile on the Switch and
add or delete multicast addresses for the profile.
Format
config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile <profile_name 1-32> [add | delete]
<mcast_address_list>
Parameters
is 32 characters.
<profile_name 1-32> - Enter the multicast VLAN group name here. This name can be up to
32 characters long.
add - Adds a multicast address list to or from this multicast VLAN profile. The
<mcast_address_list> can be a continuous single multicast address, such as 225.1.1.1,
225.1.1.3, 225.1.1.8, a multicast address range, such as 225.1.1.1-225.2.2.2, or both of types,
such as 225.1.1.1, 225.1.1.18-225.1.1.20.
delete - Deletes a multicast address list to or from this multicast VLAN profile. The
<mcast_address_list> can be a continuous single multicast addresses, such as 225.1.1.1,
225.1.1.3, 225.1.1.8, or a multicast address range, such as 225.1.1.1-225.2.2.2, or both types,
such as 225.1.1.1, 225.1.1.18-225.1.1.20.
<mcast_address_list> - Enter the multicast VLAN IP address here.
Restrictions
Example
To add the single multicast address 225.1.1.1 and multicast range 225.1.1.10-225.1.1.20 to the
IGMP snooping multicast VLAN profile named “MOD”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile MOD add
225.1.1.1, 225.1.1.10-225.1.1.20
Command: config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile MOD add 225.1.1.1,
225.1.1.10-225.1.1.20
Success.
65-6 config mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile

Description
This command is used to configure an MLD snooping multicast group profile on the Switch and
add or delete multicast addresses for the profile.
643

®
Format
config mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile <profile_name 1-32> [add | delete]
<mcast_v6address_list>
Parameters
is 32 characters.
<profile_name 1-32> - Enter the multicast VLAN group profile name here. This name can be
add - Add a multicast address list to or from this multicast VLAN profile. The
<mcast_v6address_list> can be a continuous single multicast addresses, such as FF1E::1, a
multicast address range, such asFF1E::1-FF1E::2, or both of them, such as FF1E::1,
FF1E::10-FF1E::20.
delete - Delete multicast address list to or from this multicast VLAN profile. The
<mcast_v6address_list> can be a continuous single multicast addresses, such as FF1E::1, a
multicast address range, such as FF1E::1-FF1E::2, or both of them, such as FF1E::1,
FF1E::10-FF1E::20.
<mcast_v6address_list> - Enter the multicast VLAN IPv6 address here.
Restrictions
Example
To add a multicast address or range to an MLD snooping multicast VLAN profile with name “MOD”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile MOD add
FF1E::1, FF1E::10-FF1E::20
Command: config mld _snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile MOD add FF1E::1,
FF1E::10-FF1E::20
Success.
65-7 delete [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping]

Description
This command is used to delete an IGMP snooping or MLD snooping multicast group profile on the
Switch. Specify a profile name to delete it. Specify all to remove all profiles along with the groups
that belong to that profile.
Format
delete [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping] multicast_vlan_group_profile [profile_name
<profile_name 1-32> | all]
644

®
Parameters
igmp_snooping - Specify to delete an IGMP snooping group profile.
mld_snooping - Specify to delete an MLD snooping group profile.
profile_name - Specify the multicast VLAN profile name.
<profile_name 1-32> - Enter the multicast VLAN profile name here. This name can be up to
32 characters long.
all - Specify to delete all the multicast VLAN profiles.
Restrictions
Example
To delete an IGMP snooping multicast group profile with the name “MOD”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile
profile_name MOD
Command: delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile profile_name MOD
Success.
65-8 show [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping]

Description
This command is used to show the IGMP snooping or MLD snooping multicast group profiles.
Format
show [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping ] multicast_vlan_group_profile {< profile_name 1-
32>}
Parameters
igmp_snooping - Specify that an IGMP snooping multicast group profile should be displayed.
mld_snooping - Specify that an MLD snooping multicast group profile should be displayed.
multicast_vlan_group_profile - Specify the profile name of the existing multicast VLAN profile
that should be displayed.
<profile_name 1-32> - (Optional) Enter the multicast VLAN group profile name here. The
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display all IGMP snooping multicast VLAN profiles:
645

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile

Command: show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile
Profile Name Multicast Addresses

--------------------- --------------------------------
MOD 234.1.1.1 - 238.244.244.244
239.1.1.1 - 239.2.2.2
Customer 224.19.62.34 - 224.19.162.200
Total Entries : 2
65-9 config [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping]

multicast_vlan_group
Description
This command is used to configure the multicast group learned with the specific multicast VLAN.
The following two cases can be considered for examples:
Case 1- The multicast group is not configured, multicast VLANs do not have any member ports
overlapping and the join packet received by the member port is learned on only the multicast
VLAN that this port is a member of.
Case 2-,The join packet is learned with the multicast VLAN that contains the destination multicast
group. If the destination multicast group of the join packet cannot be classified into any multicast
VLAN to which this port belongs, then the join packet will be learned on the natural VLAN of the
packet.
Note that a profile cannot overlap in different multicast VLANs. Multiple profiles can be added to a
multicast VLAN.
Format
config [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping] multicast_vlan_group <vlan_name 32> [add |
delete] profile_name <profile_name 1-32>
Parameters
igmp_snooping - Specify IGMP snooping should be configured.
mld_snooping - Specify MLD snooping should be configured.
multicast_vlan_group - The name of the multicast VLAN to be configured. Each multicast VLAN
is given a name of up to 32 characters.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the multicast VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32
characters long.
add - Used to associate a profile to a multicast VLAN.
delete - Used to de-associate a profile from a multicast VLAN.
profile_name - Specify the multicast VLAN profile name.
<profile_name 1-32> - Enter the multicast VLAN profile name here. The name can be up to
32 characters long.
646

®
Restrictions
Example
To add an IGMP snooping profile to a multicast VLAN group with the name “v1”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group v1 add
profile_name channel_1
Command: config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group v1 add profile_name
channel_1
Success.
65-10 show [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping] multicast_vlan_group

Description
This command is used to show an IGMP snooping or MLD snooping multicast VLAN group.
Format
show [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping] multicast_vlan_group {<vlan_name 32>}
Parameters
igmp_snooping - Specify that IGMP snooping VLAN groups should be displayed.
mld_snooping - Specify that MLD snooping VLAN groups should be displayed.
multicast_vlan_group - Specify the the name of the multicast VLAN to be displayed.
<vlan_name 32> - (Optional) Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32
characters long.
Restrictions
Example
To show all MLD snooping multicast VLAN groups setup on the Switch:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group
Command: show mld_snooping multicat_vlan_group
VLAN Name VLAN ID Multicast Group Profiles
------------------------------ ------------- -------------------------
mod 8 test
647

®
65-11 delete [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping] multicast_vlan

Description
This command is used to delete an IGMP or MLD snooping multicast VLAN.
Format
delete [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping] multicast_vlan <vlan_name 32>
Parameters
igmp_snooping - Specify that an IGMP snooping multicast VLAN will be deleted.
mld_snooping - Specify that an MLD snooping multicast VLAN will be deleted.
multicast_vlan - The name of the multicast VLAN to be deleted.
<vlan_name 32> -Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32 characters
long.
Restrictions
Example
To delete an MLD snooping multicast VLAN called “v1”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete mld_snooping multicat_vlan v1
Command: delete mld_snooping multicat_vlan v1
Success.
65-12 enable [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping] multicast_vlan

Description
This command is used to control the status of the multicast VLAN function. The command disable
igmp_snooping controls the ordinary IGMP snooping function. The command disable
mld_snooping controls the status of the ordinary MLD snooping function. By default, the multicast
VLAN function is disabled.
Format
enable [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping] multicast_vlan
Parameters
igmp_snooping - Specify that IGMP snooping multicast VLAN is to be enabled.
mld_snooping - Specify that MLD snooping multicast VLAN is to be enabled.
648

®
Restrictions
Example
To enable the IGMP snooping multicast VLAN function globally:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan
Command: enable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan
Success.
65-13 disable [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping] multicast_vlan

Description
This command is used to disable the IGMP or MLD snooping multicast VLAN function. The
command disable igmp_snooping is used to disable the ordinary IGMP snooping function, while
the command disable mld_snooping is used to disable the ordinary MLD snooping function. By
default, the multicast VLAN is disabled.
Format
disable [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping] multicast_vlan
Parameters
igmp_snooping - Specify that the IGMP snooping multicast VLAN function should be disabled.
mld_snooping - Specify that the MLD snooping multicast VLAN function should be disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To disable the MLD snooping multicast VLAN function:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable mld_snooping multicast_vlan
Command: disable mld_snooping multicast_vlan
Success.
649

®
65-14 config [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping] multicast_vlan

forward_unmatched
Description
This command is used to configure the forwarding mode for multicast VLAN unmatched packets.
When the Switch receives an IGMP/MLD snooping packet, it will match the packet against the
multicast profile to determine which multicast VLAN to associate with. If the packet does not match
all profiles, the packet will be forwarded or dropped based on this setting.
By default, the packet will be dropped.
Format
config [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping] multicast_vlan forward_unmatched [enable |
disable]
Parameters
igmp_snooping - Specify that the IGMP snooping multicast VLAN function will be configured.
mld_snooping - Specify that the MLD snooping multicast VLAN function will be configured.
multicast_vlan forward_unmatched - Specify to enable or disable packet flooding on the
multicast VLAN.
enable - The packet will be flooded on the VLAN.
disable - The packet will be dropped.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the forwarding mode for multicast VLAN unmatched packets：
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan forward_unmatched
enable
Command: config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan forward_unmatched enable
Success.
65-15 show [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping] multicast_vlan

Description
This command is used to display information for a multicast VLAN.
Format
show [igmp_snooping | mld_snooping] multicast_vlan {<vlan_name 32>}
650

®
Parameters
igmp_snooping - Specify that IGMP snooping multicast VLANs will be displayed.
mld_snooping - Specify that MLD snooping multicast VLANs will be displayed.
multicast_vlan - The name of the multicast VLAN to be shown.
<vlan_name 32> - (Optional) Enter the VLAN name here. The VLAN name can be up to 32
characters long.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display all IGMP snooping multicast VLANs:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan
Command: show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan
IGMP Multicast VLAN Global State : Disabled

IGMP Multicast VLAN Forward Unmatched : Disabled
VLAN Name : test

VID : 100
Member(Untagged) Ports : 1
Tagged Member Ports :
Source Ports : 3
Untagged Source Ports :
Status : Disabled
Replace Source IP : 0.0.0.0
Remap Priority : None
Total Entries: 1
651

®
Chapter 66 Network Load Balancing

(NLB) Command List
create nlb unicast_fdb <macaddr>
config nlb unicast_fdb <macaddr> [add | delete] <portlist>
delete nlb unicast_fdb <macaddr>
create nlb multicast_fdb [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>] <macaddr>
config nlb multicast_fdb [<vlan_name 32>|vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>] <macaddr> [add | delete]
<portlist>
delete nlb multicast_fdb [<vlan_name 32> |vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>] <macaddr>
show nlb fdb
66-1 create nlb unicast_fdb

Description
This command is used to create the NLB unicast FDB entry.
Format
create nlb unicast_fdb <macaddr>
Parameters
<macaddr> - Specify the MAC address of the NLB unicast FDB entry to be created.
Restrictions
Example
To create an NLB unicast MAC forwarding entry, for the product that support the VLAN information
on the unicast forwarding:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create nlb unicast_fdb 02-bf-01-01-01-01
Command: create nlb unicast_fdb 02-BF-01-01-01-01
Success.
66-2 config nlb unicast_fdb

Description
This command is used to add or delete the forwarding ports for the specified NLB unicast FDB
entry.
652

®
Format
config nlb unicast_fdb <macaddr> [add | delete] <portlist>
Parameters
<macaddr> - Specify the MAC address of the NLB unicast FDB entry to be configured.
add - Specify to add the ports.
delete - Specify to delete the ports.
<portlist> - Specify a list of forwarding ports to be added or removed.
Restrictions
Example
To configure NLB unicast FDB entry, for the product that support the VLAN information on the
unicast forwarding:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config nlb unicast_fdb 02-BF-01-01-01-01 add 1:1-1:5
Command: config nlb unicast_fdb 02-BF-01-01-01-01 add 1:1-1:5
Success.
66-3 delete nlb unicast_fdb

Description
This command is used to delete the NLB unicast FDB entry.
Format
delete nlb unicast_fdb <macaddr>
Parameters
<macaddr> - Specify the MAC address of the NLB unicast FDB entry to be deleted.
Restrictions
Example
To delete the NLB unicast FDB entry, for the product that support the VLAN information on the
unicast forwarding:
653

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete nlb unicast_fdb 02-bf-01-01-01-01

Command: delete nlb unicast_fdb 02-BF-01-01-01-01
Success.
66-4 create nlb multicast_fdb

Description
This command is used to create a NLB multicast FDB entry. The number of supported entries is
project dependent.
The network load balancing command set is used to support the Microsoft server load balancing
application where multiple servers can share the same IP address and MAC address. The
requests from clients will be forwarded to all servers, but will only be processed by one of them.
The server can work in two different modes – unicast mode and multicast mode. In unicast mode,
the client use unicast MAC address as the destination MAC to reach the server. In multicast mode,
the client use the multicast MAC address as the destination MAC to reach the server. Regarding of
the mode, this destination Mac is the named the shared MAC. The server uses its own MAC
address (rather than the shared MAC) as the source MAC address of the reply packet.
The NLB multicast FDB entry will be mutual exclusive with the L2 multicast entry.
Format
create nlb multicast_fdb [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>] <macaddr>
Parameters
multicast_fdb - Specify the VLAN of the NLB multicast FDB entry to be created.
long.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN by the VLAN ID.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID here.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address of the NLB multicast FDB entry to be created. Multicast
MAC addresses with the prefix of 33-33-XX-XX-XX is used for address mapping with IP
addresses. To avoid incorrect forwarding behaviors, 33-33-XX-XX-XX is not supported.
Multicast MAC addresses with the prefix 01-80-C2-XX-XX is reserved MAC addresses and is
also not supported.
Restrictions
Example
To create a NLB multicast FDB entry:
654

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create nlb multicast_fdb default 03-bf-01-01-01-01

Command: create nlb multicast_fdb default 03-bf-01-01-01-01
Success.
66-5 config nlb multicast_fdb

Description
This command is used to add or delete the forwarding ports for the specified NLB multicast FDB
entry.
Format
config nlb multicast_fdb [<vlan_name 32>|vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>] <macaddr> [add | delete]
<portlist>
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Specify the VLAN of the NLB multicast FDB entry to be configured.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN by the VLAN ID.
<macaddr> - Specify the Mac address of the NLB multicast FDB entry to be configured.
add - Specify a list of forwarding ports to be added.
delete - Specify a list of forwarding ports to be deleted.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports used for this configuration.
Restrictions
Example
To configure NLB multicast MAC forwarding database:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config nlb multicast_fdb default 03-bf-01-01-01-01 add
1:1-1:5
Command: config nlb multicast_fdb default 03-bf-01-01-01-01 add 1:1-1:5
Success.
66-6 delete nlb multicast_fdb

Description
This command is used to delete the NLB multicast FDB entry.
655

®
Format
delete nlb multicast_fdb [<vlan_name 32> |vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>] <macaddr>
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Specify the VLAN of the NLB multicast FDB entry to be deleted.
<macaddr> - Specify the MAC address of the NLB multicast FDB entry to be deleted.
Restrictions
Example
To delete NLB multicast FDB entry:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete nlb multicast_fdb default 03-bf-01-01-01-01
Command: delete nlb multicast_fdb default 03-bf-01-01-01-01
Success.
66-7 show nlb fdb

Description
This command is used to show the NLB Configured entry.
Format
show nlb fdb
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the NLB forwarding table:
656

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show nlb fdb

Command: show nlb fdb
MAC Address VLAN ID Egress Ports

----------------- ---------- ----------------------------------
03-bf-01-01-01-01 100 1:1-1:5,1:24,2:24
03-bf-01-01-01-01 1 1:1-1:5,1:24,2:24
Total Entries : 2
657

®
Chapter 67 Network Monitoring

Command List
show packet ports <portlist>
show error ports <portlist>
show utilization [cpu | ports]
show utilization dram {unit <unit_id>}
show utilization flash {unit <unit_id>}
clear counters {ports <portlist>}
67-1 show packet ports

Description
This command is used to display statistics about the packets sent and received by the Switch.
Format
show packet ports <portlist>
Parameters
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the packets analysis for port 7 of the unit 1:
658

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show packet ports 1:7

Command: show packet ports 1:7
Port Number : 1:7

==================================================================
Frame Size/Type Frame Counts Frames/sec
--------------- ---------------------- -----------
64 0 0
65-127 0 0
128-255 0 0
256-511 0 0
512-1023 0 0
1024-1518 0 0
Unicast RX 0 0
Multicast RX 0 0
Broadcast RX 0 0
Frame Type Total Total/sec

--------------- ---------------------- -----------
RX Bytes 0 0
RX Frames 0 0
TX Bytes 0 0
TX Frames 0 0
67-2 show error ports

Description
This command is used to display the error statistics for a range of ports.
Format
show errors ports <portlist>
Parameters
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the errors of the port 3 of unit 1:
659

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show error ports 1:3

Command: show error ports 1:3
Port Number : 1:3

RX Frames TX Frames
--------- ---------
CRC Error 0 Excessive Deferral 0
Undersize 0 CRC Error 0
Oversize 0 Late Collision 0
Fragment 0 Excessive Collision 0
Jabber 0 Single Collision 0
Drop Pkts 0 Collision 0
Symbol Error 0
67-3 show utilization

Description
This command is used to display real-time CPU or port utilization statistics.
Format
show utilization [cpu | ports]
Parameters
cpu - Specify to display information regarding the CPU.
ports - Specify a range of ports to be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the ports utilization:
660

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show utilization ports

Command: show utilization ports
Port TX/sec RX/sec Util Port TX/sec RX/sec Util

----- ---------- ---------- ---- ----- ---------- ---------- ----
1:1 0 0 0 1:21 0 0 0
1:2 0 0 0 1:22 0 0 0
1:3 0 0 0 1:23 0 0 0
1:4 0 0 0 1:24 0 0 0
1:5 0 0 0
1:6 0 0 0
1:7 0 0 0
1:8 0 0 0
1:9 0 0 0
1:10 0 0 0
1:11 0 0 0
1:12 0 0 0
1:13 0 0 0
1:14 0 0 0
1:15 0 0 0
1:16 0 0 0
1:17 0 0 0
1:18 0 0 0
1:19 0 0 0
1:20 0 0 0
To display the CPU utilization:
661

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show utilization cpu

Command: show utilization cpu
CPU Utilization
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Five seconds - 10 % One minute - 10 % Five minutes - 10 %
67-4 show utilization dram

Description
This command is used to show DRAM memory utilization.
Format
show utilization dram {unit <unit_id>}
Parameters
unit - (Optional) Specify the Switch unit ID to be displayed.
<unit_id> - Enter teh Switch unit ID used here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display DRAM utilization:
662

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show utilization dram

Command: show utilization dram
Unit 1 DRAM utilization :

Total DRAM : 131072 KB
Used DRAM : 128128 KB
Utilization : 97 %
67-5 show utilization flash

Description
This command is used to show the flash memory utilization.
Format
show utilization flash {unit <unit_id>}
Parameters
unit - (Optional) Specify the Switch unit ID to be displayed.
<unit_id> - Enter teh Switch unit ID used here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display FLASH utilization:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show utilization flash
Command: show utilization flash
Unit 1 Flash Memory Utilization :

Total Flash : 29618 KB
Used Flash : 5422 KB
Utilization : 18 %
67-6 clear counters

Description
This command is used to clear the Switch’s statistics counters.
663

®
Format
clear counters {ports <portlist>}
Parameters
ports - (Optional) Specify a range of ports to be configured. The port list is specified by listing the
lowest switch number and the beginning port number on that switch, separated by a colon.
Then highest switch number, and the highest port number of the range (also separeted by a
colon) are specified. The beginning and end of the port list range are seperated by a dash.
If no parameter is specified, system will display counters of all the ports .
Restrictions
Example
To clear the Switch’s statistics counters:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# clear counters ports 2:7-2:9
Command: clear counters ports 2:7-2:9
Success.
664

®
Chapter 68 OAM Command List (RI and

EI Mode Only)
config ethernet_oam ports [<portlist> | all ] [mode [active | passive] | state [enable | disable] |
link_monitor [error_symbol {threshold <range 0-4294967295> | window <millisecond 1000-
60000> | notify_state [enable | disable]}(1) | error_frame {threshold <range 0-4294967295> |
window <millisecond 1000-60000> | notify_state [enable | disable]}(1) | error_frame_seconds
{threshold <range 1-900> | window <millisecond 10000-900000> | notify_state [enable |
disable]}(1) | error_frame_period {threshold <range 0-4294967295> | window <number
148810-100000000> | notify_state [enable | disable]}(1)]| critical_link_event [dying_gasp |
critical_event] notify_state [enable | disable] | remote_loopback [start | stop] |
received_remote_loopback [process | ignore]]
show ethernet_oam ports {<portlist>} [status | configuration | statistics | event_log {index
<value_list>}]
clear ethernet_oam ports [<portlist> | all] [event_log | statistics]
68-1 config ethernet_oam ports

Description
This command is used to configure Ethernet OAM. The parameter to configure port Ethernet OAM
mode operates in active or passive mode. The following two actions are allowed by ports in active
mode, but disallowed by ports in passive mode: Initiate OAM discovery and start or stop remote
loopback. Note that when a port is OAM-enabled, changing the OAM mode will cause the OAM
discovery to be re-started.
The command used to enable or disable port’s Ethernet OAM function. The parameter enabling a
port’s OAM will cause the port to start OAM discovery. If a port’s is active, it initiates the discovery.
Otherwise it reacts to the discovery received from peer. Disabling a port’s OAM will cause the port
to send out a dying gasp event to peers and then disconnect the established OAM link.
The link monitoring parameter is used to configure port Ethernet OAM link monitoring error
symbols. The link monitoring function provides a mechanism to detect and indicate link faults
under a variety of conditions. OAM monitors the statistics on the number of frame errors as well as
the number of coding symbol errors. When the number of symbol errors is equal to or greater than
the specified threshold in a period and the event notification state is enabled, it generates an error
symbol period event to notify the remote OAM peer. The Ethernet OAM link monitoring error
frames parameter provides a mechanism to detect and indicate link faults under a variety of
conditions. OAM monitors the counter on the number of frame errors as well as the number of
coding symbol errors. When the number of frame errors is equal to or greater than the specified
threshold in a period and the event notification state is enabled, it generates an error frame event
to notify the remote OAM peer.
The link event parameter configures the capability of the Ethernet OAM critical link event. If the
capability for an event is disabled, the port will never send out the corresponding critical link event.
The command is used to configure the client to process or to ignore the received Ethernet OAM
remote loopback command. In remote loopback mode, all user traffic will not be processed.
Ignoring the received remote loopback command will prevent the port from entering remote
loopback mode.
665

®
Format
config ethernet_oam ports [<portlist> | all] [mode [active | passive] | state [enable | disable]
| link_monitor [error_symbol {threshold <range 0-4294967295> | window <millisecond 1000-
60000> | notify_state [enable | disable]}(1) | error_frame {threshold <range 0-4294967295> |
window <millisecond 1000-60000> | notify_state [enable | disable]}(1) |
error_frame_seconds {threshold <range 1-900> | window <millisecond 10000-900000> |
notify_state [enable | disable]}(1) | error_frame_period {threshold <range 0-4294967295> |
window <number 148810-100000000> | notify_state [enable | disable]}(1)]|
critical_link_event [dying_gasp | critical_event] notify_state [enable | disable] |
remote_loopback [start | stop] | received_remote_loopback [process | ignore]]
Parameters
<portlist> - Used to specify a range of ports to be configured.
all - Used to specify all ports are to be configured.
mode - Specify the operation mode. The default mode is active.
active - Specify to operate in active mode.
passive - Specify to operate in passive mode.
state - Specify the OAM function status.
enable - Specify to enable the OAM function.
disable - Specify to disable the OAM function.
link_monitor - Used to detect and indicate link faults under a variety of conditions.
error_symbol - Used to generate an error symbol period event to notify the remote OAM
peer.
threshold - Specify the number of symbol errors in the period that is required to be equal
to or greater than in order for the event to be generated. The default value of threshold
is 1 symbol error.
<range 0-4294967295> - Specify the range from 0 to 4294967295.
window - The range is 1000 to 60000 ms. The default value is 1000ms.
<millisecond 1000-60000> -The range is 1000 to 60000 ms.
notify_state - Specify the event notification status. The default state is enable.
enable -Specify to enable event notification.
disable -Specify to disable event notification.
error_frame - Specify the error frame.
threshold - Specify a threshold range.
<range 0-4294967295> - Specify a threshold range between 0 and 4294967295.
window - The range is 1000 to 60000 ms. The default value is 1000ms.
<millisecond 1000-60000> - The range is 1000 to 60000 ms.
enable - Specify to enable event notification.
disable - Specify to disable event notification.
error_frame_seconds - Specify error fram time.
threshold - Specify a threshold range between 1 and 900.
<range 1-900> -Specify a threshold range between 1 and 900.
window - The range is 1000 to 900000 ms.
<millisecond 10000-900000> - The range is 1000 to 900000 ms.
error_frame_period - Specify error frame period.
threshold - Specify a threshold range between 0 and 4294967295.
<range 0-4294967295> -Specify a threshold range between 0 and 4294967295.
window - The range is 148810 to 100000000 ms.
<number 148810-100000000> - The range is 148810 to 100000000 ms.
666

®
critical_link_event –Specify critical link event.

dying_gasp - An unrecoverable local failure condition has occurred.
critical_event - An unspecified critical event has occurred.
remote_loopback - Specify remote loop.
start - If start is specified, it will request the peer to change to the remote loopback mode.
stop - If stop is specified, it will request the peer to change to the normal operation mode.
received_remote_loopback - Specify receive remote loop-back.
process - Specify to process the received Ethernet OAM remote loopback command.
ignore - Specify to ignore the received Ethernet OAM remote loopback command. The default
method is”ignore”.
Restrictions
Example
To configure Ethernet OAM on ports 1 to 2 in active mode:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config ethernet_oam ports 1-2 mode active
Command: config ethernet_oam ports 1-2 mode active
Success.
To enable Ethernet OAM on port 1:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config ethernet_oam ports 1 state enable
Command: config ethernet_oam ports 1 state enable
Success.
To configure the error symbol threshold to 2 and period to 1000ms for port 1:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config ethernet_oam ports 1 link_monitor error_symbol
threshold 2 window 1000 notify_state enable
Command: config ethernet_oam ports 1 link_monitor error_symbol threshold 2
window 1000 notify_state enable
Success.
To configure the error frame threshold to 2 and period to 1000 ms for port 1:
667

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config ethernet_oam ports 1 link_monitor error_frame

threshold 2 window 1000 notify_state enable
Command: config ethernet_oam ports 1 link_monitor error_frame threshold 2
window 1000 notify_state enable
Success.
To configure the error frame seconds threshold to 2 and period to 10000 ms for port 1:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config ethernet_oam ports 1 link_monitor
error_frame_seconds threshold 2 window 10000 notify_state enable
Command: config ethernet_oam ports 1 link_monitor error_frame_seconds threshold
2 window 10000 notify_state enable
Success.
To configure the error frame period threshold to10 and period to 1000000 ms for port 1:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config ethernet_oam ports 1 link_monitor
error_frame_period threshold 10 window 1000000 notify_state enable
Command: config ethernet_oam ports 1 link_monitor error_frame_period threshold
10 window 1000000 notify_state enable
Success.
To configure a dying gasp event for port 1:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config ethernet_oam ports 1 critical_link_event dying_gasp
notify_state enable
Command: config ethernet_oam ports 1 critical_link_event dying_gasp
notify_state enable
Success.
To start remote loopback on port 1:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config ethernet_oam ports 1 remote_loopback start
Command: config ethernet_oam ports 1 remote_loopback start
Success.
To configure the method of processing the received remote loopback command as “process” on
port 1:
668

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config ethernet_oam ports 1 received_remote_loopback

process
Command: config ethernet_oam ports 1 received_remote_loopback process
Success.
68-2 show ethernet_oam ports

Description
This command is used to display Ethernet OAM information, including status, configuration,
statistics, and event log, on specified ports.
The status information includes:
(1) OAM administration status: enabled or disabled.
(2) OAM operation status. It maybe the below value:
 Disable: OAM is disabled on this port.
 LinkFault: The link has detected a fault and is transmitting OAMPDUs with a link fault
indication.
 PassiveWait: The port is passive and is waiting to see if the peer device is OAM capable.
 ActiveSendLocal: The port is active and is sending local information.
 SendLocalAndRemote: The local port has discovered the peer but has not yet accepted or
rejected the configuration of the peer.
 SendLocalAndRemoteOk: The local device agrees the OAM peer entity.
 PeeringLocallyRejected: The local OAM entity rejects the remote peer OAM entity.
 PeeringRemotelyRejected: The remote OAM entity rejects the local device.
 Operational: The local OAM entity learns that both it and the remote OAM entity have
accepted the peering.
 NonOperHalfDuplex: Since Ethernet OAM functions are not designed to work completely over
half-duplex port. This value indicates Ethernet OAM is enabled but the port is in half-duplex
operation.
(3) OAM mode: passive or active.
(4) Maximum OAMPDU size: The largest OAMPDU that the OAM entity supports. OAM entities
exchange maximum OAMPDU sizes and negotiate to use the smaller of the two maximum
OAMPDU sizes between the peers.
(5) OAM configuration revision: The configuration revision of the OAM entity as reflected in the
latest OAMPDU sent by the OAM entity. The config revision is used by OAM entities to indicate
that configuration changes have occurred, which might require the peer OAM entity to re-evaluate
whether OAM peering is allowed.
(6) OAM mode change.
(7) OAM Functions Supported: The OAM functions supported on this port. These functions include:
• Unidirectional: It indicates that the OAM entity supports the transmission of OAMPDUs on links
that are operating in unidirectional mode (traffic flowing in one direction only).
• Loopback: It indicates that the OAM entity can initiate and respond to loopback commands.
• Link Monitoring: It indicates that the OAM entity can send and receive Event Notification
OAMPDUs.
669

®
• Variable: It indicates that the OAM entity can send and receive variable requests to monitor the
attribute value as described in the IEEE 802.3 Clause 30 MIB.
The event log displays Ethernet OAM event log information. The switch can buffer 1000 event logs.
The event log is different from sys-log as it provides more detailed information than sys-log. Each
OAM event will be recorded in both OAM event log and syslog.
Format
show ethernet_oam ports {<portlist>} [status | configuration | statistics | event_log {index
<value_list>}]
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Specify the range of ports to display.
status - Specify to display the Ethernet OAM status.
configuration - Specify to display the Ethernet OAM configuration.
statistics - Specify to display Ethernet OAM statistics.
event_log - Specify to display the Ethernet OAM event log information.
index - (Optional) Specify an index range to display.
<value_list> - (Optional) Specify an index range to display.
Restrictions
Example
To display Ethernet OAM statistics information for port 1:
670

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show ethernet_oam ports 1 statistics

Command: show ethernet_oam ports 1 statistics
Port 1
------------------------------------------------------------
Information OAMPDU TX : 0
Information OAMPDU RX : 0
Unique Event Notification OAMPDU TX : 0
Unique Event Notification OAMPDU RX : 0
Duplicate Event Notification OAMPDU TX: 0
Duplicate Event Notification OAMPDU RX: 0
Loopback Control OAMPDU TX : 0
Loopback Control OAMPDU RX : 0
Variable Request OAMPDU TX : 0
Variable Request OAMPDU RX : 0
Variable Response OAMPDU TX : 0
Variable Response OAMPDU RX : 0
Organization Specific OAMPDUs TX : 0
Organization Specific OAMPDUs RX : 0
Unsupported OAMPDU TX : 0
Unsupported OAMPDU RX : 0
Frames Lost Due To OAM : 0
68-3 clear ethernet_oam ports

Description
This command is used to clear Ethernet OAM information.
Format
clear ethernet_oam ports [<portlist> | all] [event_log | statistics]
Parameters
<portlist> - Specify a range of Ethernet OAM ports to be cleared.
all - Specify to clear all Ethernet OAM ports.
event_log - Specify to clear Ethernet OAM event log information.
statistics - Specify to clear Ethernet OAM statistics.
Restrictions
Example
To clear port 1 OAM statistics:
671

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# clear ethernet_oam ports 1 statistics

Command: clear ethernet_oam ports 1 statistics
Success.
To clear port 1 OAM events:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin# clear ethernet_oam ports 1 event_log
Command: clear ethernet_oam ports 1 event_log
Success.
672

®
Chapter 69 Open Shortest Path First

(OSPF) Version 2 Command
List (RI Mode Only)
config ospf [ipif <ipif_name 12> | all] {area <area_id> | priority <value> | hello_interval <sec 1-
65535> | dead_interval <sec 1-65535> | authentication [none | simple <password 8> | md5
<key_id 1-255>] | metric <value 1-65535> | state [enable | disable] | passive [enable | disable]
| distribute_list_in [access_list <list_name 16> | none]}(1)
create ospf aggregation <area_id> <network_address> lsdb_type [summary {advertise [enable |
disable]} | nssa_ext {advertise [enable | disable]}]
config ospf aggregation <area_id> <network_address> lsdb_type [summary {advertise [enable |
disable]} | nssa_ext {advertise [enable | disable]}]
delete ospf aggregation <area_id> <network_address> lsdb_type [summary | nssa_ext]
show ospf aggregation {<area_id>}
create ospf area <area_id> type [normal | [stub | nssa {translate [enable | disable]}]
{stub_summary [enable | disable] | metric <value 0-65535>}]
config ospf area <area_id> type [normal | [stub | nssa {translate [enable | disable]}]
delete ospf area <area_id>
show ospf area {<area_id>}
create ospf host_route <ipaddr> {area <area_id> | metric <value 1-65535>}
config ospf host_route <ipaddr> {area <area_id> | metric <value 1-65535>}(1)
delete ospf host_route <ipaddr>
show ospf host_route {<ipaddr>}
config ospf router_id <ipaddr>
create ospf virtual_link <area_id> <neighbor_id> {hello_interval <sec 1-65535> | dead_interval
<sec 1-65535> | authentication [none | simple <password 8> | md5 <key_id 1-255>]}
config ospf virtual_link <area_id> <neighbor_id> {hello_interval <sec 1-65535> | dead_interval
<sec 1-65535> | authentication [none | simple <password 8> | md5 <key_id 1-255>]}(1)
delete ospf virtual_link <area_id> <neighbor_id>
show ospf virtual_link {<area_id> <neighbor_id>}
enable ospf
disable ospf
show ospf {[ipif <ipif_name 12> | all]}
show ospf lsdb {area <area_id> | advertise_router <ipaddr> | type [rtrlink | netlink | summary |
assummary | asextlink | nssa_ext | stub]}
show ospf neighbor {<ipaddr>}
show ospf virtual_neighbor {<area_id> <neighbor_id>}
config ospf default-information {originate [always | default | none] | mettype [1 | 2] | metric
<value 1-65535>}(1)
69-1 config ospf

Description
This command is used to configure the OSPF interface settings.
Format
config ospf [ipif <ipif_name 12> | all] {area <area_id> | priority <value> | hello_interval <sec
1-65535> | dead_interval <sec 1-65535> | authentication [none | simple <password 8> | md5
673

®
<key_id 1-255>] | metric <value 1-65535> | state [enable | disable] | passive [enable | disable]
| distribute_list_in [access_list <list_name 16> | none]}(1)
Parameters
long.
area - (Optional) Specify the area to which the interface is assigned. An Area ID is a 32-bit
number in the form of an IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) that uniquely identifies the OSPF area
in the OSPF domain.
<area_id> - Enter the area ID used here.
priority - (Optional) Specify the priority value for the Designated Router election. If a Router
Priority of 0 is set, the Switch cannot be elected as the DR for the network.
<value> - Enter the priority value used here.
hello_interval - (Optional) Allows the specification of the interval between the transmission of
OSPF Hello packets, in seconds. Between 1 and 65535 seconds can be specified. The Hello
Interval, Dead Interval, Authorization Type, and Authorization Key should be the same for all
routers on the same network.
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the hello packet interval value here. This value must be between 1 and
65535 seconds.
dead_interval - (Optional) Allows the specification of the length of time between the receipt of
Hello packets from a neighbor router before the selected area declares that router down. An
interval between 1 and 65535 seconds can be specified. The Dead Interval must be evenly
divisable by the Hello Interval.
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the dead packet interval value here. This value must be between 1 and
65535 seconds.
authentication - (Optional) Specify that authentication value.
none - Specify that the authentication value will be set to none.
simple - Specify that a simple text password must be specified.
<password 8> - Enter the simple text password value here.
md5 - Specify that the authentication will be set to use an MD5 key ID.
<key_id 1-255> - Enter the MD5 key used here. This key can must be between 1 and 255.
metric - (Optional) Specify the interface metric used.
<value 1-65535> - Enter the metric value here. This value must be between 1 and 65535.
state - (Optional) Specify the OSPF interface state here.
enable - Specify that the state will be set to enabled.
disable - Specify that the state will be set to disabled.
passive - (Optional) Specify whether the designated entry should be a passive interface or not.
When the interface is specified to be passive, OSPF protocol packets will neither be sent out
or received on the interface.
enable - Specify that the passive interface will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the passive interface will be disabled.
distribute_list_in - Specify the inbound route filter on the OSPF interface.
access_list - Use an IP standard access list to filter the receiving OSPF routes.
<list_name16> - Enter the access list name.
none - Specify not to filter the receiving OSPF routes.
Restrictions
Example
To configure OSPF interface settings:
674

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ospf ipif System priority 2 hello_interval 20 metric

2 state enable
Command: config ospf ipif System priority 2 hello_interval 20 metric 2 state
enable
Success.
69-2 create ospf aggregation

Description
This command is used to create an OSPF area aggregation entry.
Format
create ospf aggregation <area_id> <network_address> lsdb_type [summary {advertise
[enable | disable]} | nssa_ext {advertise [enable | disable]}]
Parameters
<area_id> - A 32-bit number in the form of an IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) that uniquely
identifies the OSPF area in the OSPF domain.
<network_address> - The IP address that uniquely identifies the network that corresponds to
the OSPF Area. The network address format is 'IP address/prefix length'.
lsdb_type - Specify the Link-State Database (LSDB) type of address aggregation.
summary - Specify the LSDB type as summary.
advertise - (Optional) Allows for the advertisement of the summary LSAs.
enable - Specify that the advertisement trigger will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the advertisement trigger will be disabled.
nssa_ext - Specify the LSDB type as a Not-So-Stub Area External Route (NSSA EXT).
advertise - (Optional) Allows for the advertisement of aggregated NSSA external route.
Restrictions
Example
To create an OSPF area aggregation entry:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create ospf aggregation 10.48.74.122 192.168.0.1/16
lsdb_type summary
Command: create ospf aggregation 10.48.74.122 192.168.0.1/16 lsdb_type summary
Success.
675

®
69-3 config ospf aggregation

Description
This command is used to configure the OSPF area aggregation settings.
Format
config ospf aggregation <area_id> <network_address> lsdb_type [summary {advertise
[enable | disable]} | nssa_ext {advertise [enable | disable]}]
Parameters
lsdb_type - Specify the Link-State Database (LSDB) type of address aggregation.
summary - Specify the LSDB type as summary.
advertise - (Optional) Allows for the advertisement of the summary LSAs.
nssa_ext - Specify the LSDB type as a Not-So-Stub Area External Route (NSSA EXT).
advertise - (Optional) Allows for the advertisement of aggregated NSSA external route.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the OSPF area aggregation settings:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ospf aggregation 10.48.74.122 192.168.0.1/16
lsdb_type summary advertise enable
Command: config ospf aggregation 10.48.74.122 192.168.0.1/16 lsdb_type summary
advertise enable
Success.
69-4 delete ospf aggregation

Description
This command is used to delete an OSPF area aggregation entry.
Format
delete ospf aggregation <area_id> <network_address> lsdb_type [summary | nssa_ext]
676

®
Parameters
lsdb_type - Specify the LSDB type.
summary - Specify the summary type.
nssa_ext - Specify the NSSA EXT type.
Restrictions
Example
To delete an OSPF area aggregation entry:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete ospf aggregation 10.48.74.122 192.168.0.1/16
lsdb_type summary
Command: delete ospf aggregation 10.48.74.122 192.168.0.1/16 lsdb_type summary
Success.
69-5 show ospf aggregation

Description
This command is used to display the current OSPF area aggregation settings.
Format
show ospf aggregation {<area_id>}
Parameters
<area_id> - (Optional) Enter the area ID used here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display OSPF area aggregation settings:
677

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ospf aggregation

Command: show ospf aggregation
OSPF Area Aggregation Settings
Area ID Aggregated LSDB Advertise

Network Address Type
--------------- ------------------ -------- ---------
10.48.74.122 192.168.0.0/16 Summary Enabled
Total Entries : 1
69-6 create ospf area

Description
This command is used to create an OSPF area. OSPF allows collections of contiguous networks
and hosts to be grouped together. Such a group, together with the routers having interfaces to any
one of the included networks, is called an area.
Format
create ospf area <area_id> type [normal | [stub | nssa {translate [enable | disable]}]
Parameters
<area_id> - Enter the OSPF area ID used here.
type - Specify the OSPF area operation type. In some Autonomous Systems, the majority of the
topological database may consist of AS external advertisements. An OSPF AS external
advertisement is usually flooded throughout the entire AS. However, OSPF allows certain
areas to be configured as "stub areas". AS external advertisements are not flooded
into/throughout stub areas; routing to AS external destinations in these areas is based on a
(per-area) default only. This reduces the topological database size, and therefore the memory
requirements, for a stub area's internal routers.
normal - Specify that the OSPF area type will be set to normal.
stub - Specify that the OSPF area type will be set to STUB.
nssa - Specify that the OSPF area type will be set to NSSA.
translate - (Optional) Specify if translation will be enabled or disabled.
enable - Specify that the translate option will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the translate option will be disabled.
stub_summary - (Optional) Specify whether the summary LSA is effective for this area.
enable - Specify that the STUB summary option will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the STUB summary option will be disabled.
metric - (Optional) Specify the metric (1 - 65535; 0 for auto cost) of this area.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the metric value used here. This value must be between 0 and
65535.
Restrictions
678

®
Example
To create an OSPF area:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create ospf area 10.48.74.122 type stub stub_summary enable
metric 1
Command: create ospf area 10.48.74.122 type stub stub_summary enable metric 1
Success.
69-7 config ospf area

Description
This command is used to configure an OSPF area’s settings.
Format
config ospf area <area_id> type [normal | [stub | nssa {translate [enable | disable]}]
Parameters
type - Specify the OSPF area operation type. In some Autonomous Systems, the majority of the
topological database may consist of AS external advertisements. An OSPF AS external
advertisement is usually flooded throughout the entire AS. However, OSPF allows certain
areas to be configured as "stub areas". AS external advertisements are not flooded
into/throughout stub areas; routing to AS external destinations in these areas is based on a
(per-area) default only. This reduces the topological database size, and therefore the memory
requirements, for a stub area's internal routers.
normal - Specify that the OSPF area type will be set to normal.
stub - Specify that the OSPF area type will be set to STUB.
nssa - Specify that the OSPF area type will be set to NSSA.
translate - (Optional) Specify if translation will be enabled or disabled.
enable - Specify that the translate option will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the translate option will be disabled.
stub_summary - (Optional) Specify whether the summary LSA is effective for this area.
enable - Specify that the STUB summary option will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the STUB summary option will be disabled.
metric - (Optional) Specify the metric (1 - 65535; 0 for auto cost) of this area.
65535.
Restrictions
Example
To configure an OSPF area’s settings:
679

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ospf area 10.48.74.122 type stub stub_summary enable

metric 1
Command: config ospf area 10.48.74.122 type stub stub_summary enable metric 1
Success.
69-8 delete ospf area

Description
This command is used to delete an OSPF area.
Format
delete ospf area <area_id>
Parameters
Restrictions
Example
To delete an OSPF area:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete ospf area 10.48.74.122
Command: delete ospf area 10.48.74.122
Success.
69-9 show ospf area

Description
This command is used to display an OSPF area’s configuration.
Format
show ospf area {<area_id>}
Parameters
<area_id> - (Optional) Enter the OSPF area ID used here.
680

®
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display OSPF areas configuration:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ospf area
Command: show ospf area
OSPF Area Settings
Area ID Type Stub Import Summary LSA Stub Default Cost Translate
--------------- ------ ----------------------- ----------------- ---------
0.0.0.0 Normal None None None
10.48.74.122 Stub Enabled 1 None
Total Entries : 2
69-10 create ospf host_route

Description
This command is used to create an OSPF host route.
Format
create ospf host_route <ipaddr> {area <area_id> | metric <value 1-65535>}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Enter the host’s IP address used here.
area - (Optional) Specify a 32-bit number in the form of an IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) that
uniquely identifies the OSPF area in the OSPF domain.
<area_id> - Enter the area ID value here.
metric - (Optional) Specify a metric that will be advertised.
65535.
Restrictions
Example
To create an OSPF host route:
681

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create ospf host_route 10.48.74.122 area 10.1.1.1 metric 2

Command: create ospf host_route 10.48.74.122 area 10.1.1.1 metric 2
Success.
69-11 config ospf host_route

Description
This command is used to configure an OSPF host route.
Format
config ospf host_route <ipaddr> {area <area_id> | metric <value 1-65535>}(1)
Parameters
<area_id> - Enter the area ID value here.
metric - (Optional) Specify a metric that will be advertised.
65535.
Restrictions
Example
To configure an OSPF host route:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ospf host_route 10.48.74.122 area 10.1.1.1 metric 3
Command: config ospf host_route 10.48.74.122 area 10.1.1.1 metric 3
Success.
69-12 delete ospf host_route

Description
This command is used to delete an OSPF host route.
Format
delete ospf host_route <ipaddr>
682

®
Parameters
Restrictions
Example
To delete an OSPF host route:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete ospf host_route 10.48.74.122
Command: delete ospf host_route 10.48.74.122
Success.
69-13 show ospf host_route

Description
This command is used to display the current OSPF host route table.
Format
show ospf host_route {<ipaddr>}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Enter the host’s IP address used here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the OSPF host route settings:
683

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ospf host_route

Command: show ospf host_route
OSPF Host Route Settings
Host Address Metric Area ID

--------------- ------ ---------------
10.48.74.122 3 10.1.1.1
Total Entries : 1
69-14 config ospf router_id

Description
The command is used to configure the router ID for the Switch. Each Switch that is configured to
run OSPF must have a unique router ID.
Format
config ospf router_id <ipaddr>
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Enter the router's IP address here.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the router ID for the Switch:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ospf router_id 10.48.74.122
Command: config ospf router_id 10.48.74.122
Success.
69-15 create ospf virtual_link

Description
This command is used to create an OSPF virtual link.
684

®
Format
create ospf virtual_link <area_id> <neighbor_id> {hello_interval <sec 1-65535> |
dead_interval <sec 1-65535> | authentication [none | simple <password 8> | md5 <key_id 1-
255>]}
Parameters
<area_id> - Specify a 32-bit number in the form of an IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) that uniquely
<neighbor_id> - Specify the OSPF router ID for the remote area. This is a 32-bit number in the
form of an IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) that uniquely identifies the remote area’s Area Border
Router. This is the router ID of the neighbor router.
OSPF Hello packets, in seconds. The Hello Interval, Dead Interval, Authorization Type, and
Authorization Key should be the same for all routers on the same network.
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the hello packet interval used here. This value must be between 1 and
65535.
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the dead packet interval used here. This value must be between 1 and
65535.
authentication - (Optional) Specify the authentication type used.
none - Specify that the authentication type will be set to none.
simple - Specify that a simple text password will be used in the authentication.
<password 8> - Enter the simple text password value here. This value can be up to 8
characters long.
md5 - Specify that an MD5 key ID will be used for the authentication.
<key_id 1-255> - Enter the MD5 key ID value used here. This value can be between 1 and
255.
Restrictions
Example
To create a virtual link to another ABR:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create ospf virtual_link 10.1.1.1 20.1.1.1 hello_interval
10
Command: create ospf virtual_link 10.1.1.1 20.1.1.1 hello_interval 10
Success.
69-16 config ospf virtual_link

Description
This command is used to configure the OSPF virtual link.
685

®
Format
config ospf virtual_link <area_id> <neighbor_id> {hello_interval <sec 1-65535> |
dead_interval <sec 1-65535> | authentication [none | simple <password 8> | md5 <key_id 1-
255>]}(1)
Parameters
OSPF Hello packets, in seconds. The Hello Interval, Dead Interval, Authorization Type, and
Authorization Key should be the same for all routers on the same network.
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the hello packet interval used here. This value must be between 1 and
65535.
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the dead packet interval used here. This value must be between 1 and
65535.
authentication - (Optional) Specify the authentication type used.
none - Specify that the authentication type will be set to none.
simple - Specify that a simple text password will be used in the authentication.
<password 8> - Enter the simple text password value here. This value can be up to 8
characters long.
md5 - Specify that an MD5 key ID will be used for the authentication.
<key_id 1-255> - Enter the MD5 key ID value used here. This value can be between 1 and
255.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the OSPF virtual link:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ospf virtual_link 10.1.1.1 20.1.1.1 hello_interval
30
Command: config ospf virtual_link 10.1.1.1 20.1.1.1 hello_interval 30
Success.
69-17 delete ospf virtual_link

Description
This command is used to delete an OSPF virtual link.
686

®
Format
delete ospf virtual_link <area_id> <neighbor_id>
Parameters
Restrictions
Example
To delete an OSPF virtual link:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete ospf virtual_link 10.1.1.1 20.1.1.1
Command: delete ospf virtual_link 10.1.1.1 20.1.1.1
Success.
69-18 show ospf virtual_link

Description
This command is used to display the current OSPF virtual link configuration.
Format
show ospf virtual_link {<area_id> <neighbor_id>}
Parameters
<area_id> - (Optional) Specify a 32-bit number in the form of an IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) that
<neighbor_id> - (Optional) The OSPF router ID for the remote area. This is a 32-bit number in
the form of an IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) that uniquely identifies the remote area’s Area
Border Router. This is the router ID of the neighbor router.
If no parameter is specified, the system will display the all current OSPF virtual link configuration.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the current OSPF virtual link configuration:
687

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ospf virtual_link

Command: show ospf virtual_link
Virtual Interface Configuration
Transit Virtual Hello Dead Authentication Link

Area ID Neighbor Router Interval Interval Status
--------------- --------------- -------- -------- -------------- ------
10.1.1.1 20.1.1.1 30 60 None Down
Total Entries : 1
69-19 enable ospf

Description
This command is used to enable OSPF on the Switch.
Format
enable ospf
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable OSPF on the Switch:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable ospf
Command: enable ospf
Success.
69-20 disable ospf

Description
This command is used to disable OSPF on the Switch.
688

®
Format
disable ospf
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable OSPF on the Switch:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable ospf
Command: disable ospf
Success.
69-21 show ospf

Description
This command is used to display the current OSPF information on the Switch.
Format
show ospf {[ipif <ipif_name 12> | all]}
Parameters
long.
all - Specify that all the IP interfaces will be displayed.
If no parameter is specified, the system will display the current OSPF state.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the current OSPF state:
689

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ospf
Command: show ospf
OSPF Router ID : 10.90.90.90 (Auto selected)

State : Disabled
OSPF Interface Settings
Interface IP Address Area ID State

Link Metric
Status
------------ ------------------ --------------- -------- --------- ---------
System 10.90.90.90/8 0.0.0.0 Disabled Link Up 1
Total Entries : 1
OSPF Area Settings
Area ID Type Stub Import Summary LSA Stub Default Cost Translate
--------------- ------ ----------------------- ----------------- ---------
0.0.0.0 Normal None None None
Total Entries : 1
69-22 show ospf lsdb

Description
This command is used to display the OSPF Link State Database (LSDB).
Format
show ospf lsdb {area <area_id> | advertise_router <ipaddr> | type [rtrlink | netlink |
summary | assummary | asextlink | nssa_ext | stub]}
Parameters
<area_id> - Enter the area ID used here.
advertise_router - (Optional) Specify the IP address of the advertising router.
<ipaddr> - Enter the advertising router's IP address here.
type - (Optional) Specify the type of link displayed.
rtrlink - Specify the type to be displayed as router link.
netlink - Specify the type to be displayed as network link.
summary - Specify the type to be displayed as summary.
assummary - Specify the type to be displayed as AS summary.
asextlink - Specify the type to be displayed as AS external link.
nssa_ext - Specify the type to be displayed as NSSA external information.
stub - Specify the type to be displayed as STUB link.
690

®
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the link state database of OSPF:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ospf lsdb
Command: show ospf lsdb
Area LSDB Advertising Link State Cost Sequence

ID Type Router ID ID Number
--------------- --------- --------------- ----------------- -------- ---------
0.0.0.0 RTRLink 50.48.75.73 50.48.75.73 * 0x80000002
0.0.0.0 Summary 50.48.75.73 10.0.0.0/8 1 0x80000001
1.0.0.0 RTRLink 50.48.75.73 50.48.75.73 * 0x80000001
1.0.0.0 Summary 50.48.75.73 40.0.0.0/8 1 0x80000001
1.0.0.0 Summary 50.48.75.73 50.0.0.0/8 1 0x80000001
0.0.0.0 ASExtLink 50.48.75.73 1.2.0.0/16 20 0x80000001
Total Entries : 6
69-23 show ospf neighbor

Description
This command is used to display the OSPF-neighbor information on a per-interface basis.
Format
show ospf neighbor {<ipaddr>}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Specify the IP address of the neighbor router.
If no parameter is specified, the system will display all OSPF neighbor information.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display OSPF neighbor information:
691

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ospf neighbor

Command: show ospf neighbor
IP Address of Router ID of Neighbor Neighbor

Neighbor Neighbor Priority State
--------------- --------------- -------- -------------
10.48.74.122 10.2.2.2 1 Initial
Total Entries : 1
69-24 show ospf virtual_neighbor

Description
This command is used to display the OSPF-neighbor information of OSPF virtual links.
Format
show ospf virtual_neighbor {<area_id> <neighbor_id>}
Parameters
<area_id> - (Optional) Specify a 32-bit number in the form of an IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) that
<neighbor_id> - (Optional) Specify the OSPF router ID for the remote area. This is a 32-bit
number in the form of an IP address (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) that uniquely identifies the remote
area’s Area Border Router.
If no parameter is specified, the system will display all OSPF virtual-link neighbor information.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display OSPF virtual-link neighbor information:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ospf virtual_neighbor
Command: show ospf virtual_neighbor
Transit Router ID of IP Address of Virtual Neighbor

Area ID Virtual Neighbor Virtual Neighbor State
--------------- ---------------- ---------------- ----------------
10.1.1.1 10.2.3.4 10.48.74.111 Exchange
Total Entries : 1
692

®
69-25 config ospf default-information

Description
This command is used to change the status of originating the OSPF default external route.
Format
config ospf default-information {originate [always | default | none] | mettype [1 | 2] | metric
<value 1-65535>}(1)
Parameters
originate - (Optional) Specify the status of originating default information.
always - Specify that the external default route will be originated, whether a default route
exists or not.
default - Specify that the external default route will be originated only when one default route
already exists.
none - Specify that the external default route will never be originated. This is the default
option.
mettype - (Optional) Specify the type of LSA that contains the default external route imported into
OSPF.
1 - Specify that this default external route will be calculated using the metric by adding the
interface cost to the metric entered in the metric field.
2 - Specify that this default external route will be calculated using the metric entered in the
metric field without change. This is the default option.
metric - (Optional) Specify the metric used by originating default external route.
65535.
Restrictions
Example
To set the status of originating the OSPF default external route:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ospf default-information originate always
Command: config ospf default-information originate always
Success.
693

®
Chapter 70 OSPF Version 3 Command

List (RI Mode Only)
config ospfv3 router_id <ipaddr>
enable ospfv3
disable ospfv3
config ospfv3 [ipif <ipif_name 12> | all] {area <area_id> | priority <value 0-255> | hello_interval
<sec 1-65535> | dead_interval <sec 1-65535> | instance <value 0-255> | metric <value 1-
65535> | state [enable | disable] | passive [enable | disable]}(1)
show ospfv3 {[ipif <ipif_name 12> | all]}
create ospfv3 area <area_id> type [normal | stub {stub_summary [enable | disable] | metric
<value 0-65535>}]
config ospfv3 area <area_id> type [normal | stub {stub_summary [enable | disable] | metric
<value 0-65535>}]
delete ospfv3 area <area_id>
show ospfv3 area {<area_id>}
create ospfv3 aggregation <area_id> <ipv6networkaddr> advertise [enable | disable]
config ospfv3 aggregation <area_id> <ipv6networkaddr> advertise [enable | disable]
delete ospfv3 aggregation <area_id> <ipv6networkaddr>
show ospfv3 aggregation {<area_id>}
show ospfv3 lsdb {area <area_id> | type [rtrlink | netlink | inter_area_prefix | inter_area_router |
asextlink | link_lsa | intra_area_prefix]}
show ospfv3 neighbor {<neighbor_id> ipif <ipif_name 12>}
show ospfv3 virtual_neighbor {<area_id> <neighbor_id>}
create ospfv3 virtual_link <area_id> <neighbor_id> {hello_interval <sec 1-65535> |
dead_interval <sec 1-65535> | instance <value 0-255>}
config ospfv3 virtual_link <area_id> <neighbor_id> {hello_interval <sec 1-65535> |
dead_interval <sec 1-65535> |instance <value 0-255>}(1)
delete ospfv3 virtual_link <area_id> <neighbor_id>
show ospfv3 virtual_link {<area_id> <neighbor_id>}
create ipv6route redistribute dst ospfv3 src [local | static | ripng] {mettype [1 | 2] | metric <value
1-16777214>}
config ipv6route redistribute dst ospfv3 src [local | static | ripng] {mettype [1 | 2] | metric <value
1-16777214>}(1)
delete ipv6route redistribute dst ospfv3 src [local | static | ripng]
70-1 config ospfv3 router_id

Description
This command is used to configure the OSPFv3 router ID.
Format
config ospfv3 router_id <ipaddr>
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Enter a 32-bit number in the form of an IPv4 address that uniquely identifies the router
in the OSPFv3 domain. In OSPFv3, neighboring routers on a given link are always identified
by their OSPFv3 Router ID. Set 0.0.0.0 means auto-selected. Switch will select the largest
694

®
IPv4 address among the IP interfaces to be the router ID. The default value of OSPFv3 router
ID is 0.0.0.0 (auto-selected). Only with executing this command, the OSPFv3 router ID can be
changed.
Restrictions
Example
To configure OSPFv3 router ID:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ospfv3 router_id 1.1.1.1
Command: config ospfv3 router_id 1.1.1.1
Success.
70-2 enable ospfv3

Description
This command is used to enable OSPFv3 on the Switch.
Format
enable ospfv3
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable OSPFv3:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable ospfv3
Command: enable ospfv3
Success.
70-3 disable ospfv3

Description
This command is used to disable OSPFv3 on the Switch.
695

®
Format
disable ospfv3
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable OSPFv3:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable ospfv3
Command: disable ospfv3
Success.
70-4 config ospfv3

Description
This command is used to configure an OSPFv3 interface.
Format
config ospfv3 [ipif <ipif_name 12> | all] {area <area_id> | priority <value 0-255> |
hello_interval <sec 1-65535> | dead_interval <sec 1-65535> | instance <value 0-255> | metric
<value 1-65535> | state [enable | disable] | passive [enable | disable]}(1)
Parameters
ipif - Specify to configure an OSPFv3 interface.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the name of the OSPFv3 interface.
all - Specify to configure all OSPFv3 interfaces.
area - (Optional) Specify the OSPFv3 area ID. It is a 32-bit number in the form of an IPv4
address that uniquely identifies the OSPFv3 area in the OSPFv3 domain.
<area_id> - Enter the OSPFv3 area ID.
priority - (Optional) Specify the priority used in the election of the Designated Router (DR).
<value 0-255> - Enter a value between 0 and 255. The default value is 1.
hello_interval - (Optional) Specify to allow the interval between the transmission of OSPFv3
Hello packets, in seconds.
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the time between 1 and 65535. The default value is 10.
dead_interval - (Optional) Specify to allow the interval between the receipt of Hello packets from
a neighbor router before the selected area declares that router down.
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the time between 1 and 65535. The default value is 40.
instance - (Optional) Specify the instance ID of the interface. Support for multiple instances on a
696

®
link is accomplished through an instance ID contained in the OSPFv3 packet header. If the
instance ID configured on the interface and that of a received OSPFv3 packets do not match,
the interface discards the packet and no neighbor relationship can be established.
metric - (Optional) Specify to allow the representative of the OSPFv3 cost to reach the specified
OSPFv3 interface.
state - (Optional) Specify to enable or disable this interface to run OSPFv3.
enable - Enable the interface to run OSPFv3.
disable - Disable the interface to run OSPFv3. This is the default.
passive - (Optional) Specify that the user may select Active or Passive for this OSPFv3 interface.
Active interface actively advertises OSPFv3 to routers on other Intranets that are not part of
this specific OSPFv3 group. Passive interface does not advertise to any other routers except
those within its OSPFv3 intranet. When this field is disabled, it denotes an active interface. Its
default setting is Disabled.
enable - Specify to be passive interface.
disable - Specify to be active interface.
Restrictions
Example
To configure an OSPFv3 interface:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ospfv3 ipif System area 1.1.1.1 priority 100
hello_interval 20 dead_interval 60 instance 1 metric 20 state enable passive
disable
Command: config ospfv3 ipif System area 1.1.1.1 priority 100 hello_interval 20
dead_interval 60 instance 1 metric 20 state enable passive disable
Success.
70-5 show ospfv3

Description
This command is used to display OSPFv3 configurations, including global state, router ID,
OSPFv3 interfaces, areas, virtual links and area aggregations. If the parameter is set, it is used to
display the information of one or all OSPFv3 interfaces.
Format
show ospfv3 {[ipif <ipif_name 12> | all]}
Parameters
ipif - (Optional) Specify the OSPFv3 interface.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the OSPFv3 interface name.
all - (Optional) Specify to display all OSPFv3 interfaces.
697

®
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display OSPFv3 configurations:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ospfv3
Command: show ospfv3
OSPFv3 Router ID : 1.1.1.1

State : Disabled
OSPFv3 Interface Settings
Interface Area ID State

Link Metric Instance ID
Status
------------ --------------- -------- --------- --------- -----------
Total Entries: 0
OSPFv3 Area Settings
Area ID Type Stub Import Summary LSA Stub Default Cost

--------------- ------ ----------------------- -----------------
0.0.0.0 Normal None None
Total Entries: 1
70-6 create ospfv3 area

Description
This command is used to create an OSPFv3 area.
Format
create ospfv3 area <area_id> type [normal | stub {stub_summary [enable | disable] | metric
<value 0-65535>}]
Parameters
<area_id> - Enter the OSPFv3 area ID. It is a 32-bit number in the form of an IPv4 address that
uniquely identifies the OSPFv3 area in the OSPFv3 domain.
type - The OSPFv3 area mode of operation.
normal - Define the OSPFv3 area created as a normal area.
stub - Define the OSPFv3 area created as a stub area.
698

®
stub_summary - (Optional) Specify whether the OSPFv3 stub area imports inter-area
prefix LSA advertisements.
enable - Import inter-area prefix LSA into this stub area.
disable - Stop importing inter-area prefix LSA into this stub area.
metric - (Optional) Specify the cost of default inter-area prefix LSA in OSPFv3 stub area.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the value between 0 and 65535. The default value is 1.
Restrictions
Example
To create an OSPFv3 area:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create ospfv3 area 1.1.1.1 type normal
Command: create ospfv3 area 1.1.1.1 type normal
Success.
70-7 config ospfv3 area

Description
This command is used to configure an OSPFv3 area. The backbone area (0.0.0.0) can not be
configured to be stub area.
Format
config ospfv3 area <area_id> type [normal | stub {stub_summary [enable | disable] | metric
<value 0-65535>}]
Parameters
type - The OSPFv3 area mode of operation.
normal - Define the OSPFv3 area created as a normal area.
stub - Define the OSPFv3 area created as a stub area.
stub_summary - (Optional) Specify whether the OSPFv3 stub area imports inter-area
prefix LSA advertisements.
enable - Import inter-area prefix LSA into this stub area.
disable - Stop importing inter-area prefix LSA into this stub area.
metric - (Optional) Specify the cost of default inter-area prefix LSA in OSPFv3 stub area.
Restrictions
699

®
Example
To configure OSPFv3 area:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ospfv3 area 2.2.2.2 type stub
Command: config ospfv3 area 2.2.2.2 type stub
Success.
70-8 delete ospfv3 area

Description
This command is used to delete an OSPFv3 area. The backbone area (0.0.0.0) can not be deleted.
Format
delete ospfv3 area <area_id>
Parameters
Restrictions
Example
To delete an OSPFv3 area:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete ospfv3 area 2.2.2.2
Command: delete ospfv3 area 2.2.2.2
Success.
70-9 show ospfv3 area

Description
This command is used to display OSPFv3 area configurations or information.
Format
show ospfv3 area {<area_id>}
700

®
Parameters
<area_id> - (Optional) Enter the OSPFv3 area ID. It is a 32-bit number in the form of an IPv4
address that uniquely identifies the OSPFv3 area in the OSPFv3 domain.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display OSPFv3 areas:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ospfv3 area
Command: show ospfv3 area
OSPFv3 Area Settings
Area ID Type Stub Import Summary LSA Stub Default Cost

--------------- ------ ----------------------- -----------------
Total Entries: 2
70-10 create ospfv3 aggregation

Description
This command is used to create an OSPFv3 area aggregation.
Format
create ospfv3 aggregation <area_id> <ipv6networkaddr> advertise [enable | disable]
Parameters
<area_id> - Enter the OSPFv3 area ID where the aggregation belongs to.
<ipv6networkaddr> - Enter the IPv6 network address of the aggregation.
advertise - Specify whether to use this aggregation to aggregate the intra-area routes when it
advertises these routes to another area.
enable - OSPFv3 ABR(Area Border Router) will use this aggregation to aggregate the intra-
area routes when it advertises these routes to another area.
disable - OSPFv3 ABR will not use this aggregation to aggregate the intra-area routes when it
Restrictions
701

®
Example
To create an OSPFv3 area aggregation:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create ospfv3 aggregation 2.2.2.2 2000::/16 advertise
enable
Command: create ospfv3 aggregation 2.2.2.2 2000::/16 advertise enable
Success.
70-11 config ospfv3 aggregation

Description
This command is used to configure an OSPFv3 area aggregation.
Format
config ospfv3 aggregation <area_id> <ipv6networkaddr> advertise [enable | disable]
Parameters
advertise - Specify whether to use this aggregation to aggregate the intra-area routes when it
enable - OSPFv3 ABR(Area Border Router) will use this aggregation to aggregate the intra-
area routes when it advertises these routes to another area.
disable - OSPFv3 ABR will not use this aggregation to aggregate the intra-area routes when it
Restrictions
Example
To configure an OSPFv3 area aggregation:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ospfv3 aggregation 2.2.2.2 2000::/16 advertise
disable
Command: config ospfv3 aggregation 2.2.2.2 2000::/16 advertise disable
Success.
70-12 delete ospfv3 aggregation

Description
This command is used to delete an OSPFv3 area aggregation.
702

®
Format
delete ospfv3 aggregation <area_id> <ipv6networkaddr>
Parameters
Restrictions
Example
To delete an OSPFv3 area aggregation:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete ospfv3 aggregation 2.2.2.2 2000::/16
Command: delete ospfv3 aggregation 2.2.2.2 2000::/16
Success.
70-13 show ospfv3 aggregation

Description
This command is used to display OSPFv3 area aggregation configurations.
Format
show ospfv3 aggregation {<area_id>}
Parameters
<area_id> - (Optional) Enter the OSPFv3 area ID where the aggregation belongs to.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display OSPFv3 area aggregations:
703

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ospfv3 aggregation

Command: show ospfv3 aggregation
OSPFv3 Area Aggregation Settings
Area ID Aggregated LSDB Advertise

Network Address Type
--------------- ------------------ -------- ---------
2.2.2.2 2000::/16 Summary Enabled
Total Entries: 1
70-14 show ospfv3 lsdb

Description
This command is used to display the OSPFv3 Link-State Database.
Format
show ospfv3 lsdb {area <area_id> | type [rtrlink | netlink | inter_area_prefix |
inter_area_router | asextlink | link_lsa | intra_area_prefix]}
Parameters
area - (Optional) Specify to only display the LSAs that belong to this area.
<area_id> - Enter the area ID.
type - (Optional) Specify to only display the LSAs of the specific type. The detail information for
these LSAs displays at the same time.
rtrlink - Specify to only display Router LSA.
netlink - Specify to only display Network LSA.
inter_area_prefix - Specify to only display Inter-area-prefix LSA.
inter_area_router - Specify to only display Inter-area-router LSA.
asextlink - Specify to only display AS external LSA.
link_lsa - Specify to only display Link LSA.
intra_area_prefix - Specify to only display Intra-area-prefix LSA.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show display OSPFv3 Link-State Database:
704

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ospfv3 lsdb

Command: show ospfv3 lsdb
Router LSA (Area 0.0.0.0)

Link State ID Adv Router Age Seq# Link
0.0.0.0 2.2.2.2 696 0x80000003 0
Link LSA (Interface System)

Link State ID Adv Router Age Seq# Prefix
0.0.0.1 2.2.2.2 696 0x80000003 1
Intra-Area-Prefix LSA (Area 0.0.0.0)

Link State ID ADV Router Age Seq# Ref LSA Type
0.0.0.1 2.2.2.2 684 0x80000004 0x2001
Total Entries: 3
70-15 show ospfv3 neighbor

Description
This command is used to display OSPFv3 neighbor information.
Format
show ospfv3 neighbor {<neighbor_id> ipif <ipif_name 12>}
Parameters
<neighbor_id> - (Optional) Specify the neighbor ID.
ipif - (Optional) Specify the interface where the neighbor is built.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the interface name.
Restrictions
Example
To show ospfv3 neighbor:
705

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ospfv3 neighbor

Command: show ospfv3 neighbor
Router ID of Interface Neighbor Neighbor

Neighbor Name Priority State
--------------- ------------ -------- -------------
10.10.10.10 System 1 Full
20.20.20.20 ip1 10 Full
Total Entries: 2
70-16 show ospfv3 virtual_neighbor

Description
This command is used to display OSPFv3 virtual neighbor information.
Format
show ospfv3 virtual_neighbor {<area_id> <neighbor_id>}
Parameters
<area_id> - (Optional) Specify the transit area where the virtual neighbor is built.
<neighbor_id> - (Optional) Specify the virtural neighbor router ID.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display OSPFv3 virtual neighbor:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ospfv3 virtual_neighbor
Command: show ospfv3 virtual_neighbor
Transit Router ID of Virtual Neighbor

Area ID Virtual Neighbor State
--------------- ---------------- ----------------
1.1.1.1 30.30.30.30 Full
Total Entries: 1
70-17 create ospfv3 virtual_link

Description
This command is used to create an OSPFv3 virtual link
706

®
Format
create ospfv3 virtual_link <area_id> <neighbor_id> {hello_interval <sec 1-65535> |
dead_interval <sec 1-65535> | instance <value 0-255>}
Parameters
<area_id> - Specify a 32-bit number in the form of an IPv4 address that uniquely identifies the
OSPFv3 area in the OSPFv3 domain. This area is the transit area where the virtual link is
built.
<neighbor_id> - Specify a 32-bit number in the form of an IPv4 address that uniquely identifies
the OSPFv3 virtual neighbor in the OSPFv3 domain.
hello_interval - (Optional) Specify the interval between the transmission of OSPFv3 hello
packets. The hello interval and dead interval should be the same for all routers at the same
link.
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the interval between 1 and 65535 seconds. The default value is 10.
dead_interval - (Optional) Specify the interval between the receipt of hello packets from a
neighbor router before the selected area declares that the router is down. The dead interval
must be evenly divisible by the hello interval.
instance - (Optional) The instance ID on the virtual link. Support for multiple instances on a link is
accomplished through an instance ID contained in the OSPFv3 packet header. If the instance
ID configured on the interface and that of a received OSPFv3 packets do not match, the
interface discards the packet and no neighbor relationship can be established.
<value 0-255> - Enter a value between 0 and 255.
Restrictions
Example
To create OSPFv3 virtual link:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create ospfv3 virtual_link 1.1.1.1 60.60.60.60
Command: create ospfv3 virtual_link 1.1.1.1 60.60.60.60
Success.
70-18 config ospfv3 virtual_link

Description
This command is used to configure an OSPFv3 virtual link.
Format
config ospfv3 virtual_link <area_id> <neighbor_id> {hello_interval <sec 1-65535> |
dead_interval <sec 1-65535> |instance <value 0-255>}(1)
707

®
Parameters
built.
hello_interval - (Optional) Specify the interval between the transmission of OSPFv3 hello
packets. The hello interval and dead interval should be the same for all routers at the same
link.
dead_interval - (Optional) Specify the interval between the receipt of hello packets from a
neighbor router before the selected area declares that the router is down. The dead interval
must be evenly divisible by the hello interval.
instance - (Optional) The instance ID on the virtual link. Support for multiple instances on a link is
accomplished through an instance ID contained in the OSPFv3 packet header. If the instance
ID configured on the interface and that of a received OSPFv3 packets do not match, the
interface discards the packet and no neighbor relationship can be established.
Restrictions
Example
To configure an OSPFv3 virtual link:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ospfv3 virtual_link 1.1.1.1 60.60.60.60
hello_interval 20 dead_interval 80 instance 1
Command: config ospfv3 virtual_link 1.1.1.1 60.60.60.60 hello_interval 20
dead_interval 80 instance 1
Success.
70-19 delete ospfv3 virtual_link

Description
This command is used to delete an OSPFv3 virtual link.
Format
delete ospfv3 virtual_link <area_id> <neighbor_id>
Parameters
built.
708

®
Restrictions
Example
To delete an OSPFv3 virtual link:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete ospfv3 virtual_link 1.1.1.1 60.60.60.60
Command: delete ospfv3 virtual_link 1.1.1.1 60.60.60.60
Success.
70-20 show ospfv3 virtual_link

Description
This command is used to display OSPFv3 virtual link configurations.
Format
show ospfv3 virtual_link {<area_id> <neighbor_id>}
Parameters
<area_id> - (Optional) Specify a 32-bit number in the form of an IPv4 address that uniquely
identifies the OSPFv3 area in the OSPFv3 domain. This area is the transit area where the
virtual link is built.
<neighbor_id> - (Optional) Specify a 32-bit number in the form of an IPv4 address that uniquely
identifies the OSPFv3 virtual neighbor in the OSPFv3 domain.
Restrictions
Example
To display an OSPFv3 virtual link:
709

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ospfv3 virtual_link

Command: show ospfv3 virtual_link
Transit Virtual Hello Dead Instance ID Link

Area ID Neighbor Router Interval Interval Status
--------------- --------------- -------- -------- ----------- ------
1.1.1.1 60.60.60.60 20 80 1 Down
Total Entries: 1
70-21 create ipv6route redistribute dst ospfv3 src

Description
This command is used to create a new IPv6 route redistribution to import route of other protocol
into OSPFv3.
Format
create ipv6route redistribute dst ospfv3 src [local | static | ripng] {mettype [1 | 2] | metric
<value 1-16777214>}
Parameters
local - Redistribute local routes into OSPFv3.
static - Redistribute static routes into OSPFv3.
ripng - Redistribute RIPng routes into OSPFv3.
mettype - (Optional) Allow the selection of one of two methods for calculating the metric value.
1 - 1 calculates the metric (for other routing protocols to OSPFv3) by adding the destination’s
interface cost to the metric entered in the Metric field.
2 - 2 uses the metric entered in the Metric field without change. If the metric type is not
specified, it will be type 2.
metric - (Optional) Specify the metric for the redistributed routes.
Restrictions
Example
To create OSPFv3 route redistribution:
710

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create ipv6route redistribute dst ospfv3 src static

Command: create ipv6route redistribute dst ospfv3 src static
Success.
70-22 config ipv6route redistribute dst ospfv3 src

Description
This command is used to configure the settings of the IPv6 route redistribution to import route of
other protocol into OSPFv3.
Format
config ipv6route redistribute dst ospfv3 src [local | static | ripng] {mettype [1 | 2] | metric
<value 1-16777214>}(1)
Parameters
local - Redistribute local routes into OSPFv3.
static - Redistribute static routes into OSPFv3.
ripng - Redistribute RIPng routes into OSPFv3.
1 - 1 calculates the metric (for other routing protocols to OSPFv3) by adding the destination’s
2 - 2 uses the metric entered in the Metric field without change. If the metric type is not
specified, it will be type 2.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the metric of OSPFv3 route redistribution:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ipv6route redistribute dst ospfv3 src static mettype
1 metric 100
Command: config ipv6route redistribute dst ospfv3 src static mettype 1 metric
100
Success.
711

®
70-23 delete ipv6route redistribute dst ospfv3 src

Description
This command is used to remove the IPv6 route redistribution to stop importing route of other
protocol into OSPFv3.
Format
delete ipv6route redistribute dst ospfv3 src [local | static | ripng]
Parameters
local - Specify not to redistribute local routes into OSPFv3.
static - Specify not to redistribute static routes into OSPFv3.
ripng - Specify not to redistribute RIPng routes into OSPFv3.
Restrictions
Example
To remove OSPFv3 route redistribution:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete ipv6route redistribute dst ospfv3 src static
Command: delete ipv6route redistribute dst ospfv3 src static
Success.
712

®
Chapter 71 Password Recovery

Command List
enable password_recovery
disable password_recovery
show password_recovery
71-1 enable password_recovery

Description
This command is used to enable the password recovery mode.
Note: This command does not take effect until being saved.
Format
enable password_recovery
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the password recovery mode:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable password_recovery
Command: enable password_recovery
Success.
71-2 disable password_recovery

Description
This command is used to disable the password recovery mode.
Note: This command does not take effect until being saved.
713

®
Format
disable password_recovery
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable the password recovery mode:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable password_recovery
Command: disable password_recovery
Success.
71-3 show password_recovery

Description
The command is used to display the password recovery state. The displayed content includes both
the running configuration and the NV-RAM configuration.
When the password recovery state is enabled, the user can reboot the Switch and enter the
Password Recovery mode. Otherwise, the user will not be able to enter the special recovery mode.
Note: Only the NV-RAM configuration will take effect when the Switch restarts, the running
configuration does not take effect until being saved. That means the password recovery is
determined by the state stored in the NV-RAM and takes effect when the Switch starts up
the next time. The Running Configuration is the current configured state of the password
recovery, the configuration is deleted without being saved, or becomes the NV-RAM
configuration when being saved.
Format
show password_recovery
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
714

®
Example
To display the password recovery state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show password_recovery
Command: show password_recovery
Running Configuration : Enabled

NV-RAM Configuration : Enabled
715

®
Chapter 72 Peripherals Command List

show device_status
show environment
config temperature threshold {high <temperature -500-500> | low <temperature -500-500>}
config temperature [trap | log] state [enable | disable]
config fan trap state [enable | disable]
config power trap state [enable | disable]
72-1 show device_status

Description
This command is used to display current status of power(s) and fan(s) on the system.
Within fan(s) status display, for example, there are three fans on the left of the Switch, if three fans
is working normally, there will display “OK” in the Left Fan field. If some fans work failed, such as
fan 1,3 , there will only display the failed fans in the Left Fan field, such as “1,3 Fail”.
In the same way, the Right Fan, Back Fan is same to Left Fan. Because there is only one CPU
Fan, if it is working failed, display “Fail”, otherwise display “OK”.
Format
show device_status
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show device status, the number 1, 2, 3 etc represent the fan number:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show device_status
Command: show device_status
Unit 1:
Internal Power: Active
External Power: Fail
Right Fan : 1,2 Fail
716

®
72-2 show environment

Description
This command is used to display current status of power(s) and fan(s) on the system.
Format
show environment
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the standalone device environment:
717

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show environment
Command: show environment
High Warning Temperature Threshold(Celsius) : 79

Low Warning Temperature Threshold(Celsius) : -10
Unit 1
Internal Power : Active
External Power : Fail
Right Fan 1 : Speed Low (3000 RPM)
Current Temperature(Celsius) : 37
Fan High Temperature Threshold(Celsius) : 40
Fan Low Temperature Threshold(Celsius) : 35
Unit 2
Unit 3
72-3 config temperature threshold

Description
This command is used to configure the warning threshold for high and low temperature.
The temperature thresholds are dependent on product. When temperature is above high threshold
or below low threshold, SW will send alarm traps or shut down the Switch system.
Format
config temperature threshold {high <temperature -500-500> | low <temperature -500-500>}
Parameters
threshold - Specify the high and low threshold value.
high - (Optional) To configure high threshold value. m is the high threshold value. The high
threshold must bigger than the low threshold.
718

®
<temperature -500-500> - Enter the high threshold temperature here.

low - (Optional) To configure low threshold value. n is the low threshold value.
<temperature -500-500> - Enter the low threshold temperature here.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the warning temperature threshold:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config temperature threshold high 80
Command: config temperature threshold high 80
Success.
72-4 config temperature

Description
This command is used to configure the trap and log state for temperature warning event.
Format
config temperature [trap | log] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
trap state - Specify the trap state for the warning temperature event.
enable - Enable trap state for warning temperature event. The default state is enabled.
disable - Disable trap state for warning temperature event.
log state - Specify the log state for the warning temperature event.
enable - Enable log state for warning temperature event. The default state is enabled.
disable - Disable log state for warning temperature event.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the trap state for temperature warning event:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config temperature trap state enable
Command: config temperature trap state enable
Success.
719

®
72-5 config fan trap state

Description
This command is used to configure the trap state for fan warning event.
Format
config fan trap state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enable trap state for warning fan event.
disable - Disable trap state for warning fan event.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the warning fan traps state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config fan trap state enable
Command: config fan trap state enable
Success.
72-6 config power trap state

Description
This command is used to configure the trap state for power warning event.
Format
config power trap state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enable trap state for warning power event.
disable - Disable trap state for warning power event.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the warning power traps state:
720

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config power trap state enable

Command: config power trap state enable
Success.
721

®
Chapter 73 Ping Command List

ping <ipaddr> {times <value 1-255> | timeout <sec 1-99> | source_ip <ipaddr>}
ping6 <ipv6addr> {times <value 1-255> | size <value 1-6000> | timeout <sec 1-99> | source_ip
<ipv6addr>}
73-1 ping
Description
This command is used to send Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) echo messages to a
remote IP address. The remote IP address will then “echo” or return the message. This is used to
confirm connectivity between the Switch and the remote device.
Format
ping <ipaddr> {times <value 1-255> | timeout <sec 1-99> | source_ip <ipaddr>}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Specify the IP address of the host.
times - (Optional) The number of individual ICMP echo messages to be sent. A value of 0 will
send an infinite ICMP echo messages. The maximum value is 255. The default is 0, indicating
infinity. Press the "CTRL+C” to break the ping test.
<value 1-255> - Enter the number of individual ICMP echo messages to be sent here. This
value must be between 1 and 255.
timeout - (Optional) Specify the time-out period while waiting for a response from the remote
device. A value of 1 to 99 seconds can be specified. The default is 1 second.
<sec 1-99> - Enter the time-out period here. This value must be between 1 and 99 seconds.
source_ip - (Optional) Specify the source IP.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To send ICMP echo message to “10.51.17.1” for 4 times:
722

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# ping 10.51.17.1 times 4

Command: ping 10.51.17.1 times 4
Reply from 10.51.17.1, time<10ms

Ping Statistics for 10.51.17.1

Packets: Sent =4, Received =4, Lost =0
73-2 ping6
Description
This command is used to send IPv6 Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) echo messages to
a remote IPv6 address. The remote IPv6 address will then “echo” or return the message. This is
used to confirm the IPv6 connectivity between the Switch and the remote device.
Format
ping6 <ipv6addr> {times <value 1-255> | size <value 1-6000> | timeout <sec 1-99> |
source_ip <ipv6addr>}
Parameters
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address here.
times - (Optional) The number of individual ICMP echo messages to be sent. A value of 0 will
send an infinite ICMP echo messages. The maximum value is 255. The default is 0, indicating
infinity. Press the "CTRL+C” to break the ping test.
<value 1-255> - Enter the number of individual ICMP echo messages to be sent here. This
size - (Optional) Size of the test packet.
<value 1-6000> - Enter the size of the test packet here. This value must be between 1 and
6000.
timeout - (Optional) Defines the time-out period while waiting for a response from the remote
device.
<sec 1-99> - Enter the time-out period here. This value must be between 1 and 99 seconds.
The default is 1 second.
source_ip - (Optional) Specify the source IP.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To send ICMP echo message to “3000::1” for 4 times:
723

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# ping6 3000::1 times 4

Command: ping6 3000::1 times 4
Reply from 3000::1, bytes=100, time<10ms

Ping Statistics for 3000::1

Packets: Sent =4, Received =4, Lost =0
724

®
Chapter 74 Policy Route Command List

(RI Mode Only)
create policy_route name <policyroute_name 32>
delete policy_route name <policyroute_name 32>
config policy_route name <policyroute_name 32> acl profile_id <value 1-6> access_id <value 1-
256> nexthop <ipaddr> state [enable | disable]
show policy_route
74-1 create policy_route name

Description
This command is used to create a policy route and define the route’s name.
Format
create policy_route name <policyroute_name 32>
Parameters
<policyroute_name 32> - The policy route name. The maximum length is 32 characters.
Restrictions
Example
To create a policy route named “danilo”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create policy_route name danilo
Command: create policy_route name danilo
Success.
74-2 delete policy_route name

Description
This command is used to delete a policy route.
Format
delete policy_route name <policyroute_name 32>
725

®
Parameters
Restrictions
Example
To delete an IP route entry in the Switch’s IP routing table named “duhon”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete policy_route name duhon
Command: delete policy_route name duhon
Success.
74-3 config policy_route name

Description
This command allows users to configure the different fields for a policy route entry. Users can set
the state of a policy route to enable or disable.
j. The user must create an ACL rule. If the ACL rule does not exist, the system will display
an error message.
k. If the ACL rule action is drop, these packets will not forward and the policy route will not be
implemented.
l. When a packet passes from the policy route, its TTL will decrease by 1.
m. If a user deletes an ACL rule that is linked to a policy rule, the system will display an error
message.
Format
config policy_route name <policyroute_name 32> acl profile_id <value 1-6> access_id
<value 1-256> nexthop <ipaddr> state [enable | disable]
Parameters
acl profile_id - The ACL profile ID.
<value 1-6>- Specify the value between 1 and 6.
access_id - The ACL access ID.
<value 1-256> - Specify the value between 1 and 256.
nexthop - The next hop IP address.
<ipaddr> - Speciify the IP address.
state - Activate or deactivate this rule.
enable - Activate this rule.
disable - Deactivate this rule.
Restrictions
726

®
Example
To configure all packets which match ACL rule profile ID=1 and access ID=1, and then route to
20.1.1.100:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config policy_route name danilo acl profile_id 1 access_id
1 nexthop 20.1.1.100 state enable
Command: config policy_route name danilo acl profile_id 1 access_id 1 nexthop
20.1.1.100 state enable
Success.
74-4 show policy_route

Description
This command is used to display the Switch’s current policy route rules.
Format
show policy_route
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the Switch’s current policy route rules:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show policy_route
Command: show policy_route
Policy Routing Table

---------------------
Name Profile ID Access ID Next Hop State

-------------------------------- ---------- --------- --------------- --------
danilo 1 1 20.1.1.100 Enabled
Total Entries: 1
727

®
Chapter 75 Port Security Command List

config port_security system max_learning_addr [<max_lock_no 1-3072> | no_limit]
config port_security ports [<portlist> | all] [{admin_state [enable | disable] | max_learning_addr
<max_lock_no 0-3072> | action [drop | shutdown] | lock_address_mode [permanent |
deleteontimeout | deleteonreset]} | {vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>]
max_learning_addr [<max_lock_no 0-3072> | no_limit]}(1)]
config port_security vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>] max_learning_addr [<max_lock_no
0-3072> | no_limit]
delete port_security_entry [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>] mac_address
<macaddr>
clear port_security_entry {ports [<portlist> | all] {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>]}}
show port_security_entry {ports {<portlist>} {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>]}}
show port_security {ports {<portlist>} {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>]}}
config port_security trap state [enable | disable]
config port_security log state [enable | disable]
75-1 config port_security system max_learning_addr

Description
This command is used to set the maximum number of port security entries that can be authorized
system wide.
There are four levels of limitations on the learned entry number; for the entire system, for a port,
for a VLAN, and for a specific VLAN on a port. If any limitation is exceeded, the new entry will be
discarded.
The setting for system level maximum learned users must be greater than the total of maximum
learned users allowed on all ports.
Format
config port_security system max_learning_addr [<max_lock_no 1-3072> | no_limit]
Parameters
max_learning_addr - Specify the maximum number of port security entries that can be learned
by the system. If the setting is smaller than the number of current learned entries on all
enabled ports, the command will be rejected.
<max_lock_no 1-3072> - Enter the maximum learning address value here. This value must
no_limit - No limitation on the number of port security entries that can be learned by the
system. By default, the number is set to no_limit.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the maximum number of port security entries on the Switch to be 256:
728

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config port_security system max_learning_addr 256

Command: config port_security system max_learning_addr 256
Success.
75-2 config port_security ports

Description
This command is used to configure the admin state, the maximum number of addresses that can
be learnt and the lock address mode.
There are four levels that limit the number of learned entries; the entire system, a port, a VLAN,
and a specific VLAN on a port. If any limitation is exceeded, the new entry will be discarded.
Format
config port_security ports [<portlist> | all] [{admin_state [enable | disable] |
max_learning_addr <max_lock_no 0-3072> | action [drop | shutdown] | lock_address_mode
[permanent | deleteontimeout | deleteonreset]}(1) | {vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>]
max_learning_addr [<max_lock_no 0-3072> | no_limit]}(1)]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter the list of port used for this configuration.
all - Specify that all ports will be configured.
admin_state - Specify the state of the port security function on the port.
enable - Specify to enable the port security function on the port.
disable - Specify to disable the port security function on the port. By default, the setting is
disabled.
on this port. If the value is set to 0, it means that no user can be authorized by the port
security function on this port. If the setting is smaller than the number of current learned
entries on the port, the command will be rejected. The default value is 32.
<max_lock_no 0-3072> - Enter the maximum number of port security entries that can be
learned here. This value must be between 0 and 3072.
action - Specify the action to be taken when the number of secure MAC address reaches the
maximum learning on the port.
drop - When the number of secure MAC address reaches the maximum learning on the port,
new entry will be dropped. This is the default setting.
shutdown - When the number of secure MAC address reaches the maximum learning on the
port, the port will be shut down and enter error-disabled state immediately. The port state is
recovered only by enabling the port manually.The shutdown action only applies to port
level security setting.
lock_address_mode - Indicates the lock address mode. The default mode is deleteonreset.
permanent - The address will never be deleted unless the user removes it manually, the
VLAN of the entry is removed, the port is removed from the VLAN, or port security is
disabled on the port where the address resides.
deleteontimeout - This entry will be removed if the entry is idle for the specified aging time.
deleteonreset - This address will be removed if the Switch is reset or rebooted. Events that
cause permanent entries to be deleted also apply to the deleteonreset entries.
vlan - Specify the VLAN name used here.
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the VLAN name used here. This name can be up to 32 characters
long.
729

®
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID used here.

<vidlist> - Enter the VLAN ID used here.
max_learning_addr - Specify the maximum learning address value.
<max_lock_no 0-3072> - Enter the maximum learning address value here. This value
no_limit - Specify that the maximum learning address value will be set to no limit.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the port-based port security setting so that the maximum number of port security
entries is restricted to 10, and the lock_address mode is set to permanent on port 6:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config port_security ports 1:6 admin_state enable
max_learning_addr 10 lock_address_mode permanent
Command: config port_security ports 1:6 admin_state enable max_learning_addr 10
lock_address_mode permanent
Success.
75-3 config port_security vlan

Description
This command is used to set the maximum number of port security entries that can be learned on
a specific VLAN.
There are four levels that limit the number of learned entries; the entire system, a port, a VLAN,
and a specific VLAN on a port. If any limitation is exceeded, the new entry will be discarded.
Format
config port_security vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>] max_learning_addr
[<max_lock_no 0-3072> | no_limit]
Parameters
vlan - Specify the VLAN by name.
vlanid - Specify a list of VLANs by VLAN ID.
by this VLAN. If this parameter is set to 0, it means that no user can be authorized on this
VLAN. If the setting is lower than the number of current learned entries on the VLAN, the
command will be rejected. The default value is “no_limit”
<max_lock_no 0-3072> - Enter the maximum number of port security entries that can be
learned here. This value must be between 0 and 3072.
no_limit - No limitation on the number of port security entries that can be learned by a specific
VLAN.
730

®
Restrictions
Example
To configure the maximum number of VLAN-based port security entries on VLAN 1 to be 64:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config port_security vlan vlanid 1 max_learning_addr 64
Command: config port_security vlan vlanid 1 max_learning_addr 64
Success.
75-4 delete port_security_entry

Description
This command is used to delete a port security entry.
Format
delete port_security_entry [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>] mac_address
<macaddr>
Parameters
vlan - Specify the VLAN by VLAN name.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID list here. This value must be between 1 and 4094.
mac_address - Specify the MAC address of the entry.
Restrictions
Example
To delete the port security entry with a MAC address of 00-00-00-00-00-01 on VLAN 1:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete port_security_entry vlanid 1 mac_address 00-00-00-
00-00-01
Command: delete port_security_entry vlanid 1 mac_address 00-00-00-00-00-01
Success.
731

®
75-5 clear port_security_entry

Description
This command is used to clear the MAC entries learned by the port security function.
Format
clear port_security_entry {ports [<portlist> | all] {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>]}}
Parameters
ports - (Optional) Specify the range of ports to be configured.
<portlist> - The port security entries learned on the specified port will be cleared.
all - All the port security entries learned by the system will be cleared.
vlan - (Optional) The port security entries learned on the specified VLANs will be cleared.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify a list of VLANs by VLAN ID.
Restrictions
Example
To clear the port security entries on port 6:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# clear port_security_entry ports 6
Command: clear port_security_entry ports 6
Success.
75-6 show port_security_entry

Description
This command is used to display the port security entries.
If more than one parameter is selected, only the entries matching all the selected parameters will
be displayed.
If the user specifies ports and VLAN (either the VLAN name or VLAN ID list), only the entries
matching all the parameters will be displayed.
Format
show port_security_entry {ports {<portlist>} {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>]}}
Parameters
ports - (Optional) Specify the range of ports that will display the port security entries. While this
732

®
parameter is null, to show the entries on all of the ports.

vlan - (Optional) Specify the name of the VLAN that the port security settings will be displayed
for.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the ID of the VLAN that the port security entries will be displayed for.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show all the port security entries:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show port_security_entry
Command: show port_security_entry
MAC Address VID Port Lock Mode

----------------- ---- ----- ---------------
00-00-00-00-00-01 1 25 DeleteOnTimeout
Total Entries: 1
75-7 show port_security

Description
This command is used to display the port security related information, including state, maximum
learned addresses and lock address mode on a port and/or on a VLAN.
If both ports and vlanid (or vlan_name) are specified, configurations matching any of these
parameters will be displayed.
Format
show port_security {ports {<portlist>} {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vidlist>]}}
Parameters
ports - (Optional) Specify the range of ports that will show their configuration. While this
parameter is null, to show the entries on all of the ports.
vlan - (Optional) Specify the name of the VLAN that will show its configuration.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the ID of the VLAN that will show its configuration.
Restrictions
None.
733

®
Example
To display the global configuration of port security:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show port_security
Command: show port_security
Port Security Trap State : Disabled

Port Security Log State : Disabled
System Maximum Address : 256
VLAN Configuration (Only VLANs with limitation are displayed)

VID VLAN Name Max. Learning Addr.
---- -------------------------------- ------------------
1 default 64
75-8 config port_security trap state

Description
This command is used to enable or disable the sending of port security traps. When the port
security trap is enabled, if there is a new MAC that violates the pre-defined port security
configuration, a trap will be sent out with the information about the MAC address and port. If the
port security trap is disabled, no trap will be sent out for a MAC address violation.
Format
config port_security trap state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enable port security trap.
disable - Disable port security trap.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the sending of port security traps:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config port_security trap state enable
Command: config port_security trap state enable
Success.
734

®
75-9 config port_security log state

Description
This command is used to enable or disable the port security log. When the port security log is
enabled, if there is a new MAC that violates the pre-defined port security configuration, the MAC,
port and other relevant information will be logged, otherwise, no log will be generated.
Format
config port_security log state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enable port security log.
disable - Disable port security log.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the port security log:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config port_security log state enable
Command: config port_security log state enable
Success.
735

®
Chapter 76 Power over Ethernet (PoE)

Command List
config poe system {units [<unitlist> | all]} {power_limit <value 37-760>|
power_disconnect_method [deny_next_port | deny_low_priority_port] | legacy_pd [enable |
disable]}
config poe ports [all | <portlist>] { state [enable | disable]| [time_range <range_name 32> |
clear_time_range]| priority [critical | high | low] | power_limit [class_0 | class_1 | class_2 |
class_3 | user_define <value 1000-35000>]}
show poe system {units <unitlist>}
show poe ports {<portlist>}
76-1 config poe system

Description
This command is used to configure the parameters for the POE system-wise function.
Format
config poe system {units [<unitlist> | all]} {power_limit <value 37-760>|
power_disconnect_method [deny_next_port | deny_low_priority_port] | legacy_pd [enable |
disable]}
Parameters
units - (Optional) Specified the units that will be configured. If no specified units, all supported
PoE units in the system will be configured.
<unitlist> - Enter the list of units that will be configured here.
all - Specify that all the units will be configured.
power_limit - (Optional) Configure the power budget of PoE system. The range of value which
can be specified is determined by the system. Normally, the minimum setting is 37 W and the
maximum setting is 760 W. The actual range will depend on power supply capability.
<value 37-760> - Enter the power limit value here. This value must be between 37 and 760.
power_disconnect_method - (Optional) Configure the disconnection method that will be used
when the power budget is running out. When the system attempts to supply power to a new
port, if the power budget is insufficient to do this, PoE controller will initiate port disconnection
procedure to prevent overloading the power supply. The controller uses one of the following
two ways to perform the disconnection procedure.
deny_next_port - The port with max port number will be denied regardless of its priority. Note
that if the disconnect_method is set to deny_next_port, then the power provision will not
utilize the system’s maximum power. There is a 19W safe margin. That is, when the
system has only 19W remaining, this power cannot be utilized.
deny_low_priority_port - If there are ports that have been supplied power that have a priority
lower than the new port, the port with the lowest priority will be disconnected. This process
will stop until enough power is released for the new port. Note that if the
disconnect_method is set to deny_low_priority_port, then the power provision can utilize
the system’s maximum power.
legacy_pd - Configure legacy PDs detection status, enable for support, if set to disable, can’t
detect legacy PDs signal.
enable - Specify that the legacy PDs detection status will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the legacy PDs detection status will be disabled.
736

®
Restrictions
Example
To config PoE system-wise was setting:
DGS-3120-24PC:admin# config poe system power_limit 250 power_disconnect_method
deny_low_priority_port
Command: config poe system power_limit 250 power_disconnect_method
deny_low_priority_port
Success.
DGS-3120-24PC:admin#
76-2 config poe ports

Description
This command is used to configure the PoE port settings.
Based on 802.3af, there are 5 kinds of PD classes, class 0, class 1, class 2, and class 3. The
power consumption ranges for them are 0.44~12.95W, 0.44~3.84W, 3.84~6.49W, 6.49~12.95W,
and 12.95~ 29.5W, respectively.
The five pre-defined settings are for users’ convenience: The following is the power limit applied to
the port for these four classes. For each class, the power limit is a little more than the power
consumption range for the class. This takes the factor of the power loss on cable into account.
Thus, the following are the typical values defined by the chip vendor.
Class 0: 15400mW
Class 1: 4000mW
Class 2: 7000mW
Clase 3: 15400mW
Other than these four pre-defined settings, users can directly specify any value that the chip
supported, Normally, the minimum setting is 1000mW, and the maximum setting is 15400mW for
802.3af and >=35000mW for 802.3at.
Format
config poe ports [all | <portlist>] { state [enable | disable] | [time_range <range_name 32> |
clear_time_range] | priority [critical | high | low] | power_limit [class_0 | class_1 | class_2 |
class_3 | user_define <value 1000-35000>]}
Parameters
ports - Specified the list of ports whose setting is under configuration.
all - Specify that all the ports will be included in this configuration.
state - (Optional) When the state is set to disable, power will not be supplied to the powered
737

®
device connected to this port.

enable - Specify that state will be enabled.
disable - Specify that state will be disabled.
time_range - (Optional) Specify the time range that applies to the port of the POE. If time range
is configured, the power can only be supplied during the period specified by time range.
<range_name 32> - Enter the time range name here. This name can be up to 32 characters
long.
clear_time_range - (Optional) Remove the time range.
priority - (Optional) Port priority determines the priority the system attempts to supply the power
to port. There are three levels of priority that can be selected, critical, high, and low. When
multiple ports happen to have the same level of priority, the port ID will be used to determine
the priority. The lower port ID has higher priority. The setting of priority will affect the ordering
of supplying power. Whether the disconnect_method is set to deny_low_priority_port, priority
of port will be used by the system to manage to supply power to ports.
critical - Specify that the priority will be set to critical.
high - Specify that the priority will be set to high.
low - Specify that the priority will be set to low.
power_limit - (Optional) Configure the per-port power limit. If a port exceeds its power limit, it will
be shut down.
class_0 - Specify that the power limit will be set to class 0.
user_define - (Optional) Specify that a user defined per-port power limit will be used.
<value 1000-35000> - Enter the user defined per-port power limit here. This value must be
Restrictions
Example
To config PoE port:
DGS-3120-24PC:admin#config poe ports 1-4 state enable priority critical
power_limit class_1
Command: config poe ports 1:1-1:4 state enable priority critical power_limit
class_1
Success.
DGS-3120-24PC:admin# config poe ports 5 state enable priority critical

power_lim
it user_define 1000
Command: config poe ports 1:5 state enable priority critical power_limit
user_define 1000
Success.
76-3 show poe system

Description
This command is used to display the setting and actual values of the whole PoE system.
738

®
Format
show poe system {units <unitlist>}
Parameters
units - (Optional) Specified units that will be displayed.
<unitlist> - Enter the unit list that will be displayed here.
If no parameter specified, the system will display the status of all supported poe units in the
systems.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display PoE system:
DGS-3120-24PC:admin#show poe system units 1
Command: show poe system units 1
Unit: 1 PoE System Information

---------------------------------------------------
Power Limit : 760(Watts)
Power Consumption : 0(Watts)
Power Remained : 371(Watts)
Power Disconnection Method : Deny Next Port
Detection Legacy PD : Disabled
If Power Disconnection Method is set to deny next port, then the system can not
utilize out of its maximum power capacity. The maximum unused watt is 19W.
76-4 show poe ports

Description
This command is used to display the setting and actual values of PoE port.
Format
show poe ports {<portlist>}
739

®
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Specified a list of ports to be displayed.
If no parameter specified, the system will display the status for all ports.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display PoE port:
DGS-3120-24PC:admin#show poe ports 1:1-1:6
Command: show poe ports 1:1-1:6
Port State Priority Power Limit(mW) Time Range

Class Power(mW) Voltage(decivolt) Current(mA)
Status
===============================================================================
1:1 Enabled Low 15400(User-defined)
0 0 0 0
OFF : Interim state during line detection
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
740

®
Chapter 77 Power Saving Command

List
config power_saving mode {length_detection | link_detection|led |port |hibernation} [enable |
disable]
config power_saving hibernation [[add | delete] time_range <range_name 32> |
clear_time_range]
config power_saving led [[add | delete] time_range <range_name 32> | clear_time_range]
config power_saving port [<portlist> | all] [[add | delete] time_range <range_name 32> |
clear_time_range]
show power_saving {length_detection | link_detection | led | port | hibernation}
config led state [enable | disable]
show led
77-1 config power_saving mode

Description
This command is used to set the power saving state.
For link detection and length detection function, they apply to the ports with copper media. If the
power saving link detection state is enabled, the power is saved by following mechanisms:
• When no links are detected on the port, the port will automatically turn off and will only wake
up the second a single link pulse is sent. While the port is turned off, a simple energy-detect
circuit will continuously monitor energy on the cable. The moment energy is detected; the port
will turn on fully as to the IEEE specification’s requirements. The power saving function is
performed while no link is detected and it will not affect the port capabilities while the link is up.
• When a link is detected on the port, for a shorter cable, the power consumption will be
reduced by lowering the signal amplitude, since the signal attenuation is proportional to the
cable length. The port will adjust the power based on the cable length and still maintain error
free applications from both sides of the link. This mechanism is only available using the
hardware support cable diagnostics function.
If the power saving state of port is disabled, all power saving schedules of port will not take effect.
If the power saving state of port LED is disabled, all power saving schedules of port LED will not
take effect.
If the power saving state of system hibernation is disabled, all power saving schedules of system
hibernation will not take effect.
Format
config power_saving mode {length_detection | link_detection|led |port |hibernation} [enable
| disable]
Parameters
length_detection - (Optional) Specify the power saving link detection state.
link_detection - (Optional) Specify the length detection used.
741

®
Led - (Optional) Specify to configure the power saving state of port LED.
port - (Optional) Specify to configure the power saving state of port.
hibernation - (Optional) Specify to configure the power saving state of system hibernation.
enable - Specify to enable power saving state.
disable - Specify to disable power saving state.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the power saving state of port, hibernation:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config power_saving mode port hibernation enable
Command: config power_saving mode port hibernation enable
Success.
77-2 config power_saving hibernation

Description
This command is used to add or delete the power saving schedule on system hibernation. When
the system enters hibernation mode, the Switch changes to a low power state and is idle. It shuts
down all the ports, and all network function does not work. Only the console connection will work
via the RS232 port.
Format
config power_saving hibernation [[add | delete] time_range <range_name 32> |
clear_time_range]
Parameters
add - Specify to add a time range.
delete - Specify to delete a time range.
time_range - Specify the name of the time range.
<range_name32> - Enter a name for maximum 32 characters.
clear_time_range - Specify to clear all the time range of system hibernation.
Restrictions
Example
To add a time range named “range_1” on system hibernation:
742

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config power_saving hibernation add time_range range_1

Command: config power_saving hibernation add time_range range_1
Success.
77-3 config power_saving led

Description
This command is used to add or delete the power saving schedule on the LED of all ports. When
any schedule is up, all port’s LED will be turned off even device’s LED working on PoE mode.
Note: The port LED admin state (configured using the command ‘config led state’) gets high
priority. If the port LED admin state is disabled, all ports’ LED will always be turned off.
Currently only three time ranges are supported.
Format
config power_saving led [[add | delete] time_range <range_name 32> | clear_time_range]
Parameters
clear_time_range - Specify to clear all the time range of port LED.
Restrictions
Example
To add a time range named “range_1” on port LED:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config power_saving led add time_range range_1
Command: config power_saving led add time_range range_1
Success.
77-4 config power_saving port

Description
This command is used to add or delete the power saving schedule on the port. When any
schedule is up, the specific port will be shut down (disabled).
Note: The port’s admin state has high priority. If the port’s admin state is disabled, the specific
port will always be shut down (disabled). Currently only three time ranges are supported.
743

®
Format
config power_saving port [<portlist> | all] [[add | delete] time_range <range_name 32> |
clear_time_range]
Parameters
clear_time_range - Specify to clear all the time range of port.
Restrictions
Example
To add a time range named “range_1” on port 1:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config power_saving port 1:1 add time_range range_1
Command: config power_saving port 1:1 add time_range range_1
Success.
To delete a time range named “range_2” on port 1:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config power_saving port 1:1 delete time_range range_2
Command: config power_saving port 1:1 delete time_range range_2
Success.
77-5 show power_saving

Description
This command is used to display the current state of power saving.
Format
show power_saving {length_detection | link_detection | led | port | hibernation}
744

®
Parameters
length_detection - (Optional) Display the length detection configuration of power saving.
link_detection - (Optional) Display the link detection configuration of power saving.
led - (Optional) Display the port LED configuration of power saving.
port - (Optional) Display the port configuration of power saving.
hibernation - (Optional) Display the system hibernation configuration of power saving.
If no parameter is specified, all configurations of power saving will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the power saving function setting:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show power_saving
Command: show power_saving
Link Detection State: Enabled

Length Detection State: Disabled
Power Saving Configuration On System Hibernation

----------------------------------------------------
State: Disabled
Power Saving Configuration On Port LED

------------------------------------------
State: Disabled
Power Saving Configuration On Port

------------------------------------------
State: Disabled
77-6 config led state

Description
This command is used to configure the LED admin state of all ports. When the port LED admin
state is disabled, the LEDs of all ports are turned off. If the port LED admin state is enabled, the
port LEDs are controlled by the ports' link status.
Format
config led state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Specify to enable the LED admin state of all ports.
disable - Specify to disable the LED admin state of all ports.
745

®
Restrictions
Example
To disable the LED admin state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config led state disable
Command: config led state disable
Success.
77-7 show led

Description
This command is used to display the setting of all port’s LED admin state.
Format
show led
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the setting of all port’s LED admin state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show led
Command: show led
Port LED State: Enabled
746

®
Chapter 78 PPPoE Circuit ID Insertions

Mode Only)
config pppoe circuit_id_insertion state [enable | disable]
config pppoe circuit_id_insertion ports <portlist> {state [enable | disable] | circuit_id [mac | ip |
udf <string 32>]}(1)
show pppoe circuit_id_insertion
show pppoe circuit_id_insertion ports {<portlist>}
78-1 config pppoe circuit_id_insertion state

Description
This command is used to enable or disable PPPoE circuit ID insertion function. When the setting is
enabled, the system will insert the circuit ID tag to the received PPPoE discover and request
packet if the tag is absent, and remove the circuit ID tag from the received PPPoE offer and
session confirmation packet. The insert circuit ID contains the following information: Client MAC
address, Device ID and Port number. By default, Switch IP address is used as the device ID to
encode the circuit ID option.
Format
config pppoe circuit_id_insertion state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Specify to enable the PPPoE circuit ID insertion on the Switch.
disable - Specify to disable the PPPoE circuit ID insertion on the Switch.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the PPPoE circuit insertion state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config pppoe circuit_id_insertion state enable
Command: config pppoe circuit_id_insertion state enable
Success.
747

®
78-2 config pppoe circuit_id_insertion ports

Description
This command is used to configure port’s PPPoE Circuit ID insertion function. When the port’s
state and the global state are enabled, the system will insert the Circuit ID TAG to the received
PPPoE discovery initiation and request packet if the TAG is absent, and remove the Circuit ID
TAG from the received PPPoE offer and session confirmation packet.
Format
config pppoe circuit_id_insertion ports <portlist> {state [enable | disable] | circuit_id [mac |
ip | udf <string 32>]}(1)
Parameters
<portlist> - Specify a list of ports to be configured.
state - Specify to enable or disable port’s PPPoE circuit ID insertion function. The default setting
is enable.
enable - Enable port’s PPPoE circuit ID insertion function.
disable - Disable port’s PPPoE circuit ID insertion function.
circuit_id - Configure the device ID part for encoding of the circuit ID option.
mac - The MAC address of the Switch will be used to encode the circuit ID option.
ip - The Switch’s IP address will be used to encode the circuit ID option. This is the default.
udf - A user specified string to be used to encode the circuit ID option.
<string 32> - Enter a string with the maximum length of 32.
Restrictions
Example
To enable port 5 PPPoE circuit ID insertion function:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config pppoe circuit_id_insertion ports 5 state enable
Command: config pppoe circuit_id_insertion ports 1:5 state enable
Success.
78-3 show pppoe circuit_id_insertion

Description
This command is used to display PPPoE circuit ID insertion status.
Format
show pppoe circuit_id_insertion
748

®
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display PPPoE circuit ID insertion status:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show pppoe circuit_id_insertion
Command: show pppoe circuit_id_insertion
Global PPPoE State: Enabled
78-4 show pppoe circuit_id_insertion ports

Description
This command is used to display Switch’s port PPPoE Circuit ID insertion configuration.
Format
show pppoe circuit_id_insertion ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Specify a list of ports to be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display port 2-5 PPPoE circuit ID insertion configuration:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show pppoe circuit_id_insertion ports 1:2-1:5
Command: show pppoe circuit_id_insertion ports 1:2-1:5
Port State Circuit ID

---- -------- ---------------------------------------------
1:2 Enabled Switch IP
749

®
750

®
Chapter 79 Protocol Independent

Multicast (PIM) Command
List (RI Mode Only)
config pim [[ipif <ipif_name 12> | all] {hello <sec 1-18724> | jp_interval <sec 1-18724> | state
[enable | disable] | mode [dm | sm | sm-dm] | dr_priority <uint 0-4294967294>}(1) |
register_probe_time <value 1-127> | register_suppression_time <value 3-255>]
enable pim
disable pim
show pim neighbor {ipif <ipif_name 12> | ipaddress <network_address>}
show pim {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
config pim cbsr [ipif <ipif_name 12> {priority [-1 | <value 0-255>]} | hash_masklen <value 0-32> |
bootstrap_period <value 1-255>]
show pim cbsr {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
config pim crp {holdtime <value 0-255> | priority <value 0-255> | wildcard_prefix_cnt [0 | 1]}
create pim crp group <network_address> rp <ipif_name 12>
delete pim crp group <network_address>
show pim crp
config pim last_hop_spt_switchover [never | immediately]
show pim ipmroute
create pim static_rp group <network_address> rp <ipaddr>
delete pim static_rp group <network_address>
show pim static_rp
show pim rpset
create pim register_checksum_include_data rp_address <ipaddr>
delete pim register_checksum_include_data rp_address <ipaddr>
show pim register_checksum_include_data_rp_list
config pim-ssm {state [enable | disable] | group_range [default | <network_address>]}(1)
show pim-ssm
79-1 config pim

Description
This command is used to configure the PIM settings.
Format
config pim [[ipif <ipif_name 12> | all] {hello <sec 1-18724> | jp_interval <sec 1-18724> | state
[enable | disable] | mode [dm | sm | sm-dm] | dr_priority <uint 0-4294967294>}(1) |
register_probe_time <value 1-127> | register_suppression_time <value 3-255>]
Parameters
ipif - Specify the IP interface name.
characters long.
hello - Specify the time between issuing hello packets to find neighboring routers.
751

®
<sec 1-18724> - Enter the hello time value here. This value must be between 1 and 18724
seconds. The default value is 30 seconds.
jp_interval - Specify the interval between transmitting (flooding to all interfaces) multicast
messages to downstream routers, and automatically ‘pruning’ a branch from the multicast
delivery tree. This interval also determines the time interval the router uses to automatically
remove prune information from a branch of a multicast delivery tree and begin to flood
multicast messages to all branches of that delivery tree. These two actions are equivalent.
The default is 60 seconds.
<sec 1-18724> - Enter the join/prune interval value here. This value must be between 1 and
18724 seconds.
state - Specify to allow the PIM function to be disabled or enabled for the above IP interface.
The default is disabled.
enable - Specify that the PIM function will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the PIM function will be disabled.
mode - Specify the multicast protocol mode used. – dense mode or sparse mode, or sparse-
dense mode. The default value is dense mode.
dm - Specify that the multicast protocol mode will be set to dense mode.
sm - Specify that the multicast protocol mode will be set to sparse mode.
sm-dm - Specify that the multicast protocol mode will be set to sparse-dense mode.
dr_priority - Specify the priority for DR (Designated Router) election. The DR will forward
multicast traffic from a unicast source to the appropriate RP (Rendezvous Point). The router
with the highest priority value will be elected as the DR in the VLAN. When multiple routers
are configured with the same highest priority value, the router with the highest IP addres will
the elected as the DR.
<uint 0-4294967294> - Enter the DR priority value used here. This value must be between 0
and 4294967294.
register_probe_time - Specify the time before the Register-Stop Timer expires. This is used
when a DR may send a Null-Register to the RP to cause it to resend a Register-Stop
message. The default value is 5 sec.
<value 1-127> - Enter the register probe time value here. This value must be between 1 and
127.
register_suppression_time - Specify the period after which a PIM DR will stop sending register
encapsulated data to the RP after receiving a Register-Stop message. The default value is 60
sec.
<value 3-255> - Enter the register suppression time value here. This value must be between 3
and 255.
Restrictions
Example
To configure PIM configurations of IP interface System:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config pim ipif System hello 35 jp_interval 70 state enable
Command: config pim ipif System hello 35 jp_interval 70 state enable
Success.
79-2 enable pim

Description
This command is used to enable PIM on the switch.
752

®
Format
enable pim
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable PIM:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable pim
Command: enable pim
Success.
79-3 disable pim

Description
This command is used to disable PIM on the switch.
Format
disable pim
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable PIM:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable pim
Command: disable pim
Success.
753

®
79-4 show pim neighbor

Description
This command is used to display the current PIM neighbor router table.
Format
show pim neighbor {ipif <ipif_name 12> | ipaddress <network_address>}
Parameters
ipif - (Optional) Specify the name of the IP interface for which you want to display the current PIM
neighbor router table.
characters long.
ipaddress - (Optional) Specify the IP address and netmask of the destination.
<network_address> - Enter the destination IP address and netmask used here.
If no parameter is specified, the system will display all the PIM neighbor addresses in the table.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display PIM neighbor address table:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show pim neighbor
Command: show pim neighbor
PIM Neighbor Address Table
Interface Name Neighbor Address Expired Time

--------------- ---------------- ------------
System 10.48.74.122 5
Total Entries : 1
79-5 show pim

Description
This command is used to display the current PIM configuration.
Format
show pim {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
754

®
Parameters
ipif - (Optional) Specify the name of the IP interface used to display the PIM configuration.
characters long.
If no parameter is specified, the system will display all the PIM configurations of all IP interfaces.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display PIM configurations of IP interface System:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show pim
Command: show pim
PIM Global State : Disabled

Last Hop SPT Switchover : Never
Register Probe Time : 5
Register Suppression Time : 60
PIM Interface Table

Designated Hello J/P
Interface IP Address Router Interval Interval Mode State
------------ ------------------ --------------- -------- -------- ----- --------
System 10.90.90.90/8 10.90.90.90 30 60 DM Disabled
Total Entries: 1
79-6 config pim cbsr

Description
This command is used to configure the BSR (Bootstrap Router) candidate feature and parameters
used by this Switch. The BSR elected, will keep all the routers in the PIM-SM domain informed of
the currently assigned RP for each multicast group. As a rule, there should be multiple BSR
candidates configured in a PIM-SM domain. The reason for this is when the elected BSR becomes
unavailable, another candidate can simply take its place. In the BSR election process the BSR
candidate with the highest priority value will be determained as the elected BSR. When the highest
priority value on multiple BSR candidates are the same, the highest IP address will be selected.
Format
config pim cbsr [ipif <ipif_name 12> {priority [-1 | <value 0-255>]} | hash_masklen <value 0-
32> | bootstrap_period <value 1-255>]
755

®
Parameters
ipif - Specify the IP interface used for this configuration.
characters long.
priority - (Optional) Specify to set the C-BSR priority. The lower value indicates lower priority.
The default value is -1. Note that only one interface can be the C-BSR in one device.
-1 - Specify that the interface will be disable to be the BSR.
<value 0-255> - Enter the C-BSR priority value used here. This value must be between 0 and
255.
hash_masklen - Enter a hash mask length, which will be used with the IP address of the
candidate RP and the multicast group address, to calculate the hash algorithm used by the
router to determine which CRP on the PIM-SM enabled network will be the RP.
<value 0-32> - Enter the hash mask lenght value here. This value must be between 0 and 32.
The default value is 30 seconds.
bootstrap_period - Specify the interval between originating Bootstrap message.
<value 1-255> - Enter the bootstrap period value used here. This value must be between 1
and 255. The default value is 60 seconds.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the C-BSR for the System interface :
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config pim cbsr ipif System priority 255
Command: config pim cbsr ipif System priority 255
Success.
79-7 show pim cbsr

Description
This command is used to list the candidate bootstrap router related information.
Format
show pim cbsr {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
Parameters
ipif – (Optional) Specify the IP interface to be displayed.
characters long.
If no parameter is specified, the system will display all C-BSR configurations.
Restrictions
None.
756

®
Example
To display the C-BSR settings:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show pim cbsr
Command: show pim cbsr
PIM Candidate-BSR Table
C-BSR Hash Mask Len : 30

C-BSR Bootstrap Period : 60
Interface IP Address Priority

------------ ------------------ -------------
System 10.90.90.90/8 255
Total Entries: 1
79-8 config pim crp

Description
This command is used to configure the RP (Rendezvous Point) candidate feature and parameters
used by this Switch. The elected RP, for a specific multicast group, will receive requested multicast
traffic from the DR (Designated Router) and will forward this to the multicast receiver(s) requesting
the traffic. In a multicast group only one active RP can exist. All other RPs will be configured as
candidate RPs.
Format
config pim crp {holdtime <value 0-255> | priority <value 0-255> | wildcard_prefix_cnt [0 | 1]}
Parameters
holdtime - (Optional) This field is used to set the time Candidate RP (CRP) advertisements are
valid on the PIM-SM enabled network. If CRP advertisements are not received by the BSR
within this time frame, the CRP is removed from the list of candidates. An entry of 0 will send
out one advertisement that states to the BSR that it should be immediately removed from CRP
status on the PIM-SM network.
<value 0-255> - Enter the hold time for the RP here. This value must be between 0 and 255.
The default value is 150 seconds.
priority - (Optional) Specify the priority used for RP election. This priority value will be included in
the router’s CRP advertisements. A lower value means a higher priority, yet, if there is a tie for
the highest priority, the router having the higher IP address will become the RP.
<value 0-255> - Enter the priority value used here. This value must be between 0 and 255.
wildcard_prefix_cnt - (Optional) Specify the Prefix Count value of the wildcard address
(224.0.0.0/24) to be choosed. The default vaule is 0.
0 - Specify that the wildcard prefix count value will be set to 0.
1 - Specify that the wildcard prefix count value will be set to 1.
757

®
Restrictions
Example
To configure the candidate rendezvous point (RP) holdtime, priority and wildcard prefix count:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config pim crp holdtime 150 priority 192
wildcard_prefix_cnt 0
Command: config pim crp holdtime 150 priority 192 wildcard_prefix_cnt 0
Success.
79-9 create pim crp group

Description
This command is used to add a multicast group range into a C-RP serve list for PIM-SM.
Format
create pim crp group <network_address> rp <ipif_name 12>
Parameters
group - Specify the multicast group address for this Switch to become a Candidate RP. This
address must be a class D address.
<network_address> - Enter the group network address used here.
rp - Specify that the interface will act as C-RP for the group.
characters long.
Restrictions
Example
To add a multicast group range into a C-RP server list:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create pim crp group 224.1.2.3/32 rp System
Command: create pim crp group 224.1.2.3/32 rp System
Success.
758

®
79-10 delete pim crp group

Description
This command is used to delete a multicast group range from the C-RP server list.
Format
delete pim crp group <network_address>
Parameters
<network_address> - Enter the multicast group address for this switch to be removed from
being a Candidate RP. This address must be a class ID address.
Restrictions
Example
To delete a multicast group range from the C-RP server list:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete pim crp group 224.1.2.3/32
Command: delete pim crp group 224.1.2.3/32
Success.
79-11 show pim crp

Description
This command is used to list all the candidate rendezvous point (C-RP) related information.
Format
show pim crp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To list all the candidate rendezvous point (C-RP) related information:
759

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show pim crp

Command: show pim crp
PIM Candidate-RP Table
C-RP Holdtime : 150

C-RP Priority : 192
C-RP Wildcard Prefix Count : 0
Group Interface
------------------ ------------------
224.1.2.3/32 System
Total Entries: 1
79-12 config pim last_hop_spt_switchover

Description
This command is used by the last hop router to decide whether to receive the multicast data from
the shared tree or switch over to the shortest path tree. When the switchover mode is set to be
never, the last hop router will always receive the multicast data from the shared tree. When the
mode is set to immediately, the last hop router will always receive the multicast data from the
shortest path tree.
Format
config pim last_hop_spt_switchover [never | immediately]
Parameters
never - Specify that the router will always receive multicast data from the shared tree.
immediately - Specify that the router will always receive multicast data from shortest path tree.
Restrictions
Example
Set the SPT-switchover mode to never:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config pim last_hop_spt_switchover never
Command: config pim last_hop_spt_switchover never
Success.
760

®
79-13 show pim ipmroute

Description
This command is used to list all the entries of multicast routing, includes (*,G), (S,G) and (S,G,rpt).
Format
show pim ipmroute
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To list all the entries of multicast routing:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show pim ipmroute
Command: show pim ipmroute
PIM IP Multicast Route Table
UA = Upstream AssertTimer
AM = Assert Metric
AMPref = Assert MetricPref
ARB = Assert RPTBit
Group Address Source Address UA AM AMPref ARB Flag Type Mode

------------------ ------------------ ---- ---- ------ ---- ---- ------- ----
225.0.0.0 12.90.90.90/32 0 0 0 0 RPT (*.G) ASM
225.0.0.1 12.90.90.90/32 0 0 0 0 RPT (*.G) ASM
225.0.0.5 12.90.90.90/32 0 0 0 0 RPT (*.G) ASM
225.7.7.5 12.90.90.90/32 0 0 0 0 RPT (*.G) ASM
226.0.0.0 12.90.90.90/32 0 0 0 0 RPT (*.G) ASM
227.0.0.3 12.90.90.90/32 0 0 0 0 RPT (*.G) ASM
232.0.0.0 12.90.90.114/32 0 0 0 0 SPT (S.G) SSM
239.255.255.250 12.90.90.90/32 0 0 0 0 RPT (*.G) ASM
Total Entries: 8
761

®
79-14 create pim static_rp group

Description
This command is used to create a static RP.
Format
create pim static_rp group <network_address> rp <ipaddr>
Parameters
group - Specify to assign the multicast group address for this static RP.
<network_address> - Enter the multicast group address used here.
rp - Specify the IP address used by this static RP.
Restrictions
Example
To create a static RP:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create pim static_rp group 239.1.1.0/24 rp 10.52.33.18
Command: create pim static_rp group 239.1.1.0/24 rp 10.52.33.18
Success.
79-15 delete pim static_rp group

Description
This command is used to delete a static RP.
Format
delete pim static_rp group <network_address>
Parameters
<network_address> - Enter Specify the multicast group address that will removed from the static
RP.
Restrictions
762

®
Example
To delete a static RP:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete pim static_rp group 239.1.1.0/24
Command: delete pim static_rp group 239.1.1.0/24
Success.
79-16 show pim static_rp

Description
This command is used to list all the static RP settings.
Format
show pim static_rp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To list all the static RP settings:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show pim static_rp
Command: show pim static_rp
PIM Static RP Table
Group RP Address
------------------ ------------------
224.1.2.0/24 10.52.33.4
239.1.1.0/24 10.52.33.18
Total Entries: 2
763

®
79-17 show pim rpset

Description
This command is used to list all the RPset information.
Format
show pim rpset
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To list all the RPset information:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show pim rpset
Command: show pim rpset
PIM RP-Set Table
Bootstrap Router: 10.54.71.9
Group Address RP Address Holdtime Expired Time Type

------------------ ------------------ --------- ------------ ------
224.0.0.0/4 10.20.6.36 210 196 Dynamic
224.0.0.0/4 10.54.71.9 0 0 Static
Total Entries: 2
79-18 create pim register_checksum_include_data rp_address

Description
This command is used to decide the checksum in register packet will include the data portion or
not. As defined in RFC 4601, the checksum for Registers is done only on the first 8 bytes of the
packet, including the PIM header and the next 4 bytes, excluding the data packet portion. Some
earlier PIM-SM routers will calculate checksum for register packet including data portion. This
configuration makes our routers communicate with those earlier routers smoothly. The default set
is not including data portion.
764

®
Format
create pim register_checksum_include_data rp_address <ipaddr>
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Specify that the RP will expect to receive a register packet in which the checksum will
be included in the data portion.
Restrictions
Example
To create an entry for a specific RP in which the checksum in the registered packet will include the
data portion:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create pim register_checksum_include_data rp_address
24.1.2.3
Command: create pim register_checksum_include_data rp_address 24.1.2.3
Success.
79-19 delete pim register_checksum_include_data rp_address

Description
This command is used to delete the register checksum including the data for the specific RP
address.
Format
delete pim register_checksum_include_data rp_address <ipaddr>
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Specify the RP address that will be removed from the checksum, including the data
portion list.
Restrictions
Example
To delete the register checksum including the data for the specific RP address:
765

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete pim register_checksum_include_data rp_address

24.1.2.3
Command: delete pim register_checksum_include_data rp_address 24.1.2.3
Success.
79-20 show pim register_checksum_include_data_rp_list

Description
This command is used to list all the RPs of the registered checksum, including the data.
Format
show pim register_checksum_include_data_rp_list
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To list all the RPs of the registered checksum, including the data:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show pim register_checksum_include_data_rp_list
Command: show pim register_checksum_include_data_rp_list
PIM Register Checksum Include Data
RP Address
-----------------------------------
24.0.0.0
24.1.2.3
Total Entries: 2
766

®
79-21 config pim-ssm

Description
This command is used to enable the SSM (Source-Specific Multicast) service model in PIM-SM on
the switch. The PIM-SSM function will take active only when SSM service model and PIM-SM
state both enabled.
Format
config pim-ssm {state [enable | disable] | group_range [default | <network_address>]}(1)
Parameters
state - Specify to enable or disable the SSM service model on the Switch.
enable - Specify that the SSM service model will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the SSM service model will be disabled.
group_range - Specify the group address range for the SSM service in IPv4.
default - The default indicates that the group address range is 232.0.0.0/8.
<network_address> - Enter the group address range for the SSM service here.
Restrictions
Example
To configure PIM-SSM state and group range:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config pim-ssm state enable group_range default
Command: config pim-ssm state enable group_range default
Success.
79-22 show pim-ssm

Description
This command is used to list all PIM-SSM protocol related information.
Format
show pim-ssm
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
767

®
Example
To display PIM-SSM state and group range:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show pim-ssm
Command: show pim-ssm
SSM Service Model State : Enabled

SSM Group : 232.0.0.0/8
768

®
Chapter 80 PIM for IPv6 Command List

(RI Mode Only)
config pim6 [ipif <ipif_name 12> | all] {hello_interval <sec 0-18000> | triggered_hello_delay <sec
0-60> | propagation_delay <sec 0-32> | override_interval <sec 0-65> | jp_interval <sec 0-
18000> | dr_priority <uint 0-4294967294> | bsr_border [disable | enable] | stub_interface
[disable | enable] | state [enable | disable]}(1)
show pim6 {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
config pim6 cbsr {ipif <ipif_name 12> state [enable | disable] | priority <value 0-255> |
hash_masklen <value 0-128>}(1)
show pim6 cbsr
config pim6 crp [rp <ipif_name 12> | all] {priority <value 0-255> | interval <sec 1-16383>}(1)
create pim6 crp group <ipv6networkaddr> rp <ipif_name 12>
delete pim6 crp group <ipv6networkaddr>
enable pim6
disable pim6
config pim6 last_hop_spt_switchover [never | immediately]
show pim6 neighbor {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
show pim6 mroute {group <ipv6addr> {source <ipv6addr>}}
show pim6 mroute star_g {group <ipv6addr> {ipif <ipif_name 12>}}
show pim6 mroute s_g {rpt} {group <ipv6addr> source <ipv6addr> {ipif <ipif_name 12>}}
create pim6 static_rp group <ipv6networkaddr> rp <ipv6addr> {override_dynamic}
delete pim6 static_rp group <ipv6networkaddr>
config pim6 embedded_rp state [enable | disable]
show pim6 crp
show pim6 static_rp
show pim6 rpset
config pim6 register_checksum_calculate [include_data | not_include_data]
config pim6 register_probe_time <sec 1-127>
config pim6 register_suppression_time <sec 3-65535>
config pim6 keepalive_period <sec 120-65535>
80-1 config pim6

Description
This command is used to set the PIM6 multicast protocol state and some related parameters in the
protocol on some interfaces.
Format
config pim6 [ipif <ipif_name 12> | all] {hello_interval <sec 0-18000> | triggered_hello_delay
<sec 0-60> | propagation_delay <sec 0-32> | override_interval <sec 0-65> | jp_interval <sec
0-18000> | dr_priority <uint 0-4294967294> | bsr_border [disable | enable] | stub_interface
[disable | enable] | state [enable | disable]}(1)
Parameters
ipif - Specify to apply the configurations to this specific IP interface.
all - Specify to apply the configurations to all IP interfaces.
769

®
hello_interval – Specify the interval of issuing hello packets fo find neighboring routers.
<sec 0-18000> - Enter the time between 0 and 18000 seconds. The default value is 30.
triggered_hello_delay - Specify the maximum time, in seconds, before the router sends a
triggered PIM Hello message on the specified interface. A value of zero indicates that
triggered PIM6 Hello message should always be sent immediately.
propagation_delay - Specify the expected propagation delay between the PIM6 routers on this
network or link, in seconds.
override_interval - Specify the value for the router to insert into the Override_Interval field of the
LAN Prune Delay option in the PIM6 Hello messages it sends on this interface. When
overriding a prune, PIM6 routers pick random time duration up to the value of this object. The
more PIM6 routers that are active on a network, the more likely it is that the prune will be
overridden after a small proportion of this time has elapsed. The more PIM6 routers are active
on this network, the larger this object should be to obtain an optimal spread of prune override
latencies.
jp_interval - Specify the frequency at which this router sends PIM6 Join/Prune messages on this
PIM6 interface. A value of zero represents not to send PIM Join/Prune message on this
interface.
dr_priority - Specify the Designated Router Priority value inserted into the DR Priority option in
PIM6 Hello message transmitted on this interface. Numerically higher values for this
parameter indicate higher priorities.
<uint 0-4294967294> - Enter the value between 0 and 4294967294. The default value is 1.
bsr_border - Specify to determine whether this interface is a PIM6 domain border. If this
interface is a domain border, it prevents bootstrap router (BSR) messages from being sent or
received through it.
disable - Specify that the interface is not a PIM6 domain border. This is the default.
enable - Specify that the interface is a PIM6 domain border.
stub_interface - Specify whether this interface is a stub interface. If this interface is a stub
interface, no PIM6 packets are sent out to this interface, and any received PIM6 packets are
ignored.
disable - Specify that the interface is not a stub interface. This is the default.
enable - Specify that the interface is a stub interface.
state - Specify to allow the PIM6 to be disabled or enabled for the IPv6 interface.
enable - Enable PIM6 for the IPv6 interface.
disable - Disable PIM6 for the IPv6 interface.
Restrictions
Example
To set the jp_interval to 60 seconds, the hello_interval to 60 seconds, and enable the PIM6 state
for interface “System”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config pim6 ipif System jp_interval 60 hello_interval 60
state enable
Command: config pim6 ipif System jp_interval 60 hello_interval 60 state enable
Success.
770

®
80-2 show pim6

Description
This command is used to display the PIM6 configurations.
Format
show pim6 {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
Parameters
ipif - (Optional) Specify to the IP interface name to be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show brief information for the PIM6 protocol related parameters on all interfaces:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show pim6
Command: show pim6
PIM6 Global State : Disabled

Last Hop SPT Switchover : Never
Register Probe Interval : 5 sec
Register Suppression Timeout : 60 sec
Keepalive Period : 210 sec
Register Checksum Calculate : Not Include Data
Embedded RP State : Disabled
PIM6-SM Interface Table
DR Hello J/P BSR

Interface Priority Interval Interval State Border
------------ ---------- -------- -------- -------- --------
System 1 60 60 Enabled Disabled
Total Entries : 1
To show detailed information for PIM6 protocol related parameters on the interface “System”:
771

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show pim6 ipif System

Command: show pim6 ipif System
Interface name : System

Interface Link-Local Address : -
Interface Global Address : -
PIM6 Mode : SM
State : Enabled
Designated Router : -
Designated Router Priority : 1
Designated Router Priority Enabled : True
Hello Interval : 60 sec
Triggered Hello Interval : 5 sec
Hello Holdtime : 210 sec
Join Prune Interval : 60 sec
Join Prune Holdtime : 210 sec
LAN Delay Enabled : True
Propagation Delay : 1 sec
Override Interval : 3 sec
Effective Propagation Delay : 1 sec
Effective Override Interval : 3 sec
Join Suppression Enabled : False
Bidirectional Capable : False
BSR Domain Border : Disabled
Stub interface : Disabled
80-3 config pim6 cbsr

Description
This command is used to set the C-BSR state, the priority and the hash mask length of the
candidate bootstrap router on an interface.
Format
config pim6 cbsr {ipif <ipif_name 12> state [enable | disable] | priority <value 0-255> |
hash_masklen <value 0-128>}(1)
Parameters
ipif - Specify the IP interface.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name. This name can be up to 12 characters long.
state - Specify to determine whether the input interface can be a C-BSR.
enable - Specify that the interface is a C-BSR.
disable - Specify that the interface is not a C-BSR. This is the default.
priority - (Optional) Specify to set the C-BSR priority.
hash_masklen - Specify the length in bits of the mask. This makes use of a hash function for the
case where a group range has multiple RPs with the same priority.
<value 0-128> - Enter the value must be between 0 and 128. The default value is 126
772

®
seconds.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the C-BSR on the interface “System”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config pim6 cbsr ipif System state enable priority 64
hash_masklen 126
Command: config pim6 cbsr ipif System state enable priority 64 hash_masklen 126
Success.
80-4 show pim6 cbsr

Description
This command is used to display the candidate bootstrap router related information.
Format
show pim6 cbsr
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show C-BSR settings on the Switch:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show pim6 cbsr
Command: show pim6 cbsr
PIM6 Candidate-BSR Information

--------------------------------------
C-BSR Interface Name : System
C-BSR Priority : 64
C-BSR Hash Mask Len : 126
773

®
80-5 config pim6 crp

Description
This command is used to configure the PIM6 C-RP related parameters.
Format
config pim6 crp [rp <ipif_name 12> | all] {priority <value 0-255> | interval <sec 1-16383>}(1)
Parameters
ipif - Specify to apply the configurations to this specific IP interface.
all - Specify to apply the configurations to all IP interfaces.
priority - Specify for RP election.
<value 0-255> - Enter the value between 0 and 255. The lower the value is, the higher the
priority is. The default value is 192.
interval - Specify the C-RP advertisement interval in seconds.
Restrictions
Example
To set the C-RP priority and the interval on the interface “System”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config pim6 crp rp System priority 60 interval 60
Command: config pim6 crp rp System priority 60 interval 60
Success.
80-6 create pim6 crp group

Description
This command is used to add a multicast group range into a C-RP serve list.
Format
create pim6 crp group <ipv6networkaddr> rp <ipif_name 12>
Parameters
<ipv6networkaddr> - Specify the IPv6 group address range served by the RP.
rp - Specify the interface act as a C-RP.
774

®
Restrictions
Example
To add a multicast group range “FF1E::12EF:1023/64” into the serve list of the C-RP “System”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create pim6 crp group FF1E::12EF:1023/64 rp System
Command: create pim6 crp group FF1E::12EF:1023/64 rp System
Success.
80-7 delete pim6 crp group

Description
This command is used to delete a multicast group range from the C-RP serve list.
Format
delete pim6 crp group <ipv6networkaddr>
Parameters
<ipv6networkaddr> - Specify the multicast group address range of the C-RP entry to be
removed from C-RP serve list.
Restrictions
Example
To delete a multicast group range “FF1E::12EF:1023/64” from the C-RP serve list:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete pim6 crp group FF1E::12EF:1023/64
Command: delete pim6 crp group FF1E::12EF:1023/64
Success.
80-8 enable pim6

Description
This command is used to enable the PIM global state for an IPv6 network.
775

®
Format
enable pim6
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the PIM global state for an IPv6 network:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable pim6
Command: enable pim6
Success.
80-9 disable pim6

Description
This command is used to disable the PIM global state for an IPv6 network.
Format
disable pim6
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable PIM-SM for an IPv6 network:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable pim6
Command: disable pim6
Success.
776

®
80-10 config pim6 last_hop_spt_switchover

Description
This command is used to make the last hop router to decide whether to receive the multicast data
from the shared tree or switch over to the shortest path tree (SPT).
Format
config pim6 last_hop_spt_switchover [never | immediately]
Parameters
never - Specify to never switch to SPT. The last hop router always receives the multicast data
from the shared tree. This is the default.
immediately - Specify to immediately switch to SPT. The last hop router switches from shared
tree to shortest path tree on the first multicast data arrived.
Restrictions
Example
To set the SPT-switchover mode to never:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config pim6 last_hop_spt_switchover never
Command: config pim6 last_hop_spt_switchover never
Success.
80-11 show pim6 neighbor

Description
This command is used to display all neighbors learned by PIM6 on the switch.
Format
show pim6 neighbor {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
Parameters
ipif - (Optional) Specify to the IPv6 interface name to be displayed.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IPv6 interface name.
Restrictions
None.
777

®
Example
To show the PIM6 neighbors:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show pim6 neighbor
Command: show pim6 neighbor
PIM6 Neighbor Address Table
Interface Neighbor Address

-------------- ----------------
System FE80::200:FF:FE26:66D0
n1 FE80::200:FF:FE26:66D1
Total Entries : 2
To show the PIM6 neighbors of interface “n20”:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show pim6 neighbor ipif n20
Command: show pim6 neighbor ipif n20
Neighbor Info on Interface n20

----------------------------------------------------
Neighbor Address : FE80::11FF:4CD8
Neighbor Up Time : 00:00:50
Neighbor Expiry Time : 00:01:50
Neighbor DR Priority Present : True
Neighbor DR Priority : 1
Total Entries : 1
80-12 show pim6 mroute

Description
This command is used to display the multicast routing information generated by PIM6.
Format
show pim6 mroute {group <ipv6addr> {source <ipv6addr>}}
Parameters
group - (Optional) Specify the IPv6 multicast group address to be displayed.
source - (Optional) Specify the IPv6 source address to be displayed.
778

®
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the whole IPv6 multicast routing table generated on the Switch:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show pim6 mroute
Command: show pim6 mroute
Total (*,*,RP) Entries : 0

Total (*,G) Entries : 1
Total (S,G) Entries : 2
Total (S,G,rpt) Entries : 1
Group : FF13::100
Source : * Upstream: n1
Outgoing : n10 n30
Group : FF13::100
Source : 2001::1111 Upstream: n2
Outgoing: n10
Group : FF13::102
Source : 2001::3F6D Upstream: n2
Outgoing: n20
Group : FF13::100
Source : 2001::1111 rpt, Upstream: n1
RP Address: 3FFE:10:10::153
Outgoing : -
Total Entries: 4
80-13 show pim6 mroute star_g

Description
This command is used to display the multicast routing information for (*, G) entries generated by
PIM6.
Format
show pim6 mroute star_g {group <ipv6addr> {ipif <ipif_name 12>}}
Parameters
ipif - (Optional) Specify the IPv6 interface to be displayed.
779

®
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the whole IPv6 multicast routing table of (*, G) generated on the switch:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show pim6 mroute star_g
Command: show pim6 mroute star_g
(*, G) Entry Table

-------------------------
Group : FF13::100
Upstream : n2
RP Address : 3FFE:10:10::153
Group : FF13::101
Upstream : n2
Group : FF13::102
Upstream : n2
Total Entries: 3
80-14 show pim6 mroute s_g

Description
This command is used to display the multicast routing information for (S, G) or (S, G, rpt) entries
generated by PIM6.
Format
show pim6 mroute s_g {rpt} {group <ipv6addr> source <ipv6addr> {ipif <ipif_name 12>}}
Parameters
rpt - (Optional) Specify the (S, G, rpt) entry.
source - (Optional) Specify the IPv6 source address to be displayed.
ipif - (Optional) Specify to the IPv6 interface name to be displayed.
780

®
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show all (S, G) route entries generated on the Switch:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show pim6 mroute s_g
Command: show pim6 mroute s_g
(S, G) Entry Table

------------------------
Group : FF13::100
Source : 2001::1111
Group : FF13::100
Source : 2001::2222
Group : FF13::200
Source : 2001::1111
Group : FF13::300
Source : 2001::1111
Total Entries: 4
80-15 create pim6 static_rp group

Description
This command is used to create a static RP. In general, a static RP cannot override a dynamic RP.
If override_dynamic is configured, the static RP will override any dynamically learned RP.
Format
create pim6 static_rp group <ipv6networkaddr> rp <ipv6addr> {override_dynamic}
Parameters
<ipv6networkaddr> - Specify the multicast group network address for this static RP.
rp - Specify the IPv6 address to this static RP.
override_dynamic - (Optional) Specify to enable static RP to override dynamically learned RP.
Restrictions
781

®
Example
To create a static RP:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create pim6 static_rp group FF02::11/64 rp 3000::12
Command: create pim6 static_rp group FF02::11/64 rp 3000::12
Success.
80-16 delete pim6 static_rp group

Description
This command is used to delete a static RP.
Format
delete pim6 static_rp group <ipv6networkaddr>
Parameters
<ipv6networkaddr> - Specify the multicast group network address for this static RP.
Restrictions
Example
To delete a static RP:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete pim6 static_rp group FF02::11/64
Command: delete pim6 static_rp group FF02::11/64
Success.
80-17 config pim6 embedded_rp state

Description
This command is used to configure the state of the embedded RP.
Format
config pim6 embedded_rp state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Specify to enable embedded RP support in PIM6.
782

®
disable - Specify to disable embedded RP support in PIM6.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the embedded RP state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config pim6 embedded_rp state enable
Command: config pim6 embedded_rp state enable
Success.
80-18 show pim6 crp

Description
This command is used to display all candidate rendezvous point (C-RP) related information.
Format
show pim6 crp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show C-RP information:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show pim6 crp
Command: show pim6 crp
PIM6 Candidate-RP Table
Group Interface Priority Interval

------------------------------------------- ------------ -------- --------
ff1e::/64 System 192 60
Total Entries : 1
783

®
80-19 show pim6 static_rp

Description
This command is used to display all static RP settings.
Format
show pim6 static_rp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the static RP:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show pim6 static_rp
Command: show pim6 static_rp
PIM6 Static RP Table

-----------------------------------
Group : FF02::/64
RP Address : 3000::12
Override Dynamic : False
Total Entries: 1
80-20 show pim6 rpset

Description
This command is used to display all the active RP information.
Format
show pim6 rpset
Parameters
None.
784

®
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show all the active RP information:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show pim6 rpset
Command: show pim6 rpset
Bootstrap Router: 3120::110
PIM6 RP-Set Table

---------------------------------------------
Group : FF3D::/64
Hold Time : 210 sec
Expired Time : 196 sec
Type : Dynamic
Group : FF3E::/64
Override Dynamic : False
Type : Static
Total Entries: 2
80-21 config pim6 register_checksum_calculate

Description
This command is used to decide whether the checksum in register packet will include the data
portion.
Format
config pim6 register_checksum_calculate [include_data | not_include_data]
Parameters
include_data - When specified to calculate the checksum in IPv6 PIM register packets, the data
portion is included.
not_include_data - When specified to calculate the checksum in IPv6 PIM register packets, the
data portion is excluded.
Restrictions
785

®
Example
To specify the switch calculates the register packet checksum including the data portion:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config pim6 register_checksum_calculate include_data
Command: config pim6 register_checksum_calculate include_data
Success.
80-22 config pim6 register_probe_time

Description
This command is used to configure the PIM6-SM register probe time.
Format
config pim6 register_probe_time <sec 1-127>
Parameters
<sec 1-127> - Enter the time before the Register-Stop Timer (RST) expires when a DR may send
a Null-Register to the RP to cause it to resend a Register-Stop message. The default value is
5.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the register probe time to be 20 seconds:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config pim6 register_probe_time 20
Command: config pim6 register_probe_time 20
Success.
80-23 config pim6 register_suppression_time

Description
This command is used to configure the PIM6-SM register suppression time.
Format
config pim6 register_suppression_time <sec 3-65535>
786

®
Parameters
<sec 3-655535> - Enter the period during which a PIM DR stops sending Register-encapsulated
data to the RP after receiving a Register-Stop message. The default value is 60.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the PIM6-SM register suppression time to be 120 seconds:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config pim6 register_suppression_time 120
Command: config pim6 register_suppression_time 120
Success.
80-24 config pim6 keepalive_period

Description
This command is used to configure the PIM6-SM multicast routing entry Keepalive Timer.
Format
config pim6 keepalive_period <sec 120-65535>
Parameters
<sec 120-655535> - Enter the period during which the PIM router will maintain the (S, G) state in
the absence of explicit (S, G) local membership or (S, G) join messages received to maintain
it. The default value is 210.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the multicast routing keepalive period to be 220 seconds:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config pim6 keepalive_period 220
Command: config pim6 keepalive_period 220
Success.
787

®
Chapter 81 Protocol VLAN Command

List
create dot1v_protocol_group group_id <int 1-16> {group_name <name 32>}
config dot1v_protocol_group [group_id <int 1-16> | group_name <name 32>] [add protocol
[ethernet_2 | ieee802.3_snap | ieee802.3_llc] <protocol_value> | delete protocol [ethernet_2 |
ieee802.3_snap | ieee802.3_llc] <protocol_value>]
delete dot1v_protocol_group [group_id <int 1-16> | group_name <name 32> | all]
show dot1v_protocol_group {[group_id <int 1-16> | group_name <name 32>]}
config port dot1v ports [<portlist> | all] [add protocol_group [group_id <int 1-16> | group_name
<name 32>] [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <id>] {priority <value 0-7>} | delete protocol_group
[group_id <int 1-16> | all]]
show port dot1v {ports <portlist>}
81-1 create dot1v_protocol_group

Description
This command is used to create a protocol group for protocol VLAN function.
Format
create dot1v_protocol_group group_id <int 1-16> {group_name <name 32>}
Parameters
group_id - The ID of protocol group which is used to identify a set of protocols
<int 1-16> - Enter the group ID used here.
group_name - (Optional) The name of the protocol group. The maximum length is 32 chars.
<name 32> - Enter the group name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
Restrictions
Example
To create a protocol group:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create dot1v_protocol_group group_id 10 group_name
General_Group
Command: create dot1v_protocol_group group_id 10 group_name General_Group
Success.
788

®
81-2 config dot1v_protocol_group add protocol

Description
This command is used to add a protocol to a protocol group. The selection of a protocol can be a
pre-defined protocol type or a user defined protocol.
Format
config dot1v_protocol_group [group_id <int 1-16> | group_name <name 32>] [add protocol
[ethernet_2 | ieee802.3_snap | ieee802.3_llc] <protocol_value> | delete protocol [ethernet_2 |
ieee802.3_snap | ieee802.3_llc] <protocol_value>]
Parameters
group_id - The ID of the protocol group which is used to identify a set of protocols.
<int 1-16> - Enter the group ID.
group_name - The name of the protocol group.
add - Specify that the protocol will be added to the specified group.
delete - Specify that the protocol will be removed from the specified group.
protocol - The protocol value is used to identify a protocol of the frame type specified.
ethernet_2 - Specify that the Ethernet 2 protocol will be used.
ieee802.3_snap - Specify that the IEEE 802.3 Snap protocol will be used.
ieee802.3_llc - Specify that the IEEE 802.3 LLC protocol will be used.
<protocol_value> - Enter the protocol value here.
Restrictions
Example
To add a protocol ipv6 to protocol group 10:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config dot1v_protocol_group group_id 10 add protocol
Ethernet_2 86dd
Command: config dot1v_protocol_group group_id 10 add protocol Ethernet_2 86dd
Success.
81-3 delete dot1v_protocol_group

Description
This command is used to delete a protocol group
Format
delete dot1v_protocol_group [group_id <int 1-16> | group_name <name 32> | all]
789

®
Parameters
group_id - Specify the group ID to be deleted.
group_name - Specify the name of the group to be deleted.
all - Specify that all the protocol group will be deleted.
Restrictions
Example
To delete protocol group 100:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete dot1v_protocol_group group_id 100
Command: delete dot1v_protocol_group group_id 100
Success.
81-4 show dot1v_protocol_group

Description
This command is used to display the protocols defined in a protocol group.
Format
show dot1v_protocol_group {[group_id <int 1-16> | group_name <name 32>]}
Parameters
group_id - (Optional) Specify the ID of the group to be displayed.
group_name - (Optional) Specify the name of the protocol group to be displayed.
If no group ID is not specified, all the configured protocol groups will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the protocol group ID 10:
790

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show dot1v_protocol_group group_id 10

Command: show dot1v_protocol_group group_id 10
Protocol Protocol Frame Type Protocol

Group ID Group Name Value
--------- --------------- ------------ ------------
100 General Group EthernetII 86dd
Success.
81-5 config port dot1v ports

Description
This command is used to assign the VLAN for untagged packets ingress from the port list based
on the protocol group configured. This assignment can be removed by using the delete
protocol_group option.
When priority is not specified in the command, the port default prority will be the priority for those
untagged packets classified by the protocol vlan.
Format
config port dot1v ports [<portlist> | all] [add protocol_group [group_id <int 1-16> |
group_name <name 32>] [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <id>] {priority <value 0-7>} | delete
protocol_group [group_id <int 1-16> | all]]
Parameters
add - Specify that the group specified will be added.
protocol_group - Specify that parameters for the group will follow.
group_id - Specify the group ID of the protocol group.
group_name - Specify the name of the protocol group.
<name 32> - Enter the name of the group used here. This name can be up to 32 characters
long.
vlan - The VLAN that is to be associated with this protocol group on this port.
long.
<id> - Enter the VLAN ID used here.
priority - (Optional) Specify the priority to be associated with the packet which has been
classified to the specified VLAN by the protocol.
<value 0-7> - Enter the priority value here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
delete - Specify that the group specified will be deleted.
protocol_group - Specify that parameters for the group will follow.
group_id - Specify the group ID of the protocol group.
all - Specify that all the groups will be deleted.
791

®
Restrictions
Example
The example is to assign VLAN marketing-1 for untaged ipv6 packet ingress from port 3.
To configure the group ID 10 on port 3 to be associated with VLAN marketing-1:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config port dot1v ports 1:3 add protocol_group group_id 10
vlan marketing-1
Command: config port dot1v ports 1:3 add protocol_group group_id 10 vlan
marketing-1
Success.
81-6 show port dot1v

Description
This command is used to display the VLAN to be associated with untagged packet ingressed from
a port based on the protocol group.
Format
show port dot1v {ports <portlist>}
Parameters
If not port is specified, information for all ports will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
The example display the protocol VLAN information for ports 1:
792

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show port dot1v ports 1:1

Command: show port dot1v ports 1:1
Port: 1:1
Protocol Group ID VLAN Name Protocol Priority
------------------- --------------------------------- -----------------
1 default -
2 VLAN2 -
3 VLAN3 -
4 VLAN4 -
Success.
793

®
Chapter 82 QinQ Command List (RI and

EI Mode Only)
enable qinq
disable qinq
config qinq inner_tpid <hex 0x1-0xffff>
config qinq ports [<portlist> | all] {role [uni | nni] | missdrop [enable | disable] | outer_tpid <hex
0x1 - 0xffff> | use_inner_priority [enable | disable] | add_inner_tag [<hex 0x1 - 0xffff> |
disable]}
show qinq
show qinq inner_tpid
show qinq ports {<portlist>}
create vlan_translation ports [<portlist> | all] [add cvid <vidlist> | replace cvid <vlanid 1-4094>]
svid <vlanid 1-4094> {priority <priority 0-7>}
delete vlan_translation ports [<portlist> | all] {cvid <vidlist>}
show vlan_translation {[ports <portlist> | cvid <vidlist>]}
82-1 enable qinq

Description
This command is used to enable QinQ. When QinQ is enabled, all network port roles will be NNI
ports; all existing static VLANs will run as S-VLAN; all dynamic learned L2 address will be cleared;
all dynamic registered VLAN entries will be cleared; and GVRP will be disabled.
To run GVRP on the Switch, the administrator should enable GVRP manually. In QinQ mode,
GVRP protocol will employ reserve address 01-80-C2-00-00-0D.
Format
enable qinq
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable QinQ:
794

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable qinq

Command: enable qinq
Success.
82-2 disable qinq

Description
This command is used to disable the QinQ. When QinQ is disabled, all dynamic learned L2
addresses will be cleared, all dynamic registered VLAN entries will be cleared, and GVRP will be
disabled.
To run GVRP on the Switch, the administrator should enable GVRP manually.
Format
disable qinq
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable QinQ:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable qinq
Command: disable qinq
Success.
82-3 config qinq inner_tpid

Description
The command is used to configure the inner TPID of the system. The inner TPID is used to decide
if the ingress packet is c-tagged. Inner tag TPID is per system configurable.
Format
config qinq inner_tpid <hex 0x1-0xffff>
795

®
Parameters
inner_tpid - Specify the inner-TPID of the system.
<hex 0x1-0xffff> - Enter the inner-TPID of the system here.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the inner TPID in the system to 0x9100:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config qinq inner_tpid 0x9100
Command: config qinq inner_tpid 0x9100
Success.
82-4 config qinq ports

Description
This command is used to configure the QinQ port's parameters.
Format
config qinq ports [<portlist> | all] {role [uni | nni] | missdrop [enable | disable] | outer_tpid
<hex 0x1 - 0xffff> | use_inner_priority [enable | disable] | add_inner_tag [<hex 0x1 - 0xffff> |
disable]}
Parameters
ports - Specify a range of ports to configure.
role - (Optional) Specify the port role in QinQ mode.
uni - Specify that the port is connecting to the customer network.
nni - Specify that the port is connecting to the service provider network.
missdrop - (Optional) Specify the state of the miss drop of ports option.
enable - Specify that the miss drop of ports option will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the miss drop of ports option will be disabled.
outer_tpid - (Optional) Specify the outer-TPID of a port.
<hex 0x1-0xffff> - Enter the outer-TPID value used here.
use_inner_priority – Specify whether to use the priority in the C-VLAN tag as the priority in the
S-VLAN tag.
enable -.Specify to use the priority in the C-VLAN tag as the priority in the S-VLAN tag.
disable -.Specify for not using the priority in the C-VLAN tag.
add_inner_tag - (Optional) Specify to add an inner tag for ingress untagged packets. If set, the
inner tag will be added for the ingress untagged packets and therefore the packets that egress
to the NNI port will be double tagged. If disable, only the s-tag will be added for ingress
untagged packets.
<hex 0x1-0xffff> - Enter the inner tag value used here.
disable - Specify that the add inner tag option will be disabled.
796

®
Restrictions
Example
To configure port list 1-4 as NNI port and set the TPID to 0x88A8:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config qinq ports 1:1-1:4 role nni outer_tpid 0x88A8
Command: config qinq ports 1:1-1:4 role nni outer_tpid 0x88A8
Success.
82-5 show qinq

Description
This command is used to display the global QinQ status.
Format
show qinq
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the global QinQ status:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show qinq
Command: show qinq
QinQ Status : Enabled
82-6 show qinq inner_tpid

Description
This command is used to display the inner-TPID of a system.
797

®
Format
show qinq inner_tpid
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the inner-TPID of a system:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show qinq inner_tpid
Command: show qinq inner_tpid
Inner TPID: 0x9100
82-7 show qinq ports

Description
This command is used to display the QinQ configuration of the ports.
Format
show qinq ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter the list of ports to be displayed here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the QinQ mode for ports 1-2 of unit 1:
798

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show qinq ports 1:1-1:2

Command: show qinq ports 1:1-1:2
Port ID: 1:1

---------------------------------------------------------
Role: NNI
Miss Drop: Disabled
Outer Tpid: 0x88a8
Add Inner Tag: Disabled
Port ID: 1:2

---------------------------------------------------------
Role: NNI
Miss Drop: Disabled
Outer Tpid: 0x88a8
Add Inner Tag: Disabled
82-8 create vlan_translation ports

Description
This command is used to create a VLAN translation rule. This setting will not be effective when the
QinQ mode is disabled.
This configuration is only effective for a UNI port. At UNI port, the ingress C-VLAN tagged packets
will be translated to S-VLAN tagged packets by adding or replacing according the configured rule.
The S-VLAN Tag of egress packets at this port will be recovered to C-VLAN Tag or stripped.
Format
create vlan_translation ports [<portlist> | all] [add cvid <vidlist> | replace cvid <vlanid 1-
4094>] svid <vlanid 1-4094> {priority <priority 0-7>}
Parameters
ports - Specify a list of ports to be configured.
add - Specify to add an S-Tag to the packet.
cvid - Specify the customer VLAN ID used.
<vidlist> - Enter the customer VLAN ID used here.
replace - Specify to replace the C-Tag with the S-Tag.
cvid - Specify the customer VLAN ID used.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the customer VLAN ID used here.
svid - Specify the service provider VLAN ID used.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the service provider VLAN ID used here.
priority - (Optional) Specify to assign an 802.1p priority to the S-Tag. If the priority is not
specified, a 802.1p priority of the S-Tag will be assigned by default.
<priority 0-7> - Enter the 802.1p S-Tag priority value here. This value must be between 0 and
7.
799

®
Restrictions
Example
To replace the C-Tag in which the CVID is 20, with the S-Tag and the S-VID is 200 at UNI Port 1:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create vlan_translation ports 1:1 replace cvid 20 svid 200
Command: create vlan_translation ports 1:1 replace cvid 20 svid 200
Success.
To add S-Tag, when the S-VID is 300, to a packet in which the CVID is 30 at UNI Port 1:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create vlan_translation ports 1:1 add cvid 30 svid 300
Command: create vlan_translation ports 1:1 add cvid 30 svid 300
Success.
82-9 delete vlan_translation ports

Description
This command is used to delete translation relationships between the C-VLAN and the S-VLAN.
Format
delete vlan_translation ports [<portlist> | all] {cvid <vidlist>}
Parameters
ports - Specify a list of ports to be configured.
cvid - (Optional) Specify the rules for the specified CVIDs. If the CVID is not specified, all rules
configured for the port will be deleted.
<vidlist> - Enter the CVID value here.
Restrictions
Example
To delete a VLAN translation rule on ports 1-4:
800

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete vlan_translation ports 1:1-1:4

Command: delete vlan_translation ports 1:1-1:4
Success.
82-10 show vlan_translation

Description
This command is used to display the existing C-VLAN-based VLAN translation rules.
Format
show vlan_translation {[ports <portlist> | cvid <vidlist>]}
Parameters
ports – (Optional) Specify a list of ports to be displayed.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports to be displayed here.
cvid - (Optional) Specify the rules for the specified CVIDs.
<vidlist> - Enter the CVID value used here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show C-VLANs based on VLAN translation rules in the system:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show vlan_translation
Command: show vlan_translation
Port CVID SPVID Action Priority

----- -------- -------- ------- ---------
1:1 20 200 Replace -
1:1 30 300 Add -
Total Entries: 2
801

®
Chapter 83 Quality of Service (QoS)

Command List
config bandwidth_control [<portlist> | all] {rx_rate [no_limit | <value 8-10240000>] | tx_rate
[no_limit | <value 8-10240000>]}
show bandwidth_control {<portlist>}
config per_queue bandwidth_control {ports [<portlist> | all]} <cos_id_list 0-7> {{min_rate
[no_limit | <value 8-10240000>]} max_rate [no_limit | <value 8-10240000>]}
show per_queue bandwidth_control {<portlist>}
config scheduling {ports [<portlist> | all]} <class_id 0-7> [strict | weight <value 1-127>]
config scheduling_mechanism {ports [<portlist> | all]} [strict | wrr]
show scheduling {<portlist>}
show scheduling_mechanism {<portlist>}
config 802.1p user_priority <priority 0-7> <class_id 0-7>
show 802.1p user_priority
config 802.1p default_priority [<portlist> | all] <priority 0-7>
show 802.1p default_priority {<portlist>}
enable hol_prevention
disable hol_prevention
show hol_prevention
config dscp trust [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
show dscp trust {<portlist>}
config dscp map {[<portlist> | all]} [dscp_priority <dscp_list> to <priority 0-7> | dscp_dscp
<dscp_list> to <dscp 0-63>]
show dscp map {<portlist>} [dscp_priority | dscp_dscp] {dscp <dscp_list>}
83-1 config bandwidth_control

Description
This command is used to configure the port bandwidth limit control.
Format
config bandwidth_control [<portlist> | all] {rx_rate [no_limit | <value 8-10240000>] | tx_rate
[no_limit | <value 8-10240000>]}
Parameters
all – Specify that all the ports will be used for this configuration.
rx_rate - (Optional) Specify the limitation applied to receive data rate.
no_limit - Indicates there is no limit on receiving bandwidth of the configured ports. An integer
value from m to n sets a maximum limit in Kbits/sec. The actual bandwidth will be an
adjusted value based on the user specified bandwidth. The actual limit may be equal to the
user specified limit, but will not exceed it. The actual limit recognized by the device, will be
displayed when the command is executed.
<value 8-10240000> - Enter the receiving data rate here. This value must be between 8 and
10240000.
tx_rate - (Optional) Specify the limitation applied to transmit data rate.
no_limit - Indicates there is no limit on port tx bandwidth. An integer value from m to n sets a
802

®
maximum limit in Kbits/sec. The actual bandwidth will be an adjusted value based on the
user specified bandwidth. The actual limit may be equal to the user specified limit, but will
not exceed it.. The actual limit recognized by the device, will be displayed when the
command is executed.
<value 8-10240000> - Enter the transmitting data rate here. This value must be between 8
and 10240000.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the port bandwidth:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config bandwidth_control 1:1-1:10 tx_rate 100
Command: config bandwidth_control 1:1-1:10 tx_rate 100
Granularity: RX: 8, TX: 8. Actual Rate: TX: 96.
Success.
83-2 show bandwidth_control

Description
This command is used to display the port bandwidth configurations.
The bandwidth can also be assigned by the RADIUS server through the authentication process. If
RADIUS server has assigned the bandwidth, then the RADIUS-assigned bandwidth will be the
effective bandwidth. The authentication with the RADIUS sever can be per port or per user. For
per-user authentication, there may be multiple bandwidth control values assigned when there are
multiple users attached to this specific port. In this case, the largest assigned bandwidth value will
be applied to the effective bandwidth for this specific port. Note that only devices that support
MAC-based VLAN can provide per user authentication.
Format
show bandwidth_control {<portlist>}
Parameters
If no parameter specified, system will display all ports bandwidth configurations.
Restrictions
None.
803

®
Example
To display port bandwidth control table:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show bandwidth_control 1:1-1:10
Command: show bandwidth_control 1:1-1:10
Bandwidth Control Table
Port RX Rate TX Rate Effective RX Effective TX

(Kbit/sec) (Kbit/sec) (Kbit/sec) (Kbit/sec)
----- ---------- ---------- ---------------- ----------------
1:1 No Limit No Limit - -
83-3 config per_queue bandwidth_control

Description
This command is used to configure per port CoS bandwidth control.
Format
config per_queue bandwidth_control {ports [<portlist> | all]} <cos_id_list 0-7> {{min_rate
[no_limit | <value 8-10240000>]} max_rate [no_limit | <value 8-10240000>]}
Parameters
ports - (Optional) Specify a range of ports to be configured.
all - For set all ports in the system, you may use “all” parameter. If no parameter is specified,
system will set all ports.
<cos_id_list 0-7> - Specify a list of priority queues. The priority queue number is ranged from 0
to 7.
min_rate - (Optional) Specify that one of the parameters below (no_limit or <value m-n) will be
applied to the mini-rate at which the above specified class will be allowed to receive packets.
no_limit - Specify that there will be no limit on the rate of packets received by the above
specified class.
<value 8-10240000> - Specify the packet limit, in Kbps, that the above ports will be allowed to
receive. If the specified rate is not multiple of minimum granularity, the rate will be
adjusted.
max_rate - (Optional) Specify that one of the parameters below (no_limit or <value m-n >) will be
applied to the maximum rate at which the above specified class will be allowed to transmit
packets.
804

®
no_limit - Specify that there will be no limit on the rate of packets received by the above
specified class.
<value 8-10240000> - Specify the packet limit, in Kbps, that the above ports will be allowed to
receive. If the specified rate is not multiple of minimum granularity, the rate will be
adjusted.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the ports 1:1-1:10 CoS bandwidth queue 1 min rate to 130 and max rate to 100000:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config per_queue bandwidth_control ports 1:1-1:10 1
min_rate 130 max_rate 1000
Command: config per_queue bandwidth_control ports 1:1-1:10 1 min_rate 130
max_rate 1000
Granularity: TX: 8. Actual Rate: MIN: 128, MAX: 1000.
Success.
83-4 show per_queue bandwidth_control

Description
This command is used to display per port CoS bandwidth control settings.
Format
show per_queue bandwidth_control {<portlist>}
Parameters
If no parameter is specified, system will display all ports CoS bandwidth configurations.
Restrictions
None.
Example
Display per port CoS bandwidth control table:
805

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show per_queue bandwidth_control 1:10

Command: show per_queue bandwidth_control 1:10
Queue Bandwidth Control Table On Port: 1:10
Queue Min Rate(Kbit/sec) Max Rate(Kbit/sec)

0 640 No Limit
1 640 No Limit
2 640 No Limit
3 640 No Limit
4 No Limit No Limit
5 No Limit No Limit
6 No Limit No Limit
7 No Limit No Limit
83-5 config scheduling

Description
This command is used to configure the traffic scheduling mechanism for each CoS queue.
Format
config scheduling {ports [<portlist> | all]} <class_id 0-7> [strict | weight <value 1-127>]
Parameters
<class_id 0-7> - This specifies the 8 hardware priority queues which the config scheduling
command will apply to. The four hardware priority queues are identified by number from 0 to 7
with the 0 queue being the lowest priority.
strict - The queue will operate in strict mode.
weight - Specify the weights for weighted round robin. A value between 0 and n can be specified.
<value 1-127> - Enter the weights for weighted round robin value here. This value must be
between 1 and 127.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the traffic scheduling CoS queue 1 to weight 25 on port 1:10:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config scheduling ports 1:10 1 weight 25
Command: config scheduling ports 1:10 1 weight 25
Success.
806

®
83-6 config scheduling_mechanism

Description
This command is used to configure the traffic scheduling mechanism for each CoS queue.
Format
config scheduling_mechanism {ports [<portlist> | all]} [strict | wrr]
Parameters
ports - (Optional) Specify a range of ports to be configured.
all - For set all ports in the system, you may use “all” parameter. If no parameter is specified,
system will set all ports.
strict - All queues operate in strict mode.
wrr - Each queue operates based on its setting.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the traffic scheduling mechanism for each CoS queue:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config scheduling_mechanism strict
Command: config scheduling_mechanism strict
Success.
To configure the traffic scheduling mechanism for CoS queue on port 1:1:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config scheduling_mechanism ports 1:1 strict
Command: config scheduling_mechanism ports 1:1 strict
Success.
83-7 show scheduling

Description
This command is used to display the current traffic scheduling parameters.
Format
show scheduling {<portlist>}
807

®
Parameters
If no parameter specified, system will display all ports scheduling configurations.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the traffic scheduling parameters for each CoS queue on port 1:1(take eight hardware
priority queues for example):
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show scheduling 1:1
Command: show scheduling 1:1
QOS Output Scheduling On Port: 1:1

Class ID Weight
-------- ------
Class-0 1
Class-1 2
Class-2 3
Class-3 4
Class-4 5
Class-5 6
Class-6 7
Class-7 8
83-8 show scheduling_mechanism

Description
This command is used to show the traffic scheduling mechanism.
Format
show scheduling_mechanism {<portlist>}
Parameters
If no parameter specified, system will display all ports scheduling mechanism configurations.
Restrictions
None.
808

®
Example
To show scheduling mechanism:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show scheduling_mechanism
Command: show scheduling_mechanism
Port Mode
----- ------
1:1 Strict
1:2 Strict
1:3 Strict
1:4 Strict
1:5 Strict
1:6 Strict
1:7 Strict
1:8 Strict
1:9 Strict
1:10 Strict
1:11 Strict
1:12 Strict
1:13 Strict
1:14 Strict
1:15 Strict
1:16 Strict
1:17 Strict
1:18 Strict
1:19 Strict
1:20 Strict
1:21 Strict
1:22 Strict
1:23 Strict
1:24 Strict
83-9 config 802.1p user_priority

Description
This command is used to map the 802.1p user priority of an incoming packet to one of the eight
hardware queues available on the Switch.
Format
config 802.1p user_priority <priority 0-7> <class_id 0-7>
Parameters
<priority 0-7> - The 802.1p user priority you want to associate with the <class_id> (the number
of the hardware queue) with.
<class_id 0-7> - The number of the Switch’s hardware priority queue. The switch has 8 hardware
809

®
priority queues available. They are numbered between 0 (the lowest priority) and 7 (the
highest priority).
Restrictions
Example
To configure the 802.1p user priority:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config 802.1p user_priority 1 3
Command: config 802.1p user_priority 1 3
Success.
83-10 show 802.1p user_priority

Description
This command is used to display 802.1p user priority for ports.
Format
show 802.1p user_priority
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the 802.1p user priority:
810

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show 802.1p user_priority

Command: show 802.1p user_priority
QOS Class of Traffic:

Priority-0 -> <Class-2>
83-11 config 802.1p default_priority

Description
This command is used to configure the 802.1p default priority settings on the Switch. If an
untagged packet is received by the Switch, the priority configured with this command will be written
to the packet’s priority field.
Format
config 802.1p default_priority [<portlist> | all] <priority 0-7>
Parameters
<portlist> - This specifies a range of ports for which the default priority is to be configured. That
is, a range of ports for which all untagged packets received will be assigned the priority
specified below. The port list is specified by listing the lowest switch number and the beginning
port number on that switch, separated by a colon. Then highest switch number, and the
highest port number of the range (also separated by a colon) are specified. The beginning and
end of the port list range are separated by a dash.
For example, 1:3 would specify switch number 1, port 3. 2:4 specifies switch number 2, port 4.
1:3-2:4 specifies all of the ports between switch 1, port 3 and switch 2, port 4 − in numerical
order.
all - Specify that the command apply to all ports on the Switch.
<priority 0-7> - The priority value (0 to 7) assigned to untagged packets received by the Switch
or a range of ports on the Switch.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the 802.1p default priority settings on the Switch:
811

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config 802.1p default_priority all 5

Command: config 802.1p default_priority all 5
Success.
83-12 show 802.1p default_priority

Description
This command is used to display the current configured default priority settings on the Switch.
The default priority can also be assigned by the RADIUS server through the authentication process.
The authentication with the RADIUS sever can be per port or port user. For per port authentication,
the priority assigned by RADIUS server will be the effective port default priority. For per user
authentication, the priority assigned by RADIUS will not be the effective port default priority
whereas it will become the priority associated with MAC address. Note that only devices
supporting MAC-based VLAN can provide per user authentication.
Format
show 802.1p default_priority {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Specified a range of ports to be displayed.
If no parameter is specified, all ports for 802.1p default priority will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display 802.1p default priority:
812

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show 802.1p default_priority 1:1-1:10

Command: show 802.1p default_priority 1:1-1:10
Port Priority Effective Priority

---- ----------- ------------------
1:1 5 5
1:2 5 5
1:3 5 5
1:4 5 5
1:5 5 5
1:6 5 5
1:7 5 5
1:8 5 5
1:9 5 5
1:10 5 5
83-13 enable hol_prevention

Description
This command is used to enable head of line prevention on the Switch.
Format
enable hol_prevention
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable HOL prevention on the Switch:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable hol_prevention
Command: enable hol_prevention
Success.
83-14 disable hol_prevention

Description
This command is used to disable head of line prevention on the Switch.
813

®
Format
disable hol_prevention
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable HOL prevention on the Switch:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable hol_prevention
Command: disable hol_prevention
Success.
83-15 show hol_prevention

Description
This command is used to display head of line prevention state on the Switch.
Format
show hol_prevention
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display HOL prevention state on the Switch.
814

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show hol_prevention

Command: show hol_prevention
Device HOL Prevention State: Enabled
83-16 config dscp trust

Description
This command is used to configure the state of DSCP trust per port. When DSCP is not trusted,
802.1p is trusted.
Format
config dscp trust [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
all - Specify that the command apply to all ports on the Switch.
state - Enable or disable to trust DSCP. By default, DSCP trust is disabled.
enable - Specify that the DSCP trust state will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the DSCP trust state will be disabled.
Restrictions
Example
Enable DSCP trust on ports 1:1-1:8.
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config dscp trust 1:1-1:8 state enable
Command: config dscp trust 1:1-1:8 state enable
Success.
83-17 show dscp trust

Description
This command is used to display DSCP trust state for the specified ports on the Switch.
Format
show dscp trust {<portlist>}
815

®
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) A range of ports to display.
If not specify the port, all ports for DSCP trust status on the Switch will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
Display DSCP trust status on ports 1:1-1:8.
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show dscp trust 1:1-1:8
Command: show dscp trust 1:1-1:8
Port DSCP-Trust
---- ----------
1:1 Enabled
1:2 Enabled
1:3 Enabled
1:4 Enabled
1:5 Enabled
1:6 Enabled
1:7 Enabled
1:8 Enabled
83-18 config dscp map

Description
This command is used to configure DHCP mapping. The mapping of DSCP to priority will be used
to determine the priority of the packet (which will be then used to determine the scheduling queue)
when the port is in DSCP trust state.
The mapping of DSCP to color will be used to determine the initial color of the packet when the
policing function of the packet is color aware and the packet is DSCP-trusted.
The DSCP-to-DSCP mapping is used in the swap of DSCP of the packet when the packet is
ingresses to the port. The remaining processing of the packet will base on the new DSCP. By
default, the DSCP is mapped to the same DSCP.
These DSCP mapping will take effect at the same time when IP packet ingress from a DSCP-
trusted port.
Format
config dscp map {[<portlist> | all]} [dscp_priority <dscp_list> to <priority 0-7> | dscp_dscp
<dscp_list> to <dscp 0-63>]
816

®
Parameters
all - Specify that all the ports will be included in this configuration.
dscp_priority - Specify a list of DSCP value to be mapped to a specific priority.
<dscp_list> - Enter the DSCP priority list here.
to - Specify that the above or following parameter will be mapped to the previously mentioned
parameter.
<priority 0-7> - Specify the result priority of mapping.
dscp_dscp - Specify a list of DSCP value to be mapped to a specific DSCP.
<dscp_list> - Enter the DSCP to DSCP list here.
to - Specify that the above or following parameter will be mapped to the previously mentioned
parameter.
<dscp 0-63> - Specify the result DSCP of mapping.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the mapping of the DSCP priority to priority 1:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config dscp map 1:1-1:8 dscp_priority 1 to 1
Command: config dscp map 1:1-1:8 dscp_priority 1 to 1
Success.
To configure the global mapping of the DSCP priority to priority 1:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config dscp map dscp_priority 1 to 1
Command: config dscp map dscp_priority 1 to 1
Success.
83-19 show dscp map

Description
This command is used to show DSCP trusted port list and mapped color, priority and DSCP.
Format
show dscp map {<portlist>} [dscp_priority | dscp_dscp] {dscp <dscp_list>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) A range of ports to show. If no parameter is specified, all ports’ dscp
mapping will be displayed.
dscp_priotity - Specify a list of DSCP value to be mapped to a specific priority.
817

®
dscp_dscp - Specify a list of DSCP value to be mapped to a specific DSCP.

dscp - (Optional) This specifies DSCP value that will be mapped.
<dscp_list> - Enter the DSCP list here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
In case of project support per port configure, show DSCP map configuration on port 1:1.
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show dscp map 1:1 dscp_dscp
Command: show dscp map 1:1 dscp_dscp
DSCP to DSCP Mapping:

--------------------------------------------------------------
Port 1:1 | 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
-----------+--------------------------------------------------
0 | 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 | 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
2 | 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
3 | 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
4 | 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
5 | 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
6 | 60 61 62 63
--------------------------------------------------------------
818

®
Chapter 84 Remote Switched Port

ANalyzer (RSPAN)
Command List
enable rspan
disable rspan
create rspan vlan [vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>]
delete rspan vlan [vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>]
config rspan vlan [vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] [redirect [add | delete]
ports <portlist> | source {[mirror_group_id <value 1-4> | [add | delete] ports <portlist> [rx | tx |
both]]}]
show rspan {[vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>]}
84-1 enable rspan

Description
This command is used to enable the RSPAN function. The purpose of the RSPAN function is to
mirror packets to a remote switch.
A packet travels from the Switch where the monitored packet is received, passing through the
intermediate switch, and then to the Switch where the sniffer is attached. The first switch is also
named the source switch.
To make the RSPAN function work, the RSPAN VLAN source setting must be configured on the
source switch. For the intermediate and the last switch, the RSPAN VLAN redirect setting must be
configured.
Note: RSPAN VLAN mirroring will only work when RSPAN is enabled (when one RSPAN VLAN
has been configured with a source port).
The RSPAN redirect function will work when RSPAN is enabled and at least one RSPAN VLAN
has been configured with redirect ports.
Format
enable rspan
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
Configure RSPAN state to enable:
819

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable rspan

Command: enable rspan
Success.
84-2 disable rspan

Description
This command is used to disable the RSPAN function.
Format
disable rspan
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
Configure RSPAN state to disabled:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable rspan
Command: disable rspan
Success.
84-3 create rspan vlan

Description
This command is used to create the RSPAN VLAN. Up to 16 RSPAN VLANs can be created.
Format
create rspan vlan [vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>]
Parameters
vlan_name - Create the RSPAN VLAN by VLAN name.
vlan_id - Create the RSPAN VLAN by VLAN ID.
820

®
Restrictions
Example
To create an RSPAN VLAN entry by VLAN name “v2”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create rspan vlan vlan_name v2
Command: create rspan vlan vlan_name v2
Success.
To create an RSPAN VLAN entry by VLAN ID “3”:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create rspan vlan vlan_id 3
Command: create rspan vlan vlan_id 3
Success.
84-4 delete rspan vlan

Description
This command is used to delete RSPAN VLANs.
Format
delete rspan vlan [vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>]
Parameters
vlan_name - Delete RSPAN VLAN by VLAN name.
vlan_id - Delete RSPAN VLAN by VLAN ID.
Restrictions
Example
To delete an RSPAN VLAN entry by VLAN name “v2”:
821

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete rspan vlan vlan_name v2

Command: delete rspan vlan vlan_name v2
Success.
To delete an RSPAN VLAN entry by VLAN ID “3”:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete rspan vlan vlan_id 3
Command: delete rspan vlan vlan_id 3
Success.
84-5 config rspan vlan

Description
This command is used to configure the source setting for the RSPAN VLAN on the source switch
or configures the redirect port on the intermediate switch and destination switch.
Format
config rspan vlan [vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>] [redirect [add | delete]
ports <portlist> | source {[mirror_group_id <value 1-4> | [add | delete] ports <portlist> [rx |
tx | both]]}]
Parameters
vlan - Specify the RSPAN VLAN used for this configuration.
vlan_name - Specify the RSPAN VLAN by VLAN name.
vlan_id - Specify the RSPAN VLAN by VLAN ID.
<value 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID here. This value must be between 1 and 4094.
redirect - Specify output portlist for the RSPAN VLAN packets. If the redirect port is a Link
Aggregation port, there will perform the Link Aggregation behavior for RSPAN packets.
add - Specify to add output ports for the RSPAN VLAN packets.
delete - Specify to delete output ports for the RSPAN VLAN packets.
ports - Specify the output ports for the RSPAN VLAN packets.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports that will be used for this configuration here.
source - If the ports are not specified by this command, the source of RSPAN will come from the
source specified by the mirror command or the flow-based source specified by an ACL.
mirror_group_id – Specify the mirror session used for RSPAN source function.
add - (Optional) Add source ports.
delete - (Optional) Delete source ports.
ports - (Optional) Specify source portlist to add to or delete from the RSPAN source.
rx - (Optional) Only monitor ingress packets.
tx - (Optional) Only monitor egress packets.
both - (Optional) Monitor both ingress and egress packets.
822

®
Restrictions
Example
To configure an RSPAN source entry without source target port:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config rspan vlan vlan_name v2 source add ports 1:2-1:5 rx
Command: config rspan vlan vlan_name v2 source add ports 1:2-1:5 rx
Success.
To configure an RSPAN source entry for per flow RSPAN, without any source ports:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config rspan vlan vlan_id 2 source
Command: config rspan vlan vlan_id 2 source
Success.
To add redirect ports for special RSPAN VLAN on intermediate or destination switch:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config rspan vlan vlan_name vlan2 redirect add ports 1:18-
1:19
Command: config rspan vlan vlan_name vlan2 redirect add ports 1:18-1:19
Success.
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config rspan vlan vlan_id 2 redirect add ports 1:18-1:19

Command: config rspan vlan vlan_id 2 redirect add ports 1:18-1:19
Success.
84-6 show rspan

Description
This command is used to display the RSPAN configuration.
Format
show rspan {[vlan_name <vlan_name> | vlan_id <vlanid 1-4094>]}
Parameters
vlan_name - (Optional) Specify the RSPAN VLAN by VLAN name
823

®
vlan_id - (Optional) Specify the RSPAN VLAN by VLAN ID.

<value 1-4094> - Enter the VLAN ID here. This value must be between 1 and 4094.
Restrictions
None.
Example
Display the specific settings:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show rspan
Command: show rspan
RSPAN : Enabled
RSPAN VLAN ID : 2
--------------------
Mirror Group ID : 1
Target Port :
Source Port
RX : 1:2-1:5
TX :
RSPAN VLAN ID : 3
--------------------
Total RSPAN VLAN :2
824

®
Chapter 85 Routing Information

Protocol (RIP) Command
List (RI Mode Only)
enable rip
disable rip
config rip [ipif <ipif_name 12> | all] {authentication [enable <password 16> | disable] | tx_mode
[disable | v1_only | v1_compatible | v2_only] | rx_mode [v1_only| v2_only | v1_or_v2 | disable]
| state [enable | disable] | distribute_list_in [access_list <list_name 16> | none]}(1)
config rip timers {update <sec 5-65535> | timeout <sec 5-65535> | garbage_collection <sec 5-
65535>}(1)
show rip {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
85-1 enable rip

Description
This command is used to enable RIP for the Switch. The default setting is disabled.
Format
enable rip
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable RIP:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable rip
Command: enable rip
Success.
85-2 disable rip

Description
This command is used to disable RIP for the Switch.
825

®
Format
disable rip
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable RIP:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable rip
Command: disable rip
Success.
85-3 config rip

Description
This command is used to configure the RIP settings for one or more IP interfaces.
Format
config rip [ipif <ipif_name 12> | all] {authentication [enable <password 16> | disable] |
tx_mode [disable | v1_only | v1_compatible | v2_only] | rx_mode [v1_only| v2_only |
v1_or_v2 | disable] | state [enable | disable] | distribute_list_in [access_list <list_name 16> |
none]}(1)
Parameters
ipif_name - Specify the IP interface name used for this configuration.
characters long.
all - Specify that all the IP interfaces will be used in this configuration.
authentication - Specify to set the state of authentication.
enable - Specify that the authentication state will be enabled.
<password 16> - When the authentication state is enabled, enter the password used here.
This value can be up to 16 characters long.
disable - Specify that the authentication state will be disabled.
tx_mode - Specify the RIP transmission mode.
disable - Specify to prevent the transmission of RIP packets.
v1_only - Specify that only RIP version 1 format packets will be transmitted.
v1_compatible - Specify to transmit RIP version 2 format packets to the broadcast address.
v2_only - Specify that only RIP version 2 format packets will be transmitted.
826

®
rx_mode - Specify the RIP receive mode.

v1_only - Specify to receive RIP version 1 format packets.
v2_only - Specify to receive RIP version 2 format packets.
v1_or_v2 - Specify to receive both v1 and v2 packets.
disable - Specify that the receiving of RIP packets will be prevented.
state - Specify that the RIP state will be enabled or disabled. If the state is disabled, then RIP
packets will not be either transmitted or received by the interface. The network configured on
this interface will not be in the RIP database.
enable - Specify that the RIP state will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the RIP state will be disabled.
distribute_list_in - Specify the inbound route filter on RIP interface.
access_list - Use an IP standard access list to filter receiving RIP routes. If the access list
does not exist, user can configure successfully, but the function will not take effective until
user create the access list.
<list_name 16> - Enter the access list name.
none - Do not filter receiving RIP routes.
Restrictions
Example
To change the RIP receive mode for the IP interface System:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config rip ipif System rx_mode v1_only
Command: config rip ipif System rx_mode v1_only
Success.
85-4 config rip timers

Description
This command is used to configure RIP timers.
Format
config rip timers {update <sec 5-65535> | timeout <sec 5-65535> | garbage_collection <sec
5-65535>}(1)
Parameters
update - The value of the time at which RIP updates are sent.
<sec 5-65535> - Enter the time between 5 and 65535 seconds.The default value is 30.
timeout - The value of the time after which a RIP route is declared to be invalid.
garbage_collection - The value of the time for which a RIP route will be kept before it is
removed from the routing table.
827

®
Restrictions
Example
To configure the RIP timers:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config rip timers update 60 timeout 360 garbage_collection
240
Command: config rip timers update 60 timeout 360 garbage_collection 240
Success.
85-5 show rip

Description
This command is used to display the RIP configuration for one or all IP interfaces.
Format
show rip {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
Parameters
ipif - (Optional) Specify the IP interface name used for this configuration.
characters long.
If no parameter is specified, the system will display RIP configuration and statistics for all the IP
interfaces.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display RIP configuration and statistics for all IP interfaces.
828

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show rip
Command: show rip
RIP Global State : Enabled

Update Time : 30 seconds
Timeout Time : 180 seconds
Garbage Collection Time : 120 seconds
RIP Interface Settings
Interface IP Address TX Mode RX Mode Authen- State

tication
------------- ------------------ ---------- ------------- ---------- -----
System 10.90.90.90/8 Disabled V1 Only Disabled Disabled
Total Entries : 1
829

®
Chapter 86 RIPng Command List (RI

Mode Only)
enable ripng
disable ripng
config ripng {method [no_horizon | split_horizon | poison_reverse ] | update <sec 5-65535> |
expire <sec 1-65535> | garbage_collection <sec 1-65535>}(1)
config ripng ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all] {state [enable | disable] | metric <value 1-15>}(1)
show ripng {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
create ipv6route redistribute dst ripng src [local | static | ospfv3] {metric <value 0-16>}
config ipv6route redistribute dst ripng src [local | static | ospfv3] {metric <value 0-16>}
delete ipv6route redistribute dst ripng src [local | static | ospfv3]
86-1 enable ripng

Description
This command is used to enable RIPng globally.
Format
enable ripng
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable RIPng globally:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable ripng
Command: enable ripng
Success.
86-2 disable ripng

Description
This command is used to disable RIPng globally.
830

®
Format
disable ripng
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable RIPng globally:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable ripng
Command: disable ripng
Success.
86-3 config ripng

Description
This command is used to configure the RIPng method and timer.
Format
config ripng {method [no_horizon | split_horizon | poison_reverse ] | update <sec 5-65535> |
expire <sec 1-65535> | garbage_collection <sec 1-65535>}(1)
Parameters
method - Specify the method of RIPng.
no_horizon - Specify not to use any horizon.
split_horizon - Specify to use basic split horizon.
poison_reverse - Specify to use poison reverse.
update - Specify the update timer.
<sec 5-65535> - Enter the time in second between 5 and 65535.
expire - Specify the expiry timer.
garbage_collection - Specify the garbage-collection timer.
Restrictions
831

®
Example
To configure the RIPng method as poison reverse:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ripng method poison_reverse
Command: config ripng method poison_reverse
Success.
86-4 config ripng ipif

Description
This command is used to specify the RIPng state or metric value for one or all interfaces.
Format
config ripng ipif [<ipif_name 12> | all] {state [enable | disable] | metric <value 1-15>}(1)
Parameters
<ipif_name 12> - Specify the interface name.
all - Specify all interfaces to be configured.
state - Specify the RIPng state on the selected interfaces.
enable - Specify to enable the RIPng state.
disable - Specify to disable the RIPng state.
metric - The cost value of an interface. The RIPng route that was learned from the interface will
add this value as a new route metric. The default value is 1.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the RIPng interface state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ripng ipif System state enable
Command: config ripng ipif System state enable
Success.
86-5 show ripng

Description
This command is used to display RIPng configurations.
832

®
Format
show ripng {ipif <ipif_name 12>}
Parameters
ipif - (Optional) Specify the interface name.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the interface name.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display RIPng information:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ripng
Command: show ripng
Global State: Enabled

Method: Poison Reverse
Update Time: 30 seconds
Expire Time: 180 seconds
Garbage Collection Time: 120 seconds
Interface State Metric

-----------------------------------------------------
int8 Disabled 1
int14 Disabled 1
Total Entries : 2
IPv6 Route Redistribution Settings
Source Destination Type Metric

Protocol Protocol
-------- ------------ -------- ------------
Local RIPng All 6
Static RIPng All Transparency
Total Entries: 2
86-6 create ipv6route redistribute dst ripng src

Description
This command is used to create RIPng route redistribution to import routes from other routing
domain into RIPng routing domain.
833

®
Format
create ipv6route redistribute dst ripng src [local | static | ospfv3] {metric <value 0-16>}
Parameters
local - Redistribute local routes into RIPng.
static - Redistribute static routes into RIPng.
ospfv3 - Redistribute OSPFv3 routes into RIPng.
metric - (Optional) Specify the RIPng route metric for the redistributed routes. When the metric
value is 0, the metric in the original route will become the metric of the redistributed RIPng
route transparently. If the metric of the original route is equal or greater than 16, the route will
be not redistributed.
Restrictions
Example
To create RIPng route redistribution:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create ipv6route redistribute dst ripng src local
Command: create ipv6route redistribute dst ripng src local
Success.
86-7 config ipv6route redistribute dst ripng src

Description
This command is used to configure the metric to be associated with the redistributed routes
imported from a specified protocol to RIPng protocol.
Format
config ipv6route redistribute dst ripng src [local | static | ospfv3] {metric <value 0-16>}
Parameters
local - Redistribute local routes into RIPng.
static - Redistribute static routes into RIPng.
ospfv3 - Redistribute OSPFv3 routes into RIPng.
metric - (Optional) Specify the RIPng route metric for the redistributed routes. When the metric
value is 0, the metric in the original route will become the metric of the redistributed RIPng
route transparently. If the metric of the original route is equal or greater than 16, the route will
be not redistributed.
834

®
Restrictions
Example
To configure the RIPng route redistribution:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ipv6route redistribute dst ripng src local metric 6
Command: config ipv6route redistribute dst ripng src local metric 6
Success.
86-8 delete ipv6route redistribute dst ripng src

Description
This command is used to remove RIPng route redistribution to stop importing routes from other
routing domain into RIPng domain.
Format
delete ipv6route redistribute dst ripng src [local | static | ospfv3]
Parameters
local - Specify not to redistribute local routes into RIPng.
static - Specify not to redistribute static routes into RIPng.
ospfv3 - Specify not to redistribute OSPFv3 routes into RIPng.
Restrictions
Example
To remove the RIPng route redistribution:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete ipv6route redistribute dst ripng src local
Command: delete ipv6route redistribute dst ripng src local
Success.
835

®
Chapter 87 Routing Command List

create iproute [default | <network_address>] [<ipaddr> {<metric 1-65535>} {[primary | backup |
weight <value 1-4>]} | null0 | ip_tunnel <tunnel_name 12>]
delete iproute [default | <network_address>] [<ipaddr> | null0 | ip_tunnel <tunnel_name 12>]
show iproute {[<network_address> | <ipaddr>]} {[static | rip | ospf | hardware]}
config route preference [static | default | rip | ospfIntra | ospfInter | ospfExt1 | ospfExt2] <value 1-
999> (RI and EI Mode Only)
create route redistribute dst ospf src [local | static | rip] {mettype [1 | 2] | metric <value 0-
16777214> | route_map <map_name 16>} (RI Mode Only)
config route redistribute dst ospf src [local | static | rip] {mettype [1 | 2] | metric <value 0-
16777214> | [route_map <map_name 16> | no_route_map]} (RI Mode Only)
delete route redistribute dst ospf src [local | static | rip] (RI Mode Only)
create route redistribute dst rip src [local | static | ospf [all | internal | external | type_1 | type_2 |
inter+e1 | inter+e2]] {metric <value 0-16> | route_map <map_name 16>} (RI Mode Only)
config route redistribute dst rip src [local | static | ospf [all | internal | external | type_1 | type_2 |
inter+e1 | inter+e2]] {metric <value 0-16> | [route_map <map_name 16> | no_route_map]}
(RI Mode Only)
delete route redistribute dst rip src [local | static | ospf] (RI Mode Only)
show route redistribute (RI Mode Only)
show route redistribute dst ospf {src [local | static | rip]} (RI Mode Only)
show route redistribute dst rip {src [local | static | ospf]} (RI Mode Only)
config ecmp algorithm {ip_destination | [ip_source | crc_low | crc_high] | tcp_udp_port} (RI
and EI Mode Only)
show ecmp algorithm (RI and EI Mode Only)
show ipfdb {[ip_address <ipaddr> | interface <ipif_name 12> | port <port>]}
show route preference {[local | static | default | rip | ospf | ospfIntra | ospfInter | ospfExt1 |
ospfExt2]} (RI and EI Mode Only)
enable ecmp ospf (RI Mode Only)
disable ecmp ospf (RI Mode Only)
87-1 create iproute

Description
This command is used to create an IP static route.
Selecting “primary” or “backup” means the newly created route is a floating static route.
If none of the following, “primary” or “backup”, is selected, the default route will:
1. be primary if there is no primary route that has the same destination;
2. be backup if there has been a primary route that has the same destination.
3. fail to create if there have been a primary route and a backup route that have the same
destination.
4. fail to create if there has been one static multipath route that has the same destination.
It will fail if a user wants to create a floating static route and there has been one static multipath
route with the same destination.
It will fail if a user wants to create a static multipath route and there has been a floating static route,
whether primary or backup.
836

®
Format
create iproute [default | <network_address>] [<ipaddr> {<metric 1-65535>} {[primary |
backup | weight <value 1-4>]} | null0 | ip_tunnel <tunnel_name 12>]
Parameters
default - Create an IP default route (0.0.0.0/0).
<network_address> - The IP address and net mask of the destination of the route. The address
and the mask can be set by the traditional format (for example, 10.1.2.3/255.0.0.0) or in CIDR
format (for example,10.1.2.3/16). (RI and EI Mode Only)
<ipaddr> - The IP address for the next hop router.
<metric 1-65535> - (Optional) Enter the metric value here. This value must be between 1 and
65535. The default setting is 1.
primary - (Optional) Specify the route as the primary route to the destination.
backup - (Optional) Specify the route as the backup route to the destination.
weight - (Optional) Specify the weight value of the IP route. (RI and EI Mode Only)
<value 1-4> - Enter the weight value used here. This value must be between 1 and 4.
null0 - Specify the null interface as the next hop. (RI Mode Only)
ip_tunnel – Specify the IP tunnel interface of the next hop. (RI Mode Only)
Restrictions
Example
To add a floating static route:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create iproute default 10.1.1.254 primary
Command: create iproute default 10.1.1.254 primary
Success.
87-2 delete iproute

Description
This command is used to delete an IP route entry from the Switch’s IP routing table.
Format
delete iproute [default | <network_address>] [<ipaddr> | null0 | ip_tunnel <tunnel_name 12>]
Parameters
default - Deletes an IP default route (0.0.0.0/0).
<network_address> – Specify the network address used. (RI and EI Mode Only)
<ipaddr> - Specify the next hop IP address of the route need to be deleted.
null0 - Specify the null interface as the next hop. (RI Mode Only)
ip_tunnel – Specify the IP tunnel interface of the next hop. (RI Mode Only)
837

®
Restrictions
Example
To delete an IP default route:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete iproute default 10.1.1.254
Command: delete iproute default 10.1.1.254
Success.
87-3 show iproute

Description
This command is used to display the Switch’s current IP routing table.
Format
show iproute {[<network_address> | <ipaddr>]} {[static | rip | ospf | hardware]}
Parameters
<network_address> - (Optional) Specify the destination network address of the route to be
displayed. (RI and EI Mode Only)
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Specify the destination IP address of the route to be displayed. The longest
prefix matched route will be displayed. (RI and EI Mode Only)
static - (Optional) Specify to display only static routes. One static route may be active or inactive.
rip - (Optional) Specify to display only RIP routes. One RIP route may be active or inactive. (RI
Mode Only)
ospf - (Optional) Specify to display only OSPF routes. One OSPF route may be active or
inactive. (RI Mode Only)
hardware - (Optional) Specify to display only the routes that have been written into the chip.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the contents of the IP routing table:
838

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show iproute

Command: show iproute
Routing Table
IP Address/Netmask Gateway Interface Cost Protocol

------------------ --------------- ------------ -------- --------
10.1.1.0/24 0.0.0.0 System 1 Local
192.168.1.0/24 0.0.0.0 ip1 1 Local
Total Entries : 2
87-4 config route preference (RI and EI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to configure the route preference. The route with smaller preference has
higher priority. The preference for local routes is fixed to 0.
Format
config route preference [static | default | rip | ospfIntra | ospfInter | ospfExt1 | ospfExt2]
<value 1-999>
Parameters
static - Configure the preference of static route. The default value is 60.
default - Configure the preference of default route. The default value is 1.
rip - Configure the preference of RIP route. The default value is 80. (RI Mode Only)
ospfIntra - Configure the preference of OSPF intra-area route. The default value is 80. (RI
Mode Only)
ospfInter - Configure the preference of OSPF inter-area route. The default value is 90. (RI
Mode Only)
ospfExt1 - Configure the preference of OSPF external type-1 route. The default value is 110.
(RI Mode Only)
ospfExt2 - Configure the preference of OSPF external type-2 route. The default value is 115.
(RI Mode Only)
<value 1-999> - Specify the value of the preference.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the route preference for static routes to 70:
839

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config route preference static 70

Command: config route preference static 70
Success.
87-5 create route redistribute dst ospf src (RI Mode Only)
Description
This command is used to redistribute routing information from other routing protocols into OSPF.
Format
create route redistribute dst ospf src [local | static | rip] {mettype [1 | 2] | metric <value 0-
16777214> | route_map <map_name 16>}
Parameters
local - Redistribute local routes into OSPF.
static - Redistribute static routes into OSPF.
rip - Redistribute RIP routes into OSPF.
1 - 1 calculates the metric (for other routing protocols to OSPF) by adding the destination’s
2 - 2 uses the metric entered in the Metric field without change. This field applies only when
the destination field is OSPF. If the metric type is not specified, it will be type 2.
<value 0-16777214> - Enter the value between 0 and 16777214. If it is not specified or
specified as 0, the redistributed routes will be associated with the default metric 20.
route_map - (Optional) Specify the route map for the redistributed routes.
Restrictions
Example
To add route redistribution settings:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create route redistribute dst ospf src rip metric 2
Command: create route redistribute dst ospf src rip metric 2
Success.
840

®
87-6 config route redistribute dst ospf src (RI Mode Only)
Description
This command is used to update the metric or the route map to be associated with the
redistributed routes from a specific protocol to OSPF protocol.
Format
config route redistribute dst ospf src [local | static | rip] {mettype [1 | 2] | metric <value 0-
16777214> | [route_map <map_name 16> | no_route_map]}
Parameters
local - Redistribute local routes into OSPF.
static - Redistribute static routes into OSPF.
rip - Redistribute RIP routes into OSPF.
1 - 1 calculates the metric (for other routing protocols to OSPF) by adding the destination’s
2 - 2 uses the metric entered in the Metric field without change. This field applies only when
the destination field is OSPF. If the metric type is not specified, it will be type 2.
<value 0-16777214> - Enter the value between 0 and 16777214. If it is not specified or
specified as 0, the redistributed routes will be associated with the default metric 20.
no_route_map - (Optional) Specify to remove the route map associated with the redistributed
routes.
Restrictions
Example
To configure route redistributions:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config route redistribute dst ospf src rip mettype 1 metric
2
Command: config route redistribute dst ospf src rip mettype 1 metric 2
Success.
87-7 delete route redistribute dst ospf src (RI Mode Only)
Description
This command is used to stop redistribution of routes from one source protocol to OSPF.
841

®
Format
delete route redistribute dst ospf src [local | static | rip]
Parameters
local - Specify the source protocol as local.
static - Specify the source protocol as static.
rip - Specify the source protocol as RIP.
Restrictions
Example
To delete route redistribution settings:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete route redistribute dst ospf src local
Command: delete route redistribute dst ospf src local
Success.
87-8 create route redistribute dst rip src (RI Mode Only)
Description
This command is used to redistribute routing information from other routing protocols into RIP.
When the metric is specified as 0, the metric in the original route will become the metric of the
redistributing RIP routes transparently. If the metric of the original routes is greater than 16, the
route will be not redistributed.
Format
create route redistribute dst rip src [local | static | ospf [all | internal | external | type_1 |
type_2 | inter+e1 | inter+e2]] {metric <value 0-16> | route_map <map_name 16>}
Parameters
local - Redistribute local routes into RIP.
static - Redistribute static routes into RIP.
ospf - Redistribute OSPF routes into RIP.
all - Redistribute both OSPF AS-internal and OSPF AS-external routes into RIP.
internal - Only redistribute OSPF AS-internal routes.
external - Only redistribute OSPF AS-external routes, including type-1 and type-2 routes.
type_1 - Only redistribute OSPF AS-internal type-1 routes.
inter+e1 - Only redistribute OSPF AS-internal type-1 and OSPF AS-internal routes.
metric - (Optional) Specifies the RIP route metric value for the redistributed routes.
<value 0-16> - Enter the value from 0 to 16. The default value is 0.
842

®
Restrictions
Example
To add route redistribution settings:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create route redistribute dst rip src ospf all metric 2
Command: create route redistribute dst rip src ospf all metric 2
Success.
87-9 config route redistribute dst rip src (RI Mode Only)
Description
This command is used to update the metric to be associated with the redistributed routes from a
specific protocol to RIP protocol.
Format
config route redistribute dst rip src [local | static | ospf [all | internal | external | type_1 |
type_2 | inter+e1 | inter+e2]] {metric <value 0-16> | [route_map <map_name 16> |
no_route_map]}
Parameters
local - Redistribute local routes into RIP.
static - Redistribute static routes into RIP.
ospf - Redistribute OSPF routes into RIP.
all - Redistribute both OSPF AS-internal and OSPF AS-external routes into RIP.
internal - Only redistribute OSPF AS-internal routes.
external - Only redistribute OSPF AS-external routes, including type-1 and type-2 routes.
metric - (Optional) Specifies the RIP route metric value for the redistributed routes.
<value 0-16> - Enter the value from 0 to 16. The default value is 0.
no_route_map – (Optional) Specify to remove the route map associated with the redistributed
routes.
Restrictions
843

®
Example
To configure the route redistributions:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config route redistribute dst rip src ospf internal
Command: config route redistribute dst rip src ospf internal
Success.
87-10 delete route redistribute dst rip src (RI Mode Only)
Description
This command is used to stop redistribution of routes from one source protocol to RIP.
Format
delete route redistribute dst rip src [local | static | ospf]
Parameters
local - Specify the source protocol as local.
static - Specify the source protocol as static.
rip - Specify the source protocol as RIP.
Restrictions
Example
To delete route redistribution settings:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete route redistribute dst rip src local
Command: delete route redistribute dst rip src local
Success.
87-11 show route redistribute (RI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to display the route redistribution settings on the Switch.
Format
show route redistribute
844

®
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the route redistribution settings:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show route redistribute
Command: show route redistribute
Route Redistribution Settings
Source Destination Type Metric RouteMapName

Protocol Protocol
-------- ------------ -------- ------------ ------------
OSPF RIP Internal 2 N/A
RIP OSPF Type-1 2 N/A
Total Entries : 2
87-12 show route redistribute dst ospf (RI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to display the redistribution with the target protocol OSPF.
Format
show route redistribute dst ospf {src [local | static | rip]}
Parameters
src - (Optional) Specify the source protocol.
local - Display the redistribution with the source local.
static - Display the redistribution with the source static.
rip - Display the redistribution with the source protocol RIP.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the redistribution with the target protocol OSPF:
845

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show route redistribute dst ospf

Command: show route redistribute dst ospf

Protocol Protocol
-------- ------------ -------- ------------
RIP OSPF Type-1 2 N/A
Total Entries : 1
87-13 show route redistribute dst rip (RI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to the redistribution with the target protocol RIP.
Format
show route redistribute dst rip {src [local | static | ospf]}
Parameters
src - (Optional) Specify the source protocol.
local - Display the redistribution with the source local.
static - Display the redistribution with the source static.
rip - Display the redistribution with the source protocol RIP.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the redistribution with the target protocol RIP:
846

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show route redistribute dst rip

Command: show route redistribute dst rip

Protocol Protocol
-------- ------------ -------- ------------
OSPF RIP Internal 2 N/A
Total Entries : 1
87-14 config ecmp algorithm (RI and EI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to configure the ECMP route load- balancing algorithm. It is effective for
ECMP routing. ECMP routing can be adopted either by OSPF dynamic routes or by static routes
which are configured with equal weight.
Format
config ecmp algorithm {ip_destination | [ip_source | crc_low | crc_high] | tcp_udp_port}
Parameters
ip_destination - (Optional) Specify to include the destination IP in the ECMP algorithm. This is
the default.
ip_source- (Optional) Specify to include the lower 5 bits of the source IP in the ECMP algorithm.
crc_low- (Optional) Specify to include the lower 5 bits of the CRC in the ECMP algorithm.
crc_high- (Optional) Specify to include the upper 5 bits of the CRC in the ECMP algorithm.
tcp_udp_port- (Optional) Specify to include the TCP or UDP port in the ECMP algorithm.
Restrictions
Example
To configure ECMP algorithm:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ecmp algorithm ip_destination ip_source
Command: config ecmp algorithm ip_destination ip_source
Success.
847

®
87-15 show ecmp algorithm (RI and EI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to display the ECMP route load-balancing algorithm.
Format
show ecmp algorithm
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the ECMP hash algorithm:
GS-3120-24TC:admin#show ecmp algorithm
Command: show ecmp algorithm
ECMP for OSPF : Enabled

ECMP Load Balance Algorithm :
Destination IP : used.
Source IP : used.
CRC_Low : not used.
CRC_High : not used.
TCP_UDP_Port : not used.
87-16 show ipfdb

Description
This command is used to display the current network address forwarding database.
Format
show ipfdb {[ip_address <ipaddr> | interface <ipif_name 12> | port <port>]}
Parameters
ip_address - (Optional) Displays the specified host IP address.
interface - (Optional) Specify a IP interface.
848

®
long.
port - (Optional) Specify a port.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display network address forwarding table:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show ipfdb
Command: show ipfdb
Interface IP Address Port Learned

------------ --------------- ------ ---------
System 10.1.1.101 1:3 Dynamic
Total Entries: 3
87-17 show route preference (RI and EI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to display the route preference setting.
Format
show route preference {[local | static | default | rip | ospf | ospfIntra | ospfInter | ospfExt1 |
ospfExt2]}
Parameters
local - (Optional) Display the preference of local route.
static - (Optional) Display the preference of static route.
default - (Optional) Display the preference of default route.
rip - (Optional) Display the preference of RIP route. (RI Mode Only)
ospf - (Optional) Display the preference of OSPF route. (RI Mode Only)
ospfIntra - (Optional) Display the preference of OSPF intra-area route. (RI Mode Only)
ospfInter - (Optional) Display the preference of OSPF inter-area route. (RI Mode Only)
ospfExt1 - (Optional) Display the preference of OSPF external type-1 route. (RI Mode Only)
ospfExt2 - (Optional) Display the preference of OSPF external type-2 route. (RI Mode Only)
Restrictions
None.
849

®
Example
To display the route preference for all route types:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show route preference
Command: show route preference
Route Preference Settings
Protocol Preference
---------- ----------
Static 60
Default 1
Local 0
87-18 enable ecmp ospf (RI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to activate the OSPF ECMP function.
Format
enable ecmp ospf
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the OSPF ECMP function:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable ecmp ospf
Command: enable ecmp ospf
Success.
87-19 disable ecmp ospf (RI Mode Only)

Description
This command is used to disable the OSPF ECMP function.
850

®
Format
disable ecmp ospf
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable the OSPF ECMP function:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable ecmp ospf
Command: disable ecmp ospf
Success.
851

®
Chapter 88 RPC PortMapper Command

List
config filter rpc_portmapper [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
show filter rpc_portmapper
88-1 config filter rpc_portmapper

Description
This command is used to configure the Switch to deny TCP/UDP packets with port number 135 on
the network.
Format
config filter rpc_portmapper [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
<portlist> - Specify a list of ports to be configured for the RPC portmapper filter state.
all - Specify all ports to be configured for the RPC portmapper filter state.
state - Specify the RPC portmapper filter state.
enable - Enable the RPC portmapper filter on specified ports.
disable - Disable the RPC portmapper filter on specified ports.
Restrictions
Example
To enable RPC portmapper filter on unit 1 port 1 to port 10:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config filter rpc_portmapper 1:1-1:10 state enable
Command: config filter rpc_portmapper 1:1-1:10 state enable
Success.
88-2 show filter rpc_portmapper

Description
This command is used to display the RPC portmapper filter state on the Switch.
Format
show filter rpc_portmapper
852

®
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the RPC portmapper state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show filter rpc_portmapper
Command: show filter rpc_portmapper
Enabled Ports: 1:1-1:10
853

®
Chapter 89 Safeguard Engine Command

List
config safeguard_engine {state [enable | disable] | utilization {rising <value 20-100> | falling
<value 20-100>}(1) | trap_log [enable|disable] | mode [ strict | fuzzy]}(1)
show safeguard_engine
89-1 config safeguard_engine

Description
This command is used to configure the CPU protection control for the system.
Format
config safeguard_engine {state [enable | disable] | utilization {rising <value 20-100> | falling
<value 20-100>}(1) | trap_log [enable|disable] | mode [ strict | fuzzy]}(1)
Parameters
state - (Optional) Specify to configure CPU protection state to enable or disable.
enable - Specify that CPU protection will be enabled.
disable - Specify that CPU protection will be enabled.
utilization - (Optional) Specify to configure the CPU protection threshold.
rising - Config utilization rising threshold , the range is between 20%-100% , if the CPU
utilization is over the rising threshold, the Switch enters exhausted mode.
<20-100> - Enter the utilization rising value here. This value must be between 20 and 100.
falling - Config utilization falling threshold , the range is between 20%-100% , if the CPU
utilization is lower than the falling threshold, the Switch enters normal mode.
<20-100> - Enter the utilization falling value here. This value must be between 20 and 100.
trap_log - (Optional) Configure the state of CPU protection related trap/log mechanism to enable
or disable. If set to enable, trap and log will be active while cpu protection current mode
changed.If set to disable, current mode change will not trigger trap and log events.
enable - Specify that the CPU protection trap or log mechanism will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the CPU protection trap or log mechanism will be disabled.
mode - (Optional) determine the controlling method of broadcast traffic. Here are two modes
(strict and fuzzy).
strict - In strict, the Switch will stop receiving all ‘ARP not to me’ packets (the protocol address
of target in ARP packet is the Switch itself). That means no matter what reasons cause the
high CPU utilization (may not caused by ARP storm), the Switch reluctantly processes
any ’ARP not to me’ packets in exhausted mode.
fuzzy - In fuzzy mode, the Switch will adjust the bandwidth dynamically depend on some
reasonable algorithm.
Restrictions
Example
To configure CPU protection:
854

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config safeguard_engine state enable utilization rising 50

falling 30 trap_log enable
Command: config safeguard_engine state enable utilization rising 50 falling 30
trap_log enable
Success.
89-2 show safeguard_engine

Description
This command is used to show safeguard engine information.
Format
show safeguard_engine
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show safeguard_engine information:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show safeguard_engine
Command: show safeguard_engine
Safeguard Engine State : Disabled

Safeguard Engine Current Status : Normal Mode
=======================================================
CPU Utilization Information:
Rising Threshold : 30%
Falling Threshold : 20%
Trap/Log State : Disabled
Mode : Fuzzy
Note: Safeguard engine current status has two modes: exhausted and normal mode.
855

®
Chapter 90 SD Card Management

Command List
create backup [config | log] time_range <range_name 32> filename <pathname> {state [enable |
disable]}
config backup [config | log] time_range <range_name 32> filename <pathname> state [enable |
disable]
delete backup [config | log] [all | time_range <range_name 32> {filename <pathname>}]
show backup {config | log}
create execute_config time_range <range_name 32> config <pathname> {state [enable |
disable] | [increment | reset]}
config execute_config time_range <range_name 32> config <pathname> {state [enable |
delete execute_config [all | time_range <range_name 32> {config <pathname>}]
90-1 create backup

Description
This command is used to create a schedule to backup the configuration or log to file system.
If the time range does not exist, the schedule will still be created without prompt. But the schedule
will not take effective until the time range is created. To create an existed entry, the device will
feedback a success message and does no change for the existed schedule. The maximum of
schedules backup is 15.
Format
create backup [config | log] time_range <range_name 32> filename <pathname> {state
[enable | disable]}
Parameters
config - Schedule to back up configuration.
log - Schedule to back up log.
time_range - The schedule to back up the configuration or log.
<range_name32> - Enter the name of the time range. Maximum 32 characters.
filename - The backup filename of the configuration or log.
<pathname> - Enter the backup file path name.
state - (Optional) Enable or disable the backup schedule when the schedule is created. If not
specified, the schedule will be disabled.
enable – Enable the backup schedule.
disable – Disable the backup schedule.
Restrictions
856

®
Example
To create a backup schedule on time range "range_1":
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create backup config time_range range_1 filename c:/bk-
confi
g-1
Command: create backup config time_range range_1 filename c:/bk-config-1
Success.
90-2 config backup

Description
This command is used to enable or disable a schedule backup.
Format
config backup [config | log] time_range <range_name 32> filename <pathname> state
[enable | disable]
Parameters
time_range - The schedule to back up the configuration or log.
filename - The backup filename of the configuration or log.
state - (Optional) Enable or disable the backup schedule when the schedule is created.
enable – Enable the backup schedule.
disable – Disable the backup schedule.
Restrictions
Example
To enable a backup schedule on time range "range_1":
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config backup log time_range range_1 filename bk-des-log
state enable
Command: config backup log time_range range_1 filename bk-des-log state enable
Success.
857

®
90-3 delete backup

Description
This command is used to delete schedule backup.
Format
delete backup [config | log] [all | time_range <range_name 32> {filename <pathname>}]
Parameters
all - Delete all the schedules.
time_range - The time range of schedule backup that wants to be deleted.
filename - (Optional) The backup filename of the configuration or log that wants to be deleted.
Restrictions
Example
To delete all the schedules:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete backup config all
Command: delete backup config all
Success.
90-4 show backup

Description
This command is used to show schedule backup.
Format
show backup {config | log}
Parameters
config - Display the backup schedules for configuration.
log - Display the backup schedules for log.
Restrictions
None.
858

®
Example
To show all backup schedules:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show backup
Command: show backup
Backup Schedule Entry 1

Time Range : range_1
Type : configuration
Filename : c:/bk-config-1
State : Disabled
Total Entries1
90-5 create execute_config time_range

Description
This command is used to create a schedule to execute the configuration on file system. If the time
range does not exist, the schedule will still be created without prompt. But the schedule will not
take effective until the time range is created. To create an existed entry, the device will feedback a
success message and does no change for the existed schedule. The maximum of schedules
execute is 15.
Format
create execute_config time_range <range_name 32> config <pathname> {state [enable |
Parameters
<range_name32> - Enter the time range for schedule to execute the configuration. Maximum 32
characters.
config - The filename of the configuration on file system.
<pathname> - Enter the configuration file path name.
state - (Optional) Enable or disable the executive schedules when the schedule is created.If not
specified, the schedule will be disabled.
enable – Enable the executive schedule.
disable – Disable the executive schedule.
increment - (Optional) The current configuration will not be reset before executing the
configuration.
reset - (Optional) The current configuration will be reset before executing the configuration.
Restrictions
Example
To create a schedule to execute the configuration on file system:
859

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create execute_config time_range range-1 config c:/vlan-

config state enable
Command: create execute_config time_range range-1 config c:/vlan-config state
enable
Success.
90-6 config execute_config time_range

Description
This command is used to configure configuration state or execute method of a executive schedule.
Format
config execute_config time_range <range_name 32> config <pathname> {state [enable |
Parameters
<range_name32> - Enter the time range for schedule to execute the configuration. Maximum 32
characters.
config - The filename of the configuration on file system.
state - (Optional) Enable or disable the executive schedules.
enable – Enable the executive schedule.
disable – Disable the executive schedule.
increment - (Optional) The current configuration will not be reset before executing the
configuration.
reset - (Optional) The current configuration will be reset before executing the configuration.
Restrictions
Example
To configure a executive schedule:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config execute_config time_range range_1 config c:/system-
config state enable increment
Command: config execute_config time_range range_1 config c:/system-config state
enable increment
Success.
860

®
90-7 delete execute_config

Description
This command is used to delete the schedule of executing configuration.
Format
delete execute_config [all | time_range <range_name 32> {config <pathname>}]
Parameters
all - Delete all the schedules of executing configuration.
time_range - The time range of the schedules that execute configuration to be deleted.
<range_name 32> - Enter the time range to be deleted. Maximum 32 characters.
config - (Optional) The configuration file name on file system.
Restrictions
Example
To delete all the schedule of executing configuration:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete execute_config all
Command: delete execute_config all
Success.
90-8 show execute_config

Description
This command is used t o display all the executive schedules.
Format
show execute_config
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
861

®
Example
To display all the executive schedules:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show execute_config
Command: show execute_config
Time Range : range-1

Filename : c:/vlan-config
Method : Reset
State : Enabled
Total Entries1
90-9 execute config

Description
This command is used to execute configuration on file system.
Format
execute config <pathname> {increment}
Parameters
<pathname> - The configuration filename on file system.
increment - (Optional) If not specified, the current configuration will be reset before executing the
configuration.If specified, the current configuration will not be reset before executing the
configuration.
Restrictions
Example
To load and execute a configuration:
DGS-3120-24PC:admin#execute config c:/config-vlan-0.cfg
Command: execute config c:/config-vlan-0.cfg
Success.
862

®
Chapter 91 Secure Shell (SSH)

Command List
config ssh algorithm [3DES | AES128 | AES192 | AES256 | arcfour | blowfish | cast128 |
twofish128 | twofish192 | twofish256 | MD5| SHA1 | RSA | DSA] [enable | disable]
show ssh algorithm
config ssh authmode [password | publickey | hostbased] [enable | disable]
show ssh authmode
config ssh user <username 15> authmode [hostbased [hostname <domain_name 32> |
hostname_IP <domain_name 32> [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>]] | password | publickey]
show ssh user authmode
config ssh server {maxsession <int 1-8> | contimeout <sec 30-600> | authfail <int 2-20> | rekey
[10min | 30min | 60min | never] | port <tcp_port_number 1-65535>}
enable ssh
disable ssh
show ssh server
config ssh publickey bypass_login_screen state [enable | disable]
download ssh client_pub_key [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] src_file <path_filename 64>
upload ssh client_pub_key [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] dest_file <path_filename 64>
91-1 config ssh algorithm

Description
This command is used to configure SSH service algorithm.
Format
config ssh algorithm [3DES | AES128 | AES192 | AES256 | arcfour | blowfish | cast128 |
twofish128 | twofish192 | twofish256 | MD5| SHA1 | RSA | DSA] [enable | disable]
Parameters
3DES - The "3DES" cipher is three-key triple-DES (encrypt-decrypt-encrypt), where the first 8
bytes of the key are used for the first encryption, the next 8 bytes for the decryption, and the
following 8 bytes for the final encryption.
AES (128,192,256) - Advanced Encryption Standard.
arcfour - RC4 (also known as ARC4 or ARCFOUR meaning Alleged RC4) is the most widely-
used software stream cipher.
blowfish - Blowfish is a keyed, symmetric block cipher.
cast128 - CAST-128 is a 12- or 16-round feistel network with a 64-bit block size and a key size of
between 40 to 128 bits.
twofish (128,192,256) - Twofish has a 128-bit block size, a key size ranging from 128 to 256 bits.
MD5 - Message-Digest Algorithm 5.
SHA1 - Secure Hash Algorithm.
RSA - RSA encryption algorithm is a non-symmetric encryption algorithm.
DSS - Digital Signature Standard.
enable - Enabled the algorithm.
disable - Disables the algorithm.
863

®
Restrictions
Example
To enable SSH server public key algorithm:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ssh algorithm DSA enable
Command: config ssh algorithm DSA enable
Success.
91-2 show ssh algorithm

Description
This command is used to show the SSH service algorithm.
Format
show ssh algorithm
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show server algorithm:
864

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show ssh algorithm

Command: show ssh algorithm
Encryption Algorithm
--------------------------
3DES : Enabled
AES128 : Enabled
AES192 : Enabled
AES256 : Enabled
Arcfour : Enabled
Blowfish : Enabled
Cast128 : Enabled
Twofish128 : Enabled
Data Integrity Algorithm

--------------------------
MD5 : Enabled
SHA1 : Enabled
Public Key Algorithm

--------------------------
RSA : Enabled
DSA : Enabled
91-3 config ssh authmode

Description
This command is used to configure user authentication method for SSH.
Format
config ssh authmode [password | publickey | hostbased] [enable | disable]
Parameters
password - Specify user authentication method.
publickey - Specify user authentication method.
hostbased - Specify user authentication method.
enable - Enable user authentication method.
disable - Disable user authentication method.
Restrictions
865

®
Example
To configure user authentication method:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config ssh authmode publickey enable
Command: config ssh authmode publickey enable
Success.
91-4 show ssh authmode

Description
This command is used to show the user authentication method.
Format
show ssh authmode
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show user authentication method:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ssh authmode
Command: show ssh authmode
The SSH Authentication Method:

Password : Enabled
Public Key : Enabled
Host-based : Enabled
91-5 config ssh user

Description
This command is used to update user information for SSH configuration.
866

®
Format
config ssh user <username 15> authmode [hostbased [hostname <domain_name 32> |
hostname_IP <domain_name 32> [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>]] | password | publickey]
Parameters
user - Specify the user name.
<username 15> - Enter the user name used here. This name can be up to 15 characters long.
hostbased - Specify user authentication method.
hostname - Specify host domain name.
<domain_name 32> - Enter the domain name here. This name can be up to 32 characters
long.
hostname_IP - Specify host domain name and IP address.
<domain_name 32> - Specify host name if configuring Host-based method.
<ipaddr> - Specify host IP address if configuring Host-based method.
<ipv6addr> - Specify host IPv6 address if configuring Host-based method. (EI Mode Only)
password - Specify user authentication method.
publickey - Specify user authentication method.
Restrictions
Example
To update user “test” authentication method:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config ssh user test authmode publickey
Command: config ssh user test authmode publickey
Success.
91-6 show ssh user

Description
This command is used to show the SSH user information.
Format
show ssh user authmode
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
867

®
Example
To show user information about SSH configuration:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show ssh user authmode
Command: show ssh user authmode
Current Accounts:
User Name Authentication Host Name Host IP
---------- --- -------------- --------- -------------
test Public Key
alpha Host-based alpha-local 172.18.61.180
beta Host-based beta-local 3000::105
Total Entries : 3
91-7 config ssh server

Description
This command is used to configure the SSH server general information.
Format
config ssh server {maxsession <int 1-8> | contimeout <sec 30-600> | authfail <int 2-20> |
rekey [10min | 30min | 60min | never] | port <tcp_port_number 1-65535>}
Parameters
maxsession - (Optional) Specify SSH server maximum session at the same time, maximum 8
sessions.
<int 1-8> - Enter the maximum session value here. This value must be between 1 and 8.
contimeout - (Optional) Specify SSH server connection time-out, in the unit of second.
<sec 30-600> - Enter the connection time-out value here. This value must be between 30 and
600 seconds.
authfail - (Optional) Specify user maximum fail attempts.
<int 2-20> - Enter the user maximum fail attempts value here. This value must be between 2
and 20.
rekey - (Optional) Specify time to re-generate session key. There are 10 minutes, 30 minutes, 60
minutes and never for the selection, which the never means do NOT re- generate session key
10min - Specify that the re-generate session key time will be 10 minutes.
never - Specify that the re-generate session key time will be set to never.
port - (Optional) Specify the TCP port used to communication between SSH client and server.
<tcp_port_number 1-65535> - Enter the TCP port number here. This value must be between
1 and 65535.
Restrictions
868

®
Example
To configure SSH server maximum session number is 3:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config ssh server maxsession 3
Command: config ssh server maxsession 3
Success.
91-8 enable ssh

Description
This command is used to enable SSH server services.
Format
enable ssh
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable SSH server:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable ssh
Command: enable ssh
Success.
91-9 disable ssh

Description
This command is used to disable SSH server services.
Format
disable ssh
Parameters
None.
869

®
Restrictions
Example
To disable the SSH server services:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable ssh
Command: disable ssh
Success.
91-10 show ssh server

Description
This command is used to show the SSH server general information.
Format
show ssh server
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show SSH server:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ssh server
Command: show ssh server
The SSH Server Configuration

Maximum Session : 8
Connection Timeout : 120
Authentication Fail Attempts : 2
Rekey Timeout : Never
TCP Port Number : 22
Bypass Login Screen State : Disabled
870

®
91-11 config ssh publickey bypass_login_screen state

Description
This command is used to enable or disable bypassing login screen which is used to avoid a
secondary username/password authentication for users using SSH public key authentication.
Format
config ssh publickey bypass_login_screen state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Specify to bypass the username/password login screen to avoid a secondary
authentication after using SSH public key authentication. If this method is specified, the login
user using SSH public key authentication can execute command directly with the initial
privilege level of the login user.
disable - Specify to need a secondary username/password authentication after using SSH public
key authentication. If this method is specified, the login user using SSH public key
authentication must pass username/password authentication before execution shell is
obtained. The initial privilege level depends on the secondary username/password
authentication.
Restrictions
Example
To disable the secondary username/password authentication for users using SSH public key
authentication:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ssh publickey bypass_login_screen state disable
Command: config ssh publickey bypass_login_screen state disable
Success.
91-12 download ssh client_pub_key

Description
This command is used to download the SSH public key file on client computer to the switch
through TFTP protocol.
Format
download ssh client_pub_key [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] src_file <path_filename 64>
Parameters
871

®
<ipv6addr> - Specify the IPv6 address of the TFTP server.

src_file - Specify the path name and file name of the TFTP server. It can be a relative path name
or an absolute path name. If path name is not specified, it refers to the TFTP server path.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the source file path. This can be up to 64 characters long.
Restrictions
Example
To download a SSH public key file named id_rsa_keys from TFTP server 169.168.10.100 to the
switch:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#download ssh client_public_key 169.168.10.100 src_file
id_rsa_keys
Command: download ssh client_public_key 169.168.10.100 src_file id_rsa_keys

Download SSH public key.................Done.
91-13 upload ssh client_pub_key

Description
This command is used to upload the SSH public key file from the switch to a computer through
TFTP protocol.
Format
upload ssh client_pub_key [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] dest_file <path_filename 64>
Parameters
<ipv6addr> - Specify the IPv6 address of the TFTP server.
src_file - Specify the path name and file name of the TFTP server. It can be a relative path name
or an absolute path name. If path name is not specified, it refers to the TFTP server path.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the source file path. This can be up to 64 characters long.
Restrictions
Example
To upload a SSH public key file named id_rsa_keys from TFTP server 169.168.10.100 to the
switch:
872

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# upload ssh client_public_key 169.168.10.100 dest_file

id_rsa_keys
Command: upload ssh client_public_key 169.168.10.100 dest_file id_rsa_keys

Upload SSH public key.................. Done.
873

®
Chapter 92 Secure Sockets Layer (SSL)

Command List
download ssl certificate <ipaddr> certfilename <path_filename 64> keyfilename <path_filename
64>
enable ssl {ciphersuite {RSA_with_RC4_128_MD5 | RSA_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA |
DHE_DSS_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA | RSA_EXPORT_with_RC4_40_MD5}}
disable ssl {ciphersuite {RSA_with_RC4_128_MD5 | RSA_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA |
delete ssl certificate <path_filename 64>
show ssl {certificate {[chain | <path_filename 64>]}}
show ssl cachetimeout
config ssl cachetimeout <value 60-86400>
config ssl certificate chain [default | <cert_list>]
92-1 download ssl certificate

Description
This command is used to download the certificate to the device according to the certificate level.
The user can download the specified certificate to the device which must, according to desired key
exchange algorithm. For RSA key exchange, the user must download RSA type certificate and for
DHS_DSS is using the DSA certificate for key exchange.
Format
download ssl certificate <ipaddr> certfilename <path_filename 64> {keyfilename
<path_filename 64>}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Enter the TFTP server IP address used for this configuration here.
certfilename - Specify the desired certificate file name.
<path_filename 64> - Certificate file path respect to tftp server root path, and input characters
max to 64 octets.
keyfilename – (Optional) Specify the private key file name which accompany with the certificate.
<path_filename 64> - Private key file path respect to tftp server root path, and input
characters max to 64 octets.
Restrictions
Example
To download certificate from TFTP server:
874

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# download ssl certificate 10.55.47.1 certfilename cert.der

keyfilename pkey.der
Command: download ssl certificate 10.55.47.1 certfilename cert.der keyfilename
pkey.der
Success.
92-2 enable ssl

Description
This command is used to enable SSL status and it’s ciphersuites. Using “enable ssl” command will
enable SSL feature which means enable SSLv3 and TLSv1. For each ciphersuites, user must
specify it by this command.
Format
enable ssl {ciphersuite {RSA_with_RC4_128_MD5 | RSA_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA |
Parameters
ciphersuite - (Optional) Specify the cipher suite combination used for this configuration.
RSA_with_RC4_128_MD5 - Indicate RSA key exchange with RC4 128 bits encryption and
MD5 hash.
RSA_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA - Indicate RSA key exchange with 3DES_EDE_CBC
encryption and SHA hash.
DHE_DSS_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA - Indicate DH key exchange with 3DES_EDE_CBC
RSA_EXPORT_with_RC4_40_MD5 - Indicate RSA_EXPORT key exchange with RC4 40 bits
encryption and MD5 hash.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the SSL ciphersuite for RSA_with_RC4_128_MD5:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable ssl ciphersuite RSA_with_RC4_128_MD5
Command: enable ssl ciphersuite RSA_with_RC4_128_MD5
Success.
To enable SSL:
875

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable ssl

Command: enable ssl
Note: Web will be disabled if SSL is enabled.

Success.
92-3 disable ssl

Description
This command is used to disable SSL feature and supported ciphercuites. Using “disable ssl”
command will disable SSL feature and for each ciphersuites status user must specified it by this
command.
Format
disable ssl {ciphersuite {RSA_with_RC4_128_MD5 | RSA_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA |
Parameters
ciphersuite - (Optional) Specify the cipher suite combination used for this configuration.
RSA_with_RC4_128_MD5 - Indicate RSA key exchange with RC4 128 bits encryption and
MD5 hash.
RSA_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA - Indicate RSA key exchange with 3DES_EDE_CBC
DHE_DSS_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA - Indicate DH key exchange with 3DES_EDE_CBC
RSA_EXPORT_with_RC4_40_MD5 - Indicate RSA_EXPORT key exchange with RC4 40 bits
encryption and MD5 hash.
Restrictions
Example
To disable SSL ciphersuite for RSA_with_RC4_128_MD5:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable ssl ciphersuite RSA_with_RC4_128_MD5
Command: disable ssl ciphersuite RSA_with_RC4_128_MD5
Success.
To disable SSL:
876

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable ssl

Command: disable ssl
Success.
92-4 delete ssl certificate

Description
This command is used to delete a certification on the Switch.
Format
delete ssl certificate <path_filename 64>
Parameters
<path_filename 64> - Specify the certification file name on the Switch.
Restrictions
Example
To delete a certificate:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete ssl certificate web_ca2.cer
Command: delete ssl certificate web_ca2.cer
Success.
92-5 show ssl

Description
This command is used to display the certificate status. User must download specified certificate
type according to desired key exchange algorithm. The options may be no certificate, RSA type or
DSA type certificate
Format
show ssl {certificate {[chain | <path_filename 64>]}}
Parameters
certificate - (Optional) Specify that the SSL certificate will be displayed.
chain - (Optioanl) Specify the chain of certifications on the Switch to be displayed.
877

®
<path_filename 64> - (Optioanl) Specify the certification file name on the Switch.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show SSL:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ssl
Command: show ssl
SSL Status Enabled
RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5 0x0004 Enabled

RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA 0x000A Enabled
DHE_DSS_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA 0x0013 Enabled
RSA_EXPORT_WITH_RC4_40_MD5 0x0003 Enabled
To show certificate:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show ssl certificate
Command: show ssl certificate
92-6 show ssl cachetimeout

Description
This command is used to show cahce timeout value which is designed for dlktimer library to
remove the session id after expired. In order to support the resume session feature, the SSL
library keep the session id in web server, and invoking the dlktimer library to remove this session id
by cache timeout value.
Format
show ssl cachetimeout
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
878

®
Example
To show SSL cache timeout:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ssl cachetimeout
Command: show ssl cachetimeout
Cache timeout is 600 second(s)
92-7 config ssl cachetimeout

Description
This command is used to configure cahce timeout value which is designed for dlktimer library to
remove the session id after expired. In order to support the resume session feature, the SSL
library keep the session id in web server, and invoking the dlktimer library to remove this session id
by cache timeout value. The unit of argument’s value is second and it’s boundary is between 60 (1
minute) and 86400 (24 hours). Default value is 600 seconds.
Format
config ssl cachetimeout <value 60-86400>
Parameters
timeout - Specify the SSL cache timeout value attributes.
<value 60-86400> - Enter the timeout value here. This value must be between 60 and 86400.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To configure the SSL cache timeout value to 60:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ssl cachetimeout 60
Command: config ssl cachetimeout 60
Success.
92-8 config ssl certificate chain

Description
This command is used to specify chain of certifications on the Switch.
879

®
Format
config ssl certificate chain [default | <cert_list>]
Parameters
default - Specify to use all certificates to constitute the SSL certificate chain.
<cert_list> - Specify chain of certifications on the Switch.
Restrictions
Example
To configure SSL chain of certifications
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config ssl certificate chain web_ca2.cer,server.crt
Command: config ssl certificate chain web_ca2.cer,server.crt
Success.
880

®
Chapter 93 Spanning Tree Protocol

(STP) Command List
enable stp
disable stp
config stp {maxage <value 6-40> | maxhops <value 6-40> | hellotime <value 1-2> | forwarddelay
<value 4-30> | txholdcount <value 1-10> | fbpdu [enable | disable] | nni_bpdu_addr [dot1d |
dot1ad]}
show stp
create stp instance_id <value 1-15>
config stp instance_id <value 1-15> [add_vlan | remove_vlan] <vidlist>
delete stp instance_id <value 1-15>
config stp mst_config_id {revision_level <int 0-65535> | name <string>}
show stp mst_config_id
config stp mst_ports <portlist> instance_id <value 0-15> {internalCost [auto | <value 1-
200000000>] | priority <value 0-240>}
config stp ports <portlist> {externalCost [auto | <value 1-200000000>] | hellotime <value 1-2> |
migrate [yes | no] |edge [true | false | auto] | p2p [true | false | auto] | state [enable | disable] |
restricted_role [true | false] | restricted_tcn [true | false] | fbpdu [enable | disable]}
show stp ports {<portlist>}
config stp priority <value 0-61440> instance_id <value 0-15>
config stp trap {topo_change [disable | enable] | new_root [enable | disable]}(1)
config stp version [mstp | rstp | stp]
show stp instance {<value 0-15>}
93-1 enable stp

Description
This command is used to enable STP globally.
Format
enable stp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable STP:
881

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable stp
Command: enable stp
Success.
93-2 disable stp

Description
This command is used to disable STP globally.
Format
disable stp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable STP:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable stp
Command: disable stp
Success.
93-3 config stp

Description
This command is used to configure the bridge parameters global settings.
Format
config stp {maxage <value 6-40> | maxhops <value 6-40> | hellotime <value 1-2> |
forwarddelay <value 4-30> | txholdcount <value 1-10> | fbpdu [enable | disable] |
nni_bpdu_addr [dot1d | dot1ad]}
Parameters
maxage - (Optional) Used to determine if a BPDU is valid. The default value is 20.
882

®
<value 6-40> - Enter the maximum age value here. This value must be between 6-40.
maxhops - (Optional) Used to restrict the forwarded times of one BPDU. The default value is 20.
<value 6-40> - Enter the maximum hops value here. This value must be between 6 and 40.
hello_time - (Optional) The time interval for sending configuration BPDUs by the Root Bridge.
The default value is 2 seconds. This parameter is for STP and RSTP version. MSTP version
uses per-port hellotime parameter.
<value 1-2> - Enter the hello time value here. This value must be between 1 and 2.
forwarddelay - (Optional) The maximum delay time for one BPDU to be transmitted by a bridge
and received from another bridge. The default value is 15.
<value 4-30> - Enter the maximum delay time here. This value must be between 4 and 30.
txholdcount - (Optional) Used to restrict the numbers of BPDU transmitted in a time interval.
<value 1-10> - Enter the transmitted BPDU restriction value here. This value must be
between 1 and 10.
fbpdu - (Optional) To decide if the bridge will flood STP BPDU when STP functionality is
disabled.
enable - Specify that the bridge will flood STP BPDU when STP functionality is disabled
disable - Specify that the bridge will not flood STP BPDU when STP functionality is disabled
nni_bpdu_addr - (Optional) Used to determine the BPDU protocol address for STP in service
provide site. It can use 802.1d STP address, or 802.1ad service provider STP address.
dot1d - Specify that the NNI BPDU protocol address value will be set to Dot1d.
dot1ad - Specify that the NNI BPDU protocol address value will be set to Dot1ad.
Restrictions
Example
To configure STP:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config stp maxage 25
Command: config stp maxage 25
Success.
93-4 show stp

Description
This command is used to show the bridge parameters global settings.
Format
show stp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
883

®
Example
To show STP:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show stp
Command: show stp
STP Bridge Global Settings

---------------------------
STP Status : Enabled
STP Version : RSTP
Max Age : 25
Hello Time : 2
Forward Delay : 15
Max Hops : 20
TX Hold Count : 6
Forwarding BPDU : Disabled
New Root Trap : Enabled
Topology Change Trap : Enabled
NNI BPDU Address : dot1d
93-5 create stp instance_id

Description
This command is used to create an MST Instance without mapping the corresponding VLANs.
Format
create stp instance_id <value 1-15>
Parameters
instance_id - Specify the MSTP instance ID. Instance 0 represents for default instance, CIST.
<value 1-15> - Enter the MSTP instance ID here. This value must be between 1 and 15.
Restrictions
Example
To create MSTP instance:
884

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create stp instance_id 2

Command: create stp instance_id 2
Warning:There is no VLAN mapping to this instance_id!

Success.
93-6 config stp instance_id

Description
This command is used to map or remove the VLAN range of the specified MST instance for the
existed MST instances.
Format
config stp instance_id <value 1-15> [add_vlan | remove_vlan] <vidlist>
Parameters
add_vlan - Specify to map the specified VLAN list to an existing MST instance.
remove_vlan - Specify to delete the specified VLAN list from an existing MST instance.
<vidlist> - Specify a list of VLANs by VLAN ID.
Restrictions
Example
To map a VLAN ID to an MSTP instance:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config stp instance_id 2 add_vlan 1-3
Command: config stp instance_id 2 add_vlan 1-3
Success.
To remove a VLAN ID from an MSTP instance:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config stp instance_id 2 remove_vlan 2
Command: config stp instance_id 2 remove_vlan 2
Success.
885

®
93-7 delete stp instance_id

Description
This command is used to delete an MST Instance.
Format
delete stp instance_id <value 1-15>
Parameters
Restrictions
Example
To delete an MSTP instance:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete stp instance_id 2
Command: delete stp instance_id 2
Success.
93-8 config stp mst_config_id

Description
This command is used to change the name or the revision level of the MST configuration
identification.
Format
config stp mst_config_id {revision_level <int 0-65535> | name <string>}
Parameters
name - (Optional) Specify the name given for a specific MST region.
<string> - Enter the MST region name here.
revision_level - (Optional) The same given name with different revision level also represents
different MST regions.
<int 0-65535> - Enter the revision level here. This value must be between 0 and 65535.
Restrictions
886

®
Example
To change the name and revision level of the MST configuration identification:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config stp mst_config_id name R&D_BlockG revision_level 1
Command: config stp mst_config_id name R&D_BlockG revision_level 1
Success.
93-9 show stp mst_config_id

Description
This command is used to show the MST configuration identification.
Format
show stp mst_config_id
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
show STP MST configuration ID:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show stp mst_config_id
Command: show stp mst_config_id
Current MST Configuration Identification

----------------------------------------
Configuration Name : 00-22-22-22-22-00 Revision Level :0

MSTI ID Vid list
------- -----------
CIST 1-4094
93-10 config stp mst_ports

Description
This command is used to configure the ports management parameters.
887

®
Format
config stp mst_ports <portlist> instance_id <value 0-15> {internalCost [auto | <value 1-
200000000>] | priority <value 0-240>}
Parameters
mst_ports - Specify to be distinguished from the parameters of ports only at CIST level.
instance_id - Specify the instance ID used.
<value 0-15> - Enter the instance ID used here. This value must be between 0 and 15.
internalCost - (Optional) Specify the port path cost used in MSTP.
auto - Specify that the internal cost value will be set to auto.
<value 1-200000000> - Enter the internal cost value here. This value must be between 1 and
200000000.
priority - (Optional) Specify the port priority value.
<value 0-240> - Enter the port priority value here. This value must be between 0 and 240.
Restrictions
Example
To configure STP MST ports:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config stp mst_ports 1:1 instance_id 0 internalCost auto
Command: config stp mst_ports 1:1 instance_id 0 internalCost auto
Success.
93-11 config stp ports

Description
This command is used to configure all the parameters of ports, except for Internal Path Cost and
Port Priority.
Format
config stp ports <portlist> {externalCost [auto | <value 1-200000000>] | hellotime <value 1-
2> | migrate [yes | no] | edge [true | false | auto] | p2p [true | false | auto] | state [enable |
disable]| restricted_role [true | false] | restricted_tcn [true | false] | fbpdu [enable | disable]}
Parameters
external_cost - (Optional) The path cost between MST regions from the transmitting Bridge to
the CIST Root Bridge. It is only used at CIST level.
auto - Specify that the external cost value will be set to automatic.
<value 1-200000000> - Enter the external cost value here. This value must be between 1 and
200000000.
888

®
hellotime - (Optional) The default value is 2 . This parameter is for MSTP version. For STP and
RSTP version, uses the per system hellotime parameter.
<value 1-2> - Enter the hello time value here. This value must be between 1 and 2.
migrate - (Optional) Operation of management in order to specify the port to send MSTP BPDU
for a delay time.
yes - Specify that the MSTP BPDU for a delay time will be sent.
no - Specify that the MSTP BPDU for a delay time will not be sent.
edge - (Optional) To decide if this port is connected to a LAN or a Bridged LAN.
true - Specify that the specified port(s) is edge.
false - Specify that the specified port(s) is not edge.
auto - In auto mode, the bridge will delay for a period to become edge port if no bridge BPUD
is received. The default is auto mode.
p2p - (Optional) To decide if this port is in Full-Duplex or Half-Duplex mode.
true - Specify that the port(s) is in Full-Duplex mode.
false - Specify that the port(s) is in Half-Duplex mode.
auto - Specify that the port(s) is in Full-Duplex and Half-Duplex mode.
state - (Optional) To decide if this port supports the STP functionality.
enable - Specify that STP functionality on the port(s) is enabled.
disable - Specify that STP functionality on the port(s) is disabled.
restricted_role - (Optional) To decide if this port not to be selected as Root Port. The default
value is false.
true - Specify that the port cannot be specified as the root port.
false - Specify that the port can be specified as the root port.
restricted_tcn - (Optional) To decide if this port not to propagate topology change. The default
value is false.
true - Specify that the port cannot be set to propagate a topology change.
false - Specify that the port can be set to propagate a topology change.
fbpdu - (Optional) To decide if this port will flood STP BPDU when STP functionality is disabled.
When the state is set to enable, the received BPDU will be forwarded. When the state is set to
disable, the received BPDU will be dropped.
enable - Specify that the port can be set to flood the STP BPDU when the STP functionality is
disabled.
disable - Specify that the port can not be set to flood the STP BPDU when the STP
functionality is disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To configure STP ports:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config stp ports 1:1 externalCost auto
Command: config stp ports 1:1 externalCost auto
Success.
93-12 show stp ports

Description
This command is used to show the port information includes parameters setting and operational
value.
889

®
Format
show stp ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
ports - To show parameters of the designated port numbers, to be distinguished from showing
parameters of the bridge.
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a list of ports used for the configuration here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show STP ports:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show stp ports
Command: show stp ports
MSTP Port Information

----------------------
Port Index : 1:1 , Hello Time: 2 /2 , Port STP : Enabled ,
External PathCost : Auto/200000 , Edge Port : False/No , P2P : Auto /Yes
Port RestrictedRole : False, Port RestrictedTCN : False
Port Forward BPDU : Disabled
MSTI Designated Bridge Internal PathCost Prio Status Role
----- ------------------ ----------------- ---- ---------- ----------
0 8000/000102030400 200000 128 Forwarding Designated
2 N/A 200000 128 Forwarding NonStp
93-13 config stp priority

Description
This command is used to configure the instance priority.
Format
config stp priority <value 0-61440> instance_id <value 0-15>
Parameters
priority - Specify the bridge priority value. This value must be divisible by 4096.
890

®
<value 0-61440> - Enter the bridge priority value here. This value must be between 0 and
61440.
instance_id - Identifier to distinguish different STP instances.
<value 0-15> - Enter the STP instance ID here. This value must be between 0 and 15.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the STP instance ID:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config stp priority 61440 instance_id 0
Command: config stp priority 61440 instance_id 0
Success.
93-14 config stp trap

Description
This command is used to enable or disable sending STP traps.
Format
config stp trap {topo_change [disable | enable] | new_root [enable | disable]}
Parameters
topo_change - Specify enable or disable sending topology change traps.
disable - Disable sending topology change traps.
enable - Enable sending topology change traps.
new_root - Specify enable or disable sending new root traps.
enable - Enable sending new root traps.
disable - Disable sending new root traps.
Restrictions
Example
To disable sending new root traps:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config stp trap new_root disable
Command: config stp trap new_root disable
891

®
93-15 config stp version

Description
This command is used to configure the STP version.
Format
config stp version [mstp | rstp | stp]
Parameters
version - To decide to run under which version of STP.
mstp - Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol.
rstp - Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.
stp - Spanning Tree Protocol.
Restrictions
Example
To configure STP version:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config stp version mstp
Command: config stp version mstp
Success.
To config STP version with the same value of old configuration:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config stp version mstp
Command: config stp version mstp
Configure value is the same with current value.

Success.
93-16 show stp instance

Description
This command is used to display each instance parameters settings. Value means the instance ID,
if there is no input of this value, all instance will be shown.
Format
show stp instance {<value 0-15>}
892

®
Parameters
instance - Specify the MSTP instance ID.
<value 0-15> - (Optional) Enter the MSTP instance ID value here. This value must be
between 0 and 15.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show STP instance:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show stp instance
Command: show stp instance
STP Instance Settings

---------------------------
Instance Type : CIST
Instance Status : Enabled
Instance Priority : 32768(bridge priority : 32768, sys ID ext : 0 )
STP Instance Operational Status

--------------------------------
Designated Root Bridge : 32768/00-22-22-22-22-00
External Root Cost : 0
Regional Root Bridge : 32768/00-22-22-22-22-00
Internal Root Cost : 0
Designated Bridge : 32768/00-22-22-22-22-00
Root Port : None
Max Age : 20
Forward Delay : 15
Last Topology Change : 2430
Topology Changes Count : 0
893

®
Chapter 94 Surveillance VLAN

Command List
enable surveillance_vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]
disable surveillance_vlan
config surveillance_vlan priority <int 0-7>
config surveillance_vlan oui [add | delete] <macaddr> <macmask> {component_type [vms |
vms_client | video_encoder | network_storage | other] description <desc 32>}
config surveillance_vlan ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
config surveillance_vlan aging_time <min 1-65535>
config surveillance_vlan log state [enable | disable]
show surveillance_vlan {oui | ports {<portlist>} | device {ports <portlist>}}
94-1 enable surveillance_vlan

Description
This command is used to enable surveillance VLAN globally. To enable the surveillance VLAN, a
name must be assigned to the sureveillance VLAN, and there must be an existing static 802.1Q
VLAN. To change the surveillance VLAN ID, the surveillance VLAN function has to be disabled
and then re-issue the enable command.
Format
enable surveillance_vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Specify the name of surveillance VLAN.
vlanid - Specify the ID of surveillance VLAN.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the ID of surveillance VLAN.
Restrictions
Example
To enable a surveillance VLAN with the name “v2”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable surveillance_vlan v2
Command: enable surveillance_vlan v2
Success.
894

®
94-2 disable surveillance_vlan

Description
This command is used to disable surveillance VLAN globally.
Format
disable surveillance_vlan
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable the surveillance VLAN:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable surveillance_vlan
Command: disable surveillance_vlan
Success.
94-3 config surveillance_vlan priority

Description
This command is used to configure the surveillance VLAN priority which is associated with the
surveillance VLAN traffic to distinguish the QoS of the surveillance traffic from the data traffic.
Format
config surveillance_vlan priority <int 0-7>
Parameters
<int 0-7> - Enter the priority of the surveillance VLAN. The range is from 0 to 7. The default
priority is 5.
Restrictions
Example
To set the priority of the surveillance VLAN to be 6:
895

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config surveillance_vlan priority 6

Command: config surveillance_vlan priority 6
Success.
94-4 config surveillance_vlan oui

Description
This command is used to configure the user-defined surveillance traffic OUI. OUI is used by the
Switch to identify the surveillance traffic packets. Apart from the pre-defined OUIs, the user can
further create user-defined OUI if needed. A user-defined OUI cannot be the same as any of the
pre-defined OUI.
Format
config surveillance_vlan oui [add | delete] <macaddr> <macmask> {component_type [vms |
vms_client | video_encoder | network_storage | other] description <desc 32>}
Parameters
add - Specify to add a user-defined OUI of a surveillance device vendor.
delete - Specify to remove a user-defined OUI of a surveillance device vendor.
<macaddr> - The user-defined OUI MAC address.
<macmask> - The user-defined OUI MAC address mask.
component_type - (Optional) Specify the surveillance components that could be auto-detected
by surveillance VLAN.
vms - Specify the Video Manage Server (VMS) to be auto-detected by surveillance VLAN.
vms_client - Specify the VMS client to be auto-detected by surveillance VLAN.
video_encoder - Specify the video encoder to be auto-detected by surveillance VLAN.
network_storage - Specify the network storage to be auto-detected by surveillance VLAN.
other - Specify other surveillance devices to be auto-detected by surveillance VLAN.
description - Specify the description for the user-defined OUI.
<desc 32> - Enter the description.
Restrictions
Example
To add a user-defined OUI of a surveillance device:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config surveillance_vlan oui add AA-BB-CC-DD-EF-FF FF-FF-FF-
00-00-00 component_type other description abc
Command: config surveillance_vlan oui add AA-BB-CC-DD-EF-FF FF-FF-FF-00-00-00
component_type other description abc
Success.
896

®
94-5 config surveillance_vlan ports

Description
This command is used to configure the surveillance VLAN state on the specific ports.
Format
config surveillance_vlan ports [<portlist> | all] state [enable | disable]
Parameters
<portlist> - Enter a list of ports to be configured.
state - The state of the surveillance VLAN function on the specified ports.
enable - Specify to enable surveillance VLAN function on the specified ports.
disable - Specify to disable surveillance VLAN function on the specified ports.
Restrictions
Example
To configure Surveillance VLAN to the enabled state on ports 4-6 of unit 1:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config surveillance_vlan ports 1:4-1:6 state enable
Command: config surveillance_vlan ports 1:4-1:6 state enable
Success.
94-6 config surveillance_vlan aging_time

Description
This command is used to set the aging time of the surveillance VLAN. The aging time is used to
remove a port from the surveillance VLAN if the port is an automatic surveillance VLAN member.
When the last surveillance device stops sending traffic and the MAC address of this surveillance
device is aged out, the surveillance VLAN aging timer will be started. The port will be removed
from the surveillance VLAN after expiration of surveillance VLAN aging timer. If the surveillance
traffic resumes during the aging time, the aging timer will be reset and stopped.
Format
config surveillance_vlan aging_time <min 1-65535>
Parameters
<min 1-65535> - Specify the aging time. The range is from 1 to 65535 minutes. The default value
is 720.
897

®
Restrictions
Example
To set the aging time of the surveillance VLAN to 60 minutes:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config surveillance_vlan aging_time 60
Command: config surveillance_vlan aging_time 60
Success.
94-7 config surveillance_vlan log state

Description
This command is used to configure the log state of the surveillance VLAN.
Format
config surveillance_vlan log state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Specify to enable the log state of the surveillance VLAN.
disable - Specify to disable the log state of the surveillance VLAN.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the log state of the surveillance VLAN:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config surveillance_vlan log state enable
Command: config surveillance_vlan log state enable
Success.
94-8 show surveillance_vlan

Description
This command is used to display the surveillance VLAN information.
898

®
Format
show surveillance_vlan {oui | ports {<portlist>} | device {ports <portlist>}}
Parameters
oui - (Optional) The OUI information of the surveillance VLAN.
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a range of ports to be displayed.
device - (Optional) The Surveillance devices that are learned through their OUI.
<portlist> - Enter a range of ports to be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the surveillance VLAN global information when surveillance VLAN is enabled:
GS-3120-24TC:admin#show surveillance_vlan
Command: show surveillance_vlan
Surveillance VLAN State : Enabled

VLAN ID : 2
VLAN Name : v2
Priority : 6
Aging Time : 60 minutes
Log State : Enabled
Member Ports :
Dynamic Member Ports :
899

®
Chapter 95 sFlow Command List (RI

and EI Mode Only)
create sflow flow_sampler ports [<portlist> | all] analyzer_server_id <value 1-4> {rate <value 0-
65535> | maxheadersize <value 18-256>}
config sflow flow_sampler ports [<portlist> | all] {rate <value 0-65535> | maxheadersize <value
18-256>}
delete sflow flow_sampler ports [<portlist> | all]
create sflow counter_poller ports [<portlist> | all] analyzer_server_id <value 1-4> {interval
[disable | <sec 20-120>]}
config sflow counter_poller ports [<portlist> | all] interval [disable | <sec 20-120>]
delete sflow counter_poller ports [<portlist> | all]
create sflow analyzer_server <value 1-4> owner <name 16> {timeout [<sec 1-2000000> |
infinite] | collectoraddress <ipaddr> | collectorport <udp_port_number 1-65535> |
maxdatagramsize <value 300-1400>}
config sflow analyzer_server <value 1-4> {timeout [<sec 1-2000000> | infinite] | collectoraddress
<ipaddr> | collectorport <udp_port_number 1-65535> | maxdatagramsize <value 300-1400>}
delete sflow analyzer_server <value 1-4>
enable sflow
disable sflow
show sflow
show sflow flow_sampler
show sflow counter_poller
show sflow analyzer_server
95-1 create sflow flow_sampler

Description
This command is used to create the sFlow flow sampler. By configuring the sampling function for a
port, a sample packet received by this port will be encapsulated and forwarded to analyzer server
at the specified interval.
Format
create sflow flow_sampler ports [<portlist> | all] analyzer_server_id <value 1-4> {rate <value
0-65535> | maxheadersize <value 18-256>}
Parameters
ports - Specify the list of ports to be configured.
analyzer_server_id - Specify the ID of a server analyzer where the packet will be forwarded.
<value 1-4> - Enter the analyzer server ID here. This value must be between 1 and 4.
rate - (Optional) The sampling rate for packet Rx sampling. The configured rate value multiplied
by x is the actual rate, where the x is project dependent with the default value 256. If set to 0,
the sampler is disabled. If the rate is not specified, its default value is 0.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the sampling rate value here. This value must be between 0 and
65535.
maxheadersize - (Optional) The maximum number of leading bytes in the packet which has
900

®
been sampled that will be encapsulated and forwarded to the server. If not specified, the
<value 18-256> - Enter the maximum header size here. This value must be between 18 and
256.
Restrictions
Example
Create sFlow flow sampler:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create sflow flow_sampler ports 1 analyzer_server_id 1
rate 1 maxheadersize 18
Command: create sflow flow_sampler ports 1 analyzer_server_id 1 rate 1
maxheadersize 18
Success.
95-2 config sflow flow_sampler

Description
This command is used to configure the sFlow flow sampler parameters. In order to change the
analyzer_server_id, delete the flow_sampler first and create a new one.
Format
config sflow flow_sampler ports [<portlist> | all] {rate <value 0-65535> | maxheadersize
<value 18-256>}
Parameters
rate - (Optional) The sampling rate for packet Rx sampling. The configured rate value multiplied
by x is the actual rate, where the x is project dependent with the default value 256. If set to 0,
the sampler is disabled. If the rate is not specified, its default value is 0.
<value 0-65535> - Enter the sampling rate value here. This value must be between 0 and
65535.
maxheadersize - (Optional) The maximum number of leading bytes in the packet which has
been sampled that will be encapsulated and forwarded to the server. If not specified, the
<value 18-256> - Enter the maximum header size value here. This value must be between 18
and 256.
Restrictions
901

®
Example
Configure the sFlow sampler the rate of port 1 to be 0:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config sflow flow_sampler ports 1:1 rate 0 maxheadersize 18
Command: config sflow flow_sampler ports 1:1 rate 0 maxheadersize 18
Success.
95-3 delete sflow flow_sampler

Description
This command is used to delete the sFlow flow sampler.
Format
delete sflow flow_sampler ports [<portlist> | all]
Parameters
Restrictions
Example
Delete the sFlow sampler port 1:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete sflow flow_sampler ports 1:1
Command: delete sflow flow_sampler ports 1:1
Success.
95-4 create sflow counter_poller

Description
This command is used to create the sFlow counter poller. The poller function instructs the Switch
to forward statistics counter information with respect to a port.
Format
create sflow counter_poller ports [<portlist> | all] analyzer_server_id <value 1-4> {interval
[disable | <sec 20-120>]}
902

®
Parameters
analyzer_server_id - The ID of a analyzer server.
<value 1-4> - Enter the analyzer server IS here. This value must be between 1 and 4.
interval - (Optional) The maximum number of seconds between successive statistics counters
information.
disable - This new sFlow counter will not export counter until the interval to be set a
appropriate value. If interval is not specified, its default value is disabled.
<sec 20-120> - Enter the maximum number of seconds between successive statistics
counters information here. This value must be between 20 and 120 seconds.
Restrictions
Example
Create sFlow counter poller, which sample port 1 to analyzer server 1:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create sflow counter_poller ports 1:1 analyzer_server_id 1
Command: create sflow counter_poller ports 1:1 analyzer_server_id 1
Success.
95-5 config sflow counter_poller

Description
This command is used to configure the sFlow counter poller parameters. If the user wants the
change the analyzer_server_id, he needs to delete the counter_poller and creates a new one.
Format
config sflow counter_poller ports [<portlist> | all] interval [disable | <sec 20-120>]
Parameters
interval - The maximum number of seconds between successive samples of the counters.
disable - Stop exporting counter.
<sec 20-120> - Enter the maximum number of seconds between successive samples of the
counters here. This value must be between 20 and 120.
Restrictions
903

®
Example
Configure the interval of sFlow counter poller port 1 to be 0:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config sflow counter_poller ports 1:1 interval disable
Command: config sflow counter_poller ports 1:1 interval disable
Success.
95-6 delete sflow counter_poller

Description
This command is used to delete the sFlow counter poller from the specified port.
Format
delete sflow counter_poller ports [<portlist> | all]
Parameters
ports - Specify the list of ports to delete the counter poller.
Restrictions
Example
Delete sFlow counter poller on port 1:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete sflow counter_poller ports 1:1
Command: delete sflow counter_poller ports 1:1
Success.
95-7 create sflow analyzer_server

Description
This command is used to create the analyzer server. You can specify more than one
analyzer_server with the same IP address but with different UDP port numbers. You can have up
to four unique combinations of IP address and UDP port number.
904

®
Format
create sflow analyzer_server <value 1-4> owner <name 16> {timeout [<sec 1-2000000> |
infinite] | collectoraddress <ipaddr> | collectorport <udp_port_number 1-65535> |
maxdatagramsize <value 300-1400>}
Parameters
analyzer_server - The ID of analyzer server.
<value 1-4> - Enter the analyzer server ID here.
owner - The entity making use of this sFlow analyzer_server. When owner is set or modified, the
timeout value will become 400 automatically.
<name 16> - Enter the owner name here. This name can be up to 16 characters long.
timeout - (Optional) The seconds to wait before the server is timed out. When the analyzer
server times out, all of the flow_samplers and counter_pollers associated with this analyzer
server will be deleted. The default value is 400 seconds.
<sec 1-2000000> - Enter the time-out value here. This value must be between 1 and 2000000
seconds.
infinite - Indicates the analyzer server never timeout.
collectoraddress - (Optional) The IP address of the analyzer server. If this is set to 0 or not
specified, the IP address is 0 and the entry is not active.
<ipaddr> - Enter the IP address used for the configuration here.
collectorport - (Optional) The destination UDP port for sending the sFlow datagram. If not
specified, the default value is 6364. The specified UDP port number can NOT conflict with
other applications.
<udp_port_number 1-65535> - Enter the destination UDP port number here. This value must
maxdatagramsize - (Optional) The maximum number of data bytes that can be packed in a
single sample datagram. If not specified, the default value is 1400 bytes.
<value 300-1400> - Enter the maximum datagram size here. This value must be between 300
and 1400.
Restrictions
Example
To create the analyzer server:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create sflow analyzer_server 2 owner monitor timeout
infinite collectoraddress 10.0.0.1 collectorport 65524 maxdatagramsize 300
Command: create sflow analyzer_server 2 owner monitor timeout infinite
collectoraddress 10.0.0.1 collectorport 65524 maxdatagramsize 300
Success.
95-8 config sflow analyzer_server

Description
This command is used to configure the receiver information. You can specify more than one
collector with the same IP address if the UDP port numbers are unique.
905

®
Format
config sflow analyzer_server <value 1-4> {timeout [<sec 1-2000000> | infinite] |
collectoraddress <ipaddr> | collectorport <udp_port_number 1-65535> | maxdatagramsize
<value 300-1400>}
Parameters
analyzer_server - The ID of analyzer server.
<value 1-4> - Enter the analyzer server ID here. This value must be between 1 and 4.
timeout - (Optional) The time (in seconds) remaining before the sample is released and stops
sampling. When the analyzer_server times out, all of the flow_samplers and counter_pollers
associated with this analyzer_server will be deleted.
<sec 1-2000000> - Enter the time-out value here. This value must be between 1 and 2000000
seconds.
infinity - Indicates the analyzer server never timeout
collectoraddress - (Optional) The IP address of the server. If not specified or set a 0 address,
sFlow packets will not be sent to this server.
collectorport - (Optional) The destination UDP port for sending the sFlow datagram. If not
specified, the default value is 6364
<udp_port_number 1-65535> - Enter the destination port number here. This value must be
maxdatagramsize - (Optional) The maximum number of data bytes that can be packed in a
single sample datagram. If not specified, the default value is 1400 bytes.
<value 300-1400> - Enter the maximum datagram size here. This value must be between 300
and 1400.
Restrictions
Example
Configure the host 10.90.90.90 to be the sFlow analyzer server with the ID 1:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config sflow analyzer_server 1 collectoraddress
10.90.90.90
Command: config sflow analyzer_server 1 collectoraddress 10.90.90.90
Success.
95-9 delete sflow_analyzer_server

Description
This command is used to delete a specified analyzer server.
Format
delete sflow analyzer_server <value 1-4>
906

®
Parameters
analyzer_server - The ID of analyzer server that to be deleted.
<value 1-4> - Enter the analyzer server ID value here. This value must be between 1 and 4.
Restrictions
Example
To delete an analyzer server:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete sflow analyzer_server 1
Command: delete sflow analyzer_server 1
Success.
95-10 enable sflow

Description
This command is used to enable the sFlow function on the Switch.
Format
enable sflow
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
Enable sFlow globally:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable sflow
Command: enable sflow
Success.
907

®
95-11 disable sflow

Description
This command is used to disable the sFlow function on the Switch.
Format
disable sflow
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
Disable the sFlow globally:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable sflow
Command: disable sflow
Success.
95-12 show sflow

Description
This command is used to show the sFlow information.
sFlow Address: The IPv4 address associated with this agent.
sFlow State: The current state of the sFlow agent.
Format
show sflow
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
908

®
Example
To show the sFlow information:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show sflow
Command: show sflow
sFlow Version : V5
sFlow Address : 10.90.90.90
sFlow State : Disabled
95-13 show sflow flow_sampler

Description
This command is used to show the sFlow flow sampler configured for ports. The actual value rate
is 256 times the displayed rate value. There are two types of rates. The Configured Rate is
configured by the user. In order to limit the number of packets sent to the CPU when the rate of
traffic to the CPU is high, the sampling rate will be decreased. This is specified as the active rate.
Format
show sflow flow_sampler
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the sFlow flow sampler information of ports which have been created:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show sflow flow_sampler
Command: show sflow flow_sampler
Port Analyzer Server ID Configured Rate Active Rate Max Header Size
---- ------------------ --------------- ----------- ---------------
1:1 1 0 0 18
Total Entries: 1
909

®
95-14 show sflow counter_poller

Description
This command is used to display the sFlow counter pollers which have been configured for port.
Format
show sflow counter_poller
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the sFlow counter poller information of ports which have been created:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show sflow counter_poller
Command: show sflow counter_poller
Port Analyzer Server ID Polling Interval (sec)

---- ------------------ -----------------------
1:1 1 Disable
Total Entries: 1
95-15 show sflow analyzer_server

Description
This command is used to show the sFlow analyzer server information. The Timeout field specifies
the time configured by user. The Current Countdown Time is the current time remaining before the
server timeout.
Format
show sflow analyzer_server
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
910

®
Example
To show the sFlow flow sampler information of ports which have been created:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show sflow analyzer_server
Command: show sflow analyzer_server
sFlow Analyzer_server Information

------------------------------
Server ID : 1
Owner : sflow
Timeout : 400
Current Countdown Time: 400
Collector Address : 10.90.90.90
Collector Port : 6343
Max Datagram Size : 1400
Server ID : 2
Owner : monitor
Timeout : Infinite
Current Countdown Time: Infinite
Collector Address : 10.0.0.1
Collector Port : 65524
Max Datagram Size : 300
Total Entries: 2
911

®
Chapter 96 Show Technical Support

Command List
show tech_support
upload tech_support_toTFTP <ipaddr> <path_filename 64>
96-1 show tech_support

Description
This command is especially used by the technical support personnel to dump the device overall
operation information. The information is project dependent and includes the following information.
• Basic System information
• System log
• Running configuration
• Layer 1 information
• Application
• OS status
• Controller’s status
This command can be interrupted by Ctrl - C or ESC when it is executing.
Format
show tech_support
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To show the information of technique’s support:
912

®
DES-3200-28P:admin#show tech_support
Command: show tech_support
#------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
# DGS-3120-24TC Gigabit Ethernet Switch
# Technical Support Information
#
# Firmware: Build 3.00.522
# Copyright(C) 2013 D-Link Corporation. All rights reserved.
#------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
******************** Basic System Information ********************
[SYS 2000-2-10 04:41:21]
Boot Time : 10 Feb 2000 04:32:32

RTC Time : 2000/02/10 04:41:21
Boot PROM Version : Build 3.00.501
Firmware Version : Build 3.00.522
Hardware Version : B1
Serial number : PVT93CB000001
MAC Address : 00-01-02-03-04-00
MAC Address Number : 65535
[STACKING 2000-2-10 04:41:21]
#Topology Information
Stable Topology:
My Box ID : 1 Role : Master
Box Cnt : 1 Topology Type : Duplex Chain
Unit Prio- Device Runtime Stacking
ID rity Role MAC Type option version version
----- ---- ------- ----------------- ---------- ------ --------- -------
1 32 32 Master 00-01-02-03-04-00 DGS-3120-24TC 0x0002 3.00.006 2.0.1
2 NOT EXIST
3 NOT EXIST
4 NOT EXIST
5 NOT EXIST
6 NOT EXIST
*(S) means static box ID
Temporary Topology:
Stable Cnt : 48 Hot Swap Type : Stable
Box Cnt : 1 Topology Type : Duplex Chain
913

®
96-2 upload tech_support_toTFTP

Description
This command is used to upload the information of technique’s support to TFTP server. The
information is project dependent and includes the following information.
• Basic System information
• System log
• Running configuration
• Application
• OS status
• Controller’s status
This command can be interrupted by Ctrl - C or ESC when it is executing.
Format
upload tech_support_toTFTP <ipaddr> <path_filename 64>
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Specify the IP address of TFTP server.
<path_filename 64> - Specify the file name to store the information of technique’s support in
TFTP server. The max size of the file name is 64.
Restrictions
Example
To upload the information of technique’s support:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#upload tech_support_toTFTP 10.0.0.66 tech_report.txt
Command: upload tech_support_toTFTP 10.0.0.66 tech_report.txt

Upload techsupport file................ Done.
Success.
914

®
Chapter 97 Simple Mail Transfer

Protocol (SMTP) Command
List
enable smtp
disable smtp
config smtp {server <ipaddr> | server_port <port_number 1-65535> | self_mail_addr <mail_addr
254> | [add mail_receiver <mail_addr 254> | delete mail_receiver <index 1-8>]}(1)
show smtp
smtp send_testmsg
97-1 enable smtp

Description
This command is used to enable the SMTP status.
Format
enable smtp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable SMTP status:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable smtp
Command: enable smtp
Success.
97-2 disable smtp

Description
This command is used to disable SMTP status.
915

®
Format
disable smtp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable SMTP status:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable smtp
Command: disable smtp
Success.
97-3 config smtp

Description
This command is used to configure SMTP settings.
Format
config smtp {server <ipaddr> | server_port <port_number 1-65535> | self_mail_addr
<mail_addr 254> | [add mail_receiver <mail_addr 254> | delete mail_receiver <index 1-8>]}(1)
Parameters
server - Specify the SMTP server IP address.
<ipaddr> - Enter the SMTP server IP address
server_port - Specify the SMTP server port.
<port_number 1-65535> - Enter the port number between 1 and 65535.
self_mail_addr - Specify the sender’s mail address.
<mail_addr 254> - Enter the mail address with maximum of 254 characters.
add mail_receiver – Specify to add mail receiver’s address.
<mail_addr 254> - Enter the mail address with maximum of 254 characters.
delete mail_receiver – Specify to delete mail receiver’s address.
<index 1-8> - Enter the mail address with maximum of 254 characters.
Restrictions
916

®
Example
To configure an SMTP server IP address:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config smtp server 172.18.208.9
Command: config smtp server 172.18.208.9
Success.
To configure an SMTP server port:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config smtp server_port 25
Command: config smtp server_port 25
Success.
To configure a mail source address:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config smtp self_mail_addr [email protected]
Command: config smtp self_mail_addr [email protected]
Success.
To add a mail destination address:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config smtp add mail_receiver [email protected]
Command: config smtp add mail_receiver [email protected]
Success.
To delete a mail destination address:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config smtp delete mail_receiver 1
Command: config smtp delete mail_receiver 1
Success.
97-4 show smtp

Description
This command is display the current SMTP information.
917

®
Format
show smtp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the current SMTP information:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show smtp
Command: show smtp
SMTP Status : Disabled

SMTP Server Address : 172.18.208.9
SMTP Server Port : 25
Self Mail Address : [email protected]
Index Mail Receiver Address

----- -----------------------------------------------------------------------
1 [email protected]
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
97-5 smtp send_testmsg

Description
This command is used to test whether the SMTP server can be reached.
Format
smtp send_testmsg
Parameters
None.
918

®
Restrictions
Example
To test whether the SMTP server can be reached:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#smtp send_testmsg
Command: smtp send_testmsg
Subject:e-mail heading
Content:e-mail content
Sending mail, please wait...
Success.
919

®
Chapter 98 Simple Network

Management Protocol
(SNMP) Command List
create snmp community <community_string 32> view <view_name 32> [read_only | read_write]
create snmp community_masking view <view_name 32> [ read_only | read_write]
delete snmp community <community_string 32>
show snmp community {<community_string 32>}
create snmp user <user_name 32> <groupname 32> {encrypted [by_password auth [md5
<auth_password 8-16> | sha <auth_password 8-20>] priv [none | des <priv_password 8-16>] |
by_key auth [md5 <auth_key 32-32> | sha <auth_key 40-40>] priv [none | des <priv_key 32-
32>]]}
delete snmp user <username 32>
show snmp user
create snmp group <groupname 32> [v1 | v2c | v3 [noauth_nopriv | auth_nopriv | auth_priv]]
{read_view <view_name 32> | write_view <view_name 32> | notify_view <view_name 32>}
delete snmp group <groupname 32>
show snmp groups
create snmp view <view_name 32> <oid> view_type [included | excluded]
delete snmp view <view_name 32> [all | <oid>]
show snmp view {<view_name 32>}
enable snmp
disable snmp
create snmp [host <ipaddr> | v6host <ipv6addr>] [v1 | v2c | v3 [noauth_nopriv | auth_nopriv |
auth_priv]] <auth_string 32>
delete snmp [host <ipaddr> | v6host <ipv6addr>]
show snmp
show snmp host {<ipaddr>}
show snmp v6host {<ipv6addr>}
config snmp engineID <snmp_engineID 10-64>
show snmp engineID
config snmp system_name {<sw_name>}
config snmp system_location {<sw_location>}
config snmp system_contact {<sw_contact>}
enable snmp traps
disable snmp traps
enable snmp authenticate_traps
disable snmp authenticate_traps
enable snmp linkchange_traps
disable snmp linkchange_traps
config snmp linkchange_traps ports [all | <portlist>] [enable | disable]
config snmp coldstart_traps [enable | disable]
config snmp warmstart_traps [enable | disable]
show snmp traps {linkchange_traps {ports <portlist>}}
config rmon trap {rising_alarm [enable | disable] | falling_alarm [enable | disable]} (1)
show rmon
enable community_encryption
disable community_encryption
show community_encryption
920

®
98-1 create snmp community

Description
This command is used to create an SNMP community string.
Use an SNMP community string to define the relationship between the SNMP manager and the
agent. The community string acts like a password to permit access to the agent on the Switch. You
can specify one or more of the following characteristics associated with the string:
An access list of IP addresses of the SNMP managers that are permitted to use the community
string to gain access to the agent.
A MIB view, which defines the subset of all MIB objects accessible to the given community.
Read and write or read-only permission for the MIB objects accessible to the community.
Format
create snmp community <community_string 32> view <view_name 32> [read_only |
read_write]
Parameters
community - An alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters used to authentication of users
wanting access to the Switch’s SNMP agent.
<community_string> - Enter the community string value here.
view_name - Specify to view a MIB name.
<view_name 32> - Enter the MIB view name here. This name can be up to 32 characters
long.
readonly - Allows the user using the above community string to have read only access to the
Switch’s SNMP agent.
readwrite - Allows the user using the above community string to have read and write access to
the Switch’s SNMP agent. The default read only community string is public. The default read
write community string is private.
Restrictions
Example
To create a read-only level SNMP community “System” with a “CommunityView” view:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create snmp community System view CommunityView read_only
Command: create snmp community System view CommunityView read_only
Success.
921

®
98-2 create snmp community_masking view

Description
This command is used to create a secure method to create a SNMP community string.
Format
create snmp community_masking view <view_name 32> [ read_only | read_write]
Parameters
<view_name 32> - Specify the name that is used to identify the group of MIB objects that a
remote SNMP manager is allowed to access on the Switch. The view name must exist in the
show snmp view command.
read_only - Specify that SNMP community members using the community string created can
only read the contents of the MIBs on the Switch.
read_write - Specify that SNMP community members using the community string created can
read from, and write to the contents of the MIBs on the Switch.
Restrictions
Example
To create a secure SNMP community string:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create snmp community_masking view restricted read_only
Command: create snmp community_masking view restricted read_only
Enter a case-sensitive community:*****

Enter the community again for confirmation:*****
Success.
98-3 delete snmp community

Description
This command is used to delete an SNMP community string.
Format
delete snmp community <community_string 32>
Parameters
community - Community string will be deleted.
<community_string 32> - Enter the community string value here. This value can be up to 32
characters long.
922

®
Restrictions
Example
To delete a SNMP community “System”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete snmp community System
Command: delete snmp community System
Success.
98-4 show snmp community

Description
This command is used to display the community string configurations.
Format
show snmp community <community_string 32>
Parameters
<community_string 32> - (Optional) Specify the Community string.
If not specify community string , all community string information will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display SNMP community:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show snmp community
Command: show snmp community
SNMP Community Table

Community Name View Name Access Right
------------------------------- ---------------------- ------------
private CommunityView read_write
public CommunityView read_only
Total Entries : 2
923

®
98-5 create snmp user

Description
This command is used to create a new user to an SNMP group originated by this command.
Format
create snmp user <user_name 32> <groupname 32> {encrypted [by_password auth [md5
<auth_password 8-16> | sha <auth_password 8-20>] priv [none | des <priv_password 8-16>]
| by_key auth [md5 <auth_key 32-32> | sha <auth_key 40-40>] priv [none | des <priv_key 32-
32>]]}
Parameters
<user_name 32> - The name of the user on the host that connects to the agent. The range is 1
to 32.
<groupname 32> - The name of the group to which the user is associated. The range is 1 to 32.
encrypted - (Optional) Specify whether the password appears in encrypted format.
by_password - (Optional) Indicate input password for authentication and privacy.
auth - Initiates an authentication level setting session. The options are md5 and sha.
md5 - The HMAC-MD5-96 authentication level.
<auth_password 8-16> - Enter the MD5 authentication password here. This value must
be between 8 and 16 characters.
sha - The HMAC-SHA-96 authentication level.
<auth_password 8-20> - Enter the SHA authentication password here. This value must
be between 8 and 20 characters.
priv - (Optional) A privacy key used by DES, it is hex string type.
none - Specify that no encryption will be used for the privacy key.
des - Specify that the DES encryption will be used for the privacy key.
<priv_password 8-16> - Enter the DES password value here. This value must be between
8 and 16 characters long.
by_key - (Optional) Indicate input key for authentication and privacy.
auth - An authentication string used by MD5 or SHA1.
md5 - An authentication key used by MD5, it is hex string type.
<auth_key 32-32> - Enter the MD5 authentication key here. This value must be 32
characters long.
sha - An authentication key used by SHA1, it is hex string type.
<auth_key 40-40> - Enter the SHA authentication key here. This value must be 32
characters long.
priv - (Optional) A privacy key used by DES, it is hex string type.
none - Specify that no encryption will be used for the privacy key.
des - Specify that the DES encryption will be used for the privacy key.
<priv_key 32-32> - Enter the DES privacy key here. This value must be 32 characters
long.
Restrictions
Example
To create a SNMP user “user123” with group “group123”:
924

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create snmp user user123 group123 encrypted by_password

auth md5 12345678 priv des 12345678
Command: create snmp user user123 group123 encrypted by_password auth md5
12345678 priv des 12345678
Success.
98-6 delete snmp user

Description
This command is used to remove a user from an SNMP group and delete the associated group in
SNMP group.
Format
delete snmp user <username 32>
Parameters
<username 32> - The name of the user on the host that connects to the agent. The range is 1 to
32.
Restrictions
Example
To delete a SNMP user “user123”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete snmp user user123
Command: delete snmp user user123
Success.
98-7 show snmp user

Description
This command is used to display information on each SNMP username in the group username
table.
Format
show snmp user
925

®
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show SNMP user:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show snmp user
Command: show snmp user
Username Group Name VerAuthPriv

-------------------------------- -------------------------- -----------
initial initial V3 NoneNone
user123 group123 V3 MD5 DES
Total Entries : 2
98-8 create snmp group

Description
This command is used to create a new SNMP group, or a table that maps SNMP users to SNMP
views.
Format
create snmp group <groupname 32> [v1 | v2c | v3 [noauth_nopriv | auth_nopriv | auth_priv]]
{read_view <view_name 32> | write_view <view_name 32> | notify_view <view_name 32>}
Parameters
group - Specify the name of the group.
<groupname 32> - Enter the group name here. This name can be up to 32 characters long.
v1 - The least secure of the possible security models.
v2c - The second least secure of the possible security models.
v3 - The most secure of the possible.
noauth_nopriv - Neither support packet authentication nor encrypting.
auth_nopriv - Support packet authentication.
auth_priv - Support packet authentication and encrypting.
read_view - (Optional) Specify that the view name would be read.
<view_name 32> - Enter the read view name here. This name can be up to 32 characters
long.
write_view - (Optional) Specify that the view name would be write.
<view_name 32> - Enter the wite view name here. This name can be up to 32 characters
long.
notify_view - (Optional) Specify that the view name would be notify.
<view_name 32> - Enter the notify view name here. This name can be up to 32 characters
926

®
long.
Restrictions
Example
To create SNMP group “group123”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create snmp group group123 v3 auth_priv read_view
CommunityView write_view CommunityView notify_view CommunityView
Command: create snmp group group123 v3 auth_priv read_view CommunityView
write_view CommunityView notify_view CommunityView
Success.
98-9 delete snmp group

Description
This command is used to remove a SNMP group.
Format
delete snmp group <groupname 32>
Parameters
<groupname 32> - The name of the group will be deleted.
Restrictions
Example
To delete SNMP group “group123”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete snmp group group123
Command: delete snmp group group123
Success.
927

®
98-10 show snmp groups

Description
This command is used to display the names of groups on the Switch and the security model, level,
the status of the different views.
Format
show snmp groups
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show SNMP groups:
928

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show snmp groups

Command: show snmp groups
Vacm Access Table Settings
Group Name : public

ReadView Name : CommunityView
WriteView Name :
Notify View Name : CommunityView
Securiy Model : SNMPv1
Securiy Level : NoAuthNoPriv
Group Name : public

WriteView Name :
Group Name : initial

ReadView Name : restricted
WriteView Name :
Notify View Name : restricted
Group Name : WriteGroup

WriteView Name : CommunityView
Total Entries: 10
98-11 create snmp view

Description
This command is used to assign views to community strings to limit which MIB objects an SNMP
manager can access.
Format
create snmp view <view_name 32> <oid> view_type [included | excluded]
Parameters
view - View name to be created.
<view_name 32> - Enter the view name here. The name can be up to 32 characters long.
929

®
<oid> - Object-Identified tree, MIB tree.

view_type - Specify the access type of the MIB tree in this view.
included - Includes for this view.
excluded - Excluded for this view.
Restrictions
Example
To create SNMP view “view123”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create snmp view view123 1.3.6 view_type included
Command: create snmp view view123 1.3.6 view_type included
Success.
98-12 delete snmp view

Description
This command is used to remove a view record.
Format
delete snmp view <view_name 32> [all | <oid>]
Parameters
view - View name to be deleted.
all - Specify that all view records will be removed.
<oid> - Object-Identified tree, MIB tree.
Restrictions
Example
To delete SNMP view “view123”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete snmp view view123 all
Command: delete snmp view view123 all
Success.
930

®
98-13 show snmp view

Description
This command is used to display the SNMP view record.
Format
show snmp view {<view_name 32>}
Parameters
view - (Optional) View name of the user who likes to show.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show SNMP view:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show snmp view
Command: show snmp view
Vacm View Table Settings

View Name Subtree View Type
--------------------- ------------------------ ----------
view123 1.3.6 Included
restricted 1.3.6.1.2.1.1 Included
restricted 1.3.6.1.2.1.11 Included
restricted 1.3.6.1.6.3.10.2.1 Included
CommunityView 1 Included
CommunityView 1.3.6.1.6.3 Excluded
CommunityView 1.3.6.1.6.3.1 Included
Total Entries: 9
98-14 enable snmp

Description
This command is used to enable the SNMP function.
Format
enable snmp
931

®
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable SNMP:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable snmp
Command: enable snmp
Success.
98-15 disable snmp

Description
This command is used to disable the SNMP function.
Format
disable snmp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable SNMP:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable snmp
Command: disable snmp
Success.
932

®
98-16 create snmp

Description
This command is used to create a recipient of an SNMP trap operation.
Format
create snmp [host <ipaddr> | v6host <ipv6addr>] [v1 | v2c | v3 [noauth_nopriv | auth_nopriv
| auth_priv]] <auth_string 32>
Parameters
host - Specify the recipient for which the traps are targeted.
<ipaddr> - The IP address of the recipient for which the traps are targeted.
v6host - Specify the IPv6 host address to which the trap packet will be sent.
<ipv6addr> - The IPv6 address of the recipient for which the traps are targeted.
v1 - The least secure of the possible security models.
v2c - The second least secure of the possible security models.
v3 - The most secure of the possible.
noauth_nopriv - Neither support packet authentication nor encrypting.
auth_nopriv - Support packet authentication.
auth_priv - Support packet authentication and encrypting.
<auth_string 32> - Authentication string. If the v1 or v2 is specified, the auth_string presents the
community string, and it must be one of the entries in community table. If the v3 is specified,
the auth_string presents the user name, and it must be one of the entries in the user table.
Restrictions
Example
To create SNMP host “10.0.0.1” with community string “public”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create snmp host 10.0.0.1 v1 public
Command: create snmp host 10.0.0.1 v1 public
Success.
98-17 delete snmp

Description
This command is used to delete a recipient of an SNMP trap operation.
Format
delete snmp [host <ipaddr> | v6host <ipv6addr>]
933

®
Parameters
host - The IP address of the recipient for which the traps are targeted.
v6host - The IPv6 address of the recipient for which the traps are targeted.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address used for the configuration here.
Restrictions
Example
To delete SNMP host “10.0.0.1”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete snmp host 10.0.0.1
Command: delete snmp host 10.0.0.1
Success.
98-18 show snmp

Description
This command is used to display SNMP status.
Format
show snmp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display SNMP:
934

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show snmp
Command: show snmp
System Name :
System Location :
System Contact :
SNMP Trap : Enabled
SNMP State : Enabled
98-19 show snmp host

Description
This command is used to display the recipient for which the traps are targeted.
Format
show snmp host {<ipaddr>}
Parameters
host - (Optional) The IP address of the recipient for which the traps are targeted.
If no parameter specified, all SNMP hosts will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show SNMP host:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show snmp host
Command: show snmp host
SNMP Host Table

Host IP Address SNMP Version Community Name / SNMPv3 User Name
--------------- --------------- ---------------------------------
10.90.90.3 V3 noauthnopriv initial
10.90.90.2 V2c private
10.90.90.1 V1 public
10.90.90.4 V3 authnopriv user123
10.90.90.5 V3 authpriv user234
Total Entries : 5
935

®
98-20 show snmp v6host

Description
This command is used to display the recipient for which the traps are targeted.
Format
show snmp v6host {<ipv6addr>}
Parameters
v6host - (Optional) Specify the IPv6 host address.
If no parameter specified, all SNMP hosts will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show SNMP host:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show snmp v6host
Command: show snmp v6host
SNMP Host Table

------------------------------------------------------------------
Host IPv6 Address : 3FFE::3
SNMP Version : V3 na/np
Community Name/SNMPv3 User Name : initial

SNMP Version : V2c
Community Name/SNMPv3 User Name : private

SNMP Version : V1
Community Name/SNMPv3 User Name : public

SNMP Version : V3 a/np
Community Name/SNMPv3 User Name : user123

SNMP Version : V3 a/ p
Community Name/SNMPv3 User Name : user234
Total Entries: 5
936

®
98-21 config snmp engineID

Description
This command is used to configure a identifier for the SNMP engine on the Switch.
Format
config snmp engineID <snmp_engineID 10-64>
Parameters
engineID - Identify for the SNMP engine on the Switch. It is octet string type. It accepts the hex
number directly.
<snmp_engineID 10-64> - Enter the SNMP engine ID here. This value must be between 10
and 64.
Restrictions
Example
To configure SNMP engine ID to “1023457890”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config snmp engineID 1023457890
Command: config snmp engineID 1023457890
Success.
98-22 show snmp engineID

Description
The show snmp engineID command displays the identification of the SNMP engine on the Switch.
The default value is suggested in RFC2271. The very first bit is 1, and the first four octets are set
to the binary equivalent of the agent’s SNMP management private enterprise number as assigned
by IANA, D_Link is 171. The fifth octet is 03 to indicates the rest is the MAC address of this device.
The 6th –11th octets is MAC address.
Format
show snmp engineID
Parameters
None.
937

®
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show SNMP engine ID:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show snmp engineID
Command: show snmp engineID
SNMP Engine ID : 1023457890
98-23 config snmp system_name

Description
This command is used to configure the name for the Switch.
Format
config snmp system_name {<sw_name>}
Parameters
system_name - A maximum of 128 characters is allowed. And NULL string is accepted.
<sw_name> - (Optional) Enter the system name used here.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the Switch name for “DGS-XXXXS Stackable Switch”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config snmp system_name DGS-XXXXS Stackable Switch
Command: config snmp system_name DGS-XXXXS Stackable Switch
Success.
98-24 config snmp system_location

Description
This command is used to enter a description of the location of the Switch.
938

®
Format
config snmp system_location {<sw_location>}
Parameters
system_location - A maximum of 128 characters is allowed. And NULL string is accepted
<sw_location> - (Optional) Enter the system location string here.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the Switch location for “HQ 5F”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config snmp system_location HQ 5F
Command: config snmp system_location HQ 5F
Success.
98-25 config snmp system_contact

Description
This command is used to enter the name of a contact person who is responsible for the Switch.
Format
config snmp system_contact {<sw_contact>}
Parameters
system_contact - A maximum of 128 characters is allowed. And NULL string is accepted.
<sw_contact> - (Optional) Enter the system contact string here.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the Switch contact to “MIS Department II”:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config snmp system_contact "MIS Department II"
Command: config snmp system_contact "MIS Department II"
Success.
939

®
98-26 enable snmp traps

Description
This command is used to enable SNMP trap support.
Format
enable snmp traps
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable SNMP trap support:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable snmp traps
Command: enable snmp traps
Success.
98-27 disable snmp traps

Description
This command is used to disable SNMP trap support on the Switch.
Format
disable snmp traps
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To prevent SNMP traps from being sent from the Switch:
940

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable snmp traps

Command: disable snmp traps
Success.
98-28 enable snmp authenticate_traps

Description
This command is used to enable SNMP authentication failure trap support.
Format
enable snmp authenticate_traps
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable SNMP authentication trap support:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable snmp authenticate_traps
Command: enable snmp authenticate_traps
Success.
98-29 disable snmp authenticate_traps

Description
This command is used to disable SNMP authentication failure trap support.
Format
disable snmp authenticate_traps
Parameters
None.
941

®
Restrictions
Example
To disable SNMP authentication trap support:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable snmp authenticate_traps
Command: disable snmp authenticate_traps
Success.
98-30 enable snmp linkchange_traps

Description
This command is used to configure the sending of linkchange traps.
Format
enable snmp linkchange_traps
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the sending of linkchange traps:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable snmp linkchange_traps
Command: enable snmp linkchange_traps
Success.
98-31 disable snmp linkchange_traps

Description
This command is used to configure the sending of linkchange traps.
Format
disable snmp linkchange_traps
942

®
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable the sending of linkchange traps:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable snmp linkchange_traps
Command: disable snmp linkchange_traps
Success.
98-32 config snmp linkchange_traps ports

Description
This command is used to configure the sending of linkchange traps and per port control for
sending of change trap.
Format
config snmp linkchange_traps ports [all | <portlist>] [enable | disable]
Parameters
all - To specify all ports.
<portlist> - To specify a port range.
enable - Enable sending of the link change trap for this port.
disable - Disable sending of the link change trap for this port.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the sending of linkchange traps:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config snmp linkchange_traps ports 1:1-1:4 enable
Command: config snmp linkchange_traps ports 1:1-1:4 enable
Success.
943

®
98-33 config snmp coldstart_traps

Description
This command is used to configure the trap for coldstart event.
Format
config snmp coldstart_traps [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enable the trap of the coldstart event. The default state is enabled.
disable - Disable the trap of the coldstart event.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the trap for coldstart event:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config snmp coldstart_traps enable
Command: config snmp coldstart_traps enable
Success.
98-34 config snmp warmstart_traps

Description
This command is used to configure the trap state for warmstart event.
Format
config snmp warmstart_traps [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enable the trap of the warmstart event. The default state is enabled.
disable - Disable the trap of the warmstart event.
Restrictions
944

®
Example
To configure the trap state for warmstart event:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config snmp warmstart_traps enable
Command: config snmp warmstart_traps enable
Success.
98-35 show snmp traps

Description
This command is used to display the snmp trap sending status.
Format
show snmp traps {linkchange_traps {ports <portlist>}}
Parameters
linkchange_traps - (Optional) Specify that the SNMP trap sending status will be displayed.
ports - (Optional) Specify the ports for the display.
<portlist> - Enter the list of ports used for the display here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show snmp traps

Command: show snmp traps
SNMP Traps : Enabled

Authenticate Traps : Enabled
Linkchange Traps : Enabled
Coldstart Traps : Enabled
Warmstart Traps : Enabled
98-36 config rmon trap

Description
This command is used to configure the trap state for RMON events.
945

®
Format
config rmon trap {rising_alarm [enable | disable] | falling_alarm [enable | disable]} (1)
Parameters
rising_alarm - (Optional) Specify the trap state for rising alarm. The default state is enabled.
enable - Specify that the rising alarm function will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the rising alarm function will be disabled.
falling_alarm - (Optional) Specify the trap state for falling alarm. The default state is enabled.
enable - Specify that the falling alarm function will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the falling alarm function will be disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the trap state for RMON events:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config rmon trap rising_alarm disable
Command: config rmon trap rising_alarm disable
Success.
98-37 show rmon

Description
This command is used to display the RMON related setting.
Format
show rmon
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To display the RMON related setting:
946

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show rmon

Command: show rmon
RMON Rising Alarm Trap : Enabled

RMON Falling Alarm Trap : Enabled
98-38 enable community_encryption

Description
This command is used to enable the encryption state on SNMP community string.
Format
enable community_encryption
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the encryption state on SNMP community string:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable community_encryption
Command: enable community_encryption
Success.
98-39 disable community_encryption

Description
This command is used to disable the encryption state on SNMP community string.
Format
disable community_encryption
Parameters
None.
947

®
Restrictions
Example
To disable the encryption state on SNMP community string:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable community_encryption
Command: disable community_encryption
Success.
98-40 show community_encryption

Description
This command is used to display the encryption state on SNMP community string.
Format
show community_encryption
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the encryption state on SNMP community string:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show community_encryption
Command: show community_encryption
SNMP Community Encryption State : Enabled
948

®
Chapter 99 Single IP Management

Command List
enable sim
disable sim
show sim {[candidates {<candidate_id 1-100>} | members{<member_id 1-32>} | group
{commander_mac <macaddr>} | neighbor]}
reconfig [member_id <value 1-32> | exit]
config sim_group [add <candidate_id 1-100> {<password>} | delete <member_id 1-32>]
config sim [[commander {group_name <groupname 64>} | candidate] | dp_interval <sec 30-90> |
hold_time <sec 100-255>]
download sim_ms [firmware_from_tftp | configuration_from_tftp] <ipaddr> <path_filename>
{[members <mslist 1-32> | all]}
upload sim_ms [configuration_to_tftp | log_to_tftp] <ipaddr> <path_filename> {[members <mslist>
| all]}
99-1 enable sim

Description
This command is used to configure the single IP management on the Switch as enabled.
Format
enable sim
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable SIM:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable sim
Command: enable sim
Success.
949

®
99-2 disable sim

Description
This command is used to disable single IP management on the Switch.
Format
disable sim
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable SIM:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable sim
Command: disable sim
Success.
99-3 show sim

Description
This command is used to display the current information of the specific sort of devices.
Format
show sim {[candidates {<candidate_id 1-100>} | members{<member_id 1-32>} | group
{commander_mac <macaddr>} | neighbor]}
Parameters
candidates - (Optional) Specify the candidate devices.
<candidate_id 1-100> - (Optional) Enter the candidate device ID here. This value must be
between 1 and 100.
members - (Optional) Specify the member devices.
<member_id 1-32> - (Optional) Enter the member device ID here. This value must be
between 1 and 32.
group - (Optional) Specify other group devices.
commander_mac - (Optional) Specify the commander MAC address used.
<macaddr> - Enter the commander MAC address used here.
neighbor - (Optional) Specify other neighbor devices.
950

®
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the self information in detail:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show sim
Command: show sim
SIM Version : VER-1.61

Firmware Version : 3.00.522
Device Name :
MAC Address : 00-01-02-03-04-00
Capabilities : L3
Platform : DGS-3120-24TC L3 Switch
SIM State : Enabled
Role State : Candidate
Discovery Interval : 30 sec
Hold Time : 100 sec
To show the candidate information in summary, if user specify candidate id, it would show
information in detail:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show sim candidate
Command: show sim candidate
ID MAC Address Platform / Hold Firmware Device Name

Capability Time Version
--- ----------------- ------------------------ ----- --------- ----------------
1 00-01-02-03-04-00 DES-XXXXS L2 Switch 40 1.00-B01 aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
bbbbbbbbbbbbbbb
2 00-55-55-00-55-00 DES-3326SR L3 Switch 140 4.00-B15 default master
Total Entries: 2
To show the member information in summary, if user specify member id, it will show information in
detail:
951

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show sim member

Command: show sim member

--- ----------------- ------------------------ ----- --------- ----------------
1 00-01-02-03-04-00 DES-XXXXS L2 Switch 40 1.00-B01 aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
bbbbbbbbbbbbbbb
2 00-55-55-00-55-00 DES-3326SR L3 Switch 140 4.00-B15 default master
Total Entries: 2
To show other groups information in summary, if user specify group name, it will show information
in detail:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show sim group
Command: show sim group
SIM Group Name : default

--- ----------------- ------------------------ ----- --------- ----------------
*1 00-01-02-03-04-01 DES-XXXXS L2 Switch 40 1.00-B01 aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
bbbbbbbbbbbbbbb
2 00-55-55-02-55-00
SIM Group Name : SIM2

--- ----------------- ------------------------ ----- --------- ----------------
*1 00-01-02-03-04-00 DES-XXXXS L2 Switch 40 1.00-B01 aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
bbbbbbbbbbbbbbb
2 00-55-55-00-55-00
3 00-55-55-00-55-11
'*' means commander switch.
To show neighbor table of SIM:
952

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show sim neighbor

Command: show sim neighbor
Neighbor Table
Port MAC Address Role

------ ------------------ ---------
23 00-35-26-00-11-99 Commander
23 00-35-26-00-11-91 Member
24 00-35-26-00-11-90 Candidate
Total Entries: 3
99-4 reconfig
Description
This command is used to re-telnet to member.
Format
reconfig [member_id <value 1-32> | exit]
Parameters
member_id - Specify the serial number of the member.
<value 1-32> - Enter the serial number of the member here.
exit - Specify to exit from the telnet session.
Restrictions
Example
To re-telnet to member:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# reconfig member_id 1
Command: reconfig member_id 1
Login:
99-5 config sim_group

Description
This command is used to configure group information.
953

®
Format
config sim_group [add <candidate_id 1-100> {<password>} | delete <member_id 1-32>]
Parameters
add - Specify to add a specific candidate to the group.
<candidate_id 1-100> - Enter the candidate ID to be added to the group here. This value
<password> - (Optional) The password of candidate if necessary.
delete - Specify to delete a member from the group.
<member_id 1-32> - Enter the member ID of the member to be removed from the group here.
This value must be between 1 and 32.
Restrictions
Example
To add a member:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config sim_group add 2
Command: config sim_group add 2
Please wait for ACK !!!

SIM Configure Success !!!
Success.
To delete a member:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config sim_group delete 1
Command: config sim_group delete 1
Please wait for ACK !!!

SIM Configure Success !!!
Success.
99-6 config sim

Description
This command is used to configure the role state and the parameters of the discovery protocol on
the Switch.
954

®
Format
config sim [[commander {group_name <groupname 64>} | candidate] | dp_interval <sec 30-
90> | hold_time <sec 100-255>]
Parameters
commander - Specify to transfer the role to the commander.
group_name - (Optional) Specify that if the user is the commander, the user can update the
name of group.
<groupname 64> - Enter the group name here. This name can be up to 64 characters long.
candidate - Specify to transfer the role to the candidate.
dp_interval - The time in seconds between discoveries.
<sec 30-90> - Enter the discovery time here in seconds. This value must be between 30 and
90 seconds.
hold_time - The time in seconds the device holds the discovery result.
<sec 100-255> - Enter the hold time here in seconds. This value must be between 100 and
255.
Restrictions
Only Administrator, Operator and Power-User level users can issue this command..
Example
To transfer to commander:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config sim commander
Command: config sim commander
Success.
To transfer to candidate:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config sim candidate
Command: config sim candidate
Success.
To update name of group:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config sim commander group_name mygroup
Command: config sim commander group_name mygroup
Success.
To change the time interval of discovery protocol:
955

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config sim dp_interval 30

Command: config sim dp_interval 30
Success.
To change the hold time of discovery protocol:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config sim hold_time 200
Command: config sim hold_time 200
Success.
99-7 download sim_ms

Description
This command is used to download firmware or configuration to indicated device.
Format
download sim_ms [firmware_from_tftp | configuration_from_tftp] <ipaddr> <path_filename>
{[members <mslist 1-32> | all]}
Parameters
firmware_from_tftp - Specify that the firmware will be downloaded from the TFTP server.
configuration_from_tftp - Specify that the configuration will be downloaded from the TFTP
server.
<ipaddr> - Specify the IP address of the TFTP server.
<path_filename> - Specify the file path of the firmware or configuration in the TFTP server.
members - (Optional) Specify a range of members who can download this firmware or
configuration.
<mslist 1-32> - Enter the member list used here. This value must be between 1 and 32.
all - (Optional) Specify that all members will be used.
Restrictions
Example
To download configuration:
956

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#download sim_ms configuration_from_tftp 10.55.47.1

D:\dwl600x.tfp members 1
Command: download sim_ms configuration_from_tftp 10.55.47.1 D:\dwl600x.tfp
members 1
This device is updating configuration. Please wait several minutes ...
Download Status :
ID MAC Address Result

--- ----------------- ----------------
1 00-01-02-03-04-00 Success
To download firmware:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#download sim_ms firmware_from_tftp 10.55.47.1 D:\test.txt
members 1
Command: download sim_ms firmware_from_tftp 10.55.47.1 D:\test.txt members 1
This device is updating firmware. Please wait several minutes ...
Download Status :

--- ----------------- ----------------
1 00-01-02-03-04-00 Success
99-8 upload sim_ms

Description
This command is used to upload configuration to TFTP server.
Format
upload sim_ms [configuration_to_tftp | log_to_tftp] <ipaddr> <path_filename> {[members
<mslist> | all]}
Parameters
configuration_to_tftp - Specify that the configuration will be uploaded to the TFTP server.
log_to_tftp – Specify that the log file will be uploaded to the TFTP server.
<ipaddr> - Specify the IP address of the TFTP server.
<path_filename> - Specify the file path to store the configuration in the TFTP server.
members - (Optional) Specify a range of members who can up this configuration.
<mslist> - Enter the member list used here.
all - (Optional) Specify that all members will be used.
957

®
Restrictions
Example
To upload configuration:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# upload sim_ms configuration_to_tftp 10.55.47.1
D:\configuration.txt members 1
Command: upload sim_ms configuration_to_tftp 10.55.47.1 D:\configuration.txt
members 1
This device is uploading configuration. Please wait several minutes ...
Upload Status :

--- ----------------- ----------------
1 00-1A-2D-00-12-12 Success
99-9 config sim trap

Description
This command is used to control sending of traps issued from the member switch.
Format
config sim trap [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enable the trap state.
disable - Disable the trap state.
Restrictions
Example
To enable sim trap:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config sim trap enable
Command: config sim trap enable
Success.
958

®
Chapter 100 Stacking Command List (EI

and SI Mode Only)
config box_priority current_box_id <value 1-6> priority <value 1-63>
config box_id current_box_id <value 1-6> new_box_id [auto | <value 1-6>]
show stack_information
show stack_device
config stacking_mode [disable | enable]
show stacking_mode
config stacking force_master_role state [enable | disable]
config stacking trap state [enable | disable]
config stacking log state [enable | disable]
100-1 config box_priority

Description
This command is used to configure the priority of switch, which will determines which box becomes
master. Lower number means higher priority. New priority will take effect after user reboot.
Format
config box_priority current_box_id <value 1-6> priority <value 1-63>
Parameters
current_box_id - Specify the Switch being configured. The range is 1-m, where the m.is
determined by device type. For example, to the DGS3120 Series, it is 6.
<value 1-6> - Enter the current box ID here. This value must be between 1 and 6.
priority - Specify the priority assigned to the box, with lower number meaning higher priority. The
range is 1-63.
<value 1-63> - Enter the higher priority value here. This value must be between 1 and 63.
Restrictions
Example
To configure box priority:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config box_priority current_box_id 1 priority 1
Command: config box_priority current_box_id 1 priority 1
Success.
959

®
100-2 config box_id

Description
This command is used to configure the box ID. By default, the box ID is automatically assigned by
the system based topology election results. Administrators can assign box IDs statically. The new
box ID will take effect after unit reboot. Each unit in the Switch stack must have a unique box IDs.
If the IDs duplicate, the stack system cannot stack normally.
Format
config box_id current_box_id <value 1-6> new_box_id [auto | <value 1-6>]
Parameters
current_box_id - Specify the Switch being configured. The parameter range is 1-m, where the m
is determined by device type. For example, to the DGS3120 Series, it is 6.
<value 1-6> - Enter the current box ID here. This value must be between 1 and 6.
new_box_id - Specify the new ID assigned to the box. The parameter range is 1-m.
auto - Allows the box ID to be assigned automatically by the stack system. The new box ID
will take effect after the next boot.
<value 1-6> - Enter the new box ID here. This value must be between 1 and 6.
Restrictions
Example
To configure box ID of box 1 to be auto:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config box_id current_box_id 1 new_box_id auto
Command: config box_id current_box_id 1 new_box_id auto
Success.
100-3 show stack_information

Description
This command is used to display stacking information.
There are three messages defined for stack topology status displayed by show stack_information,
beside the basic information of stack devices.
Message 1:
Stack Topology Status: Topology will change from Chain to Ring after n seconds.
When this message is shown, it means the topology change is detected; the topology change
process will take place after the count down timer reaches 0. If topology change is detected again
before the count down timer reaches 0, the count down timer will be reset.
960

®
Message 2:
Stack Topology Status: New device is detected; hot insert may happen after n seconds.
When this message is shown, it means hot insert of new device is detected. The stack system will
do the hot insert action after the timer reaches 0. If topology change is detected again before the
count down timer reaches 0, the count down timer will be reset. It is suggested for the user not to
do any command regarding read /write of flash, for example:”download firmware”,”save”,”show
config in flash”,”upload”,”copy”,”show slave’s dangerous log”.
Message 3:
Stack Topology Status: Configuring the new device.
When this message is shown, it means stacking has started to do the hot insert action. Now the
system is configuring the new device, and the user can not execute any command except “show
stack_ information”.
If no message shown means the topology is stable and the system operation is normally.
Format
show stack_information
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To display the stack information:
961

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show stack_information
Command: show stack_information
Topology : Duplex_Chain
My Box ID : 1
Master ID : 1
Box Count : 1
Force Master Role : Disable

Trap State : Enabled
Log State : Enabled
Box User Prio- Prom Runtime H/W

ID Set Type Exist rity MAC version version version
--- ---- ----------------- ----- --- ----------------- -------- --------- ------
1 Auto DGS-3120-24TC Exist 1 00-01-02-03-04-00 3.00.501 3.00.522 B1
2 - NOT_EXIST No
3 - NOT_EXIST No
4 - NOT_EXIST No
5 - NOT_EXIST No
6 - NOT_EXIST No
100-4 show stack_device

Description
This command is used to display the information for devices in the stack.
Format
show stack_device
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the stack information:
962

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show stack_device
Command: show stack_device
Box ID Box Type H/W Version Serial Number

------ ---------------- ----------- --------------------
1 DGS-3120-24TC B1 PVT93CB000001
100-5 config stacking_mode

Description
This command is used to configure the state of stacking function. By default stacking mode is
enabled. Administrators need to specifically configure the stacking mode to make the Switch
stackable. Stacking mode can be changed under standalone mode only.
Format
config stacking_mode [disable | enable]
Parameters
stacking_mode - Enable or disable the Switch’s stacking capability.
enable - Specify that the Switch's stacking capabilty will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the Switch's stacking capabilty will be disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To enable stacking mode:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config stacking_mode enable
Command: config stacking_mode enable
Change Box stacking_mode may cause devices work restart, still continue?(y/n)
y
Please wait, the switch is rebooting...
100-6 show stacking_mode

Description
This command is used to display the current stacking mode.
Format
show stacking_mode
963

®
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To display stacking mode:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show stacking_mode
Command: show stacking_mode
Stacking mode : Enabled
100-7 config stacking force_master_role

Description
This command is used to configure the stacking force master role state. If the state is enabled,
when device is in election state, it still uses old priority setting and MAC to compare device priority.
After stacking is stable, master’s priority will become zero. If stacking topology change again,
Master will use priority zero and MAC address to determine who new primary master is.
Format
config stacking force_master_role state [enable | disable]
Parameters
force_master_role - Enable or disable the Switch’s Stacking Force Master Role state. Default
setting is disabled.
enable - Specify that switch's stacking force master role will be enabled.
disable - Specify that switch's stacking force master role will be disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To enable stacking force master role state:
964

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config stacking force_master_role state enable

Command: config stacking force_master_role state enable
Success.
100-8 config stacking trap state

Description
This command is used to configure trap state for stacking.
Format
config stacking trap state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enable the Switch’s stacking trap.
disable - Disable the Switch’s stacking trap.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the stacking trap state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config stacking trap state enable
Command: config stacking trap state enable
Success.
100-9 config stacking log state

Description
This command is used to configure log state for stacking.
Format
config stacking log state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Enable the Switch’s stacking log.
disable - Disable the Switch’s stacking log.
965

®
Restrictions
Example
To enable the stacking log state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config stacking log state enable
Command: config stacking log state enable
Success.
966

®
Chapter 101 Static Multicast Route

Only)
create ipmroute <network_address> rpf_address [<ipaddr> | null]
delete ipmroute [<network_address> | all]
show ipmroute {<network_address>}
101-1 create ipmroute

Description
This command is used to create a static multicast route entry on the Switch.
Format
create ipmroute <network_address> rpf_address [<ipaddr> | null]
Parameters
<network_address> - Specify the network address of the static multicast route entry that is
created on the Switch.If the source IP address of the received IP multicast packet matches the
network of a static multicast route entry, the static multicast route entry will be used to do RPF
check by IP multicast route protocol.
rpf_address - Specify the RPF address of the static multicast route entry that is created on the
Switch.If the source IP address of the received IP multicast packet matches the network of a
static multicast route entry, the RPF address of the static multicast route entry will be used to
check whether the IP multicast packet is received from legal upstream interface.
<ipaddr> - Enter the RPF address.
null - If set the RPF address of a static multicast route entry to null, the RPF checks whether
the source IP address of IP multicast packets matches this static multicast route entry. If
matches, it will be always failed.
Restrictions
Example
To create a static multicast route entry:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create ipmroute 11.0.0.0/8 rpf_address 20.1.1.1
Command: create ipmroute 11.0.0.0/8 rpf_address 20.1.1.1
Success.
967

®
101-2 delete ipmroute

Description
This command is used to delete static multicast route entries on the switch.
Format
delete ipmroute [<network_address> | all]
Parameters
<network_address> - Specify the network address of the static multicast route entry.
all - Specify to delete all static multicast route entries.
Restrictions
Example
To delete a static multicast route entry:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete ipmroute 11.0.0.0/8
Command: delete ipmroute 11.0.0.0/8
Success.
101-3 show ipmroute

Description
This command is used to display static multicast route entries on the Switch.
Format
show ipmroute {<network_address>}
Parameters
<network_address> - (Optional) Specify the network address of the static multicast route entry.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display all static multicast route entries:
968

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show ipmroute
Command: show ipmroute
Index Source IP Address RPF IP Address

----- -------------------- ---------------------
1 11.0.0.0/8 20.1.1.1
Total Entries : 1
969

®
Chapter 102 Syslog and Trap Source-

interface Command List
config syslog source_ipif [<ipif_name 12> {<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>} | none]
show syslog source_ipif
config trap source_ipif [<ipif_name 12> {<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> } | none]
show trap source_ipif
102-1 config syslog source_ipif

Description
This command is used to configure syslog source IP interface.
Format
config syslog source_ipif [<ipif_name 12> {<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>} | none]
Parameters
ipif - Specify the IP interface name. If only specify this parameter, the least IPv4 address and the
smallest IPv6 address of ipif_name will be used as source IP addresses.
long.
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Enter the IP address used for the configuration here.
<ipv6addr> - (Optional) Enter the IPv6 address used for the configuration here.
none - Specify to clear the configured source IP interface.
Restrictions
Example
Configure syslog source IP interface:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config syslog source_ipif ipif3 14.0.0.5
Command: config syslog source_ipif add ipif3 14.0.0.5
Success
To clear the configured source IP interface for syslog:
970

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config syslog source_ipif none

Command: config syslog source_ipif none
Success
102-2 show syslog source_ipif

Description
This command is used to display the syslog source IP interface.
Format
show syslog source_ipif
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
Show syslog source IP interface:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show syslog source_ipif
Command: show syslog source_ipif
Syslog Source IP Interface Configuration:
IP Interface : ipif3
IPv4 Address : 14.0.0.5
IPv6 Address : None
102-3 config trap source_ipif

Description
This command is used to configure trap source IP interface.
Format
config trap source_ipif [<ipif_name 12> {<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> } | none]
971

®
Parameters
ipif - Specify the IP interface name. If only specify this parameter, the least IPv4 address and the
smallest IPv6 address of ipif_name will be used as source IP addresses.
long.
<ipaddr> - (Optional) Enter the IP address used for the configuration here.
<ipv6addr> - (Optional) Enter the IPv6 address used for the configuration here.
none - Specify to clear the configured source IP interface.
Restrictions
Example
Configure trap source IP interface:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config trap source_ipif System
Command: config trap source_ipif System
Success
To clear the configured trap source IP interface:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config trap source_ipif none
Command: config trap source_ipif none
Success
102-4 show trap source_ipif

Description
This command is used to display the trap source IP interface.
Format
show trap source_ipif
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
972

®
Example
Show trap source IP interface:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show trap source_ip
Command: show trap source_ip
Trap Source IP Interface Configuration:
IPv4 Address : None
973

®
Chapter 103 System Log Command List

clear log
show log {[index <value_list> | severity {module <module_list>} {emergency | alert | critical | error |
warning | notice | informational | debug | <level_list 0-7>} | module<module_list>]}
show log_software_module
enable syslog
disable syslog
show syslog
create syslog host <index 1-4> ipaddress [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] {severity [emergency | alert |
critical | error | warning | notice | informational | debug | <level 0-7>] | facility [local0 | local1 |
local2 | local3 | local4 | local5 | local6 | local7] | udp_port <udp_port_number> | state [enable |
disable]}
config syslog host [<index 1-4> | all] {severity [emergency | alert | critical | error | warning | notice
| informational | debug| <level 0-7>] | facility [local0 | local1 | local2 | local3 | local4 | local5 |
local6 | local7] | udp_port <udp_port_number> | ipaddress [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] | state
[enable | disable]}
delete syslog host [<index 1-4> | all]
show syslog host {<index 1-4>}
config log_save_timing [time_interval <min 1-65535> | on_demand | log_trigger]
show log_save_timing
show attack_log {unit <unit_id 1-12} {index <value_list>}
clear attack_log {unit <unit_id 1-12> | all}
103-1 clear log

Description
This command is used to clear the Switch’s history log.
Format
clear log
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To clear the Switch’s history log:
974

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# clear log

Command: clear log
Success.
103-2 show log

Description
This command is used to display the Switch’s history log.
Format
show log {[index <value_list> | severity {module <module_list>} {emergency | alert | critical |
error | warning | notice | informational | debug | <level_list 0-7>} | module<module_list>]}
Parameters
index - (Optional) The show log command will display the history log between the log number of
X and Y. For example, showing log index 1-5 will display the history log from 1 to 5.
<value_list> - Enter the index value here.
severity - (Optional) Specify the severity level used.
module - (Optional) Specify the modules which are to be displayed. The module can be obtained
by using the show log_support_module command. Use a comma to separate multiple
modules.
<module_list> - Enter the module list value here.
emergency - (Optional) Severity level 0
alert - (Optional) Severity level 1
critical - (Optional) Severity level 2
error - (Optional) Severity level 3
warning - (Optional) Severity level 4
notice - (Optional) Severity level 5
informational - (Optional) Severity level 6
debug - (Optional) Severity level 7
<level_list 0-7> - Specify a list of severity level which is to be displayed. If there is more than
one severity level, please separate them by comma. The level number is from 0 to 7.
module - (Optional) Specify the modules which are to be displayed. The module can be obtained
by using the show log_support_module command. Use a comma to separate multiple
modules.
<module_list> - Enter the module list value here.
If no parameter is specified, all history log entries will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the Switch’s history log:
975

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show log index 1-3

Command: show log index 1-3
Index Date Time Level Log Text

----- ---------- -------- ------- ----------------------------------------------
3 2011-05-10 04:06:40 CRIT(2) Unit 1, Right Side Fan 2 failed

2 2011-05-10 04:06:40 CRIT(2) Unit 1, Right Side Fan 1 failed
1 2011-05-09 11:10:23 INFO(6) Unit 1, Configuration and log saved to flash b
y console (Username: Anonymous)
103-3 show log_software_module

Description
This command is used to display the protocols or applications that support the enhanced log. The
enhanced log adds the module name and module ID. Network administrators can display logs by
module name or module ID.
Format
show log_software_module
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the protocols or applications that support the enhanced log:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show log_software_module
Command: show log_software_module
CFM_EXT DHCPv6_CLIENT DHCPv6_RELAY ERPS

ERROR_LOG MSTP OSPFV2 VRRP
103-4 enable syslog

Description
This command is used to enable the sending of syslog messages.
976

®
Format
enable syslog
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the sending of syslog messages:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable syslog
Command: enable syslog
Success.
103-5 disable syslog

Description
This command is used to disable the sending of syslog messages.
Format
disable syslog
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable the sending of syslog messages:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable syslog
Command: disable syslog
Success.
977

®
103-6 show syslog

Description
This command is used to display the syslog protocol global state.
Format
show syslog
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the syslog protocol global state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show syslog
Command: show syslog
Syslog Global State: Enabled
103-7 create syslog host

Description
This command is used to create a new syslog host. The user can choose and report specific levels
of messages to a specific host. When the user chooses a specific level for a specific host,
messages which are at that severity level or higher will be reported to that host.
Format
create syslog host <index 1-4> ipaddress [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] {severity [emergency |
alert | critical | error | warning | notice | informational | debug | <level 0-7>] | facility [local0 |
local1 | local2 | local3 | local4 | local5 | local6 | local7] | udp_port <udp_port_number> | state
[enable | disable]}
Parameters
<index> - Enter the host index value here.
all - Specify that all the host indexes will be used.
ipaddress - Specify the IP or IPv6 address for the host.
<ipaddr> - Specify the IP address for the host.
<ipv6addr> - Specify the IPv6 address for the host.
severity - (Optional) Specify the severity level.
978

®
emergency - Severity level 0

alert - Severity level 1
critical - Severity level 2
error - Severity level 3
warning - Severity level 4
notice - Severity level 5
informational - Severity level 6
debug - Severity level 7
<level 0-7> - Enter the severity level value here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
facility - (Optional) Some of the operating system daemons and processes have been assigned
Facility values. Processes and daemons that have not been explicitly assigned a Facility may
use any of the "local use" facilities or they may use the "user-level" Facility. Those Facilities
that have been designated are shown below. This facility setting will be put in the syslog
packet when it is sent to a specific syslog server.
local0 - Specify that the user-defined facility will be set to local 0.
udp_port - (Optional) Specify the UDP port number.
<udp_port_number> - Enter the UDP port number used here.
state - (Optional) The syslog protocol is used for the transmission of event notification messages
across networks to a host. The option enables or disables the host to receive such messages.
enable - Specify that the host to receive such messages will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the host to receive such messages will be disabled.
Restrictions
Example
Adds a new syslog host:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create syslog host 1 ipaddress 10.90.90.1 severity debug
facility local0
Command: create syslog host 1 ipaddress 10.90.90.1 severity debug facility
local0
Success.
103-8 config syslog host

Description
This command is used to configure the syslog host configurations. The user can choose and report
a specific level of messages to a specific host. When the user chooses a specific level for a
specific host, messages which are at that severity level or higher will be reported to the specified
host.
979

®
Format
config syslog host [<index 1-4> | all] {severity [emergency | alert | critical | error | warning |
notice | informational | debug| <level 0-7>] | facility [local0 | local1 | local2 | local3 | local4 |
local5 | local6 | local7] | udp_port <udp_port_number> | ipaddress [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] |
state [enable | disable]}
Parameters
<index 1-4> - Enter the host index value here.
severity - (Optional) Specify the severity level.
emergency - Severity level 0
alert - Severity level 1
critical - Severity level 2
error - Severity level 3
warning - Severity level 4
notice - Severity level 5
informational - Severity level 6
debug - Severity level 7
<level 0-7> - Enter the severity level value here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
facility - (Optional) Some of the operating system daemons and processes have been assigned
Facility values. Processes and daemons that have not been explicitly assigned a Facility may
use any of the "local use" facilities or they may use the "user-level" Facility. Those Facilities
that have been designated are shown below. This facility setting will be put in the syslog
packet when it is sent to a specific syslog server.
udp_port - (Optional) Specify the UDP port number.
<udp_port_number> - Enter the UDP port number used here.
ipaddress - (Optional) Specify IP address for the host.
state - (Optional) The syslog protocol is used for the transmission of event notification messages
across networks to a host. The option enables or disables the host to receive such messages.
enable - Specify that the host to receive such messages will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the host to receive such messages will be disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the syslog host configuration:
980

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config syslog host all severity debug facility local0

Command: config syslog host all severity debug facility local0
Success.
103-9 delete syslog host

Description
This command is used to delete the syslog host(s).
Format
delete syslog host [<index 1-4> | all]
Parameters
host - The host index or all hosts.
<index> - Enter the host index value here.
Restrictions
Example
To delete the specific syslog host:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete syslog host 4
Command: delete syslog host 4
Success.
103-10 show syslog host

Description
This command is used to display the syslog host configurations.
Format
show syslog host {<index 1-4>}
Parameters
host - The host index or all hosts.
<index> - (Optional) Enter the host index value here.
981

®
If no parameter is specified, all hosts will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the syslog host information:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show syslog host
Command: show syslog host
Syslog Global State: Disabled
Host 1
IP Address : 10.90.90.1
Severity : Debug(7)
Facility : Local0
UDP Port : 514
Status : Disabled
Total Entries : 1
103-11 config log_save_timing

Description
This command is used to set the method for saving the log.
Format
config log_save_timing [time_interval <min 1-65535> | on_demand | log_trigger]
Parameters
time_interval - Save log to flash every xxx minutes. (If no new log events occur in this period,
don't save.)
<min 1-65535> - Enter the time interval value here. This value must be between 1 and 65535
minutes.
on_demand - Save log to flash whenever the user enters the "save log" or "save all" command.
The default setting is on_demand.
log_trigger - Save log to flash whenever a new log event arrives.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the method for saving a log as on demand:
982

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config log_save_timing on_demand

Command: config log_save_timing on_demand
Success.
103-12 show log_save_timing

Description
This command is used to show the method for saving the log.
Format
show log_save_timing
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the timing method used for saving the log:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show log_save_timing
Command: show log_save_timing
Saving Log Method: On_demand
103-13 show attack_log

Description
This command is used to display the attack log messages. The attack log message refers to log
messages driven by modules such as DOS and the IP-MAC-port binding module. This type of log
message may generate a large amount of messages and quickly cause the system to run out of
system log storage. Therefore, for this type of log messages only the first log that is generated
each minute can be stored in the system log, with the rest of them being stored in a separate table
named attack log.
Format
show attack_log {unit <unit_id 1-12} {index <value_list>}
983

®
Parameters
unit - (Optional) The attack log messages on the specified unit will be displayed. If unit ID is not
specified, then it will be referred to as the master unit.
<unit_id 1-12> - Enter the unit ID value here. This value must be between 1 and n.
index - (Optional) The list of index numbers of the entries that need to be displayed. For
example, show attack_log index 1-5 will display the attack log messages from 1 to 5.
<value_list> - Enter the index numbers of the entries that needs to be displayed here.
If no parameter is specified, all entries in the attack log will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show dangerous messages on the master:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show attack_log index 1
Command: show attack_log index 1
Index Date Time Level Log Text

----- ---------- -------- -------- ---------------------------------------------
1 2008-10-17 15:00:14 CRIT(2) Possible spoofing attack from IP: , MAC:
0A-00-00-5A-00-01, port: 1:3
103-14 clear attack_log

Description
This command is used to clear the attack log.
Format
clear attack_log {unit <unit_id 1-12> | all}
Parameters
unit - (Optional) The attack log messages on the specified unit will be cleared. If not specified, it
will be referred to as the master unit.
<unit_id 1-12> - Enter the unit ID number here.
all - Specify that all the unit ID's information will be used.
Restrictions
Example
To clear the master’s attack log:
984

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# clear attack_log

Command: clear attack_log
Success.
985

®
Chapter 104 System Severity Command

List
config system_severity [trap | log | all] [emergency | alert| critical | error | warning | notice |
information | debug | <level 0-7>]
show system_severity
104-1 config system_severity

Description
This command is used to configure the severity level control for the system.
When the user chooses a specific level to log or trap, messages at that severity level or more will
be logged or trapped to SNMP managers.
Format
config system_severity [trap | log | all] [emergency | alert| critical | error | warning | notice |
information | debug | <level 0-7>]
Parameters
trap - Specify the severity level control for traps.
log - Specify the severity level control for the log.
all - Specify the severity level control for traps and the log.
emergency - Severity level 0.
alert - Severity level 1.
critical - Severity level 2.
error - Severity level 3.
warning - Severity level 4.
notice - Severity level 5.
information - Severity level 6.
debug - Severity level 7.
<level 0-7> - Enter the severity level here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
Restrictions
Example
To configure severity level control as information level for trap:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config system_severity trap warning
Command: config system_severity trap warning
Success.
986

®
104-2 show system_severity

Description
This command is used to display the severity level controls for the system.
Format
show system_severity
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show severity level control for system:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show system_severity
Command: show system_severity
System Severity Trap : warning(4)

System Severity Log : information(6)
987

®
Chapter 105 Telnet Client Command List

telnet [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] {tcp_port <value 1-65535>}
105-1 telnet
Description
This command is used to start the telnet client to connect to the specific telnet server. The
parameters specified by the command will only be used for the establishment of this specific
session. They will not affect the establishment of other sessions.
Format
telnet [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] {tcp_port <value 1-65535>}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - The IP address of the telnet server.
<ipv6addr> - The IPv6 address of the telnet server.
tcp_port - (Optional) Specify the telnet server port number to be connected. If not specified, the
default port is 23.
<value 1-65535> - Enter the TCP port number used here. This value must be between 1 and
65535.
Restrictions
None.
Example
Telnet to a Switch by specifying the IP address:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# telnet 10.90.90.90
Command: telnet 10.90.90.90
DGS-XXXX Fast Ethernet Switch Command Line Interface
Firmware: Build 1.00.B01

Copyright(C) 2006-2009 D-Link Corporation. All rights reserved.
UserName:
988

®
Chapter 106 TFTP Client Command List

download [firmware_fromTFTP [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] src_file <path_filename 64> {[unit
<unit_id> | all]} {dest_file <pathname>} {boot_up} | cfg_fromTFTP [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>]
src_file <path_filename 64> {[unit <unit_id> | all]} {[increment | dest_file <pathname>]}]
upload [cfg_toTFTP [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] dest_file <path_filename 64> {unit <unit_id>} {src_file
<pathname>} {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string
80>}} {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}}
{[include | exclude | begin ] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>}}}}} |
log_toTFTP [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] dest_file <path_filename 64> | attack_log_toTFTP
[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] dest_file <path_filename 64> {unit <unit_id>} | firmware_toTFTP
[<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] dest_file <path_filename 64> {unit <unit_id>} {src_file <pathname>}]
106-1 download
Description
This command is used to download the firmware image and configuration from TFTP server.
Format
download [firmware_fromTFTP [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] src_file <path_filename 64> {[unit
<unit_id> | all]} {dest_file <pathname>} {boot_up} | cfg_fromTFTP [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>]
src_file <path_filename 64> {[unit <unit_id> | all]} {[increment | dest_file <pathname>]}]
Parameters
firmware_fromTFTP – Specify to download firmware from a TFTP server.
<ipaddr> - (Optional) The IP address of the TFTP server.
<ipv6addr> - (Optional) The IPv6 address of the TFTP server.
src_file - (Optional) Used to identify the parameter “path_filename”.
<path_filename 64> - Enter the source file path name here. This name can be up to 64
characters long.
master unit.
<unit_id> - Enter the unit ID value here. This value must be between 1 and n.
all - When all is specified, the firmware image on all units will be updated.
dest_file - (Optional) Used to identify the parameter “path_filename”.
<pathname> - Enter the destination file path name here.
boot_up - (Optional) Specify as boot up file.
cfg_fromTFTP – Specify to download a configuration file from a TFTP server.
<ipaddr> - (Optional) The IP address of the TFTP server.
<ipv6addr> - (Optional) The IPv6 address of the TFTP server.
<path_filename 64> - The pathname specifies the pathname on the TFTP server. It can
be a relative pathname or an absolute pathname. This name can be up to 64 characters
long.
master unit.
<unit_id> - Enter the unit ID value here. This value must be between 1 and n.
all - (Optional) When all is specified, the firmware image on all units will be updated.
increment - (Optional) This is only required for system which does not have file system and
only support one configuration file since the download of a configuration will automatically
989

®
apply the setting to the system. If increment is specified, the existing configuration will not
be cleared before applying to the new configuration. If it is not specified, the existing
configuration will be cleared before applying to the new configuration.
dest_file - (Optional) Used to identify the parameter “path_filename”.
<pathname>- The pathname specifies an absolute pathname on the device file system. If
pathname is not specified, it refers to the boot_up configuration file.
Restrictions
Example
To download firmware from TFTP:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# download firmware_fromTFTP 10.54.71.1 src_file px.had
Command: download firmware_fromTFTP 10.54.71.1 src_file px.had

Download firmware...................... Done. Do not power off!
Please wait, programming flash......... Done.
To download configuration from TFTP:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin# download cfg_fromTFTP 10.54.71.1 src_file cfg01.txt
Command: download cfg_fromTFTP 10.54.71.1 src_file cfg01.txt
Connecting to server.................…. Done.

Download configuration................. Done.
106-2 upload
Description
This command is used to upload firmware and configuration from device to TFTP server.
Format
upload [cfg_toTFTP [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] dest_file <path_filename 64> {unit <unit_id>}
{src_file <pathname>} {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>
{<filter_string 80>}} {[include | exclude | begin] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>
{<filter_string 80>}} {[include | exclude | begin ] <filter_string 80> {<filter_string 80>
{<filter_string 80>}}}}} | log_toTFTP [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] dest_file <path_filename 64> |
attack_log_toTFTP [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] dest_file <path_filename 64> {unit <unit_id>} |
firmware_toTFTP [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>] dest_file <path_filename 64> {unit <unit_id>}
{src_file <pathname>}]
990

®
Parameters
cfg_toTFTP – Specify that the configuration file will be uploaded to the TFTP server.
<ipaddr> - The IP address of the TFTP server.
<ipv6addr> - The IPv6 address of the TFTP server.
dest_file - Used to identify the parameter “path_filename”.
long.
master unit.
<unit_id> - Enter the stacking system unit ID here.
<pathname> - The pathname specifies an absolute pathname on the device file system. If
pathname is not specified, it refers to the boot_up CFG file.
include - (Optional) Specify to include lines that contain the specified filter string.
exclude - (Optional) Specify to exclude lines that contain the specified filter string.
output.
<filter_string 80> - A filter string is enclosed by symbol. Thus, the filter string itself cannot
contain the character. The filter string is case sensitive. This string can be up to 80
characters long.
<filter_string 80> - (Optional) A filter string is enclosed by symbol. Thus, the filter string itself
cannot contain the character. The filter string is case sensitive. This string can be up to 80
characters long.
<filter_string 80> - (Optional) A filter string is enclosed by symbol. Thus, the filter string
itself cannot contain the character. The filter string is case sensitive. This string can be
output.
characters long.
characters long.
output.
characters long.
characters long.
log_toTFTP - Specify to upload a log file from device to TFTP server.
991

®
long.
attack_log_toTFTP – Specify that the attack log will be uploaded to the TFTP server.
<path_filename 64> - Specify the path name on the TFTP server to hold the attack log.
This name can be up to 64 characters long.
unit - (Optional) The attack log messages on the specified unit will be uploaded to the
TFTP server. If it is not specified, it refers to the master unit.
<unit_id> - Enter the unit ID.
firmware_toTFTP – Specify that the firmware file will be uploaded to the TFTP server.
<path_filename 64> - The pathname specifies the pathname on the TFTP server. It
can be a relative pathname or an absolute pathname. This name can be up to 64
characters long.
unit - (Optional) Specify which unit on the stacking system. If it is not specified, it refers to
the master unit.
<unit_id> - Enter the unit ID value.
<pathname> - The pathname specifies an absolute pathname on the device file
system. If pathname is not specified, it refers to the boot_up image. This name can
Restrictions
Example
To upload firmware from a file system device to a TFTP server:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# upload firmware_toTFTP 10.1.1.1 dest_file D:/firmware.had
src_file 100b70.had
Command: upload firmware_toTFTP 10.1.1.1 dest_file D:/firmware.had src_file
100b70.had

Upload firmware........................ Done.
In case that the designated file does not exist:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin# upload firmware_toTFTP 10.1.1.1 dest_file D:/firmware.had
src_file 100b70.had
Command: upload firmware_toTFTP 10.1.1.1 dest_file D:/firmware.had src_file
100b70.had
No such file.
Failure!
992

®
To upload configuration from TFTP:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#upload cfg_toTFTP 10.90.90.99 dest_file 111.cfg unit 1
src_file c:/config.cfg
Command: upload cfg_toTFTP 10.90.90.99 dest_file 111.cfg unit 1 src_file
c:/config.cfg

Upload configuration................... Done.
In case that the designated file does not exist:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#upload cfg_toTFTP 10.90.90.99 dest_file 111.cfg unit 1
src_file c:/config2.cfg
Command: upload cfg_toTFTP 10.90.90.99 dest_file 111.cfg unit 1 src_file
c:/config2.cfg
No such file.
Failure!
To upload the master’s dangerous log:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin# upload attack_log_toTFTP 10.90.90.1 dest_file c:\alert.txt
Command: upload attack_log_toTFTP 10.90.90.1 dest_file c:\alert.txt
Success.
993

®
Chapter 107 Time and SNTP Command

List
config sntp {primary <ipaddr> | secondary <ipaddr> | poll-interval <int 30-99999>}
config sntp ipv6server {primary <ipv6addr> | secondary <ipv6addr>}(1)
show sntp
enable sntp
disable sntp
config time <date ddmthyyyy> <time hh:mm:ss>
config time_zone {operator [+ | -] | hour <gmt_hour 0-13> | min <minute 0-59>}
config dst [disable | repeating {s_week <start_week 1-4,last> | s_day <start_day sun-sat> | s_mth
<start_mth 1-12> | s_time <start_time hh:mm> | e_week <end_week 1-4,last> | e_day
<end_day sun-sat> | e_mth <end_mth 1-12> | e_time <end_time hh:mm> | offset [30 | 60 | 90
| 120]} | annual {s_date <start_date 1-31> | s_mth <start_mth 1-12> | s_time <start_time
hh:mm> | e_date <end_date 1-31> | e_mth <end_mth 1-12> | e_time <end_time hh:mm> |
offset [30 | 60 | 90 | 120]}]
show time
107-1 config sntp

Description
This command is used to change SNTP configurations.
Format
config sntp {primary <ipaddr> | secondary <ipaddr> | poll-interval <int 30-99999>}
Parameters
primary - (Optional) SNTP primary server IP address.
secondary - (Optional) SNTP secondary server IP address.
poll-interval - (Optional) Specify the polling interval range seconds.
<int 30-99999> - Enter the polling interval range here. This value must be between 30 and
99999 seconds.
Restrictions
Example
To configure SNTP:
994

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config sntp primary 10.1.1.1 secondary 10.1.1.2 poll-

interval 30
Command: config sntp primary 10.1.1.1 secondary 10.1.1.2 poll-interval 30
Success.
107-2 config sntp ipv6server

Description
This command is used to configure the SNTP IPv6 server information.
Note: If both SNTP IPv4 and IPv6 servers are configured, the SNTP IPv4 server has higher
priority, the Switch’s time syncs with the IPv4 server’s time first.
Format
cconfig sntp ipv6server {primary <ipv6addr> | secondary <ipv6addr>}(1)
Parameters
primary - (Optional) SNTP primary server IPv6 address.
secondary - (Optional) SNTP secondary server IPv6 address.
Restrictions
Example
To configure SNTP:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config sntp ipv6server primary 1000::1 secondary 1000::2
Command: config sntp ipv6server primary 1000::1 secondary 1000::2
Success.
107-3 show sntp

Description
This command is used to display SNTP current time source and configuration.
Format
show sntp
995

®
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show SNTP:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show sntp
Command: show sntp
Current Time Source : System Clock

SNTP Status : Disabled
IPv4 Primary SNTP Server : None
IPv4 Secondary SNTP Server: None
IPv6 Primary SNTP Server : None
IPv6 Secondary SNTP Server: None
SNTP Poll Interval : 720 sec
107-4 enable sntp

Description
This command is used to turn on SNTP support.
Format
enable sntp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable SNTP:
996

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable sntp

Command: enable sntp
Success.
107-5 disable sntp

Description
This command is used to turn off SNTP support.
Format
disable sntp
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable SNTP:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable sntp
Command: disable sntp
Success.
107-6 config time

Description
This command is used to configure time and date settings of the device.
Format
config time <date ddmthyyyy> <time hh:mm:ss>
Parameters
<date ddmthyyyy> - Specify the system clock date. An example would look like this:
'30jun2010'.
<time hh:mm:ss> - Specify the system clock time. An example would look like this: '12:00:00'.
997

®
Restrictions
Example
To configure time:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config time 30jun2003 16:30:30
Command: config time 30jun2003 16:30:30
Success.
107-7 config time_zone

Description
This command is used to configure time zone of the device.
Format
config time_zone {operator [+ | -] | hour <gmt_hour 0-13> | min <minute 0-59>}
Parameters
operator - (Optional) Specify the operator of time zone.
[+ | -] - Specify that time should be added or subtracted to or from the GMT.
hour - (Optional) Specify the hour of time zone.
<gmt_hour 0-13> - Enter the hour value of the time zone here. This value must be between 0
and 13.
min - (Optional) Specify the minute of time zone.
<minute 0-59> - Enter the minute value of the time zone here. This value must be between 0
and 59.
Restrictions
Example
To configure time_zone:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config time_zone operator + hour 2 min 30
Command: config time_zone operator + hour 2 min 30
Success.
998

®
107-8 config dst

Description
This command is used to configure Daylight Saving Time of the device.
Format
config dst [disable | repeating {s_week <start_week 1-4,last> | s_day <start_day sun-sat> |
s_mth <start_mth 1-12> | s_time <start_time hh:mm> | e_week <end_week 1-4,last> | e_day
<end_day sun-sat> | e_mth <end_mth 1-12> | e_time <end_time hh:mm> | offset [30 | 60 | 90
| 120]} | annual {s_date <start_date 1-31> | s_mth <start_mth 1-12> | s_time <start_time
hh:mm> | e_date <end_date 1-31> | e_mth <end_mth 1-12> | e_time <end_time hh:mm> |
offset [30 | 60 | 90 | 120]}]
Parameters
disable - Disable the Daylight Saving Time of the Switch.
repeating - Set the Daylight Saving Time to repeating mode.
s_week, e_week - (Optional) Configure the start /end week number of Daylight Saving Time.
<start_week 1-4, last> - Enter the starting week number of Daylight Saving Time here.
This value must be between 1 and 4.
<end_week 1-4, last> - Enter the ending week number of Daylight Saving Time here. This
s_day, e_day - (Optional) Configure the start /end day number of Daylight Saving Time.
<start_day sun-sat> - Enter the starting day value of Daylight Saving Time here. This
value must either be sun, mon, tue, wed, thu, fri or sat.
<end_day sun-sat> - Enter the ending day value of Daylight Saving Time here. This value
must either be sun, mon, tue, wed, thu, fri or sat.
s_mth, e_mth - (Optional) Configure the start /end month number of Daylight Saving Time.
<start_mth 1-12> - Enter the starting month number of Daylight Saving Time here. This
<end_mth 1-12> - Enter the ending month number of Daylight Saving Time here. This
s_time, e_time - (Optional) Configure the start /end time of Daylight Saving Time.
<start_time hh:mm> - Enter the starting time of Daylight Saving Time here. This value
must be in the hh:mm format.
<end_time hh:mm> - Enter the starting time of Daylight Saving Time here. This value
offset - (Optional) Indicates number of minutes to add or to subtract during summertime. The
ranges of offset are 30, 60, 90,120. The default value is 60.
30 - Specify that the offset range will 30 minutes.
annual - Set the Daylight Saving Time to annual mode.
s_date, e_date - (Optional) Configure the start /end date of Daylight Saving Time.
<start_date 1-31> - Enter the starting date of Daylight Saving Time here. This range must
be between 1 an 31.
<end_date 1-31> - Enter the ending date of Daylight Saving Time here. This range must
be between 1 an 31.
s_mth, e_mth - (Optional) Configure the start /end month number of Daylight Saving Time.
<start_mth 1-12> - Enter the starting month number of Daylight Saving Time here. This
<end_mth 1-12> - Enter the ending month number of Daylight Saving Time here. This
s_time, e_time - (Optional) Configure the start /end time of Daylight Saving Time.
999

®
<start_time hh:mm> - Enter the starting time of Daylight Saving Time here. This value
<end_time hh:mm> - Enter the starting time of Daylight Saving Time here. This value
offset - (Optional) Indicates number of minutes to add or to subtract during summertime. The
ranges of offset are 30, 60, 90,120; default value is 60.
Restrictions
Example
To configure time:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config dst repeating s_week 2 s_day tue s_mth 4 s_time
15:00 e_week
2 e_day wed e_mth 10 e_time 15:30 offset 30
Command: config dst repeating s_week 2 s_day tue s_mth 4 s_time 15:00 e_week 2
e
_day wed e_mth 10 e_time 15:30 offset 30
Success.
107-9 show time

Description
This command is used to display time states.
Format
show time
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show time:
1000

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show time
Command: show time
Current Time Source : System Clock

Boot Time : 9 May 2011 06:20:55
Current Time : 9 May 2011 07:46:10
Time Zone : GMT +00:00
Daylight Saving Time : Disabled
Offset In Minutes : 60
Repeating From : Apr 1st Sun 00:00
To : Oct last Sun 00:00
Annual From : 29 Apr 00:00
To : 12 Oct 00:00
1001

®
Chapter 108 Trace Route Command List

traceroute <ipaddr> {ttl <value 1-60>} {port <value 30000-64900>} {timeout <sec 1-65535>}
{probe <value 1-9>}
traceroute6 <ipv6addr> {ttl <value 1-60> | port <value 30000-64900> | timeout <sec 1-65535> |
probe <value 1-9>}
108-1 traceroute
Description
This command is used to trace the routed path between the Switch and a destination end station.
Format
traceroute <ipaddr> {ttl <value 1-60> | port <value 30000-64900> | timeout <sec 1-65535> |
probe <value 1-9>}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Specify the IP address of the destination end station.
ttl - (Optional) The time to live value of the trace route request. This is the maximum number of
routers that a trace route packet can pass. The traceroute command will cross while seeking
the network path between two devices. The range for the TTL is 1 to 60 hops.
<value 1-60> - Enter the time to live value here. This value must be between 1 and 60.
port - (Optional) The port number. The value range is from 30000 to 64900.
<value 30000-64900> - Enter the port number here. This value must be between 30000 and
64900.
timeout - (Optional) Defines the timeout period while waiting for a response from the remote
device. A value of 1 to 65535 seconds can be specified. The default is 5 seconds.
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the timeout period value here. This value must be between 1 and
65535 seconds.
probe - (Optional) The number of probing. The range is from 1 to 9. If unspecified, the default
value is 1.
<value 1-9> - Enter the probing number value here. This value must be between 1 and 9.
Restrictions
Example
Trace the routed path between the Switch and 10.48.74.121:
1002

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# traceroute 10.48.74.121 probe 3

Command: traceroute 10.48.74.121 probe 3
1 <10 ms. 10.12.73.254

2 <10 ms. 10.19.68.1
3 <10 ms. 10.48.74.121
Trace complete.
108-2 traceroute6
Description
This command is used to trace the IPv6 routed path between the Switch and a destination end
station.
Format
traceroute6 <ipv6addr> {ttl <value 1-60> | port <value 30000-64900> | timeout <sec 1-65535>
| probe <value 1-9>}
Parameters
<ipv6addr> - Specify the IPv6 address of the destination end station.
ttl - (Optional) The time to live value of the trace route request. This is the maximum number of
routers that a trace route packet can pass. The traceroute command will cross while seeking
the network path between two devices. The range for the TTL is 1 to 60 hops.
<value 1-60> - Enter the time to live value here. This value must be between 1 and 60.
port - (Optional) The port number. The value range is from 30000 to 64900.
<value 30000-64900> - Enter the port number here. This value must be between 30000 and
64900.
timeout - (Optional) Defines the timeout period while waiting for a response from the remote
device. A value of 1 to 65535 seconds can be specified. The default is 5 seconds.
<sec 1-65535> - Enter the timeout period value here. This value must be between 1 and
65535 seconds.
probe - (Optional) The number of probing. The range is from 1 to 9. If unspecified, the default
value is 1.
<value 1-9> - Enter the probing number value here. This value must be between 1 and 9.
Restrictions
Example
Trace the IPv6 routed path between the Switch and 3000::1:
1003

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# traceroute6 3000::1 probe 3

Command: traceroute6 3000::1 probe 3
1 <10 ms. 1345:142::11

2 <10 ms. 2011:14::100
3 <10 ms. 3000::1
Trace complete.
Trace the IPv6 routed path between the Switch and 1210:100::11 with port 40000:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# traceroute6 1210:100::11 port 40000
Command: traceroute6 1210:100::11 port 40000
1 <10 ms. 3100::25

2 <10 ms. 4130::100
3 <10 ms. 1210:100::11
Trace complete.
1004

®
Chapter 109 Traffic Control Command

List
config traffic control [<portlist> | all] {broadcast [enable | disable] | multicast [enable | disable] |
unicast [enable | disable] | action [drop | shutdown] | [threshold <value 0-1488100> |
{broadcast_threshold <value 0-1488100> | multicast_threshold <value 0-1488100> |
unicast_threshold <value 0-1488100>}] | countdown [<min 0> | <min3-30> | disable] |
time_interval <sec 5-600>}
config traffic trap [none | storm_occurred | storm_cleared | both]
show traffic control {<portlist>}
config traffic control log state [enable | disable]
config traffic control auto_recover_time [<min 0> | <min 1-65535>]
109-1 config traffic control

Description
This command is used to configure broadcast/ multicast/ unicast packet storm control. Shutdown
mode is provided to monitor the traffic rate in addition to the storm control drop mode. If traffic rate
is too high, this port will be shut down.
Format
config traffic control [<portlist> | all] {broadcast [enable | disable] | multicast [enable |
disable] | unicast [enable | disable] | action [drop | shutdown] | [threshold <value 0-
1488100> | {broadcast_threshold <value 0-1488100> | multicast_threshold <value 0-
1488100> | unicast_threshold <value 0-1488100>}] | countdown [<min 0> | <min3-30> |
disable] | time_interval <sec 5-600>}
Parameters
<portlist> - Used to specify a range of ports to be configured.
broadcast - (Optional) Enable or disable broadcast storm control.
enable - Specify that broadcast storm control will be enabled.
disable - Specify that broadcast storm control will be disabled.
multicast - (Optional) Enable or disable multicast storm control.
enable - Specify that multicast storm control will be enabled.
disable - Specify that multicast storm control will be disabled.
unicast - (Optional) Enable or disable unknown packet storm control. ( Supported for drop mode
only)
enable - Specify that unicast storm control will be enabled.
disable - Specify that unicast storm control will be disabled.
action - (Optional) One of the two options for action is specified for storm control, shutdown or
drop mode. Shutdown mode is a function of software, drop mode is implemented by the chip.
If shutdown mode is specified, it is necessary to configure values for the countdown and
time_interval parameters.
drop - Specify that the action applied will be drop mode.
shutdown - Specify that the action applied will be shutdown mode.
threshold - (Optional) The upper threshold, at which point the specified storm control is
triggered. The <value> is the number of broadcast/multicast packets per second received by
1005

®
the Switch that will trigger the storm traffic control measure. The threshold is expressed as
PPS (packets per second) and must be an unsigned integer.
<value 0-1488100> - Enter the upper threshold value here. This value must be between 0 and
1488100.
broadcast_threshold - Specify the number of broadcast packets per second received by the
Switch that will trigger the storm traffic control measure.
<value 0-1488100> - Enter the value between 0-1488100.
multicast_threshold - Specify the number of multicast packets per second received by the
Switch that will trigger the storm traffic control measure.
unicast_threshold - Specify the number of unicast packets per second received by the Switch
that will trigger the storm traffic control measure.
countdown - (Optional) Timer for shutdown mode. If a port enters the shutdown Rx state and
this timer runs out, port will be shutdown forever. The parameter is not applicable if “drop”
(mode) is specified for the “action” parameter.
<min 0> - 0 disables the forever state, meaning that the port will not enter the shutdown
forever state.
<min 3-30> - Enter the countdown timer value here. This value must be between 3 and 30.
disable – Specify that the countdown timer will be disabled.
time_interval - (Optional) The sampling interval of received packet counts. The possible value
will be m-n seconds. The parameter is not applicable if “drop” (mode) is specified for the
“action” parameter.
<sec 5-600> - Enter the time interval value here. This value must be between 5 and 600.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the parameters so that the traffic control status is enabled on ports 1-12:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config traffic control 1:1-1:12 broadcast enable action
shutdown threshold 1 countdown 5 time_interval 10
Command: config traffic control 1:1-1:12 broadcast enable action shutdown
threshold 1 countdown 5 time_interval 10
Success.
109-2 config traffic trap

Description
This command is used to configure trap modes.
Occurred Mode: This trap is sent when a packet storm is detected by the packet storm
mechanism.
Cleared Mode: This trap is sent when the packet storm is cleared by the packet storm mechanism.
Format
config traffic trap [none | storm_occurred | storm_cleared | both]
1006

®
Parameters
none - No trap state is specified for storm control.
storm_occurred - Occurred mode is enabled and cleared mode is disabled.
storm_cleared - Occurred mode is disabled and cleared mode is enabled.
both - Both occurred and cleared modes are enabled.
Restrictions
Example
To enable both the occurred mode and cleared mode traffic control traps:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config traffic trap both
Command: config traffic trap both
Success.
109-3 show traffic control

Description
This command is used to display the current traffic control settings.
Format
show traffic control {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Used to specify the range of ports to be shown.
If no parameter is specified, the system will display the packet storm control configuration for all
ports.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the traffic control parameters for ports 1 to 10:
1007

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show traffic control 1:1-1:10

Command: show traffic control 1:1-1:10
Traffic Control Trap : [Both]

Traffic Control Log : Enabled
Traffic Control Auto Recover Time: 0 Minutes
Port Broadcast/ Multicast/ Unicast/ Action Count Time Shutdown

Threshold Threshold Threshold down Interval Forever
---- --------- --------- --------- -------- -------- --------- --------
1:1 Enabled Disabled Disabled shutdown 5 10
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
109-4 config traffic control log state

Description
This command is used to configure the traffic control log state. When the log state is enabled,
traffic control states are logged when a storm occurs and when a storm is cleared. If the log state
is disabled, traffic control events are not logged.
Note: The log state is only applicable for shutdown mode. Since shutdown mode only support
broadcast and multicast storm control, doesn’t support unicast storm control. The log only
generate for broadcast and multicast storm control.
Format
config traffic control log state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Both occurred and cleared are logged.
1008

®
disable - Neither occurred nor cleared is logged.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the traffic log state on the Switch:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config traffic control log state enable
Command: config traffic control log state enable
Success.
109-5 config traffic control auto_recover_time

Description
This command is used to configure the traffic auto recover time that allowed for a port to recover
from shutdown forever status.
Format
config traffic control auto_recover_time [<min 0> | <min 1-65535>]
Parameters
auto_recover_time - The time allowed for auto recovery from shutdown for a port. The default
value is 0, so no auto recovery is possible; the port remains in shutdown forever mode. This
requires manual entry of the CLI command “config ports [ <portlist> | all ] state enable" to
return the port to a forwarding state. The default value is 0, which means disable auto recover
mode, shutdown forever.
<min 0> - Specify that the auto recovery time will be disabled.
<min 1-65535> - Enter the auto recovery time value here. This value must be between 1 and
65535.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the auto recover time to 5 minutes:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config traffic control auto_recover_time 5
Command: config traffic control auto_recover_time 5
Success.
1009

®
1010

®
Chapter 110 Traffic Segmentation

Command List
config traffic_segmentation [<portlist> | all] forward_list [null | all | <portlist>]
show traffic_segmentation {<portlist>}
110-1 config traffic_segmentation

Description
This command is used to configure the traffic segmentation.
Format
config traffic_segmentation [<portlist> | all] forward_list [null | all | <portlist>]
Parameters
forward_list - Specify a range of port forwarding domain.
null - Specify a range of port forwarding domain is null.
all – Specify all ports to be configured.
Restrictions
Example
To configure traffic segmentation:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config traffic_segmentation 1:1-1:10 forward_list 1:11-
1:15
Command: config traffic_segmentation 1:1-1:10 forward_list 1:11-1:15
Success.
110-2 show traffic_segmentation

Description
This command is used to display current traffic segmentation table.
1011

®
Format
show traffic_segmentation {<portlist>}
Parameters
If no parameter is specified, the system will display all current traffic segmentation tables.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display traffic segmentation table:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show traffic_segmentation 1:1-1:10
Command: show traffic_segmentation 1:1-1:10
Traffic Segmentation Table
Port Forward Portlist

------ --------------------------------------------------
1:1 1:11-1:15
1:2 1:11-1:15
1:3 1:11-1:15
1:4 1:11-1:15
1:5 1:11-1:15
1:6 1:11-1:15
1:7 1:11-1:15
1:8 1:11-1:15
1:9 1:11-1:15
1:10 1:11-1:15
1012

®
Chapter 111 Trusted Host Command List

create trusted_host [<ipaddr> |<ipv6addr> | network <network_address> | ipv6_prefix
<ipv6networkaddr>] {snmp | telnet | ssh | http | https | ping}
delete trusted_host [ipaddr <ipaddr> | ipv6address <ipv6addr> | network <network_address> |
ipv6_prefix <ipv6networkaddr> | all]
config trusted_host [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> | network <network_address> | ipv6_prefix
<ipv6networkaddr>] [add | delete] {snmp | telnet | ssh | http | https | ping | all}
show trusted_host
111-1 create trusted_host

Description
This command is used to create the trusted host. The switch allows you to specify up to thirty IP
addresses that are allowed to manage the Switch via in-band SNMP or TELNET based
management software. These IP addresses must be members of the Management VLAN. If no IP
addresses are specified, then there is nothing to prevent any IP address from accessing the
Switch, provided the user knows the Username and Password.
When the access interface is not specified, the trusted host will be created for all interfaces.
Format
create trusted_host [<ipaddr> |<ipv6addr> | network <network_address> | ipv6_prefix
<ipv6networkaddr>] {snmp | telnet | ssh | http | https | ping}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - The IP address of the trusted host.
<ipv6addr> - The IPv6 address of the trusted host.
network - The network address of the trusted network. The form of network address is
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/y.
ipv6_prefix – Specify that IPv6 prefix here.
<ipv6networkaddr> - Enter the IPv6 network address here.
snmp - (Optional) Specify trusted host for SNMP.
telnet - (Optional) Specify trusted host for TELNET.
ssh - (Optional) Specify trusted host for SSH
http - (Optional) Specify trusted host for HTTP
https - (Optional) Specify trusted host for HTTPs.
ping - (Optional) Specify trusted host for PING
Restrictions
Example
To create the trusted host:
1013

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# create trusted_host 10.48.74.121

Command: create trusted_host 10.48.74.121
Success.
111-2 delete trusted_host

Description
This command is used to delete a trusted host entry made using the create trusted_host command
above.
Format
delete trusted_host [ipaddr <ipaddr> | ipv6address <ipv6addr> | network
<network_address> | ipv6_prefix <ipv6networkaddr> | all]
Parameters
ipaddr - The IP address of the trusted host.
ipv6addr - The IPv6 address of the trusted host.
<ipv6addr> - Enter the IPv6 address used for this configuration here.
network - The network address of the trusted network.
<network_address> - Enter the network address used for this configuration here.
ipv6_prefix - The IPv6 subnet prefix of the trusted network.
<ipv6networkaddr> - Enter the IPv6 subnet prefix here.
all - All trusted hosts will be deleted.
Restrictions
Example
To delete the trusted host:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete trusted_host ipaddr 10.48.74.121
Command: delete trusted_host ipaddr 10.48.74.121
Success.
111-3 config trusted_host

Description
This command is used to configure the access interfaces for the trusted host.
1014

®
Format
config trusted_host [<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr> | network <network_address> | ipv6_prefix
<ipv6networkaddr>] [add | delete] {snmp | telnet | ssh | http | https | ping | all}
Parameters
<ipaddr> - The IP address of the trusted host.
<ipv6addr> - The IPv6 address of the trusted host.
network - The network address of the trusted network. The form of network address is
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/y.
ipv6_prefix - The IPv6 subnet prefix of the trusted network.
<ipv6networkaddr> - Enter the IPv6 subnet prefix here.
add - Add interfaces for that trusted host.
delete - Delete interfaces for that trusted host.
snmp - (Optional) Specify trusted host for SNMP.
telnet - (Optional) Specify trusted host for TELNET.
ssh - (Optional) Specify trusted host for SSH.
http - (Optional) Specify trusted host for HTTP.
https - (Optional) Specify trusted host for HTTPs.
ping - (Optional) Specify trusted host for PING.
all – (Optional) Specify trusted host for all application.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the trusted host:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config trusted_host 10.48.74.121 add ssh telnet
Command: config trusted_host 10.48.74.121 add ssh telnet
Success.
111-4 show trusted_host

Description
This command is used to display a list of trusted hosts entered on the Switch using the create
trusted_host command above.
Format
show trusted_host
Parameters
None.
1015

®
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display trusted host:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show trusted_host
Command: show trusted_host
Management Stations
IP Address Access Interface

----------------------------------------------------------------
10.48.74.121 SNMP Telnet SSH HTTP HTTPs Ping
Total Entries: 1
1016

®
Chapter 112 UDP Helper Command List

enable udp_helper
disable udp_helper
config udp_helper udp_port add [time | tacacs | dns | tftp | netbios-ns | netbios-ds |
<port_number 0-65535>]
config udp_helper udp_port delete [time | tacacs | dns | tftp | netbios-ns | netbios-ds
|<port_number 0-65535>]
config udp_helper add ipif <ipif_name 12> <ipaddr>
config udp_helper delete ipif <ipif_name 12> <ipaddr>
show udp_helper {[udp_port | ipif <ipif_name 12>]}
112-1 enable udp_helper

Description
This command is used to enable the UDP helper function on the Switch.
Format
enable udp_helper
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the UDP helper function:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable udp_helper
Command: enable udp_helper
Success.
112-2 disable udp_helper

Description
This command is used to disable the UDP helper function on the Switch.
Format
disable udp_helper
1017

®
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable the UDP helper function:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable udp_helper
Command: disable udp_helper
Success.
112-3 config udp_helper udp_port add

Description
This command is used to add a UDP port for UDP helper function on the Switch.
Format
config udp_helper udp_port add [time | tacacs | dns | tftp | netbios-ns | netbios-ds |
Parameters
time – Time service. The UDP port is 37.
tacacs - Terminal Access Controller Access Control System service. The UDP port number is 49.
dns - Domain Naming System. The UDP port number is 53.
tftp - Trivial File Transfer Protocol. The UDP port number is 69.
netbios-ns - NetBIOS Name Server. The UDP port number is 137.
netbios-ds - NetBIOS Datagram Server. The UDP port number is 138.
<port_number 0-65535> - Specify other UDP ports, except the port 67 and 68. These two ports
are reserved for DHCP function.
Restrictions
Example
To add a UDP port:
1018

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config udp_helper udp_port add 55

Command: config udp_helper udp_port add 55
Success.
112-4 config udp_helper udp_port delete

Description
This command is used to delete a UDP port for UDP helper function on the Switch.
Format
config udp_helper udp_port delete [time | tacacs | dns | tftp | netbios-ns | netbios-ds |
Parameters
time – Time service. The UDP port is 37.
tacacs - Terminal Access Controller Access Control System service. The UDP port number is 49.
dns - Domain Naming System. The UDP port number is 53.
tftp - Trivial File Transfer Protocol. The UDP port number is 69.
netbios-ns - NetBIOS Name Server. The UDP port number is 137.
netbios-ds - NetBIOS Datagram Server. The UDP port number is 138.
<port_number 0-65535> - Specify other UDP ports, except the port 67 and 68. These two ports
are reserved for DHCP function.
Restrictions
Example
To delete a UDP port:
dmin#config udp_helper udp_port delete 55
Command: config udp_helper udp_port delete 55
Success.
112-5 config udp_helper add ipif

Description
This command is used to add a UDP helper server address for specific interface of the Switch.
Format
config udp_helper add ipif <ipif_name 12> <ipaddr>
1019

®
Parameters
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the name of the IP interface that receives UDP broadcast.
<ipaddr> - Enter the UDP helper server IP address.
Restrictions
Example
To add a server address for System interface:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config udp_helper add ipif System 20.0.0.90
Command: config udp_helper add ipif System 20.0.0.90
Success.
112-6 config udp_helper delete ipif

Description
This command is used to delete a UDP helper server address for specific interface of the Switch.
Format
config udp_helper delete ipif <ipif_name 12> <ipaddr>
Parameters
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the name of the IP interface that receives UDP broadcast.
<ipaddr> - Enter the UDP helper server IP address.
Restrictions
Example
To delete a server address for System interface:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config udp_helper delete ipif System 20.0.0.90
Command: config udp_helper delete ipif System 20.0.0.90
Success.
1020

®
112-7 show udp_helper

Description
This command is used to display the current UDP Helper configuration on the Switch
Format
show udp_helper {[udp_port | ipif <ipif_name 12>]}
Parameters
udp_port - (Optional) Specify the UDP port configured for the UDP helper.
ipif - (Optional)Specify the name of the IP interface to be configured for the UDP helper
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the name of the IP interface.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the current UDP Helper configuration:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show udp_helper
Command: show udp_helper
UDP Helper Status : Enabled
Application UDP Port

------------ ---------------
User App1 55
Interface Server
------------ ---------------
System 20.0.0.90
1021

®
Chapter 113 Virtual Router Redundancy

Protocol (VRRP) Command
List (RI Mode Only)
enable vrrp {ping}
disable vrrp {ping}
create vrrp vrid <vrid 1-255> ipif <ipif_name 12> ipaddress <ipaddr> {state [enable | disable] |
priority <int 1-254> | advertisement_interval <int 1-255> | preempt [true | false] | critical_ip
<ipaddr> | critical_ip_state [enable | disable]}
config vrrp vrid <vrid 1-255> ipif <ipif_name 12> {state [enable | disable] | priority <int 1-254> |
ipaddress <ipaddr> | advertisement_interval <int 1-255> | preempt [true | false] | critical_ip
config vrrp ipif <ipif_name 12> [authtype [none | simple authdata <string 8> | ip authdata <string
16>]]
delete vrrp {vrid <vrid 1-255> ipif <ipif_name 12>}
show vrrp {ipif <ipif_name 12> {vrid <vrid 1-255>}}
113-1 enable vrrp

Description
This command is used to enable VRRP globally.
Format
enable vrrp {ping}
Parameters
ping - (Optional) Specify that the ping option will be enabled.
Restrictions
Example
To enable VRRP:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable vrrp
Command: enable vrrp
Success.
1022

®
113-2 disable vrrp

Description
This command is used to disable VRRP globally.
Format
disable vrrp {ping}
Parameters
ping - (Optional) Specify that the ping option will be disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To disable VRRP:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable vrrp
Command: disable vrrp
Success.
113-3 create vrrp vrid

Description
This command is used to create a virtual router entry by VRID.
Format
create vrrp vrid <vrid 1-255> ipif <ipif_name 12> ipaddress <ipaddr> {state [enable | disable]
| priority <int 1-254> | advertisement_interval <int 1-255> | preempt [true | false] | critical_ip
Parameters
vrid - Specify the ID of the Virtual Router used.
<vrid 1-255> - Enter the Virtual Router ID used here. This value must be between 1 and 255.
characters long.
ipaddress - Specify the virtual router’s IP address used.
<ipaddr> - Enter the virtual router's IP address used here.
state - (Optional) Specify the state of the virtual router function.
enable - Specify that the virtual router function will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the virtual router function will be disabled.
1023

®
priority - (Optional) Specify the priority to be used for the Virtual Router Master election process
<int 1-254> - Enter the priority value used here. This value must be between 1 and 254.
advertisement_interval - (Optional) Specify the time interval used between sending
advertisement messages.
<int 1-255> - Enter the advertisement interval value here. This value must be between 1 and
255 seconds.
preempt - (Optional) Controls whether a higher priority virtual router will preempt a lower priority
master. The preempt setting must be consistent with all the routers participating within the
same VRRP group. Default is settings is true.
true - Specify that if the backup router’s priority is set higher than the masters priority, it will
become the master instead of the current one.
false - Specify that if the backup router’s priority is higher than the masters priority, it will not
become the master until the master failed.
critical_ip - (Optional) Specify an IP address that will provide the most direct route to the Internet
or other critical network connections from this virtual router. This IP address must be a real IP
address of a real device on the network. If the connection from the virtual router to this IP
address fails, the virtual router will automatically be disabled. A new Master will be elected
from the backup routers participating in the VRRP group. Different critical IP addresses may
be assigned to different routers participating in the VRRP group and can therefore define
multiple routes to the Internet or other critical network connections.
<ipaddr> - Enter the critical interface's IP address used here.
critical_ip_state - (Optional) Specify the state of checking the status (active or inactive) of a
critical IP address.
enable - Specify that the critical IP state checking will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the critical IP state checking will be disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To create a VRRP entry:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create vrrp vrid 1 ipif System ipaddress 10.90.90.91 state
enable
Command: create vrrp vrid 1 ipif System ipaddress 10.90.90.91 state enable
Success.
113-4 config vrrp vrid

Description
This command is used to configure the virtual router settings by VRID.
Format
config vrrp vrid <vrid 1-255> ipif <ipif_name 12> {state [enable | disable] | priority <int 1-
254> | ipaddress <ipaddr> | advertisement_interval <int 1-255> | preempt [true | false] |
critical_ip <ipaddr> | critical_ip_state [enable | disable]}
1024

®
Parameters
vrid - specifies the ID of the Virtual Router used.
characters long.
state - (Optional) Specify the state of the virtual router function.
enable - Specify that the virtual router function will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the virtual router function will be disabled.
priority - (Optional) specifies the priority to be used for the Virtual Router Master election process
<int 1-254> - Enter the priority value used here. This value must be between 1 and 254.
ipaddress - (Optional) Specify the virtual router’s IP address used.
<ipaddr> - Enter the virtual router's IP address used here.
advertisement_interval - (Optional) Specify the time interval used between sending
advertisement messages.
<int 1-255> - Enter the advertisement interval value here. This value must be between 1 and
255 seconds.
preempt - (Optional) Controls whether a higher priority virtual router will preempt a lower priority
master. The preempt setting must be consistent with all the routers participating within the
same VRRP group. Default is setting is true.
true - Specify that if the backup router’s priority is set higher than the masters priority, it will
become the master instead of the current one.
false - Specify if the backup router’s priority is higher than the masters priority, it will not
become the master until the master failed.
critical_ip - (Optional) specifies an IP address that will provide the most direct route to the
Internet or other critical network connections from this virtual router. This IP address must be a
real IP address of a real device on the network. If the connection from the virtual router to this
IP address fails, the virtual router will automatically be disabled. A new Master will be elected
from the backup routers participating in the VRRP group. Different critical IP addresses may
be assigned to different routers participating in the VRRP group and can therefore define
multiple routes to the Internet or other critical network connections.
<ipaddr> - Enter the critical interface's IP address used here.
critical_ip_state - (Optional) Specify the state of checking the status (active or inactive) of a
critical IP address.
enable - Specify that the critical IP state checking will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the critical IP state checking will be disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To configure VRRP:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config vrrp vrid 1 ipif System state enable
Command: config vrrp vrid 1 ipif System state enable
Success.
113-5 config vrrp ipif

Description
This command is used to configure a virtual router authentication type on an interface.
1025

®
Format
config vrrp ipif <ipif_name 12> [authtype [none | simple authdata <string 8> | ip authdata
<string 16>]]
Parameters
ipif - Specify the name of IP interface used for this configuration.
characters long.
authtype - Specify the VRRP’s authentication type.
none - Specify that no authentication algorithm will be used on this interface.
simple - Specify that the authentication algorithm will be set to simple text on this interface.
authdata - Specify the authentication data used in the simple text authentication algorithm.
<string 8> - Enter the authentication data used in the simple text authentication
algorithm here. This value can be up to 8 characters long.
ip - Specify that the authentication algorithm will be set to IP authentication header on this
interface.
authdata - Specify the authentication data used in the IP authentication header algorithm.
<string 16> - Enter the authentication data used in the IP authentication header
algorithm here. This value can be up to 16 characters long.
Restrictions
Example
To configure a VRRP IP interface:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config vrrp ipif System authtype simple authdata 12345678
Command: config vrrp ipif System authtype simple authdata 12345678
Success.
113-6 delete vrrp

Description
This command is used to delete the VRRP entries.
Format
delete vrrp {vrid <vrid 1-255> ipif <ipif_name 12>}
Parameters
vrid - (Optional) Specify the Virtual Router ID used.
ipif - (Optional) Specify the IP interface name used.
1026

®
characters long.
If no parameter is specified, all the VRRP entries will be deleted.
Restrictions
Example
To delete VRRP:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete vrrp vrid 1 ipif System
Command: delete vrrp vrid 1 ipif System
Success.
113-7 show vrrp

Description
This command is used to display the VRRP settings.
Format
show vrrp {ipif <ipif_name 12> {vrid <vrid 1-255>}}
Parameters
ipif - (Optional) Specify the IP interface name to be displayed.
<ipif_name 12> - Enter the IP interface name to be displayed here. This name can be up to
12 characters long.
vrid - (Optional) Specify the Virtual Router ID to be displayed.
<vrid 1-255> - Enter the Virtual Router ID to be displayed here. This value must be between 1
and 255.
If no parameter is specified, then all the VRRP entries will be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the VRRP configuration:
1027

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show vrrp
Command: show vrrp
Global VRRP : Enabled

Non-owner Response Ping: Disabled
Interface Name : System

Authentication Type : Simple Text Password
Authentication Data : 12345678
VRID : 1
Virtual IP Address : 10.90.90.91
Virtual MAC Address : 00-00-5E-00-01-01
Virtual Router State : Master
State : Enabled
Priority : 100
Master IP Address : 10.90.90.90
Critical IP Address : 0.0.0.0
Checking Critical IP : Disabled
Advertisement Interval : 1 Sec(s)
Preempt Mode : True
Virtual Router Up Time : 621430 centi-secs
Total Entries: 1
1028

®
Chapter 114 VLAN Trunking Command

List
enable vlan_trunk
disable vlan_trunk
config vlan_trunk ports [<portlist> | all] | state [enable | disable]
show vlan_trunk
114-1 enable vlan_trunk

Description
This command is used to enable the VLAN trunk function. When the VLAN trunk function is
enabled, the VLAN trunk ports shall be able to forward all tagged frames with any VID.
Format
enable vlan_trunk
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the VLAN Trunk:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable vlan_trunk
Command: enable vlan_trunk
Success.
114-2 disable vlan_trunk

Description
This command is used to disable the VLAN trunk function.
Format
disable vlan_trunk
1029

®
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable the VLAN Trunk:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable vlan_trunk
Command: disable vlan_trunk
Success.
114-3 config vlan_trunk

Description
This command is used to configure a port as a VLAN trunk port. By default, none of the port is a
VLAN trunk port.
If the user enables the global VLAN trunk function and configurethe VLAN trunk ports, then the
trunk port will be member port of all VLANs. That is, if a VLAN is already configured by the user,
but the trunk port is not member port of that VLAN, this trunk port will atutomatically become
tagged member port of that VLAN. If a VLAN is not created yet, the VLAN will be automatically
created, and the trunk port will become tagged member of this VLAN.
When the user disables the VLAN trunk globally, all VLANs automatically created by VLAN Trunk
enabled shall be destroyed, and all the automatically added port membership will be removed.
A VLAN trunk port and a non-VLAN trunk port cannot be grouped as an aggregated link. To
change the VLAN trunk setting for an aggregated link, the user must apply the command to the
master port. However, this setting will disappear as the aggregated link is destroyed, and the
VLAN trunk setting of the individual port will follow the original setting of the port.
If the command is applied to link aggregation member port excluding the master, the command will
be rejected.
The ports with different VLAN configurations are not allowed to form an aggregated link. However,
if they are specified as VLAN trunk port, they are allowed to form an aggregated link.
For a VLAN trunk port, the VLANs on which the packets can be by passed will not be advertised
by GVRP on this port. However, since the traffic on these VLANs are forwarded, this vlan trunk
port should participate the MSTP instances corresponding to these VLAN.
Format
config vlan_trunk ports [<portlist> | all] | state [enable | disable]
1030

®
Parameters
state - Specify that the port is a VLAN trunk port or not.
enable - Specify that the port is a VLAN trunk port.
disable - Specify that the port is not a VLAN trunk port.
Restrictions
Example
To configure VLAN trunk ports:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config vlan_trunk ports 1:1-1:5 state enable
Command: config vlan_trunk ports 1:1-1:5 state enable
Success.
Port 6 is LA-1 member port; port 7 is LA-2 master port:

DGS-3120-24PC:admin#config vlan_trunk ports 1:6-1:7 state enable
Success.
DGS-3120-24PC:admin#config vlan_trunk ports 1:7 state disable

Command: config vlan_trunk ports 1:7 state disable
Success.
DGS-3120-24PC:admin#config vlan_trunk ports 1:6-1:7 state disable

Command: config vlan_trunk ports 1:6-1:7 state disable
Success.
Port 6 is LA-1 member port; port 7 is LA-1 master port:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config vlan_trunk ports 1:6-1:7 state enable
Success.
Port 6, 7 have different VLAN configurations before enabling VLAN trunk.

Port 6 is LA-1 member port; port 7 is LA-1 master port.
1031

®
DGS-3120-24PC:admin#config vlan_trunk ports 1:7 state disable

Success.
Port 6, 7 have the same VLAN configuration before enabling VLAN trunk.
Port 6 is LA-1 member port; port 7 is LA-1 master port.
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config vlan_trunk ports 1:7 state disable
Success.
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config vlan_trunk ports 1:6-1:7 state disable

Command: config vlan_trunk ports 1:6-1:7 state disable
Success.
114-4 show vlan_trunk

Description
This command is used to show the VLAN trunk configuration.
Format
show vlan_trunk
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show the VLAN Trunk information:
1032

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show vlan_trunk
Command: show vlan_trunk
VLAN Trunk Global Setting

----------------------------
VLAN Trunk Status : Enabled
VLAN Trunk Member Ports : 1:1-1:5
The following example displays the VLAN information which will also display VLAN trunk setting:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show vlan
Command: show vlan
VLAN Trunk State : Enabled

VLAN Trunk Member Ports : 1:1-1:5.1:7

VLAN TYPE : static Advertisement : Enabled
Member ports : 1:1-1:24,2:1-2:24
Static ports : 1:1-1:24,2:1-2:24
Current Tagged ports:
Current Untagged ports : 1:1-1:24,2:1-2:24
Static Tagged ports:
Static Untagged ports : 1:1-1:24,2:1-2:24
Forbidden ports :
VID : 2 VLAN Name : v1

VLAN TYPE : static Advertisement : Disabled
Member ports : 1:24,2:24
Static ports :
Current Tagged ports:
Current Untagged ports :
Static Tagged ports:
Static Untagged ports :
Forbidden ports :
Total Static VLAN Entries : 1

Total GVRP VLAN Entries: 1
1033

®
Chapter 115 Voice VLAN Command List

enable voice_vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]
disable voice_vlan
config voice_vlan priority <int 0-7>
config voice_vlan oui [add | delete] <macaddr> <macmask> {description <desc 32>}
config voice_vlan ports [<portlist> | all] [state [enable | disable] | mode [auto {[tag
|untag]}|manual]]
config voice_vlan aging_time <min 1-65535>
config voice_vlan log state [enable | disable]
show voice_vlan
show voice_vlan oui
show voice_vlan ports {<portlist>}
show voice_vlan voice_device {ports <portlist>}
show voice_vlan lldp_med voice_device
115-1 enable voice_vlan

Description
This command is used to enable the global voice VLAN function on a switch. To enable the voice
VLAN, the voice VLAN must be also assigned .At the same time, the VLAN must be an existing
static 802.1Q VLAN.
To change the voice VLAN, the user must disable the voice VLAN function, and re-issue this
command.
By default, the global voice VLAN state is disabled.
Format
enable voice_vlan [<vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]
Parameters
<vlan_name 32> - Enter the name of the voice VLAN here. This name can be up to 32
characters long.
vlanid - Specify the VLAN ID of the voice VLAN.
<vlanid 1-4094> - Enter the voice VLAN ID here. This value must be between 1 and 4094.
Restrictions
Example
To enable a voice VLAN with name “v2”:
1034

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable voice_vlan v2

Command: enable voice_vlan v2
Success.
115-2 disable voice_vlan

Description
The command is used to disable the voice VLAN function on a switch. When the voice VLAN
function is disabled, the voice VLAN will become unassigned.
Format
disable voice_vlan
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable the voice VLAN:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable voice_vlan
Command: disable voice_vlan
Success.
115-3 config voice_vlan priority

Description
This command is used to configure the voice VLAN priority. The voice VLAN priority will be the
priority associated with the voice VLAN traffic to distinguish the QoS of the voice traffic from data
traffic.
Format
config voice_vlan priority <int 0-7>
Parameters
priority - The priority of the voice VLAN. The default priority is 5.
<int 0-7> - Enter the priotity value here. This value must be between 0 and 7.
1035

®
Restrictions
Example
To set the priority of the voice VLAN to be six:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config voice_vlan priority 6
Command: config voice_vlan priority 6
Success.
115-4 config voice_vlan oui

Description
This command is used to configure the user-defined voice traffic’s OUI. The OUI is used to identify
the voice traffic. There are a number of pre-defined OUIs. The user can further define the user-
defined OUIs if needed.The user-defined OUI cannot be the same as the pre-defined OUI.
The following are the pre-defined voice traffic’s OUI:
OUI Vendor Mnemonic name

00:E0:BB 3COM 3com
00:03:6B Cisco cisco
00:E0:75 Veritel veritel
00:D0:1E Pingtel pingtel
00:01:E3 Siemens siemens
00:60:B9 NEC/ Philips nec&philips
00:0F:E2 Huawei-3COM huawei&3com
00:09:6E Avaya avaya
Format
config voice_vlan oui [add | delete] <macaddr> <macmask> {description <desc 32>}
Parameters
oui - Specify the OUI used for this configuration.
add - Adding a user-defined OUI of a voice device vendor.
delete - Deleting a user-defined OUI of a voice device vendor.
<macaddr> - The user-defined OUI MAC address.
<macmask> - The user-defined OUI MAC address mask.
description - (Optional) The description for the user-defined OUI.
<desc 32> - Enter the description here. This value can be up to 32 characters long.
1036

®
Restrictions
Example
To add a user-defined OUI for a voice device:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config voice_vlan oui add 00-0A-OB-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-
00-00
Command: config voice_vlan oui add 00-0A-OB-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00
Success.
115-5 config voice_vlan ports

Description
This command is used to enable or disable the voice VLAN function on ports.
Format
config voice_vlan ports [<portlist> | all] [state [enable | disable] | mode [auto {[tag
|untag]}|manual]]
Parameters
ports - Specify a range of port to set.
state - The voice VLAN function state on ports. The default state is disabled.
enable - Specify that the voice VLAN function for this switch will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the voice VLAN function for this switch will be disabled.
mode - The voice VLAN mode. The default mode is auto.
auto - Specify that the voice VLAN mode will be set to auto.
tag - When the port is working in auto-tagged mode, and learns about a voice device
through the device’s OUI, it will join the voice VLAN as a tagged member automatically.
When the voice device sends voice VLAN tagged packets, the Switch will change its
priority. When the voice device sends untagged packets, it will forward them to port’s
PVID VLAN.
untag - When the port is working in auto-untagged mode, and the port captures a voice
device through the device’s OUI, it will join the voice VLAN as an untagged member
automatically. When the voice device sends voice VLAN tagged packets, the Switch will
forward them according to the tag. When the voice device sends voice VLAN untagged
packets, it will assign priority and voice VLAN ID into this packet. When the Switch
receives LLDP-MED packets, it checks the VLAN ID, tagged flag and priority flag.The
switch should follow the tagged flag and priority setting. By default, the mode is auto
untagged.
manual - Specify that the voice VLAN mode will be set to manual.
Restrictions
1037

®
Example
To configure voice VLAN ports 4-6 to enable:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config voice_vlan ports 1:4-1:6 state enable
Command: config voice_vlan ports 1:4-1:6 state enable
Success.
To set the mode auto to voice VLAN ports 3-5:

DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config voice_vlan ports 1:3-1:5 mode auto
Command: config voice_vlan ports 1:3-1:5 mode auto
Success.
115-6 config voice_vlan aging_time

Description
This command is used to set the aging time of the voice VLAN. The aging time is used to remove
a port from voice VLAN if the port is an automatic VLAN member. When the last voice device
stops sending traffic and the MAC address of this voice device is aged out, the voice VLAN aging
timer will be started. The port will be removed from the voice VLAN after expiration of the voice
VLAN aging timer.
If the voice traffic resumes during the aging time, the aging timer will be stopped and reset.
Format
config voice_vlan aging_time <min 1-65535>
Parameters
aging_time - The aging time to set. The default value is 720 minutes.
<min 1-65535> - Enter the aging time value here. This value must be between 1 and 65535.
Restrictions
Example
To set 60 minutes as the aging time of voice VLAN:
1038

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config voice_vlan aging_time 60

Command: config voice_vlan aging_time 60
Success.
115-7 config voice_vlan log state

Description
This command is used to configure the log state for voice VLAN. If there is a new voice device
detected/or a port joins/leaves the voice VLAN dynamically, and the log is enabled, a log will be
triggered.
Format
config voice_vlan log state [enable | disable]
Parameters
enable - Specify that the sending of a voice VLAN log will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the sending of a voice VLAN log will be disabled.
Restrictions
Example
To enable the log state for voice VLAN:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config voice_vlan log state enable
Command: config voice_vlan log state enable
Success.
115-8 show voice_vlan

Description
This command is used to show the voice VLAN global information.
Format
show voice_vlan
Parameters
None.
1039

®
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the voice VLAN global information when voice VLAN is enabled:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show voice_vlan
Command: show voice_vlan
Voice VLAN State : Enabled

VLAN ID : 2
VLAN Name : v2
Priority : 5
Log State : Enabled
Member Ports : 1:2,1:5
Dynamic Member Ports :
To display the voice VLAN global information when voice VLAN is disabled:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show voice_vlan
Command: show voice_vlan
Voice VLAN State : Disabled

Voice VLAN : Unassigned
Priority : 5
Log State : Enabled
115-9 show voice_vlan oui

Description
This command show OUI information of voice VLAN.
Format
show voice_vlan oui
Parameters
None.
1040

®
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the OUI information of voice VLAN:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show voice_vlan oui
Command: show voice_vlan oui
OUI Address Mask Description

------------------ ----------------- --------------
00-01-E3-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 Siemens
00-03-6B-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 Cisco
00-09-6E-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 Avaya
00-0A-0B-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00
00-0F-E2-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 Huawei&3COM
00-60-B9-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 NEC&Philips
00-D0-1E-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 Pingtel
00-E0-75-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 Veritel
00-E0-BB-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 3COM
Total Entries: 9
115-10 show voice_vlan ports

Description
This command is used to show the port voice VLAN information.
Format
show voice_vlan ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a list of ports used to be displayed here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the voice VLAN information of ports 1-5:
1041

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show voice_vlan ports 1:1-1:5

Command: show voice_vlan ports 1:1-1:5
Ports Status Mode

----- --------- --------------
1:1 Disabled Auto Untagged
1:4 Enabled Auto Untagged
1:5 Enabled Auto Untagged
115-11 show voice_vlan voice device

Description
This command is used to show voice devices that are connected to the ports. The start time is the
time when the device is detected on this port and the activate time is the latest time the device
sent traffic.
Format
show voice_vlan voice_device {ports <portlist>}
Parameters
ports - (Optional) Specify the list of ports to be configured here.
<portlist> - Enter a list of ports used to be displayed here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the voice devices that are connected to the ports 1-5:
1042

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show voice_vlan voice_device port 1:1-1:5

Command: show voice_vlan voice_device ports 1:1-1:5
Ports Voice Device Start Time Last Active Time

----- ----------------- ---------------- ----------------
1:1 00-E0-BB-00-00-01 2008-10-6 09:00 2008-10-6 10:30
1:1 00-E0-BB-00-00-02 2008-10-6 14:10 2008-10-6 15:00
1:1 00-E0-BB-00-00-03 2008-10-6 14:20 2008-10-6 15:30
1:2 00-03-6B-00-00-01 2008-10-6 17:15 2008-10-6 18:00
1:4 00-E0-75-00-00-02 2008-10-6 18:15 2008-10-6 20:00
1:5 00-01-E3-01-02-03 2008-10-6 18:30 2008-10-6 20:30
Total Entries: 6
115-12 show voice_vlan lldp_med voice_device

Description
This command is used to show the voice devices being discovered by the LLDP-MED.
Format
show voice_vlan lldp_med voice_device
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the voice devices discovered by LLDP-MED:
1043

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show voice_vlan lldp_med voice_device

Command: show voice_vlan lldp_med voice_device
Index : 1
Local Port : 1:1
Chassis ID : 00-E0-BB-00-00-11
Port ID Subtype : Network Address
Port ID : 172.18.1.1
Create Time : 10/6/2008 09:00
Remain Time : 120 Seconds
Index : 2
Local Port : 1:3
Chassis ID : 00-E0-BB-00-00-12
Port ID Subtype : Network Address
Port ID : 172.18.1.2
Create Time : 10/6/2008 09:00
Remain Time : 120 Seconds
Total Entries: 2
1044

®
Chapter 116 Web-Based Access Control

(WAC) Command List
enable wac
disable wac
config wac ports [<portlist> | all] {state [enable | disable] | aging_time [infinite | <min 1-1440>] |
idle_time [infinite | <min 1-1440>] | block_time [<sec 0-300>]} (1)
config wac method [local | radius]
config wac default_redirpath <string 128>
config wac clear_default_redirpath
config wac virtual_ip {<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>}(1)
config wac switch_http_port <tcp_port_number 1-65535> {[http | https]}
create wac user <username 15> {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]}
delete wac [user <username 15> | all_users]
config wac user <username 15> [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094> | clear_vlan]
config wac authorization attributes {radius [enable| disable] | local [enable | disable]}(1)
config wac authentication_page element [default | page_title <desc 128> | login_window_title
<desc 64> | user_name_title <desc 32> | password_title <desc 32> | logout_window_title
<desc 64> | notification_line <value 1-5> <desc 128>]
show wac
show wac ports {<portlist>}
show wac user
show wac auth_state ports {<portlist>}
show wac authenticate_page
clear wac auth_state [ports [<portlist> | all] {authenticated | authenticating | blocked} | macaddr
<macaddr>]
116-1 enable wac

Description
This command is used to enable WAC function.
Format
enable wac
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable WAC:
1045

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# enable wac

Command: enable wac
Success.
116-2 disable wac

Description
This command is used to disable WAC function; all authentication entries related to WAC will be
deleted.
Format
disable wac
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable WAC:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# disable wac
Command: disable wac
Success.
116-3 config wac ports

Description
This command is used to configure state and other parameters of the ports.
Format
config wac ports [<portlist> | all] {state [enable | disable] | aging_time [infinite | <min 1-
1440>] | idle_time [infinite | <min 1-1440>] | block_time [<sec 0-300>]} (1)
Parameters
<portlist> - A port range to set their WAC state.
1046

®
all - Configure all the Switch ports’ WAC state.

state - (Optional) To specify the port state of WAC
enable - Specify that the port state of WAC will be enabled.
disable - Specify that the port state of WAC will be disabled.
aging_time - (Optional) A time period during which an authenticated host will keep in
authenticated state.
infinite - Indicates never to age out the authenticated host on the port
<min 1-1440> - Enter the aging time period here. This value must be between 1 and 1440
minutes.
idle_time - (Optional) If there is no traffic during idle time, the host will be moved back to
unauthenticated state
infinite - Indicates never to check the idle state of the authenticated host on the port.
<min 1-1440> - Enter the idle time period here. This value must be between 1 and 1440
minutes.
block_time - (Optional) If a host fails to pass the authentication, it will be blocked for a period
specified by “block_time”.
<sec 0-300> - Enter the blocking time here. This value must be between 0 and 300 seconds.
Restrictions
Example
To config state and other parameters of the ports:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config wac ports 1:1-1:9 state enable
Command: config wac ports 1:1-1:9 state enable
Success.
116-4 config wac method

Description
This command is used to specify the RADIUS protocol used by WAC to complete RADIUS
authentication.
WAC shares other RADIUS configuration with 802.1X, when using this command to set the
RADIUS protocol, you must make sure the RADIUS server added by “config radius …” command
supports the protocol.
Format
config wac method [local | radius]
Parameters
local - The authentication will be done via the local database.
radius - The authentication will be done via the RADIUS server.
1047

®
Restrictions
Example
To configure WAC auth method:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config wac method radius
Command: config wac method radius
Success.
116-5 config wac default_redirpath

Description
This command is used to configure WAC default redirect path. If default redirect path is configured,
the user will be redirected to the default redirect path after successful authentication.
When the string is cleared, the client will not be redirected to another URL after successful
authentication.
Format
config wac default_redirpath <string 128>
Parameters
<string 128> - The URL that the client will be redirected to after successful authentication. By
default, the redirected path is cleared. This value can be up to 128 characters long.
Restrictions
Example
To config WAC default redirect URL:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config wac default_redirpath http://www.dlink.com
Command: config wac default_redirpath http://www.dlink.com
Success.
1048

®
116-6 config wac clear_default_redirpath

Description
This command is used to clear the WAC default redirect path. When the string is cleared, the client
will not be redirected to another URL after successful authentication.
Format
config wac clear_default_redirpath
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To clear WAC default redirect URL:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config wac clear_default_redirpath
Command: config wac clear_default_redirpath
Success.
116-7 config wac virtual_ip

Description
This command is used to configure the virtual IP address for WAC. The virtual IP of WAC is used
to accept authentication request from unauthenticated host. Only requests sent to this IP will get
response correctly.
This IP does not respond to ARP request or ICMP packet!
Format
config wac virtual_ip {<ipaddr> | <ipv6addr>}(1)
Parameters
<ipaddr> - Specify the IP address of the virtual IP.
<ipv6addr> - Specify the IPv6 address of the virtual IP. (EI Mode Only)
Restrictions
1049

®
Example
Set virtual IP address:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config wac virtual_ip 1.1.1.1
Command: config wac virtual_ip 1.1.1.1
Success.
116-8 config wac switch_http_port

Description
This command is used to configure the HTTP or HTTPs ports used by WAC. The TCP port for
HTTP or HTTPs is used to identify the HTTP or HTTPs packets
That will be trapped to CPU for authentication processing, or to access the login page.
If not specified, the default port number for HTTP is 80, and the default port number for HTTPS is
443.
If no protocol specified, the protocol is HTTP.
The HTTP cannot run at TCP port 443, and the HTTPS cannot run at TCP port 80.
Format
config wac switch_http_port <tcp_port_number 1-65535> {[http | https]}
Parameters
<tcp_port_number 1-65535> - A TCP port which the WAC Switch listens to and uses to finish
the authenticating process. The range of port number is 1-65535.
http - (Optional) To specify the WAC runs HTTP protocol on this TCP port.
https - (Optional) To specify the WAC runs HTTPS protocol on this TCP port.
Restrictions
Example
To config HTTP(s) port of the Switch used by WAC:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config wac switch_http_port 8888 http
Command: config wac switch_http_port 8888 http
Success.
1050

®
116-9 create wac user

Description
This command is used to create account for web-base access control.
This user account is independent with login user account.
If VLAN is not specified, the user will not get a VLAN assigned after the authentication.
Format
create wac user <username 15> {[vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094>]}
Parameters
user - User account for web-base access control.
<username 15> - Enter the user name here. This name can be up to 15 characters long.
vlan - (Optional) Specify the target VLAN name for authenticated hosts which will uses this user
long.
vlanid - (Optional) Specify the target VLAN ID for authenticated hosts which will uses this user
Restrictions
Example
To create a WAC local user:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create wac user Jim
Command: create wac user Jim
Enter a case-sensitive new password:***

Enter the new password again for confirmation:***
Success.
116-10 delete wac user

Description
This command is used to delete WAC users from the local DB.
Format
delete wac [user <username 15> | all_users]
1051

®
Parameters
user - To specify the user name to be deleted
all_users - All user accounts in local DB will be deleted.
Restrictions
Example
To delete a WAC local user:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# delete wac user 123
Command: delete wac user 123
Success.
116-11 config wac user

Description
This command is used to update the local user DB. Only created user can be configured
Format
config wac user <username 15> [vlan <vlan_name 32> | vlanid <vlanid 1-4094> | clear_vlan]
Parameters
user - The user name to be configured.
vlan - Specify the VLAN name for authenticated host which uses this user account to pass
authentication.
long.
vlanid - Target VLAN ID for authenticated host which uses this user account to pass
authentication.
clear_vlan - Specify that the VLAN details for the specified user will be cleared.
Restrictions
Example
To configure WAC local user:
1052

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config wac user Jim vlanid 3

Command: config wac user Jim vlanid 3
Enter a old password: ***

Enter a case-sensitive new password: ***
Enter the new password again for confirmation: ***
Success.
116-12 config wac authorization attributes

Description
This command is used to enable or disable the acceptation of authorized configuration. When the
authorization is enabled for WAC’s radius, the authorized data assigned by the RADUIS server will
be accepted if the global authorization network is enabled. When the authorization is enabled for
WAC’s local, the authorized data assigned by the local database will be accepted.
Format
config wac authorization attributes {radius [enable| disable] | local [enable | disable]}(1)
Parameters
radius - (Optional) If specified to enable, the authorized data assigned by the RADUIS server will
be accepted if the global authorization network is enabled. The default state is enabled.
enable - Specify that the authorized data assigned by the RADUIS server will be accepted.
disable - Specify that the authorized data assigned by the RADUIS server will not be
accepted.
local - (Optional) If specified to enable, the authorized data assigned by the local database will
be accepted if the global authorization network is enabled. The default state is enabled.
enable - Specify that the authorized data assigned by the local database will be accepted.
disable - Specify that the authorized data assigned by the local database will not be accepted.
Restrictions
Example
To disable acceptation of authorized configuration:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config wac authorization attributes local disable
Command: config wac authorization attributes local disable
Success.
1053

®
116-13 config wac authentication_page element

Description
This command is used to customize the authenticate page elements.
Format
config wac authentication_page element [default | page_title <desc 128> |
login_window_title <desc 64> | user_name_title <desc 32> | password_title <desc 32> |
logout_window_title <desc 64> | notification_line <value 1-5> <desc 128>]
Parameters
default - Reset the page elements to default.
page_title - Specify to configure the title of the authentication page.
<desc 128> -Enter a description with maximum of 128 characters.
login_window_title - Specify to configure the login window title of the authentication page.
<desc 64> - Enter a description with maximum of 64 characters.
user_name_title - Specify configure the user name title of the authentication page.
password_title - Specify to configure the password title of the authentication page.
logout_window_title - Specify to configure the logout window title of the authentication page.
notification_line - Specify to set the notification information by line in authentication Web pages.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the authenticate page elements:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config wac authentication_page element notification_line 1 C
opyright @ 2011 D-Link All Rights Reserved
Command: config wac authentication_page element notification_line 1 Copyright @
2011 D-Link All Rights Reserved
Success.
116-14 show wac

Description
This command is used to display the WAC global setting.
1054

®
Format
show wac
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
Show global configuration about WAC:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show wac
Command: show wac
Web-based Access Control

--------------------------------
State : Enabled
Method : Local
Redirect Path : http://www.dlink.com
Virtual IP : 1.1.1.1
Virtual IPv6 : ::
Switch HTTP Port : 8888 (HTTP)
RADIUS Authorization : Enabled
Local Authorization : Disabled
116-15 show wac ports

Description
This command is used to display the port level setting.
Format
show wac ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
ports - Specify a range of member ports to show the status.
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a list of ports to display here.
Restrictions
None.
1055

®
Example
To show WAC port state and other parameters:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show wac ports 1-3
Command: show wac ports 1-3
Port State Aging Time Idle Time Block Time

(min) (min) (sec)
------- ------------- ------------- ------------ ------------
1:1 Enabled 60 30 120
1:2 Enabled 60 30 120
1:3 Enabled 120 60 120
116-16 show wac user

Description
This command is used to show web authentication account.
Format
show wac user
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To show WAC local user:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin# show wac user
Command: show wac user
User Name Password VID
----------------- ----------------- ---------
Jim pasx 1000
Total Entries: 1
116-17 show wac auth_state

Description
This command is used to display the authentication state of a port.
1056

®
Format
show wac auth_state ports {<portlist>}
Parameters
ports - Specify a range of member ports to show the status.
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a list of ports to display here.
Restrictions
None.
Example
Supposed that port 1 is in host-based mode:
1. MAC 00-00-00-00-00-01 is authenticated without VLAN assigned (may be the specified
target VLAN does not exist or target VLAN has not been specified at all), the ID of RX
VLAN will be displayed (RX VLAN ID is 20 and the assigned VLAN ID is 4004 in this
example).
2. MAC 00-00-00-00-00-02 is authenticated with target VLAN assigned, the ID of target
VLAN will be displayed (RX VLAN ID is 20 and the assigned VLAN ID is 1234 in this
example).
3. MAC 00-00-00-00-00-03 failed to pass authentication, the VID field will be shown as “-”
indicating that packets with SA 00-00-00-00-00-03 will be dropped no matter which VLAN
these packets are from.
4. MAC 00-00-00-00-00-04 attempts to start authentication, the VID field will be shown as “-
“until authentication completed.
Supposed that ports 2 and 3 are in port-based mode:

1. MAC 00-00-00-00-00-10 is the MAC which made port 2 pass authentication; MAC address
is followed by “(P)” to indicate the port-based mode authentication. Supposed that port 3 is
in port-based mode:
2. MAC 00-00-00-00-00-20 attempts to start authentication, MAC address is followed by “(P)”
to indicate the port-based mode authentication.
3. MAC 00-00-00-00-00-21 failed to pass authentication, MAC address is followed by “(P)” to
indicate the port-based mode authentication.
1057

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show wac auth_state ports 1:1-1:3

Command: show wac auth_state ports 1:1-1:3
P:Port-based Pri: Priority
Port MAC Address Original State VID Pri Aging Time/ Idle
RX VID Block Time
Time
------ -------------------- ---- -------------- ---- -- ----------- ----
1:1 00-00-00-00-00-01 20 Authenticated - 3 Infinite 40
1:1 00-00-00-00-00-02 20 Authenticated 1234 - Infinite 50
1:1 00-00-00-00-00-03 4004 Blocked - - 60 -
1:1 00-00-00-00-00-04 4004 Authenticating - - 10 -
1:2 00-00-00-00-00-10(P) 2040 Authenticated 1234 2 1440 20
1:3 00-00-00-00-00-20(P) 2045 Authenticating - - 5 -
1:3 00-00-00-00-00-21(P) 2045 Blocked - - 100 -
Total Authenticating Hosts :2

Total Authenticated Hosts :3
Total Blocked Hosts :2
116-18 show wac authenticate_page

Description
This command is used to show the elements of the customized authenticate pages.
Format
show wac authenticate_page
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the authentication page elements:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show wac authenticate_page
Command: show wac authenticate_page
Page Title : D-Link

Login Window Title : Authentication Login
User Name Title : User Name
1058

®
Password Title : Password

Logout Window Title : Logout From The Network
Notification :
Copyright @ 2011 D-Link All Rights Reserved
116-19 clear wac auth_state

Description
This command is used to clear the authentication state of a port. If the port is port-based mode, the
port will return to un-authenticated state. The entire timer associated with the port will be reset.
If the port is host based mode, users on this port will be cleared. The user needs to be re-
authenticated to access the network.
Format
clear wac auth_state [ports [<portlist> | all] {authenticated | authenticating | blocked} |
macaddr <macaddr>]
Parameters
ports - Specify the list of ports whose WAC state will be cleared.
authenticated - (Optional) Specified to clear all authenticated users for a port.
authenticating - (Optional) Specified to clear all authenticating users for a port.
blocked - (Optional) Specified to clear all blocked users for a port.
macaddr - Specify the MAC address of the users to be cleared.
<macaddr> - Enter the MAC address of the users to be cleared here.
Restrictions
Example
To delete WAC hosts on ports 1 to 5:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#clear wac auth_state ports 1:1-1:5
Command: clear wac auth_state ports 1:1-1:5
Success.
1059

®
Chapter 117 Weighted Random Early

Detection (WRED)
Command List
enable wred
disable wred
create wred profile <int 2-128> profile_name <profile_name 32>
config wred profile [default | profile_id <int 2-128> | <profile_name 32>] {tcp | non_tcp} {green |
yellow | red} min_threshold <int 0-100> max_threshold <int 0-100> max_drop_rate <int 0-
100>
config wred ports [<portlist> | all] [cos <class_id 0-7> [profile [default | profile_id <int 2-128> |
<profile_name 32>] | weight <int 0-15>] | profile [default | profile_id <int 2-128> |
<profile_name 32>] | weight <int 0-15>]
delete wred profile [profile_id <int 2-128> | <profile_name 32> |all]
show wred {ports {<portlist>}}
show wred profile {[ default | profile_id <int 2-128> | <profile_name 32>]}
117-1 enable wred

Description
This command is used to enable the WRED global state.
Format
enable wred
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To enable global wred state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#enable wred
Command: enable wred
Success.
1060

®
117-2 disable wred

Description
This command is used to disable the WRED global state.
Format
disable wred
Parameters
None.
Restrictions
Example
To disable wred global state:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#disable wred
Command: disable wred
Success.
117-3 create wred profile

Description
This command is used to create a WRED profile.
Format
create wred profile <int 2-128> profile_name <profile_name 32>
Parameters
<int 2-128> - Specify the WRED profile ID to be added.
profile_name - Specify the profile name to be added.
<profile_name 32> - Enter the profile name.
Restrictions
Example
To create a wred profile id 2:
1061

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#create wred profile 2 profile_name profilename

Command: create wred profile 2 profile_name profilename
Success.
117-4 config wred profile

Description
This command is used to configure the WRED profile.
Format
config wred profile [default | profile_id <int 2-128> | <profile_name 32>] {tcp | non_tcp}
{green | yellow | red} min_threshold <int 0-100> max_threshold <int 0-100> max_drop_rate
<int 0-100>
Parameters
default - Specify the default WRED profile to be configured.
profile_id - Specify the WRED profile ID to be configured.
<int 2-128> - Enter the WRED profile ID.
<profile_name 32> - Enter the WRED profile name.
tcp - (Optional) Specify the TCP type of packets to be dropped.
non_tcp - (Optional) Specify the non-TCP type of packets to be dropped.
green - (Optional) Specify the green packets to be dropped.
yellow - (Optional) Specify the yellow packets to be dropped.
red - (Optional) Specify the red packets to be dropped.
min_threshold - Specify the minimum threshold value used. If the queue size is higher than this
value, then the color yellow will be assigned to it. If the queue size is lower than this value,
then the color green will be assigned to it and then it will be guaranteed not to be dropped.
Yellow packet behavior depends on the profile setting for this color.
<int 0-100> - Enter the value between 0 and 100.
max_threshold - Specify the maximum threshold value used. If the queue size is lower than this
value, then the color yellow will be assigned to it. If the queue size is higher than this value,
then the color red will be assigned to it and then it will be dropped. Yellow packet behavior
depends on the profile setting for this color.
max_drop_rate - Specify the maximum drop rate value.
Restrictions
Example
To config the profile 2 to drop all type and all color packets:
1062

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config wred profile profile_id 2 min_threshold 30

max_threshold 50 max_drop_rate 10
Command: config wred profile profile_id 2 min_threshold 30 max_threshold 50
max_drop_rate 10
Success.
117-5 config wred ports

Description
This command is used to configure the WRED parameters of the ports.
Format
config wred ports [<portlist> | all] [cos <class_id 0-7> [profile [default | profile_id <int 2-128>
| <profile_name 32>] | weight <int 0-15>] | profile [default | profile_id <int 2-128> |
<profile_name 32>] | weight <int 0-15>]
Parameters
cos – Specify the hardware priority queues.
<class_id 0-7> - Enter the priority between 0 and 7.
profile - Specify the profile to be used.
default - Specify the default profile to be used.
profile_id - Specify the profile ID to be used.
<int 2-128> - Enter the profile ID between 2 and 128.
<profile_name 32> - Specify the profile name to be used.
weight – Specify the weight of average queue size formular.
<int 0-15> - Enter the weight between 0 and 15.
profile - Specify the profile to be used.
default - Specify the default profile to be used.
profile_id - Specify the profile ID to be used.
<profile_name 32> - Specify the profile name to be used.
weight – Specify the weight of average queue size formular.
<int 0-15> - Enter the weight between 0 and 15.
Restrictions
Example
To configure the port 1:1 as queue 2 and to use the profile 2:
1063

®
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#config wred ports 1:1 cos 2 profile profile_id 2

Command: config wred ports 1:1 cos 2 profile profile_id 2
Success.
117-6 delete wred profile

Description
This command is used to delete a WRED profile.
Format
delete wred profile [profile_id <int 2-128> | <profile_name 32> |all]
Parameters
profile_id - Specify the profile ID to be deleted.
<profile_name 32> - Specify the profile name to be delete.
all - Specify all profiles to be delete.
Restrictions
Example
To delete the profile 2:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#delete wred profile all
Command: delete wred profile all
Success.
117-7 show wred

Description
This command is used to display the WRED port information.
Format
show wred {ports {<portlist>}}
Parameters
ports - (Optional) Specify a range of ports.
1064

®
<portlist> - (Optional) Enter a range of ports.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display wred of port 1:1 and 1:2 settings:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show wred ports 1:1-1:2
Command: show wred ports 1:1-1:2
Global WRED : Disabled
Port: 1:1
Class_ID Weight Profile_id Profile_Name
-------- ------ ---------- ------------
0 9 1 default
1 9 1 default
2 2 2 profilename
3 9 1 default
4 9 1 default
5 9 1 default
6 9 1 default
7 9 1 default
Port: 1:2
Class_ID Weight Profile_id Profile_Name
-------- ------ ---------- ------------
0 9 1 default
1 9 1 default
2 9 1 default
3 9 1 default
4 9 1 default
5 9 1 default
6 9 1 default
7 9 1 default
117-8 show wred profile

Description
This command is used to display the WRED profile information.
Format
show wred profile {[ default | profile_id <int 2-128> | <profile_name 32>]}
1065

®
Parameters
default - (Optional) Specify the default profile to be displayed.
profile_id - (Optional) Specify the profile ID to be displayed.
<profile_name 32> - (Optional) Specify the profile name to be displayed.
Restrictions
None.
Example
To display the WRED profile information:
DGS-3120-24TC:admin#show wred profile
Command: show wred profile
Total Profile Number: 2
WRED Profile ID: 1 Profile Name: default

Packet Type Min-Threshold Max-Threshold Max-Drop-Rate
--------------- ------------- ------------- -------------
TCP-GREEN 50 100 50
TCP-YELLOW 50 100 50
TCP-RED 50 100 50
NON-TCP-GREEN 50 100 50
NON-TCP-YELLOW 50 100 50
NON-TCP-RED 50 100 50
WRED Profile ID: 2 Profile Name: profilename

Packet Type Min-Threshold Max-Threshold Max-Drop-Rate
--------------- ------------- ------------- -------------
TCP-GREEN 50 100 50
TCP-YELLOW 50 100 50
TCP-RED 50 100 50
NON-TCP-GREEN 50 100 50
NON-TCP-YELLOW 50 100 50
NON-TCP-RED 50 100 50
1066

®
Appendix A Password Recovery

Procedure
This chapter describes the procedure for resetting passwords on D-Link switches. Authenticating
any user who tries to access networks is necessary and important. The basic authentication
method used to accept qualified users is through a local login, utilizing a Username and Password.
Sometimes, passwords get forgotten or destroyed, so network administrators need to reset these
passwords. This chapter explains how the Password Recovery feature can help network
administrators reach this goal.
The following steps explain how to use the Password Recovery feature on D-Link devices to easily
recover passwords.
Complete these steps to reset the password:
1. For security reasons, the Password Recovery feature requires the user to physically
access the device. Therefore this feature is only applicable when there is a direct
connection to the console port of the device. It is necessary for the user needs to attach a
terminal or PC with terminal emulation to the console port of the Switch.
2. Power on the Switch. After the runtime image and UART init are loaded to 100%, the
Switch will allow 2 seconds for the user to press the hotkey [^] (Shift + 6) to enter the
“Password Recovery Mode.” Once the Switch enters the “Password Recovery Mode,” all
ports on the Switch will be disabled and all port LEDs will be lit.
Boot Procedure V3.00.501

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Power On Self Test ........................................ 100 %
MAC Address : 00-01-02-03-04-00

H/W Version : B1
Please Wait, Loading V3.00.522 Runtime Image .............. 100 %

UART init ................................................. 100 %
Starting runtime image
Password Recovery Mode

>
3. In the “Password Recovery Mode” only the following commands can be used.
Command Parameters
reset config The reset config command resets the whole configuration back to the
{force_agree} default values. If force_agree is specified, the configuration will reset to
default without the user’s agreement.
reboot The reboot command exits the Reset Password Recovery Mode and
{force_agree} restarts the Switch. A confirmation message will be displayed to allow the
user to save the current settings.
1067

®
Command Parameters
reset account The reset account command deletes all the previously created accounts.
reset password The reset password command resets the password of the specified user. If
{<username>} a username is not specified, the passwords of all users will be reset.
show account The show account command displays all previously created accounts.
1068

®
Appendix B System Log Entries

The following table lists all possible entries and their corresponding meanings that will appear in
the System Log of this Switch.
Category Event Description Log Information Severity Remark

System System started up [Unit <unitID>,] System started Critical
up
System warm start [Unit <unitID>,] System warm Critical
start
System cold start [Unit <unitID>,] System cold start Critical
Configuration saved to [Unit <unitID>,] Configuration Informational "by console" and
flash saved to flash by "IP: <ipaddr>" are
console(Username: XOR shown in log
<username>, IP: <ipaddr> ) string, which
means if user login
by console, there
will no IP
information for
logging.
System log saved to flash [Unit <unitID>,] System log Informational "by console" and
saved to flash by "IP: <ipaddr>" are
means if user login
by console, there
will no IP
information for
logging.
Configuration and log [Unit <unitID>,] Configuration Informational "by console" and
saved to flash and log saved to flash by "IP: <ipaddr>" are
means if user login
by console, there
will no IP
information for
logging.
Internal Power failed [Unit <unitID>,] Internal Power Critical
failed
Internal Power is [Unit <unitID>,] Internal Power is Critical
recovered recovered
Redundant Power failed [Unit <unitID>,] Redundant Critical
Power failed
Redundant Power is [Unit <unitID>,] Redundant Critical
working Power is working
Side Fan failed [Unit <unitID>,] Side Fan failed Critical
Side Fan recovered [Unit <unitID>,]Side Fan Critical
recovered
up/down-load Firmware upgraded [Unit <unitID>,] Firmware Informational "by console" and
successfully upgraded by console "IP: <ipaddr>" are
successfully (Username: XOR shown in log
means if user login
by console, there
will no IP
information for
logging.
Firmware upgrade was [Unit <unitID>,] Firmware Warning "by console" and
unsuccessful upgrade by console was "IP: <ipaddr>" are
unsuccessful! (Username: XOR shown in log
means if user login
by console, there
will no IP
information for
logging.
Configuration successfully Configuration successfully Informational "by console" and
1069

®
downloaded downloaded by "IP: <ipaddr>" are

means if user login
by console, there
will no IP
information for
logging.
Configuration download Configuration download by Warning "by console" and
was unsuccessful console was unsuccessful! "IP: <ipaddr>" are
(Username: <username>, IP: XOR shown in log
<ipaddr>) string, which
means if user login
by console, there
will no IP
information for
logging.
Configuration successfully Configuration successfully Informational "by console" and
uploaded uploaded by console "IP: <ipaddr>" are
<ipaddr> ) string, which
means if user login
by console, there
will no IP
information for
logging.
Configuration upload was Configuration upload by console Warning "by console" and
unsuccessful was unsuccessful! (Username: "IP: <ipaddr>" are
<username>, IP: <ipaddr> ) XOR shown in log
string, which
means if user login
by console, there
will no IP
information for
logging.
Log message successfully Log message successfully Informational "by console" and
uploaded uploaded by console "IP: <ipaddr>" are
<ipaddr> ) string, which
means if user login
by console, there
will no IP
information for
logging.
Log message upload was Log message upload by console Warning "by console" and
unsuccessful was unsuccessful! (Username: "IP: <ipaddr>" are
string, which
means if user login
by console, there
will no IP
information for
logging.
Firmware successfully Firmware successfully uploaded Informational "by console" and
uploaded by console (Username: "IP: <ipaddr>" are
string, which
means if user login
by console, there
will no IP
information for
logging.
Firmware upload was Firmware upload by console was Warning "by console" and
unsuccessful unsuccessful! (Username: "IP: <ipaddr>" are
string, which
means if user login
by console, there
will no IP
information for
logging.
Interface Port link up Port <[unitID:]portNum> link up, Informational link state, for ex: ,
<link state> 100Mbps FULL
duplex
1070

®
Port link down Port <[unitID:]portNum> link Informational

down
Stacking Hot insert Unit<UnitID>,MAC:<macaddr> Informational
Hot insertion.
Hot remove Unit<UnitID>,MAC:<macaddr> Informational
Hot removal.
Firmware upgraded to Firmware upgraded to SLAVE Informational
SLAVE successfully successfully
(Username:<username>)
Firmware upgraded to Firmware upgraded to SLAVE Warning
SLAVE unsuccessfully unsuccessfully! (Username:
<username>)
Stacking topology change. Stacking topology is Informational
<Stack_TP_TYPE>. Master(Unit
<unitID>, MAC:<macaddr>)
Backup master changed Backup master changed to Informational
to master master. Master (Unit: <unitID>)
Slave changed to master Slave changed to master. Master Informational
(Unit: <unitID>)
Box ID conflict Hot insert failed, box ID conflict: Critical
Unit <unitID> conflict (MAC:
<macaddr> and MAC:
<macaddr>)
Console Successful login through [Unit <unitID>,] Successful login Informational There are no IP
Console through Console (Username: and MAC if login
<username>) by console.
Login failed through [Unit <unitID>,] Login failed Warning There are no IP
Console through Console (Username: and MAC if login
Logout through Console [Unit <unitID>,] Logout through Informational There are no IP
Console (Username: and MAC if login
Console session timed out [Unit <unitID>,] Console session Informational There are no IP
timed out (Username: and MAC if login
Web Successful login through Successful login through Web Informational
Web (Username: <username>, IP:
<ipaddr> )
Login failed through Web Login failed through Web Warning
(Username: <username>, IP:
<ipaddr> )
Logout through Web Logout through Web (Username: Informational
<username>, IP: <ipaddr> )
Web session timed out Web session timed out Informational
<ipaddr> )
Successful login through Successful login through Informational
Web(SSL) Web(SSL) (Username:
Login failed through Login failed through Web(SSL) Warning
Web(SSL) (Username: <username>, IP:
<ipaddr> )
Logout through Web(SSL) Logout through Web(SSL) Informational
<ipaddr>)
Web(SSL) session timed Web(SSL) session timed out Informational
out (Username: <username>, IP:
<ipaddr> )
Telnet Successful login through Successful login through Telnet Informational
Telnet (Username: <username>, IP:
<ipaddr>)
Login failed through Login failed through Telnet Warning
Telnet (Username: <username>, IP:
<ipaddr> )
Logout through Telnet Logout through Telnet Informational
<ipaddr>)
Telnet session timed out Telnet session timed out Informational
<ipaddr>)
SNMP SNMP request received SNMP request received from Informational
with invalid community <ipAddress> with invalid
string community string!
1071

®
STP Topology changed Topology changed Informational

(Instance:<InstanceID> ,Port:<[u
nitID:]portNum>,MAC:<macaddr
>)
New Root selected [CIST | CIST Regional | MSTI Informational
Regional] New Root bridge
selected( [Instance:
<InstanceID> ]MAC: <macaddr>
Priority :<value>)
Spanning Tree Protocol is Spanning Tree Protocol is Informational
enabled enabled
Spanning Tree Protocol is Spanning Tree Protocol is Informational
disabled disabled
New root port New root port selected Notice
(Instance:<InstanceID>,
port:<[unitID:]portNum>)
Spanning Tree port status Spanning Tree port status Notice
changed change (Instance:<InstanceID> ,
Port:<[unitID:]portNum>)
<old_status> -> <new_status>
Spanning Tree port role Spanning Tree port role change Informational
changed (Instance:<InstanceID> ,
Port:<unitID:portNum>)
<old_role> -> <new_role>
Spannnig Tree instance Spanning Tree instance created Informational
created (Instance:<InstanceID>)
Spannnig Tree instance Spanning Tree instance deleted Informational
deleted (Instance:<InstanceID>)
Spanning Tree Version Spanning Tree version change Informational
changed (new version:<new_version>)
Spanning Tree MST Spanning Tree MST Informational
configuration ID name and configuration ID name and
revision level changed revision level change
(name:<name> ,revision level
<revision_level>).
configuration ID VLAN configuration ID VLAN mapping
mapping table deleted table change (instance:
<InstanceID> delete vlan
<startvlanid> [- <endvlanid>])
configuration ID VLAN configuration ID VLAN mapping
mapping table added table change (instance:
<InstanceID> add vlan
<startvlanid> [- <endvlanid>])
DoS Spoofing attack Possible spoofing attack from IP: Critical
1. The soure ip is same as <ipaddr>, MAC: <macaddr>,
switch's interface ip but Port: <[unitID:]portNum>
the source mac is different
2. Source ip is the same
as the switch's IP in ARP
packet
3. Self IP packet detected
DOS attack <dos_name> is blocked from (IP: Informational
1. when the specific DoS <ipaddr> Port: <[unit
packet is detected ID:]portNum>)
SSH Successful login through Successful login through SSH Informational
SSH (Username: <username>, IP:
<ipaddr> )
Login failed through SSH Login failed through SSH Warning
<ipaddr>, )
Logout through SSH Logout through SSH (Username: Informational
SSH session timed out SSH session timed out Informational
<ipaddr>)
SSH server is enabled SSH server is enabled Informational
SSH server is disabled SSH server is disabled Informational
Successfully download SSH client public keys file was Informational
client public keys. upgraded successfully
(Username: <username>, IP: <
ipaddr | ipv6address >)
AAA Authentication Policy is Authentication Policy is enabled Informational
1072

®
enabled (Module: AAA)

Authentication Policy is Authentication Policy is disabled Informational
disabled (Module: AAA)
Console authenticated by Console authenticated by AAA
AAA local method local method (Username:
<username>)
Login failed through Login failed through Console Warning
Console authenticated by authenticated by AAA local
AAA local method method (Username:
<username>)
Successful login through Successful login through Web Informational
Web authenticated by from <userIP> authenticated by
AAA local method AAA local method (Username:
<username> )
Login failed through Web Login failed failed through Web Warning
authenticated by AAA from <userIP> authenticated by
local method AAA local method (Username:
<username> )
Web(SSL) authenticated Web(SSL) from <userIP>
by AAA local method authenticated by AAA local
method (Username:
<username> )
Web(SSL) authenticated from <userIP> authenticated by
by AAA local method AAA local method (Username:
<username>)
Successful login through Successful login through Telnet Informational
Telnet authenticated by from <userIP> authenticated by
<username>, )
Login failed through Login failed through Telnet from Warning
Telnet authenticated by <userIP> authenticated by AAA
AAA local method local method (Username:
<username> )
Successful login through Successful login through SSH Informational
SSH authenticated by from <userIP> authenticated by
<username> )
Login failed through SSH Login failed through SSH from Warning
authenticated by AAA <userIP> authenticated by AAA
local method local method (Username:
<username>)
Console authenticated by Console authenticated by AAA
AAA none method none method (Username:
<username>)
AAA none method AAA none method (Username:
<username> )
by AAA none method authenticated by AAA none
method (Username:
<username> )
<username> )
<username> )
Successful login through Successful login through Informational There are no IP
Console authenticated by Console authenticated by AAA and MAC if login
AAA server server <serverIP> (Username: by console.
<username>)
Login failed through Login failed through Console Warning There are no IP
Console authenticated by authenticated by AAA server and MAC if login
AAA server <serverIP> (Username: by console.
<username>)
Login failed through Login failed through Console due Warning
1073

®
Console due to AAA to AAA server timeout or

server timeout or improper improper configuration
configuration (Username: <username>)
AAA server AAA server <serverIP>
(Username: <username>)
Login failed through Web Login failed through Web from Warning
server server <serverIP> (Username:
<username> )
Login failed through Web Login failed through Web from Warning
due to AAA server timeout <userIP> due to AAA server
or improper configuration timeout or improper configuration
(Username: <username> )
by AAA server authenticated by AAA server
<serverIP> (Username:
<username> )
Web(SSL) authenticated from <userIP> authenticated by
by AAA server AAA server <serverIP>
Web(SSL) due to AAA from <userIP> due to AAA
server timeout or improper server timeout or improper
configuration configuration (Username:
<username> )
Telnet authenticated by <userIP> authenticated by AAA
AAA server server <serverIP> (Username:
<username> )
Telnet due to AAA server <userIP> due to AAA server
timeout or improper timeout or improper configuration
configuration (Username: <username>)
<username> )
due to AAA server timeout <userIP> due to AAA server
or improper configuration timeout or improper configuration
Successful Enable Admin Successful Enable Admin Informational
through Console through Console authenticated
authenticated by AAA by AAA local_enable method
local_enable method (Username: <username>)
Enable Admin failed Enable Admin failed through Warning
through Console Console authenticated by AAA
authenticated by AAA local_enable method
local_enable method (Username: <username>)
through Web through Web from <userIP>
authenticated by AAA authenticated by AAA
local_enable method local_enable method
through Web Web from <userIP>
(Username: <username>)
through Web(SSL) through Web(SSL) from
1074

®

(Username: <username>, )
through Web(SSL) Web(SSL) from <userIP>
through Telnet through Telnet from <userIP>
through Telnet Telnet from <userIP>
through SSH through SSH from <userIP>
through SSH <Telnet or Web or SSH> from
authenticated by AAA by AAA none method
none method (Username: <username>)
authenticated by AAA authenticated by AAA none
none method method (Username:
<username> )
none method none method (Username:
<username>)
<username>)
<username> )
authenticated by AAA by AAA server <serverIP>
server (Username: <username>)
through Console Console authenticated by AAA
authenticated by AAA server <serverIP> (Username:
server <username>)
through Console due to Console due to AAA server
AAA server timeout or timeout or improper configuration
improper configuration (Username: <username>)
authenticated by AAA authenticated by AAA server
server <serverIP> (Username:
<username> )
through Web Web from <userIP>
<username> )
1075

®
through Web due to AAA Web from <userIP> due to AAA

<username>)
<username> )
through Web(SSL) Web(SSL) from <userIP>
<username> )
through Web(SSL) due to Web(SSL) from <userIP> due to
AAA server timeout or AAA server timeout or improper
improper configuration configuration (Username:
<username>)
<username>)
through Telnet Telnet from <userIP>
<username> )
through Telnet due to AAA Telnet from <userIP> due to
server timeout or improper AAA server timeout or improper
<username>)
<username> )
through SSH SSH from <userIP>
<username> )
through SSH due to AAA SSH from <userIP> due to AAA
<username> )
Port Security port security is exceeded Port security violation (MAC Warning
to its maximum learning address: <macaddr> on port:
size and will not learn any <[unitID:]portNum>)
new address
RADIUS VID assigned from RADIUS server <ipaddr> Informational
RADIUS server after assigned VID :<vlanID> to port
RADIUS client is <[unitID:]portNum>
authenticated by RADIUS (account :<username> )
server successfully .This
VID will be assigned to the
port and this port will be
the VLAN untagged port
member.
Ingress bandwidth RADIUS server <ipaddr> Informational
assigned from RADIUS assigned ingress
server after RADIUS client bandwith :<ingressBandwidth>
is authenticated by to port <[unitID:]portNum>
RADIUS server (account : <username>)
successfully .This Ingress
bandwidth will be
assigned to the port.
Egress bandwidth RADIUS server <ipaddr> Informational
assigned from RADIUS assigned egress
server after RADIUS client bandwith :<egressBandwidth> to
is authenticated by port <[unitID:]portNum>
1076

®
RADIUS server (account: <username>)

successfully .This egress
bandwidth will be
802.1p default priority RADIUS server <ipaddr> Informational
assigned from RADIUS assigned 802.1p default
server after RADIUS client priority:<priority> to port
is authenticated by <[unitID:]portNum> (account :
RADIUS server <username>)
successfully. This 802.1p
default priority will be
Failed to assign ACL RADIUS server <ipaddr> Warning
profiles/rules from assigns <username> ACL failure
RADIUS server. at port <[unitID]portNum>
(<string>)
802.1X 802.1X Authentication 802.1X Authentication failure [for Warning
failure. <reason> ] from (Username:
<username>, Port:
<[unitID:]portNum>, MAC:
<macaddr> )
802.1X Authentication 802.1X Authentication Informational
successful. successful from (Username:
<username>, Port:
<[unitID:]portNum>, MAC:
<macaddr>)
A host fails to pass the MAC-based Access Control Critical
MAC-based authentication unauthenticated host(MAC:
Access Control <macaddr>, Port
<[unitID:]portNum>, VID: <vid>)
The authorized user Port <[unitID:]portNum> enters Warning per port
number on a port reaches MAC-based Access Control stop
the max user limit. learning state.
The authorized user Port <[unitID:]portNum> recovers Warning per port
number on a port is below from MAC-based Access Control
the max user limit in a stop learning state.
time interval(interval is
project depended).
The authorized user MAC-based Access Control Warning per system
number on whole device enters stop learning state.
reaches the max user
limit.
The authorized user MAC-based Access Control Warning per system
number on whole device recovers from stop learning
is below the max user limit state.
in a time interval(interval
is project depended).
A host passes the MAC-based Access Control host Informational
authentication login successful (MAC:
<macaddr>, port:
<[unitID]portNum>, VID: <vid>)
A host is aged out MAC-based Access Control host Informational
aged out (MAC: <macaddr>,
port: <[unitID]portNum>, VID:
<vid>)
JWAC When a client host JWAC authenticated user Informational
authenticated successful. (Username: <string>, IP: <ipaddr
| ipv6address>, MAC:
<macaddr>, Port: <[unitID:]
portNum>)
When a client host fails to JWAC unauthenticated user Warning
authenticate. (User Name: <string>, IP:
<ipaddr | ipv6address>, MAC:
<macaddr>, Port:
<[unitID:]portNum>)
This log will be triggered JWAC enters stop learning state. Warning per system
when the number of
authorized users reaches
the maximum user limit on
the whole device.
This log will be triggered JWAC recovers from stop Warning per system
when the number of learning state.
authorized users is below
the maximum user limit on
1077

®
whole device in 5 minutes

WAC When a client host WAC authenticated user Informational
authenticated successful. (Username: <string>, IP: <ipaddr
| ipv6address>, MAC:
<macaddr>, Port: <[unitID:]
portNum>)
When a client host fails to WAC unauthenticated user (User Warning
authenticate. Name: <string>, IP: <ipaddr |
ipv6address>, MAC: <macaddr>,
Port: <[unitID:]portNum>)
The authorized user WAC enters stop learning state. Warning per system
number on whole device
reaches the max user
limit.
The authorized user WAC recovers from stop Warning per system
number on whole device learning state.
is below the max user limit
in a time interval(interval
is project depended).
IMPB Unauthenticated IP Unauthenticated IP-MAC Warning
address encountered and address and discarded by IMPB
discarded by IP-MAC port (IP: <ipaddr>, MAC: <macaddr>,
binding Port <[unitID:]portNum>)
Dynamic IMPB entry is Dynamic IMPB entry conflicts Warning
conflict with static ARP with static ARP(IP: <ipaddr>,
MAC: <macaddr>, Port
<[unitID:]portNum>)
Dynamic IMPB entry is Dynamic IMPB entry conflicts Warning
conflict with static FDB with static FDB(IP: <ipaddr>,
<[unitID:]portNum>)
Dynamic IMPB entry Dynamic IMPB entry conflicts Warning
conflicts with static IMPB with static IMPB(IP: <ipaddr>,
<[unitID:]portNum>)
Creating IMPB entry failed Creating IMPB entry failed due Warning
due to no ACL rule to no ACL rule being
available available(IP:<ipaddr>, MAC:
<macaddr>, Port
<[unitID:]portNum>)
Port shutdown due to the Port < [unitID:] portNum> is Warning
DHCP rate excludes the currently shut down due to the
rate limiting DHCP rate excludes the rate
limiting
Port recovery due to the Port < [unitID:] portNum> is Informational
DHCP auto-recovery timer currently recovery due to the
is timeout DHCP auto-recovery timer is
timeout
IP and Password IP Address change activity [Unit <unitID>,] Management IP Informational "console" and "IP:
Changed address was changed by <ipaddr>" are
<username>,IP:<ipaddr>) string, which
means if user login
by console, there
will no IP
information for
logging.
Password change activity [Unit <unitID>,] Password was Informational "console" and "IP:
changed by console (Username: <ipaddr>" are
<username>,IP:<ipaddr> ) XOR shown in log
string, which
means if user login
by console, there
will no IP
information for
logging.
Safeguard Safeguard Engine is in [Unit <unitID>] Safeguard Engine Informational
Engine normal mode enters NORMAL mode
Safeguard Engine is in [Unit <unitID>] Safeguard Engine Warning
filtering packet mode enters EXHAUSTED mode
Packet Storm Broadcast strom Port <[unitID:]portNum> Warning
occurrence Broadcast storm is occurring
Broadcast storm cleared Port <[unitID:]portNum> Informational
Broadcast storm has cleared
1078

®
Multicast storm Port <[unitID:]portNum> Warning

occurrence Multicast storm is occurring
Multicast storm cleared Port <[unitID:]portNum> Informational
Multicast storm has cleared
Port shut down due to a Port <[unitID:]portNum> is Warning
packet storm currently shut down due to a
packet storm
Loop Back Port loop occurred Port <[unitID:]portNum> LBD Critical
Dection loop occurred. Port blocked
Port loop detection Port <[unitID:]portNum> LBD Informational
restarted after interval port recovered. Loop detection
time restarted
Port with VID loop Port <[unitID:]portNum> VID Critical
occurred <vlanID> LBD loop occurred.
Packet discard begun
Port with VID Loop Port <[unitID:]portNum> VID Informational
detection restarted after <vlanID> LBD recovered. Loop
interval time detection restarted
The number of VLANs Loop VLAN number overflow Informational
that loop back has
occured hit the specified
number.
Gratuituios ARP Gratuituios ARP detected Conflict IP was detected with this Warning
duplicate IP. device (IP: <ipaddr>, MAC:
<macaddr>, Port
<[unitID:]portNum>, Interface:
<ipif_name>).
DHCP Detect untrusted DHCP Detected untrusted DHCP Informational DHCP Server
server IP address server(IP: <ipaddr>, Port: Screening
<[unitID:]portNum>)
BPDU Protection BPDU attack happened Port <[UnitID:]portNum> enter Informational
BPDU under attacking state
(mode: drop / block / shutdown)
BPDU attack Port <[UnitID:]portNum> recover Informational
automatically recover from BPDU under attacking state
automatically
BPDU attack manually Port <[UnitID:]portNum> recover Informational
recover from BPDU under attacking state
manually
MONITOR Temperature exceeds [Uint <unitID>] Temperature Warning
confidence level Sensor <sensorID> enter alarm
state. (current temperature:
<temperature>)
Temperature recovers to [Uint <unitID>] Temperature Informational
normal. Sensor <sensorID> recovers to
normal state. (current
temperature: <temperature>)
CFM Cross-connect is detected CFM cross-connect. Critical
VLAN:<vlanid>, Local(MD
Level:<mdlevel>, Port
<[unitID:]portNum>,
Direction:<mepdirection>)
Remote(MEPID:<mepid>,
MAC:<macaddr>)
Error CFM CCM packet is CFM error ccm. MD Warning
detected Level:<mdlevel>,
VLAN:<vlanid>, Local(Port
<[unitID:]portNum>,
Remote(MEPID:<mepid>,
MAC:<macaddr>)
Can not receive remote CFM remote down. MD Warning
MEP's CCM packet Level:<mdlevel>,
<[unitID:]portNum>,
Remote MEP's MAC CFM remote MAC error. MD Warning
reports an error status Level:<mdlevel>,
<[unitID:]portNum>,
Remote MEP detects CFM remote detects a defect. Informational
CFM defects MD Level:<mdlevel>,
1079

®
<[unitID:]portNum>,
CFM EXTENSION AIS condition detected AIS condition detected. MD Notice
Level:<mdlevel>,
<[unitID:]portNum>,
Direction:<mepdirection>,
MEPID:<mepid>)
AIS condition cleared AIS condition cleared. MD Notice
Level:<mdlevel>,
<[unitID:]portNum>,
MEPID:<mepid>)
LCK condition detected LCK condition detected. MD Notice
Level:<mdlevel>,
<[unitID:]portNum>,
MEPID:<mepid>)
LCK condition cleared LCK condition cleared. MD Notice
Level:<mdlevel>,
<[unitID:]portNum>,
MEPID:<mepid>)
Voice VLAN When a new voice device New voice device detected Informational
is detected in the port (MAC:<macaddr>,Port:<[unitID:]
portNum>)
While the port join to the Port <[unitID:]portNum> add into Informational
voice VLAN while the port voice VLAN <vid >
is auto voice VLAN mode
While the port withdraws Port <[unitID:]portNum> remove Informational
from the voice VLAN while from voice VLAN <vid >
there is no more voice
device detected in the
aging interval.
ERPS Signal failure detected Signal failure detected on node Notice
<macaddr>
Signal failure cleared Signal failure cleared on node Notice
<macaddr>
RPL owner conflict RPL owner conflicted on the ring Warning
<macaddr>
Command Command Logging <username>: execute command Informational
logging "<string>".
DDM DDM exceeded or recover DDM Port <[unitID:]portNum> Critical
from DDM alarm threshold optic module [thresholdType]
[exceedType] the
[thresholdSubType] alarm
threshold
DDM exceeded or recover DDM Port <[unitID:]portNum> Warning
from DDM warning optic module [thresholdType]
threshold [exceedType] the
[thresholdSubType] warning
threshold
LAC Lac trunk group link down Link aggregation Group <LAG Information
and link up log. Index> (Interface: <LAG
interface index>) <link status>
SD Card Execute configuration Error when execute configuration Warning
Management error. <filename> line:<lineno> at time
< time-range>.
Schedule backup fail. Backup <type>:<filename> at Warning
time <time-range> failure.
Execute configuration Execute configuration Informational
success. <filename> success at time <
time-range>.
Schedule backup Backup <type>:<filename> Informational
success. success at time <time-range>.
LLDP LLDP-MED Topology LLDP-MED Topology change notice
change detected detected (on port %d. chassis id:
%d, %s, port id: %d, %s, device
class: %d)
Conflict LLDP-MED Conflict LLDP-MED device type notice
device type detected detected (on port %d. chassis id:
1080

®
%d, %s, port id: %d, %s, device

class: %d)
Incompatible LLDP-MED Incompatible LLDP-MED TLV notice
TLV set detected set detected (on port %d.
chassis id: %d, %s, port id: %d,
%s, device class: %d)
Surveillance When a new surveillance New surveillance device Informational
VLAN device is detected in the detected (Port <portNum>, MAC
port <macaddr>)
When a port which is Port < portNum > add into Informational
enabled surveillance surveillance VLAN <vid >
VLAN joins the
surveillance VLAN
automatically.
When a port leaves the Port < portNum > remove from Informational
surveillance VLAN and at surveillance VLAN <vid >
the same time, no
surveillance device is
detected in the aging
interval for that port, the
log message will be sent.
OSPFv2 OSPF interface link state OSPF interface <intf-name> Informational
changed. changed state to [Up | Down]
OSPF interface OSPF protocol on interface <intf- Informational
administrator state name> changed state to
changed. [Enabled | Disabled]
One OSPF interface OSPF interface <intf-name> Informational
changed from one area to changed from area <area-id> to
another. area <area-id>
One OSPF neighbor state OSPF nbr <nbr-id> on interface Notice
changed from Loading to <intf-name> changed state from
Full. Loading to Full
One OSPF neighbor state OSPF nbr <nbr-id> on interface Notice
changed from Full to <intf-name> changed state from
Down. Full to Down
One OSPF neighbor OSPF nbr <nbr-id> on interface Notice
state’s dead timer expired. <intf-name> dead timer expired
One OSPF virtual OSPF nbr <nbr-id> on virtual link Notice
neighbor state changed changed state from Loading to
from Loading to Full. Full
One OSPF virtual OSPF nbr <nbr-id> on virtual link Notice
neighbor state changed changed state from Full to Down
from Full to Down.
OSPF router ID was OSPF router ID changed to Informational
changed. <router-id>
Enable OSPF. OSPF state changed to Enabled Informational
Disable OSPF. OSPF state changed to Disabled Informational
VRRP One virtual router state VR <vr-id> at interface <intf- Informational
becomes Master. name> switch to Master
One virtual router state VR <vr-id> at interface <intf- Informational
becomes Backup. name> switch to Backup
One virtual router state VR <vr-id> at interface <intf- Informational
becomes Init. name> switch to Init
Authentication type Authentication type mismatch on Warning
mismatch of one received VR <vr-id> at interface <intf-
VRRP advertisement name>
message.
Authentication checking Authentication fail on VR <vr-id> Warning
fail of one received VRRP at interface <intf-name>. Auth
advertisement message. type <auth-type>
Checksum error of one Received an ADV msg with Warning
received VRRP incorrect checksum on VR <vr-
advertisement message. id> at interface <intf-name>
Virtual router ID mismatch Received ADV msg virtual router Warning
of one received VRRP ID mismatch. VR <vr-id> at
advertisement message. interface <intf-name>
Advertisement interval Received ADV msg adv interval Warning
mismatch of one received mismatch. VR <vr-id> at
VRRP advertisement interface <intf-name>
message.
A virtual MAC address is Added a virtual MAC <vrrp-mac- Notice
added into switch L2 table addr> into L2 table
A virtual MAC address is Deleted a virtual MAC <vrrp- Notice
deleted from switch L2 mac-addr> from L2 table
1081

®
table.
A virtual MAC address is Added a virtual IP <vrrp-ip-addr> Notice
adding into switch L3 MAC <vrrp-mac-addr> into L3
table. table
A virtual MAC address is Deleted a virtual IP <vrrp-ip- Notice
deleting from switch L3 addr> MAC <vrrp-mac-addr>
table. from L3 table
Failed when adding a Failed to add virtual MAC <vrrp- Error
virtual MAC into switch mac-addr> into chip L2 table.
chip L2 table. Errcode <vrrp-errcode>
Failed when deleting a Failed to delete virtual MAC Error
virtual MAC from switch <vrrp-mac-addr> from chip L2
chip L2 table. table. Errcode <vrrp-errcode>
Failed when adding a Failed to add virtual IP <vrrp-ip- Error
virtual MAC into switch L3 addr> MAC <vrrp-mac-addr> into
table. The L3 table is full. L3 table. L3 table is full
table. The port where the L3 table. Port <mac-port> is
MAC is learned from is invalid
invalid.
table. The interface where L3 table. Interface <mac-intf> is
the MAC is learned from is invalid
invalid.
table. The box where the L3 table. Box id <mac-box> is
MAC is learned from is invalid
invalid.
virtual MAC into switch addr> MAC <vrrp-mac-addr> into
chip’s L3 table. chip L3 table. Errcode <vrrp-
errcode>
Failed when deleting a Failed to delete virtual IP <vrrp- Error
virtual MAC from switch ip-addr> MAC <vrrp-mac-addr>
chip’s L3 table. from chip L3 table. Errcode
<vrrp-errcode>
RIPng The RIPng state of RIPng protocol on interface <intf- Informational
interface changed name> changed state to
<enabled | disabled>
1082

®
Appendix C Trap Log Entries

This table lists the trap logs found on DGS-3120 Series hardware version A2.
Log Entry Description OID

swL2macNotification This trap indicate the MAC addresses 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.11.117.1.1.2.100.1.
variation in the address table . 2.0.1(DGS-3120-24TC)
Binding 1: swL2macNotifyInfo 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.11.117.1.2.2.100.1.
2.0.1(DGS-3120-24PC)
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.11.117.1.3.2.100.1.
2.0.1(DGS-3120-24SC)
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.11.117.1.4.2.100.1.
2.0.1(DGS-3120-48TC)
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.11.117.1.5.2.100.1.
2.0.1(DGS-3120-48PC)
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.11.117.1.6.2.100.1.
2.0.1(DGS-3120-24SC-DC)
swL2PortSecurityViolationTrap When the port_security trap is enabled, if 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.11.117.1.1.2.100.1.

there's a new MAC that violates the pre- 2.0.2(DGS-3120-24TC)
defined port security configuration, a trap 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.11.117.1.2.2.100.1.
will be sent out. 2.0.2(DGS-3120-24PC)
Binding 1: swL2PortSecurityPortIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.11.117.1.3.2.100.1.
2: swL2PortSecurityViolationMac 2.0.2(DGS-3120-24SC)
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.11.117.1.4.2.100.1.
2.0.2(DGS-3120-48TC)
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.11.117.1.5.2.100.1.
2.0.2(DGS-3120-48PC)
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.11.117.1.6.2.100.1.
2.0.2(DGS-3120-24SC-DC)
swIpMacBindingViolationTrap When the IP-MAC Binding trap is enabled, if 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.23.5.0.1

there's a new MAC that violates
the pre-defined port security configuration, a
trap will be sent out.
Binding 1: swIpMacBindingPortIndex
2: swIpMacBindingViolationIP
3: swIpMacBindingViolationMac
swIpMacBindingIPv6ViolationTrap When the IP-MAC Binding trap is enabled, if 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.23.5.0.4

there's a new MAC that violates the pre-
defined IPv6 IMPB configuration, a trap will
be sent out.
Binding objects：
(1) swIpMacBindingPortIndex
(2) swIpMacBindingViolationIPv6Addr
(3) swIpMacBindingViolationMac
swIpMacBindingShutdownTrap When the rate limiting is shutdown mode 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.23.5.0.5

and the DHCP rate excludes the limiting, a
Binding objects：
(1). swIpMacBindingPortIndex
swIpMacBindingRecoveryTrap When the port is shutdown by DHCP rate 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.23.5.0.6

limiting and the auto-recovery timer is
timeout, a trap will be sent out.
Binding objects：
1083

®
swPktStormOccurred The trap is sent when packet storm is 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.25.5.0.1

detected by packet storm mechanism and
take shutdown as action.
Binding 1: swPktStormCtrlPortIndex
swPktStormCleared The trap is sent when the packet storm is 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.25.5.0.2

cleared by packet storm mechanism.
swPktStormDisablePort When the port is disabled by the packet 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.25.5.0.3

storm mechanism.
2: swPktStormNotifyPktType
SafeGuardChgToExhausted This trap indicates System change 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.19.4.1.0.1

operation mode from normal to exhausted.
SafeGuardChgToNormal This trap indicates System change 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.19.4.1.0.2

operation mode from exhausted to normal.
agentGratuitousARPTrap This trap is sent when there is an IP 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.1.7.2.0.5

address conflict.
Binding
1. agentGratuitousARPIpAddr
2. agentGratuitousARPMacAddr
3. agentGratuitousARPPortNumber
4. agentGratuitousARPInterfaceName
swDoSAttackDetected This trap is sent when the specific DoS 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.59.4.0.1

packet is received and trap is enabled.
Binding objects:
(1) swDoSCtrlType
(2) swDoSNotifyVarIpAddr
(3) swDoSNotifyVarPortNumber
swMacBasedAccessControlLoggedS The trap is sent when a MAC-based Access 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.35.11.1.0.1

uccess Control host is successfully logged in.
Binding
1. swMacBasedAuthInfoMacIndex
2. swMacBasedAuthInfoPortIndex
3. swMacBasedAuthVID
swMacBasedAccessControlLoggedFa The trap is sent when a MAC-based Access 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.35.11.1.0.2

il Control host login fails
Binding
swMacBasedAccessControlAgesOut The trap is sent when a MAC-based Access 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.35.11.1.0.3

Control host ages out.
Binding
swFilterDetectedTrap Send trap when illegal DHCP server is 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.37.100.0.1

detected. The same illegal DHCP server IP
address detected is just sent once to the
trap receivers within the log ceasing
unauthorized duration.
Binding
1. swFilterDetectedIP
2. swFilterDetectedport
1084

®
swPortLoopOccurred The trap is sent when a Port loop occurs. 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.41.10.0.1

Binding
1. swLoopDetectPortIndex
swPortLoopRestart The trap is sent when a Port loop restarts 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.41.10.0.2

after the interval time.
Binding
swVlanLoopOccurred The trap is sent when a Port with a VID loop 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.41.10.0.3
occurs.
Binding
2. swVlanLoopDetectVID
swVlanLoopRestart The trap is sent when a Port with a VID loop 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.41.10.0.4
restarts after the interval time.
Binding
swBpduProtectionUnderAttackingTra When the BPDU Protection trap is enabled, 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.76.4.0.1

p if the specific port changes from a normal
state to an under attack state, a trap will be
sent out.
Binding
1. swBpduProtectionPortIndex
2. swBpduProtectionPortMode
swBpduProtectionRecoveryTrap When the BPDU Protection trap is enabled, 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.76.4.0.2

if the specific port changes from an under
attack state to a normal state, a trap will be
sent out.
2. swBpduProtectionRecoveryMethod
swERPSSFDetectedTrap When a signal failure occurs, a trap will be 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.78.4.0.1

generated.
Binding
1. swERPSNodeId
swERPSSFClearedTrap When the signal failure clears, a trap will be 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.78.4.0.2

generated.
Binding
1. swERPSNodeId
swERPSRPLOwnerConflictTrap When a conflict occurs, a trap will be 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.78.4.0.3

generated.
Binding
1. swERPSNodeId
dot1agCfmFaultAlarm A MEP has a persistent defect condition. A 1.3.111.2.802.1.1.8.0.1

notification
(fault alarm) is sent to the management
entity with the OID
of the MEP that has detected the fault.
Binding
1. dot1agCfmMepHighestPrDefect
swCFMExtAISOccurred A notification is generated when local MEP 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.86.100.0.1

enters AIS status.
Binding
1. dot1agCfmMdIndex
2. dot1agCfmMaIndex
3. dot1agCfmMepIdentifier
1085

®
swCFMExtAISCleared A notification is generated when local MEP 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.86.100.0.2

exits AIS status.
Binding
1. dot1agCfmMdIndex
2. dot1agCfmMaIndex
swCFMExtLockOccurred A notification is generated when local MEP 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.86.100.0.3

enters lock status.
Binding
1. dot1agCfmMdIndex
2. dot1agCfmMaIndex
swCFMExtLockCleared A notification is generated when local MEP 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.86.100.0.4

exits lock status.
Binding
1. dot1agCfmMdIndex
2. dot1agCfmMaIndex
swFanFailure Fan Failure notification. 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.3.0.1

Binding
1. swFanUnitIndex
2. swFanID
swFanRecover Fan Recover notification. 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.3.0.2

Binding
1. swFanUnitIndex
2. swFanID
swHighTemperature High Temperature notification. 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.4.0.1

Binding
1. swTemperatureUnitIndex
2. swTemperSensorID
3. swTemperatureCurrent
swHighTemperatureRecover swHighTemperatureRecover 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.4.0.2

Binding
2. swTemperSensorID
swLowTemperature Low Temperature notification. 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.4.0.3

Binding
2. swTemperSensorID
swLowTemperatureRecover Low Temperature notification. 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.4.0.4

Binding
2. swTemperSensorID
agentFirmwareUpgrade This trap is sent when the process of 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.1.7.2.0.7

upgrading the firmware via SNMP has
finished.
Binding
1. swMultiImageVersion
agentCfgOperCompleteTrap The trap is sent when the configuration is 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.1.7.2.0.9

completely saved, uploaded or downloaded.
Binding
1. unitID
2. agentCfgOperate
1086

®
3. agentLoginUserName
swPowerFailure Power Failure notification. 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.2.0.2

Binding
1. swPowerUnitIndex
2. swPowerID
3. swPowerStatus
swPowerRecover Power Recover notification. 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.2.0.3

Binding
1. swPowerUnitIndex
2. swPowerID
3. swPowerStatus
swUnitInsert Unit Hot Insert notification. 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.1.0.1

Binding
1. swUnitMgmtId
2. swUnitMgmtMacAddr
swUnitRemove Unit Hot Remove notification. 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.1.0.2

Binding
1. swUnitMgmtId
swUnitFailure Unit Failure notification. 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.1.0.3

Binding
1. swUnitMgmtId
swUnitTPChange The stacking topology change notification. 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.1.0.4

Binding
1. swStackTopologyType
2. swUnitMgmtId
swUnitRoleChange The stacking unit role change notification. 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.1.0.5

Binding
1. swStackRoleChangeType
2. swUnitMgmtId
lldpRemTablesChange A lldpRemTablesChange notification is sent 1.0.8802.1.1.2.0.0.1

when the value of
lldpStatsRemTableLastChangeTime
changes. It can be utilized by an NMS to
trigger LLDP remote systems table
maintenance polls.
Binding
1. lldpStatsRemTablesInserts
2. lldpStatsRemTablesDeletes
3. lldpStatsRemTablesDrops
4. lldpStatsRemTablesAgeouts
lldpXMedTopologyChangeDetected A notification generated by the local device 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.0.1

sensing a change in the topology that
indicates that a new remote device attached
to a local port, or a remote device
disconnected or moved from one port to
another.
Binding
1. lldpRemChassisIdSubtype
2. lldpRemChassisId
3. lldpXMedRemDeviceClass
swDdmAlarmTrap The trap is sent when any parameter value 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.72.4.0.1

exceeds the alarm threshold value or
recover to normal status depending on the
configuration of the trap action.
1087

®
Binding
1. swDdmPort
2. swDdmThresholdType
3. swDdmThresholdExceedType
4. swDdmThresholdExceedOrRecover
swDdmWarningTrap The trap is sent when any parameter value 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.72.4.0.2

exceeds the warning threshold value or
Binding
1. swDdmPort
dot3OamNonThresholdEvent A dot3OamNonThresholdEvent notification 1.3.6.1.2.1.158.0.2

is sent when a local or remote non-threshold
crossing event is detected. A local event is
detected by the local entity, while a remote
event is detected by the reception of an
Ethernet OAM Event Notification OAMPDU
that indicates a non-threshold crossing
event.
Binding
1. dot3OamEventLogTimestamp
2. dot3OamEventLogOui
3. dot3OamEventLogType
4. dot3OamEventLogLocation
5. dot3OamEventLogEventTotal
swSingleIPMSLinkDown The commander switch will send 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.8.6.0.13

swSingleIPMSLinkDown notification to the
indicated host when its member generates a
link down notification.
Binding
1.swSingleIPMSID
2.swSingleIPMSMacAddr
3.ifIndex
swSingleIPMSLinkUp The commander switch will send 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.8.6.0.14

swSingleIPMSLinkUp notification to the
link up notification.
Binding
1.swSingleIPMSID
3.ifIndex
swSingleIPMSAuthFail The commander switch will send 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.8.6.0.15

swSingleIPMSAuthFail notification to the
indicated host when its member generates
an authentation failure notification.
Binding
1. swSingleIPMSID
2. swSingleIPMSMacAddr
swSingleIPMSnewRoot The commander switch will send 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.8.6.0.16

swSingleIPMSnewRoot notification to the
new root notification.
Binding
1. swSingleIPMSID
1088

®
swSingleIPMSTopologyChange The commander switch will send 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.8.6.0.17

swSingleIPMSTopologyChange notification
to the indicated host when its member
generates a topology change notification.
Binding
1. swSingleIPMSID
coldStart A coldStart trap signifies that the SNMPv2 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1

entity, acting
in an agent role, is reinitializing itself and
that its
configuration may have been altered.
warmStart A warmStart trap signifies that the SNMPv2 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.2

entity, acting
in an agent role, is reinitializing itself such
that its
configuration is unaltered.
linkDown A linkDown trap signifies that the SNMP 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3

entity, acting in
an agent role, has detected that the
ifOperStatus object for
one of its communication links is about to
enter the down
state from some other state (but not from
the notPresent
state). This other state is indicated by the
included value
of ifOperStatus.
Binding 1: ifIndex
2: ifAdminStatus
3: ifOperStatus
linkUp A linkUp trap signifies that the SNMP entity, 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4

acting in an
agent role, has detected that the
one of its communication links left the down
state and
transitioned into some other state (but not
into the
notPresent state). This other state is
indicated by the
included value of ifOperStatus.
Binding 1: ifIndex
2: ifAdminStatus
3: ifOperStatus
authenticationFailure An authenticationFailure trap signifies that 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5

the SNMPv2
entity, acting in an agent role, has received
a protocol
message that is not properly authenticated.
While all
implementations of the SNMPv2 must be
capable of generating
this trap, the snmpEnableAuthenTraps
object indicates
whether this trap will be generated.
newRoot The newRoot trap indicates that the sending 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.1

agent
has become the new root of the Spanning
1089

®
Tree; the
trap is sent by a bridge soon after its
election
as the new root, e.g., upon expiration of the
Topology Change Timer immediately
subsequent to
its election. Implementation of this trap is
optional.
topologyChange A topologyChange trap is sent by a bridge 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.2

when
any of its configured ports transitions from
the
Learning state to the Forwarding state, or
from
the Forwarding state to the Blocking state.
The
trap is not sent if a newRoot trap is sent for
the
same transition. Implementation of this trap
is
optional.
risingAlarm The SNMP trap that is generated when an 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.0.1

alarm
entry crosses its rising threshold and
generates
an event that is configured for sending
SNMP
traps.
Binding
1: alarmIndex
2: alarmVariable
3: alarmSampleType
4: alarmValue
5: alarmRisingThreshold
fallingAlarm The SNMP trap that is generated when an 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.0.2

alarm
entry crosses its falling threshold and
generates
SNMP
traps.
Binding
1: alarmIndex
2: alarmVariable
3: alarmSampleType
4: alarmValue
5: alarmFallingThreshold
LLDP This trap is initialed when a LLDP entry is 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3.0

added to or deleted from remote DB. 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.4.1.0
1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.2
1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.3
1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.4
1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.5
1090

®
This table lists the trap logs DGS-3120 Series hardware version B1 found on DGS-3120 Series
hardware version B1.
Log Entry Description OID

swL2macNotification This trap indicate the MAC addresses 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.11.117.2.1.2.100.1.
variation in the address table . 2.0.1(DGS-3120-24TC)
Binding 1: swL2macNotifyInfo 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.11.117.3.1.2.100.1.
2.0.1(DGS-3120-24PC)
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.11.117.4.1.2.100.1.
2.0.1(DGS-3120-24SC)
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.11.117.5.1.2.100.1.
2.0.1(DGS-3120-48TC)
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.11.117.6.1.2.100.1.
2.0.1(DGS-3120-48PC)
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.11.117.7.1.2.100.1.
2.0.1(DGS-3120-24SC-DC)
swL2PortSecurityViolationTrap When the port_security trap is enabled, if 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.11.117.2.1.2.100.1.

there's a new MAC that violates the pre- 2.0.2(DGS-3120-24TC)
defined port security configuration, a trap 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.11.117.3.1.2.100.1.
will be sent out. 2.0.2(DGS-3120-24PC)
Binding 1: swL2PortSecurityPortIndex 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.11.117.4.1.2.100.1.
2: swL2PortSecurityViolationMac 2.0.2(DGS-3120-24SC)
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.11.117.5.1.2.100.1.
2.0.2(DGS-3120-48TC)
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.11.117.6.1.2.100.1.
2.0.2(DGS-3120-48PC)
1.3.6.1.4.1.171.11.117.7.1.2.100.1.
2.0.2(DGS-3120-24SC-DC)
swIpMacBindingViolationTrap When the IP-MAC Binding trap is enabled, if 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.23.5.0.1

there's a new MAC that violates
the pre-defined port security configuration, a
Binding 1: swIpMacBindingPortIndex
2: swIpMacBindingViolationIP
3: swIpMacBindingViolationMac
swIpMacBindingIPv6ViolationTrap When the IP-MAC Binding trap is enabled, if 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.23.5.0.4

there's a new MAC that violates the pre-
defined IPv6 IMPB configuration, a trap will
be sent out.
Binding objects：
(1) swIpMacBindingPortIndex
(2) swIpMacBindingViolationIPv6Addr
(3) swIpMacBindingViolationMac
swIpMacBindingShutdownTrap When the rate limiting is shutdown mode 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.23.5.0.5

and the DHCP rate excludes the limiting, a
Binding objects：
swIpMacBindingRecoveryTrap When the port is shutdown by DHCP rate 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.23.5.0.6

limiting and the auto-recovery timer is
timeout, a trap will be sent out.
Binding objects：
swPktStormOccurred The trap is sent when packet storm is 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.25.5.0.1

detected by packet storm mechanism and
take shutdown as action.
1091

®
swPktStormCleared The trap is sent when the packet storm is 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.25.5.0.2

cleared by packet storm mechanism.
swPktStormDisablePort When the port is disabled by the packet 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.25.5.0.3

storm mechanism.
2: swPktStormNotifyPktType
SafeGuardChgToExhausted This trap indicates System change 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.19.4.1.0.1

operation mode from normal to exhausted.
SafeGuardChgToNormal This trap indicates System change 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.19.4.1.0.2

operation mode from exhausted to normal.
agentGratuitousARPTrap This trap is sent when there is an IP 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.1.7.2.0.5

address conflict.
Binding
1. agentGratuitousARPIpAddr
2. agentGratuitousARPMacAddr
3. agentGratuitousARPPortNumber
4. agentGratuitousARPInterfaceName
swDoSAttackDetected This trap is sent when the specific DoS 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.59.4.0.1

packet is received and trap is enabled.
Binding objects:
(1) swDoSCtrlType
(2) swDoSNotifyVarIpAddr
(3) swDoSNotifyVarPortNumber
swMacBasedAccessControlLoggedS The trap is sent when a MAC-based Access 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.35.11.1.0.1

uccess Control host is successfully logged in.
Binding
swMacBasedAccessControlLoggedFa The trap is sent when a MAC-based Access 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.35.11.1.0.2

il Control host login fails
Binding
swMacBasedAccessControlAgesOut The trap is sent when a MAC-based Access 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.35.11.1.0.3

Control host ages out.
Binding
swFilterDetectedTrap Send trap when illegal DHCP server is 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.37.100.0.1

detected. The same illegal DHCP server IP
address detected is just sent once to the
trap receivers within the log ceasing
unauthorized duration.
Binding
1. swFilterDetectedIP
2. swFilterDetectedport
swPortLoopOccurred The trap is sent when a Port loop occurs. 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.41.10.0.1

Binding
swPortLoopRestart The trap is sent when a Port loop restarts 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.41.10.0.2

after the interval time.
1092

®
Binding
swVlanLoopOccurred The trap is sent when a Port with a VID loop 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.41.10.0.3
occurs.
Binding
swVlanLoopRestart The trap is sent when a Port with a VID loop 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.41.10.0.4
restarts after the interval time.
Binding
swBpduProtectionUnderAttackingTra When the BPDU Protection trap is enabled, 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.76.4.0.1

p if the specific port changes from a normal
state to an under attack state, a trap will be
sent out.
Binding
2. swBpduProtectionPortMode
swBpduProtectionRecoveryTrap When the BPDU Protection trap is enabled, 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.76.4.0.2

if the specific port changes from an under
attack state to a normal state, a trap will be
sent out.
2. swBpduProtectionRecoveryMethod
swERPSSFDetectedTrap When a signal failure occurs, a trap will be 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.78.4.0.1

generated.
Binding
1. swERPSNodeId
swERPSSFClearedTrap When the signal failure clears, a trap will be 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.78.4.0.2

generated.
Binding
1. swERPSNodeId
swERPSRPLOwnerConflictTrap When a conflict occurs, a trap will be 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.78.4.0.3

generated.
Binding
1. swERPSNodeId
dot1agCfmFaultAlarm A MEP has a persistent defect condition. A 1.3.111.2.802.1.1.8.0.1

notification
(fault alarm) is sent to the management
entity with the OID
of the MEP that has detected the fault.
Binding
1. dot1agCfmMepHighestPrDefect
swCFMExtAISOccurred A notification is generated when local MEP 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.86.100.0.1

enters AIS status.
Binding
1. dot1agCfmMdIndex
2. dot1agCfmMaIndex
swCFMExtAISCleared A notification is generated when local MEP 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.86.100.0.2

exits AIS status.
Binding
1. dot1agCfmMdIndex
2. dot1agCfmMaIndex
1093

®
swCFMExtLockOccurred A notification is generated when local MEP 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.86.100.0.3

enters lock status.
Binding
1. dot1agCfmMdIndex
2. dot1agCfmMaIndex
swCFMExtLockCleared A notification is generated when local MEP 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.86.100.0.4

exits lock status.
Binding
1. dot1agCfmMdIndex
2. dot1agCfmMaIndex
swFanFailure Fan Failure notification. 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.3.0.1

Binding
1. swFanUnitIndex
2. swFanID
swFanRecover Fan Recover notification. 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.3.0.2

Binding
1. swFanUnitIndex
2. swFanID
swHighTemperature High Temperature notification. 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.4.0.1

Binding
2. swTemperSensorID
swHighTemperatureRecover swHighTemperatureRecover 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.4.0.2

Binding
2. swTemperSensorID
swLowTemperature Low Temperature notification. 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.4.0.3

Binding
2. swTemperSensorID
swLowTemperatureRecover Low Temperature notification. 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.4.0.4

Binding
2. swTemperSensorID
agentFirmwareUpgrade This trap is sent when the process of 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.1.7.2.0.7

upgrading the firmware via SNMP has
finished.
Binding
1. swMultiImageVersion
agentCfgOperCompleteTrap The trap is sent when the configuration is 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.1.7.2.0.9

completely saved, uploaded or downloaded.
Binding
1. unitID
2. agentCfgOperate
3. agentLoginUserName
swPowerFailure Power Failure notification. 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.2.0.2

Binding
1. swPowerUnitIndex
1094

®
2. swPowerID
3. swPowerStatus
swPowerRecover Power Recover notification. 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.2.0.3

Binding
1. swPowerUnitIndex
2. swPowerID
3. swPowerStatus
swUnitInsert Unit Hot Insert notification. 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.1.0.1

Binding
1. swUnitMgmtId
swUnitRemove Unit Hot Remove notification. 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.1.0.2

Binding
1. swUnitMgmtId
swUnitFailure Unit Failure notification. 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.1.0.3

Binding
1. swUnitMgmtId
swUnitTPChange The stacking topology change notification. 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.1.0.4

Binding
1. swStackTopologyType
2. swUnitMgmtId
swUnitRoleChange The stacking unit role change notification. 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.11.2.2.1.0.5

Binding
1. swStackRoleChangeType
2. swUnitMgmtId
lldpRemTablesChange A lldpRemTablesChange notification is sent 1.0.8802.1.1.2.0.0.1

when the value of
lldpStatsRemTableLastChangeTime
changes. It can be utilized by an NMS to
trigger LLDP remote systems table
maintenance polls.
Binding
1. lldpStatsRemTablesInserts
2. lldpStatsRemTablesDeletes
3. lldpStatsRemTablesDrops
4. lldpStatsRemTablesAgeouts
lldpXMedTopologyChangeDetected A notification generated by the local device 1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.5.4795.0.1

sensing a change in the topology that
indicates that a new remote device attached
to a local port, or a remote device
disconnected or moved from one port to
another.
Binding
1. lldpRemChassisIdSubtype
2. lldpRemChassisId
3. lldpXMedRemDeviceClass
swDdmAlarmTrap The trap is sent when any parameter value 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.72.4.0.1

exceeds the alarm threshold value or
Binding
1. swDdmPort
1095

®
swDdmWarningTrap The trap is sent when any parameter value 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.72.4.0.2

exceeds the warning threshold value or
Binding
1. swDdmPort
dot3OamNonThresholdEvent A dot3OamNonThresholdEvent notification 1.3.6.1.2.1.158.0.2

is sent when a local or remote non-threshold
crossing event is detected. A local event is
detected by the local entity, while a remote
event is detected by the reception of an
Ethernet OAM Event Notification OAMPDU
that indicates a non-threshold crossing
event.
Binding
1. dot3OamEventLogTimestamp
2. dot3OamEventLogOui
3. dot3OamEventLogType
4. dot3OamEventLogLocation
5. dot3OamEventLogEventTotal
swSingleIPMSLinkDown The commander switch will send 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.8.6.0.13

swSingleIPMSLinkDown notification to the
link down notification.
Binding
1.swSingleIPMSID
3.ifIndex
swSingleIPMSLinkUp The commander switch will send 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.8.6.0.14

swSingleIPMSLinkUp notification to the
link up notification.
Binding
1.swSingleIPMSID
3.ifIndex
swSingleIPMSAuthFail The commander switch will send 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.8.6.0.15

swSingleIPMSAuthFail notification to the
indicated host when its member generates
an authentation failure notification.
Binding
1. swSingleIPMSID
swSingleIPMSnewRoot The commander switch will send 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.8.6.0.16

swSingleIPMSnewRoot notification to the
new root notification.
Binding
1. swSingleIPMSID
swSingleIPMSTopologyChange The commander switch will send 1.3.6.1.4.1.171.12.8.6.0.17

swSingleIPMSTopologyChange notification
to the indicated host when its member
generates a topology change notification.
Binding
1096

®
1. swSingleIPMSID
coldStart A coldStart trap signifies that the SNMPv2 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1

entity, acting
in an agent role, is reinitializing itself and
that its
configuration may have been altered.
warmStart A warmStart trap signifies that the SNMPv2 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.2

entity, acting
in an agent role, is reinitializing itself such
that its
configuration is unaltered.
linkDown A linkDown trap signifies that the SNMP 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3

entity, acting in
an agent role, has detected that the
one of its communication links is about to
enter the down
state from some other state (but not from
the notPresent
state). This other state is indicated by the
included value
of ifOperStatus.
Binding 1: ifIndex
2: ifAdminStatus
3: ifOperStatus
linkUp A linkUp trap signifies that the SNMP entity, 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4

acting in an
agent role, has detected that the
one of its communication links left the down
state and
transitioned into some other state (but not
into the
notPresent state). This other state is
indicated by the
included value of ifOperStatus.
Binding 1: ifIndex
2: ifAdminStatus
3: ifOperStatus
authenticationFailure An authenticationFailure trap signifies that 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5

the SNMPv2
entity, acting in an agent role, has received
a protocol
message that is not properly authenticated.
While all
implementations of the SNMPv2 must be
capable of generating
this trap, the snmpEnableAuthenTraps
object indicates
whether this trap will be generated.
newRoot The newRoot trap indicates that the sending 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.1

agent
has become the new root of the Spanning
Tree; the
trap is sent by a bridge soon after its
election
as the new root, e.g., upon expiration of the
Topology Change Timer immediately
1097

®
subsequent to
its election. Implementation of this trap is
optional.
topologyChange A topologyChange trap is sent by a bridge 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.2

when
any of its configured ports transitions from
the
Learning state to the Forwarding state, or
from
the Forwarding state to the Blocking state.
The
trap is not sent if a newRoot trap is sent for
the
same transition. Implementation of this trap
is
optional.
risingAlarm The SNMP trap that is generated when an 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.0.1

alarm
entry crosses its rising threshold and
generates
SNMP
traps.
Binding
1: alarmIndex
2: alarmVariable
3: alarmSampleType
4: alarmValue
5: alarmRisingThreshold
fallingAlarm The SNMP trap that is generated when an 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.0.2

alarm
entry crosses its falling threshold and
generates
SNMP
traps.
Binding
1: alarmIndex
2: alarmVariable
3: alarmSampleType
4: alarmValue
5: alarmFallingThreshold
LLDP This trap is initialed when a LLDP entry is 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3.0

added to or deleted from remote DB. 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.4.1.0
1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.2
1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.3
1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.4
1.0.8802.1.1.2.1.2.5
vrrpTrapNewMaster The newMaster trap indicates that the 1.3.6.1.2.1.68.0.1

sending agent has transitioned to 'Master'
state.
Binding objects:
(1) vrrpOperMasterIpAddr
vrrpTrapAuthFailure A vrrpAuthFailure trap signifies that a packet 1.3.6.1.2.1.68.0.2

has been received from a router whose
authentication key or authentication type
conflicts with this router's authentication key
1098

®
or authentication type. Implementation of

this trap is optional.
Binding objects:
(1) vrrpTrapPacketSrc
(2) vrrpTrapAuthErrorType
pimNeighborLoss A pimNeighborLoss notification signifies the 1.3.6.1.2.1.157.0.1

loss of an adjacency with a neighbor. This
notification should be generated when the
neighbor timer expires, and the router has
no other neighbor on the same interface
with the same IP version and a lower IP
address than itself.
This notification is generated whenever the
counter pimNeighborLossCount is
incremented, subject to the rate limit
specified by
pimNieghborLossNotificationsPeriod.
Binding objects:
1. pimNeighborUpTime
pimInvalidRegister A pimInvalidRegister notification signifies 1.3.6.1.2.1.157.0.2

that an invalid PIM Register message was
received by this device.
counter pimInvalidRegisterMsgsRcvd is
specified by
pimInvalidRegisterNotificationPeriod.
Binding objects:
1. pimGroupMappingPimMode
2. pimInvalidRegisterAddressType
3. pimInvalidRegisterOrigin
4. pimInvalidRegisterGroup
5. pimInvalidRegisterRp
pimInvalidJoinPrune A pimInvalidJoinPrune notification signifies 1.3.6.1.2.1.157.0.3

that an invalid PIM Join/Prune message was
received by this device.
counter pimInvalidJoinPruneMsgsRcvd is
specified by
pimInvalidJoinPruneNotificationPeriod.
Binding objects:
2. pimInvalidJoinPruneAddressType
3. pimInvalidJoinPruneOrigin
4. pimInvalidJoinPruneGroup
5. pimInvalidJoinPruneRp
6. pimNeighborUpTime
pimRPMappingChange A pimRPMappingChange notification 1.3.6.1.2.1.157.0.4

signifies a change to the active RP mapping
on this device.
counter pimRPMappingChangeCount is
specified by
pimRPMappingChangeNotificationPeriod.
Binding objects:
2. pimGroupMappingPrecedence
1099

®
pimInterfaceElection A pimInterfaceElection notification signifies 1.3.6.1.2.1.157.0.5

that a new DR or DF has been elected on a
network.
counter pimInterfaceElectionWinCount is
specified by
pimInterfaceElectionNotificationPeriod.
Binding objects:
1. pimInterfaceAddressType
2. pimInterfaceAddress
1100

®
Appendix D RADIUS Attributes

Assignment
The RADIUS Attributes Assignment on the Switch is used in the following modules: 802.1X (Port-
based and Host-based), MAC-based Access Control, Web-based Access Control (WAC) and
Japanese Web-based Access Control (JWAC).
The description that follows explains the following RADIUS Attributes Assignment types:
• Ingress/Egress Bandwidth
• 802.1p Default Priority
• VLAN
• ACL
To assign Ingress/Egress bandwidth by RADIUS Server, the proper parameters should be

configured on the RADIUS Server. The tables below show the parameters for bandwidth.
The parameters of the Vendor-Specific attributes are:
Vendor-Specific Attribute Description Value Usage

Vendor-ID Defines the vendor. 171 (DLINK) Required
Vendor-Type Defines the attribute. 2 (for ingress bandwidth) Required
3 (for egress bandwidth)
Attribute-Specific Field Used to assign the bandwidth Unit (Kbits) Required
of a port.
If the user has configured the bandwidth attribute of the RADIUS server (for example, ingress
bandwidth 1000Kbps) and the 802.1X authentication is successful, the device will assign the
bandwidth (according to the RADIUS server) to the port. However, if the user does not configure
the bandwidth attribute and authenticates successfully, the device will not assign any bandwidth to
the port. If the bandwidth attribute is configured on the RADIUS server as "0", the effective
bandwidth will be set "no_limited", and if the bandwidth is configured lower than 0 or higher than
maximum supported value, the bandwidth will be ignored.
To assign 802.1p default priority by RADIUS Server, the proper parameters should be
configured on the RADIUS Server. The tables below show the parameters for 802.1p default
priority.
1101

®
The parameters of the Vendor-Specific attributes are:

Vendor-Specific Attribute Description Value Usage
Vendor-Type Defines the attribute. 4 Required
Attribute-Specific Field Used to assign the 802.1p default 0-7 Required
priority of the port.
If the user has configured the 802.1p priority attribute of the RADIUS server (for example, priority 7)
and the 802.1X, or Host-based authentication is successful, the device will assign the 802.1p
default priority (according to the RADIUS server) to the port. However, if the user does not
configure the priority attribute and authenticates successfully, the device will not assign a priority to
this port. If the priority attribute is configured on the RADIUS server is a value out of range (>7), it
will not be set to the device.
To assign VLAN by RADIUS Server, the proper parameters should be configured on the RADIUS
Server. To use VLAN assignment, RFC3580 defines the following tunnel attributes in RADIUS
packets.
The table below shows the parameters for a VLAN:

RADIUS Tunnel
Description Value Usage
Attribute
Tunnel-Type This attribute indicates the tunneling protocol(s) 13 (VLAN) Required
to be used (in the case of a tunnel initiator) or
the tunneling protocol in use (in the case of a
tunnel terminatior).
Tunnel-Medium-Type This attribute indicates the transport medium 6 (802) Required
being used.
Tunnel-Private- This attribute indicates group ID for a particular A string (VID) Required
Group-ID tunneled session.
A summary of the Tunnel-Private-Group-ID Attribute format is shown below.
0 1 2 3
01234567890123456789012345678901
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
| Type | Length | Tag | String...
+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+-+
The table below shows the definition of Tag field (different with RFC 2868):
1102

®
Tag field value String field format Note

0x01 VLAN name (ASCII) A tag field of greater than 0x1F is
0x02 VLAN ID (ASCII) interpreted as the first octet of the
following field.
Others 1. When the switch receives the
VLAN setting string, it will think it is
(0x00, 0x03 ~ the VLAN ID first. In other words, the
0x1F, >0x1F) switch will check all existed VLAN ID
and check if there is one matched.
2. If the switch can find one

matched, it will move to that VLAN.
3. If the switch can not find the

matched VLAN ID, it will think the
VLAN setting string as a “VLAN
Name”.
4. Then it will check that it can find

out a matched VLAN Name.
If the user has configured the VLAN attribute of the RADIUS server (for example, VID 3) and the
802.1X, or MAC-based Access Control authentication is successful, the port will be added to VLAN
3. However, if the user does not configure the VLAN attribute and authenticates successfully, the
port will be kept in its original VLAN. If the VLAN attribute configured on the RADIUS server does
not exist, the port will not be assigned to the requested VLAN.
To assign ACL by RADIUS Server, the proper parameters should be configured on the RADIUS
Server. The table below shows the parameters for an ACL.
The parameters of the Vendor-Specific Attribute are:

RADIUS Tunnel
Description Value Usage
Attribute
Vendor-Type Defines the attribute. 12 (for ACL profile) Required

13 (for ACL rule)
Attribute-Specific Used to assign the ACL ACL Command Required
Field profile or rule.
For example:
ACL profile: create access_profile
profile_id 6 profile_name 1 ethernet
vlan 0xFFF;
ACL rule: config access_profile
profile_id 6 add access_id
auto_assign ethernet vlan_id 1 port
all deny;
1103

®
If the user has configured the ACL attribute of the RADIUS server (for example, ACL profile:
create access_profile profile_id 6 profile_name 1 ethernet; ACL rule: config access_profile
profile_id 6 add access_id auto_assign ethernet), and the 802.1X, MAC-based Access Control,
WAC or JWAC authentication is successful, the device will assign the ACL profiles and rules
according to the RADIUS server. For more information about the ACL module, please refer to
Chapter 22 Access Control List (ACL) Commands.
1104

Xstack PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Xstack PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Xstack PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.

com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Chapter 106 TFTP Client Command List ............................................................................................... 989

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Chapter 1 Using Command Line

1-1 Accessing the Switch via the Serial Port

DGS-3120-24TC Gigabit Ethernet Switch

Firmware: Build 3.00.522

1-2 Setting the Switch’s IP Address

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Boot Procedure V3.00.501

Power On Self Test ........................................ 100 %

MAC Address : 00-01-02-03-04-00

Please Wait, Loading V3.00.522 Runtime Image .............. 100 %

DGS-3120-24TC:admin# config ipif System ipaddress 10.24.22.100/255.0.0.0

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

authen_enable authen_login authen_policy authentication

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1-3 Command Syntax Symbols

1-4 Line Editing Keys

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Left Arrow Move cursor to left.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Chapter 2 Basic Command List

2-1 show session

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ID Live Time From Level User

CTRL+C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh

2-2 show serial_port

Baud Rate : 9600

2-3 config serial_port

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-4 enable clipaging

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-5 disable clipaging

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

DGS-3120-24TC Gigabit Ethernet Switch

Firmware: Build 3.00.522

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-10 show command_history

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

2-11 config command_history

2-12 config greeting_message

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Greeting Messages Editor

DGS-3120-24TC Gigabit Ethernet Switch

Firmware: Build 3.00.522

<Function Key> <Control Key>

2-13 show greeting_message

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Firmware: Build 3.00.522

2-14 config command_prompt

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine